a collection of mysteries from these...

STRANGE TIMES
A NEXUS NEW TIMES SPECIAL EDITION AUSTRALIA (incl. GST)
NZ (incl. GST)
USA
$16.95
NZD $18.95
USD $15.95
UK 13.25

Prophecies & Predictions

EU 14.95

Subterranean Mysteries
Evidence of Giants
Encounters with Aliens
UFO Whistleblowers
Crop Circles
Strange Creatures

Area 51 Yowies Antarctic Secrets & more

 Editorial
STRANGE TIMES
PUBLISHED BY W elcome to STRANGE Times, a special edition published by NEXUS
Magazine. In this compendium, we present some of the most intriguing
"mystery" articles to have appeared in NEXUS over the last 15 years. I've
NEXUS Magazine Pty Ltd
grouped these articles into seven sections, covering the following topics:
ABN 80 003 611 434
UFO and Alien Encounters: Needless to say, this is one issue not likely to
EDITOR disappear. Sightings are increasing, evidence is accumulating, hundreds of
Duncan M. Roads high-level whistleblowers want to testify to the existence of UFOs, and still
CO-EDITOR the mainstream media snigger at the subject. As you will see, elected govern-
Catherine Simons ment members are not in the loop on UFOs, and the military-industrial and
intelligence communities are in control when it comes to disclosure.
ASSISTANT EDITOR Anomalous Creatures: We call them "yowies" in Australia, but they exist
Ruth Parnell on many other continents and have similar characteristics. Also in this sec-
PROOFREADER tion are articles on encounters with bunyips, chupacabras and sea serpents.
Jenny Hawke Prophecies and Predictions: If you're like me, you're sick of vague
prophecies that only seem to make sense after the event. You'll be amazed at
CARTOONS the prophecies we've published over the years. Some hold great promise for
Phil Somerville our future and some we hope will never come true, but all are worth reading.
Mysteries Within the Earth: There are tales from all over the globe of
COVER GRAPHIC strange places and weird creatures that live deep underground, as you will
Jeff Edis read here. This section includes Hollow Earth theory and the search for the
PRINTING fabled subterranean realm of Agharta and city of Shambhala.
Beaudesert Times, Queensland, Giants from Prehistory: You'll be astounded at the evidence that a race
Australia of giant humans once walked the Earth. We look at the evidence obtained by
the Smithsonian Institution over a century ago as well as stories from folklore.
AUSTRALIAN DISTRIBUTION Hidden Bases and Unusual Beings: I was in a bit of a quandary as to how
Newsagents Direct Distribution to describe this section. Basically it contains some of my favourite "recent"
HEAD OFFICE All Correspondence mysteries. You will see that these articles contain "all of the above", i.e.,
PO Box 30, Mapleton, Qld 4560, Australia
Tel: (07) 5442 9280; Fax: (07) 5442 9381
secret bases, UFOs, giants and strange creatures.
Email: editor@nexusmagazine.com The Crop Circle Conundrum: While the rest of the planet is happy with
Website: http://www.nexusmagazine.com the announcement 10 years ago that two hoaxers had come forward and con-
NEW ZEALAND OFFICE fessed to making all the crop circles, those who read NEXUS will recognise
RD 2, Kaeo, Northland that the mystery still remains unsolved. Chemical changes in the soil and
Tel: +64 (0)9 405 1963; Fax: +64 (0)9 405 1964 plants, anomalous electromagnetic field effects and high-pitched sounds have
Email: nexusnz@xtra.co.nz been documented. This section features a photographic round-up of the best
USA OFFICE crop circles from 1999 to 2004, along with a report on each season.
PO Box 1248, Walterboro, SC 29488
Tel: +1 843 549 5985; Fax: +1 877 349 1928 As regular readers of NEXUS Magazine will recognise, we have included
Email: nexususa@earthlink.net many of the relevant "Twilight Zone" sections from past editions; these con-
UK OFFICE 55 Queens Rd, East Grinstead, West tain shorter items under the category of the unexplained or mysterious.
Sussex, RH19 1BG. Tel: +44 (0)1342 322854; It is our hope that you find these articles stimulating enough that you'll want
Fax: +44 (0)1342 324574 to research them further. Where possible, we have listed the source and
Email: nexus@ukoffice.u-net.com
author contact details. We welcome feedback, further information and
EUROPE OFFICE - Postbus 10681, 1001 ER reasonable questions.
Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
Ph: +31 (0)228 324076; Fax: +31 (0)228 312081 As you'll see from the pages of this STRANGE Times compilation, we are
e-mail address: nexus@fsf.nl not in the game of sensationalising these topics. We would like to see these
STATEMENT OF PURPOSE mysteries explained, mainly because I think it will result in mankind having to
NEXUS recognises that humanity is undergoing a massive take a new look at who we are and what "reality" really is. In many ways, we
transformation. With this in mind, NEXUS seeks to provide are living in times akin to when we "knew" that the Earth was flat, we "knew"
'hard-to-get' information so as to assist people through
these changes. NEXUS is not linked to any religious, that the Earth was at the centre of the universe, and we "knew" that rocks did
philosophical or political ideology or organisation. not fall from the sky, and so on. In order to explain the anomalies, mankind
PERMISSION-TO-REPRODUCE POLICY had to adopt an entirely new framework within which to understand the
While reproduction and dissemination of the information in strange observations made by "quackpots". How strange that those very
NEXUS is actively encouraged, anyone caught making a
buck out of it, without our express permission, will be in "quackpots" are now the scientific heroes of history.
trouble when we catch them! Duncan
WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY
Advertisers upon and by lodging material with the Publisher for publication or authorising or approving of the publication of any material INDEMNIFY the
Publisher and its servants and agents against all liability claims or proceedings whatsoever arising from the publication and without limiting the generality of the
foregoing to indemnify each of them in relation to defamation, slander of title, breach of copyright, infringement of trademarks or names of publication titles, unfair
competition or trade practices, royalties or violation of rights or privacy AND WARRANT that the material complies with all relevant laws and regulations and that
its publication will not give rise to any rights against or liabilities in the Publisher, its servants or agents and in particular that nothing therein is capable of being
misleading or deceptive or otherwise in breach of the Part V of the Trade Practices Act 1974. All expressions of opinion are published on the basis that they are
not to be regarded as expressing the opinion of the Publisher or its servants or agents. Editorial advice is not specific and readers are advised to seek professional
help for individual problems. The publisher reserves the right to refuse any advertising material for any reason. NEXUS New Times 2006

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 1

 STRANGE TIMES - CONTENTS
UFO AND ALIEN ENCOUNTERS.....4
PROJECT UFO DISCLOSURE........................................5
By Steven M. Greer, MD. The findings of The Disclosure
Project feature testimony from military "insiders" with
first-hand experience of UFOs and ETs.
TOWARDS FULL DISCLOSURE ON UFOs...................9
By Theresa de Veto. Retired US Army/DIA analyst John
Maynard had access to highly classified files which con-
firm the existence of UFOs and alien beings, and he now
urges the government and military to come clean.
THE TWILIGHT ZONE................................................15
We include news proving that the US media suppressed
reports of UFO sightings, and revelations that a US
Library of Congress staffer wrote studies on extraterrestrial
intelligence for US President Jimmy Carter.
THE TWILIGHT ZONE................................................18
We report on author Victor Hugo's sances with aliens in
the 1850s, President Carter's 1969 UFO sighting, haunt-
ings at a UK spy headquarters, and British police officers'
own UFO encounters.
AREA 51/S-4: SECRETS BEHIND THE SCENES...........21
By Wendelle C. Stevens. This veteran UFO researcher
tells the story of an ex-US Marine sentry who confirmed
the presence of UFOs and aliens at Area 51/S-4 before
mysteriously disappearing.
UFOs & EBEs: MORE INSIDER EVIDENCE..........26
By Linda Moulton Howe. A former US Army Signal
Corps and CIA officer who toured Area 51 in 1958,
"Kewper" divulges details on what the government is hid-
ing about UFOs and alien races.
AN INTERPLANETARY ADVENTURE..........................33 UNDERSTANDING THE YOWIE PHENOMENON.....85
By Alec Newald. In 1989, Alec was abducted for 10
days by a group of advanced, benign aliens. His life-
changing experiences have profound significance for
human and other galactic beings.
THE TWILIGHT ZONE................................................39 STRANGE TALES ABOUT SEA SERPENTS...................91
News featuring alleged alien artefacts kept in the US
Capitol in the late 1930s, leaked documents that shed
light on official secrecy over UFOs, Dr Edward Teller's
proposal that UFO documents be declassified, and a
1992 joint exercise between the US military and aliens.
THE TWILIGHT ZONE................................................43
Graham Birdsall interviews Valery Uvarov, of Russia's
National Security Academy, about a strange installation
in Siberia that can destroy errant cosmic bodies.
MEETINGS WITH REMARKABLE ALIENS....................45 THE PROPHECIES OF MITAR TARABICH.................105
By Linda Moulton Howe. Unwilling abductee Jim Sparks
claims to have had an in-the-flesh encounter with a
group of advanced reptilian humanoids with an environ-
mental awareness message for humanity.
2 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE................................................50
The 1999 COMETA report on UFOs, prepared by an
independent group at France's Institute of Higher Studies
for National Defence, gives serious attention to the ques-
tion, "What must we be prepared for?"
THE TWILIGHT ZONE................................................54
Linda Moulton Howe interviews former US naval intelli-
gence officer C. B. Scott Jones on the reality of UFOs and
ETs and the issue of disclosure.
THE TALL WHITE EXTRATERRESTRIALS.....................58
An interview by Dr Michael E. Salla. A weather observer
at Nellis Air Force Base in the mid-1960s, Charles Hall
encountered a resident race of Tall White extraterrestrials
engaged in technology transfer with the US military.
THE TWILIGHT ZONE................................................63
Debbie Payne provides an expos on the files available
in the Australian National Archives that confirm govern-
ment knowledge of the UFO phenomenon.
ANOMALOUS CREATURES.....70
THE "CHUPACABRAS" MYSTERY................................71
By Linda Moulton Howe. Terrifying vampire-like attacks
on animals and humans were reported in Puerto Rico,
Mexico and southern USA in 199596. Are chupacabras
to blame? Did UFOs bring them?
THE BUNYIP MYSTERY...............................................78
By Gary Opit. Several types of large aquatic animals,
popularly called bunyips, have been known to both
Aborigines and European settlers in Australia, and at least
one species may be a megafauna remnant from
Pleistocene times.
By Gary Opit. If bellowing calls, huge footprints and
mutilated prey are any evidence, Australia's dense forests
may be home to two cryptic primates: the Yowie and its
smaller relative, the Junjadee.
By C. D. Pollard. So many eyewitness accounts of "sea
serpents" through the centuries can't all be figments of
the imagination. Perhaps the plesiosaur has indeed sur-
vived the age of the dinosaurs.
PROPHECIES AND PREDICTIONS.....96
PROPHECY COUNTDOWN 2000..............................97
From the Hopi Elders, Mother Shipton and Dannion
Brinkley's Light Beings.
Edited by Neo. A Serbian peasant who lived in the 19th
century, Mitar Tarabich had an uncanny ability to predict
the future of his people and still has surprises in store for
us in the 21st century.
STRANGE Times 2006
 STRANGE TIMES - CONTENTS
PROPHECIES AND PREDICTIONS
THE TWILIGHT ZONE..............................................111
We feature "final days" prophecies from the Hopi Elders,
compiled by John Hogue.
NIGHT OF THE RED SKY..........................................113 HOLOCAUST OF GIANTS........................................165
By Tom Brown, Jr. In the 1920s, an Apache wise man
had a stream of prophetic visions that foretold the demise
of humanity unless we changed our ways. Two of these
visions seem to have come true.
THE TWILIGHT ZONE..............................................119 THE TWILIGHT ZONE..............................................174
Ancient Vedic scriptures contain prophecies about the
current Kali-yuga (the dark age that began in 3102 BC),
many of which have significance today.
THE TWILIGHT ZONE..............................................123
We feature transmissions of the Mitchell-Hedges "talking"
crystal skull, covering the history of the civilisation who
made it and prophecies about imminent Earth changes.
PROPHECIES FROM THE MEIER CONTACTS...........127
By Michael Horn, and with contactee Billy Meier in dis-
cussion with Quetzal, the Plejaren, on the Henoch
Prophecies. So many Plejaren predictions have come
true that we'd be wise to heed their warnings of annihila-
tion and learn to live together.
MYSTERIES WITHIN THE EARTH.....134
THE HOLLOW EARTH THEORY PATENT.................135
By Mark Harp. In 1914, a US patent was awarded for a
theory that our Earth is a hollow sphere with polar open-
ings and an internal sun. A compelling body of evidence
exists for the validity of the hollow Earth theory.
THE TWILIGHT ZONE..............................................142
We highlight the Russian artist/mystic Nicholas Roerich's
connection with the mysterious Chintamani Stone and his
search for the fabled lost kingdom of Agharta and city of
Shambhala in the Himalayan region.
THE DEEP DWELLERSPart 1..................................145
By Wm Michael Mott. Ancient mythologies and religions
are rich with tales of inhabitants from subterranean
realms, and they have commonalities whether they be
from the East, West or New World.
THE DEEP DWELLERSPart 2..................................151
By Wm Michael Mott. Modern-day reports of strange
subterranean creatures and humanoids have much in
common with descriptions preserved in ancient art, leg-
ends and religions the world over.
THE DEEP DWELLERSPart 3..................................157
By Wm Michael Mott. Modern accounts of alien abduc-
tions and Men in Black incidents have parallels with
global legends of beings who live underground.
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE..............................................161
We feature a 1535 account of an expedition into the
depths of the mysterious Breitenwinner Cave in Germany.
GIANTS FROM PREHISTORY.....164
By Ross Hamilton. Smithsonian Institution documents
attest to the existence of a race of giants in ancient North
America, but skeletal remains found in prehistoric earth
mounds have either perished or been hidden from view.
John Mount says that references to giants can be found in
folklore, art and historical records around the globe, but
conclusive evidence of the existence of these giants is
being kept secret or has been mysteriously removed.
HIDDEN BASES & UNUSUAL BEINGS.....177
BRITAIN'S SECRET WAR IN ANTARCTICA...............178
By James Roberts. At the end of World War II, Britain
sent a covert mission to Antarctica to investigate anom-
alous activities near its Maudheim base and to seek out
and destroy a subterranean Nazi haven.
THE SNAKE DRAGON MYSTERY..............................183
By Marius Boirayon. The Solomon Islanders have a long
history of encounters with strange aerial craft and alien
beings, and recent experiences sparked this former RAAF
engineer to search for UFO bases on the islands.
THE TWILIGHT ZONE..............................................188
Marius Boirayon reports on eyewitness accounts of giants
and dwarves that still exist in the caves and mountainous
jungles of the Solomon Islands, as well as on discoveries
of skeletons, stone walls, artefacts and inscribed obelisks.
THE CROP CIRCLE CONUNDRUM.....191
DOES SOUND CREATE CROP CIRCLES?..................192
By Freddy Silva. Trilling sounds have often been recorded
in connection with crop circle creation, and experiments
with plants and sound have produced similar effects in the
laboratory.
CROP CIRCLES ROUND-UP
Reports by Andy Thomas
News of the Swirled: 1999....................................197
Formative Fields: 2000..........................................203
Signs of the Times: 2001.......................................207
Pick of the Season: 2002.......................................212
Genius in the Fields: 2003.....................................217
Geometry in the Grain: 2004................................223
NEXUS 3
 UFO and Alien Encounters
W e open this special compendium with a collection of articles and items that deal with the UFO issue. As you
will see, the UFO "debate" covers some diverse areas.
The Disclosure Project: In Washington, DC, in May 2001, Dr Steven Greer gathered numerous high-level
whistleblowers to give public testimony as to their direct knowledge of and involvement with UFOs, ETs and
related technology. The majority of these whistleblowers were asking for immunity from prosecution so that they
could circumvent their national security oath which prevents them from openly disclosing what they know. The
project was gathering momentum, with former US presidential chiefs of staff and advisers also giving their support,
when suddenly September 11 came along and everyone's focus changed.
Nevertheless, countries such as France, China and Russia have published internal reports which confirm that
UFOs exist, suggest that they are not hostile, and claim that the USA is pressuring other nations to keep quiet on
the issue. Several of the articles in these pages feature Disclosure Project participants and what they have to say.
Media Cover-ups: In this section you'll read an example of the mainstream media failing to disclose accurately
anything related to the UFO phenomenon. This is certainly not the first time that a major media organisation had
a documented scoop on UFOs which was cancelled on orders from above.
Consider the example of the massive UFO flaps seen and recorded over Mexico City in the early 1990s. Here
we have one of the world's largest cities with UFOs hovering in the sky for hours in broad daylight and at night.
Scores of people were able to videotape these objects. Cars stopped on freeways while people in their tens of
thousands looked up to the heavens to witness these amazing sights. Jaime Mausson, the anchorman for the
Mexican equivalent of 60 Minutes, also witnessed the objects and has since become a key speaker on the UFO
conference circuit. There was major media coverage in Mexico, but typically not a mention in the Western or
English-language media including Australian newspapers, radio and television. We have to ask why.
HumanAlien Contact: This is where it becomes tricky, even for seasoned UFO researchers. How do you
assess the credibility of a person's experiences? Well, given that we are small publishers with limited resources,
we do our best to assess character, background and initial supporting evidence. Even then, we are sometimes left
with tales that are worth telling regardless. In these cases, we publish and let the readers decide what they think
about these testimonies.
Such is the case with the book CoEvolution, an extract of which we reprint here. This is the amazing story of
New Zealander Alec Newald's claimed 10-day abduction by an extraterrestrial race back in the late 19 80sa
claim which, even to this day, UFO groups don't want to investigate. Alec is certainly convinced of his story, and
we at NEXUS Magazine found it compelling enough that we went on to publish CoEvolution. (You can still obtain
a copy through our magazine and website, or you can use the order form at the back of this compilation.)
At this point, I must stress to any doubters that the vast majority of people who report a UFO abduction or
sighting do not make money out of their story and do not make film stars of themselves; in fact, many would advise
other UFO experiencers to keep their mouth shut! The motive in all cases I've looked into has been one of wanting
to find out what on (or off) Earth is going on!

So, where do we go from here on the subject of UFOs, ETs and whistleblowers? Well, my advice is to read
everything before coming to any conclusion, and even then you'd better be prepared to change your views when
new information comes to hand. This is a subject which is "evolving". We have gone from classic flying saucers,
charismatic contactees and conspiracy theories involving secret treaties with aliens, to human abductions, joint
human-alien bases utilising reverse-engineered alien technology and "star children" who grow up remembering
their previous existence as an alien from elsewhere in the universe and who have enhanced awareness and
abilities.
To appreciate the full scope of the UFO debate, you will need to take a few years off work and dive into the
Internet! Thousands of websites offer every conceivable angle possible. These include all manner of theories on
UFOs, from their being secret military technology or intergalactic visitors to originating inside this planet or from
the Moon or another dimension. Are we merely being visited by curious travellers, or are we being farmed by
some species with a long-term agenda? Are we being visited by ourselves in probable future timelines, or are we
a lab experiment gone crazy? Or is it "all of the above"?

As usual, we leave it for you to ponder.

4 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

TESTIMONY THAT EXPLAINS THE
SECRECY OVER UFOs
by Steven M. Greer, MD 2001
T
his establishes the reality of the
UFO/ET phenomenon and also the
fact that we have been studying it for
years. Many people might believe that it is
limited to the so-called "Roswell event" of
the 1940s, but this could not be further
from the truth. In fact, there have been
multiple events, at least a couple of dozen,
where objects of extraterrestrial origin have
been downed, acquired and studied.
We believe that this is something which
is of extreme importance, because one can-
not consider that covert programshaving
spent hundreds of billions of dollars over
the decades on research and development,
so-called "reverse engineering" or "back
engineering" extraterrestrial technologies
have not had significant breakthroughs.
Gordon Cooper: US Astronaut
Gordon Cooper was one of the original
Mercury 7 astronauts and the last American
to fly into space alone. In his testimony he
recounts how he observed UFOs flying in
the same formation as his fighter group
over the skies of Germany. These UFOs
made manoeuvres that could not be done
STRANGE Times 2006
by conventional fighters. He felt they must
have been under intelligent control to com-
municate with one another, due to the type
of manoeuvres they were mimicking.
At another time, while filming conven-
tional aircraft performing precision land-
ings, a saucer flew directly overhead and
landed ahead of them on a dry lakebed.
The entire event was filmed, including
detailed close-ups. The film was sent back
to Washington and was never returned.
Dr B.: Scientist and Engineer
Dr B. is a scientist and engineer who has
worked on top-secret projects almost all his
life. Over the years he has directly worked
on or had involvement with projects
involving anti-gravity, chemical warfare,
secure telemetry and communications,
extremely high energy space-based laser
systems and electromagnetic pulse technol-
ogy. Dr B. has direct knowledge of the fact
that certain groups have used these space-
based systems successfully to shoot down
extraterrestrial spacecraft and their occu-
pants. On at least one occasion he has per-
sonally seen extraterrestrial spacecraft.
Dr Carol Rosin: Space Weapons
Dr Carol Rosin was the first female cor-
porate manager of Fairchild Industries and
www.nexusmagazine.com
was spokesperson for Wernher von Braun
in the last years of his life. She founded
the Institute for Security and Cooperation
in Outer Space in Washington, DC, and has
testified before Congress on many occa-
sions about space-based weapons.
Von Braun revealed to Dr Rosin a plan
to justify weapons in space, based on hoax-
ing first a Russian threat, then a terrorist
threat, an asteroid threat, then finally an
extraterrestrial threat. She was also present
at meetings in the 1970s when the scenario
for the Gulf War of the 1990s was planned.
Nick Pope: UK Ministry of Defence
Nick Pope is a British Ministry of
Defence official, still currently employed at
the Ministry. He headed up the Ministry's
office for research and investigation of the
UFO phenomenon for a number of years in
the 1990s.
In his testimony, we learn of incontro-
vertible evidence in several events with
massive objects moving at extraordinary
speeds, witnessed by military personnel
and tracked on radarobjects which were
not manufactured on this Earth. He can
also confirm the Bentwaters case and other
cases within the UK, and acknowledges the
existence of extensive government files on
the UFO phenomenon.
NEXUS 5
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
Larry Warren: United States Air
Force Security Officer
Larry Warren was a security officer at
Bentwaters Air Force Base in the United
Kingdom. He was present during an event
in 1980 when an extraterrestrial vehicle
(ETV) landed, hovered and interacted with
air force personnel on the base.
Afterwards, the many personnel who had
witnessed the events were intimidated,
debriefed and forced to sign documents
telling a false version of the story.
Warren's testimony is corroborated by
multiple other military witnesses who have
been identified. There are official docu-
ments related to this event; there is a photo-
graph related to the event; and there is
physical landing trace evidence. This
entire event is also corroborated by
Ministry of Defence official Nick Pope, by
Five-Star Admiral, Sea Lord, former
Ministry of Defence head Lord Hill-
Norton, and by Sergeant Clifford Stone.
Sergeant Clifford Stone: US Army
Sergeant Clifford Stone tells an amazing
story about the history of UFOs and
extraterrestrials dating back to the early
1940s and probably before. Back in 1943,
General Douglas MacArthur organised a
group called the Interplanetary Phenomena
Research Unit to study this issue, and its
work continues to this day. Their purpose
is to recover objects of unknown origin,
particularly those that are of non-Earthly
origin. They obtain field intelligence infor-
mation and pass it on to those who are the
"You here for the UFO Conference?"
6 NEXUS
"keepers of this information". Stone says
that even Project Bluebook had an elite
investigation unit, which was outside of
Bluebook. This unit was thought to be
working in conjunction with Bluebook, but
in fact was not.
Stone has seen living and dead extrater-
restrials in his official duties on an army
team that retrieved crashed ET craft. He
thinks that the ETs will not permit us to
explore the depths of outer space until
we've learned to grow spiritually, and that
they will make themselves known soon if
we don't first acknowledge their presence.
Major-General Vasily Alexyev:
Russian Air Force
Major-General Alexyev, of the Space
Communications Centre in Russia, is con-
sidered one of the most knowledgeable
Russian Generals. He states that if
extraterrestrials are capable of traversing
vast distances, then they are probably from
a higher level of civilisation. And if this is
true, then they must be concerned with nor-
mal development of relations between peo-
pleconstructive progress, not destructive.
He says that if we look at our Earth history,
we will see a tale of self-destruction, mur-
der and death of entire peoples. He
believes that advanced civilisations would
not tolerate such behaviour because their
lives would have a different meaning and
be understood in a larger context.
Major-General Alexyev knows of many
eyewitness reports of unusual craft docu-
mented in specific Soviet papers. Various
www.nexusmagazine.com
departments within the government, includ-
ing the Defence Ministry and the Academy
of Sciences, began investigating this phe-
nomenon. They have many reports of
UFOs seen over locations containing high
concentrations of advanced science, such
as nuclear facilities. In some cases they
have learned how to create situations where
they could deliberately provoke the appear-
ance of UFOs, and in these "contacts" they
would, for example, point their arms in var-
ious directions and the UFOs would
respond by flattening their spheres in the
same direction. There was a case just out-
side Moscow where a warrant officer found
himself at the site of a UFO landing and the
extraterrestrials made contact with him
telepathically and asked him if he would
like to visit inside the craft.
Master Sergeant Dan Morris (Ret.):
US Air Force/NRO Operative
Dan Morris is a retired US Air Force
career Master Sergeant who was involved
in extraterrestrial projects for many years.
After leaving the Air Force, he was recruit-
ed into the super-secret National
Reconnaissance Organization (NRO), dur-
ing which time he worked specifically on
extraterrestrial-connected operations. He
had a Cosmic Top Secret clearance (38 lev-
els above Top Secret) which, he states, no
US President to his knowledge has ever
held.
In his testimony, Morris talks of assassi-
nations committed by the NSA, and he tells
how the US military deliberately caused
the 1947 ET craft crashes near Roswell and
captured one of the ETs, which they kept at
Los Alamos for three years until he died.
He talks about the intelligence teams that
were charged with intimidating, discredit-
ing and even eliminating witnesses to
ET/UFO events. He discusses Germany's
re-engineering of UFOs even prior to
World War II.
Morris also talks about our current ener-
gy crisis and the fact that we haven't need-
ed fossil fuels since the 1940swhen free
energy technologies were developed but
have been kept from humanity ever since.
This is the real reason for the ET/UFO
secrecy. "What the people in power right
now don't want us to know is that this free
energy is available to everybody."
In conclusion, Morris warns against the
weaponisation of space and the shooting
down of ET craft: this could force them to
retaliate, and that would be our destruction.
STRANGE Times 2006

Don Phillips: Lockheed Skunkworks,
USAF, CIA Contractor
Don Phillips was in the US Air Force at
Las Vegas Air Force Base during an event
when UFOs were seen moving at enormous
speeds near Mt Charleston, northwest of
Las Vegas. In addition, he worked with
Kelly Johnson at the Lockheed
Skunkworkson design and construction
of the U-2 and the SR-71 Blackbird. He
testifies that not only do we have these
extraterrestrial devices, but we have also
achieved tremendous technological
advances from their study.
Phillips states that in the 1950s and
1960s, NATO did research into the origin
of ET races and disseminated reports to the
leaders of various countries. He further
states that there are records and filmed doc-
umentation of meetings in California in
1954 between ETs and leaders of the USA.
He lists a few of the technologies we were
able to develop because of the ETs: com-
puter chips, lasers, night vision, bullet-
proof vests, and concludes: "Are these ET
people hostile? Well, if they were hostile,
with their weaponry they could have
destroyed us a long time ago, or could have
done some damage."
Don Phillips now develops technologies
such as energy generation systems that use
natural energies from planet Earth, which
can help eliminate environmental pollu-
tants and reduce the need for fossil fuels.
Captain Bill Uhouse (Retired): US
Marine Corps
Bill Uhouse served 10 years in the
Marine Corps as a fighter pilot, and four
years with the Air Force at Wright-
Patterson AFB as a civilian doing flight-
testing of exotic experimental aircraft.
Later, and for the next 30 years, he worked
for defence contractors as an engineer of
antigravity propulsion systemson flight
simulators for exotic aircraft and on actual
flying discs.
Captain Uhouse testifies that the first
disc they tested was the re-engineered ET
craft that crashed in Kingman, Arizona, in
1958. He further testifies that the ETs pre-
sented a craft to the US Government; this
craft was taken to Area 51, which was just
being constructed at the time, and the four
ETs that accompanied the craft were taken
to Los Alamos. Uhouse's speciality was
the flight deck and instruments on the flight
deck; he understands the gravitational field
and what it takes to get people trained to
STRANGE Times 2006
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
experience antigravity. He testifies that he flying very fast. In 1953 he spent some
actually met several times with an extrater- time with Military Defence in Whitehall
restrial who helped the physicists and engi- and worked on the floor underneath a
neers with the engineering of the craft. department, Air Technical, dealing with
UFOs. He says that a UFO landed on the
A.H.: Boeing Aerospace estate of Lord Mountbatten in the south of
A.H. has gained significant information England near Southampton.
from inside the UFO extraterrestrial groups
within the US Government, military and Sergeant Karl Wolfe: US Air Force
civilian companies. He has friends at the Karl Wolfe was in the Air Force for 412
NSA, CIA, NASA, JPL, ONI, NRO, Area years beginning in January 1964. He had a
51, the Air Force, Northrup, Boeing and top-secret crypto clearance and worked
more. He used to work at Boeing as a sur- with the Tactical Air Command at Langley
face technician. He was introduced to Four AFB in Virginia.
Star General Curtis Lemay and one day While working at an NSA facility, he
went to his house in Newport Beach, was shown photographs of the Moon, taken
California, and spoke with him about this by the Lunar Orbiter, that showed detailed
subject. Lemay confirmed the ETV crash artificial structures. These photos were
at Roswell. taken prior to the Apollo landing in 1969.
A.H.'s NSA contact told him that Henry
Kissinger, George Bush as well as Ronald Donna Hare: Former NASA
Reagan and Mikhail Gorbachev were all Contract Employee
aware of the ET subject. His CIA contact Donna Hare had a Secret clearance while
told him that the USAF had shot down working for NASA contractor Philco Ford.
some of these spacecraft. A friend of She testifies that she was shown a photo of
A.H.'s who worked at Boeing was part of a picture with a distinct UFO. Her col-
crash recovery and personally saw and car- league explained that it was his job to air-
ried ET bodies. A.H. says that a group in brush such evidence of UFOs out of pho-
the FBI discovered that radar testing was tographs before they were released to the
causing interference with some of the public.
ETVs and that this was what was causing She also heard information from other
so many crashes. Johnson Space Center employees that some
He also says there are underground bases astronauts had seen extraterrestrial craft,
testing and maintaining extraterrestrial and that when some of them wanted to
technologyin Utah (reachable only by speak out about this they were threatened.
air); Enzo, Lancaster/
Palmdale, Edwards
AFB and March AFB,
California; Eglin
AFB, Florida; in
England and many
other locations.
Gordon Creighton:
Former British
Foreign Service
Official
Gordon Creighton
worked for many
years in the British
Foreign Service. He
spent 10 years in
China and in 1941 he
saw a UFO while at
the Embassy. In
broad daylight he saw
a disc-shaped, silent
UFO with a blue- "According to this Global Positioning System,
white light on top, we're in the wrong place at the wrong time."
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 7
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
Mr John Maynard: Retired Analyst,
US Defense Intelligence Agency
John Maynard was a military intelligence
analyst for the Defense Intelligence
Agency. In the course of his 21-year career
he saw evidence of the military's interest in
UFOs in a variety of ways: electronic
communications that did not originate from
Earth, and military photos of UFOs. While
at the DIA he became familiar with the
compartmentalisation process of maintain-
ing secrecy. He saw spy plane photos
which clearly show UFOs.
Harland Bentley: US Army
Mr Bentley has been involved in work-
ing on classified projects with several US
Government agencies including NASA and
the DoE. He has a BSc-EE degree and
extensive training in nuclear engineering.
Mr Bentley recounts a story of personal-
ly witnessing a UFO crash at a Nike Ajax
missile facility in Maryland and viewing on
radar a group of UFOs take off at a calcu-
lated 17,000 miles an hour after having
hovered on the ground. He also speaks of a
1967/68 incident where he overheard a
conversation between Houston Control and
astronauts in-flight, about avoiding a colli-
sion with a UFO and our astronauts see-
ingthrough portholes in the UFO space-
craftliving beings moving about.
Dr Robert Wood: Engineer,
McDonnell Douglas Aerospace
Dr Robert Wood worked in a senior
capacity as an aerospace engineer at
8 NEXUS
McDonnell Douglas for his entire 43-year
career. In his testimony he states that he
was involved in a specific project at
McDonnell Douglas to study the propul-
sion systems of UFOs. He also confirms
the existence of other projects within the
aerospace industry and gives his assess-
ment that this subject is not only real but is
of an extraterrestrial nature. He also con-
firms the extreme secrecy surrounding it.
Colonel Phillip J. Corso, Sr (Retired):
US Army
Colonel Phillip Corso [now deceased]
was a US Army intelligence officer who
served on Eisenhower's National Security
Council. After his 21-year military career,
he served as a military analyst. He person-
ally saw deceased extraterrestrials from the
Roswell crash in 1947 and a UFO craft at
an airbase, and also saw, on radar, UFOs
travelling at 4,000 miles per hour. When
he worked in R&D he was given fragments
of ET technologies from various crashes
and his job was to seed industry with these
technologies, telling them they were from
Earthly foreign sources.
Mark McCandlish: US Air Force
Mark McCandlish is an accomplished
aerospace illustrator and has worked for
many of the top aerospace corporations in
the United States. His colleague Brad
Sorenson, with whom he studied, has been
inside a facility at Norton Air Force Base
where he witnessed alien reproduction
vehicles, or ARVs, that were fully opera-
tional and hovering.
According to his
testimony, the US
not only has opera-
tional antigravity
propulsion devices
but has had them for
many, many years.
They have been
developed through
the study, in part, of
ET vehicles over the
past 50 years. In
addition, we have
the drawing from
aerospace inventor
Brad Sorenson of the
devices he saw, as
well as a schematic
of one of these
ARVs in some
remarkable detail.
www.nexusmagazine.com
Professor Paul Czysz: Aeronautics
Dr Paul Czysz is a Professor of
Aeronautical Engineering at Parks College
in St Louis, Missouri. He spent eight years
in the US Air Force at Wright-Patterson
Air Force Base, and another 30 years work-
ing for McDonnell Douglas in the field of
exotic technologies.
While at Wright-Patterson AFB, he was
involved in tracking UFOs over Missouri,
Ohio and Michigan. These UFOs were
seen by many peoplemilitary, local
police and civiliansand were clocked at
speeds around 20,000 mph as they per-
formed unusual, silent manoeuvres.
Dr Czysz spent more than half his career
at McDonnell Douglas, working on classi-
fied and compartmentalised projects, and
testifies to the processes involved in main-
taining secrecy on these projects. He
warns against the human tendency to make
every new technology into a weapon,
pointing out that our weaponisation of
space does not address the threat of Earth
terrorists, and that the idea of using these
weapons against extraterrestrial targets
would be suicidal.
Fred Threlfell: Communications
Instructor, Royal Canadian Air Force
Fred Threlfell was a communications
instructor in the Royal Canadian Air Force
at RCAF Station Toronto in 1953, when he
witnessed an experiment involving the suc-
cessful dematerialisation and re-materiali-
sation of an object.
Because of his top-secret clearance, he
was also able to check out from the base
library original films of gun camera
footage from WWII planes. Many times,
while watching these films, he noticed
UFOs in the footagedifferent positions,
different shapes, but definitely UFOs. He
has also personally seen UFOs
manoeuvring in the sky.
Editor's Note:
This is an edited extract from the Executive
Summary of testimony gathered by The
Disclosure Project and released in May
2001. For the full text, visit the website
www.disclosureproject.org. Steven M.
Greer, MD, is the Director of CSETI, the
Center for the Study of Extraterrestrial
Intelligence, and the author of
Extraterrestrial Contact: The Evidence and
Implications (reviewed in NEXUS 8/01).
See reviews of The Disclosure Project
video and CD-ROM in that issue.
STRANGE Times 2006
 T OWARDS F ULL D ISCLOSURE
ON UFO/ET C ONTACT

T
he following is the edited version of an exclusive interview which Surfing
The Apocalypse conducted with Disclosure Project witness John Maynard,
US Army Retired Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA). It was conducted
via email over a period of several weeks by Theresa de Veto for Surfing The
Apocalypse (www.surfingtheapocalypse.com/maynard.html).
Surfing The Apocalypse is denoted as SURFING. John Maynard is denoted as
MAYNARD. The views expressed here are not necessarily the views of Surfing The
Apocalypse, the interviewer or any of the affiliated websites.
Retired US
MAYNARD: One might ask, with a career that includes a background in counterintel-
Army/DIA analyst ligence for both military purposes and drug trafficking, "How did you become involved in
John Maynard UFOs?" My involvement was probably more happenstance than anything else. I became
involved while overseas in Germany, Turkey and Korea. These areas were not noted for a
confirms the lot of UFO activity. I was primarily afforded the opportunity to investigate peripherally a
few incidents and implement disinformation or misinformation programs to divert atten-
existence of highly tion away from the military and toward the paranormal and/or UFO [followers] in those
areas. However, a point I never revealed to the military was that my grandmother brought
classified UFO files me up believing that UFOs exist.
Regardless of that point, I was still a staunch conservative (politically) and placed my
in military archives military duties ahead of my beliefs. I had a "country, duty and honour" type attitude. I
believed that because of my dedication and what appeared to be naivety on my part, my
and urges the military superiors did not question my actions when it came to debunking UFO sightings.
government to However, I became very intrigued as to why UFOs were not to become public knowl-
edge and that they (the government) preferred that any UFO information for public con-
make a full sumption stay in the realm of the paranormal and/or the unreliable UFO resources. It took
me several years to figure out that this blatant disregard for public opinion was a plan
disclosure on UFOs designed to keep and maintain the pressure of proof on certain elements of our society.
The plan was basically to place the burden of proof on the UFO researchers and to steer
and alien contact. the public away from the military organisations that were directly involved in UFO
research. In this plan, I deduced that the military was using the media to keep these UFO
researchers from making too much of the issue by having the media brand them as kooks,
weird, paranoid and unbelievable; better yet, by having people who go around chasing
after shadows in a belief that UFOs are real and the government is hiding something.
To date, this plan has worked well above average, and the general public still has an
opinion that follows whatever the media tell them.
SURFING: Can you tell me about the pivotal point at which you decided to move out
of the realm of disinformation in the UFO field and into the belief that disclosure was
needed? How did you come to the decision that your beliefs should take precedence over
An interview with your military duties?
MAYNARD: If you want to pin it down to when it started to happen, I guess it was in
John Maynard the early 1970s while I was in Germany. It was also the time of the famous LA Times
by Theresa de Veto publishing of "The Pentagon Papers" and Daniel Ellsberg. I was in charge of a US/NATO
for Surfing The Apocalypse 2001 classified repository, and The Pentagon Papers caused me to inventory everything in the
Website: repository, right down to the last page. Part of the Ellsberg papers was classified Top
www.surfingtheapocalypse.com/ Secret Cosmic, which is a NATO classification. Since I was at an Air Defense site, that
maynard.html particular document was in my repository, so we had to account for everything. This
caused my office an untold amount of work, inventorying all the documents.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 9

 It was a page-by-page inventory. It was during that time that I
realised just how much the government was hiding under its clas-
sification and disclosure blanket. Even newspaper reports that
had become part of the file were being classified. It appeared to
me that they literally did not want anyone to know what they
knew. I guess curiosity got the best of me at that point.
After that incident, I started to pay serious attention to what was do exist, as I can identify the kind and classification of them.
going on, particularly when it came to the classification of docu-
ments. I, more or less, became an official source to ask about
classifying documents, which meant full research of the docu-
ments surrounding the one being classified.
They say that hindsight has 20/20 vision. I could have turned
illegal at that point and made copies of the pages pertaining to
UFO incidents. However, my security oath and duty to country
stopped me from going that extra measure to the illegal.
The progression of this change in attitude and thoughts contin-
ued. While I was stationed in Turkey, I finally came to the con-
clusion that disclosure was needed. It took about six years to get
to this point. It was also the time when I had become a Christian
and was really having turmoil within myself as to which way to
take a disclosure program and/or to finish my military career. I
really had no means by which to
accomplish this without literally going
to jail. Call it providence or whatever,
but upon leaving Turkey I was
assigned to DIA headquarters in the
Pentagon. At that point I realised that
"Just a simple disclosure that
it might be best to wait and see what UFOs exist and contact has
else I could learn about UFOs, what
the government was doing with the been made with alien beings
information and why they considered is feared by the government."
UFOs a threat to public knowledge.
That day was probably the day I
made up my mind that something had
to be done, and that I was being
afforded the opportunity to gain infor-
mation that the public does not have, and probably will never
have, without disclosure. Actually, I still have difficulty with
stepping out and telling what I know, but I also firmly believe that
it is the time for disclosure. Full disclosure!
SURFING: What exactly do you mean when you say "full
disclosure"?
MAYNARD: Exactly what it means! I feel that the govern-
ment should come clean and release all the information and let the
American people decide what should be done with it.
Surprisingly enough, or contrary to studies done by the military
and other government agencies, I believe that American citizens
and the world population as a whole are ready for this kind of dis-
closure. It has been far too long in coming. Even at that, I doubt
that the government will release everything at one time. Just a
simple disclosure that UFOs exist and contact has been made with
alien beings is feared by the government.
SURFING: Did you personally see any evidence in your work
with the government that contact has been made? If so, can you
tell us specifically what this "contact" entails?
MAYNARD: Personally, yes, as listed in the documents I was
in charge of. I also knew several people who flew in and out of
Nellis AFB on the Janet flights out of Las Vegas McCarran
International Airport. These were government-chartered flights
(unmarked) from McCarran directly to Nellis/Area 51.
SURFING: Can you tell us about the most convincing evi-
dence you have encountered?
MAYNARD: Not any one thing was most compelling except
10 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
for, at the time, classified satellite photos and radar imagery taken
during different compartmental photographic missions, such as
Talent Keyhole (TK11) and by the Omni satellites. I am sure they
are still classified.
As for what this information means to The Disclosure Project, it
is multi-faceted. Firstly, it provides substantiation that documents
Secondly, it provides backup documentation to other witnesses.
Lastly, it establishes a basis for congressional hearings, if nothing
else, to clear the problems with congressional apathy.
SURFING: Many theories have been put forth in regard to
UFOs; they have been called everything from extraterrestrial to
multidimensional, to government black-ops projects, to demonic
entities. From your research and knowledge, of what do you
believe the UFO phenomenon consists?
MAYNARD: A very loaded question, to say the least! I guess
I would have to answer "D, all of the above"! Information and
evidence became available to our government, mainly in the
black-ops area, as you call it, which is basically covert intelli-
gence or operations under deep cover and compartmentalisation.
The information the government accumulated gave credence and
support to all of the theories: UFOs,
extraterrestrials, multidimensional trav-
el and, for those in the religious move-
ment, what can be referred to as
"demonic".
Let me put it this way: we live in a
very settled but dynamic universe; it is
ever-changing, yet it continues steadily
in the same direction. We are not to be
"the masters of this universe", nor are
any of its inhabitants that are known to
exist therein. However, I have a prob-
lem with this word "phenomenon", par-
ticularly as it relates to sightings and
encounters that are a matter of fact.
Labelling these events as a "phenomenon" is suppression of the
event by a very refined disinformation program that is in place,
which is automatically mimicked, i.e., "reported", by the media.
This serves in keeping the subject of UFOs in the realm of fantasy
or "phenomenon" as reported.
SURFING: A persistent legend in regard to flying saucers is
that at the end of World War II, after Germany had been defeated,
a select group of Nazi military personnel and scientists escaped
capture from the Allied troops and established a secret base in
Antarctica, where they continued to develop advanced aircraft that
may have been based on extraterrestrial technologies.
MAYNARD: To answer your question: I have heard the story
of the German escape to Antarctica, of spaceships being built and
subsequent bases on the Moon. However, I have never seen any-
thing in writing or heard it mentioned in any conversation I had
regarding documents. If there were any truth to it, it was beyond
my area of classification and responsibility.
SURFING: From your knowledge, have you seen anything
that would make you believe that any of the UFO sightings
are/were craft of this nature?
MAYNARD: No, although I did read certain documents that
indicated our own abilities in this area: back-engineered
equipment, propulsion systems and alien vehicles that could
provide us with the capability of travelling great distances from
this planet. I have also had recent conversations in this area, but I
am not prepared to go into this in detail at this time. I need to
make further inquiries and confirm this information from alternate
STRANGE Times 2006
sources before making a complete statement on these government
activities.
SURFING: Do you fear that you might be reprimanded for
bringing any of this evidence out now?
MAYNARD: No! And yes! However, I think I am at a posi-
tion in life where I am comfortable in either case. Also, that my
knowledge, along with the other witnesses all speaking the same
language, gives me comfort. For the government to bring
reprisals upon one, or all, would be more damaging in the case of
rebuttal.
SURFING: Do you believe that the US Government has had
active ongoing communications with alien species from beyond
this Earth?
MAYNARD: Yes! There is no
doubt in my mind that this is occur-
ring. "I believe the United States
SURFING: Can you tell us from Government
where these extraterrestrials origi-
nate? but not necessarily the elected
MAYNARD: Where do they
come from? That is probably the $64
governmenthad some
million dollar question for everyone, knowledge of an alien presence
except certain government offices.
Personally, I do not know, as I have as early as the mid-1800s."
never read about or conversed with
one of them to find out. I have heard
all the rhetoric that has been spouted
about Greys from Alpha Centauri or Sirius, Reptilians (which I
had never heard of before seeing the term used on the Internet),
and then, of course, the term of "Nordic-looking aliens".
Therefore, I do not believe that I can provide any insight into this stumbled dramatically, giving rise to speculation and conspiracy
question. However, this does not mean that I lack knowledge of
their existence, albeit only Greys. I have never read anything on
any other species.
SURFING: Are you saying that in your work with the US
intelligence community you have seen evidence that the "Greys"
are actual extraterrestrial biological entities?
MAYNARD: EBEs, I do not know what else to call themdo
you? They are not from this planet, but their interaction with the
main populace of this planet has been very limited by government
actions.
SURFING: How has interaction with the
Greys been limited by government actions?
MAYNARD: "Limited" is probably too
gentle of a word for what is happening. The
government is trying to directly control all
contact between the Greys and the popu-
lace. This is one of the reasons for the hos-
tilities spoken of between them, and why
we may hear from the Greys long before the
government wants disclosure.
SURFING: What do you know, if any-
thing, regarding the motivations behind the
visitors to our Earth?
MAYNARD: I can speculate like every-
one else, yet some of this information was
way beyond what my clearance was
allowed to read. I do know that some of
that motivation has to do with our growth,
not only as a species but also as a future
member of an interplanetary social commu-
nity that has already achieved a place in a
greater universal society. How fast we get
there and what our importance will be to that community depends
on many factors. At present, our government is controlling this
aspect of our knowledge and until that has changed there will
never be a true relationship. I firmly believe that if our govern-
ment and other governments that have full knowledge of this con-
tact do not come forward and make the announcement to the
world, then the aliens will do it themselves, which most certainly
will cause some panic.
SURFING: How long do you believe our government has had
the knowledge that we are not alone in the Universe?
MAYNARD: That is hard to say, but I believe the United
States Governmentbut not necessarily the elected govern-
menthad some knowledge of an
alien presence as early as the mid-
1800s. However, as to when official
contact was made, I have never seen
anything in writing on a specific
datealthough, through the tracking
of rumours, other stated information
and conversations I have had, I would
estimate that official contact was
made in the early to mid1930s. Yet
it could have been as early as pre-
WWI (191014), which is long
before today's popular belief of the
1950s.
Therein, because of the limited
(congressional and executive branch) knowledge, the government
as a whole was not prepared for the UFO crashes that occurred in
the late 1940s and early 1950s. Because of this, the government
theories. However, with the speed of today's communications, the
conspiracy advocates have a tendency to provide far more infor-
mation on the event than actually occurred. Therefore, society is
left with the feeling of being off balance because of who does and
does not have knowledge of extraterrestrial life.
SURFING: You state, "I firmly believe that if our government
and other governments that have full knowledge of this contact do
not come forward and make the announcement to the world, then
the aliens will do it themselves."
"I feel alienated"

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 11

 MAYNARD: Yes, I firmly believe this, and have believed it
for at least the last 20 years.
SURFING: If contact has been ongoing for as long as you
believe that it has, why the sense of urgency from the alien stand-
point to make this announcement now?
MAYNARD: I came to the conclusion that something was not
quite right between the aliens and the people who were in contact
with them. Not so much that it was stated outright, but just some-
thing that was said while I was doing background checks on
cross-referenced documents. Also, in statements made during
conversations with several fellow workers and my friends who
worked at Area 51, it became obvious that all was not right at
Groom Lake. Furthermore, other discreet conversations had indi-
cations that there was a confrontation going on between higher
authority and those that had daily contact with the aliens.
However, I never learned exactly what the
problems were. All I could grasp from the
conversations was that there definitely was a
confrontation of some kind. I have contin-
ued my research on this and believe that it is
still going on today, but in a more heated
sense, such as armed belligerence on both
sides, with a much smaller alien presence.
SURFING: When you say "higher "There are certain
authority", do you mean persons higher up in
the chain of command? government
MAYNARD: I am referring to the chain
of command. Yes! installations (military
SURFING: You state that "other discreet
conversations had indications that there was
and/or civilian)
a confrontation going on between higher where daily UFO
authority and those that had daily con-
tact with the aliens". Can you tell us and alien contact
anything about what the nature of this
"daily contact" entails?
was, and is,
MAYNARD: There are certain gov-
ernment installations (military and/or
a normal event
civilian) where daily UFO and alien of the day."
contact was, and is, a normal event of
the day. They are: Groom Lake (Area
51) in Nevada; Dugway Proving
Grounds in Utah; Cheyenne Mountain
(Space Command) in Colorado; White
Mountain in Arizona.
Places where it was not a normal
daily activity were: California
Lawrence Livermore Laboratories, El
Toro and China Lake Naval Air
Stations and Edwards Air Force Base; New MexicoSandia Base
and Los Alamos Laboratories; FloridaEglin, MacDill and
Maxwell AF Bases, which also supported the Space Centers at
Canaveral and Kennedy; MaineLoring AFB.
There were other places that had some activity which are of
lesser importance and would cloud the issue.
SURFING: Please, tell us more about what you know about
the daily events at Cheyenne Mountain.
MAYNARD: First off, I want you to understand a little of the
background of Cheyenne Mountain which will give the reader an
image of what we are talking about as it concerns daily contact.
Long before there was an organisation called Space Command,
there was the North American Air Defense Command (NORAD),
set up to protect the North American continent from attack. This
was the main reason for building the complex in Cheyenne
12 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
Mountain. The main purpose of this joint US/Canadian organisa-
tion was to support the Strategic Air Command (SAC) and the
missile Air Defense Program.
As time progressed, satellite surveillance was incorporated in
the command structure of a little-known organisation called the
National Reconnaissance Office (NRO). The NRO is basically a
black opstype organisation that has kept its main role in SAC as
a basic cover for the new command. It was the task of the NRO
to obtain information through Ariel and/or satellite imagery. As
more and more space activity became involved in the process,
another command was developed to handle this alone; this is
called the Space Command.
It is the Space Command's responsibility to maintain an uninter-
rupted and consistent data flow of daily activities in Earth and
near space and of space vehicles entering our atmosphere. This
Command is supported by all military organ-
isations jointly, as well as NASA and several
companies from the military-industrial com-
plex, such as Hughes, EG&G and Dryden,
and SAC.
All of these organisations provide budget,
manpower and support activities and it is a
shared process to some degree, whereas the
NRO is basically an Air Forcerun operation
supported by all of the military commands.
All three organisations, NORAD, NRO and
the Space Command, are mission-supported
directly by the NSA [National Security
Agency], and in turn supply processed infor-
mation to the NSA.
The Space Command acts like an air
traffic controller for all the activity
involved in and around North America.
I have been working on getting
information to substantiate my
allegations surrounding the daily
contact.
Over the past few years there have
been incidents reported or alleged that
would indicate a daily UFO and/or
EBE contact. Although these incidents
are, at most, suspect, there seemed to
be too many factors unrelated in each
incident that struck a familiar chord.
After thoroughly examining each of the
incidents (which I do not feel comfort-
able naming at this time), and in the
course of my cursory investigation of
the incidents, I noted similarities and patterns of disinformation
being used that would make people scoff at what was stated.
After applying my knowledge of disinformation, I began to see
the truth in each of the incidents. This caused me to intensify my
own investigation, which is ongoing at this time and involves
more than just the Cheyenne Mountain complex. I hope to have a
document ready to publish with the results of what I have found,
later this fall or winter.
SURFING: Many people have reported abduction
experiences. They describe being taken against their will by
aliensusually described as the Greysand subjected to some
sort of medical examination. Some of these abductees have also
witnessed US military personnel present during the abduction
experiences. What do you know about the abduction element in
all of this?
STRANGE Times 2006
 MAYNARD: I was never exposed to any direct information were these corporations involved in "defensive" measures against
on abductions. I knew that there were cases being investigated, the so-called "alien threat", backward engineering of captured or
but I never saw any reports. On a personal note, I would have to shared alien technologies, or all of the above and more? What
say that abductions have occurred and still are occurring today. can you tell us?
Other than that, I do not believe I can offer anything further on MAYNARD: The Department of Defense has had an ongoing
this matter. program since the mid-1950s, which provided contracts to US
SURFING: Why do you think the aliens decided to interact civilian contractors/organisations/corporations that worked in the
with the government, rather than directly with the people? intelligence community. These projects came under very tight
MAYNARD: Over the years many statements have been writ- security and usually were very highly compartmentalised. What
ten (fiction and/or nonfiction) concerning the best approach to this this means is that you have several concentric circles: the closer
delicate subject, and I tend to agree with many of those state- you are to the inner circle, the more information you can find on
ments. It is apparent that our species has been controlled to the the project; the further you get away from this inner circle, the
large part by the government and media; whereas the Star Trek less information is available. All this is established on a very
"Prime Directive" is probably the most famous statement, and strict need-to-know basis. Within these circles you could, if you
most agree it could be the most likely scenario. However, as looked hard enough, find contractors that worked on various parts
beings being observed for at least the last several thousand years, of the project but really had no idea what the overall project was.
give or take a millennium, it will probably be less of a surprise to This also happened with the military's interaction with the prima-
us in this day and age than previously thought; "Details at 11". ry contractor. Also in this respect, each military branch had cer-
Yet, the factors with which we govern ourselves do not exactly tain projects that came under the compartmentalisation security
bring out the best part of us. Therefore, if I were an alien study- measures.
ing this planet and its societies, I might be a little apprehensive What is meant by this compartmentalisation is simply the clas-
about charging into the open and sification of a document or project,
announcing my presence. I would whether it is classified as
probably contact one, two or more of Confidential, Secret or Top Secret.
the major governments and work with However, when they are named such
them, and, when the time was right, "Therefore, you can literally as Umbra (UM), Majestic (MJ), Omni
make a joint announcement and let his- talk with a top official in the (OM), or Talent Keyhole (TK), the
tory take its course. Still, regardless of compartmented program becomes an
what one might say, once governmen- Pentagon but, unless he has entity unto itself. The projects and
tal contact was made and working the circle of knowledge draw very
arrangements had been ongoing, any
the authorisation for that tight toward the centre and access is
announcement might not be timely and particular project, he probably granted or denied from within that
might also be unproductivethat is, circle. Therefore, you can literally
until it is apparent that disclosure is
does not know that it exists." talk with a top official in the
necessary. In these instances, the Pentagon but, unless he has the autho-
amount of the populace's knowledge is risation for that particular project, he
a big factor in determining the proper probably does not know that it exists.
time to make the announcement. If he does know it exists, he knows
The other side of that coin might be that contact was made mil- nothing about it. Knowing the simple rules of classification helps
lennia ago, and through design it was decided that an alien pres- in identifying the right person to talk with.
ence would be counterproductive to our planetary society growth. SURFING: One of the planks in The Disclosure Project plat-
In that case, nondisclosure might be the best scenario. form is "To enact legislation which will ban all space-based
Then again, if the contact had a positive reception and disclo- weapons". Do you believe projects like the planned US antimis-
sure had been made, interaction might be a common factor in our sile defence program are somehow related to the extraterrestrials?
society and would no more be thought of than what you think of MAYNARD: My political view on this is, since we cannot get
your neighbour. Some believe, as wellas I dothat we might along with anyone on this planet, that we justify our choice of
have had an even better planetary society had acknowledgement weapons with which to defend ourselves. My ideological view is
of contact occurred positively and openly from the beginning. that we should ban all of our weapons, throw out our monetary
Primarily, you have to remember that contact is a two-way street; systems, return to a bartering system and live in harmony with
both parties have to be in agreement with the action to achieve the each other. Science should be shared with everyone, not just the
best results. privileged.
SURFING: That perhaps the aliens have not revealed them- SURFING: But do you believe that some of these space-based
selves directly to us so as not to affect our natural course? weapons are actually being designed to do battle with extraterres-
MAYNARD: Truthfully, I am not sure if our governmentor trials? If so, what effect will building them have on our "relation-
the aliensare the cause for the nondisclosure at this point, ship" with the aliens?
although personally I feel that the former is the stronger MAYNARD: Does anyone know? We officially have not
possibility. I firmly believe that if it were up to the aliens, been told that our government or any other government is in con-
disclosure would have been made long ago. Why else would tact with aliens. So how can we have a relationship? One can
there be so many open sightings, personal information from only speculate at this point. I firmly believe that we still have a
people all over the world and near-encounters with aliens? Also, basic fear of ourselves, thus anything alien is a basic fear for all
why would the government work so hard at denying it? humans. Those in power play on this point to maintain their need
SURFING: Regarding these highly classified projects that you to have weapons for self-defence, be it singular or mass destruc-
speak of involving US corporations: according to your research, tion. As you know, we have two sides to every coin and you walk

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 13

on one side at a time. Then there are those that walk on the edge the social aspects of an alien presence will have a dramatic effect
between both sides. The problem comes to us as: where do you at first, which is a given fact...
want to stand? This is something each of us has to ask ourselves
at one point or another. Concluding Remarks:
SURFING: What do you think is the reasoning behind the MAYNARD: One quick note regarding weapons in space: I
government secrecy and not wanting to share knowledge of an have two simple statements. Firstly, I believe and pray that all
extraterrestrial interaction with Earth? weapons in space will be banned. Secondly, I am also practical in
MAYNARD: Not a simple question to answer and we seem to understanding that where there are humans there will always be a
be walking all around this question. I have had this question weapon of some kind involved.
asked before and have thought about it for some time, at least for Reflecting on what has been said in this and other interviews
the past 35 years. Yet any answer I come up with does not really makes me even more determined to see The Disclosure Project
say it all. through, no matter what the consequences might be. We must be
Two of the top theories as I see it are "greed" and "secret gov- making some big progress because the "masters of disinforma-
ernment" theories. If you look at greed within the government tion" personalities are stepping up to their microphones and trying
(the old master and slave routine) as one pos- to make it sound like we are a bunch of crack-
sibility, it comes out with a very strong case. pots.
Then, of course, you have the secret govern- So what do you believe? I know what I
ment concept: not as strong as greed, but a believe! I believe in what Dr Greer has start-
very good contender in many circles. ed, how he has pulled the people and
However, the all-time theory, I believe, is resources together to present a powerful mes-
powertotal and complete, unchecked sage to the American people, and to ask for
powerwhich is a combination of greed and disclosure by our governmenta message
secrecy. This is what I believe has kept this "When it comes to that has been denied by our government for
covered up for so long and will continue to far too many years.
keep parts of it hidden, never to be released. UFOs and alien In this regard, I do not believe that it any
Therein, I think that The Disclosure Project contact, in our current longer matters that the government has not
has the right idea: simply disclose that UFOs disclosed the fact that UFOs and extraterres-
and aliens exist. The rest will come later as system at trials have visited Earth on a regular basis.
Congress gets into the act and really finds out least 98 per cent of our What matters is that the government finally
what the military has been up to for the past stop playing its denial role and tell the truth.
40, 60 or more years. Even at that, there elected officials are as Yes, the truth that we have been visited
will be certain aspects that will be held
very tightly and will never see the light
much in the dark as the repeatedly by nonEarth entities who fly
in and out of our space in craft that have
of day as far as the average American rest of been sighted and photographed for many
citizen is concerned, andin all due our citizens." years by people just like you.
respect to its powerCongress also. It is time that our government bring
SURFING: In your opinion, what this knowledge to full disclosure, not
effect would full disclosure have on our only to the American people but also to
social, religious and political organisa- the world as a whole, allowing other
tions? governments to follow in this brave new
MAYNARD: Let me take each one unfolding of our history.
of these aspects of our lives in reverse I also believe that once a full disclo-
order. sure has been achieved, all of the world's
Political life and organisations: When population will realise that we can
it comes to UFOs and alien contact, in achieve world peace, without weapons,
our current system at least 98 per cent of our elected officials are through the technology and assistance from our galactic neigh-
as much in the dark as the rest of our citizens. It is also a simple bours. It is my hope that the people of Earth will force their gov-
fact that our elected officials are so greedy that they have not been ernments to seek this peaceWorld Peace. I have heard that
able to look beyond that greed to what has been happening in our phrase so often that I never thought we had a hope or glimmer
country, but I should add that this is not all-inclusive. As for that it could really be possible, but it is. It is a matter of making
world organisations, primarily within the leadership, such as the people understand, no matter who they are, that the only solution
UN and industrial nations, their current level of knowledge proba- for a more tolerant peace in our own world is to maintain peace
bly goes beyond what the American populace is aware of, yet it is beyond our worldly confines.
still shrouded in secrecy to the nth degree. It boils down to this: Disclosure first; peace second; and no
Religious organisations: For the most part, the majority will be weapons in space, third! A beautiful way to really get the new
totally and utterly devastated and receive a blow to their theology. millennium rolling.
Yet, there will be a full element within the religious community
that will take this in stride and will not be shaken by the Editor's Note:
announcement. It will be that element that leads the way to a To access testimony gathered by The Disclosure Project or to
greater understanding of the scriptures and the theology of a one- obtain a copy of Disclosure, The Video or the Briefing
God concept. Document and Executive Summary on CD-ROM, visit the
Social aspects: This is probably the most difficult to predict or website www.disclosureproject.org. Also see Twilight Zone
provide an assessment for. I would have to say that, as a whole, article and reviews in NEXUS 9/01.

14 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 PROOF OF HIGH-LEVEL MEDIA growing bigger as it headed our way. It stood there and watched as the craft
COVER-UP ON UFOS was big, slow moving and in no way was suddenly got within a couple miles and
by Greg Boone 2003 supposed to be flying over residential shut off its lights, aft to fore, while it
areas. Folks up there have shotguns and pivoted port, travelled east a bit, then made

T
his story is proof positive of the use them at the drop of a hat! It's very old a startlingly hard starboard turn and headed
UFO cover-up by news sources. On Republican territory; folks still beef about straight for us!
August 25th, 1985, I along with 10 Pearl Harbor like it was yesterday. This thing got huge, and believe it or not
other newsmen were on duty at the On the highway, thousands and thou- it flew right over the top of us by about 40
Poughkeepsie Journal, New York's oldest sands of people were so alarmed they bolt- feet! It had to be 200 feet wide and was jet
newspaper and one of the flagships of the ed from their cars to gander at this craft. black. The illumination of the street lights
Gannett News Service. Of the 10 editors/reporters there, I was not reflecting anything off its surface
It was about 9.35 pm when one of our believe only three were nonex-military. I that we could determine.
photographers radioed in that one of those
giant boomerang UFOs that people had
been reporting for years was heading south
on Route 9.
Mind you, on this day it was during the
Dutchess County Fair, one of the oldest
and biggest county fairs in the USA.
Roughly 20,000 people leaving the fair's
festivities for home were travelling that
highway, heading south from Rhinebeck,
NY, about 18 miles north of Poughkeepsie
(about 75 miles north of NY City).
Our photographer stated that the craft
was huge and was headed south, and it
might be visible from our office windows
on the third floor. I and two editors dashed
to the northern window of the managing
editor's office, and sure enough we saw, at
a distance of approximately five miles, a
dark shape about 100 feet above the
ground, with amber and red lights slowly "Yeah, yeah, you found a new UFO website. So what's new?"

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 15

 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
Wanting to get a better glimpse of it, we
dashed to the other windows to see if it had
passed overhead. It couldn't be seen, and
we realised it might be hovering over us.
Sure enough, that's what it did! We dashed
to one of the bathrooms facing east, and
that's when the craft turned east again and
glided over the more heavily populated
section of the city noiselessly, and then it
was gone.
Mind you, tens of thousands saw this as
clear as a bell. Veteran military, news and
law enforcement people saw it as well.
I immediately thought of Stan Friedman,
as he had lectured on UFOs at Dutchess
Community College several years earlier
and we ran a kind story about it. (Yes,
Stan, I was leaning over the city desk mak-
ing sure it got in!)
Well, we're sitting there, screaming at the wide hovering over a local monument that
photogs and reporters that this will be the
story of the century. We had access to AP,
where I would sit and do sketches after
work, another big menacing fellow waltzed
in with a stack of papers and pics eight
inches high; he slammed them on the bar
and bellowed a threat: "So! Somebody in
here wanted to talk about UFOs?"
He made a big mistake. My high school
and college chums were at the bar that
night and we are just as big and menacing.
He was ceremoniously ushered out of the
bar by about 3,000 pounds of very angry
citizens.
This was the first time that a craft had
flown over our newspaper, but it wasn't the
last.
A year later, a huge saucer-shaped craft
did the same thing. We all bolted outside,
this time onto the roof of the building, and
saw a circle of lights about a half-mile
rests on a hill where couples go. It was
there for about 10 minutes, and cops,
night, close upagain, with multiple
witnesses.
I've seen these craft about six times.
Way back in 1980, a friend got pics of it.
This was the first time I'd heard of it and
we developed the film at the newspaper
ourselves. Nothing unusual, but definitely
the boomerang shape and we figured it was
just another test aircraft that the region is
famous for testing.
Yet again, "mum" was the word and
there was heck to pay if you pressed the
issue at the evening editors' meeting.
(Source: Illusions mailing list, 6 October
2003, http://lists.beyond-the-illusion.com/)
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS
ALLEGEDLY WROTE TWO ETI
REPORTS FOR JIMMY CARTER
by Linda Moulton Howe 2003

Gannett, etc., and USA Today which we
mainly put out.
Nope. Word came down from on high
that not one word was to be mentioned.
This was a solid object that hovered,
manoeuvred, was seen by tens of thou-
sands, was photographedand no mention
anywhere.
Next day, some "menacing" chaps
showed up in our editorial office. I got into
trouble for staring back just as menacingly.
That night at the local watering hole,
"Sorry, but it seems everyone wanted to visit Earth incognito this
weekend, and this is the only thing we've got left in stock."
F
people, all saw it. ollowing is the text of an interview
Then the remarkable part. conducted by Linda Moulton Howe
As I dashed downstairs to get my trusty with Grant Cameron, a building
telescope from my van to get a closer look, facility manager at the University of
I suddenly looked straight up and another Manitoba as well as reporter and producer
large boomerang object was directly over- of the presidentialufo.com website, in
head! Manitoba, Winnipeg, Canada. Editor
Three people were in the parking lot at
that time with me and we stared at it and Grant Cameron (GC): One of the
then it kicked in its orange afterburnersI strongest stories in support of the con-
recall six laterally on its aft sectiontook tention that the American President knows
off like a rocket due west at high speed, what is going on concerning extraterrestrial
and then did a information and has been briefed on the
hard bank port crashed flying saucer aspect of the UFO
that surprised us mystery is a story told by Danny Sheehan.
and must've taken Sheehan has long been a civil rights
off southwest at attorney. He was involved with "The
over 500 mph Pentagon Papers", the Silkwood case and
easily. Three Mile Island, and defended Harvard
You could hear psychiatrist John Mack, PhD, the abduction
the afterburners researcher. Sheehan was also involved in
kick in overhead, Iran-Contra and studied under Henry
and this thing was Kissinger. He's a prominent attorney who
at about 100 feet was legal counsel to the Jesuit headquarters
high and was in Washington, DC.
about 100 feet Sheehan tells the story that he was
wide. brought as a consultant into two studies
It wasn't the that were being done for President Jimmy
source of the cir- Carter, that the President had asked for.
cular lights, but These studies were being written by Marcia
we suspect the Smith, who is now the pre-eminent expert
boomerang- on the Russian space program.
shaped object Danny Sheehan currently is still an
chased away the attorney in San Francisco, working on
circular object. various programs. He made several strong
That's two speeches after 9/11 and focuses on civil
UFOs in one, at rights cases.

16 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006


Sheehan was to give a lecture for the top
50 people at the Jet Propulsion Laboratory,
in the SETI (Search for Extraterrestrial
Intelligence) section, about the implications
of extraterrestrial intelligence for mankind.
In order to do that, Sheehan said he
wanted access to the classified Blue Book
files. Marcia Smith got him access in the
basement of the Madison Building, which
is one of the three buildings for the Library
of Congress in Washington.
Sheehan says he was brought into a vault
in the basement of the Madison Building
and then, while looking through microfilms
of the classified Blue Book files, he came
across clear pictures of a crashed flying
saucer in an embankment with snow and
US Air Force officers around it. You can
clearly read their name tags, he said. There
were close-ups of writing on the side of the
craft, and this material Sheehan reported
back to Marcia Smith.
When I interviewed him, Sheehan said
that, in one of two studies that were written
at the Library of Congress for reading by
President Jimmy Carter, the reports stated
there are at least six extraterrestrial races
from this galaxy visiting our planet.
Linda Moulton Howe (LMH): Did he
detail what the six types were and what
they looked like?
GC: No. He basically saw the reports
before they went. At that point, they had
no classification markings on them. I
guess it was sort of the final draft before
they went, and there were no exact details.
He might have them, but I've heard him tell
the story a dozen times. I've never heard
him mention details, but he has always
mentioned the fact that this statement was
in this one report that was going to the
President of the United States.
LMH: Did he try to follow up further?
GC: Danny Sheehan knows an awful
lot. I don't know Marcia Smith. I contact-
ed her by email and Danny Sheehan found
out I did and was quite upset that I had
contacted Marcia Smith to get her side of
the story.
He also tells a story about the Vatican
letters. He had contacted the Vatican on
behalf of the White House after asking for
the ET files inside the Vatican Library. He
knew the guy who ran the Vatican Library,
and Danny Sheehan was Chief Counsel to
the Jesuit headquarters in Washington, DC.
He got a reply back that the Vatican
Library would not release these files, and
he said it was the first time he had ever
STRANGE Times 2006
received a denial from the Vatican.
Sheehan wrote a second letter to the
Vatican Library, and that letter specifically
stated the letter was on behalf of the
President of the United States [Jimmy
Carter]. The Vatican Library wrote back,
"No, you can't have the files".
Danny Sheehan still has those letters,
which is fairly significant. He is close
friends with Marcia Smith; and with my
email letter to Marcia Smith, I guess
Sheehan was upset because I was asking,
"Is Danny Sheehan telling the truth?" He
has been protective of her situation.
I saw Danny Sheehan trace out the writ-
ing on the craft in the photograph, and he
did an exact tracing. Because of the over-
head [projection] on microfilm, he was able
to trace on the back of a legal pad the exact
symbols that were on the side of the craft
inside the classified Blue Book files. So,
Danny Sheehan has some stuff that would
be pretty dramatic and substantial and back
his story. But for some reason, I don't
know why he hasn't released this.
LMH: What was the nature of those
symbols in terms of languages around the
world you have seen?
GC: To me, it was just sort of dots and
slashes, the way Danny Sheehan showed it.
LMH: What was Marcia Smith's exact
title in relationship to the President?
GC: This is part of the controversy, that
she worked for the Library of Congress
with the Congressional Research Service.
You can read everything I've reported
about Marcia S. Smith at my website,
http://www.presidentialUFO.com. She's
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
doing something different now and is fairly
high up in the hierarchy of the Library of
Congress.
She did a number of UFO and extrater-
restrial studies. I think there have been
four or five that have been released by the
Library of Congress. All of them were
released by her, but as far as I know she's
never been interviewed.
She gave Danny Sheehan access to the
Blue Book files and tells the story to
Sheehan that George Bush, Sr, who was the
Director of the Central Intelligence Agency
under Ford, briefed President-Elect Jimmy
Carter on intelligence and special programs
when Carter was becoming President.
When Carter asked for the UFO files,
George Bush told him: "You don't have
the need to know. Being President is not
sufficient need to know. You're going to
have to go to Congress and get them to
declassify the files." Marcia Smith is also
the source of that story, according to
Danny Sheehan.
Editor's Note:
If anyone has more information to con-
tribute, linking US Presidents to knowl-
edge about crashed aerial vehicles from
outer space, please contact Grant
Cameron by email at presidentialUFO@
presidency.com or via the website
http://www.presidentialUFO.com.
(Source: From part three of an interview
by Linda Moulton Howe with Grant
Cameron, 29 October 2003, website
http://www.earthfiles.com)
NEXUS 17
 VICTOR HUGO TALKED TO of the Ouija board. Mercurians called their planet petasus
ALIENS IN THE 1850S! An alien named Tyatafia, from the planet insani, "the wildly insane messenger of the

O
ne hundred and fifty years ago, Jupiter, told Hugo that the inhabitants of gods". Hugo thought this might be in refer-
Victor Hugo seems to have talked his planet lived grim and difficult lives, ence to the strange planetary motions of the
to aliens. Astonishingly, the lacking most of the advantages enjoyed by planet Mercury, which races around the
renowned author of Les Misrables and Earth people. Tyatafia said his planet was Sun once every 88 Earth days but takes 59
The Hunchback of Notre Dame may have a "prison world"; souls from other worlds Earth days to turn around once on its axis
communicated with ETs from Jupiter and were sometimes sent there to live out a life- (in other words, one day on Mercury lasts
Mercury and, in the latter case, learned time as punishment for past sins. 59 Earth days). These motions were
much about their planet. The inhabitants of the planet Mercury roughly known in Hugo's time.
These meetings took place at seances the lived considerably happier lives. They told The Mercurians said that their planet was
great French writer attended when he was a Hugo they were half-animal and half-spirit not a prison world but a "reward world",
political exile on the English Channel and spent a great deal of their time floating upon which souls from other planets were
island of Jersey from 1853 to 1855. in the planet's thin atmosphere, suspended allowed to live a lifetime if they had
According to transcripts just recently trans- by six appendages ending in tiny "suns" behaved extremely well during their previ-
lated, the beings tapped out messages which they called their "torches". ous existence.
through a "talking table"the forerunner Channelling in Latin for some reason, The strange but friendly aliens from
the Mercurians Mercury described the "temples" on their
described them- world. They told Hugo that, though they
selves as having grew old and died like humans, they
"two eyes which became ill only when they lost one or
remained open all another of their "torches" which kept them
the time, a huge floating in mid-air.
but very light The information from the Mercurians
head, and a long was allegedly channelled in the shade of
but very thin the great French alchemist Nicolas Flamel,
body". They said sometimes in strange drawings vaguely
they didn't take suggestive of ancient alchemical formulae.
solid refreshment Flamelalong with Victor Hugois
but only drank thought by some to have been a Grand
liquids, and did Master of the secret order of the Priory of
not breathe but Sion.
"shone like the While on Jersey, Hugo attended more
Sun". They than 100 seances with his wife, daughter,
added that they two sons and several political exile friends.
"And do you, Gorppp, promise to love, honour and were all married. During these seanceswhich are described
transmogrify molecularly so long as you both shall live?" T h e in a new book, Conversations with

18 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006


Eternity: The Forgotten Masterpiece of
Victor Hugo (New Paradigm Books)the
great French writer also talked to aliens
from other star systems.
They told him that every galaxy in the
Universe contains billions of inhabited
planets. The ETs said that most of the
planets that were visible were "prison
worlds", but that there were other planets
which were made of light only and there-
fore not visible, and which were "reward
worlds".
The star beings explained that the inhabi-
tants of the more favoured reward worlds
were commanded by God to help the
inhabitants of the less fortunate prison
worlds in every way possible. They added
that carrying out these responsibilities was
particularly important in the difficult day
and age in which we now live.
According to Conversations with
Eternity, Victor Hugo also talked with
many other kinds of beings, including the
biblical hero Joshua who fought the Battle
of Jericho and made the walls of the city
come tumbling down by having his soldiers
blow their trumpets. Joshua is also said to
have made the Sun stand still for twelve
hours. During one seance, the spirit of the
biblical hero even told Hugo that he had
been able to perform these acts by harness-
ing the laws of what sounds very much like
modern quantum holography.
(Source: John Chambers, New Paradigm
Books, 22783 South State Road 7, #97,
Boca Raton, FL 33428, USA, telephone
(561) 482 5971, fax (561) 852 8322, e-mail
jdc@flinet.com, internet website
http://www.newpara.com)
HAUNTED HEADQUARTERS
SPOOKS BRITISH SPIES!
T
he UK Ministry of Defence (MoD)
has a problem on its hands with
claims that the new headquarters for
the Intelligence and Security Centre (ISC),
the 850-year-old Chicksands Priory near
Bedford, is haunted by at least nine spirits,
including a nun called Rosata who was
entombed after being forced to watch her
lover's execution. (The ISC is an all-ser-
vices agency, established in 1996 to co-
ordinate covert intelligence operations.)
After several sightings, unexplained
laughter and moving lights in unoccupied
rooms, the MoD deployed surveillance
equipment and seismic sensors, but nothing
conclusive was recorded.
STRANGE Times 2006
Brigadier Chris Holten, head of the ISC,
appreciates the irony of an intelligence
agency being haunted by spooks. He
believes the apparitions are recordings of
"traumatic events imprinted in the fabric of
the building".
Permission has been obtained for a new
investigationinvolving ISC personnel
using high-tech pressure sensors, night
vision recorders, infrared video, tempera-
ture and movement sensorsto prove Brig.
Holten's conviction that there is a "spiritual
element to the intelligence business".
The Priory was used as a covert radio
interception station from 1936, and was
taken over by the US Air Force from 1950
to 1995. The following year, the ISC
moved in...and the ghosts made their pres-
ence known.
(Source: Intelligence, no. 92, 25 Jan 1999)
BRITISH POLICE OFFICERS
CONFESS TO UFO ENCOUNTERS
OF THEIR OWN
A
number of retired and serving
police officers are risking ridicule
by coming forward to tell all about
their alleged encounters with UFOs.
More than 20 officers have responded to
an advertisement in Police Review, inviting
them to recount their close encounters of
the third kind.
Their reports include stories of alien
abduction and gigantic blocks of light hov-
ering above their squad cars. At least two
former officers claim to have photographic
"That's the 93rd successful test of the antigravity machine.
It's also the 93rd prototype we'll never see again."
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
evidence of their meetings with extraterres-
trials.
Their extraordinary stories have been
collected for a new book, Policing the
UFO, which includes interviews with at
least 20 former and serving officers and as
many as 200 recorded incidents from
around the world involving police. Many
of the examples from the second category
are taken from previously unreleased
Ministry of Defence papers.
The book's author, Irene Bott, has chosen
to concentrate on police officers because of
their relative position of trust in society.
"They are less likely to be written off as
cranks, loonies or anoraks," she explained.
Others, however, may think they are
boldly going beyond the call of duty and
risking ridicule and professional suicide.
For this reason, many officers appear to
have waited until they left the police ser-
vice before speaking out, although others
who contacted the researchers feel so
strongly about what they have witnessed
that they are prepared to be named.
These are some of the encounters
included in the book:
An officer claims to have been abduct-
ed and medically examined by aliens in the
1980s. The former officer, who has yet to
give the full details of his case, is said to
have been out driving when he experienced
disturbances to his vehicle, followed by
memory loss. Later, via hypnosis, he
recalled being taken aboard a spacecraft
and examined by aliens.
A police officer says he took five
NEXUS 19
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
photographs of a UFO while he was on duty
in the West Midlands in the 1980s, but the
MoD confiscated them.
A policeman and policewoman were
out on patrol in the countryside and saw
lights and a cylindrical object in the sky.
An officer saw a disc-shaped object
hovering 20 feet above the road.
In the 1970s, a police officer on duty
saw a wedge-shaped object in the sky that
was about four storeys high and 50 feet
long.
Declassified MoD papers from the
1950s to 1970s cover incidents at military
bases and investigations by police officers
into reported sightings. The files name the
police officers involved, and allegedly
include accounts of helicopters being sent
after UFOs.
There have also been several reports
one as recently as last monthfrom offi-
cers in Sussex, an area which is considered
a fruitful zone for UFO sightings.
While the majority of the police officers
who have been in contact are retired, some
are still serving and one of them is an
Inspector.
Ms Bott commented: "In a court of law,
the person who is most believed is usually
a policeman. Also, these people are out
day and night, observing things around
them, so they are excellent witnesses.
"A UFO is simply an unidentified flying
object; it's not little green men. Many offi-
cers do not want to talk about it openly
while they are still serving, because they
can kiss their promotion chances good-
bye."
So far, she has been in touch with about
20 NEXUS
20 serving and former officers. Only a
couple of weeks ago, she was contacted by
two serving officers claiming to have seen
UFOs in the past month.
Nick Redfern, author of several books on
UFOs, is assisting Ms Bott with her pro-
ject. He added: "These people are willing
to fly in the face of potential ridicule,
which shows how strongly they feel about
what they have witnessed. These are
strong, credible witnesses."
One of those to come forward was for-
mer PC John Hanson, 52, who retired from
the West Midlands police force in 1994
after 27 years of service. His encounter
with a UFO took place on the evening of
14 June 1995. Mr Hanson was at his home
near Redditch, Worcestershire, when he
looked out of his bedroom window.
"I saw a silver, pear-shaped ball of light
hovering over a tree," he recalled. "It was
about 40 feet off the ground, and about 20
feet long and five feet wide. Immediately
opposite was a red, cigar-shaped object,
about 30 feet tall.
"The pear ball suddenly moved and there
was a piece cut out of it like a wedge of
cheese. It then changed into the shape of a
jelly bean and jumped onto the cigar-
shaped object. The two objects then fused
together, produced a rippling light and
were gone."
He said the whole episode lasted about
five minutes and took place around 10.35
pm. He noted that a similar sighting had
taken place 20 miles away on the same
night.
"I am not talking about flying saucers or
spacemen, but an unidentified object
www.nexusmagazine.com
some form of energy source," he added.
(Source: by Jason Bennetto, The Sunday
Independent, London, 23 January 1999)
PRESIDENT CARTER'S UFO
SIGHTING REPORT TO NICAP
D
uring the autumn of 1973, hundreds
of people throughout the United
States reported UFO sightings to
the National Investigations Committee on
Aerial Phenomena (NICAP). Governors
Ronald Reagan and Jimmy Carter both
reported seeing UFOs, and both later
became Presidents.
Jimmy Carter stated: "If I become
President, I'll make every piece of informa-
tion that this country has about UFO sight-
ings available to the public."
On 12 October 1973, then Governor
Carter responded to NICAP's inquiries
about his sighting with a letter and a report
form. Harry Lederman, the regional inves-
tigator, handled the investigation.
The following are the essential answers
to questions on the NICAP form:
"Name: Jimmy Carter
Occupation: Governor
Address: State Capitol, Atlanta
Phone: (404) 656 1776
Education: Graduate in Nuclear Physics
Military Service: Navy
"Carter and ten members of the Leary,
Georgia, Lions Club witnessed a UFO
shortly after dark, 30 degrees above the
western horizon, in October of 1969. The
group of persons observed the object for
ten to twelve minutes, starting at 7:15 EST.
The object was at one time as bright as the
moon. The object changed size, color, and
brightness. The object was sharply out-
lined and self-luminous. The object came
close, moved away, came close, then
moved away. It was about the same size as
the moon, maybe a little smaller, varied
from brighter/larger than planet to apparent
size of moon. The object moved to dis-
tance, then disappeared. Estimated dis-
tance to the object was difficult to deter-
mine, maybe 3001,000 yards, about 30
degrees above the horizon.
"[signed] 9/18/73, Jimmy Carter"
(Source: 1998 by George A. Filer,
MUFON Eastern Director, MUFON
Skywatch Investigations, Filer's Files #6-
1998, issued 11 February 1999, e-mail
Majorstar@aol.com; MUFON Journal,
103 Oldtowne Road, Sequin, TX 78155-
4099, USA. http://mufon.com)
STRANGE Times 2006
 AREA 51/S-4
Secrets Behind the Scenes

O
n Tuesday, 22 October 1991, one of the strangest and most exciting stories of
my career in UFO research began to unfold. A young man calling himself
Connor O'Ryan called my home in Tucson, Arizona, from Los Angeles and
said he wanted to come and see some of my collection of UFO information and
pictures. That was about noon of Tuesday.
At about 14:00 hours I received another call from the same voice saying that he feared
he may be in danger, because when he went to the bank to draw out money for his trip, he
was informed that his account was "frozen"! He tried his Bankcard in the automatic teller
machine and it was returned unhonoured. He went to another bank and tried to withdraw
In 1991, UFO money on his Visacard and it also was not honoured. He said he suspected the worst.
He went back and packed his bags and left his apartment. He called me again about
investigator 14:45 to say he had something for me if I would get him a bus ticket to deliver it. He said
the next bus left his position at 16:00. I raced to my nearest Mail Boxes outlet and wired
Wendelle Stevens him $100 for a ticket to Tucson. After that, I was tied up on my telephone for a few min-
utes when my line was interrupted by another call saying the money was not at Western
was contacted by Union yet, and time was running out. I assured him that I would go check on it immedi-
ately, and that he should check Western Union again in 15 minutes. He did, and the funds
a Delta Force were verified, and Western Union verified this to me. The Mail and Western Union sub-
station was in a mall across the street from the bus station and he made it in time; but now
sentry who he began to worry about what he was carrying, and on impulse decided not to carry what
he had with him, but to ship it to me to hold for him when he got here.
divulged details of He made up a package in an automobile starter box and weighted it with rocks to dis-
guise the contents. He then took it to the mail section of the bus station office and
flying saucers and shipped it to me at priority rate, registered and insured so that it had to be signed for.
The man arrived in Tucson at 02:30 early next morning and called me, so I went down
aliens kept at and picked him up at the Tucson bus station. He did not want to eat, but I was now up
and wanted a cup of coffee. We stopped at the Dunkin' Donuts all-night counter near
Area 51. 22nd Street and Craycroft Road, and I had a coffee and he drank a Pepsi-Cola. Then we
went to my home and went to sleep.
The next morning, Wednesday, all seemed normal and we went out to breakfast. The
young visitor asked a lot of questions about UFOs and my research. He said he had found
out about me and my interests in a book on UFOs, among the very few on the subject in
the Las Vegas downtown public library, and copied my name and address from it. A call
to the Tucson telephone directory service gave him my number.
He said he was a US Marinea "Seal", an elite Navy Special Forces positionand had
been such since his enlistment some nine years ago. He was 29 years old, and for the last
nine months he had been assigned to "Delta Force, Team Six", a super-elite cross-service
activity that answered to none of the service commands but to a command line of its own,
answering directly to the Joint Service Staff. This was all new to me.
He said he was, until one week before, assigned to duty at S-4 in the Area 51 facility of
by Wendelle C. Stevens 1997 the ACE reservation in Nevada. He said he was a sentry who lived in the quarters at the
facility and whose duty post was on Level 2 of a four-level complex. He said there were
From his talk given at the 1997 Australian no sentries below Level 2, as everything below that was electronically controlled and he
International UFO Symposium did not know what was down there. At Level 2 they controlled access to the separate ele-
vators that went down belowone to Level 3 and another one to Level 4. To use one of
PO Box 17206 these elevators it took a card, a thumbprint and a matching retina scan of the right eye.
Tucson, Arizona 85731, USA Anyone who was not cleared by this process was immediately arrested.
The sentries worked continuous shifts of four hours on and eight off. They patrolled

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 21

their area at attention and were prohibited from looking around or Level 1. There were other sentries on Level 1, whom he did not
directly at anybody. They were not allowed to talk to each other know.
or to anybody else. Socialisation off-duty was discouraged and He saw naked alien bodies pickled in a liquid and preserved
little conversation or discussion took place in the facility, making standing erect in a large, transparent, tubelike case. A metal band
everyone pretty much a loner. around the waist held the bodies erect. The eyes in one of them
The men were given physical examinations every three months, seemed to be sunken back some.
during which they were always hypnotised for about one hour. Over time, a small camera was successfully taken into the facil-
Even their most secret thoughts were probed. ity, pictures were taken and the film was brought out. This
These men were allowed three days of rest and recuperation became a dangerous game, and its possible discovery during one
leave in groups and were taken to Las Vegas once a month. They of the hypnotic sessions may have been the real reason for his
were dropped at the Imperial Palace Hotel on Las Vegas sudden separation. If this was the case, and he really did have
Boulevard in the afternoon of the first day, and were picked up at Hodgkin's disease, the implications were fearful. He may have
16:00 on the third day to go back to their been given this disease by his own
work facility. Rooms were provided in a superiors to terminate him for what
special reserved section of the Imperial he had seen! This had already
Palace maintained by the security agency. He saw naked alien bodies occurred to him, and he was very
The men were searched on the way out of worried because he was still in per-
the secure S-4 facility, and were searched pickled in a liquid and preserved fect health and had no history of
again and given a polygraph test on the such a disease in his family.
way back into the facility.
standing erect in a large, His retaliation, if this turned out
On his last quarterly physical, our guest transparent, tubelike case. A to be true, was to release some 52
was told that he had Hodgkin's disease photographs taken inside Level 2 of
and would be given a medical discharge, metal band around the waist S-4. If successfully brought out, he
which was done. He was distraught at held the bodies erect. could blow the lid off such a nefari-
being kicked out of his choice service and ous operation which was truly the
a career which he loved and counted on. work of "mad scientists".
He wanted to go all the way to his retire- Connor felt his hand was being
ment in this service. He was frightened at forced by the freezing of his money
the prospect of being ill and debilitated by a killer disease when supply, and he now sought to get out of the whole thing. He
he felt perfectly well. He had always been very active. shipped his "weapon", the set of 52 photographs, in the starter box
only 20 minutes before he got on the bus to come to Tucson.

C
onnor had begun to take an interest in what was going on Other sets were strategically stashed in case of intercept of one or
in the facility, and he began to look around and at things. more.
He saw seven disc-shaped craft stored there in Level 2.

N
Three of them were alike and the remaining four were all differ- ow Connor was waiting anxiously for the box to arrive,
ent. He saw some of them occasionally taken up to Level 1, and the shipping clerk having advised him that it would take
sometimes one would be taken outside when all satellite activity three days to get to Tucson. That would mean arrival on
was clear. The craft were kept on rolling platforms, and they Friday, 25 October.
were always moved on these same platforms from his Level 2 to But on Thursday 24th, I found a pale-blue envelope resting in
the brackets on the
porch mailbox next to
my front door. It bore
no address and no
stamps, indicating a
hand delivery. The
return address, printed
in the upper left corner
of the envelope, was
Imperial Palace, 3535
Las Vegas Blvd, South
Las Vegas, Nevada
89109. Inside the blue
parchment-like enve-
lope was a sheet of
similar pale-blue sta-
tionery, with the
Imperial Palace name
and address on the top
of the page and a gold
crest on the bottom in
the right-hand corner.
On that sheet of
Part of the mysterious note found by Wendelle Stevens outside his home on 25 October 1991. paper was a message in

22 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

very simple, childlike letters, of the style used in penmanship decided upon.
practice in elementary schoolvery difficult from which to judge Connor was leaving and they had already taken a number of
handwriting characteristics. The message said: "It's to come photographs and stashed them securely. Connor would deliver
home." There was a Delta Force symbol with the point of the tri- one set to us and arrange for a follow-on plan. Those still inside
angle up, indicating "It's cool"as we found out later. would take more pictures and try to get documents with official
I showed the letter to my grandson, Gem Cox, who was sleep- headings on them, discussing the craft and bodies. The biologist
ing on the porch. Connor was sleeping on the sofa between the would provide dissection reports, autopsies and analyses on the
porch and my bedroom. He was still asleep. Gem did not know alien bodies, together with photos of the bodies under dissection.
what it was all about, and suggested we wake Connor and ask him This material was to be brought out periodically and be made
about it. When we did, Connor went visibly pale and was imme- available to us through a special drop arrangement or arrange-
diately alert. He muttered, "Oh God, they're here already!" and ments. We were given our instructions for follow-up and were
shook his head. told where and how it would be done. This could all be published
Our visitor was now concerned that he also had a tracking on a signal, to raise the profile of the group in case any one of
device implanted in his body, because, though we'd been watch- them was harmed. They hoped that a public outcry would result
ing carefully, we had detected no evidence of Connor being fol- and that this would save some of them from internal "executions".
lowed and had done everything to detect if he Such an outcry could lead to lawsuits against
had been. the government and subpoenas for evidence,
This angered Connor even more than the ...Connor told us that finally bringing down the "house of cards" of
possibility of the disease being introduced,
because now he had evidence of this. He
there were five people security over these important matters affect-
ing us all, our society and our world.
said he wanted to give us a statement to be from inside S-4, all

F
held in confidence unless, and until, some- riday morning we were anxiously await-
thing was done to him. If he were to be
working on Level 2, who ing delivery of the shipment so we
harmed, or any of his friends or family were had become could get the package, when at about
to be harmed because of him, the statement 11:30 I went out to see if any mailbox flags
would be released. disenchanted over the were still up. Coming back to the door, I
secrecy of their noticed another of those pale-blue Imperial

W
e went out into the desert, to a Palace envelopes stuck behind my house
high spot where all approaches operation and the way it number.
could be watched simultane- was being run. This time the message was a white 3"
ously, and video-recorded a two-hour x 5" card with the Delta Force triangle,
statement for this purpose. Five copies the point now turned to about the 2
were made and all were dispersed to They thought the secrecy o'clock position, indicating time was
separate locations away from hereto running out. Then there was a circle
trusted hands who would release the was misplaced and that with an envelope in it and a line drawn
information if anything happened to us. the American public diagonally across the whole pictogram,
At that time Connor told us that there indicating no shipment and possibly an
were five people from inside S-4, all ought to know what intercept of the registered package. The
working on Level 2, who had become
disenchanted over the secrecy of their
was there... next pictogram was a circle with "LV
BUS" written inside; a diagonal line was
operation and the way it was being run. drawn across that symbol, indicating a
They thought the secrecy was misplaced possible intercept there, too. That was
and that the American public ought to followed by a big question mark, indi-
know what was there, especially since this place had become cating "What are you going to do now?" But the most threatening
commonly known inside as "The Museum", as the primary part of this message were the last two symbols: one was the word
research activity had been moved elsewhere. "Home", and the other was two paper matches, indicating a threat
The security people working there were not allowed to use of arson.
names, but were all identified by a number. Connor's number was The arson threat was turned over to the County Sheriff and the
122 and the other three sentries had numbers 123, 124 and 125. A local Fire Department for file in case this threat was carried out.
biologist working with the bodies had number 118. These num- If so, it would clearly lead back to Delta Force and Area 51. We
bers applied only at this facility and were changed as people came have the names of the chain of command leading all the way back
and went. to the [then] Secretary of Defense, Dick Cheney, and we have
This group had been considering this action and contact for attorneys who are most anxious to initiate such a lucrative action.
some time and had discussed whom of the UFO researchers they One of the 52 photos is said to clearly show Dick Cheney inspect-
would contact. They went to the public library in Las Vegas and ing Level 2 of the S-4 facility, where the alien ship and sample
studied all the available material on UFOs, looking for names. bodies are kept and where our man was a sentry on duty. This
They rejected MUFON and CUFOS because they feared those photo was surreptitiously taken by our Delta Force visitor at that
organisations might have been infiltrated by agents of the govern- time, after the end of the Gulf War.
ment. They rejected John Lear as their primary contact because Interception of this package of photographs does not mean they
he was too close and was being watched constantly. They reject- are all gone. Other sets were made and stashed in trusted hands
ed George Knapp of TV Channel 8 because he was also too close for safekeeping in case of loss of some. They can be produced to
and might want a story immediately. They chose us because they save a life or to pursue an arson threat carried out by Delta Force
thought we could be persuaded to wait and go at a pace they had or its agents. The evidence is clearly established.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 23

 After the third letter from Delta Force, on Saturday 26 October
1991, our man decided they might come in by force and take him,
so he went out into my walled backyard, found a dark corner
under some big oleander trees, buried his identification cards and
covered the whole thing with dead leaves so it looked undis-
turbed.
We were only absent from home for a short time to go eat
something, and we discussed copying his cards and dispersing the
copies. When we returned home he
went out to get them and they were
already gone, leading to speculations
that even the ID cards may have track-
ing devices in them. He saw four "ninjas"
That third message was found at
about noon, in another sort of enve- (men in close-fitting black
lope; white this time, with a white
sheet of paper inside. Again, it had
bodysuits with padded feet
been stuck in the corner of my house and black knitted ski-masks)
numbers at my front door.
This time the message seemed to be
in there with them.
an offer. This was truly Orwellian in
scope and a very frightening situation
for our society.
T
hat day Gem Cox had to go to Phoenix on business and
took Connor along with him to see what would happen with
a change of location. As expected, the next message from
the unseen force was delivered there, in Phoenix, and was found
the next afternoon.
The two had detected no evidence of pursuit, though they'd
sanitised their trail to the best of their ability. They'd driven very were followed by pictograms showing three men, in the step: " =
fast, until they could see no other car lights, and then pulled off
the road behind some bushes and waited. They did this several
times and detected no pursuit.
They had left Tucson late in the evening and got to Phoenix just
Wendelle Stevens, during his presentation at the 1997 Australian International UFO
Symposium held in Brisbane last October.
24 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
before midnight. They arrived at Jim Dilettoso's and talked with
him for about an hour before going to their room in an outbuilding
to get some sleep.
About 02:30 in that early morning, Gem Cox was awakened by
someone else in their room. He tried to open his eyes and tried to
move, but he was completely paralysed! He could only see
through a small slit of eyelid opening, and could look down his
prone body. He saw four "ninjas" (men in close-fitting black
bodysuits with padded feet and black
knitted ski-masks) in there with them.
One was standing over Gem on his
bed, straddling his ankles and point-
ing an automatic weapon at his head.
Another similar figure was standing
over Connor the same way. Two
more "ninjas" were going through
their things, looking for something.
One came up with a piece of paper
from Connor's bag, looked at it,
cursed and crumpled it, then threw it
towards the door. A fifth man, in a
suit, was also there in the room.
Nothing was said by any of them.
Gem lost consciousness again and he
and Connor both slept until 14:30 in the afternoon!
When they got up and went out to the car, there was another
(the fourth) pictographic note in the Delta Force shorthand lan-
guage showing the triangle pointed back to the 12:00 position,
indicating "No rush". Then there were carefully disguised pen-
manship letters that read: "Situ: Extreme. Please be pat." These
$$$ = No TV, Work on deal. You have 7 days to produce pack
or = . We want GW1 to come home. We will call in 48 hrs."
Later on Sunday, 27 October, a fifth note, in a white envelope,
was found stuck in the car door. It had a sheet of white paper
inside with instructions for them to check
into the Motel 6 in Scottsdale and wait.
They did this late on Sunday afternoon,
after purchasing an infra-red sensor light
and cans of peanuts to get the aluminium
pull-off tops.
They rigged the sensor light to come on
when someone was just beyond the motel
room door, and they inserted peanut-can
lids in the crack around the door so as to fall
out if the door were moved or the cracks
disturbed.
That night, both the light came on and the
can lids were knocked to the floor by some-
one who checked the door and then went
away.
The two men checked out the next day.
They went out to the parking lot to return to
Tucson, and as they approached Gem's red
Porsche they saw a sixth envelope pinched
into the door crack.
They then thought of their arrival to
check into the motel, and how the desk
clerk had handed Gem a key that was
already laying on the clerk's desk pad in
front of him. Thinking that rather suspi-
cious, Gem looked at the key number,
affected dislike and said, "Give me another
STRANGE Times 2006

room. I don't like this number. I am very sensitive about num-
bers." The clerk objected but did change the key, and so they
ended up in a different room. Now they wondered what would
have happened if they had used the first room.
This time the note seemed a little more conciliatory. It had the
delta triangle pointing up at 12 o'clock again. Then the note said:
"100,000 within 48 hrs for location. No foul play or"and that
was all.
On Tuesday, 29 October, a seventh note was received, again
mentioning 100,000 and showing three stick men walking away.
The delta triangle was again pointed up, and then it said, "18:00,
All be there".
The 48 hours ran out at 18:00 on Wednesday evening, and at
18:15 an eighth note was found stuck behind the house numbers
in Tucson again. This one said, "Trouble with money. Delay to
13:00 to 16:00 tomorrow". That
would be Thursday, 31 October 1991.
We waited all Thursday afternoon,
from 12:00 to 18:00, with no further
contact. Finally Connor asked for my "They" would not hesitate to
car so he could go make a call. He
came back somewhat disturbed and take out my whole
said he had been told that the orders to
"terminate" him had been issued.
neighbourhood if necessary,
and the reference,
A
t that point we decided to raise
Connor's profile so that news "MALAKIA", meant just that.
of such a "termination" might
draw the interest of hundreds of UFO
buffs anxious to check out Area 51 and
S-4.
I called the Ham Radio Net and asked them to stand by in case
something dangerous happened, giving them a few clues and con-
tacts to put the story together. I also called the computer mailbox-
es and had them stand by for a spectacular release, or for a story
about our being taken in on a set-up intended to discredit us.
Either way, the story would get much mileage.
There was no contact at all, all day of Fridayvery unusual in
view of the deadlines.
On the morning of Saturday, 2 November, we found a plain
brown envelope behind my house numbers again. This was
apparently the end of the negotiations and a final kiss-off. The
threat was plain and simple: no more negotiations. "They" would
not hesitate to take out my whole neighbourhood if necessary, and
the reference, "MALAKIA", meant just that.
Sunday passed and still no contact had been made. Connor was
beginning to lose patience in view of the execution order issued
on him. He called a friend (his tutor and mentor from earlier in
his career) and consulted him on what to do. The friend offered to
come and get him and take him to a safe place.
On Monday, 4 November, Connor decided to go get us some
stashed evidence to be used in publishing the whole story, if that
became necessary to prevent the deaths of his several confederates
who by now had certainly been discovered. He timed this to coin-
cide with the arrival of his rescuer in a private plane to take him to
safety, or so he thought.
He asked to be dropped at the bus station where there would be
safety in numbers, and that is where I took him. His last words
were that he would retrieve a stashed package and put it in our
hands before he left. He would contact us with instructions in a
few hours.
That was the last we saw of our mysterious visitor.
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
C
onnor had given me a locker key that he said was for a
locker in the Greyhound bus terminal in downtown Las
Vegas. He said that there was an envelope, taped up
behind the door-locking mechanism in the front of the locker,
which I should remove as soon as possible, as there would be a
follow-on delivery by his friends inside the S-4 facility if this
were removed.
I went to Las Vegas and called John Lear to go with me to the
bus station and videotape me as I opened that locker number 424.
I had a map of the location of that locker bank and number in the
bus station. I found the correct bank of lockers, and the position
of the locker number I was looking forbut that number was not
there. The locker numbers were in correct order on either side of
this position, but one whole bank of lockers was now different.
The locker key I had looked exactly like all the other keys in the
other lockers in that major number
series, but the locker I wanted by
number was gone. Its number was on
my key.
I went to the locker manager in the
terminal and explained my dilemma,
and was told that the lockers were a
concession, and that the concession-
aire did occasionally change lockers
for his own reasons, and that, yes,
some had been changed just last week.
That ended my contact with this
story, except that I had the two-hour
videotaped interview with the mysteri-
ous Connor O'Ryan.
My house was again searched sev-
eral times, but that tape was never found because, in fact, it had
been in the hands of the Pima County Sheriff's Office ever since it
was recorded, and it was still safe there.
About the Author:
Wendelle Stevens is a retired Lt Colonel who served as a
US Army Air Corps test pilot during World War II and then
worked out of the Flight Test Division of the Air Materiel
Command at Wright Field, Dayton, Ohio. His duty desk was
in the Foreign Technology Division of the Air Technical
Intelligence Centerthe office out of which UFO-related Air
Force projects Sign, Grudge and Bluebook were eventually
formed. In 1947 he took part in the Ptarmigon project to map
the entire Arctic land and sea area, and record all anomalous
phenomena, even evidence of UFO activity.
From thereon, Wendelle Stevens began amassing what is
now arguably the largest collection of UFO photographs in
the world. He retired from the US Air Force in 1963 and has
pursued his UFO interests ever since, contributing articles to
many UFO magazines, both US and foreign, and giving lec-
tures internationally. He has accumulated reams of data from
his own investigations of sightings reports over the years.
Stevens is not affiliated or aligned with any particular UFO
organisations and continues his research at his own expense.
At the QUFON 1997 Australian International UFO
Symposium, held in Brisbane during October, Wendelle
Stevens 'went public' for the first (and last) time with Connor
O'Ryan's story, at the same time showing segments of
O'Ryan's videotaped statement. Wendelle mentioned that he
actually received death threats over the phone as he was
preparing to leave the USA to come to Australia to deliver this
presentation.
NEXUS 25
 UFOs & EBEs
M ORE I NSIDER E VIDENCE

S
ince my new book, Glimpses of Other RealitiesVolume II: High Strangeness,
was released to nationwide US bookstores on April 1, 1998, I have heard from
several ex-military and ex-intelligence people from around the country. They say
the documents and military voices in my new book have true information about
United States Government knowledge and cover-up of non-humans interacting with Earth.
And a month ago, in May, I was put in phone contact with a man I will simply call
"Kewper" to protect his identity at his request. Kewper served as a First Lieutenant with
This testimony from the US Army Signal Corps and was a CIA administrator at an Army base in the southeast-
ern USA from 1957 to 1960. He provided his DD-214 and Certificate of Discharge along
a former US Army with a 1956 newspaper article about his being drafted. That civilian name and Army
Signal Corps and Signal Corps base of operations were consistent with the Army discharge papers.
I would name the Army base, but as you read further you will see that Kewper was
CIA officer is the asked by a government watchdog to withhold that information in order to protect current
CIA-sensitive and classified operations out of the same base in 1998.
latest to confirm Back in the 1957 to 1960 period, Kewper taught radio operations and cryptography to
Army Signal Corps officers under a false identification assigned to him by the CIA. The
that the US head of that Signal Corps school had worked for the Office of Strategic Services (OSS)
during World War II. The OSS became the Central Intelligence Agency in 1947. In addi-
government and tion to teaching, Kewper's CIA boss at the Army base asked Kewper to help analyse Top
Secret cases gathered for the Air Force's Project Blue Book investigation of unidentified
military are flying objects.
withholding the When I first talked with Kewper a month ago, he said his security oaths expired 30 to
35 years after he got out of the Army and CIA in 1960. So that period ended around
facts about 1995. Therefore, he said, he now feels he's not doing anything wrong by discussing with
me his extraordinary first-hand knowledge and experiences concerning "extraterrestri-
extraterrestrial craft als"as he said they were referred to in the Top Secret classified files he'd read and
analysed. However, a month ago he was not certain he wanted to go on the public record.
and biological On Saturday, May 30, I called him again to ask if he might now be willing to do a radio
interview as long as his real civilian name was withheld. Since 1993 I have been report-
entities. ing science and environmental news for the nationally syndicated Chancellor Radio
Broadcasting Network. Kewper surprised me when he immediately said, "I'm afraid your
phone is tapped." He'd had a call on Monday, May 25 from a man who did not explain
who he was or for whom he worked, and did not address Kewper by name but simply
started talking. And this is what Kewper told me on the record, under the condition that I
edit out subjects that the unidentified caller said were still sensitive. Those edits are indi-
cated by parenthesis notes in the following interview first broadcast on the North
American syndicated radio programs Dreamland, on May 31, 1998, and Coast to Coast
AM Hosted by Art Bell on all-night radio, June 1-2, 1998:

by Linda Moulton Howe 1998
LMH Productions
PO Box 21843
Albuquerque, NM 87154, USA
Fax: 0011 1 505 797 7908
E-mail: earthfiles@earthfiles.com
Website: http://www.earthfiles.com
Howe: You answered the phone and they said...?
Kewper: Yeah, they didn't repeat my name. They just said: "We understand that you
had a conversation with somebody in Pennsylvania in regards to classified materials that
had been classified, and we would appreciate it if you didn't bring up the fact in an inter-
view or television interviews in regards to [Army base name deleted] that you had men-
tioned on the telephone, and also about anything going on in the [CIA aerial logistics
deleted] or anything in regard to that. We would really appreciate it because reporters and
just interested people, if it gets aired, may try to get into the classified area thereand, of
course, to their own physical harm."

26 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 Howe: They did not say that you could not talk about the six- states like Oregon or Washington or Utahsomewhere out in that
fingered humanoid film? area.
Kewper: No; nothing like that. Howe: You mean someone just happened to be filming?
Howe: Well, then, could we do an interview today? Not for Kewper: Yes. Someone was trying a brand new camera and
name attribution but to put you on the radio as a person who they were filming this power plant. First, the mountainous areas
servedand you can tell me how you want it describedand around, and then they were over to this power plant. The power
who saw this film, and you could try to give me the year. Can we plant had a smokestack and had some smoke going on up. And a
do that? little ways away from where the smoke was going up, we started
Kewper: Yeah, I guess so, as long as I don't bring up anything seeing little white, round...like a little piece of a cloud. It got
about... more and more dense, and more and more round. And pretty soon
Howe: So you were getting the reports that Project Blue Book you could see little tiny windows around the bottom section. I'm
was collecting; that they were allowing to the public only those just using "windows" as a term loosely. It developed more and
they were explaining. You were actually handling the files that more, and pretty soon it looked real silver, and soon it started fly-
were unexplained? ing off by itself, slowly.
Kewper: Yes. Probably not all of them, but at least we were Howe: So you had on film, in Central Intelligence Agency
one of the groups investigating the unexplained. I know when work, we'll call it an actual materialisation of what appeared to be
they closed down Project Blue Book they said they had found a hard, silver disc that literally just emerged from what looked
absolutely nothing as far as what they did in like a vaporous cloud?
Project Blue Book that wasn't explained. Kewper: Yes; just a little ways from a
And that was actually true because anything cloud emitted by the smokestack. So we
they didn't explain would be sent to Fort thought at that time that these aliens must
Belvoir in Virginia and then farmed out have some way of materialising or travelling
from there to other military. The FBI was from one area to another and materialising,
involved with some of the things, too, I by using the current that was down in the
know, because FBI would show up on some So you had on film, in power plant somehow to change the electric
of these peoples' doorsteps. Central Intelligence currents...into something electromagnetic or
Howe: What were the years that you something solid, like solid material.
were personally working in the CIA and Agency work, we'll call it Howe: Now, how was the autopsy/dissec-
handling these highly classified reports relat- an actual materialisation tion of the six-fingered humanoid film pre-
ed to the UFO phenomenon? sented to you? What was the explanation of
Kewper: 1957 to 1960. I was in the ser- of what appeared to be a how this had occurred?
vice starting in 1956, but I didn't get Kewper: They just said that this was
involved with this in the first year, you
hard, silver disc that done at Roswell, the same day or day
know. literally just emerged afterthe same, I thinkthe craft was
Howe: And your rank was what and picked up at night; that some time dur-
in which military branch?
from what looked like a ing the next day this autopsy was per-
Kewper: I was in the Army and a vaporous cloud? formed there at the military base, and
First Lieutenant. I was still actually in also an autopsy was performed in town
the Army Signal Corps, but I also in the little clinic or hospital they have
worked for the CIA, too, because I was there.
getting two paychecks. I was getting Howe: Now that would contradict
one from the CIA and one from mili- the statement released with the autop-
tary service. sy/dissection film by the alleged cam-
Howe: Now, in the course of this eraman who said he was there and
work from 1957 to 1960, did you see filmed the wreckage and the beams that
any 16-mm films related to this phe- had the symbols, and that about two
nomenon? weeks later, I believe, he was asked to go to some place to film
Kewper: In regard to UFOs in Roswell, you mean? the autopsy dissection. Do you know how to reconcile these two
Howe: Right. pieces of information?
Kewper: The only film I saw is the one that has been released Kewper: No, I don't, because we were toldit mentioned
in the last couple of years showing an alien autopsy. I saw that right in the filmthat it was done in New Mexico, that most of
very same film in 1957. the film was done right there at the military base outside of
Howe: And what were the circumstances in which you saw Roswell and that some little parts of the film were done at the
this? local hospital or clinic.
Kewper: It was in regard to studying UFOs, in working up and Howe: And what was the briefing to you about these six-fin-
going through and trying to cover or investigate some of these gered humanoids? How were they described? Was there any
folders we had in regard to the different sightings. Apparently information?
someone at Fort Belvoir, Virginia, sent that film to my boss. The Kewper: There was little info in regards to that. The film was
team viewed the thing one Saturday morning and he had to send it about 10 years old at that time, and they just said this was the only
right back to Fort Belvoir again. But we did see that one. And film that we have of the aliens and the body. There are pictures
we also saw several other at that time highly classified UFO sight- that have been taken by different private people showing these
ings on film. We had one film showing a UFO actually develop- aliens walking around outside their craft, something like that, but
ing or materialising over a power plant out in one of the western this is the only film that we have that shows a close picture of the

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 27

aliens and exactly what they look like. So, if you run across any threat; and they were working under that assumption to try to
more of these sightings that people have sent in that describe this increase the different radar around the country more so that they
particular being, then you can match them up according to this. could detect if they were coming in from outer space and be able
Howe: Was the film you saw in black and white or colour? to get some type of scrambling from the Air Force's nearest base
Kewper: It was black and white. to check it out or shoot them down or whatever.
Howe: And did you ever see any colour film or photographs of Howe: Were you ever given a briefing or exposed to any other
these beings? information between 1957 and 1960 beyond that screening of the
Kewper: No, not of the beings. The only coloured film I autopsy/dissection film?
remembered seeing was of that spaceship materialising. Kewper: I would say no, not during that time. We just had the
Howe: Now, you were working for the CIA and this was tan- various foreign, a few domestic, but mostly foreign sightings that
gential to Project Blue Book. How were you shown this film? we had gone over. We had people overseas who would go and
What were the screening conditions? Were you in Washington? interview these people who had photographs of aliens outside of a
Were you in the South? saucer, but nothing at that time. Basically I saw just the film of
Kewper: Yeah, they sent this down to [location deleted at the autopsy on that particular being; but, like I mentioned, when I
Kewper's request after anonymous phone call referenced in intro- went to Area 51 in 1958 I did see another type of a being where it
duction to this interview] and we looked at the film. Then my was the peaked face, the great big eyes and the little chin that has
boss had to send it right back the next day by a special courier always been termed a "grey", I believe.
they had running between Fort Belvoir and CIA headquarters. Howe: Okay, can you describe that experience?
Howe: How many of you were there? Kewper: We were out there for a meeting of all the CIA peo-
Kewper: About 20 of us. There were 26 people involved alto- ple around this country and over towards the Far East and so on,
gether in our group, and I would say that about 20 of us saw it. and we had the meeting there at Area 51. We were involved with
Some were overseas at the time. A lot of the UFO pictures that this Project Blue Book thing and they wanted the meeting there, so
we got were not from the United some of us involved directly with it
States; they were European, Central there were only five of us that went
American, Mexican, and South from [name of Army base deleted]
American sightings of UFOs. One and we were the only five that had the
was an Italian film. So I believe we meeting out there. They had meetings
got it down there at the CIA because
While I was there, the whole right in the main buildings of the Air
the CIA had facilities in all these for- three years, we never saw any Force, a little base they had there.
eign countries to be able to try to veri- Howe: At Nellis AFB in Nevada.
fy some of these things; because we information about where they Kewper: Yes. But we went out to
had men in all the different parts of came from and what they Groom Lake area and the two areas
the world. they had out there. They showed it to
Howe: So this was your first visual were doing here. us, but only to us and not to the CIA
sort of experience with something people from the Far East or from
non-human. Do you remember what Central America. They didn't go out
you thought at the time? there; it was only the five of us. We
Kewper: Yeah, I was kind of per- landed at Area 51 at the main landing
plexed. I thought: How can this be? How can these beings come strip. Then we got into a van-type of small minibus. After that,
here? How can they be completely different from man? we didn't stop to get into any other buildings there.
Howe: But sort of resembled us in a humanoid-shape way. They took us down about 10 miles away, something of that
Kewper: Yes, they did; they did resemble us. That particular nature, and stopped at the first special area. And they took us into
alien, the six-fingered alienyou might say it didn't resemble us the area there, and they had U-2s and also the SR-71 Blackbirds
completely, but it looked like a miniature man with a smaller I believe they were flying them at that time. We were there a
head, but it wasn't the great big narrow face with the big eyes. It short period of time, and then we got back on the bus and went
didn't have ears like we have; it had a little circle around a hole about another eight miles to the third and final area where they
inside of its skull. The ears didn't look like [ours]. The nose had highly classified material. We stopped there and went into an
looked basically like [ours] and the mouth was much smaller. office area first, and then a colonel there met us and took us on a
Howe: Do you remember if this film was shown to you in tour. He took us first of all down a walkway into a hangar area
1957, 10 years after 1947? Was there any knowledge then among that had been carved out. It might have been a natural cave to
the intelligence agencies from any communication with these start out with, but at least it was carved out of the mountainside
beings about what their origin was? area. It was not extremely large.
Kewper: Nothing really. While I was there, the whole three Howe: Was this the Papoose mountain range?
years, we never saw any information about where they came from Kewper: I wouldn't really know. I don't think I ever ques-
and what they were doing here. Nothing was ever brought out in tioned what the mountains were.
regards to that. My boss and I were both wondering about that: Howe: Okay, but so I am clear, this is a colonel who is joining
Why were they here? Why would they come here? And where you and your CIA boss and three other CIA men in your pro-
were they from? During that period of time, as far as I know, the gram?
government had no idea where they were from or what they were Kewper: Yes.
trying to do here. Howe: Were there only six of you?
Howe: From a military and CIA point of view, were they con- Kewper: Yes. As we passed through different areas, naturally
sidered a threat? there were other workers and scientists working on different
Kewper: Not really a threat, but there was a questionable things, and office personnel.

28 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 Howe: And did you understand what the reason was that your
boss was having you go to have this tour by this colonel?
Kewper: Yes. They wanted us to see the craft so when we
looked at pictures, trying to identify fake pictures from the real
thing, this would be a help to us. That was the main reason why
we were toured through the area to see the different types of craft,
so we could pick out the [hoaxed] "garbage can covers" from the
real craft.
Howe: So the six of you, with the colonel, your CIA boss,
yourself and these three other CIA men involved in this project,
you're going, literally moving, walking into a carved-out area of a
mountain?
Kewper: Yes.
Howe: Can you describe exactly what you saw?
Kewper: As soon as we got in, the first thing we did see were
two small craft.
Howe: What colour were they?
Kewper: They were silver, kind of a silver finish to them; not
real shiny and bright, but basically silver.
Howe: What was the diameter?
Kewper: About 18 or 20 feet. They were quite small.
Howe: Were you allowed to go over and touch them?
Kewper: No. We were on a
walkway area and couldn't get down
over to where the craft were actually
sitting.
Howe: And how many others
could you see? He just stated that these are
Kewper: At least about seven, I
think. There were some larger ones some of the [alien] craft we
that were in the rear towards the end have picked up and captured
that we could see down there because
they were probably 50 to 60 feet in in different parts of the world.
diameter.
Howe: Could you see any charac-
teristics on these? Were any differ-
ent from another?
Kewper: They were all disc-
shaped, but some had larger bottom areas that extended down the
same as the top, the top extending up. And they were in different
colours. The larger ones in the rear were a real deep, real dark
grey colour, and some of the other ones were lighter in colour, but
maybe like a light- or medium-brown type of thing. The larger
ones in the rear had real large top units and large bottom units to
them and were sitting on metal saw-horses to hold them up off the
ground.
Howe: And did the colonel try to explain, or did he have
knowledge or any understanding of the propulsion system of the
extraterrestrial craft?
Kewper: That question was asked, and he mentioned it was
electromagnetic/antigravitational-type engines. But some of the
craft had other propulsion systems also, but he didn't go into great
detail on other propulsions. Apparently it was like antimatter
propulsion on one of the units, something of that nature.
And I saw they'd tried to reverse-engineer one craft, so part of it telepathically. The colonel had more terms added to it other than
was taken apart. They were trying to figure out how it works, and
he was explaining to us that there really was no physical motor in
that thing. The entire disc was like an electronic circuit, and the
aliens had to be inside of this disc to complete the electronic cir-
cuit to make it fly. The Area 51 people knew that, because they
had tried to make that one fly. It was just like a battery electrical
unit; it worked with antigravitational/electromagnetic drive, but
the whole saucer itself was like the drive of the ship. It was all
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
coated with nickel inside and it was like a giant circuit, an elec-
tronic circuit. And it took the aliens to complete the circuit
because they were tied right in with it: they had headbands they
wore that had detectors on, and they had finger-type board control
where they could fly the craft.
Howe: Those are the hand-imprinted, six-fingered control pan-
els that were with that autopsy film?
Kewper: Yes.
Howe: And did you see the panels themselves actually there
with the craft?
Kewper: Yes. They were there with the craft. They were try-
ing to figure out the electronic circuitry because there was no
wiring of any kind that they could see. But later on when they
had it at Groom Lake, they had a couple of scientists there who
used microscopes to check over the fingertip-control harnessing
and found little fibres going out from it. They found out then that
it was a fibre optic type of electrical transmission throughout the
craft.
Howe: All done with light.
Kewper: Yes, it was light. The report I read originally said
that when they looked inside the craft it was glowing with a real
thin light inside from all the circuitry fibre optics. Reverse-engi-
neering of that is apparently where
we got fibre optics from.
Howe: What was the colonel
saying to you about these discs in
relationship to where you were
going next?
Kewper: He just stated that
these are some of the craft we
have picked up and captured in
different parts of the world.
Apparently some of them were
even brought in from overseas
from some point or other, but I
gathered that most were captured
within the US. He then men-
tioned that we were going back
out to the general office area and another smaller hangar area to
see the being, this extraterrestrial being, that they had there at that
time.
Howe: Try to walk us through what happened next.
Kewper: Okay. We went from the hangar area where the
saucers were, out to a covered walkway area and into an office
complex, I would call it, because it was a bunch of small rooms
and offices. They had a special room for viewing that had one-
way windows in itone-way mirrors, rather. We could look
through the window into this small office, and the being that was
in there was not able to see us through the mirror because there
was a mirror on his side.
Howe: And what happened?
Kewper: They said we could go in and talk to this being, and
at that time I chose not to go in. Years later, I wished I had, but I
chose not to go in because they did tell us that the being spoke
telepathically, but the being wouldn't speak in any manner that we
could hear through our ears. So I chose to stay out, and the other
four people did go in.
Howe: Your boss, the three other CIA guys and the Colonel
Jim?
Kewper: Yes.
Howe: Now, can you describe the being exactly, from your
watching this and listening?
NEXUS 29
 Kewper: What the colonel called him was a "grey". He had Back in those days, that type of thing was just beginning with
the large head and bigger eyes, kind of slanted bigger eyes. He computers. He said it didn't sound like a human voice: it sounded
looked like he was wearing sunglasses because the lenses were like an electronic voice.
real dark. He had kind of a slim face down to a peaked chin with Howe: Neither male nor female?
just a little nose area, a tiny slit of a mouth and just holes in the Kewper: Neither one, sort of in between.
side of his head for ear openings. Howe: Why would the concept of a telepathic-communication
Howe: About how tall? being bother you?
Kewper: About five feet, something like that. Kewper: Well, naturally, it's something I'd never run across
Howe: What was the surface of the skin like in colour and tex- before; that would be a certain amount of bother, you know.
ture? Howe: Did you ever learn in your work for the CIA what the
Kewper: Yeah, it was greyish looking, but it looked fairly relationship was between the six-fingered beings and the grey
coarse, not like the smoothness of our skin. being?
Howe: Now what happened between your boss, the three CIA Kewper: Nope, never did.
guys and Colonel Jim in that room communicating with the Howe: Did someone explain why this being was even being
being? kept there?
Kewper: My boss did ask him, "What are you doing here? Kewper: No. They wouldn't tell us why he was kept there,
And why do you come here?" The only answer he got was, "We how long he had been there or anything like that. I think one of
are not here to conquer the Earth. We are not here to destroy any- the answers was, "We can't talk about that." I believe that was the
thing. We are here to add knowledge to humans so they can gain main answer.
more knowledge in different areas." Howe: And who at Area 51 seemed to be
He [the CIA boss] said it was probably in control of this being? Which agency?
like a 16- or 20-letter name where he was Kewper: It was the Air Force, actually.
from, but he couldn't remember what the The Air Force colonel is the one we talked
being said. After he came out and we left, I to.
asked him and he said, "I don't remember Howe: Did this colonel or anybody
what it was, but it was a real long name that explain to you what their perception was of
he had given us as far as where he was this grey being from the standpoint of
from." He'd asked if it was a part of the "We are not here to whether there was any kind of a threat?
galaxy or if that was his planet. He said the conquer the Earth. We Kewper: No, they didn't really consider it
being answered back to him that it was part like a big threat, but there was always this:
of a galaxy he was from. Not our galaxy, are not here to destroy "We don't know for sure, but we don't think
but a different galaxy.
Howe: A different galaxy?
anything. We are here they are going to be harmful to us, but we
don't really know for sure. We can't say for
Kewper: Yes. to add knowledge to sure that they are not trying to invade,
Howe: When the being had humans so they can or checking us all out and checking out
"telepathed" to your boss that it wasn't our military." Because even at that
here to hurt anything but to impart gain more knowledge time, the saucer sightings were always
knowledge, how would they impart in different areas." around classified areas and any military
knowledge to us if they weren't making bases, that type of thing. So it looked
themselves public to the Earth in a almost like they were scouting, you
straightforward way? know.
Kewper: I remember my boss Howe: By the time you left the
mentioning that when he said that, he Army Signal Corps and CIA in 1960,
denoted the creature was stretching the did you have any further briefings
truth or lying just by the tone of the about the beings, and were they referred
answer, this type of thing; that he wasn't to as "extraterrestrials"?
telling the truth altogether, you know. Kewper: Yes, they were referred to
Howe: Did your boss and the other as "extraterrestrials". Most of the time
men explain to you how the telepathic process went? What did they referred to the one out there as a "grey".
they experience? Howe: The one at Area 51?
Kewper: They said they definitely weren't hearing a thing Kewper: Yes. They just referred to it as a "grey".
through their ears and that the voice they heard more or less was Howe: Did they have any live six-fingered humanoids any-
right in the mind itself. They could put their fingers in their ears where?
and they would still hear the being. One tried that; he plugged Kewper: No, not that I know of. That was one of the ques-
both ears to see if he could still hear the being, and he could. tions I asked the military man on the way in thereif this was the
Howe: Oh, you could see through the glass that one of the men same kind of being. He'd mentioned they had a being that we
actually put his fingers in his ears? were going to look at, and I asked if it was the same being as
Kewper: Yes, to see if he was actually hearing the being, and Roswell. He said no. And I asked if they had any beings like at
he wasn't, but he just heard what the being said right in his mind. Roswell, and he said no.
Howe: What was the sound of the being in his mind? Howe: And Roswellfrom your point of view in 1957 when
Kewper: He said the voice almost sounded like an electroni- you were shown the six-fingered humanoid film, did it identify in
cally reproduced voice. And now, of course, we have computers the introduction where exactly the six-fingered humanoids had
that can talk to us and answer the phone with a computer voice. been retrieved from?

30 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 Kewper: They just said "near Roswell".
Howe: But they didn't specify?
Kewper: No, no. They didn't specify if that was the craft they
had captured near Roswell; they didn't specify that. They just said
"near Roswell", and I understand they had two or three craft they
had picked up there that same summer of 1947.
Howe: Did anyone talk about the weather balloon story as
being deliberately floated to obscure...?
Kewper: Yes, they did, and they said it was a cover story. The
weather balloon was a cover story.
Howe: To cover up the fact that extraterrestrials and craft were
retrieved.
Kewper: Yes. And I asked them why they covered this up.
This was 10 years later...
Howe: In 1957?
Kewper: Right, in 1958 [while visiting Area 51]. I asked him
[Colonel Jim], "Why do you continue to cover this up?" Well, he
said it was covered originally because the Cold War was just
starting and somebody up in the governmentI'm sure it was
probably President Trumanhad requested a tight cover on this
because with the Cold War starting and now having aliens flying
around, he thought it would be too much for the American public
all at once. But it was perpetuated, and even to this day they are
still covering it with balloon stories.
Howe: Now it is 1998. This is 40
years after you first saw the 16-mm
black and white film of the six-fin-
gered humanoid dissection, and there
still appears to be a policy of silence I know that we have worked
and denial about this extraterrestrial together with
interaction. Why do you think the
government has not told the United and that Russia is involved with
States and the world what they
know?
particle beam weapons, too,
Kewper: You would think they from satellite and from ground.
would have by now. But I know that
at the same time through the Cold
War era back in the 1950sI was
involved with itthe CIA in a lot of
cases in regards to these unidentified flying objects did contact
and work with even the Russians during that time of the Cold War
to see what they had, because the Russians had contacted us in
regards to UFOs as they had UFO sightings also. They contacted
us because they thought it might be some kind of advanced flying
craft that we had, and they were calling us to warn us to keep
them out of their area because they thought they were our craft.
We told them they were not ours.
Howe: If Russia and the United States were secretly trying to
talk with each other about an extraterrestrial presence, did you
ever have any further information over the last 40 years about
what our government's understanding of the agenda or intent of
these beings is by now?
Kewper: I know that we have worked together with Russia on
this, especially since the Gorbachev thing and we became more
friendly; and that Russia is involved with particle beam weapons,
too, from satellite and from ground. We had actually given them
the particle beam weapon to be able to shoot down any of the
saucer craft.
Howe: But why would we try to shoot down craft if we per-
ceived these beings to be benevolent?
Kewper: Well, it could be something that happened since that
time. I believe it would have happened over the [former] Soviet
Union because I know they had a big craft go over that was
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
almost like a mother ship, and they tried to shoot it down but the
thing just shot all the aircraft that they had pursuing it, right out of
the air in just a few seconds, with whatever lasers or whatever
they [alien craft] haddeath rays, something like that.
Howe: What is the source of your information on this?
Kewper: This is through my friend, through my boss's son.
When he talked to me in 1993 he mentioned that they'd had an
ugly incident there where the aliens had actually attacked some
type of a military base from where they had sent the planes up to
attack [the mother ship].
Howe: Did you ever learn what type of being was in that craft?
Kewper: No, I didn't. Nobody did. It was a flyover-type thing
and nothing landed, so no one would know what was actually in
there. But I know the big craft contained many small saucer craft;
it was almost like an aircraft carrier, like we would have with air-
planes on it.
Howe: So, in summary, you went from 1957 to 1960 seeing
these highly classified reports about extraterrestrial beings, tech-
nology and craft. You actually saw 16-mm black and white
autopsy/dissection film of the six-fingered humanoid when you
were in the CIA. You actually went to Nevada, to Nellis AFB
and Area 51, where you personally saw at least seven different
craft and the live being that was described as a "grey" with large
black eyes and was different from the six-fingered humanoid.
And yet, when you left the Army
Signal Corps and CIA work in 1960,
there was still no understanding about
the relationship between those beings
or why they were there.
Russia on this... Kewper: Yes, that's right; one-
hundred-per-cent right. At that time
there was a question mark, a big ques-
tion mark as to why they were here.
In some casesapparently some of
the US sightingsthey were tremen-
dously friendly.
Howe: Were friendly?
Kewper: Yes, were friendly. And,
of course, there were all the abduction
things that came out later. There weren't any in that original Blue
Book file that I had seen at that time in Blue Book. I know there
were quite a few later that said they were abducted.
Howe: And did you ever see any references to animal mutila-
tions or unusual deaths?
Kewper: Yes. At that time we had it out in Colorado, I think.
I saw some of those. Different parts of the animal were taken like
samplesthe stomachs in some, sex organs in othersand [the
animals were] apparently mutilated with a laser weapon of some
kind that left very precise cutting edges.
Howe: Did you read about any such cases in that 1957 to 1960
time period?
Kewper: Yes, especially from Colorado.
Howe: Even back then?
Kewper: Yes.
Howe: And was there speculation on the part of the Central
Intelligence Agency or the military about the relationship between
these unusual animal deaths and the extraterrestrials?
Kewper: Yes. The only thought at that time, if I remember
correctly, is that they [extraterrestrials] were taking samples of
these various animals on the Earth just to see more or less what
their different functions were...
Howe: Do you think that this story should be told in its entirety
today?
NEXUS 31
 UFOs & EBEs: More Insider Evidence
Kewper: Yes, I think it should. I think
it would be helpful in explaining it, first of
all. We still have a lot of sightings to this
day and age.
Howe: And this is why you're talking to
me?
Kewper: Yes.
EPILOGUE
After this audiotaped interview was
broadcast on the North American syndicat-
ed radio programs Dreamland and Coast
To Coast AM Hosted by Art Bell, I learned
from Kewper that he'd contacted a phone
company executive in his city to inquire
about the source of the anonymous call to
him on May 25. He was told that the
source was the Wackenhut Corporationa
security operation that works for the
National Reconnaissance Office and other
sensitive military and intelligence agencies
in the United States.
More than 50 years after the 1947
Roswell incident, a major question is:
What do the United States, England,
Australia other American ally government
insidersand, according to Kewper, even
Russiaknow which sustains the
Orwellian policy of silence and denial in
32 NEXUS
which lies are ordered to become official
truth?...as written so strongly in "SOM1-
01, the Majestic12 Group Special
Operations Manual of April 1954":
Any encounter with entities
known to be of extraterrestrial origin
is to be considered to be a matter of
national security and therefore
classified TOP SECRET. Under no
circumstance is the general public or
the public press to learn of the
existence of these entities. The
official government policy is that
such creatures do not exist, and that
no agency of the federal government
is now engaged in any study of
extraterrestrials or their artifacts.
Any deviation from this stated policy
is absolutely forbidden.
What will it take to change this policy
instigated by US President Harry S.
Truman's Executive Order in 1947? What
military-industrial-complex interests are so
vested in perpetuating the suppression, and
why? It seems a right of the entire global
human family to know that we are not
alone in this universe, and that extraterres-
trial biological entities and other-dimen-
www.nexusmagazine.com
sional entities have been interacting with
this planet for aeons, affecting our biologi-
cal, social and religious evolutions. But
why?
Note: If any readers readers have more
information, please fax Linda Moulton
Howe in the USA on (215) 491 9842, or
write to her as per details on the first page
of this article.
About the Author:
Linda Moulton Howe is a graduate of
Stanford University, USA, and has a Masters
Degree in Communication. She is a sci-
ence and environmental reporter for radio
and television. Her film documentaries, A
Strange Harvest and Strange Harvests 1993,
explored the worldwide animal mutilations
phenomenon. Her books include An Alien
Harvest, Glimpses of Other
RealitiesVolume I: Facts & Eyewitnesses,
and, most recently, Glimpses of Other
RealitiesVolume II: High Strangeness
(Paper Chase Press, USA.
Ms Howe's investigations have taken in such
diverse subjects as crop circles, the
chupacabras mystery, humanity's hidden
history, and the evidence for UFOs and ETs,
including research into the alleged Roswell
UFO crash fragments and government
knowledge and cover-up of non-human
intelligences interacting with our planet.
STRANGE Times 2006
 CoEVOLUTION
An Interplanetary Adventure
In 1989, Alec
Newald's lifepath
took an unexpected
turn when he was
abducted by a
group of benevolent
aliens for ten days
and transported to
their homeworld.
His amazing
experiences have
great significance
for the future of
humanity and our
galactic cousins.
by Alec Newald 1996-97
Extracted from Chapters 4, 5, 6
of his book
CoEvolution
Published by NEXUS Publications
Mapleton, Qld, Australia, 1997
STRANGE Times 2006
A
lec Newald first contacted us in 1995 about publishing his book,
CoEvolution, describing his incredible ten-day round trip to his abductors'
homeworld, Haven, and the Earth-based controversy it created. We found
Alec's story particularly fascinating; and, having met him and had him speak
at the 1996 NEXUS Conference, we have no reason to doubt his integrity. Here we
publish some intriguing excerpts from his soon-to-be-released book. Ed.
THE EARTH SEEN IN A DIFFERENT LIGHT
I must have gone to sleep almost immediately.
When I opened my eyes again, Zeena was sitting opposite my cubicle.
"Verva," she said. "Did you sleep well?"
"Like a rock," I replied.
"Curious expression," was her reply.
"How long has it been?" I added, enquiring as to the length of my sleep.
"One half of an Earth daytwelve hours," she answered.
"What's 'verva'?" I asked.
"Oh, 'good spirit, fresh energy to you'. It is a greeting we use a lot, like your 'hello',"
she explained.
"What's on the schedule?" I enquired.
"Some more liquid replacement for you," was her reply. "Come on. We have only two
more of your Earth days and there is much to learn if you desire, and quite a few questions
I have for you, too, before I return home."
Zeena appeared most anxious, but how could she be more inquisitive than I? Even
though, I was still reeling from awakening to find myself 'dream-bound' and not back on
Earth as I had expected.
"Her home! Now there's something I'd like to know about," I thought to myself but
realised almost immediately that Zeena would read it.
"About the size of the planet Mars in your system," she replied, right on cue. "But it is
not in the best of health, for our sun is slowly dying and we are being roasted with radia-
tion. We are also losing our atmosphere. We can patch that up to a degree, but not for
ever."
"Doesn't sound good. What are you guys doing about it?" I asked.
"Well, we have been looking for a new home for many of your years. The best bet is
still Earth, but we cannot take your gravity, among other things. That has always been the
major factor but it is also not of the right conformation for us yet. It used to be, but we are
not quite like we used to be."
Zeena hesitated, as if pondering whether to go on with this topic. She chose not to con-
tinue.
"There is every chance that the Earth is about to change in the not-too-distant future,"
was her revised answer.
"Change its conformation?" I enquired, startled.
"It shall mutate to a different density level, as you would understand it. It's no big deal.
It's happening all over, all the time," she replied.
I think she might now have been trying to downplay it all after she noted how panicked
I must have appeared.
"It'll what?" I queried, looking at her in amazement.
"Well, that is another of those long stories I promised to tell you about. It is best we get
comfortable first and you get some fluid intake."
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 33
ANCIENT HISTORY LESSONS FROM THE FUTURE your planet right now. That is not to say there are no other ET
"Now, how shall I start?" Zeena asked. "Perhaps with the races that will not interfere, and that is why you must have your
Elders." wits about you.
"Elders?" I chipped in. "Some of those processes which are occurring, or are about to
"Like the Guardian you have met. They are each many hun- occur, are the direct result of that seeding by our ancient Elders.
dreds of Earth years old and have a very ancient lineage. Their Even the pyramids are ancient legacies left behind by our Elders
ancestors, who are my ancestors, are also very distant ancestors of to help you awaken when the time is right. They are very impor-
yours; at least in part they are. Now do not interrupt!" tant to you, and it is from this front that progress of a most unex-
Zeena headed me off at the pass, even before I could get the pected kind will manifest itself to your race in the not-too-distant
thought out of my head. future.
"This is going to be difficult enough to explain without inter- "All knowledge will be made available to your race in good
ruption. I will make room for questions a little later," she added. time and in accordance with the laws of evolution. There has yet
"These distant common ancestors of ours came to Earth many to be a force artificially manufactured in any universe that my
times, but more important to you was the visit of two million people know of that is more powerful or wiser than this natural
years ago, your time-scale. They were not the first [aliens] to law. Trust me when I say this, for my race knows well the cost of
visit. In fact, they and others have lived in and explored what you interfering with the laws of evolution. We would warn your own
call your solar system for hundreds of millions of years. people, if only those in control would listen. Alas, that approach
"These travellers tidied up some earlier attempts to manufacture appears to have fallen on deaf ears, so we shall now attempt to
a race of humanoids on Earth, the end result being Homo sapiens. pass on the message in a different way.
I will not go so far as to say these ancient "There was indeed a time upon your plan-
ancestors of mine were solely responsible for et, not so long ago in the context of this his-
your race, for that was indeed a joint effort of tory lesson, when a 'force' came down upon
many ETs, all of which at some time have it and did in fact claim it [the Earth] and all
laid claim to manufacturing your race. This upon it as its own. That forceand I know
is not a deliberate lie on their behalfjust a "Some of my ancient you will find this difficult to accept, Alec
slight exaggeration of the facts. Do not inter- [Zeena used my name for the first time]
rupt yet, please. I shall explain all in due Elders stayed with your that force is still among you. It is indeed
course. developing race. Others now a part of all of you, so I suppose you
"In many ways you have manufactured or could say it still does own the planet in
at least fine-tuned your own race, and it con- moved on. From time to some way.
tinues even at this very moment. This is mis- "After this force won your planet, it
takenly called 'evolution'. 'Natural progres-
time there were conflicts realised it would have a continuous fight on
sion of the species' is a fine turn of phrase with other ET races as to its hands, for you were not as you are now.
uttered by one of your kind's more You were well on your way to enlight-
enquiring minds some years ago. It
what was best for one or enment, with a very strong spiritual
was thought by many to explain the the other, just as there base. You were actually almost as
path of evolution, and there is an end to strong as this force itself. It had to
it. But this thinking leaves more ques- are conflicts on your trick you in order to master you, and
tions unanswered than answered, for planet now, among your while you were down it altered your
how and when did a butterfly obtain its make-up, your very structure; your
wings? I shall not pursue this subject own kind." DNA, in fact. It crippled you and
for there are more important things to stunted you, and set you back many
discuss, but no doubt you see my point. thousands of years. It made you into
Perhaps there will be a time at a later what you are today, which is only a
date. portion of the greatness you can be, for
"I will, however, tell you more of you have not yet even fully recovered.
your own race's personal history, for it And if that force has its way, you
is important that you should know your never will!
own past, and that evolution as you understand it is a myth. The "That force is known to most as the 'force of darkness', for it is
changes are never slow but they are always planned. Later I shall indeed the enemy of enlightenment. You will please understand
show you that nothing in this Universepast, present or future in that this is a very simplistic description of a most complex entity.
your time-scaleis left to chance. Forgive me, for I diverge from Even we do not understand it in its entirety. It is in the air that
our chosen path. you breathe and everywhere about you. It has aligned itself to the
"Some of my ancient Elders stayed with your developing race. planet and you. It beats to the pulse of your very planet, for you
Others moved on. From time to time there were conflicts with and the Earth are one and the same. This is one thing your peo-
other ET races as to what was best for one or the other, just as ples do not seem to comprehend, but you can use this union of the
there are conflicts on your planet now, among your own kind. whole to do wondrous things, just as we have.
You must understand that Earth is a very special place. It is very "Unfortunately, most of your kind fight the natural forces of
beautiful and there are many who have desired to own it. I would your wondrous planet. By this I mean you bend them, even break
not go so far as to say this is no longer the case, but you should them, to fit your needs. It need not be this way. If your people
always have your wits about you! Even we, although we do not will just open their minds and hearts to your planet, as many of
wish to own it, would like to live there. But we cannotindeed, your ancient races have done in the past, it will show you the way.
we must notinterfere with the processes that are happening on All is not lost; it just needs to be recalled. Until this is done, we

34 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

have much need for concern. It is not just Earth planet you are
violating as you bend and break Nature in your whims of fancy,
for all of all is connected. This is really very basic knowledge. It
has been ignored because it suits those who would play with
power to ignore it. We and others are indeed benevolent to your
race, as we all are connected, but soon something must be done
before your play does meaningful harm to us all!
"We find that there is a need to teach you more about the dark
forces that permeate you. You would do well by your people if
you take great heed of this lesson and pass on your findings to
those of your kind who would listen. The dark force vibrates at a
level that is compatible with your brainwave patterns. This much
you should already know, but others of your kind have kept it
from you.
"In spite of this, some, like you,
Alec, are building a resistance to
this alien intruder. This is one of
the reasons why you find yourself
thinking differently from the
majority around you. It has
enabled you to see more clearly
the error of your ways and what
must be done. You shall continue
along this path a while longer yet,
and even doubt your own kind
from time to time. Be patient.
This is all I can suggest, as inade-
quate as it may sound. We have
been working on these things with
you for many a year now. All of
your people will find their way
with the passing of time.
"As you find with all afflictions,
they are easier to contend with if
you understand them. I am doing
my best to explain all this to you
in terms you will understand.
Please interject from here on if you do not understand some point,
for we do consider the following to be most important.
"Some on your planet have aligned themselves with this 'force'.
Note I have said 'aligned' and not 'allied', for there is a difference.
Do you understand this? [I nodded.] They have gained much
power from the force, and some are even foolish enough to think
they have it under control. This is nave, of course, as the force or
alien entity is feeding off these people or, rather, feeding off the
conflicts these people create in their bid for wealth and power. As
long as this suits the dark force, it shall continue; for the 'fear'
emotion is what it lives off.
"The easiest way to defeat this force is to remove fear from
your societies. This will, in effect, starve it out. It will then go
elsewhere, looking for easier prey. You see, your human race is
one of the very few that lives with this most unusual thing called
'emotion', which is why the force came here in the first place.
We, too, had emotions once, so I am told, and some are saying we
can now experience them again, thanks to the new breeding pro-
gram we are experimenting with. Forgive me, I digress again.
"You will find some of your kind are trying very hard to har-
ness this most dangerous force. Unfortunately, they do not fully
understand that it is an entity in its own right and that this is a
very dangerous mistake to be making. They think they are play-
ing a game and that they are winning this game. We have tried to
warn your people more than once in the past, but no heed has
been taken. As your people say, 'it is your life'.
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
"The worry we have is that your planet breathes with you, in
harmony even with your thoughts. To attack the people by using
the force in this way is to attack the planet. Be it on your own
heads if you invoke the wrath of your planet. There would be lit-
tle or nothing we could do for your people should that happen.
Perhaps you can help us with this message. We have an idea to
put to you, but that shall keep until another time, for there is still
much to be related on other subjects.
"Your societies, right from the very beginning, have engineered
fear into your lives. Most of it is an artificial fear of society itself;
in other words, you fear your very own laws. Your high priests
from long ago shouted down to the common masses, describing
what wraths would be set upon them if they did so much as dare
to cross the all-mighty gods of
their time. Forgive me if I make
what you call a 'joke' of this, for
these all-mighty gods they
describe were people like me or
the Guardian, whom you have
met. Do you fear me, Alec, from
where you stand?" Zeena asked.
"I feel no fear," was my answer.
"So you see how your masses
were manipulated in our absence
by those who would gain from
it?" she asked again.
"I can see how a lie could fool
the uneducated," was my reply.
"And you think your people are
better educated on this subject
today?" she asked once more.
"If you ask what we know of
God, then perhaps not," I replied.
"Exactly my point," Zeena
stated.
"Zeena" "And so the intimidation goes
on, only you have a hundredfold
the number of laws today. These are not the laws of Nature, how-
ever; just of your manipulators who in turn have been manipulat-
ed by the force.
"The laws of Nature you break every day as you drive to work
in your disgusting machines. It is even more curious to us that
you all know these things but you continue to allow them just the
same. Why is there not a law against it in your society? Does
pollution not kill? Are your people so blind they could not see
what would happen with the proliferation of these strange
machines? You need not answer, for we know the reasons. This
is just, as you might say, an example.
"You will perhaps tolerate our confusion, though, when we fail
to understand what we have observed in your so-called Western
societies in which thousands of your money are spent to save but
one life, while millions of your kind die in other far areas for the
sake of small amounts of this money. Are you not all one people
of the same flesh and blood? For this question, we ourselves do
not have such an answer. Could you perhaps help us in the rea-
soning of this?" Zeena asked, looking at me in a most perplexed
way.
"My own people sometimes embarrass and confuse me. No, I
have no answer to that question," I replied.
"Very well. Why do your people take such time and interest in
a single tree, should it be cut down in your cities, while they allow
large areas of many-years-old trees to be removed from the forests
which are out of their sight? Please take this question home with
NEXUS 35
you to put to others, for we also find this most confusing."
I have since duly completed that request.
Zeena did have some encouraging news. She suggested that the
force would soon feel the weight of an invasion from above, and
there would be battles fought at sea and underwater, and also in
the skies high above. Most would know little about these events,
except those caught within the by-product of the battles. By this
she meant that the Earth would experience storms of gathering
intensity, and where these storms would once have been confined
to the vortex points of our globe (the western Atlantic-Bermuda
area and the western Pacific, south-east of Japan) they would now
appear randomly all over our planet. She did not say who or what
might be behind these battles or be the cause of them. However,
when the way is clear and some
portion of the fear has been
removed, we may indeed see
other races of the Cosmos openly
visiting and interacting with us
here on Earth!
"In the due course of time you
will awaken from this 'sleep' that
the force has had you in, with a
little help from your friends," she
added. "Being a sailor," she said,
suggesting I watched the weather,
"you will know what to look for.
Trust in your instincts."
This is all she was prepared to
say on the subject.
"Your race is nearly strong
enough to fight back and win its
rightful place in this galaxy of
ours. We will help you and your
planet to do great things again, for
we love all life. Even the dark
force is a form of life and we "Elder"
must and do respect it. Do you
understand, Alec? This is very important."
Zeena at last let me have a say.
"Yes, I do. But how do we fight this force if we cannot see it or
know where it is?" I asked.
"It is within your very soul. You fight it with knowledge and
understanding. But only each and every one of your kind can
help yourselves. Nevertheless, to know that it exists is half the
battle, and you can pass on this knowledge to all who should care
to listen. Your race is about to change, become more aware
well, most of you are. It is an unfortunate fact that the ones upon
your planet who truly understand what a great hold this force
known to you as fear has over your people, are the very ones who
are using it against youand always have. They only understand
its power, not its reason for being. That is why we have chosen
this time to explain to you, and others of your kind, what we are
here for. We have come to help enlighten you and, in so doing,
perhaps free you from this force. We also understand that there
will be some among you who will resent this knowledge being
made available and will do their best to belittle and downplay its
importance to your race.
"We may also need things from you and your planet. Call it a
trade if you like, but I would prefer to use the word 'coevolution'.
We both can grow. We both need to change. You will become
more like us, while we need to become more like you. We can
truly become great friends once you learn to break free. We have
been waiting a long time for this to happen, and you, Alec, are
36 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
part of this very special event that will happen, as are many oth-
ers. You will find them and they will find you. Just let it be
known that you are a child of the light, whenever you feel the
time is right. You will be amazed at what will happen from then
on."
As Zeena finished this part of the lesson, I really did not know
what to say. How could I reply to what she'd just said? Her nar-
ration had brought up more questions than answers, and quite
frankly I did not know where to begin. Even though most of what
she'd just said was totally amazing, it was as if I had always
known it was so! For that reason you may think my next question
out of place.
"The thing that worries me the most," I replied, "was your earli-
er comment before this lesson
began about the Earth 'mutating'
into something. Where will that
leave us, the people?"
"You have no fears there. It
will be you, the people, who help
the Earth to transform. You will
already have passed over to the
next level of density, or be in the
act of doing so, which in actual
fact is evolutiontrue evolution,
as it just so happens; not the form
of change that you may have asso-
ciated with that word in the past. I
am sorry, here, because there has
not yet been time to ground you in
that knowledge. The Earth, too,
will evolve along these same
lines, and that is what I meant by
'mutate'. I am sorry for the use of
that word if it has caused you con-
cern," Zeena quickly replied.
"I have more questions," I said,
looking at Zeena and hoping I
could continue to ask them. Her indication was that I could.
"What happened to those early ancestorsthe ones who stayed
on Earth, the ones who helped us in the past?"
"Some of them eventually interbred with your kind, although
there was resistance to this initially. The offspring of these unions
became our common ancestors. All who were pure of our blood
eventually died of an unknown illness or left the planet. Their
life-span should have been many hundreds, perhaps even thou-
sands of your years. Some say they simply died of premature
ageing. There are many possible reasons why this may have
occurred, but it is not necessary for us to discuss that now. The
few who escaped this fate and left Earth are now lost to us; where
they may have gone, my people do not know, for that was indeed
a long time ago. But while we are on the subject of interbreeding,
there are a few questions I would ask of you, if I may," Zeena
requested.
I nodded my approval, knowing I would get more chances to
ask the hundred-and-one questions I was waiting to ask.
Her first question took me a little by surprise.
"Have you bred on your home planet?"
"That's an interesting question," was my startled reply. "By
'breed', I suppose you mean have I any children of my own?"
I couldn't believe she didn't already know the answer to this
question. Perhaps she was just being polite.
"Yes," she said.
"Well, I have a son who is fourteen years old and is fit and
STRANGE Times 2006
healthy. He doesn't appear to have too many problems, except your years. Time is now short, for next will come the changes
that he could be without a proper father from now on." your awakening."
"What do you mean by that?" she asked. She answered my question before I could ask it. There was not
"I was in the process of leaving my family unit permanently much I could do but sit in silent amazement.
when you guys zapped me up here!" I replied. "Don't ask why. "You must realise," she continued, as I couldn't think of any
It's very complicated, and I'm not sure I know the answer any- worthwhile thing to say, "that we are quite a primitive race com-
way." pared to other extraterrestrials that may communicate with Earth
"This breeding process, in the form you Homo sapiens use, I people from time to time. That is one of the reasons we are so
have studied as much as I can from our records, but there is still attracted to Earth and to you as a race. We feel a real kindred or
much I wish to know. I have been selected for a modified repro- bonding for your people. We also think Earth is a most beautiful
ductive process when I return to my home planet. We as a people place."
are running out of time to develop offspring which could survive "Where would you like to live on Earth if you had a choice?" I
on any other planet apart from our own without life-support sys- asked.
tems. By this I mean we have not yet found another world that is "We have an area that we call our own."
compatible with our specific and rather unique needs. I may be Zeena explained to me that they were already using an under-
able to elaborate on this point a little later. For now, it is enough water base in the general area of this land that had been set aside
to say we have few options, and may have to adjust to new envi- for them, although she would go no further in describing where
ronments such as planet Earthwhich we that might be. She was then called away,
still like to call our second home, even promising to return as soon as possible to
though we are far removed from being able continue our conversation.
to live there full time," Zeena finished,
sounding rather distressed. "Oh, we have already had SURVIVAL STRATEGIES
"Our planet is rather full already," I com-
mented, not really wishing to add to her bur-
communication with Upon her return from duty, Zeena was
keen to continue her explanation of what
den. In spite of what I had already witnessed Earth governors on that they were doing and were about to do on the
and been party to, I was in no way prepared subject; since the 1950s, new breeding program, and why it had
for her reply to my statement. become such a priority to her people. In
"Oh, we have already had communication in fact. They know of our order for me to understand, or try to under-
with Earth governors on that subject; since desire and need. We stand fully, another lesson was apparently
the 1950s, in fact. They know of our desire necessary, so she suggested once again that
and need. We have even made a trade, as have even made a trade, I make myself comfortable as it was like-
you might call it. I cannot elaborate on it ly to take some time.
at this time. But not everyone has lived
as you might call it. I "For you to understand the problems
up to their agreements since then." cannot elaborate on it at that we have, it is best that I tell you a lit-
"Why does nobody know of this on tle more about the world you live in.
Earth?" I asked, my eyes wide open.
this time. But not Some of this will be a little hard to under-
"Your various governors, in their wis- everyone has lived up to stand, but some other aspects will ring a
dom, decided that the Earth's general bell when you start to look at them in a
population was not then ready for the their agreements since different light," said Zeena, who was sit-
message and knowledge we had planned then." ting opposite my sleeping cubicle.
to give your people. If you think back to I had just finished another small nap to
the subjects we have recently discussed, make up for my forty-hour marathon
it is hardly surprising, is it? They feel without sleep.
you are still not ready, and we will not Zeena continued. "You will remember
tell your people a half-truth to suit others. some time ago I promised to tell you
So we have this situationwhat do you say?a stalemate," about the other side of yourself. This concerns the cycle of the
Zeena concluded. atom, the part that is still little understood by your people, or,
"What did the governors say when you said you would like to should I say, not yet fully understood by them. When this is
return to Earth at some time in the future?" I asked. understood, a whole new dimension, or dimensions, will open up
"All they wanted were the 'lollies'," she commented, without for you; for in this instant of time between the pulses of atoms lies
expanding on that subject. a world within worlds. They are in fact parallel dimensions to
"There are not that many of us," Zeena continued. Fifteen mil- your ownat least to the one where most of you live your 'now'.
lion is but a small total, is it not, among your billions? And our These dimensions are so close to your real 'now' that you can slip
technology trade-off would make life so much easier for your in and out of them without even knowing you have done so!
population. If I dare be so brave as to say history could repeat There are sometimes little clues that tell you what has just hap-
itself, you may find we interbreed to become one race again, as pened. This dimension-slipping has been going on since you first
happened so long ago in your past histories. walked the Earth, only now it is becoming more common to your
"At this point in time there are still some important things that people. It can happen almost every day to some, but they are
we must physically do here on Earth: some repair work, as it basically unaware of it. This is happening because you are awak-
were; a legacy from the past which I am not permitted to discuss ening to your true selves.
at this time. We must correct that which is in a state of disrepair. "You are close to a major dimension-leap, the like of which you
Just by way of coincidence, that work is now almost completed. have never before experienced; a leap that will bring you closer to
This is no small thing, for repairs have been going on for many of my people. This is what we have all been waiting for! How

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 37

many times have you searched for something in a room and could "I cannot begin to explain the complications we have had. It has
not find it? You go back some time later and there it is, right in stretched our technology to its limits and beyond. The end result
front of your nose; there is no way you could have missed it when is what you see before you now. I may look good to you, but I still
you searched. You see, you are not always where you think you could not live on your planet without our technology to help me
are. The trick is to be fully conscious when you make these mini- constantly. The bottom line is that the process has been too slow,
leaps and be aware of where you have gone. You will be very and up to now has not done the job. At the present rate, it may take
surprised, I think. It is a place not far from there that you will more time than we have to spare on our crippled planet! We now
find us. need to start taking some risks to speed up the process."
"We basically come from your future. It does not matter if it is "What kind of risks?" I asked.
six minutes into your future or six years; if you can get to one, "Well, up until now we have been more concerned with
you can get to the other. But, for us, it is not as simple as that, for preserving our mind-generated energy distribution abilities
we also come from another dimension; not quite the one you will which I don't expect you to comprehend just yetbut now we need
shift into, but close. So we are what you would call dimensional to concentrate on the physical aspects, the strength and endurance,
time-travellers. Sounds like a good movie, does it not? Your Mr even if we lose a little of the other abilities."
Spielberg would love it!" "Become more like us?" I chimed in again.
I had to laugh at that one. "Yes, we must," Zeena replied. "We already have, as you
"Wemyself and others like meare in noticed earlier," she said, with what almost
fact a whole new race, or, to be more accu- appeared to be a smile on her face. This was
rate, a newly reconstituted race. Further the first hint of an emotion I had seen.
modifications are still required before we "Now there needs to be a stepa big
can achieve our goals as a people. This is "We basically come from oneeven further down that road. There is a
one of the reasons for our travel to your time chance for me to become part of that step,"
zone, and, indeed, the reason for others your future. It does not she added. "That is why I wish to ask you
being here who are also experimenting with matter if it is six minutes more questions about your breeding
their biological make-up, although they have processes; procreationwould that be a
far different goals behind their experimenta- into your future or six better word for it?"
tion than we do. "You would be surprised at some of the
"The reason behind so many abductions
years; if you can get to words we use for it," I replied. "Even I don't
occurring on your planet over the last few one, you can get to the know where some of them come from."
years of your time is that this is the last "I understand it is most primitive and basic
chance for our raceand other races of ETs
other. in its natural form. It is possible that I may be
with problems similar to oursto inter- But, for us, it is not as able to be fertilised and to carry the
act with you as a race before you foetus almost full-term within me. That
change to a form that will no longer be simple as that, for we may not sound much to you, but no
of use to us. Yes, it is that close! My also come from another female of our race has carried a child
own surrogate mother was of your time within her for many hundreds of
and race..." dimension; not quite the thousands of years. The artificial
"We could go further back in time, one you will shift into, methods we have been using are too
but it is this now that we need. I will slow and hard to change. They may
not complicate matters by trying to but close ... " even be impossible to use if we settle on
explain that; we would be here for a planet like your Earth.
many more days. My race still has a "I have been designed to take the
problem to overcome. We must breed place of what you would call a synthetic
a race with stronger limbs and oxygen- birth process. There has been quite
processing units." some progress just lately. Even a
"Lungs?" I enquired again. hundred years ago, your time, one of
"Yes. We have been using a mixture of your species' DNA and our type could not have interacted with your species on this level.
chromosomes, along with our own. Our blood used to be very That is how much we have evolved in different directions since the
similar to yoursand still is, with a little modificationalthough early colonists left your planet. Now we find it necessary to take
we really only have one type as you would know it; well, two, but a step in another direction."
they are both very much like your A-negative. We can modify I noted how she diplomatically skirted the suggestion that they
most things, but what it adds up to is that we are not going to go might be going backwards on the evolutionary tree. I could not
looking for problemswe already have enough of them. really understand what knowledge she could want from me, and I
"We have approximately only five per cent of your male popu- doubted there was anything I knew that she did not already know...
lation to work with, notwithstanding health, age, etc. There is a
very special, shall I say, 'X-factor' which must be brought into this
equation, which in fact brings only about one per cent of this Notes:
already small group into our calculationsthat is, if we should NEXUS Magazine published the book, CoEvolution by Alec
Newald circa 1997. The book is the full account of what hap-
require a male to help us. The fact that we are not of the same
pened to Alec during his missing days. To order - mail, phone
vibrational plane is the major problem. This is part of that X-fac- or fax $22- and your address to: NEXUS Magazine, PO Box
tor, and is related to health and disease resistance, biological bal- 30, Mapleton Qld 4560 Australia. Ph: 07 5442 9280; Fax:
ance in relation to birth location, previous adaptability tests, and 07 5442 9381, or use the form on page 239 of this issue.
so on and so on.

38 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 ALIEN ARTIFACTS IN AMERICAN
HANDS IN THE LATE 1930s?
by George A. Filer August 2002
W
illiam E. Jones of the Center for
UFO Studies (CUFOS) writes:
"I thought your readers should be
aware of the Cordell Hull story that alien
artifacts were in our hands in 1939."
In early December 1999, CUFOS
received a letter from the daughter of the
Reverend Turner Hamilton Holt:
"Today I want to share some knowledge
that has been, by request, kept secret in our
family since sometime in World War II.
This concerns something my father was
shown by his cousin Cordell Hull, the
Secretary of State under [US President]
Franklin Roosevelt. My father, who was
young, brilliant and sound of mind, told us
this story because he didn't want the infor-
mation to be lost.
"One day when my father was in DC,
Cordell swore him to secrecy and took him
to a sub-basement in the US Capitol build-
ing and showed him an amazing sight: (1)
four large glass jars holding four creatures
unknown to my father or Cordell; (2) a
wrecked round craft of some kind nearby.
"My father wanted my sister and I to
make this information known long after he
and Cordell were dead, because he felt it
was a very important bit of information.
STRANGE Times 2006
We have researched your group and feel it
is the most reliable group in the country.
We hope that you will research and search
this information. The jars with creatures in
formaldehyde and the wrecked craft are
somewhere!
"Cordell said they were afraid they
would start a panic if the public found out
about it."
"Sincerely,
"Lucile Andrew, Ashland, Ohio"
C ordell Hull was one of the greatest
statesmen of the 20th century, with
absolutely no apparent reason to tell this
story unless it were true, especially at a
time when stories of flying saucers and
their alien drivers had not yet become part
of our culture.
Hull was an elected US Senator
(19311937), was Chairman of the
Democratic National Committee, and
became the Secretary of State under
President Franklin D. Roosevelt in March
1933, the longest-serving Secretary in US
history when he resigned in 1944 because
of ill health. He was also offered the Vice
Presidency and, in 1945, he won the 1945
Nobel Peace Prize.
Reverend Holt and Cordell Hull were
both born in Pickett County and were
cousins and friends. Holt received his
doctorate in theology from Ashland
www.nexusmagazine.com
Theological Seminary, and was a minister
at the Shenandoah Christian Church in
Greenwich, Ohio. He was a community
leader, and he wrote a book entitled Life's
Convictions. He married Vina May Clark
and they had three daughters.
Two of the daughters claim their father
had told them about the "creatures".
Lucile's original letter essentially tells the
story as her father told it to her when she
was a teenager.
Unfortunately, Lucile said that she was
too young really to pay much attention to
what her father told her, but Allenethe
mother of Eloise, the co-author of this
storywas told the same story as her sis-
ter. Both sisters assured us that they
remember the stories independently.
Reverend Holt described the entities in
the glass jars as "creatures", a term com-
mon for his day. He never referred to them
as "aliens" or "extraterrestrials", and he
never said where they came from.
Lucile stated that his experience hap-
pened in the "late 1930s", probably 1939.
The material that was nearby the less-than-
four-foot-tall creatures was described as
"silver metallic". She also remembers he
referred to the material as being a "vehicle"
that appeared to have been taken apart and
was "in pieces". He said the colour of this
material wasn't a colour that he had seen
before, but for the lack of a better word he
NEXUS 39
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
used "silver". Reverend Holt was not the
sort of person to make up such a wild story,
and the sisters feel that by telling the story
they are following their father's wishes.
Barbara A. Wolamin, the curator at the
US Capitol building, chuckled a bit after
being told the story. She said she had
never heard about these creatures being
stored at the Capitol, but she did confirm
that back then there was a sub-basement
that was divided into storage rooms. She
said the building had been significantly
changed over the years. So, in a small
way, part of Reverend Holt's story checked
out.
After Cordell Hull left government
service, he wrote his memoirs in a two-
volume book set. No reference to this story
appears in these pages, among his papers in
the Library of Congress. We contacted
numerous experts and libraries and found
no confirmation for the story.
If four alien bodies and other-world tech-
nology were retrieved in 1939, what would
that do to our interpretation of the US gov-
ernment's involvement in UFO research?
One would assume prior knowledge would
have made the government ready for an
event like Roswell and that the Roswell
retrieval was more efficient because of that.
This is a story that truly deserves further
investigation.
Thanks to William E. Jones, MUFON
State Director for Ohio, Dr Irena Scott and
CUFOS International UFO Reporter.
(Source: By George A. Filer, Director,
Mutual UFO Network Eastern Region,
"Filer's Files", no. 32, August 7, 2002,
website http://www.ufoinfo.com/
40 NEXUS
LEAKED PAPERS SHED LIGHT ON
OFFICIAL SECRECY OVER UFOs
T
he Majestic Documents investigation
team has recently posted a set of four
leaked UFO-related documents to its
website, http://www.majesticdocuments.
com. They arrived anonymously in UFO
researcher Tim Cooper's Big Bear,
California, mailbox in July 2001.
National UFO Intelligence Program
The first document is a two-page Secret
memorandum from President Dwight D.
Eisenhower to the Director of Central
Intelligence, dated November 4, 1953.
The document deals with Eisenhower's
comments on an "MJTWELVE Operations
Plan of June 16, 1953 on the subject of
instructions for the expenditures of the
National UFO Intelligence Program, and,
more specifically, the Special Operations
Instructions to be issued to Unified and
Specific Major Commands and
Commanders". In the memorandum,
Eisenhower:
(a) expresses concern about inflaming
the UFO situation with the Soviets;
(b) reiterates that both the CIA and the
NSA have leading roles to play in the UFO
program; and
(c) confirms that both Dr Robert
Oppenheimer and Professor Albert Einstein
(described as the Director of Project
JEHOVAH) were involved in research
relating to UFO physics.
Both original and replica documents can
be downloaded at:
http://209.132.68.98/documents/pdf/
eisenhower-dci_4nov53.pdf.
www.nexusmagazine.com
UFO Violations of US Airspace
The second is a seven-page document
attributed to the Office of Scientific
Intelligence in 1976. This photocopied
onionskin document is titled "UFO
Sovereignty Over Air Space: A Defense
Intelligence Problem". The document is
signed by "LCR"the initials of an
astronomer attached to the CIA's Office of
Scientific Intelligence in the 1970s.
LCR talks about the way in which UFOs
have violated US airspace on numerous
occasions; the way in which Top Secret
UFO data have been withheld from elected
leaders by the CIA; the recovery of a
crashed UFO in New Mexico in 1947 by
the Armed Forces Special Weapons
Project; the fear of a nuclear confrontation
with the Soviets being prompted by UFO
radar tracks; President John F. Kennedy's
involvement in the UFO controversy;
UFOs and the Cuban missile crisis of 1962;
and LCR's initiative to begin reintroducing
presidential briefings on the UFO subject.
The discussion of organisational slow-
downs, denied information and manage-
ment dilemmas are typical of bureaucra-
cies, irrespective of topic. Such references
in the discussion are consistent with a prag-
matic working document, not for sensation-
alism or public melodrama.
The document in both its original and
replicated form can be downloaded at:
http://www.majesticdocuments.com/
documents/1970-present.html.
UFOs, the CIA and National Security
The third paper is an Executive Briefing
document for the Director of Central
Intelligence, titled "Unidentified Flying
Object: Implication for Nation Security
and Human Survival".
It provides a three-page introduction to a
paper of undetermined length, written by
LCR in December 1976. LCR reveals that
between 1946 and 1955, he compiled infor-
mation on UFOs and the US intelligence
community that was included in his book,
Central Intelligence, UFOs and National
Security, published in 1956 by the CIA. It
reveals the surprising fact that many secret
documents concerning UFO encounters at
Los Alamos and the White Sands Missile
Range in the period 19441949 were
destroyed, and also reveals how this caused
problems in trying to evaluate the true pic-
ture from an historical perspective.
The paper also touches upon the CIA's
role in espionage and UFO investigations,
STRANGE Times 2006

as well as LCR's examination of the CIA's
historical UFO studies.
The original and replica documents can
be downloaded at:
http://209.132.68.98/documents/pdf/
ufo-implicationfornationsecurity.pdf.
Dr Edward Teller Advocates Less
Official Secrecy on UFOs
The fourth paper in the collection, titled
"UFO Technology and the Imbalance of
Power", is attributed to scientist Dr Edward
Teller and is a five-page photocopy of the
onionskin-paper original (~1980s). It goes
into great detail about the nature of official
secrecy and the benefits and hazards of
secrecy both in the Cold War and beyond.
Dr Teller proposes that official secrecy sur-
rounding UFOs should be lessened for
three prime reasons:
(a) to stimulate research in the field of
military applications of UFO technology;
(b) to promote cooperation between the
US and its allies around the world on the
UFO issue; and
(c) to inform the US public of "the true
state of UFO reality".
Dr Teller also proposes that the majority
of classified UFO documents should be
declassified. In addition, he discusses the
use of UFO technology integrated into the
US military's remotely piloted vehicle
(RPV) program, and maintaining an ade-
quate defence against "UFO nuclear
weapons".
The original and replica documents can
be downloaded at:
http://209.132.68.98/documents/pdf/
ufotechnology-teller.pdf.
(Source: From Majestic Documents inves-
tigators Ryan S. Wood and Dr Robert M.
Wood, August 29, 2002, email
rswood@majesticdocuments.com, website
http://www.majesticdocuments.com)
A JOINT MILITARY EXERCISE
WITH ALIENS IN ARKANSAS?
A
n American officer, who wished to
remain anonymous, has affirmed
that aliens took part in a military
exercise that took place in Arkansas, USA,
several years ago.
"There are some things that I cannot talk
about. Yet, I think I can say something."
Airborne troops conducted their exercise
from April 15 to May 5, 1992. The event
took place on the territory of the Fort
Chaffee army base. The exercise was
STRANGE Times 2006
performed under the code name, Operation
Curtain. Special units of airborne troops
from Venezuela, Ecuador, the USA and
Puerto Rico took part in the exercise. The
troops were sent to swamps in a remote
part of the base. They were ordered not to
allow the dummy bridge that was built for
the exercise to be exploded.
"No unit managed to prevent the
explosion of the bridge. Neither the
Venezuelans, nor Americans, nor the
soldiers from Ecuador managed to detect
the 'enemy'. No one could understand how
the saboteur made its way without even
bumping into any of the best units.
Nevertheless, it happened," said the officer.
Commandos from Puerto Rico encircled
the swamp and started waiting for the
"enemy". "A strange noise could be heard
in the distance at about 0030 hours.
Soldiers thought that the 'enemy' had land-
ed on the other side of the swamp.
Everybody was ready to meet them. The
only aspect that we did not know was the
time that it would take for the 'enemy' to
cross the swamp. Before the exercise start-
ed, the commandos were given an order not
to use night vision devices. However, there
was an American sergeant among the
Puerto Ricans who had such a device.
"The soldiers soon heard strange sounds
coming from the other side of the swamp.
The sounds were getting more and more
distinct. Everybody was staring in the
direction of the sound, but no one saw any-
thing at all.
"Suddenly, everyone smelled the strong
smell of the swamp. One of the Puerto
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
Rican officers ran out of patience and
asked the American sergeant to give him
the night vision device. The officer looked
around the territory and he saw three small
creatures. They were visible with the
naked eye. The officer gave the night
vision device to another officer and so on.
Everybody saw the weird 'enemy'.
"The soldiers eventually contacted their
command. The command kept silence for
a long while, and then it was ordered that
they carefully watch the creatures without
bringing harm to them.
"They were like little people, about one
metre high. They looked absolutely white
in the night vision devices. There was
another such creature sitting on a stump, as
if it were watching the crawling ones. At
first I thought that they were wearing some
kind of helmets. But then I realised that
they were not helmets, but their long, egg-
like heads. I could even see their big black
eyes with no eyeballs. It also seemed to
me that they had two little holes instead of
a nose. I did not see a mouth. They had
four fingers on their hands."
The officer also said that a helicopter
arrived soon after and took the "little
people" away. The command strictly
ordered everyone to maintain silence about
the event. The American officer was struck
with what he saw. He did not say anything
about it for two years. Who were those
creatures? What were they doing among
military men? How far did it all go?
(Source: Pravda, September 4, 2002, web-
site http://english.pravda.ru/main/2002/
09/04/35979.html)
NEXUS 41
42 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006
 THE INSTALLATION
An Interview with Valery Uvarov
by Graham W. Birdsall 2003
T
he following extracts were tran-
scribed from a filmed interview
with Valery Uvarov, of Russia's
National Security Academy, conducted
by Graham W. Birdsall, Editor of the
UK-based UFO Magazine. The inter-
view took place at the 12th International
UFO Congress Convention and Film
Festival, held February 28, 2003, in
Laughlin, Nevada, USA.
Graham Birdsall (GB): What is your
official title?
Valery Uvarov (VU): I am head of the
Department of UFO Research, Science and
Technical, National Security Academy,
based in St Petersburg, Russia.
GB: This, then, is an official Russian
government agency?
VU: Absolutely. I am answerable to
two people above me. They are answer-
able to the next person above them, who is
our President [Putin].
GB: What exactly is your remit?
VU: Our research efforts are divided
into two parts. Firstly, we are constantly
analysing data coming in from all over the
world. We then extract what we consider
to be the most interesting information
STRANGE Times 2006
through our databasewhich is yellow, VU: It is not so much a case of belief;
which is red. This, then, is released to vari- we know what caused it. It was a meteor,
ous departments throughout Russia. but a meteor that was destroyed bylet's
The other aspect of our research say, a missile.
stemmed from asking the question: do The missile was generated by a material
UFOs exist or not? For sure, we know they installation. We don't know who
exist, but what is behind their activity, their constructed it, but it was built long, long
interest? This is the most important issue ago and is situated in Siberia, several
for us, and what we mostly focus our hundred kilometres north of Tunguska.
investigations on. I can tell you that our investigation has
GB: There is active co-operation
between NASA and Russian aerospace
officials at a technical, scientific and
maybe even military level. Do you liaise
or have ties with organisations similar to
your own overseas?
VU: I can tell you, truthfully, that just a
couple of days before I flew to the United
States I had a meeting with mylet's say,
my bosses. And they said they are very
interested in co-operating with other organ-
isationslet's say, our friends in the West.
So, I can tell you that this particular mis-
sion is at the starting point. I am charged
with finding the right people. When this is
done, and the next stage is activated, we
can make some concrete steps.
GB: Earlier, off camera, you alluded to
some important developments concerning
the Tunguska explosion of 1908. For the
record, can you tell us why you now Valery Uvarov
believe you know the cause? (Photo courtesy of UFO Magazine, UK)
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 43
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
revealed more than one explosion at
Tunguska. Let me share something with
you. The last time that this installation shot
down a meteor was on 24/25 September
last year. The Americansthey have three
basesthey, too, noticed this explosion.
GB: Forgive me, but some will say this
sounds like science fiction.
VU: Graham, you know that when we
talk about the truths that lie behind this
subject, we only do so with those who have
an understanding of the responsibility that
goes with it. And you know that we are
dealing with a technology much further
ahead of our ownone capable of doing
things that we cannot.
GB: Can you be more specific about the
location of this installation?
VU: Look for the site of the Tunguska
explosion. To the southeast is the very
large and famous Lake Baikal. Beyond
that, to the north, is a huge and barren
territory covering 100,000 kilometres.
Hardly anyone lives there. There are no
towns or cities. Here is where we located
the installation
GB: Are you aware of strange stories or
rumours concerning the so-called "Planet
X"? If some new and heavenly body had
entered our solar system, astronomers
would surely detect it and declare its
presence.
VU: I cannot speak for astronomers in
the West, but astronomers within our
Academy tell us we have nothing to fear. I
have heard people talk about a rotation fig-
ure of 3,600 years for this planet, which is
in a similar orbit to that of the Earth but
behind the Sun. We know that this planet
44 NEXUS
and the installation in Siberia are closely
connected. Let me say that we believe that
this installation is keeping that planet in a
stable orbit. If that planet were to move, to
shift orbit, the entire solar system would
become unstable. Those of us in the
Academy are sure that this planet is inhab-
ited, and that this installation is designed to
protect them and us. We are sure that noth-
ing dangerous will happen. Everything is
under control.
Our investigations have shown that the
Earth has a pulsea finely tuned
frequency that affects everything, every
living thing. Some 12,500 years ago, this
pulse corresponded to 360 days of the
yearstudy the old Egyptian calendar
but then an asteroid struck the Earth. We
believe the orbit of the Earth was altered,
artificially, to compensate for this. Our
planet moved further away from the Sun, to
a frequency pulse of 365.
This has taught us to believe that we
have friendsfriends who watch over us,
silently. They did not allow then, nor will
they allow now, any planet, comet or aster-
oid to strike and destroy the Earth. This,
for us, is now absolutely clear.
Those who wish to weaponise spaceto
tell you the truth, all of us involved in this
project feel a pain in our hearts. Here we
all are, investigating this installation and
some other stuff, material stuff, none of
which was constructed by Russians or
Americans but by someone else, someone
from outer space. It saddens us when we
think what could happen if weapons are put
into space.
Let me speak frankly. This installation
has a power sys-
tem, an energy
source. We have
located this. It was
during the conflict
in the former
Yugoslavia that we
first noticed an
increase in the out-
put of that energy.
For us, it was
incredible, but we
now know that this
installation reacts
to social upheaval
and conflict.
Part of our
investigation
involved searching
through ancient
www.nexusmagazine.com
records and archives, and then we came
across the Echutin Apposs Alanhor [sic]
texts. We call them the Alanhor, and they
are at least 4,000 years old. They describe
the installation, in scientific terms, as to
what was taking place there. It's amazing.
I have visited the area twice. The first
time our equipment detected strong levels
of radiation. I have to tell you, it was
pretty dangerous; we couldn't hide from it.
The few local inhabitants of the area knew
of the installation, of course, and they
described it to us. They describe metal-like
structures and drew them for us. We
plotted everything on a map. But these
people, their families, the animals, they
were suffering from radiation sickness.
The radiation levels have been continu-
ously monitored for the past six years, and
now everyoneincluding the animals
has left the forest.
Let me tell you something about the
Tunguska explosionsomething that has
never been spoken of before. Two months
before the explosion, every living animal
fled the region. It was as if the installation
had powered up to deal with the asteroid.
With that came an increase in radiation.
The same thing is happening now, today.
GB: Are there any plans to mount
another expedition to the area and to visit
the installation?
VU: The radiation is a factor but, yes,
another expedition is planned for later this
year. Look, we want to be open and honest
about this. We welcome international par-
ticipation, but the people we invite must be
responsible in the eyes of the world. We
want people who are honest, open-minded
and transparent, who are eager and willing
to co-operate and exchange and then dis-
seminate the scientific data.
I invite you, Graham, to come to Russia
and visit the installation as an observer.
GB: I would be honoured. Thank you.
VU: You can tell people that we,
Russia, have decided that it is time that
other people should know about this, and
not just a few.
Editor's Note:
This interview first appeared in the April
2003 edition of UFO Magazine,
published by Quest Publications
International Limited, UK.
Unfortunately the magazine has ceased
publication due to the death of the
publisher and editor, Graham Birdsall, in
2004.
STRANGE Times 2006
 M EETINGS WITH
R EMARKABLE A LIENS
Jim Sparks describes
his life-changing
encounter with
reptoid aliens,
whose message for
saving planet Earth
may veil their true
intentions.
by Linda Moulton Howe 1998
LMH Productions
PO Box 21843
Albuquerque, NM 87154, USA
Fax: 0011 1 505 797 7908
E-mail: earthfiles@earthfiles.com
Website: http://www.earthfiles.com
Extracted from Chapter 3 of
Glimpses of Other Realities Vol. II
STRANGE Times 2006
Higher intelligence takes advantage of, and uses, lower intelligencesort of the way we
humans use cattle. And with the privilege of use, comes the responsibility of caring... A
farmer tends to his animals by feeding them and taking care of their medical needs. If the
pasture became contaminated, the farmer would be the first to protect his investments.
Jim Sparks, Abductee, 1996
Fort Myers Beach, Florida, USA
I
n 1995, I met a man named Jim Sparks who says he has had completely conscious
encounters with "small, grey, drone worker types; taller true aliens, or supervisors;
and tall reptoids with big, human-shaped bodies covered with scaly, reptile skin".
Sparks sees himself as an interpreter or translatoror at least an elementary grade
student in an alien "school". He says he has been forced to learn English letter and num-
ber equivalents to alien symbols.
Jim Sparks permitted me to tape-record hours of our discussions about his experiences.
This chapter emerged from those conversations and his efforts to visualise and write down
what has happened for his own book manuscript.1
After eight years "of being close enough to breathe their rotten-egg-smelling skin",
Sparks thinks he has some insights into the alien agenda, but admits he has "a thousand
more questions than answers". He is frustrated that he cannot prove his contacts with
alien beings.
Sparks was born to Italian parents on November 15, 1954. The formal name on his
birth certificate is Vincent Sparacino. He grew up in southern Florida, graduated from
high school and spent a couple of years in a local college studying real estate. He moved
on to Houston, Texas, in 1979, and then to North Carolina where he purchased raw land
and divided lots for housing constructionbut always felt a strong need to preserve the
trees at his developments. Happy, married and thriving, by 1988 at age thirty-four, Sparks
suddenly came face to face with other beings from other worlds.
Sparks at first thought he had lost his mind. He says he was kept totally conscious
through most of the interactions, including the agony of being "pulled" from his bed at
night to a craft.
"I'm usually pulled the same way, which I call the 'hard way', and it's completely physi-
cal. My whole body is taken. The first thing I hear is a low-pitched, whirling sound in
my head, like a whip going around in the air. This is usually after I go to bed and am
asleep. Normally for me, it's 3.30 am in the early morning. I don't know why. I wake up
from my natural sleep, and then there's the whirling sensation in the pit of my stomach
and it feels like it's coming up into my chest. When it gets up to my heart area, my heart
starts beating fast, just racing in my head, and the whirling sound starts picking up rpm
and is tremendously loud. It starts low and rises in pitch and screams in your head. The
fear is like you're going to die. Your heart is racing a million miles an hour and then you
get this acceleration feeling, but I always feel like I'm being pulled down; I never feel like
I'm being pulled up. It's like I go down a rollercoaster, only a hundred times faster, and
whoomyou black out and you're there, wherever it is you're going to be, usually on
board a craft."
Sparks told me why he thinks that most of the time he is actually "pulled" physically
from bed and literally moved through the walls or ceiling as other abductees have also
described.
"It's their technology. I know the aliens rely heavily on a created field. This field
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 45
produces several things: the ability to be invisible, the ability to
work in one dimension and be partially in another, and the ability
to move us poor humans through solid matter.
"How exactly it works, I don't know. But I know it's a field.
When the field is in action, you can feel it, you can sense it; you
almost feel like you are a magnet or static electricity. It takes a
wall as you would normally see it and makes it transparent. You
walk right through it. So, it's a field that somehow separates mol-
ecules, changes your physiology when you're in it."
I asked Sparks if he has been awake and conscious while actu-
ally seeing doors and walls become transparent.
"Only rarely. And it freaked me out. Most of the time I black
out before that moment and then I'm on board the craft. I know
this all sounds weird as hell, but I'm doing the best I can under
very bizarre circumstances not to be scared to death, not to be
intimidated, and to figure out what these bastards are up to. And I
know that their technology renders different ways of transport,
and one is the 'hard way' and I'm there in
the flesh, not out of body!"
'Your leaders said the vast
complete and I could see where I was going. That was a first!
"As my eyes opened, I saw that I was at least a thousand feet
above the ground and slowly descending. Below me was an aban-
doned carnival park. I was floating over a large, old-fashioned
wooden rollercoaster and I wasn't scared! I was calm and relaxed,
and the ride was so gentle I was actually enjoying it.
"When I was twenty or thirty feet from the ground, I started to
slowly rock back and forth several times like a pendulumalmost
like I was being guided to a target and this was the final adjust-
ment. Then I saw the profiles of about a dozen large creatures
standing in a semi-circle. Although it was night, I could make out
the shapes of their body sizeand they were large, even by
human standards. A few inches front the ground, I blacked out.
"As I began to regain consciousness, I was standing and heard
telepathically, loud and clear:
'We would have given it to you, but we knew it wouldn't have
meant anything unless you earned it.
It was the only way you could possi-
bly understand what you have been a

I
n early 1995, Jim Sparks had an part of and what you have to do.'
abduction experience that changed him majority of your population "I now know the 'it' was knowledge. I
forever, he says, and left him obsessed wasn't ready for anything like us was clear-headed and wide-awake con-
with saving the rainforests and stopping yet, so we made time agreements scious. There were twelve large,
the human slashing and burning-by-fire humanoid creatures standing in almost a
that is destroying them. This experience, with your leaders as to when complete circle in which I was a part.
excerpted here with Jim's permission, is your people would be made The creatures appeared to be at least six
puzzling because yet another alien type is aware of our presence.' feet tall. All of them had their heads
introduced. These reptilian entities also turned towards the alien who was stand-
provoke questions about a possible con- ing to my immediate left.
nection to viper references in Enoch of the "The only apparent light source was on
Dead Sea Scrolls and the Book of Genesis in the Bible. the face of this creature, like a hologram of a human face super-
Jim Sparks's encounter with reptilian humanoids, their warning imposed and glowing over the alien's face [Howe's emphasis]. It
and possible agenda, follows: was radiating light, and this was done to disguise his true appear-
"The pulling started the usual way with a low-pitched, whirling ance. He had done this to make me feel less apprehensive. The
soundonly this time, it didn't speed up as fast or get as loud and creatures didn't take into consideration that as this holographic
it was more gentle. I was paralysed again, but I momentarily face spoke and moved its lips, there was no audible sound.
regained consciousness before the final transport sequence was "The voice being communicated telepathically was out of sync
with the lips! Plus, the face was obviously a holo-
gram because it was slightly off centre from the
body. But it worked, nonetheless, because I wasn't
scared.
"As the reptoids transmitted telepathically, I
noticed that each alien seemed to be concentrating
its thoughts to the creature on my left. One thing
for sure: they were of one mind, and it said:

'There are some things you need to understand.

Jim Sparks's depiction of the holographic human face superimposed over the large
reptoid's head. Drawing by Josi Galante 1996 for Jim Sparks.
Yes, it's true that we have been in contact with
your government leaders and heads of power.
It is also true that agreements have been made
and kept secret from your people. It is also true
that, in the past, some of your people have lost
their lives or have been badly hurt to protect
this secret. Our hands had no part in this.
'We contacted your leaders because your
planet is in grave trouble. Your leaders said the
vast majority of your population wasn't ready
for anything like us yet, so we made time
agreements with your leaders as to when your
people would be made aware of our presence.
This part of the agreement has not at all been
kept.

46 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 'It was also agreed that, in the meantime, steps would be
taken to correct the environmental condition of your planet
with our advice and technology. We say advice, because we
respect the fact that this is your planet, not ours. Your gov-
ernment also broke this agreement.'
"I felt an awful emotion of abandonment from these aliens.
They are different. I never sensed true emotion from the other
aliens before. But the feeling wasn't at all good. It felt like great
loss. I couldn't help asking, 'You aren't giving up on us, are you?'
"There was a long pause of silence and I had a strong feeling of
tremendous loss. So I asked again, 'Well, are you?' There was
another long pause.
"Then finally:
When your own government's policy is to say 'You're just plain
crazy', it only deepens the pain.
"But this is a time when intelligence should rule over emotions.
So I asked, 'How do I fit in all this? What can I possibly do?'
'What you are doing already. We will share much more
knowledge with you in the future. Although you understand
a lot, we will show you much more. Continue to work with
people that come to you. We are aware of the small groups
that are forming around the world. These are people who are
prepared to learn and we consider them the core. Most
important is the condition of your planet. The first step in
solving this serious problem is amnesty. We have advice.
You will receive more knowledge in the near future.'

'No. We are now concentrating our energy on the average "As this was going on, it started to rain. I mean, it was
person. Your air and your water are contaminated. Your pouring! The creatures didn't even budge or try to get out from
forests, jungles, trees and plant life are dying. There are sev- under it. They didn't have to: we weren't getting wet. Although
eral breaks in your food chain. You have an amount of we were standing completely outdoors with no roof, not one drop
nuclear and biological weapons which include nuclear and of rain touched us. I guess we were being protected by some sort
biological contamination. Your planet is overpopulated. of electric field. I could hear drops as they fell, but there was a
Warning: It is almost to the point clear, detectable line [around us]
of being too late unless your people between rainfall and no rainfall. Then
act now. There are better ways of 'It was also agreed that...steps they said:
deriving your energy and food 'It's time to go.'
needs without causing your planet would be taken to correct the "A thought flashed into my mind.
any damage. Those in power are environmental condition of 'Wait, please! I have a request. I want
aware of this and have the capabili- your planet with our advice to see what you look like.' I'll never for-
ty to put these methods into world- get their response as long as I live:
wide use.' and technology... 'It will strike fear in your heart.'
"I answered, 'It won't scare me so
"I asked, 'Why aren't we doing it 'Your government also broke much if you don't stand there and stare at
now?' There was silence, and the whole this agreement.' me. It would help if you would just
thing was so strange because I could see wave at me. Just don't stare. Promise
that the whole group was thinking and me you'll wave.'
speaking its mind at one time. It felt
good because I was a participant in an honest-to-goodness meet- "Now I can't believe how stupid that request was. I had, in the
ing! The best part was that for the first time I was getting direct flesh, face to face, probably some of the most intelligent creatures
answers to my questions. 'Why aren't we putting these new meth- from the far reaches of the galaxy, with answers that have been
ods into use now?' plaguing mankind since the dawn of time. And what did I say?
'Could you wave at me?'
'Those in power view it [technology for clean energy and "The strangest thing started to take place. A spinning white
abundant food] as a military and security threat.' light with a hint of green began to radiate over their faces and
upper bodies, all dozen of them. The intensity of the light slowly
"Then I got angry as hell and said, 'You mean to tell me our got brighter and it was radiating from no direct or detectable
people in power have the ability to save and better this planet and source. I could see they were huge. Their upper torso was strong,
they aren't doing it?!' The thought that technology was being held with huge shoulders and a thick, strong neck like football line-
back from the public because of paranoia and greed outraged me, backers. As the light became brighter and details clearer, fear and
and the aliens saw my anger. But was it true? shock zapped through me.
"I said, 'You have scales!' Their faces looked like a cross
'Amnesty.' between a lizard and a snakenothing at all like the little grey
"What do you mean?" guys. Their eyes were small like ours, only diamond-shaped, and
'Complete amnesty. To those in power, the governments and the pupils were a red colour. Their heads were in normal propor-
the leaders who have been suppressing the truth. They can't tion with their bodies, but bigger than ours. The skull looked like
be held liable for any past wrong deeds. It is the only way their brains stuck out over their foreheads, covered by skin. This
these leaders can come forward with the truth. It is necessary feature was slightly different among all dozen of them.
that you do this in order to work together and survive.' "I said in a scared whimper, 'You promised to wave.' And each
and every one of them slowly lifted their arms and waved in front
"There was silence for a while, as if they wanted me to think of their faces. Their hands were huge with thick, club-like fin-
about what was just said. This was a hard truth to swallow. If gers, too thick to work fine instruments. But you have to keep in
anybody had a good reason to hate their government for covering mind that their technology is thought-activated.
up this information, it was me and others like me. Most abductees "I stood there and stared at them for a while in silence, absorb-
still consider themselves victims who constantly suffer ridicule. ing this spectacular sight. Their message kept running through

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 47

my mind. I was sure that my country has been involved with "Lately, I think the negative ones have told the government they
aliens. Most Americans believe there's been a cover-up. But will introduce themselves to the public if the government does
what really got to me was the message about the poor condition of not. So, the government is supposedly setting the stage to intro-
our planet! Then I felt the acceleration pull and blacked out. duce the negative ones, and the negative aliens are planning to
"I understood better their nature and agenda. They are neither help the government 'clear its reputation' by staging false events
benevolent nor evil. They have been among us in secret for thou- with holographic inserts. Human minds won't be able to tell
sands of years, maybe longer. But the length of time isn't as much what's real and what's not."
the issue as why they have been among us. I believe they have Whatever we ultimately learn about the truth in these highly
been farming us for raw materials. strange cases in which dire warnings are given to humans about
"We humans have been a self-perpetuating crop, a crop that the Earth's future, the fact is that, by the fall of 1997, Jim Sparks
doesn't need much tending and continues to reproduce, at least up was still pretty much in the same place he had been after the
to now and all the Earth problems. Thank goodness they don't kill carnival park meeting. He had no specific instructions about how
us; they just use us. This system has worked well for the aliens to carry out his "mission" to save the environment and to move
for a long time. But now there's a problem and their investment is the US Government towards amnesty for all military and
in trouble. They have spent a lot of time, travel and effort to farm intelligence people who had signed oaths of secrecy about UFO-
us. But we are on an almost irreversible path of self-destruction. related matters.
Nuclear and biological weapons and their waste have polluted the However, Sparks had a night-time visitation by one of the little
air, land and water. Forests, jungles and trees are being cut down grey "drones". He said he woke up and was conscious of "the lit-
or are dying. Now there are breakdowns in the food chain and the tle guy" standing at the foot of his bed. Then he got a clear men-
rest of the food chain is contaminated. tal picture of Rome burning and then a
Over-population, disease and viruses rainforest burning, along with the
beyond our grasp, with new and more "Just as the original creators of the strong telepathic communication,
complicated illnesses cropping up "You must put out the fire!"
every day. These are just a few of the human prototype desired to see the Jim is confused about the associa-
problems we humans have created. fulfilment of our species as guardians tion between Rome burning and the
"Most of us are blind or numb to this of the Earth, there also exist forces of rainforest destruction, but says he
reality because we can still go to the wants to do something to save trees:
grocer and buy food. We can go to great power that do not wish this plan
work and back and not see this death to succeed." "Linda, I need to get better known in
and dying. All seems almost normal. order to have influence. I want to get
Anna Hayes, in
But if we environmentally destroy our- Voyagers, The Sleeping Abductees to a situation where I can speak pub-
selves, the aliens still have an excellent licly so I can talk about the rainforest
insurance policy. They've been col- problems and other issues facing the
lecting seeds from plants, animals and Earth's environment."
humans. Through semen and ova extraction, the aliens can start But meanwhile, Jim, every second of every day, the forests are
us, or other Earth life, all over again, here or somewhere else." on fire.
"That's right."

E
choing the Jim Sparks experience, the major concern
expressed by abductee Anna Hayes in Voyagers, The
Sleeping Abductees2 was competition and conflict among
non-human intelligences over Earth life and their employment of
the same sophisticated technologies to manipulate, deceive and
inspire.
"Just as the original creators of the human prototype desired to
see the fulfilment of our species as guardians of the Earth, there
also exist forces of great power that do not wish this plan to suc-
ceed. If humans are able to fulfil their evolutionary blueprint, the
Earth and many other reality fields will no longer be free for
exploitation."
Hayes stressed that if humans had truth about their extraterres-
trial genetic connection and understood how many outsiders have
taken advantage of human ignorance and used sophisticated tech-
nologies to manipulate and deceive for their gain, the human fam-
ily could change and evolve in strength, not weakness.
In conversation, she told me: "Both negative and positive agen-
das are producing hybrids and androids, and both sides are
emphasising the need to save the Earth's environment for their
various vested interests. Guardian aliens are promoting healing
the planet, but the negative groups are also trying to 'help the
planet' by offering new technologies so they can have a clean
place to take over. I understand the negative ones have had time
agreements with the US Government about introducing their
species to humans.
So what is being accomplished? Have you contacted groups
that are already trying to save the rainforests and joined up with
them?
"No. I have always cared about what happens to the Earth, but
I've never got myself involved with any groups. This is some-
thing new to me. What am I going to say? I'm being advised by
ETs?!"
What details did the reptoids give about air and water damage?
"They didn't give me exact details. They told me that we've got
problems with the air and water and food chain. I was told [in
March 1995] that we've got about a decade to turn this thing
around. Not that the world will end. But there will be problems
in reversing all the damage. And the reptoids said someone in
political power already has this knowledge and technology and
[they] are hoarding it for security and defence reasons. And prob-
ably for greed, too.
"Those Black Budget Boys aren't coming forth with the truth
because their asses are on the line. They've got all the secret
organisations out there who have taken advantage of this knowl-
edge while everything else goes to hell. That's why the amnesty
thing makes sense. Then the BBB guys can tell the truth finally
about alien contact, getting alien technology, making money from
it, and even maiming and killing people to protect that secret.
With amnesty, they can come forward with the truth and won't be
prosecuted."
Jim, if there is urgency, why would the aliens go to you when

48 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006


you have no resources to make radical
changes?
"Maybe it isn't just Jim Sparks. It could
be a million other abductees, too, for all I
know. Maybe all of us are going to do
something at the same time. It's a very
complicated thing. I wish I had the power
today to go down to South America and
Malaysia and snuff the fires out. I don't. I
know there are organisations like
Greenpeace and the Sierra Club and Save
the Rainforestsbut have they stopped
things, either?"
Jim, what happens if there's no change in
the status quo?
"I think the aliens want to do this with
our help. But if that doesn't work, I think
they are going to intervene. They use a
minimal amount of energy to get the most
work done. I think that if they can interact
with individuals on this planet, give advice,
give technology, show ways of doing
things that are better for survival, they'll do
that first."
But why? What's in it for the aliens?
"The same thing they've been doing with
us for the past several thousand years.
Which is?
"They farm us. They clone us. They
STRANGE Times 2006
Meetings with Remarkable Aliens
make organs from us, and all kinds of stuff.
I'm not saying they are wonderful, benevo-
lent beings coming down here to save the
Earth. Bullshit! They have their own self-
interests."
So, Jim, they want to preserve the Earth
so they can continue to harvest DNA from
certain bloodlines?
"Yeah. I think the Earth will be fine,
eventually. But humans might not be able
to live on it. You need a certain percentage
of oxygen to breathe."
You mean the aliens are trying to get
their 'crop' to stop self-destructing, so they
can keep harvesting what they need.
"That's right. And remember, Linda,
when this stuff started happening, I didn't
ask for it. And not only did I not ask for it,
I didn't want anything to do with it."
Editor's Note:
This text was extracted, with permission,
from chapter 3 ("Other Beings, Other
Worlds") of Linda Moulton Howe's
book, Glimpses of Other Realities Vol.
II: High Strangeness (Paper Chase Press,
USA, 1998, ISBN 1-879706-78-4) (see
review in NEXUS 5/05).
www.nexusmagazine.com
About the Author:
Linda Moulton Howe is a graduate of
Stanford University, USA, and has a Masters
degree in communication. She is a science
and environment reporter for radio and tele-
vision, and reporter and editor on
www.earthfiles.com and with Premiere
Radio Networks. For the last seven years
without interruption, she has reported news
for both Coast to Coast AM with Art Bell
and Dreamland on Sundays.
Linda's film documentaries, A Strange
Harvest and Strange Harvests 1993,
explored the worldwide animal mutilations
phenomenon. Her books include An Alien
Harvest; Glimpses of Other Realities Vol.
I: Facts & Eyewitnesses; and, most recently,
Glimpses of Other Realities Vol. II: High
Strangeness These are available on the
Internet via amazon.com and
barnes&noble.com. Linda's books and
videos can also be obtained through
NEXUS offices in Australia, NZ, UK and the
Netherlands.
Endnotes
1. Sparks, Jim, Star People, Outsiders
Us? Or Them?, 1996 (unpublished manu-
script).
2. Hayes, Anna, Voyagers, The Sleeping
Abductees, Wild Flower Press, USA, 1998.
NEXUS 49
 NEW FRENCH REPORT ON
UFOS AND DEFENCE
O
n 16 July 1999, a document was
published in France, titled "UFOs
and Defence: What must we be
prepared for?" ("Les OVNI et la Dfense:
A quoi doit-on se prparer?"). This 90-
page report is the result of an in-depth
study of UFOs, covering many aspects of
the subject, especially questions of defence.
The study was carried out over several
years by an independent group of former
"auditors" at the Institute of Higher Studies
for National Defence (Institut des Hautes
Etudes de Dfense Nationale, or IHEDN),
and qualified experts from various fields.
Before its public release, it was sent to the
President of the French Republic, Jacques
Chirac, and to Prime Minister Lionel
Jospin.
The report is prefaced by General
Bernard Norlain of the French Air Force,
former Director of IHEDN, and begins
with a preamble by Andr Lebeau, former
President of the National Centre for Space
Studies (Centre National d'Etudes
Spatiales, or CNES), the French equivalent
of NASA. The collective author of the
report is COMETA (the Committee for In-
depth Studies), and the group is presided
over by General Denis Letty of the Air
Force, a former auditor (FA) of IHEDN.
A list of COMETA members is given at
the beginning of the report. It includes:
50 NEXUS
General Bruno Lemoine of the Air Force
(FA of IHEDN); Admiral Marc Merlo (FA
of IHEDN); Michel Algrin, doctor of polit-
ical sciences and attorney at law (FA of
IHEDN); General Pierre Bescond, engineer
for armaments (FA of IHEDN); Denis
Blancher, chief national police superinten-
dent at the Ministry of the Interior;
Christian Marchal, chief engineer of the
national Corps des Mines and research
director at the National Office of
Aeronautical Research (ONERA); and
General Alain Orszag, PhD (physics),
armaments engineer.
The committee also expresses its grati-
tude to outside contributors, including:
Jean-Jacques Velasco, head of SEPRA
(Service d'Expertise des Phnomnes de
Rentre Atmosphrique) at CNES;
Franois Louange, president of Fleximage,
photo analysis specialist; and Air Force
General Joseph Domange, general delegate
of the Association of Auditors (AA) at
IHEDN.
General Norlain tells in a short preface
how this committee was created. General
Letty came to see him in March 1995,
when Norlain was Director of IHEDN, to
discuss his project of a committee on
UFOs. Norlain assured him of his interest
and directed him to the AA of the IHEDN,
which in turn gave its support. It is inter-
esting to recall here that, 20 years ago, it
was a report of that same Association
www.nexusmagazine.com
which led to the creation of GEPAN
(Groupe d'Etude des Phnomnes
Arospatiaux Non-identifis)the first
unit for UFO study at CNES. As a result,
several members of the committee come
from the AA of the IHEDN, joined by
other experts. Most of them hold, or have
held, important functions in defence, indus-
try, teaching, research or various central
administrations.
General Norlain expresses hope that this
report will help develop new efforts nation-
ally and an indispensable international
cooperation. General Letty, as president of
COMETA, points to the main theme of the
report, which is that the accumulation of
well-documented observations compels us
now to consider all hypotheses (especially
extraterrestrial) as to the origin of UFOs.
The committee then presents the contents
of the study. In the first part, the authors
discuss some remarkable UFO cases, both
French and foreign. In the second part,
they describe the present organisation of
research in France and abroad, as well as
studies done by scientists worldwide which
may bring partial explanations in accor-
dance with known laws of physics. The
main global explanations are then
reviewed, from secret aircraft to extrater-
restrial manifestations. The third part
examines measures to be taken regarding
defence, from information to pilots, both
civilian and military, to strategic, political
STRANGE Times 2006

and religious consequences, should the
extraterrestrial hypothesis be confirmed.
Part I: Facts and Testimonies
Many of the cases selected are well
known by most researchers, and need only
be mentioned briefly here. They are:
Testimonies of French pilots: M.
Giraud, pilot of Mirage IV (1977); Colonel
Bosc, fighter pilot (1976); Air France flight
AF 3532 (Jan 1994).
Aeronautical cases worldwide:
Lakenheath, UK (1956); RB-47, USA
(1957); Teheran, Iran (1976); San Carlos
de Bariloche, Argentina (1995).
Observations from the ground:
Antananarivo, Madagascar (1954); obser-
vation of a saucer near the ground by a
French pilot, J.-P. Fartek (1979); close-
range observation over a missile site at
Kapustin Jar, Russia (1989).
Close encounters in France: Valensole,
encounter of Maurice Masse (1965);
Cussac, Cantal (1967); Trans-en-Provence
(1981); Nancy, the so-called case of the
Amaranth (1982).
There are also counter-examples of elu-
cidated phenomena (two cases).
Although the selection is limited, it
seems sufficient to convince an uninformed
but open-minded reader of the reality of
UFOs.
Part II: Present State of Knowledge
The second part, entitled "The present
state of knowledge" ("Le point des connais-
sances"), surveys the organisation of offi-
cial UFO research in France, from the first
instructions given to the Gendarmerie in
1974 for the redaction of reports,
to the creation of GEPAN in
1977, its organisation and its
results: collection of more than
3,000 reports from the
Gendarmerie, case studies and
statistical analyses. It then sur-
veys agreements passed by
GEPAN and, later, SEPRA, with
the air force and army, civilian
aviation and other organs, such as
civilian and military laboratories
for the analysis of samples and
photographs.
Regarding the methods and
results, we are reminded of some
famous cases (Trans-en-Provence,
l'Amarante), and emphasis is
directed to the catalogues of
cases, notably of pilots (Weinstein
STRANGE Times 2006
catalogue) and "radar/visual", worldwide.
An historical note appears here with a
quotation from General Twining's famous
letter of September 1947, asserting the real-
ity of UFOs. [The reference is to a then-
secret memorandum sent by US General
Nathan Twining to General George
Schulgen. Twining states: "The phenome-
non reported is something real and not
visionary or fictitious... There are objects
probably approximating the shape of a
disk, of such appreciable size as to appear
to be as large as man-made aircraft..."
Twining notes the impressive aerial perfor-
mance of these objects, their apparent
metallic structure and other characteristics
often associated with UFOs. CNI Ed.]
The following chapter, "UFOs: hypothe-
ses, attempts at modelling" ("OVNI:
hypothses, essais de modlisation"), dis-
cusses some models and hypotheses which
are under study in several countries.
Partial simulations have already been made
for UFO propulsion, based on observations
of aspects such as speed, movement and
acceleration, engine failure of nearby vehi-
cles, paralysis of witnesses, etc. One
model is MHD (magneto-hydrodynamic)
propulsion, already tested successfully in
water, and which might be achieved in the
atmosphere with superconducting circuits
in a few decades. Other studies are briefly
mentioned regarding both atmospheric and
space propulsion (such as particle beams),
antigravity and reliance on planetary and
stellar impulsion.
The chapter also suggests that the failure
of land-vehicle engines may be explained
by microwave radiations. In fact, high-
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
power hyperfrequency generators are under
study in France and other countries,
according to the report. One application is
microwave weapons. Particle beamsfor
instance, proton beams which ionise the air
and therefore become visiblemight
explain the observation of luminous beams.
Microwaves might explain body paralysis.
In the same chapter, "global hypotheses"
are considered next. The authors regard
hoaxes as rare and easily detected. Some
non-scientific hypotheses are put aside,
such as conspiracies and manipulations by
powerful secret groups, parapsychic
phenomena and collective hallucinations.
The hypothesis of secret [human] weapons
is also regarded as very improbable. We are
then left with various extraterrestrial
hypotheses. One version has been
developed in France by astronomers Jean-
Claude Ribes and Guy Monnet, based on
the "space islands" concept of American
physicist O'Neill, and it is compatible with
present-day physics.
The organisation of UFO research in the
United States, Great Britain and Russia is
surveyed rapidly. In the United States, the
media and the polls show a marked interest
and concern on the part of the public, but
the official position, especially of the Air
Force, is still one of denialmore
precisely, that there is no threat to national
security. Actually, declassified documents,
released under FOIA, show another story:
one of surveillance of nuclear installations
by UFOs and the continued study of UFOs
by the military and intelligence agencies.
The report stresses the importance in the
United States of private, independent
NEXUS 51
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
associations. It mentions the "UFO
Briefing Document", sent in 1995 to a
thousand personalities worldwide, and the
Sturrock workshop in 1997both
sponsored by Laurance Rockefeller. The
"Briefing Document" has obviously been
welcomed by the authors of the COMETA
report.
The committee also notes the public
emergence of alleged insiders such as [the
late] Colonel Philip Corso, and considers
that his testimony may be partly significant
as to the real situation in the US, in spite of
many critics.
The report briefly describes the situation
in Great Britain, with a special mention of
Nick Pope [ex-Ministry of Defence, author
of two books on UFOs], and poses the
question of the possible existence of secret
studies pursued jointly with American ser-
vices. It also mentions research in Russia
and the release of some information,
notably by the KGB in 1991.
PART III: UFOs and Defence
The third part, "UFOs and defence"
("Les OVNI et la dfense"), states that, if it
is true that no hostile UFO action has been
proved yet, at least some actions of "intim-
idation" have been recorded in France
(case of the Mirage IV, for instance).
Since the extraterrestrial origin of UFOs
cannot be ruled out, it is therefore neces-
sary to study the consequences of that
hypothesis, not only at the strategic level
but also at political, religious and
"It's these damn obsidian eyes ... you got any designer contacts
that will give me a Drew Barrymore look?"
52 NEXUS
media/public information levels.
The first chapter of Part III is devoted to
prospective strategies and it begins with
fundamental questions: "What if extrater-
restrials [exist]? What intentions and what
strategy can we deduce from their behav-
iour?" Such questions open a more contro-
versial part of the report.
Possible motivations of extraterrestrial
visitors are explored here, such as protec-
tion of planet Earth against the dangers of
nuclear war, suggested, for instance, by
UFOs' repeated flying over nuclear missile
sites.
The committee then ponders the possible
repercussions on the behaviour, official or
not, of different nation-states, and focuses
on the possibility of secret, privileged con-
tacts which might be "attributed to the
United States". The attitude of the US is
seen as "most strange" since the 1947 wave
and the Roswell event. Since that time, a
policy of increasing secrecy seems to have
been applied, which might be explained by
the protection at all cost of military techno-
logical superiority to be acquired from the
study of UFOs.
Next, the report tackles the question:
"What measures must we take now?" At
the least, whatever the nature of UFOs,
they necessitate "critical vigilance", in par-
ticular regarding the risk of "destabilising
manipulations". A kind of "cosmic vigi-
lance" should be applied by the elites,
nationally and internationally, in order to
prevent any shocking surprise, erroneous
www.nexusmagazine.com
interpretation and hostile manipulation.
Nationally, COMETA urges the
strengthening of SEPRA and recommends
the creation of a cell at the highest level of
government, entrusted with the develop-
ment of hypotheses, strategy and prepara-
tion of cooperation agreements with
European and other foreign countries. A
further step would be that European states
and the European Union undertake diplo-
matic action towards the Unites States
within the framework of political and
strategic alliances.
A key question of the report is: "What
situations must we be prepared for?" The
report mentions such situations as:
extraterrestrial moves for official contact;
discovery of a [UFO/alien] base within the
territory of Europe; invasion (deemed
improbable) and localised or massive
attack; and manipulation or deliberate dis-
information aiming at destabilising other
states.
COMETA devotes special attention to
"aeronautical implications", with detailed
recommendations aimed at various person-
nel, such as air staff, controllers, meteorol-
ogists and engineers. It also makes recom-
mendations at the scientific and technical
levels, aimed at developing research with
potential benefits for defence and industry.
The report further explores the political
and religious implications of UFOs, using
as a model the perspective of our own
exploration of space: how would we do it,
and how would we handle contacts with
less advanced civilisations?
Such an approach is not new to well-
informed readers of the abundant ufologi-
cal literature, but it has a special value
here, being treated seriously at such a
level. The media/publicity implications are
not forgotten, with the problems of disin-
formation, fear of ridicule, and manipula-
tion by certain groups.
In its conclusion, COMETA claims that
the physical reality of UFOs, under control
of intelligent beings, is "quasi-certain".
Only one hypothesis takes into account the
available data: the hypothesis of
extraterrestrial visitors. This hypothesis is
of course unproved, but has far-reaching
consequences. The goals of these alleged
visitors remain unknown, but must be the
subject of speculations and prospective
scenarios.
In its final recommendations, the
COMETA report stresses again the need
to:
STRANGE Times 2006

1) inform all decision-makers and per-
sons in positions of responsibility;
2) reinforce means of investigation and
study at SEPRA;
3) have UFO detection taken into
account by agencies engaged in space sur-
veillance;
4) create a strategic cell [for UFO
study/analysis] at the highest state level;
5) undertake diplomatic action towards
the United States for cooperation on this
"capital question";
6) study measures which might be neces-
sary in case of emergencies.
UFO CASES CITED IN REPORT
The authors of the French UFO report
selected a small but impressive sample of
UFO cases to illustrate the seriousness of
the subject. Many of these cases will be
familiar to experienced ufologists, but not
necessarily to all readers. Here is a brief
description of most of the cases highlighted
in the COMETA report:
Testimony of French pilot M.
Giraud, 7 March 1977: Giraud and his
navigator were flying a Mirage IV jet at
night near Dijon, France, when they saw a
bright light rapidly closing in. The light
tailed them at a distance of 1,500 metres
(4,920 feet), though they made evasive
turns. They radioed a military radar site,
but the UFO did not show on radar.
Testimony of French fighter pilot
Colonel Claude Bosc, 3 March 1976: On
a night training flight in a T-33, Bosc saw a
bright light approach at high speed on a
collision course. His jet was then
enveloped in green phosphorescent light
for several seconds. Radar showed noth-
ing, but two other pilots saw the encounter
from a distance.
Air France Flight 3532, 28 January
1994: Pilot and copilot of an Airbus 320-
111, flying in daylight near Paris at 39,000
feet, reported seeing a very large disc-like
craft about 30 miles away and slightly
below them. Military radar confirmed the
presence of an object about 250 metres
(820 feet) in diameter. The object was
observed visually and on radar for about 50
seconds, then suddenly disappeared.
Lakenheath RAF Base, UK, 13
August 1956: Extraordinary UFO events
occurred over a span of six hours, involv-
ing very clear radar tracks of more than a
dozen objects, sometimes travelling over
4,000 miles (6,437 km) per hour, some-
times slower than 100 mph (160 kph). Jets
STRANGE Times 2006
were scrambled and encountered UFO traf-
fic, but the pilots could not identify it.
RB-47 case, USA, 17 July 1957:
"Arguably the most important UFO case in
history," says US researcher Jerome Clark.
Flight crew of an RB-47 reconnaissance jet
engaged a UFO for nearly two hours over
Mississippi, Louisiana and Texas. The
UFO was simultaneously tracked visually
and by ground and air radar, and a signal
from the UFO was tracked as well.
Teheran, Iran, 18 September 1976:
Two F-4 jets of the Iranian Air Force sepa-
rately engaged a brilliant, fast-moving
UFO, tracking it visually and on radar. On
approaching the UFO, the jets' onboard
weapons and control functions repeatedly
failed, forcing retreat. A second UFO
object was seen to separate from the main
UFO and appeared to land.
San Carlos de Bariloche, Argentina,
1 August 1995: A commercial jet on
approach to Bariloche airport reported a
UFO flying alongside. During the plane's
descent, the airport experienced a total
electrical blackout, forcing the pilot to
abort the landing and circle around for a
second attempt. Meanwhile, the UFO flew
upwards and disappeared from view.
Antananarivo, Madagascar, 16
August 1954: A brilliant green fireball was
observed crossing the sky, trailing flames.
As it approached, multiple witnesses said it
resembled a metallic oval object as big as a
DC-4 aircraft. As the object passed
overhead at low altitude, the city
experienced a major electrical blackout.
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
Kapustin Jar, ex-USSR, 2829 July
1989: Military personnel reported a clearly
visible disc-shaped UFO hovering low over
an army missile base and shining a beam of
light down on a weapons depot. The sight-
ing lasted over 90 minutes. A similar
report occurred later that night at another
nearby base.
Valensole, Basses-Alpes, France, 1
July 1965: Farmer Maurice Masse
encountered a landed UFO and two small
humanoids in his lavender field at about
6 am. On approach, he became paralysed
but remained conscious while the beings
boarded the craft and flew away. Masse
suffered massive fatigue for several weeks,
and nothing but stunted weeds grew in the
landing area for years afterwards. This
case was extensively investigated by
French authorities.
Trans-en-Provence, France, 8
January 1981: A disc-shaped metallic
UFO was observed by farmer Renato
Niccolai to land briefly in his alfalfa field
at about 5 pm, then lift off and fly away.
Investigation showed that a very heavy
object, weighing maybe four to five tonnes,
had compressed the soil in the landing area,
and plants were obviously affected.
(Source: Report by Gildas Bourdais,
GBourdais@aol.com, for CNI News, vol. 5,
no. 11, 1 August 1999, CNINews1
@aol.com. Requests for translation and
publication rights to the full report should
be sent to M. Michel Algrin, 25 boulevard
St-Germain, 75005 Paris, France.)
NEXUS 53
GOVERNMENT WHISTLEBLOWER
C. B. SCOTT JONES ON
UFO SECRECY
An interview by
Linda Moulton Howe April 2004
The Chinese told me over and over again
of the amount of evidence they have from
which they conclude that the ET phenom-
enon is real, in the sense that there are
real, tangible craft penetrating their air-
space.
Dr C. B. Scott Jones, former US Naval
Intelligence officer, Special Assistant in
UFO Research for US Senator Claiborne
Pell, 19851991, Founder of the Center for
Applied Anomalous Phenomena (1985),
the Human Potential Foundation (1989),
and the Peace & Emergency Action
Coalition for Earth (PEACE) (2003)
Dr Werner von Braun and the UFO
Cover-up
G
aithersburg, Maryland, USA, April
21, 2004 This past weekend at
the X-Conference, the focus was on
American government knowledge of an
extraterrestrial presence on Earth and the
cover-up of that knowledge.
There has been a policy of silence and
54 NEXUS
denial about ETs and advanced technolo-
gies in the interest of national security
since at least the presidency of Harry S.
Truman in the 1940s.
One of the speakers was C. B. Scott
Jones, PhD, who worked in US Naval
Intelligence in the 1960s to 1970s. Later,
from 1985 until 1991, Scott Jones worked
as a Special Assistant to US Senator
Claiborne Pell, the then Chairman of the
Senate Foreign Relations Committee. Dr
Scott Jones's goal was to find out what
other governments and scientists knew
about the UFO phenomenon. At the top of
his research list were the Soviet Union and
China and the implied knowledge of
German rocket scientist Dr Werner von
Braun.
Dr von Braun began his work in the
United States after World War II under
Project Paperclip, in which German rocket
experts were brought to America to create a
space rocket program similar to what they
had been doing in Peenemnde, Germany.
Their base of operations was White Sands
Missile Range, west of Alamogordo and
Roswell, New Mexico. Von Braun served
from 1960 to 1970 as the first Director of
the Marshall Space Flight Center. He was
most noted for directing the development
of the giant Saturn V rocket that carried
men to the Moon for the first time in 1969.
www.nexusmagazine.com
Scott Jones thinks that Werner von
Braun not only knew about the extraterres-
trial presence and discs flying rapidly over
their White Sands rocket experiments, but
seemed to have insider knowledge about
how the ET presence might be manipulated
and used by the United States government.
For more background, see websites at the
end of this interview with C. B. Scott
Jones.
Linda Moulton Howe
C. B. Scott Jones (CBSJ): We
absolutely know that our country, the
United States, has a determined policy of
secrecy, silence, denial and misinformation
on this [UFO phenomenon]. So, the big
question for me and many others is:
"Why?"
Linda Moulton Howe (LMH): Isn't
that why a focus on Werner von Braun
going back into the 1940s and Project
Paperclip in the United States is important,
because he seemed to provide some
insights about why this government might
perpetuate a policy of silence when he
knew for a fact that we were dealing with
something that fell into the non-human
category?
CBSJ: Yes, the basis for the Werner von
Braun commentand that's about 20 years
ago. This was after he had been in the US a
long time and actually was in the twilight of
STRANGE Times 2006
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
"the bear of a sci-
entist" in Russia?
CBSJ: That
was interesting.
Since I was work-
ing for Senator
[Claiborne] Pell,
who was then
Chairman of the
Senate Foreign
R e l a t i o n s
Committee, that
gave me entre to
The original Project Paperclip team photographed at Fort Bliss in White Sands, New Mexico, in the 1940s.
Dr Werner von Braun is sixth from the right in the front row. (Photo is courtesy of the Smithsonian Museum.) places around the
world. The title
his life; he was a dying person. A protg and the research directors knew they were he had given me was "Special Assistant"
he had selected, Carol Rosin, in an inter- going to have a revolution. and no one ever asked what that really
view has given us this information. He told And they literally offered me stacks of meant, which was fine. But they obviously
Carol that he had been in meetings in which their classified reports. We would have made their own assumptions as to what the
the strategy, the corporate strategyand it's huge stacks of their reports over years of Special Assistant to the Chairman of the
alleged that it wasn't just his corporation, their official government involvement, and US Senate Foreign Relations Committee
which was Fairchild, but a conglomerate the funding for that came from the Ministry was. So, perhaps they were overgenerous
was this. It is essential to keep the income of Defence and their intelligence communi- in sharing things, but I certainly appreciat-
pump for the militaryindustrial complex ty, the KGB and the GRU. And they iden- ed whatever their expectations were.
primed and going to make sure that we have tified their sources of funding to me I was frequently used as a messenger boy
adequate enemies. He ticked off to Carol because they were interestedI think for in every country that I went to, because
that essentially here is the list. Watch for the obvious reasonfirst of
this: all to ascertain if this [UFOs]
first the Soviet Union, but that will was something coming from
collapse; NATO, from the United
then terrorism and crazies in other States. Were these things that
countries; were penetrating their air-
then asteroids; space still another threat to
then extraterrestrials. their national security and a
provocation?
That's an extraordinary list, and I must
I think they very quickly
say on reflection that everything has been
realised that they could deter-
mentioned as a potential enemy or threat by
mine the difference between a
the United States, except extraterrestrials to
U2 and naval aircraft pene-
this point. trating their borders and then
later on other satellite and air-
Foreign Assignments craft when they came online,
versus the ETs and the UFOs
LMH: In the work that you did with that came over. I asked them,
Senator Claiborne Pell, where you were "What do you think is the
assigned to explore the world to find out motivation? What is the
what was going on with research in other intent of these intrusions, not
governments' efforts to understand only in your country but
whatever this phenomenon is, did you find around the world?" They
there were other countriesmaybe China, confessed they had no idea
Russia, Francewho were ready to what the intention was.
disclose what they knew and the United LMH: But it underscores
States was the only obstacle between their that this is a global phenome- Dr Werner von Braun, the German rocket scientist brought
saying to the world public, "We know we to the United States after World War II to head Project
non, that it is being seen by
Paperclip at White Sands Missile Range. Project Paperclip
are not alone"? thousands of people around was the US government's assembly of dozens of German
CBSJ: That intrigued me, what I ran the planet on an ongoing physicists to create an American space rocket program as
into. First of all, when I first went into the basis in every country. Can the German scientists had been producing in Peenemnde,
Soviet Unionthis was before their blood- you describe what you Germany, during the reign of Adolf Hitler. (Photograph
less revolutionthe scientists I dealt with learned from what you called date and source are unknown.)

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 55

 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
they knew of my relationship with Senator military is upset because your diplomats that he was as good as he was advertised to
Pellthe Russians less than the Chinese. gave it away." me[I wondered if] I had missed what he
The Chinese did it repeatedly. And he agreed with that. had said or the translator had missed
If they had a heartburn that they wanted So I asked him, "What do you want me something. And I think the message from
eased, they would say, "Look, when you to do?" the hero scientist of the Soviet Unionyou
get back to Washington, we want you to And he said, "I want you to tell Senator put it together. He knew where I was and
tell Senator Pell this and let's clean this up Pell how unfair and how unnecessary and he knew what we had been talking about
or have that stopped or get this going." It wrong this is." for two days.
was easy for me to say I was glad to do I did that when I got back to LMH: UFOs...
that, and that kept the relationship warm Washington. I told my boss and he said, CBSJ: That's right. So I don't think he
and ongoing. came principally to talk about a phased-
I was in the Institute of Theoretical array radar in any other context than
Problems, and the Director told me UFOs. And I think what the translation
late one afternoon, "Tomorrow there "The Chinese told me over and should have been was that this radar is
is going to be something new to the over again of the amount of important to usthe Soviet Union and
agenda. A very senior scientist, a hero evidence they have from which the United States.
of the Soviet Union, wants to meet And if I had had my wits about me, I
with you." they conclude that the ET should have asked, "What is the fre-
I asked, "What does he want to meet phenomenon is real, in the sense quency of this radar picking up UFOs?"
about?" I think then he would have answered
Now, we had been meeting for two that there are real, tangible craft the question. He assumed that I was
days on the subject of UFOs at that penetrating their airspace." smart and would figure it out. I think
time. he would have dialogued with me if I
He said, "He will tell you." had brought that up.
He was a huge man, and when he LMH: Are we tracking certain
swept into the room his presence just took frequencies that we know are linked to very
over and people pulled back from him. I "Let's go to the [Senate Foreign Relations] specific kinds of extraterrestrial aerial craft?
held my ground as best I could, and he got committee." So, I told the Soviet experts CBSJ: Linda, I don't know technically
right up in my face and it was a finger- on the committee about this and they just whether we are or not. If in fact they
pointing monologue on his part. He was shrugged and said they didn't know what he emanate on a frequency spectrum that we
telling me that the antiballistic missile was so mad about. can monitor, the answer certainly must be
treaty that had just been completed was It was some time lateractually, I was "Yes". But I suspect there may be
completely unfair, and our insistence that reviewing my notes. I tried to take notes frequencies in spectrums we don't
the Soviet Union take down a large phased- while I was there because so much was recognise. It might be a dimensional thing,
array radar was not justified. going on and I thought it would be poor and I don't think we know how to check for
He said, "This is an important radar. It is form to have a tape recorder. So I would frequencies in this dimension and then shift
technically not in violation." take notes and scribble as I did. So I was to another dimension to check for
And I said, "I can imagine that you are reviewing the notes, and while I had hired a frequencies there.
upset as a scientist and I imagine the good technical translatorI was confident
China Waits for America to Make
First ET Disclosure

LMH: What was the most provocative

information that you ran into in China?
CBSJ: The Chinese can be very direct,
bless them for that. They just simply told
me it was "an outrageous and transparent lie
that you come to China and allege that you
don't know what your own country is doing
in these [UFO] fields"essentially, "How
dare you go to our people in the military
attach and our embassy in Washington,
DC, and say you would like to meet senior
people in the following academies and
institutes who are doing the important
research in UFOs and psychic phenomena,
unless you have a responsibility and
knowledge of what your own country was
doing with it!"

56 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006


I was never able to convince them that I
was not among the anointed, and that kept
me away from their most senior people
whom I knew and identified. But they
simply would not let me get to them.
I guess the important thing with the
Chinese came from the Minister for
Foreign Affairs. In a casual moment, he
lamented how sad he was that the exchange
of information between our countries on
the subject of UFOs had stopped.
I said, "I am not familiar with that
exchange. What are the additional
details?"
Then I think he realised he should not
have said what he did, and he sort of mum-
bled his way out of it.
The reason this is important is...I think it
has been somewhat validated by the extra-
ordinary 1999 report that came out of
France [COMETA; see website link
below], in which they say in one part of the
report that there is an allegation that there
is a special relationship between the United
States and whatever this phenomenon is.
The Chinese told me over and over again
of the amount of evidence they have from
which they conclude that the ET phenome-
non is real, in the sense that there are real,
tangible craft penetrating their airspace.
That issue is essentially settled with them.
I said, "This being the case, why don't
you make a public announcement and tell
the world about this reality?"
And there was a short silence and he
said, "China will be a quick second after
the United States makes the
announcement."
That again suggests there is a belief or
understanding that the responsibility for the
first announcement comes from the United
States. And I don't understand this, Linda.
I do not know what the basis of this is.
Remote Viewing Sheds Light on
1908 Tunguska Explosion
I
n his efforts to get more truth about the
UFO puzzle, Scott Jones hired a remote
viewing group that had originally
trained in a classified Defense Intelligence
program and later sold remote viewing as
an investigative tool in the civilian world.
Scott wanted to learn more about the
June 30, 1908, explosion above the ground
in Tunguska, Siberia, that incinerated trees
in an 18-mile-diameter circle around
ground zero. Whatever blew up was so
strong that, beyond the 18-mile [29-kilo-
metre] burned circle, thousands of trees
STRANGE Times 2006
were knocked down over a 25-mile [40.2-
km] radius. If the explosion had occurred
over a city, the effect would have been cat-
astrophic for all the people living there.
To date, the most common hypothesis
has been that a large meteorite blew up
above Tunguska in 1908. But when Scott
Jones had the remote viewers, led by Ed
Dames, concentrate on the historic event,
they got a different answer
LMH
C. B. Scott Jones: Three out of five
remote viewers came up with UFOs, a ship
in trouble. There was an explosion
perhaps the demise of a ship having real
technical difficulties.
Now I am beginning to seriously
consider that the ships observed in the
Roswell event were a time-travel vehicle. I
don't have the physics background to make
an argument for this.
To me, it would make a huge difference
in the exploitation of whatever was gar-
nered from [Roswell] if you start out that
this is from a time-travelling vehicle rather
than this is from a ship that somehow got
hereand these pieces of hardware we will
independently exploit and see what we can
learn from them. If you put it in a different
context and say this is part of a time-travel
vehicle, what else can we learn from the
same things that have been exploited
already?
LMH: Could we in the US government
learn how to operate that technology and
literally go backwards or forwards in time?
CBSJ: I don't know if it is bi-directional
or not. I think I heard at this conference it
"None of the food here has been genetically modified, but some of the staff have."
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
is only back in time. If that's the case, then
the travellers that are coming here are com-
ing from our future.
And of course, that brings a great
potential. If it is a future in all areas, they
are more technologically advanced, more
psychologically, emotionally and spiritually
advanced, then they truly have some gifts to
share with us.
About the Author:
Linda Moulton Howe is a graduate of Stanford
University, USA, and has a Masters Degree in
Communication. She has worked as a science
and environment reporter for radio and
television, and edits the Earthfiles.com
website. Her film documentaries, A Strange
Harvest and Strange Harvests 1993, explored
the worldwide animal mutilations
phenomenon. Her books include An Alien
Harvest, Glimpses of Other Realities Vol. I:
Facts & Eyewitnesses, Glimpses of Other
Realities Vol. II: High Strangeness and
Mysterious Lights and Crop Circles (Paper
Chase Press, USA, 200001).
Linda's investigations have taken in such
diverse subjects as crop circles, the
chupacabras mystery, humanity's hidden
history, and the evidence for UFOs and ETs,
including research into the alleged Roswell
UFO crash fragments and government
knowledge and cover-up of non-human
intelligences interacting with our planet.
Website References
http://www.peaceroom.com
http://www.cufos.org/cometa.html
http://www.paradigmclock.com/
X-Conference/jones_supplement.htm
http://www.hq.nasa.gov/office/pao/History
/SP-4201/ch1-3.htm
NEXUS 57
 C HARLES H ALL ON THE
T ALL W HITE E XTRATERRESTRIALS
MOTIVATIONS OF THE TALL WHITE EXTRATERRESTRIALS AND THEIR
EXOPOLITICAL SIGNIFICANCE

W
hat follows is based on an interview with Charles Hall on 2 December 2004
regarding the existence of the Tall White extraterrestrials that he met while
serving at Nellis Air Force Base, Nevada, as a duty weather observer from
While serving as a 1965 to 1967. His experiences are recorded in his three-volume book
series, Millennial Hospitality (for details, see http://www.millennialhospitality.com). I
weather observer at had earlier read the first two volumes of his book series and recorded my impressions in a
short article (see http://www.exopolitics.org/Exo-Comment-22.htm). I was put in touch
Nellis Air Force with Charles Hall by Paola Harris, the first major UFO researcher to investigate the case
Base, Nevada, in thoroughly (see http://www.paolaharris.it/hall1.htm).
In the interview, I asked a series of questions and recorded his replies by taking notes.
the mid-1960s, My aim in conducting the interview was to get a better idea of the motivations of the "Tall
Whites" and their exopolitical significance on Earth. I begin this evaluation of my
Charles Hall had interview by first outlining my questions and Charles Hall's replies. (Note: The replies
are recorded in the third person and we have adjusted the questions to the third person
dealings with a style accordingly. Ed.) I finish with my evaluation of his testimony and book series
which I believe are vitally important as a possible disclosure initiative that will attract
mysterious group of much public attention and carry great exopolitical significance.
Michael E. Salla, PhD
Tall White alien 3 December 2004
beings housed there Why did he call the book a work of fiction?
and engaged in He had to protect himself and the men who served with him. He changed the names to
protect the innocent, including himself and other servicemen. People he replaced had
technology transfer experienced severe psychological pressure and trauma. Some wouldn't want to be men-
tioned so he didn't give their correct names. He affirmed that everything in the books is
with the US true. It is as close to a documentary of events he experienced as possible.

military. How did he recall all conversations recorded in the book?

Interview with
Charles J. Hall, BS, MA, MBA
http://www.millennialhospitality.com/
He didn't keep a diary, but kept a log book. He basically relied on memory in writing
the book. He relived the emotions as he covered each experience, and this helped his rec-
ollection of events and conversations. Key episodes are basically etched into his mind.
He had to summarise many conversations. Some conversations had to be reconstructed.
Usually conversations with other airmen are summarised/reconstructed. Conversations
with Tall Whites are close to verbatim, since the Tall Whites didn't talk much. Tall White
men especially didn't speak much at all. Tall White women were more talkative than the
men. If Tall Whites didn't wear their communication equipment, then they wouldn't com-
municate at all. Charles wanted to capture all the emotions he experienced, and these are
faithfully recorded in the book.

by Michael E. Salla, PhD When did he start writing the books?

3 December 2004
Expolitical Comment #23
Website: http://www.exopolitics.org
He first tried telling people about his experiences during 196568. When he got a word
processor in 1985, he began the typing process using floppy discs. Writing was a slow
process for technical reasons and also emotionally, since he relived the experiences and
this took much time. For example, it took six months before he could control his fears of
the Tall Whites back in 1965.

58 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

When did he finish the book? described an incident in his book where a serviceman had to beg
Back in the 1980s he had trouble finding a potential publisher for his life when he yelled at a Tall White child. The only reason
for his planned autobiography and also had family responsibilities. the Tall White didn't kill him, according to Charles, was that a
In 2002 he became unemployed and began to edit, polish and Tall White male came over to the Tall White female and told her
publish what he had written so far. The publisher he found, that since the serviceman hadn't hurt the child, the American gen-
Firstbook.com, allowed him to publish it as a "print-on-demand" erals wouldn't understand why she would kill the serviceman.
book where he controlled copyright, etc. He is still not satisfied Charles said that the generals, however, thought military service-
with what has been published so far, and wants to edit the first men were expendable, and wouldn't allow any killing by the Tall
volume one more time. Basically the book was a work in progress Whites to stop technology transfers.
since 1985 up until 2002. Final editing was done from late 2002
to early 2003. Were other servicemen killed by Tall Whites for
offending them?
Did he ever take photos? He explained an incident back in September 1965 near the
He never took any photos. When out there by himself he was mountain at Indian Springs where the Tall Whites had their main
worried about keeping himself hangar. One of the cover stories
alive, and taking photos wasn't for sightings of Tall Whites was
thought of. Initially he thought he that they were bighorn sheep in
was dreaming (that's why he the desert. One hunter wanted to
believes Area 51 is called shoot one of the "sheep" and rent-
"Dreamland"). This was a reason ed horses and went with his
why he never thought about taking friend. The hunters eventually
photos. Later, when he realised separated, and one hunter went
that the Tall Whites were real, he near the hangar where the Tall
talked himself out of it when he Whites are based and took a shot
went back to his base, so he didn't at one of the kids. The Tall
think about photos. Whites grabbed him and handed
Also, he didn't want to offend him to the human guards, who
the Tall Whites and stayed on his were military personnel. The
best behaviour. He didn't think human guards shot him and gave a
taking pictures was prudent and cover story for his accidental
might offend them, and they could death. The guards found his
destroy the evidence anyway since friend, beat him up and threw him
they always had access to his into the brig for about six weeks.
belongings. Charles said that usually if one
wasn't hurting anyone and was
Did any other servicemen just unarmed and hiking, etc., then
ever take pictures of Tall the Tall Whites wouldn't bother
Whites that he was aware of? one. Basically, they would kill if
He is not aware of that happen- threatened in any way. They
ing, but recalled that in a paper- Charles J. Hall in the mid-1960s believe in tit for tat. If you did
back book published back in the nothing to scare or hurt them, the
early 1990s there is a set of pictures of Tall Whites which he worst they would do was to scare you away pleasantly.
believes are authentic. These were published by a New Jersey
housewife who travelled to Albuquerque, New Mexico, and said Why does he say the generals were desperate for
that she was waiting on a public highway when she saw a scout technology exchange with the Tall Whites?
craft and she took six pictures of the Tall Whites standing six foot They would do anything to maintain good relations with the
six inches tall. The implication was that some serviceman had Tall Whites to get technology. The Tall White "teacher" had con-
taken the photos and sent them to the author, who gave a cover versations with Charles that demonstrated this. American gener-
story for how she got the photos. He couldn't recall the name of als wouldn't stop Tall Whites if they were intent on killing ser-
the book or the author. vicemen who had hurt any Tall White child. Tall Whites
exchanged technologies such as radio and communications sys-
Has he ever been approached or briefed by agencies not tems, but not faster-than-light-speed technology. Technology
to disclose the events on Nellis? exchange was done on the basis of only those technologies that
No. He said that weather information was never classified. As would benefit Tall Whites, such as good radios and communica-
a weather observer he was never part of a classified project where tions that they could use as well if necessary. He gave the exam-
security oaths were taken. The orders given to Charlie were clas- ple that the Tall Whites would help with a nuclear-powered craft,
sified, but nothing he did was ever to be classified. That was a but not propulsion systems for deep-space travel. Antigravity
decision taken by a committee including the Tall Whites and oth- technologies which were deep-space capable were not shared with
ers in the Pentagon. The idea was that Charlie would be free to the generals.
interact with the Tall Whites without being continually briefed. American generals were sometimes in the scout craft of the Tall
He said that the American generals would do anything to get Whites, so the technology for the scout ships was shared to an
technology transfers. Generals would permit Tall Whites to kill extent since the scout ships were made on Earth using materials
servicemen if they were offended, threatened or harmed. He here with the assistance of the US military. Tall Whites sometimes

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 59

participated in classified meetings and helped with technology
development. Charles described how much of the technology
transfer occurred. Basically, the Tall Whites would participate in
classified meetings by sitting in and helping with some well-placed
questions.
Charles argued that the Tall Whites like to keep to themselves
and don't have any interest in colonising or dominating the Earth
or taking over governments. They just want to maintain friendly
relations with the US government so they can continue to use the
base.

In volume one, he describes an incident where mental In volume three, he describes an incident where he was
images entered his mind about the Tall Whites in the burned by a microwave weapon. Can he elaborate?
frontier era. Can he explain? He explained how the pencil weapon can be used by the Tall
Charles described how, when he was reading the history of the Whites to cause great pain, death or sleep. He described an inci-
West and the history of Death Valley and Indian Springs, he dent where a CIA guard tried to help a Tall White female in get-
remembered mental images of Tall Whites in the frontier era. ting up the stairs at the Congressional building, but the guard
These images just entered his mind when the Tall Whites were inadvertently hurt the Tall White and she threatened the CIA
nearby, and left when the Tall Whites departed. guard, who had to beg for his life.
He explained that the pencil weapon can be used to stimulate
In the book, he mentions 1954 as the first time that calcium atomic frequencies to cause great pain like being burned,
reports of the Tall Whites were made in the vicinity of but one was not actually burned.
Nellis. Is there any earlier date or evidence he thinks When the iodine setting is used by the stun gun, it can cause
would support the presence of Tall Whites in the area? one to bleed to death. He compared this to the black plague when
He said that the legend of Range Four Harry (a description used people would bleed to death due to arteries being weakened and
for the Tall Whites by servicemen at blood leaking out, causing death.
the Nellis base) went back at least as In an email, Charles clarified how
far as 1954. the pencil weapon works. "The
pencil weapon could be set to
Does he think these mental
"Charles argued that the stimulate the atomic frequencies of
images he observed were real Tall Whites like to keep to sodium, calcium or iodine.
historical events or fabricated? Stimulating the sodium atoms caused
He felt that the mental images were
themselves and don't have immense pain because it caused the
based on real historical events. He any interest in colonising or nerves to discharge. If the weapon is
noted that when the Tall Whites set high enough, it can cause instant
moved away, the images stopped. dominating the Earth or death. Stimulating the calcium atoms
This suggested that the Tall Whites taking over governments." caused the reverse (i.e., sleep,
were feeding him these images to calmness, relaxation, etc.) because it
give him historical information that causes the nerves to reset and relax.
they wanted to pass on. Stimulating the iodine atoms, of
course, as described in book three,
Does he believe that Tall Whites have been in the caused death by internal bleeding because it causes chemical
Indian Springs area for a couple of hundred years? changes that allow the blood to pass through the walls of the
Yes. He was told that Pamela (a Tall White) was born in that arteries in and around the thyroid gland."
valley during the James Madison era. They like the valley He said that Tall Whites' tempers can change very quickly from
because it's hot, and that is an important requirement for them. friendly to hostile.
The pencil weapon was used against Charles in a
What does he think the motivations of the Tall Whites misunderstanding that is described in his book, but the iodine
are in terms of their presence on Earth? setting was used which caused internal bleeding.
They used the base as a place for their deep-space craftthe He recalled seeing a friendly Tall White female approach him
same as the way the US Navy would use a base in the Pacific. when he was lying hurt and she did a kind of graceful dance
They used the base to refuel, repair and refit their deep-space around him.
craft. He talked about the long distances in space and the need for In an email, he described that Tall White as "...a young female,
a base on a planet like Earth where they can get supplies, make probably equivalent to a human young woman of age 19. She
repairs, etc. stood approximately 5'10"5'11'' tall. She had a male companion
Since deep-space craft arrived and left on schedule, this meant who I always guessed was her brother because the two of them
they were engaged in commerce. looked like fraternal twins. She and I were completely unafraid of
each other. On a number of evenings when I was making the
Basically, does he believe they just wish to use Earth as morning balloon run, she would come up and stand beside or near
a base for their deep-space travel and don't have any me or slightly behind me. Frequently she would come within
ulterior motive to colonise the Earth or dominate arm's length and still not show the slightest fear of me. Likewise,
national governments? when she came in that close, I also did not feel any particular fear
Yes, that's his belief. From the Tall White point of view, they of her either. Her brother, by comparison, was always noticeably
are very happy with what they have. Because their life-span is 10 afraid of me and always kept his distance from me (usually he
times longer than ours, they take 10 times longer to age and also stayed back at least 5060 feet). He obviously liked me, but also
to heal. They were amazed at how quickly Hall could heal, and he obviously never trusted me. For example, he would never turn
he described how they watched him closely when he bruised him- his back to me when he was anywhere in my area (i.e., within 100
self and healed within a day. feet)."

60 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

If this could occur to him after all the trust that was the seriousness of the experiences he had. The emotions that
developed with the Tall Whites, what does that suggest Charles objectively described in great detail conveyed the extent
for most members of humanity? to which what he was experiencing shook his world view and the
The idea that Tall Whites can turn on one and use weapons, world views of those around him.
even despite all the good things that have been done, is generally Charles's knowledge of the Tall Whites' interaction with the US
correct. Tall Whites differ very much in temperament and per- Air Force generals is very enlightening in terms of the way
sonality, as do humans. agreements were followed to the letter. It appears that the Tall
He explained an incident involving a Tall White general who Whites are quite legalistic and this seemed to be something that the
wouldn't brook any discussion and could be cruel if he felt he was US military found to be helpful in working with them. This is very
not being obeyed to the letter. Yet the Tall White doctor was significant in the technology exchanges that Hall described were
quite friendly and would approach very closely. The Tall White vitally important for the US military. The Tall Whites were quite
captain described in Charles's book was a nice enough guy, but he clear that only certain categories of technology would be shared
only came around humans when it was necessary. He only categories that presumably would not give the US military deep-
wanted to know about humans to the extent that it would help him space capabilities. According to Charles, this technology
do his job. A cultural difference was evident, as in cases where exchange involved the US collaborating in the construction of
Americans might befriend a Japanese person but wouldn't want to scout craft used by the Tall Whites. Providing the required
socialise with Japanese. He stressed that Tall Whites vary material for the Tall Whites presumably would have helped US
tremendously in personality. scientists understand the principles of space flight. Since this is
what Charles observed in the mid-1960s, it may be presumed that
When was the last time he directly communicated with larger constructions may have been attempted more recently that
a Tall White? have more advanced propulsion systems than nuclear power.
He referred to what is described in book three, which is when The exopolitical question here is: what would the Tall Whites
he left for military service in Vietnam in 1967. Subsequent to gain or have gained in return for allowing US authorities to col-
then, he has had no communication laborate in building larger spacecraft?
with the Tall Whites. If technology for smaller scout craft
had been given in exchange for bas-
Additional Comments from ing rights, what Earth resources
Charles J. Hall "I personally saw the American would be or have been traded for
There are many episodes he had larger constructions using more
that he didn't include in the books. generals themselves with their advanced propulsion systems?
For example, in 1965, American Tall White counterparts Charles Hall comes across as very
generals were showing Tall White thoughtful and very intelligent. He
generals through the military barracks boarding and deboarding has a degree in physics and a master's
where he slept. When that first
happened, he thought he was
the white scout craft." degree in applied (nuclear) physics,
and believes he has worked out some
dreaming. He remembers generals of the main principles of the Tall
talking to Tall Whites about taking Whites' deep-space propulsion
Air Force officers with the Tall system.
Whites on scout craft. In an email, He didn't pull any punches in
Charles elaborated on this: "The American generals were describing the intimidating behaviour of the Tall Whites and their
discussing the possibility of the Tall Whites taking two young readiness to use deadly force to protect themselves and especially
American officers on board the Tall Whites' black deep-space their children against potential threats, intended or otherwise.
craft (i.e., to another nearby star). I personally saw the American Even surprising or scaring Tall White children could lead to Tall
generals themselves with their Tall White counterparts boarding White adults intimidating humans with their advanced weaponry,
and deboarding the white scout craft." He thought the discussion as he has made clear in his book series.
was too risky to include, since it included what he felt was Significantly, in his book he described how the Tall Whites
sensitive material that was probably classified. would threaten to kill humans who scared or disobeyed them (for
He stressed how the Tall Whites would follow agreements to quotes, see http://exopolitics.org/Exo-Comment-22.htm). In the
the letter. He gave the example of an agreement he had with the interview, however, he focused on how the Tall Whites would
Tall Whites. They would basically never sneak up behind him only respond when they were threatened in some way. He
and scare him, and he would be sure never to do the same to them. stressed the principle of "tit for tat" that the Tall Whites followed,
This agreement was closely followed in all the interactions which is well understood in human society and is a principle (lex
Charles had with the Tall Whites and helped him survive. talionis) found in biblical documents. It appears that in the inter-
Basically, he believed the Tall Whites could be trusted once they view Charles was portraying the Tall Whites in a more reasonable
had agreed to something. light than described in his book.
While it is clear that Charles was being as objective as possible,
Evaluation and Exopolitical Analysis of Charles Hall the discrepancy between his book narration and the interview, in
I found Charles Hall to be very credible and compelling in his terms of the conditions when Tall Whites threatened to kill or
response to questions. He displays great integrity and is quite sin- intimidated military servicemen and humans in general, suggests
cere in describing solely the facts concerning his experiences. He he was painting a more sympathetic picture of their behaviour
described his experiences with the Tall Whites in a very objective than in the book. This is something I hope he can clarify later,
manner, and the emotional reality of the experiences was quite since it helps contextualise the Tall Whites' motives on Earth.
vivid and conveyed much information about his state of mind and Charles described the Tall Whites as having no ulterior designs

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 61

on the Earth in terms of colonising it or taking over governments. ability of the Tall Whites to refer to earlier historical periods and
He stressed the analogy of the use of overseas bases by the US their presence is possibly due to advanced technologies such as
military, such as in the case of US bases in Italy or the Pacific. time travel which they can use to influence our perceptions of
The idea is that the use of such bases was purely to facilitate the their historical presence. This will be controversial, naturally, but
operations of the US military, while local sovereignty and cus- is vitally important as knowledge of the Tall Whites becomes
toms were recognised. So just as the US government/military has more widespread and their exopolitical significance is discussed.
no ulterior motive for control of Italy through its base there, so In sum, my view is that Charles Hall's testimony is vitally
too the Tall Whites have no ulterior motive to control the Earth. important information that has great exopolitical significance and
This is quite a controversial argument, since the control of bases is likely to gain widespread public interest. Already, various
throughout different periods of history has been contentious and media outlets are treating Charles Hall's story as a major disclo-
was part of the dynamics that drove sure event, and Hall is generating
colonialism. Indeed, the existence much public interest due to his obvi-
of military bases in Saudi Arabia ous integrity, clarity and coherence.
was a major factor influencing Hall's disclosure of his experi-
regional perceptions of US motives ences at Nellis Air Force Base at
in the Middle East and influenced Indian Springs from 1965 to 1967
events in Afghanistan and Iraq. will likely play a major role in pub-
If the Tall Whites need the Earth lic disclosure of the extraterrestrial
as a base for their deep-space opera- presence and will help shape public
tions and commerce, then it would perceptions of extraterrestrials and
be nave to believe they have no their presence on Earth.
interest in influencing human affairs
and political institutions. Human About the Interviewee:
history shows that when foreign Charles James Hall has a BS in
powers establish bases on one's terri- Physics (1972) and an MA in
tories, it's hard to get such powers to Applied Physics (1973) from
leave and to prevent them from California State University at San
Diego, as well as an MBA in
interfering with local political Organizational Stress (1983) from
affairs. We may have already Nova University, Fort Lauderdale,
achieved that point, due to agree- Florida. He has over 18 years'
ments reached between the secret experience in software design, 15
committees managing extraterres- years of this as the lead member of
trial affairs and the Tall Whites. software development teams. He
Charles believes that the Tall has over nine years' experience in
Whites have been on Earth since at designing/creating websites,
least the early 1950s and possibly as including military/government
long as a hundred years or more, sites. He also has 18 years'
based on what some Tall Whites experience performing nuclear-
related scientific analyses. He has
related to him and mental images he a "Secret" Department of Defense
received when reading about the Artist's impression of the "Tall White" ETs
encountered by Charles Hall in the mid-1960s. security clearance. To see his
local history of Indian Springs. extensive rsum and find
This will be a critical question to (Illustration by Teresa Barbatelli, from website
information on how to obtain
explore, since obviously the time of http://www.exopolitics.org/charleshall.htm) copies of his three-volume book,
the first appearance of the Tall Whites on Earth will influence our Millennial Hospitality, visit his website at
assessment of their ultimate goal here. http://www.millennialhospitality.com/
If they have been here for a century or more, as Hall suggested
and which he was influenced to believe by the Tall Whites, then it About the Interviewer:
would be fair to assess that they have no ulterior design on Dr Michael E. Salla has held academic appointments in the
controlling the Earth. Presumably they could have easily taken School of International Service, American University,
control of the Earth in the early 19th century. If, however, the Washington, DC (19962001), and at the Department of Political
Tall Whites appeared subsequent to the 1954 EisenhowerET Science, Australian National University, Canberra, Australia
agreements (see http://www.exopolitics.org/Study-Paper-8.htm), (199496). He taught as an adjunct faculty member at George
Washington University, Washington, DC, in 2002. He has a PhD
then it is very likely that the Tall Whites have ulterior motives
in Government from the University of Queensland, Australia, and
which go significantly beyond merely resupplying and repairing an MA in Philosophy from the University of Melbourne, Australia.
their deep-space craft on route to other interstellar locations. The Dr Salla's February 2003 article, "An Exopolitical Perspective
use of time travel technologies might be used by the Tall Whites on the Pre-emptive US-led War against Iraq", was published in
to buttress the idea that they have been on Earth for centuries, but NEXUS vol. 10, no. 3. His book, Exopolitics: Political
this could be entirely fabricated. I believe that the Tall Whites Implications of the Extraterrestrial Presence (Dandelion Books,
were associated with the 1954 EisenhowerET meetings and that 2004), was reviewed in NEXUS vol. 11, no. 5.
they subsequently established their base in the Indian Springs area The full text of this interview is at http://www.exopolitics.org/
of Nevada in that time period. Exo-Comment-23.htm. For other interviews and more info, visit
Charles was subtly influenced by the Tall Whites to believe Dr Salla's websites at http://www.exopolitics.org and
they have been present in different periods of US history. The http://www.galacticdiplomacy.com.

62 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 UFO DISCLOSURE AUSTRALIA
The Journey So Far
by Debbie Payne 2004
D
uring the course of this article I am
going to try to give you a glimpse
through a very small window into
the Australian Government's files on UFOs.
What has to be understood is that the infor-
mation beyond this window is so extensive
that it would be impossible for me to pre-
sent even a fraction of what has been dis-
covered, let alone explain it to you.
The hardest part in writing this paper was
deciding on which files to discuss, so I tend-
ed to focus more on the ones that stood out
for various reasons. What I would like to
suggest is that you log on to the National
Archives of Australia (NAA) website
(http://www.naa.gov.au) and view these
files, just as AURAthe Australian UFO
Research Associationhas done.
The Australian Disclosure
The Collins Dictionary defines
"disclosure" as "a revelation" and "to
disclose" as "to make known, to allow to be
seen". Over the last four or five years
Australian UFO researchers, like their
counterparts overseas, have been discussing
and debating the concept of "disclosure".
Many of you no doubt will be familiar with
the US Disclosure Project headed up by Dr
Steven Greer and the enormous amount of
work his team has done in this direction.
STRANGE Times 2006
But the substance of this article isn't to
weigh up the absolute arguments for and
against the existence of UFOs; it's to pre-
sent enough viable evidence in the form of
raw data to challenge the belief systems of
those who are uninformed or sceptical. It's
not about the analysis of what we have
found so far because once we have collated
enough data from the files we've had
released, then the analysis will be the focus
of our future efforts. We estimate this
whole process could take a couple of years.
But by following this methodical procedure,
I think that it will strengthen the resolve of
established and committed researchers that
their work is both viable and important to
the understanding of the overall phenome-
non. Everyone in some way contributes a
piece to the jigsaw puzzle and the picture is
becoming clearer.
What we have done during the first stages
of the Australian Disclosure Project is to
find out exactly how many records exist in
the Australian Government sector about
UFOs and to what extent the government
pursued, and indeed still pursues, this issue.
These pages can now be viewed publicly
by anyone and mulled over, dissected, fol-
lowed up, researched and individual conclu-
sions reached. We are showing you what's
there. It's up to you to decide what to do
with the information. However, whatever
your conclusions, these records certainly
give you a starting point for all kinds of
research into this subject.
www.nexusmagazine.com
Our search began about a year ago with
our own local knowledge and the on-line
records of the National Archives of
Australia. Currently the on-line record
search will only give access to around 10%
of what is registered with the Archives, but
at least it was a place for us to start. At one
stage we punched in "Reports on Flying
Saucers"; to our surprise, this search term,
unlike searches we did on the term "UFO",
produced around 20 files. In these 20 files
there were around 5,000 pages of informa-
tion, but we had no idea about what they
contained or to what extent the government
had documented them. I can only tell you
we were more than encouraged after view-
ing the first few documents. Imagine what
it will be like when the remaining 90 per
cent can be accessed.
Who kept UFO files?
You will see from the list below that
there were numerous resource channels
open to us, including:
RAAF (Royal Australian Air Force);
CSIRO (Commonwealth Scientific &
Industrial Research Organisation);
Department of External Affairs, includ-
ing Department of Territories;
RAN (Royal Australian Navy);
Department of Supply (a federal depart-
ment, now defunct), at Woomera;
DSTO (Defence Science and
Technology Organisation) at Edinburgh
Air Force Base, which was formerly the
NEXUS 63
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
Long Range Weapons Research
Establishment (WRE);
Bureau of Meteorology;
Department of Civil Aviation;
"The Committee".
More recently, under the Freedom of
Information (FOI) Act we obtained over
600 pages of information, but this figure is
due to increase very shortly by a further
2,300 pages because the RAAF has kindly
granted us access to another 38 filesenig-
matic files, to say the least. These 38 files
were suspiciously unavailable the first time
we asked; then we were told they had been
destroyed. On our last request, these files
were located and made available because
this time we went through a different chan-
nel. So sometimes it all depends on whom
you speak to.
Currently all these files from the depart-
ments previously mentioned total some
12,000-odd pages and have cost AURA
over A$1,800 to date to obtain.
Unfortunately I can only present a few
reports in any detail due to our limited
space, so at least you will get to know
something about the content of these files
and the extent of their information. I have
tried to be as diverse in subject matter as I
can with my chosen examples, just to
demonstrate the intriguing number of very
different cases recorded in these files.
Some may be familiar to you as famous
Australian cases, and others you won't have
heard of. I want you to see that the
Australian Government did keep detailed
files on our most famous cases (see table 1).
64 NEXUS
Rather than have other researchers labori-
ously go through every one of the thousands
of pages at the Archives looking for some-
thing in particular, we wrote brief notes on
the content of every page in every file. By
doing this, anyone can go to these file sum-
maries and scan through them to find what
they're looking for, like an indexkeeping
in mind, of course, that the NAA files were
obtained under the 30-year rule, which
makes 1973 the most current record we are
able to access at this present time.
But I tell you that when 1st January
clicked over this year, another 14 files
appeared on our standard search. However,
files released under the FOI Act can be a lot
more recent, so don't think we are only lim-
ited to files prior to 1974; we're not.
We have also conducted register searches
at our local National Archives Office in
Adelaide, something we will endeavour to
carry out at various other Archives offices
around the country.
All the files you see as digital copies on-
line can be viewed on your personal com-
puters in the luxury of your own homes.
These records are currently held at the head
office of the National Archives in Canberra.
And contrary to conjecture from some
who are very quick to imply we won't find
anything new in our recently released gov-
ernment files, we have uncovered hundreds
of pages of documents that have never seen
the light of day, so statements of that nature
are completely without substance.
What do we know now that we didn't
know a year ago? In a word, plenty! We
know that Australiaespecially the RAAF
www.nexusmagazine.com
and the Long Range Weapons Research
Establishment at Woomera was deeply
involved with other governments and vari-
ous intelligence organisations, including
NASA, in joint space programs and the
sharing of information relating to anything
space based. So my first file has something
to do with international co-operation and
interest in this subject.
What was Project Moondust?
In 1953 the USAF 4602nd Air
Intelligence Service Squadron was created.
Its purpose was to recover downed enemy
aircraft during the Korean War. In 1957 it
was expanded to recover objects and debris
from space vehicles that had survived re-
entry from space to Earth, and in 1961,
according to a United States Air Force
memo, it included UFOs.
While researching the topic of Project
Moondust on the Internet, I came across a
42-page file released under the USA
Freedom of Information Act which clearly
demonstrates a link between UFOs, the
United Nations and Project Moondust.
On the first page of these documents, the
subject header simply reads "Project
Moondust", and dates from November
1973. It concerns the recovery of what may
have been Soviet satellite debris. However,
also included in this 42-page package are
documents on a 1978 discussion concerning
the potential of having the United Nations
undertake UFO investigations, report on
UFO sightings and retrieve crashed objects
from different countries. It also mentions
the recovery of a spherical object (said to
have landed smoothly) in Buenos Aires in
1984.
So Moondust was very much a global
project. But a singular statement made by
the Prime Minister of Grenada and recount-
ed by the American delegate to the United
Nations leaps out at you on page 9 and
reads as follows:
...the recent report of the abduction of
a Cessna aircraft in Australia seemed
to him to be a compelling reason for
the United Nations to "come alive to its
responsibilities and take a serious look
at the UFO phenomenon, to which
Planet Earth has been conspicuously
exposed since 1947".
Two words immediately caught my atten-
tion in this phrase: the word "abduction",
which was used to describe the disappear-
ance on 21 October 1978 of Frederich
Valentichnot crashed, lost or missing at
STRANGE Times 2006

sea, but abducted; and, of course, the refer-
ence to 1947, which we all come across
during the course of our research. It seems
to be a definitive time in ufology. We have
pre-1947 and post-1947 as a way to cate-
gorise the modern era of sightings.
The next page of the file states that 133
countries had already provided reports
regarding UFOs for the express purpose of
setting up a UN-sponsored committee to
study the phenomenon. Jacques Vallee,
Stanton Friedman and J. Allen Hynek were
also present at this meeting.
However, the official reason for Project
Moondust was to retrieve downed space
vehicles, and what we wanted to know was
whether or not Australia participated in this
project. I am certain the answer is, "Yes,
we did".
Crash retrieval team
The Department of Supply file no. SA
5644/2/1 contains a 1962 memo from the
Controller of WRE to the Superintendent at
Woomera. In it, he states that "the United
States Embassy" sought WRE's assistance
to obtain information about sightings or
downed fragments of space vehicles.
This location and recovery of fragments
was exactly the role of the US Air Force's
Project Moondust, and the request to
Australia was made a year after the project
commenced in full force to include UFOs.
In our reading of the Supply file, there is
never actually a mention of the words
"Project Moondust". However, as it was a
classified US project, perhaps this is not
surprising. Under this banner the
Australian Government located and
retrieved several items of interest, which we
have listed on our website.
It also means that the military had in
place a "quick response unit". In his 1996
document, "UFOs Sub Rosa Down Under
The Australian Military & Government
Role in the UFO Controversy", Bill Chalker
writes:
It appears JIO [Joint Intelligence
Organisation] have a "rapid interven-
tion" capability, as they have been able
to instigate prompt widespread ground
searches in suspected "hardware"
crashes. They do this through "special
access" channels. This operation may
be similar to the US activity operating
under the code name Project
"Moondust".
So I think it's fair to say that Australia did
participate in Project Moondust, and did
STRANGE Times 2006
have and still has a "rapid intervention"
team connected to the Department of
Defence.
The reason I am so confident that the
rapid intervention team exists is partly due
to a number of conversations a member of
our AURA team had with a Woomera resi-
dent who is retired from the military. He
claims to have been a member of this
retrieval team, and at the moment we are
trying to corroborate his story.
From the many retrievals listed, I find
one in particular rather interesting. This
one was near Inkerman in Queensland in
March 1968 and was given to the US
Embassy in Australia immediately and
without analysis [RAAF file J63/25
5/40/AIR PART 1]. It makes you wonder
what was in those diplomatic pouches!
Is Woomera Area 52?
The next find I'd like to discuss is based
on a couple of files from the Department of
Supply at Woomera on sightings that
occurred between 1952 and 1954. There
were literally hundreds of sightings over the
years at this highly restricted space facility.
In fact, the base servicemen even had their
own UFO club, called STARS (Scientific
Technical Astronomical Research Society),
which they were permitted to set up but
with very stringent conditions including
being prohibited from publishing any of
their UFO reports.
In order for you to understand the signifi-
"Our next big mission for 2008 is to send a fully equipped probe Washington
to search for signs of intelligent life."
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
cance of the Woomera space facility, its
participation in projects on a global scale
and the dates I have chosen, here are a few
facts and figures.
1947 Long Range Weapons
Establishment formed between the UK
and Australia
1949 First missile launched from
Woomera Rocket Range;
1957 First Skylark rocket launched;
1958 First Black Night rocket
launched;
1959 The first deep-space tracking
station to be established outside the
United States is established by NASA at
Woomera;
1962 Countries from Europe together
with Australia formed the European
Launcher Development Organisation
(ELDO), a collaboration which launched
the Europa series of rockets;
1964 First Europa rocket launched (a
modified Blue Streak rocket);
1966 First Europa rocket with
dummy stages launched;
1967 Australia's very own satellite,
WRESAT (Weapons Research
Establishment Satellite) launched, mak-
ing Australia only the fourth country in
the world to launch its own satellite from
its own territory.
The list of launches and research and
development programs goes on, but we'll
leave this for now.
NEXUS 65
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
The Department of Defence lists
Woomera's possible activities as follows:
Air-to-air combat training;
Bombing camps;
Remote area operations;
Airborne and ground testing of long-
range weapons systems;
Rocket testing (including Scramjet
technology);
Space vehicle launch and recovery,
including reusable rockets;
Parachute drops;
Hot and dry equipment trials;
Because electromagnetic interference is
extremely low, the area permits
EMI/EMC testing (electromagnetic inter-
ference and compatibility between guid-
ance systems and aircraft electronic
equipment, both on the ground and
in the air).
Today, Woomera still operates a
deep-space tracking station. It has
what they call "ears in space", listening
to noises from space, and it monitors
equipment on satellites in orbit.
Woomera has R&D connections with
NASA, the European Space Agency,
Kistler Aerospace, BAE (British
Aerospace) Systems, the Japanese
Cangaroo Project and other not-so-
public projectslike research into
nanotechnology and breaking the Mach 7
barrier (two years before the Americans,
who announced they had done so in March
2004) with its work on Scramjet
technology. Incidentally, Woomera does
have an area designated as Area 52a Evetts
Field. It was one of the sites proposed for
the National Radioactive Waste Repository
and probably still is.
The Woomera Prohibited Area, as it is
now known, is the size of England and cov-
ers 127,000 square kilometres. You can
hide a lot of activity in a remote desert com-
pound the size of a small country. But in
the early 1950s, Woomera was a lot bigger.
It covered 270,000 square kilometres. It
was also the subject of some very interest-
ing events.
Military officers witness UFO
On the night of Saturday 27 October
1952, at approximately 8.00 pm, five per-
sons witnessed a cigar-shaped object fly on
a straight and horizontal trajectory, 40 to
45 degrees above the horizon from the wit-
nesses' right-hand side to their left. Four of
the witnesses were at the Woomera open-air
66 NEXUS
theatre and were seated together: Warrant
Officer H., Warrant Officer W., J. A. (chief
baker at the Department of Supply) and
Sergeant P.
In his report, Sergeant P. makes several
observations, and considering he was an
officer at Woomera he would have
observed test flights and been familiar with
rockets and jets. He saw that the cigar-
shaped object had two portholes and interi-
or lighting. (Now why would an unmanned
rocket need portholes and interior lighting?)
It travelled faster than any jet aircraft he'd
ever seen. And in his statement he says he
was not prepared to say whether this thing
was an Earthly object. W. states it was not
a falling star, and was faster than any air-
Woomera Prohibited Area
is now the size of England
and covers 127,000 square
kilometres. In the early
1950s, Woomera covered
270,000 square kilometres.
craft he'd ever seen. H. comments that he
heard no noise, and that it was definitely
something other than anything from the
heavens, meaning a comet or shooting star.
The other witness was the wife of a service-
man and gives the same description from
another location in Woomera township.
The interesting part is where the Chief
Security Officer forwards all the reports
from the investigator to the State Security
Office in Adelaide under the title "Flying
Saucer Observed Over Woomera". In a
brief covering letter he states that the wit-
nesses are all reliable and sober and that a
cigar-shaped object, "whether man made or
not", was observed. A copy is then on-for-
warded to the Deputy Chief Security
Officer in Melbourne. A paper trail has
begun.
It then transpires that the Advertiser
newspaper also published reports of the
same object, sighted by different witnesses
in other parts of the state. (Any news clip-
pings regarding flying saucers were cut out
and retained by the various defence forces.
We found a lot of them.)
www.nexusmagazine.com
And so a file is now bornRSO
52/618and becomes part of a greater file.
Snow clouds don't do 90 turns
This next report from Woomera is from a
radar officer who was on duty at the time of
this event. I have the original Defence
Department tracking map to back up these
statements:
At 1.45 pm while searching for a
Mustang on G1, a target was locked
onto in the Shell Lagoon Area. On
looking through the telescope on the
radar dish, no target could be seen.
The signal-to-noise ratio was at least 5
to 1, which is similar to that obtained
from a large aircraft. Between 1.45
and 2.00 pm the target came to with-
in a mile distant, and still could not
be seen. At 2.05 pm I decided to
plot the course of the target. At
times during the movement of the
target, SMALLER targets seemed
to detach themselves from the main
target and drift away.
There are numerous contradictions
surrounding this event. The official
explanation, by the way, turned out to
be a snow cloud. However, the officials
shot themselves in the foot on that one.
The report is titled "Flying Saucer
Phenomenon over Range G1"not an
anomalous snow cloud! The file
summary on the weather conditions is as
follows, and I did check these conditions
independently:
Fine, high cloud @ 25,000 feet, warm
temperature, 84 degrees Fahrenheit
[27 degrees C]. Strong, northerly wind
(2530 mph), which blew from the
inland desert.
And this is where it gets strange (my
emphasis in bold):
In view of the foregoing weather report
and the absence of any visual sighting,
the signals probably came from a
cloud.
In a report put together two weeks later,
after other radar operators were questioned,
the object is referred to as the "invisible
phenomenon"and because no object was
visible, there was nothing of security inter-
est. (So if you can see it, it can't be all bad.)
But in the very same report, one paragraph
above this one, it reads (my emphasis in
bold):
...the fact that small portions were
breaking away tends to show that
whatever it was on radar was
STRANGE Times 2006

registering the target very efficiently on
something other than ordinary snow.
So there goes the snow theory. Doesn't
make sense, does it?
In the second paragraph on the same
piece of paper it reads:
...the phenomenon was locked to his
radar beam for a period of at least 24
minutes which in NO WAY can be com-
pared with Flying Saucer phenomenon
of previous reports.
So I take it from that comment that they
knew pretty much how a flying saucer
behaved!
UFO filmed during rocket launch
My next slide shows some correspon-
dence regarding the sighting of a UFO
filmed during a Skylark rocket test back in
April 1967. We are yet to locate that film.
Some of the transcript reads as follows:
I spoke to you some weeks ago about a
report of UFO sightings during a
Skylark launch...have you had the films
examined?
The superintendent was most upset that
the report he requested had not found its
way to his desk. (We encountered many
significant handwritten notes on the files we
examined.)
From 400 mph to Mach 5 3,600
mph in just 10 seconds!
In May 1954, a dark grey circular disc
was observed by a Woomera radar operator
through binoculars, pacing a Canberra
bomber directly above it. The cruising
speed of a Canberra bomber was around
400 mph. The disc flew up to the
Canberra, paused over the top of it,
remained stationary (seemingly) above the
bomber, then flew away at great speed.
Radar operators who took the bearing on
the target timed it between two points and
realised that this object was doing in excess
of 3,600 miles per hour, or Mach 5, and yet
it appeared to be stationary seconds before-
hand. The radar operator who witnessed
the event is quoted as saying:
...during this time I found it very hard
to believe what I was seeing, so I shut
my eyes and looked again, and it was
still stationary over the Canberra.
What makes this guy so believable is that
he worked for VickersArmstrong. They
made aircraft. He knew what he was look-
ing at.
Mach 1 was officially reached in October
1947 (there's that date again) by Chuck
STRANGE Times 2006
Yeager (The Right Stuff) in a Bell X-1 air-
craft. Mach 2 was reached in December
1953, and Mach 3 in September 1956. It
took a further five years to achieve Mach 4
in March 1961, and shortly after that Mach
5 (3,603 mph) was achieved on 23 June
1961seven years after something else did
it at Woomera. Mach 6 was reached on 9
November 1961. It then took us 43 years,
officially, to get from Mach 6 to Mach 7 in
March 2004, although according to my
sources Woomera achieved Mach 7 two
years ago.
But what's most interesting about this case
(and you really need to get your head around
this) is that the object went from about 400
mph to 3,600 mph in just 10 seconds! In
1954!
Hot Spots, Sightings at Milne Bay,
Papua New Guinea
One of the most intriguing things I found
throughout my Disclosure journey refers to
a series of reports coming out of Papua
New Guinea, in particular the Milne Bay
area. Considering the number of files I've
scanned, this area was by far the most
active that I'd come across, next to
Woomera.
Milne Bay is on the easternmost tip of
Papua New Guinea, bordered by the
Solomon Sea above and the Coral Sea
below. The surrounding islands and seas
were rife with reports of all kinds of weird
and wonderful sightings. I believe there
may well be an underwater base in this area,
because of the number of sightings over
such a great period of time and also because
the survey map indicates that the ocean is
very deep in this area.
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
The seabeds around these islands are lit-
tered with underwater caverns.
What was seen but wasn't on the
radar at Santa Cruz?
The area of the Santa Cruz Islands, bor-
dering the Coral Sea near Vanuatu, is the
subject of my next report. HMAS Anzac
reported that at 5.45 pm on Thursday 5 May
1966, when in position near the Santa Cruz
Islands, four unidentified flying objects
were sighted at about 20 degrees above the
horizon by the navigating officer and by
several other officers who were not on the
bridge at the time.
These objects were quite distinct and
appeared closely grouped, the leading
object glowing red and the three trailing
objects green in colour and forming an
equilateral triangle with its apex towards the
leading object. They left trails of colour in
their wakes but these did not last. The trails
were approximately six times the length of
the objects.
After the objects had disappeared behind
cloud ahead of the ship, they reappeared
one more time before disappearing once
again into cloud cover. The approximate
time in sight was not more than 25 seconds,
and the objects were travelling at a very
high speed.
No radar contacts were detected at the
timealthough there is a handwritten nota-
tion on this report to re-check all radar
imaging for that day. There are two for-
warding reports and there's another note
clearly stating that this report should "not
find its way to the Australian UFO file". It
is signed by the Director of Naval
Intelligence.
NEXUS 67
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
U2 spyplane over Tasmania! per cent of any given file with names and It was set up to review certain interesting
Over the years, there have been a number details on them "for research purposes", so cases that were found to be either
of occasions when UFO researchers have that's why we want anyone with an interest inconclusive or inexplicable in terms of
run into UFO sightings generated by obser- in this subject to obtain a copy of the CDs "Earthly Origin". Following is an extract
vations of "secret" aircraftflying triangles to see for themselves what a goldmine of from a letter from the Director of Naval
being a perfect example. information is now on record. Intelligence:
Are they or aren't they ours? To the best Some of the most interesting reports are 2. It is advised that the reports have
of our knowledge, no Australian researcher from air bases in all States, particularly been passed to the Committee which
or group has suggested that "secret aircraft" Pearce in Western Australia, Woomera in has been set up to consider such
have been the cause of any Australian UFO South Australia, and Williams at Laverton in reports. The Committee desires to
reports. Victoria. There are reports from TAA and express its thanks for such a well-
It was therefore with surprise that we QANTAS pilots. There are hundreds of authenticated sighting.
came across the following report when individual sighting reports, fully This Committee actually seems rather
reviewing an RAAF UFO file. documented, from every part of Australia, pleased to get such a well-documented and
A Department of Agriculture inspector including from personnel on oil platforms, authenticated report, obviously because this
reported a UFO sighting to the RAAF in cargo ships and naval vessels as well as from is what they were there for. The report in
May 1961. Following is a reconstruction of police officers and the general public. The question is on the Nowra Incident.
the incident, based on the information locat- list is huge.
ed in a digital copy of file series A703: So what does the Government real-
At 8.35 am on 25 May 1961, chil- ly know about UFOs?
dren were playing in the backyard of a There are hundreds of Not as much as they could, because
house in Devonport, Tasmania. The individual sighting reports, they seem to do very little analysis on
children saw something in the sky the reports they gather, but I'm only
which caused them to get a "Mr Y." fully documented, from every surmising this. I'm quite sure that if they
out of the house. This male witness part of Australia, including had a piece of alien bumper bar, they
reported seeing one definite object in from pilots, personnel on oil wouldn't have documented it in the
the sky. It was "silvery but not reflec- Archives for us to look at.
tive" and was "shaped like a ther- platforms, cargo ships and naval I think they know everything they
mometer or a pencil without a point". vessels as well as from police need to know for now, and you can bet
No detailed structure was noted, and they have files that will never see the
there was no sound associated with the officers and the general public. light of day. But one thing's for sure:
sighting. The object's speed was stated they would have someone, somewhere,
as "slow". It was seen to the north-north- who knows a damned sight more than
west of Devonport, travelling in a straight I guess we will still plod through the we do.
line. enormous amount of information at the About the Author:
Question 26 on the RAAF Report Form, NAA, because in order for you to look at Debbie Payne, based in Adelaide, South
which was filled in by the RAAF the files on their web page you have to Australia, has worked as a technical adviser in
interviewer, asks for the "Location of any air request each file to be examined and made the construction industry for the last 20 years.
traffic in the vicinity at the time of sighting". available. Until she had her first UFO sighting at close
Typed here are the words, "U2 aircraft over We have a master list of around 110 pos- range about 10 years ago, she was a sceptic.
Great Lake at approximately 8.15 am sibly relevant files. The RAAF has files on From 1994 to 2002, Debbie was involved
travelling in a northerly direction, leaving a UFOs from 1984 to 1994, so we need to with the Australian International UFO and
distinct vapour trail". take a look at these. Flying Saucer Research Organisation, which
What were we doing with a U2 spyplane The aim is in two or three years' time to has been meeting since 1952. In mid-2002,
flying over Tasmania in 1961? use our solid material to become politically together with ufologist Keith Basterfield, she
formed an eight-member, self-funded research
active in seeking other information from the group, the Australian UFO Research
The research journey Australian Government and then to lobby Association (AURA).
During the course of our research, AURA the government to declare openly what their This article is based on Debbie Payne's pre-
has looked at hundreds of report forms, knowledge is on the topic of UFOs. sentation at the Australian National UFO
sketches, photographs and records on so Conference in June 2004. The full text can be
many different types of UFOs it's The mysterious "Committee" found at the webpage
staggering. And we haven't even finished In all the files I reviewed, there were only http://disclosure.freewebpage.org/
10 per cent of what could be released. two references that I came across to "the Article%20text%2022.6.04.htm.
I have only recounted a few sightings Committee". Both were from very-high- Debbie Payne can be contacted at the
from the hundreds if not thousands of sight- ranking military personnel. Australian UFO Research Association, PO
ings on record. It would be almost impossi- I believe the Committee was attached Box 786, North Adelaide, SA 5006,
Australia; telephone 0413 800 143 (mobile;
ble to present them all to you, so that's why originally to the Joint Intelligence Australia only), email
we are putting all this information on CDs. Organisation and had firm ties to the Chiefs disclosureaustralia@yahoo.com.au, website
Under Crown copyright, I can only show 10 of Naval and Air Force Intelligence. http://www.disclosure.freewebpage.org.

68 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 69
 Anomalous Creatures
W hat compendium on strangeness would be complete without mentioning the plethora of
anomalous creatures still being reported around the world? Included in this section are:
Chupacabras: These bizarre creatures have been widely reported terrorising neighbourhoods in
many parts of South and Central America including the island of Puerto Rico (where some suggest
Chupacabras have some association with a US military base). They have also been reported in some
areas of the mainland United States such as New Mexico and even New Jersey (see the Internet
accounts of the "Jersey Devil"). There have been dozens of eyewitness sightings, scores of incidents
where humans have been attacked, and hundreds of cases where chickens, goats, cats, dogs and
cattle have been killed. The descriptions are all of the same type of creature, and sightings are being
reported to this day.
Bunyips: Most of us would assume that these are mythical creatures known only to the
Aborigines, but this is wrong. Scores of early settlers in many parts of Australia reported sightings of
two distinct types of Bunyip which they observed in or around bodies of water. While the habitat of
these creatures has been disturbed with the advance of European settlement, who knows...some of
them may still be out there!
Yowies: Well, in Australia we call them Yowies, although there's a smaller version known by the
Aborigines as Junjadee. Overseas equivalents have been labelled Yeti, Bigfoot or Sasquatch, to name
a few. They have been reported in Scandinavia, right across northern Russia and Siberia, in the
Himalayas, the jungles of South East Asia, the Pacific Islands, the east coast of Australia and, of
course, North America. They all have similar reported characteristics: they're large and hairy, they
move with amazing speed, have superhuman strength, are hominids and they stink! They also seem
to be able to disappear, as if into another dimension, leaving an absence of reliable evidence as to
their presence.
Sea Serpents: These are not just the stuff of drunken sailors' legends! More and more evidence
is emerging for the existence of very large plesiosaur-like creatures that occasionally emerge from the
deep. The creature we call the "Loch Ness Monster" has its equivalent in numerous lakes and inlets
around the world, including in the Hawkesbury River system near Sydney, leading many to believe
that there are still unusual creatures left to discoversomewhere.

Of course, there are many other mystery creatures being sighted around the world, but we don't
have space to cover them here. If you find yourself drawn to this topic, look up the word
"cryptozoology" on the Internet and you'll find hundreds of pages of accounts and research from
almost every country imaginable.
While we've received reports on yowies, bunyips and sea monsters in Australia, we've also read
accounts of other kinds of anomalous creatures such as large dog-like cats, mountain lions (warrigals)
and black panthers, 30-foot-long lizards and hairy spiders the size of a dog!

If you've had any experiences of weird or strange creatures, we would love to hear from you.

70 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 CHUPACABRAS
The Mysterious Bloodsuckers

T
here's a dangerous, mysterious beast lurking in the wilds of Puerto Rico," the San
Juan Star newspaper announced on 19 November 1995. A similar creature that
locals say punctures its victims and leaves bloodless holes made headlines in
1996 in Miami, Florida; Tucson, Arizona; San Jos, Costa Rica; and in Jurez
In 1995- 96 a and several other areas of Mexico. But it was Puerto Rico where the current cycle of
vampire-like attacks was first reported.
strange vampire-like On 11 March 1995, near a town called Orocovis in the centre of the island, Enrique
Barreto Hernandez found eight of his sheep dead. Each sheep had three strange puncture
creature went on holes in the chest, and the wounds were described as "bloodless". Over the spring and
summer months, reports of similar attacks spread from the centre of the island to far-flung
the rampage in towns such as Gunica on the southwest coast, Naguabo on the east coast, and Canovanas
regions of Puerto between San Juan and El Junque rainforest. As word spread that blood was being sucked
from sheep, goats and other farm animals by an unidentified creature, the Spanish words
Rico, Mexico and chupar ("to suck") and cabras ("goats") were put together in a catch-all word,
chupacabras, as a name for the marauder.
southern USA, By November, several hundred animals including goats, sheep, rabbits, chickens, dogs
and guinea hens had been found with puncture holes which averaged about a quarter-inch
killing animals and wide and three-quarters of an inch deep. Veterinarian Dr Carlos Soto of Levittown,
Puerto Rico, examined one rabbit that had an exceptionally deep wound. He reported that
even attacking the "puncture wound was half a centimetre wide at the base of the jaw and extended
about three to four inches into the base of the brain. There was no haemorrhaging either;
humans. no blood at all. I don't know what kind of natural predator could do that."
Eyewitness descriptions have varied in different parts of the island. On the west end, in
the Sabana Grande and Lajas regions, there have been reports of a primate-like creature.
For instance, on 21 December 1995 near Gunica on the southwestern coast, 44-year-old
With links to UFOs mechanic Osvaldo Claudio Rosado was washing his car at 3 am, but when he went to shut
off the water faucet he was suddenly grabbed from behind. As Rosado tried to fight off
and age-old fables, the intruder, he was shocked to see a black-haired "gorilla", about five feet tall. The ani-
mal ran off and Rosado drove to the Tito Mattei hospital in Yauco to have doctors exam-
these 'chupacabras' ine and treat cuts in his abdomen, possibly torn by fingernails or claws on the animal's
hands.
incidents still defy I visited the University of Puerto Rico Primate Center which studies rhesus and patus
monkeys now living inland. Those animals escaped from an island south of Lajas where a
explanation. government research project was conducted in the 1960s. A Civil Defense investigator
told me: "Back then, they didn't know those monkeys could swim. But they can, and
now those monkeys live north of Gunica and Sabana Grande." However, rhesus and
patus monkeys don't stand five feet tall and are basically vegetarians, not bloodsuckers.
At the other end of the island in towns such as Dorado, Aguas Buenas and Canovanas,
residents have come face to face with a large-eyed creature that has red-coloured feathers
or spikes from its head to the bottom of its spine. Some say the eyes glow red in the dark.
by Linda Moulton Howe 1996 Homicide detective Eliezer Rivera Diaz from Carolina, Puerto Rico, told television
LMH Productions reporters that he watched the spikes on such a creature glow with light as it rose straight
PO Box 21843 into the night sky.
Albuquerque, NM 87154, USA The chupacabras' hands and feet are described as having only three toes and fingers but
Fax: 0011 1 505 797 7908 with two-inch-long nails. It is also said to have small, pointed ears and "thin, patchy or
E-mail: earthfiles@earthfiles.com spotted hair" in shades of grey, brown and orange. "It smelled like a wet dog or like it had
Website: http://www.earthfiles.com been in a sewer," said one Canovanas police officer who shot at a peculiar creature while
it attacked his dog.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 71

 Some residents are convinced that the chupacabras is linked to
the flying discs that are often seen in the skies above Puerto Rico.
In June 1995, Mrs Enrique Gonzales and her six-year-old daugh-
ter were outside around 11.30 pm on a warm summer evening.
Mr Gonzales heard both of them scream and immediately ran over
to them, whereupon he saw a huge, round, glowing object. His
wife and daughter told him they were watching the object when
suddenly a red beam of light came out and touched the little girl
on her upper right arm. Mr Gonzales reported that his daughter's
skin reddened in a circle and "bubbled up" where she'd been hit
with the beam.
Photographer Eddie Deese Conde, from El Vocero newspaper,
eventually heard about the incident and travelled to the Gonzales'
home. Conde told me later that by the time he got there the little
girl's upper arm had several bumps, but the redness had gone.
Two months later in September, Mr Gonzales' wire chicken
coop was violently torn apart and nine of the birds lay dead with
bloodless holes in their necks, legs or backs. "It was the chu-
pacabras," he said emphatically, "and I think it came from that
UFO!"
Even though there was no direct or proven connection between
the two incidents, the notorious chupacabras was beginning to be
blamed for every animal death. Privately, many locals worried
that the chupacabras might attack humans.
In the town of Canovanas, in the first week of August 1995,
Miguel Agosta got up in the early morning to walk across the
Drawing of a large, black creature with huge, round, red, reflective
eyes, which computer technician Juan Murati saw as it sat in a tree
near his home in Canovanas, Puerto Rico, at the end of September
1995. (Drawing by Juan Murati)
72 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
The Carolina homicide
detective said he watched
in disbelief as the strange,
glowing animal rose into
the air.
street from his home to the auto garage where he works as a
mechanic. His wife, Madalyne, was home with their children and
that day she was helping her mother who lived next door.
Miguel's first job was to fix a truck he had left with its hood up
the night before. He said that when he got into the driver's seat to
start the engine, "There was a terrible noise, a loud thumping, and
then I saw a creature land on the ground near me. It was about
three to four feet high and it moved in a crawling way. But then it
just stood next to the cyclone fence about eight feet away and
jumped straight over into the tall grass. A few hours later, my
wife and her mother saw the same creature on the sidewalk in
front of our house."
Madalyne Agosta told me that she was helping her mother
clean her house and was washing the front window when she saw
two people walking backwards on the sidewalk, not more than
five feet away, with their eyes wide open as if scared. Puzzled,
she continued to watch and was shocked when a "creature I had
never seen before" came walking slowly in front of her on the
other side of the window.
"This creature was standing in front of me for at least a
minute," Madalyne said. "And the thing that really impressed me
were the eyes. I get scared every time I have to talk about this
because it seems to me it looked like one of those extraterrestrials
that you see in movies: long, slanted eyes that were dark grey.
The whole eyes were like wet Jello. It was holding two hands up
kind of limply and I could see three fingers that looked human
except there were nails about two inches long. The feet looked
human, too, but they had only three toes separated by big spaces
in between. There was a lot of mud on the feet. Going down the
back were red feathers or something about four inches long.
When I started screaming, that's when my mother came."
Madalyne's mother told me, "At the beginning I thought it was
a kangaroo because the nose and face was kind of long and point-
ed out a little. But when I saw the back, I could see some red
feathers that were laid down. And I looked to see if it had a tail,
but it had no tail. Then I thought it was not a kangaroo. Then it
just started running across the street and hid itself in the grass."
The mud and water smell suggests that the creature hides out in
sewer ducts, underground caverns and springs or somewhere that
is wet. The situation is even more confusing when scattered
reports that the chupacabras can fly are taken into consideration.
The Carolina homicide detective said he watched in disbelief as
the strange, glowing animal rose into the air. This high strange-
ness in the chupacabras reports has provoked some investigators
to speculate that the creature might even be a new biological
android created by whatever pilots the discs. More terrestrial
explanations have been fruit bats or flying foxes which have big
STRANGE Times 2006
 marks. "I have never seen anything like it, ever," he told Houston
Chronicle reporter Dudley Althaus in early May. "A coyote never
Finally, he managed to free himself kills the way these sheep were killed. The coyotes and jungle cats
and started running. Then he was in the area devour their prey, rip it apart. The dead sheep had
only puncture wounds."
startled to hear a loud noise, like a jet The sheep that Dr Lara referred to belonged to Violeta
taking off. When Pulido turned and Colorado, a 27-year-old mother with two small children.
Colorado found nine of her sheep dead in a pasture next to her
looked back, the creature had already house. None of the sheep had been eaten, but their throats had
mysteriously disappeared. been punctured, leaving bloodless holes. Several of the dead
sheep were taken to Villahermosa, the Tabasco state capital about
30 miles away, for further examination. So far, no official reports
have been released to the public.
Mexican eyewitnesses in close encounters with the chu-
wing spansbut their bodies aren't four to five feet long. pacabras report hearing a screeching sound like a wild turkey or
And what was sitting on a tree branch near the home of com- even a sound similar to a jet airliner taking off.
puter technician Juan Murati at five o'clock in the afternoon at the In the first week of May 1996, a man named Jos Angel Pulido
end of September 1995? As he explained, "I was walking to my from Tlajomulco, Jalisco state, reported to doctors and police that
car when I had the feeling someone was looking at me. I take a he was walking home through the small farming community at
glance and I see it, and I see the big red eyes, and I say, 11.30 pm when, ahead of him in the dimly-lit street, he saw a dark
'Chupacabras!' And I got worried, scared." shape that he first thought was a dog lying asleep. When he got
Pointing at a tree branch about 50 feet away, Juan said, "He was closer, the dark shape sprang for his head. Pulido said he felt pain
right there. He was sitting upright, not hanging down like a bat, in his right arm and tried to fight off the creature with his left arm.
but upright about two feet tall. And he was all black, a non- He said the attacker had no hair and that when he was hitting it,
reflective black, like a bat, but non-reflective. The eyes were real- it felt like "a plastic bag filled with soft jelly; no bones, no mus-
ly round, the size of oranges. And the eye colour was red like a cles". Pulido also said that the shape of the creature's head
ketchup bottle or a Coca-Cola can. Very reflective, very glassy, reminded him of an owl'slarge and round. Finally, he managed
the eyes. I kept walking without showing the animal I had fear. to free himself and started running. Then he was startled to hear a
Then I hear this sound, 'plah, plah, plah, plah, plah', and he's fly-
ing away."
Juan Murati has his house surrounded by a tall chain-link fence
with barbed wire on top and guarded by five pit bull dogs. One
day, a month after he saw the black flying creature in the tree, he
found his largest and strongest male pit bull with two puncture
holes in its neck.
"I came here as I do every day to feed the dogs," Juan said,
"and I saw the classical vampire marks on the big dog, the male.
So I went to the police and from the police I went to Mayor
Chemo Soto in Canovanas. He asked me what I thought it was
if I thought it was the demon, the devil, or from outer space. All I
can say is I saw what I saw and that was it."
I showed a Philadelphia vertebrate biologist (who wishes to
remain anonymous) several chupacabras drawings I have collect-
ed, including Juan Murati's sketch. The biologist emphasised that
vampire bats don't sit upright in trees and don't make 3/4-inch-
long punctures. Their front teeth are sharp and the bat makes sev-
eral shallow cuts on its victim's skin and then licks off the blood.
He doubted the credibility of the reports because "animals fall into
categories which have long been studied and are recognisable.
This is like a concoction that makes no sense, and therefore I
doubt the accuracy of the eyewitnesses." When I showed him
Juan Murati's drawing, he guessed the creature was an owl but
admitted that owls are not solid black in colour.

CHUPACABRAS REPORTS BEYOND PUERTO RICO

On 11 May 1996, Molly Moore, reporting from Mexico City
for the Washington Post, wrote: "First came the reports of goats,
then lambs and roosters, massacred in the night and drained of
their blood. The only evidence of their attackers: large fang
marks on the animals' necks."
But Dr Mario Santiago Lara, a veterinarian from Zapotal,
southeast of Mexico City, disagrees that the wounds are fang
Drawing by Jos Miguel Agosta of the chupacabras creature he
saw early one morning in the first week of August 1995. The
unknown animal leapt from a truck that Agosta was repairing. It
hit the ground about eight feet away and then leapt straight up
over a chain-link fence and disappeared into tall grass.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 73

 The NBC affiliate in El Paso, Texas, sent
a camera crew to investigate. In one of
their reports, broadcast 27 March 1996, sev-
eral Jurez children showed drawings of
what they had seen. The drawings showed
round objects, some with a row of coloured
lights around the middle. One nine-year-old
girl drew a picture of the creature that
attacked her dog as she watched. Her draw-
ing has several similarities to the creature
drawn by Miguel and Madalyne Agosta in
Canovanas, Puerto Rico.
A team of Mutual UFO Network
(MUFON) investigators, led by Yolika
Stone of El Paso, reported that "the area is
very isolated and extremely poor. The peo-
ple live in cardboard and tin shacks with no
electricity or running water. It doesn't seem
that they could have been influenced by
something on TV because they don't have
access to television.
"These children told us that there were
The two puncture marks surrounded by a red inflammation, assumed to have been caused two types of beings that appeared from
by the creature's mouth sucking on Mr Jos Angel Pulido's arm when it attacked him UFOs on various occasions: one short and
during the first week of May 1996 in Tlajomulco, Jalisco, Mexico.
(Photograph from Telemundo News videotape, with their permission) one slightly taller. The beings floated to the
ground by a beam of light coming from the
loud noise, like a jet taking off. When Pulido turned and looked UFO that hovered one metre from the ground.
back, the creature had already mysteriously disappeared. "The children told us of another incident with their school bus.
Pulido's attacker put two puncture holes, each about one-quarter A bright light hit the bus and the bus stalled. The light came from
of an inch wide, in his right arm about two inches above his elbow a UFO that hovered over the bus." The UFO was estimated to be
crease. A third triangle-shaped puncture was evident in Pulido's 50 feet in diameter.
right wrist where he thought his arm had been held while the crea- "The children also told us about their animals. The dogs were
ture sucked at the puncture holes. Videotape of the wound shows put into suspended animation. There were also animal mutilations
a reddish ring around the puncture holes that looks like a suction of horses, dogs, sheep, goats and cows. Apparently they were bit-
mark. Pulido said he felt nauseous for about three days afterward. ten and the blood was drawn out."
Some people wonder if the chupacabras is beamed up into an Over the border in Tucson, Arizona, 28-year-old Jos O.
overhead UFO, especially since eyewitnesses in Jurez, Mexico, Espinoza of North Palomas Avenue on the west side of the city,
have reported seeing silver, saucer-shaped craft and strange, small encountered a creature in the house in the early morning of 1 May
beings since January 1996. 1996. "It had big red eyes, a pointy nose, pointy ears and a wrin-
kled face," Espinoza said. It "mumbled
something" at him and "hopped away" into
his seven-year-old son's bedroom, hopped
up onto the bed and then out of the open
window. Espinoza said the animal smelled
like a wet dog and left footprints and hand-
prints all over his house. He called the
police who came with an unfortunate atti-
tude of ridicule, examined a handprint on
the refrigerator door and told Espinoza it
was his three-year-old son's handprint.
Whatever people are seeing in Puerto
Rico, Mexico, Costa Rica and southern
parts of the United States, there are correla-
tions in the historical records of recurring
cycles of events involving unknown crea-
tures which attack animals.

Juan Murati's pit bull dog suffered two puncture holes in its neck, just one month after Juan HISTORICAL REPORTS OF STRANGE
saw the black creature sitting in the tree near his house. This dog, one of five which patrol ANIMAL KILLINGS
Murati's house as protection, survived the attack. "But," Juan asked, "how did anything get In the spring of 1975 in Moca, a town in
to my pit bull's neck like that without a horrible fight?" The dog had no other marks on its the northwestern corner of Puerto Rico, "the
body and there were no signs of struggle inside the high barbed-wire fence that surrounds Vampire of Moca" was on the rampage,
Juan Murati's home. killing livestock and scaring residents. On

74 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

15 March, the local newspaper, El Vocero,
appealed to the government to investigate.
The first victims of "the Vampire" were
cattle. Then came a report from farmer
Hector Vega Rosado who was shocked to
find two of his goats dead with wounds
under the thorax and above the haunches
from something very sharp. The next day
he found 10 more of his goats dead, seven
wounded and another 10 missing altogether.
He could see no blood around any of the
one-inch- deep holes in the carcasses.
In 1925, the Woodbury Daily Times in
New Jersey, USA, printed a detailed
drawing by an alleged eyewitness of what
was dubbed the "Jersey Devil". According
to the newspaper report, a farmer found a
strange beast that was consuming his
chickens. He described it as being "as big as Jos Angel Pulido from Tlajomulco in Jalisco state, Mexico, showing a Telemundo
a grown Airedale with dark fur, having a television reporter the puncture marks in his arm after the attack in early May 1996.
kangaroo-fashioned hop; forequarters, (Photograph from Telemundo News videotape frame, with their permission)
higher than its rear, which were always
crouched, and hind feet with four webbed toes. Its eyes are very
yellow and its jaw is neither dog, wolf nor coyote. Its crushers in
the lower jaws each have four prongs into which the upper teeth fit
perfectly."
In December 1993, a park ranger named John Irwin was
patrolling the Wharton State Forest in New Jersey. He reported
that he "noticed a large, dark figure emerge from the woods. It
stood like a human, over six foot tall, and it had black fur that
looked wet and matted."
The official Forest Service report about the incident continued:
"John sat in his car only a few feet away from the monster. His
initial shock soon turned to fear when the creature turned its deer-
like head and stared through the windshield. But instead of gaz-
ing into the bright yellow glow of a deer's eyes, John found him-
self the subject of a deep glare from two piercing red eyes."
In Europe and other countries, fables about mythical beasts of
Drawing of the "Jersey Devil", based on an alleged eyewitness
close encounter. It was published in a 1925 edition of the
Woodbury Daily Times, New Jersey, USA.
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
horrible form which attack people and animals have been passed
down through the centuries. And back on the island of Puerto Rico
there is the tradition of the plenasongs which describe a "terrible
animal" having an ox's head, a bull's horns and a serpentine tail.
One of these songs implores, "Free us from all evil; protect us from
this terrible animal".
What are these strange creatures that seem to 'recycle' them-
selves through the centuries? Are they some unknown, under-
ground life-form that cohabits with us, the surface life of this
planet? Do they come from UFOs, despatched like worker bees
to gather tissue and fluids as part of some unknown agenda? Or
do they slip into and out of an unimaginable place, another time,
another space beyond this dimension? Whatever their origin, they
have left behind hard physical evidence in the foreheads, necks,
backs and stomachs of animals, both dead and still living. And
thousands of people are afraid to go out after dark.
POSTSCRIPT
There have been no other reports of chupacabras attacks on
humans since those May 1996 incidents described in this article,
and puncture attacks on domestic animals have almost ended for
unknown reasons. As quickly as the mystery began in March
1995, it seems to have come to an end, or at least a pause, in the
summer of 1996.
About the Author:
Linda Moulton Howe is a graduate of Stanford University,
USA, and has a Masters Degree in Communication. She has
devoted her film/TV career to documentary and studio pro-
ductions on science, medicine and the environment. Her
documentaries, A Strange Harvest and Strange Harvests 1993,
explored the worldwide animal mutilations which have been
ongoing since the late 1960s. She has written several books,
including An Alien Harvest and Glimpses of Other Realities,
vols. I and II. Ms Howe's investigations have taken in such
diverse subjects as the crop circles phenomenon, the evi-
dence for UFOs and ETs, humanity's hidden history and,
more recently, the chupacabras mystery.
For further information about the author's books and docu-
mentaries, contact LMH Productions (see details at the begin-
ning of this article).
NEXUS 75
76 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006
 T HE B UNYIP M YSTERY
EARLY SIGHTINGS IN VICTORIA

D
uring a very hot January in 1982 I was staying with a friend, Lee Kelly, his
mother, Heather, and his grandmother at their farm at Macarthur near the
Eumeralla River in western Victoria. Lee's grandmother had spent much of her
life on the farm and while reminiscing about life on the land mentioned the
bunyip that once lived on the property. It inhabited a large swamp that was connected to
the Eumeralla River during times of flood.
She had never actually observed the animal itself and did not even regard it as anything
particularly unusual, for she had long grown accustomed to its strange roaring call at
The large aquatic nightuntil the swamp was eventually drained and turned into pasture. I asked her if she
animals seen in had ever seen a brown bittern (Botaurus poiciloptilus), a secretive, solitary bird with
streaky variegated brown and buff plumage that enables it to hide and nest in the dense
Australia's inland cumbungi reed beds. I told her that it has a voice like a deep, distant foghorn and has a
double "woomph-woomph" call. She replied that she had not observed or even heard of
water systems by such a bird and did not believe that it was the call that she was once familiar with. She
knew only of the creature's haunting roaring call and that it was known as a "bunyip".
Aborigines and Sixty-three kilometres north of Macarthur I stayed overnight at the historic Bunyip
Hotel in the town of Cavendish. I asked the publican how the hotel had received its name
European pioneers and he replied that it had been named after an animal that once lived in the nearby Dundas
River, though he had no idea what the animal looked like.
may have been Some time afterwards I discovered that the respected Australian Museum scientist
remnant megafauna Gilbert Whitley had written an article, published in the Australian Museum Magazine in
March 1940, entitled "Mystery Animals of Australia",1 in which he noted that a large
from Pleistocene brown animal with a kangaroo-like head, a large mouth and an elongated neck with a long
shaggy mane had been reported in 1848 to live in the Eumeralla River near Port Fairy.
times. An early settler, Mr I. Best, and his son were recorded as having observed in the Merri
River near Warrnambool in either 1844 or 1845 a large black hairy animal 10 feet (3
metres) long, which Best believed to feed on the "rank herbage" by the river and which
made a terrible noise at night in the swamps, "enough to frighten the strongest nerves,
similar to a bullock having a dreadful cough".
Whitley further recorded similar descriptions by the Aboriginal people of the Port
Phillip district of an aquatic animal with a body that varied from the size of a calf up to a
bullock. It had an elongated neck and head, resembling an emu, with a mane like a horse,
flippers like a seal and a horse-like tail, and they knew it as the tunatpan.
The first European known to have lived in Victoria was the convict William Buckley,
who escaped from the earliest settlement under the command of Lieutenant-Colonel
Collins in 1803. Buckley was a stonemason turned soldier who was apparently falsely
by Gary Opit 2001 arrested during an army uprising. After his escape, the settlement was abandoned and he
lived for 32 years with the Wothowurong Aboriginal people in the Geelong area until the
PO Box 380 next attempt by Europeans to settle Victoria in 1835. He guided the first settlers around
Mullumbimby NSW 2482 the district, described the cultural life of the tribal peoples that inhabited the land and gave
Australia information on the plants and animals. He also described his attempts to identify the large
Tel: 02 6680 5466 unknown aquatic animals that he often observed:2
Email: garyopit@bigpond.com "...in this lake [Modewarre] as well as in most of the others inland, and in the
deep-water rivers [including the Barwon], is a very extraordinary amphibious

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 77

 animal, which the natives call Bun-yip, of which I could settler, E. S. Hall, who later became Coroner and founder of the
never see any part except the back, which appeared to be Bank of New South Wales, stated that in November 1821 in Lake
covered with feathers of a dusky-grey colour. It seemed to Bathurst, a small body of water surrounded by a much larger area
be about the size of a full-grown calf, and sometimes of reed beds, he heard and saw an aquatic animal:7
larger. The creatures only appear when the weather is "One fine morning in November 1821, I was walking by
very calm and the water smooth. I could never learn from the side of the marsh which runs into Lake Bathurst, when
any of the natives that they had seen either the head or my attention was attracted by a creature casting up the
tail, so that I could not form a correct idea of their size, or water and making a noise, in sound resembling a porpoise,
what they were like. When alone I several times but shorter and louder: the head only was out of the
attempted to spear a Bun-yip; but had the natives seen me water. At the distance I stood it had the appearance of a
do so it would have caused great displeasure. And again, bull-dog's head, but perfectly black; the head floated
had I succeeded in killing, or even wounding one, my own about as though the animal was recreating itself; it cut up
life would probably have paid the forfeit; they considering the water behind, but the quantity thrown up evinced nei-
the animal something supernatural." ther strength nor bulk; it remained about five minutes, and
then disappeared. I saw it at a greater distance afterwards,
The Wergaia language people who inhabited the northwestern when it wore the same appearance."
portion of Victoria, bounded by Dimboola,
Lake Albacutya, Yanac and Warracknabeal, He went on to describe how his overseer
knew of two different kinds of bunyip. One had shot one at daybreak after it rose from
species they called a banib (pronounced the water and lay at full length, measuring
"bunnip"), which resembled a large black pig Charles La Trobe, 1.5 metres long, on the reeds and it then
and lived in Lake Hindmarsh; while a second first Governor of the rolled over and disappeared. Other sightings
species was named banip-ba-gunuwar of the animal were consequently made, but
("bunyip and swan"), which was also large
Port Phillip district, no shots were fired. However, he obtained
and dark but with an elongated neck, and began receiving reports another good view of the animal in the sum-
lived in Lake Albacutya.3 of large aquatic animals mer"InofDecember the following year:8
Charles La Trobe, first Governor of the last, Mr Forbes and I
Port Phillip district, began receiving reports from settlers as they were bathing at the eastern end of the
of large aquatic animals from settlers as they spread out over the lake, where an arm runs among the
spread out over the new frontier. From the honeysuckles. As I was dressing, a
descriptions of both Europeans and new frontier. creature, at a distance of about 130 or
Aborigines, he also began to believe 150 yards [117 to 135 metres],
that there were two species of bunyip. suddenly presented itself to my
In 1847 he wrote of a northern and a
From the descriptions view; it had risen out of the water
southern species and managed to pro- of both Europeans and before I perceived it, and was
cure Aboriginal drawings of each, Aborigines, he also then gliding on the smooth sur-
which were subsequently lost.4 face with the rapidity of a whale-
However, further drawings of the began to believe that boat, as it appeared to me at the
two species by Aboriginal artists have there were two species time. Its neck was long, appar-
come down to us in Brough Smyth's ently about three feet [0.9 metre]
The Aborigines of Victoria (1878). 5 of bunyip. out of the water, and about the
One of these drawings was the work of thickness of a man's thigh; the
an unnamed Murray River Aborigine in colour a jet black; the head was
1848 and depicts the pig-like banib. rather smaller in circumference
The other drawing was the work of than the neck and appeared sur-
Kurruk, under the direction of a tribal rounded by black flaps which
elder of the people of Western Port, and depicts the second bunyip seemed to hang down, and gave it a most novel and strik-
species, described as having a head and neck like an emu and ing appearance. The body was not to be seen; but, from
known in their language as a too-roo-don. This type of bunyip the rippling of the water, I judged it to be longer than the
was said to have four legs, each with three emu-like webbed toes, neck. After it had continued for 300 yards [274 m], I
though the drawing has only two emu-like legs. turned to ascertain if Mr Forbes had also seen it, and on
looking again it had dived and was seen no more."
EARLY SIGHTINGS IN NEW SOUTH WALES
Further north in New South Wales, explorers and settlers were Further sightings of this long-necked species were reported
also reporting their sightings of large, unknown, aquatic animals. from New South Wales by the explorer William Hovell in his
On 5 April 1818, explorers Hamilton Hume and James Meehan travels along the Murrumbidgee River. He was told by the differ-
found skulls and bones on the edge of Lake Bathurst, 40 kilome- ent tribes of Aboriginal people he encountered of an aquatic ani-
tres south of the present city of Goulburn, which they believed mal that they referred to as katenpai, kinepratia and tanatbah,
came from an animal that they thought may have been a native according to their different tribal languages.
hippopotamus or perhaps a freshwater dugong. The Philosophical Although their names for the animal were different, the
Society of Australasia offered to reimburse Hume for any expens- descriptions were very similar. Each time it was described as
es incurred if he would return to the lake to obtain a specimen.6 being an aquatic animal with a body up to the size of a bullock,
In a letter to the Sydney Gazette of 27 March 1823, a new with an elongated neck and head resembling an emu, a mane that

78 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

extended from the head to the shoulders, a horse-like tail, four legs
and three flipper-like webbed toes on each foot.
Hovell must have been fascinated with the idea of an unknown
species of large aquatic mammal and wrote an article for the
Sydney Morning Herald that was published on 9 February 1847,
entitled "The apocryphal animal of the interior of New South
Wales".9
One such animal was subsequently said to have been killed by
the Aboriginal people of the lower Murrumbidgee. A local set-
tler, Athol T. Fletcher, heard about it, visited the site near
Balranald and found a strange skull, with blood, membranes and
ligaments still attached, that measured 23 centimetres in length.
Although the top of the cranium, the front of the snout and the
lower jaw were missing, having been chewed at by dingos, all the
Aboriginal people to whom he showed the skull confirmed that it
was in fact the skull of a katenpai and that the missing front of the
jaw would have supported two
downward-projecting large
tusks.
Fletcher showed the skull to
William Hovell who then wrote
to the Sydney Morning Herald,
which on 19 February 1847 pub-
lished his letter describing the
discovery of a bunyip's skull.
Fletcher then took the skull to
Melbourne and showed it to
Governor La Trobe, who
described it as having a long
bill-like snout, the forehead ris-
ing abruptly, the eyes placed
very low, strong grinding teeth
and a very large brain cavity.
The anatomists Dr Hobson and
Mr Greeves examined it, and
then it was sent to the biologist
Ronald Gunn in Launceston,
Tasmania. Dr James Grant
described it in the Tasmanian
Journal of Natural Science
(January 1847) as a young, pos-
sibly even foetal (stillborn or
miscarried) bunyip and said that Emu-headed bunyip, illustrated by Sarah Stevens.
the arrangement of the head and (Source: Josie Flett's book, A History of Bunyips, Australia's
Great Mystery Water Beasts, Free Spirit Press, 1999)
teeth were unlike anything he
was familiar with.
The skull was then returned to New South Wales and given to
Sir Charles Nicholson, Speaker of the Legislative Council in
Sydney, who handed it over to the naturalist William S. Macleay,
who exhibited it in the Colonial Museum (now the Australian
Museum) as the skull of a bunyip. Macleay eventually decided
that it was actually the skull of a deformed colt and a drawing of it
was sent to Sir Richard Owen, curator of the Hunterian Museum
in London, who thought that it was a calf.10 The skull eventually
disappeared, probably having been thrown out as nothing more
than the remains of a domestic animal, even though various
anatomists were unable to identify it as such.
However, a description of the living animal appeared in the
Melbourne Argus on 29 June 1847, written by George Hobler, a
settler at Nap Nap on the Murrumbidgee, to William Hovell. It
described how in May 1847, near Oxley, a white man had
observed what the Aboriginal people of that district called a
kinepratia on a cattle station owned by Mr Tyson, situated 20
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
kilometres from the junction of the Lachlan and Murrumbidgee
rivers, at a time of extensive flooding:11
"The Lachlan when flooded spreads its waters over an
immense extent of lowland, covered with reeds, through
which the water finds its way to the junction with the
Murrumbidgee. There is on the edge of this large reed
bed, about 12 miles from the junction, a cattle station,
recently settled by a Mr Tyson: the river has been over-
flowing these reed beds for some months past.
"Well, some few weeks ago, an intelligent lad in Tyson's
employ, who was in search of the milking cows on the
edge, and just inside this reed bed, where there are occa-
sional patches of good grass, came suddenly, in one of
these openings, upon an animal grazing, which he thus
describes: it was about as big as a six-month-old calf, of a
dark brown colour, a long neck and long pointed head; it
had large ears, which it
pricked up when it per-
ceived him; had a thick
mane of hair from the head
down the neck, and two
large tusks; he turned to
run away, and this creature
equally alarmed ran off
too, and from the glances
he took of it, he described
it as having an awkward
shambling gallop; the fore-
quarters of the animal were
very large in proportion to
the hindquarters, and it
had a large tail, but
whether he compared it to
a horse or a bullock I do
not recollect; he took two
men to the place next
morning to look for its
tracks, which they describe
as broad and square, some-
what like the spread hand
of a man would make in
soft muddy ground. The
lad had never heard of the
kinepratia, and yet his
descriptions in some
respects tally with that of aborigines, who pretend to have
seen them, so that I am inclined to think there is one of
these extraordinary animals still living within a few miles
of me, and I cannot but entertain a hope of being some
day fortunate enough to come in contact with one, and, if
so, I shall do my best to bring him home with me.
"Captain Hovell, who communicates Mr Hobler's letter
to the Herald, gives a similar description of another live
specimen seen by a shepherd on the Murrumbidgee"
Following is that portion of the letter published in the Sydney
Morning Herald of 16 June 1847 that included the shepherd's
sighting:12
"While he was standing on the bank of the Murrumbidgee,
he saw something (similar in appearance to the one men-
tioned in the accompanied letter) rise suddenly out of the
middle of the stream, that it showed, as he supposes, about
half of its figure, and that while in the act of shaking itself,
NEXUS 79
 it caught sight of him and instantly disappeared, but that there were indeed two species of bunyip inhabiting the south-
although the time could not have exceeded a few eastern portion of the continent ranging from South Australia up
moments, he saw sufficient to enable him to describe it to into southeastern Queensland. Different witnesses only rarely
me, and which nearly agrees with what I have been told reported the long-necked species, whereas there were many sight-
by the Aborigines." ings of the short-necked species which was described as pig-like,
dog-like, seal-like and otter-like. The latter species was also regu-
A SOUTH AUSTRALIAN BUNYIP larly reported in Tasmania. These sightings may well have been
On 19 December 1853, the Melbourne Argus published an of seals that had made their way up into rivers and lakes, for the
article entitled "The Bunyip of South Australia", which stated:13 descriptions are always of a seal-like character: glossy black fur,
"A gentleman writing from Rocky River, near Mount dog- or seal-like head and flippers.
Remarkable, under date of 15th instant, says: 'About four In 1863, Charles Headlam and his son Anthony, while rowing
nights ago I was camped close to a large and exceedingly on Great Lake in Tasmania, had a close encounter with the
deep waterhole here... I was startled by hearing a curious animal:15
noise in the water. I jumped up and looked towards the "my oar nearly came in contact with a large-looking
place from which the noise seemed to proceed, and as the beast about the size of a fully developed sheep dogit
moon was very bright I was enabled to perceive a large appeared to have two small flappers, or wings, which it
blackish substance advancing towards the bank and made good use of..."
which, as it approached, raised itself out of the water. I
crept towards it, and perceived that it had a large head and Francis McPartland also observed these animals in Great Lake
a neck something like that of a horse, with thick bristly in 1868 and described three or four of them, dark in colour with
hair. I suppose it must have seen round heads like a bulldog and 90 to 120
me for it proceeded down the centimetres in length, swimming around
river, keeping a few yards from in pairs with their heads and occasional-
the bank towards which it made Different witnesses only rarely ly their shoulders above the surface of
again nearly abreast of my horse, reported the long-necked the water.16
which no sooner saw it than it Back on the mainland in New South
made a rush, breaking the tether
species, whereas there were Wales, the Wagga Wagga Advertiser of
rope and bolting. The noise occa- many sightings of the short- April 1872 reported the observations of
sioned by the horse running away necked species which was a dog-like bunyip known to the
caused my strange visitor to disap- Aboriginal people as the waa-wee and
pear immediately, in consequence described as pig-like, dog-like, seen many times in Midgeon Lagoon,
of which I had not an opportunity seal-like and otter-like. 26 kilometres north of Narrandera:17
of examining it more minutely. "The animal was about half as
From what I saw of it, however, I long again as an ordinary retriever
should think its entire length dog, the hair all over its body
would be from fifteen to eighteen feet [4.5 to 5.5 metres]." black and shining, its coat was very longthe hair spread-
ing out on the surface of the water for about five inches,
SIGHTINGS OF SEALS AND SEAL-LIKE BUNYIPS and floating loosely as the creature rose and fell by its own
This next article on the bunyip appeared in the Moreton Bay motion. I could not detect any tail, and the hair about its
Free Press of 15 April 1857, describing the observations of Mr head was too long and glossy to admit to my seeing its
Stocqueler, a naturalist who was exploring the Murray and eyes; the ears were well marked."
Goulburn rivers in NSW in early 1857 in a canvas boat:14
"Mr Stocqueler informs us that the bunyip is a large fresh- One of the few descriptions of the seal-like bunyip observed out
water seal, having two small paddles or fins attached to of the water was by Captain Sam Southwell, near Canberra in the
the shoulders, a long swan-like neck, a head like a dog, late 1800s, who noted that its rear end had fins or flippers, as
and a curious bag hanging under the jaw, resembling the retold by John Gale, founder of the Queanbeyan Age newspaper:18
pouch of a pelican. The animal is covered with hair like a "He was riding along the banks of the Murrumbidgee
platypus, and the colour is glossy black. Mr Stocqueler River, somewhere above Cusack's Crossing, when he saw
saw no less than six of the curious animals at different a strange animal of proportions akin to those of a three-
times; his boat was within thirty feet [9 m] of one, near month-old calf, basking on a sandbank on the water's
McGuire's Point, on the Goulburn, and [he] fired at the edge. The clatter of his horse's hoofs on the stony ground
bunyip, but did not succeed in capturing him. The small- beneath its feet disturbed the creature, which at once
est appeared to be about five feet [1.5 m] in length, and wriggled, rather than walked, into the deep water and
the largest exceeded fifteen feet [4.5 m]. The head of the disappeared. The rider, dismounting from his steed,
largest was the size of a bullock's head and three feet out descended afoot to the place where this strange animal
of the water." had been basking, and examined closely its trail. This had
the appearance of fins or flippers, and not of feet, visible to
He went on to state that he had observed them travelling at a the water's very edge."
speed of seven knots against the current and had drawn pictures of
them, which he showed to local Aboriginal people who described Pioneer and veteran cattleman T. Hall observed one of these
the drawings as the "bunyip's brother"perhaps meaning a animals at the junction of Swan Creek and Gap Creek on the
duplicate or likeness of the bunyip. Darling Downs during the 1860s or 1870s:19
Most serious bunyip researchers have come to the conclusion "From the first, the blackfellows of the 'Blucher' tribe were

80 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 unanimous in their descriptions of the 'Mochel Mochel',
which in a way corresponded with that of an otter, also
that it was only to be found in and about deep permanent
waterholes; further, that it was a very shy animal which
required great cunning and stealth to get a glimpse of,
owing to its quickness and alertness. I was told that it
could both see and hear underwater. That was particularly
the case as regards anything moving about the bank, in the
vicinity of its home; further, that it could produce sounds
under the water I heard a piercing kind of a scream sim-
ilar to that uttered by a female in terrible distress Much
to my surprise I saw an animal similar to a low-set sheep
dog, the colour of a platypus,
head and whiskers resembling
an otter, passing from the shal-
low water over a strip of dry He described it
land to the deep water."
animal with a big ugly head, a
Seals were actually shot on a num- big mouth full of sharp teeth, a
ber of occasions, far up freshwater
rivers. In 1850, Mr E. J. Dunn, direc-
shaggy mane, a rough coat
tor of the Geological Survey of and an enormous rough
Victoria, watched along with several
other people a group of seals swim- long bushy tail.
ming up the flooded Murrumbidgee
River near Gundagai, 1,200 kilome-
tres from the sea.20 Also in 1850, a seal
was shot, and it was mounted and displayed for many years in the
Carnago Hotel in New South Wales, 1,500 kilometres from the
sea and well away from the main watercourses. In 1859, a three-
metre-long leopard seal with a platypus in its belly was taken in
the Shoalhaven River. Mr R. E. Day, chairman of the South
Australian Pastoral Board, saw and identified a seal 400 kilome-
tres up the Murray River at Overland Corner in 1890.
In the early 1930s, a seal was stranded in a lagoon in the river-
ine swamps of the Murray River between Renmark and Loxton,
500 kilometres from the sea.21 A Canberra fishing writer, John
Turnbull, reported that a seal had been shot
near Deniliquin in 1951.22
The building of dams and other artificial
obstructions may well have put an end to
stray seals venturing far up our waterways
and then being reported as bunyips.
However, sightings of large and mysterious
water creatures continued up until late into
the 20th century in some localities. The
Bunyip of Lismore in far northeastern NSW
was frequently observed in a large lagoon as
late as 1971, feeding on waterfowl. It was
described as very seal-like, with a dog-like
head with small ears.23
with bunyips. Mat Heeb was duck-shooting on the Nerang River
in 1886 and observed an animal with a very large rough mane and
a long bushy tail that dived into water weeds at the edge of a
lagoon. Joe Daly also encountered a bunyip that year when he
was camped beside Merrymac Swamp and described an animal
that "had a big, ugly drafthorse's head, rough mane and coat and a
powerful voice, part bark, part grunt and part roar". Lenz also
described how a friend, Lionel Brown, came face to face with a
bunyip on the land.
He described it as a four-legged animal with a big ugly head, a
big mouth full of sharp teeth, a shaggy mane, a rough coat and an
enormous rough long bushy tail. It opened its mouth and snarled
at him and, of course, he turned and
ran for his life. His sister Faith took
their father's military Marting rifle
as a four-legged and fired at it from the road the next
day. It dived and was not seen again.
Lenz eventually saw a saltwater croc-
odile in these wetlands and believed
that it was responsible for the bunyip
stories.24
Another bunyip was observed on
the NerangCarrara Road during
flooding around about 1903. This
was one of the long-necked, horse-
like bunyips, a shy creature that dived
back into the Nerang River when it
was disturbed. In 1925, Mrs Valmai Natlock heard two bunyips
calling from the swamps almost every night behind Burleigh. In
1965 at Gilston, neighbouring dairy farmers Tommy Hinde and
Billy Hill both heard barking, roaring calls and found the nearby
river churned up with mud splashed high up the riverbanks. A
woman reported that she had seen a shaggy black-haired animal
attack a dog in the river and throw it out of the water.25
Perhaps the final appearance of the bunyip in southeast
Queensland was in August 1986 when a group of teenagers camp-
ing in swampland adjacent to Currumbin Creek fled in terror from

QUEENSLAND ENCOUNTERS
Further north across the border in the
Gold Coast hinterland in southeastern
Queensland, the 800 hectares of lagoons
and swamps stretching from Mudgeeraba to
Burleigh Heads had a very long tradition of
bunyips.
In 1887, Carl Lenz searched the swamps
for two bunyips that he regularly heard call-
ing half a mile apart. He also gathered Palorchestes azael, illustrated by Peter Schouten.
reports from other settlers of encounters (Source: Prehistoric Animals of Australia, Australian Museum, Sydney, 1983)

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 81

a bear-like animal with a high-pitched scream. The Gold Coast
Bulletin published a clear photo of the tracks that measured 5 cm
by 5 cm and a description of the animal by two of the witnesses,
Jason Turner and Grant Thrower, then aged fifteen. "There is no
way it was a wild dog. It was really weird and had a high-pitched
scream. It looked like a small bear, moved on all fours and had a
hump on its back," said Grant Thrower.
"We have been coming here to this area for about a year and a
half and I have never seen anything like this," added Jason
Turner. "After fleeing the camp and boarding the boat, I shone
the torch and saw two big orange eyes. I guess the creature was
one metre high and a metre wide. It terrified us."26
IS THE MACQUARIE RIVER BUNYIP STILL LURKING?
So, the bunyip may have survived into recent times and there is
a remote possibility that it may still lurk within a 200-kilometre
stretch of the Macquarie River between Wellington and Warren
and in the Macquarie Marshes in NSW.
The late Jack Mitchell, who ran a garage in Warne Street,
Wellington, had settled on a river-frontage property at Dubbo
after the Second World War and became interested in the bunyip
after several of his neighbours claimed to have observed them.
He advertised for information and received dozens of reports
between 1947 and 1973 from Aborigines, graziers and tourists,
describing the animals sunbaking on the riverbank, swimming
against the current and thrashing about in the water.
Following a tradition since 1847, the bunyip once again raised
its head above water, perhaps for the last time, to be described as
a living member of our unique fauna in a Sydney Morning Herald
article, this one dated 20 April 1973. Jack Mitchell was quoted as
saying:27
"In every case the animal is the same. It swims in the river,
makes a fearful noise, has a head like a calf and tremen-
Palorchestes azael, illustrated by Frank Knight.
(Source: Kadimakara: Extinct Vertebrates of Australia, Pioneer Design Studio, Victoria, 1985)
82 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
dous strength. Aborigines have told me it flails the water
to foam and easily bursts through their fishing nets."
Unfortunately, all the maps and reports that Jack collected have
gone missing since his passing, and these need to be retrieved if
possible to honour the work of this fine gentleman and to increase
our knowledge of an Australian icon. Whether the Macquarie
River Bunyip was a member of the herbivorous, horse-necked,
maned bunyips or the carnivorous, black dog-like bunyips is also
unknown. There is the possibility that the black dog-like bunyip
was an unclassified native aquatic predator, though there is no
record of such an animal in the fossil record.
THE "TRUE" BUNYIP: A MEGAFAUNA REMNANT?
If you visit the Australian Museum in Sydney and walk through
the Aboriginal cultural display, you can sit within an artificial
cave adorned with rock art and listen to the tape-recorded voice of
an Aboriginal man talking about his own encounter with a bunyip.
He describes the warnings he received from his elders, that the
bunyip ambushed prey at the water's edge at dusk, especially
when a light wind was blowing. He then describes how he went
to the place where the bunyip was known to hunt and observed
what he describes as a giant black water ratlike animal.
So, although straying seals were probably responsible for most
of the more common black dog-like bunyip sightings, we still
have the mystery of the less common, long-necked, maned,
tusked, horse-tailed bunyip. This "true bunyip", the bunyip of
William Buckley, the Eumeralla River Bunyip near Port Fairy, the
tunatpan of the Port Phillip district and the katenpai, kinepratia
and tanatbah of the Murrumbidgee River that William Hovell, the
earliest cryptozoologist, searched for, is still unidentified.
Unlike the black dog-like bunyip which no doubt fed on fish,
was observed to take waterfowl and may even at times have
attacked humans, the true bunyip was a shy, herbivorous animal.
We know from the few observations that
it was a grazing animal that generally
left the water only at night. Its two large
downward-pointing tusks (no fangs or
canines were ever described) identify it
as a Diprotodontid (meaning "two front
teeth") marsupial. The descriptions of
the animal's body clearly point to only
one genus of Diprotodontid. Even the
skull of the "foetal" kinepratia found on
the Murrumbidgee River and examined
by the most respected anatomists
matches this animal.
Finally, of all the herbivorous
megafauna, only one species appears to
have avoided the mass extinctions that
occurred perhaps as long as 40,000 years
ago and was painted by Aboriginal
artists on a very few of the caves in the
Northern Territory.
Tim Flannery, in the Australian
Museum's 1983 book, Prehistoric
Animals of Australia, states:28
"Perhaps no animal is as suited to
have inspired the legend of the
bunyip as Palorchestes azael.
Although a herbivore, it must have
been a fearsome sight. The largest
of the three known species of the
genus Palorchestes azael was the
STRANGE Times 2006
 size of a bull. Its exceptionally massive forearms were So here we have a very large animal with a smallish head, per-
equipped with razor sharp, rapier-like claws up to 12 cm haps on a somewhat elongated thick neck, with powerful though
long, and its bizarre head was crowned with a longish rather immobile forelimbs that were locked at the elbows, claws
trunk. Surely this sight would have been enough to give that almost prevented the animal the ability to move about
any newly arrived Aboriginals second thoughts about set- (though they may have been retractable), and somewhat delicate
tling. And there is little doubt that Palorchestes azael and hindlimbs.
humans were acquainted. In fact, they co-existed in This arrangement would appear to hinder a large and heavy ani-
Australia between about 4020,000 years ago." mal as it wandered slowly about, looking for food. In a land full
of powerfully built marsupial lions that were adapted to prey on
In Riversleigh: The Story of Animals in Ancient Rainforests of big mammals and giant goannas that grew to almost the size and
Inland Australia (1991), further details are provided:29 weight of an Allosaurus dinosaur, it is perhaps unlikely that these
"The Palorchestids are the other half of the Diprotodontid animals staggered slowly about, ripping up bulbs and roots or the
radiationtheir weird half-brothers. The Pleistocene and bark and limbs off trees. The almost immobile forelimbs and
last-surviving species, Palorchestes azael, was about the great claws appear to be adaptations for a very specialised way of
size of a horse. In body shape it resembled no other life that has nothing to do with walking about or climbing trees.
creature known. It had huge koala-like claws, enormously Now this may be a long shot, but perhaps these adaptations
powerful forelimbs, a long ribbon-like tongue and a large were required for a sedentary aquatic lifestyle where the giant
elephantine trunk. Until the skeleton is adequately claws and relatively immobile front legs gripped the substrate of
studied, speculation about what it did for a living will sunken logs and rocks whilst the elongated snout and tongue
continue. Although we are certain that it was a herbivore, moved about, dragging in vegetation.
we are not at all certain about the kinds of plants it ate. In With the buoyancy provided by water, this heavy beast with
contrast to its Diprotodontid delicate hind limbs and immobile front
cousins, its high-crowned, limbs may well have found it easier to
complex teeth probably could move about within swamps and
have withstood the abrasive He received dozens of reports marshes, feeding on reeds and thereby
effects of a grass diet, but this avoiding the powerful terrestrial
simple interpretation feels
between 1947 and 1973 from predators of the time.
hollow when its peculiar limbs, Aborigines, graziers and tourists, With a limited habitat of wetlands,
claws and trunk are considered." describing the animals sunbaking each individual would indeed need a
large territory, which it would define
In Kadimakara: Extinct Vertebrates on the riverbank, swimming with far-carrying bellowing roars. It
of Australia (1985), further against the current and would be a rare animal with slow, low
information is given on this most rates of reproduction.
bizarre animal:30 thrashing about in the water. The probably young kinepratia
"In 1874 Sir Richard Owen observed in the extensive marshes of
described the first-known speci- the Murrumbidgee in May 1847 was
men of Palorchestes azael... The described as "having an awkward
specimen, consisting of the anterior part of the skull...was shambling gallop and the forequarters of the animal were very
discovered in the year 1851 by Dr Ludwig Becker in a bed large in proportion to the hindquarters", which fits with the
of yellowish sand and clay mixed with very small shells, in descriptions of the fossil marsupial tapir. Such an animal would
the Province of Victoria. The distribution and abundance also fit with William Buckley's "very extraordinary amphibious
of Palorchestes bones can give some clues, which are use- animal, which the natives call Bun-yip, of which I could never see
ful in reconstructing the ecology and habitat of these ani- any part except the back, which appeared to be covered with
mals. feathers of a dusky-grey colour"which may well have been the
"Their remains are rare everywhere, indicating that per- extensive mane that was so frequently described. Perhaps the
haps they were solitary animals. This apparent rarity could "elongated neck and head resembling an emu" may have been the
have several causes. If one assumes that their rarity as fos- trunk of the marsupial tapir extending up into the air as the animal
sils reflects their rarity as live animals, it is probable that fed on waterside foliage.
they had low rates of reproduction and occupied relatively The identity of the bunyip has to be addressed. In the past it
large territories or home ranges. has been pushed aside with explanations that the Aboriginal peo-
"The skeletons of the species of Palorchestes are highly ple, who had inhabited the land for something like 50,000 years,
unusual. Perhaps their most striking feature is the structure were a superstitious and ignorant lot who still had not worked out
of the front legs The nature of the articulation of the what lived in their own supermarket. European settlers who
upper and lower arm bones in Palorchestes azael is very observed the bunyip were regarded as obviously of the same ilk.
unusual and appears to indicate that this joint was immo- Consequently the bunyip has been turned into a children's fairy-
bile, the front legs being permanently locked in a partly tale character.
flexed position Perhaps more likely it was a remarkable remnant of Australia's
"The finger bones possess large, semi-circular articulations megafauna, a solitary aquatic herbivore on the edge of extinction,
and appear to have been highly mobile, but only in a for- surrounded on all sides by predatory humans. With the arrival of
wards-backwards direction. In comparison with the fore- Europeans and their cattle competing for forage, the massive habi-
limb, the hindlimb was delicate The massive claws tat destruction with widespread wetland drainage and silting up of
must have presented a problem to the species of the waterways, yet another ancient life form departed this rapidly
Palorchestes, assuming that they walked on the ground." emptying continent.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 83


Endnotes
1. Whitley, Gilbert, "Mystery Animals of
Australia", The Australian Museum Magazine, no.
7, 1 March 1940, p. 135.
2. Morgan, John, Life and Adventures of William
Buckley, A. MacDougall, Hobart, 1852.
3. Hercus, Luise A., "The Languages of Victoria:
a late survey, Part II", Australian Aboriginal
Studies, vol. 17 (c. 1960s).
4. Whitley, ibid., p. 134.
5. Brough Smyth, R., The Aborigines of Victoria:
with notes relating to the habits of the natives of
other parts of Australia and Tasmania, Victorian
Government Printer, 1878, vol. 1, p. 436.
6. Whitley, ibid., pp. 132-139.
7. Hall, E.S., in a letter to The Sydney Gazette
and New South Wales Advertiser, 27 March 1823.
8. ibid.
9. Hovell, William H., "The apocryphal animal
of the interior of New South Wales", Sydney
Morning Herald, 9 February 1847.
10. Barrett, Charles, The Bunyip and other
Mythical Monsters and Legends, Reed & Harris,
Melbourne, 1946.
11. The article published in the Melbourne
Argus, 29 June 1847, was a report of the letter
dated 6 May 1847 that Hobler sent to William H.
Hovell and which was published in the Sydney
Morning Herald, 16 June 1847.
12. Hovell, William, in a letter published in the
Sydney Morning Herald, 16 June 1847.
13. "The Bunyip of South Australia", The Argus,
Melbourne, 19 December 1853.
14. "The Bunyip", Moreton Bay Free Press, 15
84 NEXUS
The Bunyip Mystery
April 1857.
15. Gould, Charles, "Large aquatic animals",
Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Tasmania, 1872, pp. 32-38.
16. ibid.
17. Wagga Wagga Advertiser, April 1872.
18. Gale, John, Canberra: History of and
Legends Relating to the Federal Capital Territory
of the Commonwealth of Australia, A.M. Fallick
& Sons, Queanbeyan, 1927.
19. Hall, Thomas, A Short History of the Downs
Blacks, known as 'the Blucher Tribe', Warwick
Newspaper Co., Warwick, pp. 33-34.
20. Dunn, E.J., "The Bunyip", Victorian
Naturalist, vol. 40, 1923, p. 93.
21. Smith, Malcolm, Bunyips and Bigfoot: In
Search of Australia's Mystery Animals,
Millennium Books, E.J. Dwyer, Sydney, 1996.
22. Healy, Tony and Paul Cropper, Out of the
Shadows: Mystery Animals of Australia,
Ironbark/Pan Macmillan, Sydney, 1994.
23. "Monster search in NSW lagoon", The
Telegraph, Brisbane, 24 September 1971.
24. Lenz, Carl, letter to the editor, "Pioneer
claims that 'bunyips are crocs'", Gold Coast
Bulletin, 28 April 1965. Also "Reminiscences of
a Pioneering Life", The Hinterlander, Gold Coast
(undated clipping in Josie Flett's 1999 A History
of Bunyips, Australia's Great Mystery Water
Beasts, Free Spirit Press, Tyalgum, NSW)..
25. Smith, ibid., 1996.
26. Bailey, Tim, "Beast with orange eyes had
boys flee in terror", Gold Coast Bulletin, 1986
(exact date unknown).
www.nexusmagazine.com
27. Mitchell, Jack, quoted in The Sydney
Morning Herald, 20 April 1973.
28. Flannery, Tim, "A unique trunked giant
Palorchestes azael", in Prehistoric Animals of
Australia (Susan Quirk and Michael Archer, edi-
tors; drawings by Peter Schouten), Australian
Museum, Sydney, 1983.
29. Archer, Michael, Suzanne J. Hand and Henk
Godthelp, Riversleigh: The Story of Animals in
Ancient Rainforests of Inland Australia, Reed
Books, Sydney, 1991.
30. Rich, P.V., G.F. van Tets and F. Knight,
Kadimakara: Extinct Vertebrates of Australia,
Pioneer Design Studio, Lilydale, Victoria, 1985.
About the Author:
Gary Opit is an environmental consultant
with a 25-year career in field research and
public relations in Australia, Papua New
Guinea and Southeast Asia. His skills and
expertise include vegetation and fauna sur-
veying and mapping techniques, plant con-
servation biology and wildlife habitat man-
agement. He lectures to university and
high school students in botany, zoology,
biogeography, Australian and Aboriginal
ecology, and Aboriginal religion and cul-
ture. He has a regular talkback radio pro-
gram on regional ABC Radio 2NR (9 4.5
FM, 720 AM) on Thursdays at 10.30 am.
Gary's article, "Understanding the Yowie
Phenomenon", was published in NEXUS
6/05.
STRANGE Times 2006
 U NDERSTANDING THE
Y OWIE P HENOMENON
Indigenous legends
and eyewitness
reports suggest that
two types of
bipedal primates,
the larger Yowie
and the smaller
Junjadee, inhabit
densely forested
country in
Australia.
by Gary Opit 1999
PO Box 380
Mullumbimby NSW 2482
Australia
Tel: 02 6680 5466
Email: garyopit@bigpond.com
http://www.yowiehunters.com.au
STRANGE Times 2006
I
have a regular talkback radio program on 2NR regional ABC in northeastern New
South Wales, where I talk about the seasonal behaviour of local wildlife and identify
fauna species for listeners from their descriptions of physical features or calls. On 11
February 1997, I received a call from John Morrison of Coffs Harbour, which made
the local news service.
On 15 January 1997, whilst on a family picnic between Station Creek and Dundurrabin
in the Guy Fawkes National Park, Morrison's daughter found a trail of footprints. Each
print was 60 centimetres long. He described them as something similar to a human foot-
print, with obvious left and right prints, 1 to 1.5 metres apart. The big toe was distinct
from a group of other toes that impressed together so they couldn't really be counted. The
heel made the deepest depression: about two centimetres.
The prints were in a dry creek-bed in sandy alluvial soil covered with some scattered
shrubs. John and his family followed the prints for about a kilometre up a long, narrow
gully until it reached a rocky outcrop. There were no fallen leaves or other debris within
the prints, so they were fresh. It appeared to the family that a large, heavy, bipedal animal
had recently walked up the gully. John had heard stories about an unknown animal called
a Yowie, and wanted to know if the creature was generally regarded as real, because, until
then, he was under the impression that they were just fanciful stories.
I told John and the listeners that I had never really believed in the reports in newspapers
about giant furry bipedal primates lurking within our bushland, until I was fortunate
enough to hear at close quarters three different sets of calls that proved to me that there
really was something unknown out there. I gave forth with approximations of the calls
that I had heard, and I would imagine that those calls were the first Yowie territorial calls
ever uttered over the airways.
In 197374, I was studying the fauna of the Papua New Guinean rainforest with biolo-
gists at the Wau Ecology Institute, a field station of the Bishop Museum of Hawaii. Over
a one-year period I recorded fauna species (primarily birds) and their behaviour with an
ornithologist on the slopes of Mount Missim in undisturbed Castanopsis oak rainforest at
Poverty Creek at an elevation of 1,500 metres.
On 6, 14 and 19 December 1973 and on 16 and 25 October 1974, during daylight hours,
we heard very loud and powerful mammal calls consisting of a series of deep, base notes,
repeated without variation over a period of five seconds, that produced a bellowing roar
clearly audible through the rainforest from perhaps a kilometre away. At one instance I
was standing on a rock outcrop above the trees and clearly heard the calls emanating from
a forest valley approximately two kilometres below me. We had particularly specialised
in the identification of fauna from their calls, so were surprised to hear powerful calls that
sounded to my ears as primate-like.
Having spent some time listening to the vocalising of chimpanzees, gibbon and other
primates at Taronga Zoological Gardens in Sydney, I was forced to the conclusion that I
was listening to the calls of a very large and powerful primate. As Papua New Guinea has
an Australian faunal assemblage with no primates, I found it hard to believe that such a
creature as I was hearing could exist.
On 25 November 1973 at Vickery Creek, Mount Missim, at 1,200 metres elevation,
whilst walking along an old logging track towards a bird hide in which an ecologist was
observing nesting superb fruit dove, I observed a dark, bipedal figure crossing the track
200 metres in front of me. I took it to be a native Melanesian, but was surprised to see no
sign of clothing at this high altitude and no weapons, and that, unusually, the figure did
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 85
not walk or even glance along the track but instead moved
through dense vegetation while travelling down the slope. The
ecologist had not observed the figure, even though it was moving
towards the hide.
It was a great mystery to me as to the identification of a human-
like figure, swinging its arms and paying no attention to the track
that it was crossing, especially as we never encountered anyone
else. Even after hearing the subsequent calls, it did not occur to
me at the time that the figure I had observed may have been
responsible for the calls. I had read newspaper articles of Yetis
and Bigfoot in the northern hemisphere, but had never heard of
unknown primate bipeds in this part of the world.
nal silence was broken by the occasional backfire of a car travel-
ling down the mountainside, a tree falling in the rainforest or the
mail plane travelling overhead. Two of the dingoes were approxi-
mately 80 metres to one side of the mysterious animal and the
third was howling at a similar distance on the opposite side. The
sound of these four animals in full cry was the most remarkable
natural sound I have ever heard. Even more important, though,
was that I was able to judge accurately the call of the unknown
animal over the calls of the dingoes that I regularly heard.
The call of the Yowieif that's what it was, for I could equally
refer to it as a Bunyipwas at least twice as loud and much more
powerful than the dingoes', and after their howling finished the
Yowie continued its repetitive bellowing for perhaps another

I
t was not until I returned to Australia that I first read about minute. Then only the sound of Curtis Falls, Cedar Creek and the
Yowies, and I was particularly interested in a close encounter chirping of the crickets remained.
in early 1978 in Springbrook, southeastern Queensland, by a That experience proved to me that there was indeed a very large
National Parks and Wildlife Services ranger. The witness was a and powerful animal dwelling in the localityno matter how
work colleague of a naturalist friend of mine who was able to implausible it seemed. It also provided an answer to a couple of
relate to me a detailed description. the mysteries that I had pondered for some time.
A bipedal, gorilla-like primate, standing 2.5 metres high, with a The first was a local mystery surrounding an unknown carni-
distinctive odour, a grunting voice, a body covered in long black vore that was preying on rednecked pademelons (small wallabies)
hair, a flat and shiny black face, large yellow eyes, a sagittal crest, that had always been common on the mountain, where they fed on
and huge hand, was clearly observed lawns adjacent to rainforest. Our
in Antarctic beech rainforest at 2 pm neighbour at the time, Frank Field, is
in good light from a distance of four a retired jackeroo, drover, tracker,
metres. Several other previous sight- naturalist and farmer. On several
ings on the same mountain and in occasions in 1976 he had encountered
surrounding districts were reported in I could clearly hear the calls kill sites on an adjacent property
local newspapers.
I found these reports extremely dif-
being pumped out of a massive where pademelons had been attacked.
He would find traces of fur and scuff
ficult to believe because I had spent chest, and they sounded more marks on the ground and then several
years studying the flora and fauna in like the call of a big primate metres away the entrails of the walla-
the forests of southeast Queensland, I by, torn from the body and left on the
had read widely on historical and nat- than anything else. grass and leaf litter. The intestines
ural history subjects, and had neither would trail back towards the forest,
suspected nor found any trace that as if the animal had been gutted while
would lead me to conclude that such being carried away.
a remarkable animal could be inhabit- "It definitely wasn't a dingo, which
ing the district. Even more difficult I spent years hunting when on the
to explain was the fact that an unknown primate was definitely land. It was as if the predator had simply lifted the wallaby off
not an expected member of the Australian faunal assemblage. A the ground each time, and carried its prey instead of dragging it
deep channel of open ocean, known as the Wallace Line, has off and leaving traces on the ground as a dingo always does. I
always divided the fauna of Southeast Asia and Australia. This have no idea what animal would be powerful enough to carry a
explains why Asian monkeys, apes, squirrels, cats, deers, rhinos wallaby away and rip its intestines out as it went," he told me.
and elephants, to name just a few, were never able to cross over to Having spent years searching for physical traces of wildlife
this continent. Only humans and their pet dingoes in water craft behaviour so as to identify what species were in a locality, I knew
were successful in undertaking such a hazardous journey. that an unknown herbivore would have left traces of vegetation
Then, on 21 June 1978 at 3 am, on a very quiet night with a full disturbance while feeding, and large, distinctive faeces. However,
moon, I was awakened by a very powerful, continuously repeated if the Yowie were a nocturnal carnivore that remained hidden dur-
roaring, bellowing call emanating from lowland subtropical rain- ing the day and carried larger prey items to secluded locations
forest in Joalah National Park on Tamborine Mountain, 300 where it would feed and defecate, it would be unlikely for evi-
metres from our house, at an altitude of 500 metres. The call was dence of its activities to be noticed.
similar to those that I'd heard in Papua New Guinea, though the The second mystery occurred in 1971 when I was working as a
animal was much closer and the call was therefore even more National Parks ranger at Green Mountains in Lamington National
powerful. It was a deep-throated, booming "yee-yee-yee-yee-yee" Park. One Saturday night, the officer at the ranger's office and
that continued without a break for five minutes, and so was much residence was startled to hear a series of heavy thumps on the out-
longer than the calls that I had heard in Papua New Guinea. I side wall. When he got to a window and yelled out to whoever
could clearly hear the calls being pumped out of a massive chest, was outside to identify themselves, another noisy commotion
and they sounded more like the call of a big primate than anything began beneath the house. He was amazed to see large numbers of
else. It was much more powerful than the roaring-grunting of a heavy working tools, shovels, hoes, rakes, axes and brush-hooks,
koala or even the bellowing of cattle. used in the maintenance of the walking tracks and stored under
After approximately two minutes, three dingoes broke into their the house, flung with great force onto the back lawn. The sound
characteristic howling, as they regularly did whenever the noctur- of heavy grunts amongst the crash of tools terrified him and,

86 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

believing that a madman was attacking the cabin, he ran for his
life up to O'Reilly's Guest House for help.
Campers also arrived at the guest house, informing the staff of
the terrible noises coming from the ranger's cabin, and so a group
walked back to see what was going on. No one had seen people
or vehicles near the house, so rampaging louts were discounted,
and, although dozens of tools now lay on the grass in the dark, no
sign of the madman was found and no explanation for the incident
could be determined.
I arrived on the Sunday night to hear about the incident, and the
next morning we picked up all the tools and stored them away as
before. Then I walked into the rainforest immediately below the
backyard and was surprised to find that our enormous woodstack
had also been attacked. Approximately 7 metres in length, 1.5
metres wide and 2 metres high, and composed of very heavy
pieces of timber held in place by strong timber stakes that had
been sledgehammered into the ground, it now lay completely scat-
tered and most of the stakes had been pulled out of the ground.
It took us the rest of the day to rebuild the woodstack, and we
had absolutely no idea what was responsible for its dismantling.
No human had the power to move so much timber. The regrowth
of the rainforest above and surrounding it was undisturbed, the
weather had been fine, and we knew of no life-form that could
perform such a task. But the call and the reports of a powerful
nocturnal primate at large in the locality now provided an answer:
the ranger's cabin had been attacked by a Yowie.
Yowie sightings have since been recorded occasionally
throughout the locality but, for my own part, years of bushwalk-
ing and flora and fauna surveys have yielded not the slightest
trace of their existence.
Another Tamborine resident, Larry Edwards, heard similar calls
from Guanaba Gorge just after dark on 7 September 1992. They
reminded him of the loud, resonating, shrill, roaring calls that he
regularly heard as a youngster at Blunder Creek, southwest of
Brisbane, between 1961 and 1972. His family always heard the
calls at the beginning of spring each year, at about 9 pm on full-
moon nights. The call would last for about two minutes, increas-
ing in volume as the animal ran
down a dry creek-bed in the
gully below the house, with the
sound of its feet making huge,
leaping steps; then the call would
decrease in volume as the crea-
ture continued on its way.
He told me that the man who
was in charge of the nearby
Blunder Repeater Station tape-
recorded the calls and made plas-
ter casts of the footprints which
were three metres apart when it
was running. The prints were
humanlike but 30 cm long and
10 cm wide, with circular claw-
marks 5 mm wide that were 4 cm
deep into the soil. With the com-
mencement of suburban develop-
ment in the area, the calls were
no longer heard.
John Macey and workmate Sid Griffith were surveying a road in
bushland at Murderer's Hill, near Walballa in Gippsland,
Victoria, one misty day in September 1979 when at 11 am they
saw, five metres away, an ape-like animal, 1.2 metres high, stand-
ing on its hind legs with its back to them. They noticed that it was
a powerful animal with wide hips and buttocks that were visible
as it threw its long arms over a 1.3-metre-high fallen log and then
clambered over to disappear into thick vegetation. They noticed a
patch of pale skin on the back of the neck beneath the black hair
that covered all of its body. It did not appear to be a chimpanzee,
gorilla or orang-utan, which they had seen in zoos, but was defi-
nitely another species of ape that had no tail.
Then, at 3.30 am on 1 June 1996, in bushland behind a house
that we were renting on the slopes of the Koonyum Range at Main
Arm in northeastern NSW, I was again fortunate enough to hear
the calls of this undescribed animal. There was a full moon illu-
minating a crystal-clear night and there was no air movementso
sounds, such as a rooster crowing, could be heard for some kilo-
metres. Approximately 200 metres away, near a dry creek-bed in
eucalypt forest at 200 metres elevation, a series of some 90 loud,
bark-like calls rent the air.
The calls were mostly in a series of three, making a sound like
"arroo-ARROO-arroo". The first was a start-up call, which was
not as loud as the middle call, which was climactic and was fol-
lowed by a softer call. The beginning of each of the three barks,
"arr", was sudden and intense, while the final "oo" portion was cut
short as it fell off in volume. Between the sets of three barks, at a
time of about five or six seconds, a disturbingly strange, soft, gur-
gling call, "gu-gu-gu-gu", could be heard. It continued with very
little variation for about five minutes, with the last couple of
series of calls appearing less loud, as if the creature had begun to
move off. They were quite unlike the calls of foxes or barking
deer that I had heard in Southeast Asia and, once again, had more
of a primate feel to them.
The next day I found three toeprints in an earth creek-bank
where the creature had climbed up the slope. Each toe was about
the same size as a human big toe, but each slightly smaller in size

T
he first person I ever
talked to who had actually
observed a Yowie was a
Victorian Government surveyor.
Depiction of male and female Yowies, based upon ancient Aboriginal as well as modern-day
European eyewitness descriptions.
Sketch by Rex Gilroy, from his book Mysterious Australia (1995, NEXUS Publishing)

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 87

 T
towards the right, as if from a right foot. Nearby, on a ridgetop he calls that I heard can be used to provide a provisional
covered in dry eucalypt forest, five square metres of native grass identity for these unknown animals. The calls were typical
had been disturbed, in that each clump of grass had been pulled of a territorial call, being loud, powerful and repetitive, and
up with the roots and then placed back exactly where it had uttered on quiet, windless nights so that the calls were far-carry-
grown. Two weeks later, a distinctive brown patch of dead grass ing and could reach the ears of other territory-holding adults.
was evident. The small bipedal primate observed and heard in 1996 is
The calls of this animal were similar in some respects to the call unlikely to be an immature or halfgrown specimen of the much
of the first animal I'd heard in 1978, in that they were a series of larger bipedal primate observed and heard in 1978. This is
unvarying or repeated calls which were quite powerful and because immature animals do not hold territories or give territori-
occurred continuously for about five minutes. The first call, al calls. If they did, it would be an immediate invitation for a
though, was even more powerful, with a very bass note as if fully grown animal to locate the brash young usurper and drive it
uttered by a very large animal. This second call was higher- off.
pitched and sounded as if it came from a smaller animal. Because both territorial calls were similar in their make-up (a
Strangely enough, this accorded with the sighting of an unusual series of loud, repetitive calls) and were made under similar con-
animal some months before by some friends. ditions (still, moonlit nights in June), it can be inferred that both
animals are closely related. This also agrees with sightings

L
yn Clark and her 12-year-old son Joshua were on their way descriptions of unknown bipedal primates. However, it can also
to our house in the late afternoon to attend the birthday be inferred from both territorial calls that two different species are
party of one of our daughters on 23 March 1996. Because involved.
they were concerned that their old car might not be able to climb The 1978 call was a continuous series of extremely powerful,
the steep, kilometre-long hill up to the house, they decided to bellowing roars, as would be expected from a large bipedal pri-
walk up the driveway. mate, 2.5 metres tall and inhabiting the rainforest. The 1996 call
Joshua was in front, and halfway up he was surprised to see was a continuous series of powerful, high-pitched barks in series
what appeared to be one of the chil- of three, with a softer gurgling call
dren from the party, dressed in dark included. These latter calls were
clothing and running headlong down associated with the sighting of a
the steep slope. He was amazed that small bipedal primate, 1.25 metres
a child could run downhill at such a tall, inhabiting mountainous, dry
pace, and found it even more remark- Afterwards, Lyn described to me sclerophyll forest.
able that the child was not running It is a common occurrence with-
down the concrete driveway but was what she had observed: in closely related animal species
running down a slope thickly covered a dark-furred animal with a round inhabiting a similar ecological
in large clumps of kangaroo grass, niche and utilising a similar food
grass-trees and scattered shrubs head and no tail, running on two resource that a major size differ-
beneath a eucalypt canopy. He was legs like a person. I was naturally ence evolves so that one species is
sure it was a child because of its pos- half the size and weight of the
tureit was bent slightly forward, as extremely sceptical ... other, so as to reduce competition
is normal for a person running down amongst them. This is perfectly
a hilland he expected to see the shown in the observed size differ-
child trip and fall at any moment. ence in these two undescribed
But the child ran down towards him bipedal primates. Different terri-
without any difficulty until it saw him torial calls also evolve in closely
and then turned and stopped about 30 metres away. related species and further reduce competition between them.
Joshua was even more surprised now because, although it was Both species were known to the Aboriginal people and
shaped very like a child and was 1.25 metres tall, about the same European settlers, particularly those working in the bush.
height as a 10-to-12-year-old, it was covered in thick, black hair Aboriginal people throughout eastern NSW knew the larger
with only its dark face visible. Joshua rushed back to get his species as Doolagarl, Doolagard, Gooligah, Thoolagal, Moomega
mother and pointed the creature out to her, as it was still standing and Yaromah, depending on their language group. Aboriginal
in the same position. peoplefrom Sydney, inland to the Blue Mountains and Bathurst,
Lyn found it difficult to see because the creature was very well and down to Batemans Bay and Begaappear to have used the
camouflaged until it began to move. From a bipedal position, it word Yowie, or Yourie, for ghosts and evil spirits. This name,
dropped down to move off slowly downhill, knuckle-walking as a along with the name Yahoo, then appears to have been applied to
quadruped. Then, as it gathered speed, it stood erect and ran off the large bipedal primate by early European settlers. After the
down the hill. settlers arrived, both the terms Yowie and Yahoo were also used
Afterwards, Lyn described to me what she had observed: a by Aboriginal people, though Europeans also used the terms
dark-furred animal with a round head and no tail, running on two Hairy Man and Australian gorilla. However, Yowie has become
legs like a person. I was naturally extremely sceptical, as I had the accepted name in recent years.1
seen nothing unusual in my explorations of the area, and told her Cryptozoologists researching reports of similar large bipedal
that it could only have been a swamp wallaby, often seen on the primates (usually known as Wild Men) across Africa, Eurasia,
slopethough she insisted that it didn't hop but ran on two legs. Southeast Asia and the Americas agree that the animal appears to
It wasn't until I heard the unexpected calls at close range that I be Gigantopithecus, known only from half-a-million-year-old fos-
was able to believe that Lyn and Joshua had seen a very remark- sils from China. Descriptions of the physical appearance and
able animal. behaviour of the Yeti of the Himalayas, the Yeren of China, the

88 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

Sasquatch or Bigfoot of North America, and Doolagarl or the Accidental rafting could also explain this Asian animal's pres-
Yowie of Australia are all so similar that it would appear they are ence in Australia. It is believed that Asian mice reached
all members of the same species, or are at least closely related.2 Australian shores in this way over millions of years and, once on
All appear to be extremely cryptic, solitary, nocturnal hunters that land, diversified into endemic species.7 Larger mammals would
have adapted to a wide range of different habitats, have naturally have enormous difficulties surviving such a voyage, adapting to
low population numbers and very large territories, as is typical of the new environment and arriving in large enough numbers to
many large carnivorous mammal species. Competition with begin a genetically diverse population. However, an adaptable,
another similar-sized bipedal hunting primate (humans) may have semi-aquatic, carnivorous primatehumansmade the journey,
been partly responsible for humans existing in large, diurnal, so perhaps a similar, though fur-covered, species could do like-
social populations, and Gigantopithecus existing as scattered, wise. Before human domination of Southeast Asia, the islands
solitary, nocturnal, cryptic populations, so reducing competition. were thickly vegetated and richly populated with a diverse fauna.
The small bipedal primate was known to the Aboriginal people Riverside rainforest torn loose near a river-mouth during cyclonic
as Junjadee, Junjuddis, Dinderi, Winambuu, Waaki and Nimbunj, weather to form rafts of trees that floated to Australia with a com-
depending on their language group, and as Brown Jacks since plement of animals preyed upon by a family of Yowie castaways,
European settlement. This smaller species made newspaper head- could just be possible.
lines in March 1979 when individuals were observed on Tower

M
Hill at Charters Towers in Queensland. There have been many any researchers of undescribed cryptic animals are not
reports of small bipedal primates from Africa, Asia and Sumatra, biologists, and they often conclude that these animals
where they are known as Orang Pendek.3 must be paranormal because they are so elusive and
So how did these originally Asian animals get to Australia? impossible to capture. They state that the existence of the animal
The answer is evident in the documentation of sightings of these can only be understood by looking for explanations beyond the
and similar animals elsewhere. understanding of modern physics. These statements are absolute-
In Australia, the large bipedal ly preposterous and show little under-
primate has been observed swim- standing of physics, biology, ecology
ming in rivers and lagoons, and in or animal behaviour. It is most unlike-
such situations has been called a The small bipedal primate was ly that the entire understanding of
Bunyip. Sightings of seals far physical reality falls apart whenever an
upstream in freshwater rivers and known to the Aboriginal people as undescribed animal is reported. It is
billabongs, perhaps along with the also unlikely that the only evidence of
last surviving aquatic megafauna,
Junjadee, Junjuddis, Dinderi, other dimensions intruding into our
were probably responsible for most Winambuu, Waaki and Nimbunj, own is represented by a cryptic animal
Bunyip reports. and by no other aspect of natural phe-
The Aboriginal people of the depending on their language nomena.
lower Murray River know of an group, and as Brown Jack since It is to be expected that the general
ape-like creature that swims in the public would have little knowledge of,
river, and have named it European settlement. or belief in, undescribed fauna. Most
Mooluwonk. On 18 July 1848, the people's experience with wildlife
Argus reported the sighting of a comes from museums, zoos and the
huge humanoid swimming in the picnic areas of national parks, so it is
Eumeralla River, Victoria. The Melbourne Herald of 29 October only natural that they would believe that if an animal has not been
1849 reported the observation of a Bunyip beside a lake on Phillip regularly observed then it could not possibly exist.
Island, Victoria. It was described as being half-man and half- Field biologists, however, know from years of experience that it
baboon, and it dived into the lake when it was shot at. The is incredibly difficult to observe, trap, photograph or obtain any
Sydney Morning Herald of 24 August 1872 reported that a party evidence for the existence of many speciesat least until they
of surveyors observed a Bunyip swimming at Cowal Lake, NSW. come up with an innovative method to do so. This particularly
It resembled a human but was covered with long dark hair, and it applies to solitary nocturnal carnivores.
rose out of the waterso they were able to see its shouldersand The Eastern puma or mountain lion (Puma [Felis] concolor
then dived as if in chase of fish.4 A Yowie was observed wading couguar), which ranged from New Brunswick in Canada to the
ashore from Lake Dulverton in Tasmania in 1987; Sasquatch have Carolinas in the USA, has been considered extinct by all
been observed wading in Lake Winnipegosis and the Klamath American state wildlife agencies and the US Fish & Wildlife
River in North America.5 Service for most of the 20th century. Despite numerous fauna
These reports show that the Yowie is an excellent swimmer in surveys, no evidence for its existence had been found in almost
small bodies of water. Investigations by Bob Titmus, one of the 100 years, and yet dozens of eyewitness reports are made in
very early Bigfoot investigators who operated from a boat among almost all eastern states every year.
the islands and inlets of British Columbia over several years, A Canadian wildlife biologist, Bruce Wright, director of the
proved that the Sasquatch was capable of swimming through Northeastern Wildlife Station of the University of New
stormy seas. Brunswick, was convinced from sightings reports from the late
Fresh sets of tracks coming out of the water and into the woods 1930s that the Eastern puma had survived in cryptic, remnant
on small islands show that the Yowie is perfectly capable of populations, but he was never able to convince his fellow zoolo-
swimming across open seas to reach distant hunting grounds or to gists or provincial officials. After over 50 years of investigations
colonise new territory.6 Yowies therefore appear to have entered of Eastern puma sightings by biologists, fresh tracks in snow and
the Australasian region from Asia by swimming from island to faecal scat were found. Analysis of the droppings revealed the
island. remains of consumed prey (snowshoe hare) and indisputable

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 89

 Understanding the Yowie Phenomenon
Eastern puma hairs from the feet and legs,
presumably ingested while grooming after
feeding. On 1 March 1993, the New
Brunswick Minister of Natural Resources
officially acknowledged the presence of an
Eastern puma population.8
The Eastern puma is still regarded as
extinct in the USA, despite the eyewitness
reports and its official rediscovery in
Canada. It is now understood to have sur-
vived all of that time that it was thought to
be definitely extinct, even though not a
photograph or specimen has been obtained
as evidence.
Unlike what some researchers thought,
the sightings did not represent an entity
from another dimension, but an ordinary
animal that could easily survive and repro-
duce without revealing any evidence of its
existence.
If a carnivorous animal is hunted into
apparent extinction, what is probably exter-
minated are all those members of the popu-
lation that have been the most successful
competitors for territory and therefore hold
the prime habitats, are more self-assured
and are more obvious to human hunters.
The survivors are probably those that have
always been forced to live in the poorest
90 NEXUS
habitats and, through competition with
more dominant individuals, have been
forced to become cryptic. When humans
clear the prime habitat of the species, the
cryptic individuals survive in remnant habi-
tat and pass on their genes for cryptic
behaviour to their offspring.
If the Eastern puma can survive as an
almost invisible entity in such a heavily
populated area as the eastern part of North
America, how much easier is it for our own
cryptic species, such as the often-reported
mainland thylacine (the Tasmanian tiger),
supposed feral pumas and panthers, and the
Yowie and Junjadee? When biologists
point out that thylacines were easily
trapped and hunted in the early part of the
20th century and so could not possibly
have changed their behaviour to become
cryptic, it is possible that the cryptic mem-
bers of the population always avoided the
hunters and continue to do so now.
With the increasing technological advan-
tage that we humans possess, it may even-
tually be proved that we were extremely
arrogant, and that cryptic specieswhich
we swore could not possibly exist without
our knowing all about themhave been
observing us all along.
www.nexusmagazine.com
Endnotes
1. Healy, T. and Cropper, P., Out of the
Shadows: Mystery Animals of Australia,
Ironbark/Pan Macmillan Australia, Sydney,
1994.
2. ibid.
3. ibid.
4. ibid.
5. ibid.
6. The ISC Newsletter, International Society
of Cryptozoology, vol. 12, no. 2,
19931996.
7. Strahan, R. (ed.), Complete Book of
Australian Mammals, The Australian
Museum, Angus & Robinson Publishers,
Sydney, 1983.
8. The ISC Newsletter, ibid.
About the Author:
Gary Opit is an environmental consultant
with a 30-year career in field research and
public relations in Australia, Papua New
Guinea and Southeast Asia. His skills and
expertise include vegetation and fauna
surveying and mapping techniques, plant
conservation biology and wildlife habitat
management. He lectures to university and
high school students in botany, zoology,
biogeography, Australian and Aboriginal
ecology, and Aboriginal religion and
culture. He had a fortnightly talkback radio
program on regional ABC Radio 2NR (94.5
FM, 720 AM) on Tuesdays at 10.30 am.
STRANGE Times 2006
 Strange Tales about
Sea Serpents
Many reliable
eyewitnesses over
the centuries have
reported bizarre
encounters with
monstrous "sea
serpents'".
Are these reports
really descriptions
of the plesiosaur
and ichthyosaur,
living underwater
relics of the age of
dinosaurs?
by C. D. Pollard 1996
1 Highfields Grange
Cheslyn Hay
Walsall, WS6 7PF, UK
Telephone/fax: +44 011922 414703
STRANGE Times 2006
T
here is a general disposition to regard the sea serpent as an everlasting joke. "He"
only turns up, say the jokers, when the silly season arrives with its prize gooseberries
and showers of frogs. Nevertheless, there is reason to believe that the sea serpent is
a living fact, and there is evidence that great living creatures yet unclassified by science
inhabit the sea.
The Norwegian fishermen of the past regarded the existence of the sea serpent as some-
thing beyond all dispute, and a Norwegian travel book published in the 16th century
reports its appearance in the year 1522. Olaus Magnus described the sea serpent as being
200 feet long and 20 feet in circumference, having fiery eyes and a short mane.
Hans Egede, who later became a bishop, travelled to Greenland in the year 1734 as a
missionary. In his account of the voyage, he described a sea monster which appeared near
the ship on 6 July:
"Its head, when raised, was on a level with our main-top. Its snout was long and sharp,
and it blew water almost like a whale; it had large broad paws or paddles; its body was
covered with scales; its skin was rough and uneven; in other respects it was a serpent; and
when it dived, the end of its tail, which was raised in the air, seemed to be a full ship's
length from its body."
Erik Pontoppidan, the Bishop of Bergen and a famous Norwegian naturalist, was
sceptical of sea serpents but confessed his conversion in his book of 1755 after receiving
reliable evidence. He stated that the creatures kept to the bottom of the sea except during
spawning in July and August when they rose to the surface. He discriminated between the
Greenland and Norwegian sea snakesthe former being scaly, and the latter being
perfectly smooth with a mane about the neck, hanging like a bunch of seaweed. He
estimated the serpents at about 600 feet in length. They had high, broad foreheads, though
some had sharp snouts and others flat. The eyes were large and bluish, and the skin dark-
brown or patchy.
The Zoologist for the year 1847 contained many accounts of the appearance of sea ser-
pents in the Norwegian fjords, but one of the most famous and best authenticated appear-
ances of a sea monster was recorded by HMS Doedalus in 1848. The official report by
Captain M'Quhae to Admiral Sir W. H. Gage follows:
"Sir, In reply to your letter requiring information as to the truth of a statement, pub-
lished in the Times newspaper, of a sea serpent of extraordinary dimensions having been
seen from Her Majesty's Ship Doedalus, under my command, in her passage from the East
Indies, I have the honour to acquaint you, for the information of my Lords Commissioners
of the Admiralty, that at 5 o'clock p.m., on 6th August last, in latitude 24 degrees 44' S.
and longitude 9 degrees 22' E., the weather dark and cloudy, wind fresh from the N.W.,
with a long ocean swell from the S.W., the ship on a port tack, heading N.E. by N., some-
thing very unusual was seen by Mr. Sartoris, midshipman, rapidly approaching the ship
from before the beam. The circumstance was immediately reported by him to the officer
of the watch, Lieutenant Edgar Drummond, with whom, and Mr. William Barrett, the
master, I was at the time walking the quarter-deck. The ship's company were at supper.
"On our attention being called to the object, it was discovered to be an enormous ser-
pent, with head and shoulders kept about four feet constantly above the surface of the sea;
and, as nearly as we could approximate by comparing it with the length of what our main-
topsail yard would show in the water, there was at the very least 60 feet of the animal
fleur d'eau, no portion of which was, in our perception, used in propelling it through the
water, either by vertical or horizontal undulation. It passed rapidly, but so close under our
lee quarter that, had it been a man of my acquaintance, I should have easily recognised his
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 91
features with the naked eye; and it did not, either in approaching
the ship or after it had passed our wake, deviate in the slightest
degree from its course to the S.W., which it held on at the pace of
from 12 to 15 miles per hour, apparently on some determined pur-
pose. The diameter of the serpent was about fifteen or sixteen
inches behind the head, which was, without any doubt, that of a
snake; and it was never, during the 20 minutes that it continued in
sight of our glasses, once below the surface of the water; its
colour, a dark brown with yellowish white about the throat. It had
no fins, but something like the mane of a horse, or rather a bunch
of seaweed, washed about its back. It was seen by the quarter-
master, the boatswain's mate, and the man at the wheel in addition
to myself and officers above mentioned."
This is unassailable evidence from the best source possible
the observation of several educated men used to the sea, and set
down in a sober, official report. A letter was printed shortly after-
wards in the Globe newspaper, giving an account of the appear-
ance of a similar monster seen from the American brig Daphne,
20 degrees further south, soon after it was seen from the
Doedalus.
Captain W. H. Nelson, of the American ship Sacramento,
reported catching a glimpse of a strange sea-monster on 30 July
1877, on latitude 3159'N, longitude 37W. John Hart, the man at
the wheel, had a better view than Captain Nelson, for he was the
one who first caught sight of the creature and the Captain did not
arrive upon deck until it had proceeded some distance. Some 40
feet of the creature was seen above the surface, and its girth
appeared to be about that of a flour barrel. Indeed, it resembled
an ichthyosaur.
An account from an officer of HMS Plumber ran as follows:
"On the morning of 31st December 1848, lat. 41 degrees 13' N.,
and long. 12 degrees 31' W., being nearly due west of Oporto, I
saw a long, black creature with a sharp head, moving slowly, I
should think about two knots, through the water, in a north-west-
erly direction, there being a fresh breeze at the time and some sea
on. I could not ascertain its exact length, but its back was 20 feet,
if not more, above the water, and its head, as near as I could
judge, from 6 feet to 8 feet. I had not the time to make a closer
Plesiosaurus
92 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
observation, as the ship was going six knots through the water,
her head E. half S. and S.S.E. The creature moved across our
wake, towards a merchant barque on our lee-quarter and on the
port tack. I was in hopes she would have seen it also. The offi-
cers and men saw it, and [those] who have served in parts of the
world adjacent to whale and seal fisheries and have seen them in
the water, declare they have never seen or heard of any creature
bearing the slightest resemblance to the one we saw. There was
something on its back that appeared like a mane, and, as it moved
through the water, it kept washing about; but before I could exam-
ine it closely it was too far astern."
The following account of a sea serpent was communicated to
the Illustrated London News on 25 September 1853:
"We hand you the following extract from the log-book of our
ship Princess, Captain A. K. N. Tremaine, in London Docks, 15th
instant, from China, viz.: 'Tuesday, July 8th, 1853; latitude (accu-
rate) 34.56 degrees S.; longitude (accurate) 18.14 degrees E. At 1
p.m. saw a very large fish, with a head like a walrus, and twelve
fins similar to those of the blackfish, but turned the contrary way.
The back was from 20 feet to 30 feet long; also a great length of
tail. It is not improbable that this monster has been taken for the
great sea-serpent. Fired and hit it near the head with rifle ball. At
eight, fresh wind and fine.'"
The monster was seen by the entire ship's crew, and also by
Captain Morgan, a passenger.
Another sea-serpent was seen by Dr Biccard, of Cape Town, in
February 1857, and again, a month later, by Mr Fairbridge and
others. Dr Biccard was at the lighthouse at Green Point at about 5
pm in the afternoon of the day in question, when he was sum-
moned by the lighthouse keeper, and the following account is in
his own words:
"I proceeded to the lighthouse and from thence I saw on the
water, about 150 yards from the shore, a serpent. I borrowed a
rifle from Mr. Hall (the father-in-law of the lighthouse keeper),
and fired at the animal. The ball fell short in front of it by about
four yards. The animal did not move, and then I fired a second
shot, the ball striking about one foot or one-and-a-half feet from
it. The serpent then, apparently startled, moved from its position,
and straightened himself out, and went
under water, evidently getting out of the
way. He was invisible about ten minutes,
at the expiration of which interval he reap-
peared about 200 yards distant, and, I
should say, about 40 yards farther off. He
then came right on towards the place where
I first saw him; but before arriving there,
my son, who had joined me, fired at the ani-
mal. Unluckily the discharge broke the nip-
ple of the rifle, and I was thus prevented
from further firing. Upon reaching the
place which he first occupied, and then
stood right into the bay, and soon after-
wards we lost sight of him altogether."
The animal was about 200 feet in length,
and the head was indistinct. The body was
of a dull, dark colour, except the head
which was maculated with white spots. The
water at that time was very calm, and the
creature was seen by eight persons in all.
A young sea-serpent was actually caught
and dissected by members of the Linnaean
Society of Boston. Due to a number of
reports of great sea-serpents seen during the
STRANGE Times 2006
month of August 1817 in the harbour of Gloucester, towards the bottom, where, no doubt, it was gorged at the serpents
Massachusetts, the Linnaean Society appointed a committee to leisure...
collect evidence with regard to the existence and appearance of "Allowing for two coils round the whale, I think the serpent
such an animal. Shortly after, a report appeared, and a month was about 160 feet or 170 feet long and 7 feet or 8 feet in girth. It
later a young sea-serpent was actually caught. It was named was in colour much like a conger eel, and the head, from the
Scolioplus Atlanticus, and was killed on the seashore near Cape mouth being always open, appeared the largest part of the body...
Ann. Following the dissection, a pamphlet was published giving "At 7 a.m., July 13th, in the same latitude, and some eighty
details. miles east of San Roque, I was astonished to see the same or a
In its issue of 19 April 1879, the Graphic gave an illustration of similar monster. It was throwing its head and about 40 feet of its
a sea serpent seen by its correspondent, Major H. W. J. Senior, of body in a horizontal position out of the water, as it passed
the Bengal Staff Corps, together with a description of the monster, onwards by the stern of our vessel...
as it appeared to him from the poop deck of the Steamship City of "I was startled by a cry of 'There it is again,' and, a short dis-
Baltimore, on latitude 1228'N, longitude 4352'E. Major Senior tance to leeward, elevated some 60 feet in the air, was the great
first saw the creature about three-quarters of a mile distant, "dart- leviathan, grimly looking towards the vessel...
ing rapidly out of the water and splashing in again, with a noise "A vessel, about three years ago, was dragged over by some
distinctly audible", and rapidly approaching the ship. It got within sea-monster in the Indian Ocean."
500 yards before changing course and finally disappearing. It Due to the sheer number of doubters of such an outrageous
moved so quickly that it could not be viewed through the tele- story, the Captain, accompanied by a number of his officers and
scope, and no one was sure if it had scales or not. Major Senior crew, appeared before Mr Raffles, stipendiary magistrate, at the
also reported the following: Dale Street Police Court, Liverpool, and made a declaration. This
"The head and neck, about two feet in diameter, rose out of the shorter account was then signed by George Drevar, Horatio
water to a height of about twenty or thirty feet, and the monster Thompson, Henderson Landello, Owen Baker and William
opened its jaws wide as it rose, and closed them again as it low- Lewan. In all, three declarations were made, one for each sight-
ered its head and darted forward for a dive, reappearing almost ing.
immediately some hundred yards ahead. The body was not visi- Captain Hassel, of the barque St. Olaf, from Newport, two days
ble at all, and must have been some depth under water, as the dis- before her arrival at Galveston, Texas, on 13 May 1872, saw a
turbance on the surface was too slight to attract notice, although large sea-serpent lying on the surface of the water. Seventy feet
occasionally a splash was seen at some distance behind the head. of it were visible and it had four fins along the back. It was about
The shape of the head was not unlike pictures of the dragon I have six feet in diameter, and was of a greenish-yellow colour with
often seen, with a bulldog appearance of the forehead and eye- brownish spots over the upper part.
brow. When the monster had drawn its head sufficiently
out of the water, it let itself drop, as it were, like a huge
log of wood, prior to darting forward under water."
Dr Hall, the ship's surgeon, and Miss Greenfield, a
passenger, also saw the creature.
Much ridicule was cast upon the story of the sea ser-
pent seen by Captain Drevar and the crew of the barque
Pauline. The account runs as follows:
"Barque PaulineJuly 8th, 1875; lat. 5 degrees 13'
S., long. 35 degrees W.; Cape Roque, northeast corner
of Brazil, distant twenty miles at 11 a.m.
"The weather fine and clear, the wind and sea moder-
ate, observed some black spots on the water and a
whitish pillar, about 35 feet high, above them. At first I
took it all to be breakers, as the sea was splashing up
fountain-like about them, and the pillar, a pinnacle rock
bleached with the sun; but the pillar fell with a splash
and a similar one rose. They rose and fell alternately in
quick succession, and good glasses showed me it was a
monster sea-serpent coiled twice round a large sperm
whale. The head and tail parts, each about 30 feet long,
were acting as levers, twisting itself and the victim
around with great velocity. They sank out of sight about
every two minutes, coming to the surface still revolving,
and the struggles of the whale and two other whales that
were near, frantic with excitement, made the sea in this
vicinity like a boiling caldron, and a loud and confused
noise was distinctly heard. This strange occurrence last-
ed some fifteen minutes, and finished with the tail por-
tion of the whale being elevated straight in the air, then
waving backwards and forwards and lashing the water
furiously in the last death struggle, when the whole body Elasmosaurus
disappeared from our view, going down head foremost

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 93

 In June 1877, the officers and crew of the Royal yacht Osborne Matheson was sailing with his wife on Loch Alsh which separates
encountered a sea monster off the coast of Sicily. Lieutenant the Island of Skye from the mainland. His own account runs as
Haynes described it thus: follows:
"My attention was first called by seeing a long row of fins "The time was between one and two when suddenly I saw
appearing above the surface of the water at a distance of about something rise out of the Loch in front of us, a long, straight,
200 yards from the ship, and away on our beam. They were of neck-like thing as tall as my mast.
irregular heights and extending about 30 feet or 40 feet in line. In "It was then 200 yards away and was moving towards us. Then
a few seconds they disappeared, giving place to the forepart of the it began to draw its neck down, and I saw clearly that it was a
monster. By this time it had passed astern, swimming in an oppo- large sea-monster of the saurian type, I should think. It was
site direction to that we were steering, and as we were passing brown in colour, shining, and with a sort of ruffle at the junction
through the water at ten-and-a-half knots I could only get a view of the head and neck. I can think of nothing to which to compare
of it 'end on'. The head was bullet-shaped, and quite 6 feet thick, it so well as the head and neck of the giraffe, only the neck was
the neck narrow, and its head was occasionally thrown back out of much longer, and the head was not set upon the neck like that of a
the water, remaining there for a few seconds at a time. It was giraffe; that is, it was not so much at right angles to it as a contin-
very broad across the back or shoulders, about 15 feet or 20 feet, uation of it in the same line. It moved its head from side to side,
and the flappers appeared to have a semi-revolving motion, which and I saw the reflection of the light from its wet skin."
seemed to paddle the monster along. They were about 15 feet in Dr Matheson saw no scales on the creature, just a perfectly
length. From the top of the head to the part of the body where it smooth surface. It was in sight for about two minutes and then
became immersed, I should consider 50 feet, and that seemed disappeared. Then it rose again three different times, at intervals
about one-third of the whole length. All this part was smooth, of two or three minutes. It stood perpendicularly out of the water
resembling a seal. I cannot account for and seemed to look round.
the fins, unless they were on the back "When it appeared the second time it
below where it was immersed." was going from us, and was travelling
Captain R. J. Cringle, of the
"It was then 200 yards away at a great rate. It was going in the
Steamship Umfuli, one of the ten ves- and was moving towards us. direction of the northern outlet of the
sels of the Natal Line belonging to
Bullard, King and Company, entered
Then it began to draw its neck Loch, and we were sailing in its wake; I
was interested, and followed it. From
the following in the ship's log: down, and I saw clearly that it its first to its last appearance we trav-
"SS. Umfuli, Monday, Dec. 4th,
1893, 5.30 p.m., lat. 23 deg. N., long. was a large sea-monster of the elled a mile, and the last time we saw it
it was about a mile away.
18 deg. W. Sighted and passed, saurian type..." "I saw no body, only a ripple of the
about 500 yards from ship, a monster water where the line of the body should
fish of serpentine shape, about 80 feet be. I should judge, however, that there
long, with shining skin, and short fins, must have been a large base of body to
about 20 feet apart, on the back; in circumference, about the support such a neck... An eel could not lift up its body like that,
dimensions of a full-sized whale." nor could a snake."
The position indicated was off the coast of Africa, a little south Despite suggestions that it was an optical illusion, Dr Matheson
of the Canary Islands. When questioned further, the captain said and his wife stuck to the story.
that all his crew and the passengers had seen it. He had this to Curiously, Dr Matheson's description of the sea serpent sounds
add: surprisingly close to that of a periscope. When it came to sub-
"...and this thing, whatever it was, was in sight for over half an marines, at that time Britain lagged far behind the rest of the
hour. In fact, we did not lose sight of it until darkness came on. world, but France, Germany and America were all investing large
"When we first saw it I estimated that it would be about 400 sums in their development. Could that long neck and head, that
yards away. It was rushing through the water at great speed, and turned this way and that, possibly have been the periscope of a
was throwing water from her bows. I saw full 15 feet of its head foreign submarine doing a little spying?
and neck on three occasions. They appeared and disappeared
three times. The body was all the time visible." References
After likening the body to a hundred-ton gun partly submerged, Dunn, Matthias, Studies Under The Sea, Hazell, Watson &
with three distinct humps or swellings above the waves, he then Viney, 1901.
continued: Story, Alfred T., The Sea-Serpent, Newnes, 1895.
"The base, or body, from which the neck sprang was much About the Author:
thicker than the neck itself... I turned the ship round to get closer C. D. Pollard is a former second-hand book dealer turned
to it, and got much nearer than we were at first; but the sun was full-time writer, whose articles and short stories have been
setting." published in over 30 magazines in the UK, France, USA and,
The creature appeared to have smooth skin, and was dark now, Australia and New Zealand. His first book, Classic
brown in colour. The ship was so near it at one time that a pas- Tastes, part of a series, is due to be published by Pipers' Ash
senger, Mr Kennealy, said he could hear the creature hiss, but the Ltd, UK, in late 1997.
first officer claimed that the sound was nothing but the noise from Mr Pollard has a peculiar obsession with the Victorian and
the water at the bows. Mr Kennealy may have immortalised him- Edwardian periods, particularly with rare literature and some
self if only he had taken the trouble to use the camera he had on of the more unusual goings-on of those times, be they Fortean
board. or just plain eccentric. Working from his base in a small
Dr Farquhar Matheson, of London, had a still closer view of a English village on the edge of The Black Country, his aim is to
similar creature. This happened in September 1893 while Dr rekindle the public's interest in many of these strange stories.

94 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 95
 Prophecies and Predictions
W e are pleased to present this collection of largely unknown prophecies and predictions. I've
tried to select predictions from those with a good "track record" on past events and which are
not too ambiguous (as with the quatrains of Nostradamus).
You will read prophecies and predictions from several cultures in the following pages: Native
American, English, Vedic, Serbian, modern American, extraterrestrial, crystal and more.
Hopi and Apache Prophecies: I've selected several Native American visions of the future, all with
a common thread as above. I'm sure you'll agree they are compelling reading.
Mother Shipton's Prophecies: There are many popular verses in circulation attributed to
15th/16th-century English prophetess Mother Shipton, but we came across a collection of verses
practically unknown in the public record. How this happened is another story but, as you will see,
these verses are extraordinary.
Dannion Brinkley's Light Beings' Prophecies: A former US government "hit man", Dannion was
talking on the phone one day when lightning hit the wires nearby. He "died" on the operating table
several times, and while having his near-death experiences (NDEs) he received lucid visions of our
possible future from "Light Beings". Needless to say, Dannion became a changed man and since then
has worked tirelessly to assist people overcome their fear of death and prepare for the next life.
The Crystal Skull Prophecies: The famous Mitchell-Hedges crystal skull still defies explanation
by "experts" as to its age, purpose and origin. However, when mere mortals are exposed to its
presence, strange effects are noted. We report here on what happened when Canada's most famous
psychic "tuned in" to the crystal skull. Basically she went into a trance, her voice changed and she
became a conduit for the transmission of some remarkable prophecies. The transcript is reprinted
here.
Billy Meier and the Henoch Prophecies: Billy Meier has been a regular UFO contactee for over
half a century. Many less-informed people consider Meier to be a con-artist and hoaxer, but no one
has ever been able to prove thisdespite round-the-clock surveillance of his activities. Over the
years, Meier's alien friends have given him much informationin some cases, specific information
about events to come or which have since come to pass. Given his track record of accurate
predictions, we reprint Meier's "Henoch Prophecies" which cover a number of possibilities facing
humanity. I hope they turn out to be wrong!
Generally speaking, I've noticed that nearly all these predictions contain a similar theme: that
unless mankind "improves", there is going to be rapid and catastrophic change. In most cases it is
stressed that mankind can change what is predicted merely by becoming "nicer" "more spiritual" or
"closer to God".

96 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 The Fifth World Prophecy
of the Hopi Elders
THE FIFTH WORLD PROPHECY

O
n a blistering hot summer day in 1958, a minister named David Young was driving
along a highway that stretched through desert country, not far from Taos, New
Mexico. Toward noon, he saw an elderly Indian walking on the road's gravel
The North shoulder, and knowing he must be suffering from the heat, Young stopped and asked him
if he would like a ride to the next town. The old man nodded. and got in.
American Hopi For several minutes the Indian said nothing, but then he finally spoke: "I am White
Feather, a Hopi of the ancient Bear Clan. In my long life I have travelled through this
Elders correctly land, seeking my brothers, and learning from them many things of wisdom. I have fol-
lowed the sacred paths to my people, who inhabit the forests and many lakes in the east,
foretold white the land of ice and long nights in the north, the mountains and streams of jumping fish in
the west, and the place of holy altars of stone built long ago by my brothers' fathers in the
man's invasion of south. From all these I have heard the stories of the past, and the prophecies of the future.
Today, many of the prophecies have turned to stories, and few are left: the past grows
their lands in a longer, and the future grows shorter.
"And now White Feather is dying. His sons have all joined his ancestors, and soon he
series of too shall be with them. But there is no one left, no one to recite and pass on the ancient
wisdom to. My people have tired of the old ways: the great ceremonies which tell of our
predictions. origins, of our emergence into the Fourth World, are almost all abandoned, forgotten. Yet
even this has been foretold. The time grows short."
The old Indian fell silent again, but after a minute spoke once more: "My people await
Pahana, the lost white brother, as do all our brothers in the land. He will not be like the
white men we know now, who are cruel and greedy. We were told of their coming long
The truth of their ago. But still we await Pahana.
"He will bring with him the symbols, and the missing piece of that sacred tablet now
final Fifth World kept by the elders, given to him when he left, that shall be restored to the tablet and make
it whole. This shall identify him as our true white brother."
prophecy could Turning to Young, he said: "You are much like Pahana, and not like other white men.
You stopped to give an old man a ride, to lighten his burden. That is the way of Pahana.
soon be revealed. He will come soon, for the prophecies are nearly done."
Resting a moment, the Indian found his breath, and then continued: "The Fourth World
shall end soon, and the Fifth World will begin. This the elders everywhere know. The
Signs over many years have been fulfilled, and so few are left.
"This is the First Sign: We were told of the coming of white-skinned men, like Pahana,
but not living like Pahanamen who took the land that was not theirs. And men who
struck their enemies with thunder." Young later realised this is how the Indian prophets
would have described gunpowder.
Extracted from the book "This is the Second Sign: Our lands will see the coming of spinning wheels of wood
ROLLING THUNDER: filled with voices. In his youth, my father saw this prophecy come true with his eyesthe
The Coming Earth Changes white men bringing their families in wagons across the prairies.
by J. R. Jochmans "This is the Third Sign: A strange beast, like a buffalo, but with great long horns will
overrun the land in large numbers. These White Feather himself saw with his eyesthe
Published in 1980 by coming of the white man's cattle.
Sun Publishing Company "This is the Fourth Sign: The prairie will be crossed by snakes of iron...." At that
PO Box 5588 moment, Young slowed his car to drive over a railroad crossingand this time it was his
Santa Fe, NM 87502, USA own eyes, looking down miles of winding track, that saw how the prophecy had been
fulfilled.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 97

 "This is the Fifth Sign: The land shall be criss-crossed by a
giant spider's web." The Indian stopped, and glanced for a second
upward at the telephone and electric lines that flashed past along-
side the highway.
"This is the Sixth Sign: The land shall be criss-crossed with
rivers of stone that make pictures in the sun." The Indian paused
again to let Young puzzle over the meaning of his words.
Suddenly, he understood, for he was seeing it right in front of him:
The concrete road stretched ahead. and in the distance, the shim-
mering heat waves produced a mirage, an image of the road itself
just above the surface. The Indian nodded and went on.
"This is the Seventh Signand it is the first that is yet to come:
You will hear of the sea turning black, and many living things
dying because of it.
"This is the Eighth Sign: You will see many youth, who will
wear their hair long like my people, come and join the tribal
nations to learn of their ways and wisdom.
"And this is the Ninth and last Sign: You will hear of a
dwelling-house in the heavens, above the Earth, that shall fall with
a great crash. It will appear as a Blue Star. Very soon after this,
the ceremonies of my people will cease.
"These are the Signs that great destruction is coming. The
world shall rock to and fro. The white men will battle against
other peoples in other landswith those who possessed the first
light of wisdom. Terrible will be the result. There will be many
columns of smoke and fire such as White Feather has seen the
white man make in the deserts not far from here." Young immedi-
ately knew he meant the atomic bomb tests. "Only those which
come will cause disease and a great dying. Many of my people,
understanding the prophecies, shall be safe. Those who stay and
live in the places of my people shall also be safe. There will then
be much to rebuild. And soonvery soon afterwardPahana
will return. He will bring with him the dawn of the Fifth World.
He shall plant the seeds of his wisdom in their hearts. Even now
the seeds are being planted. These shall smooth the way to the
Emergence, into the Fifth World.
"But White Feather shall not see it. I am old and dying. You-
perhaps you will see it. In time, in time..."
The old Indian's voice faded, and then went silent. They had
arrived at his destination, and he pointed to the corner where he
wanted to get off. Young stopped the car, let the old Indian out,
and watched him slowly disappear down the street. Then Young
continued on his triphe never saw the old man again.

The prophecies of Mother Shipton ...

M other Shipton reputedly was born Ursula Sontheil in 1488 in Norfolk, England, and died in 1561. She exhibited prophetic and psy-
chic abilities from an early age. At 24, married to Toby Shipton, she eventually became known as Mother Shipton. Many of her
visions came true within her own lifetime and in subsequent centuries. In 1992, NEXUS came into possession of some very rare verses
attributed to Mother Shipton. We could find no record of them having been published before. You will agree that her descriptions of the
future have been remarkably accurate, leaving us to wonder about the events yet to unfold.
These verses were on the outer wrapping of the scrolls: The following verses were found on a scroll in a separate jar.
They appear to have been written at the same time as the verses above.
The signs will be there for all to read; When man shall do most heinous
deed
Man will ruin kinder lives; By taking them as to their wives.
I know I go, I know I'm free
And murder foul and brutal deed; When man will only think of greed.
I know that this will come to be.
And man shall walk as if asleep; He does not lookhe many not peep
Secreted this, for this will be And iron men the tail shall do; And iron cart and carriage too.
Found by later dynasty.
The kings shall false promise make; And talk just for talking's sake
A dairy maid, a bonny lass And nations plan horrific war; The like as never seen before
Shall kick this tome as she does pass And taxes rise and lively down; And nations wear perpetual frown.
And five generations she shall breed Yet greater sign there be to see; As man nears latter century.
Before one male child does learn to read. Three sleeping mountains gather breath; And spew out mud, and ice and
death.
This is then held year by year
And earthquakes swallow town and town; In lands as yet to me
Till an iron monster trembling fear unknown.
Eats parchment, words and quill and ink
And Christian one fights Christian two; And nations sigh, yet nothing do
And mankind is given time to think. And yellow men great power gain; From mighty bear with whom they've
And only when this comes to be lain.
Will mankind read this prophecy These mighty tyrants will fail to do; They fail to split the world in two.
But one man's sweet's another's bane But from their acts a danger bred; An ague, leaving many dead.
So I shall not have burned in vain. And physics find no remedy; For this is worse than leprosy.
Oh many signs for all to see; The truth of this true prophecy.
Mother Shipton
(Editor's Note: There are many lines here that unfortunately describe our
twentieth century. Some of the thoughts that come to mind: "Christian one
fights Christian two" could describe the ongoing conflict between Catholics
and Protestants in Ireland; an "ague" is an illness or great sickness; the "yellow
men" could be interpreted by many as the Chinese or Japanese; and the
"mighty bear" could well be Russia.)

98 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

The prophecies of Mother Shipton ...
A carriage without horse will go
Disaster fill the world with woe.
In London, Primrose Hill shall be
In centre hold a Bishop's See
Around the world men's thoughts will fly
Quick as the twinkling of an eye.
And water shall great wonders do
How strange. And yet it shall come true.
Through towering hills proud men shall ride
No horse or ass move by his side.
Beneath the water, men shall walk
Shall ride, shall sleep, shall even talk
And in the air men shall be seen
In white and black and even green.
A great man then, shall come and go
For prophecy declares it so.
In water, iron then shall float
As easy as a wooden boat.
Gold shall be seen in stream and stone
In land that is yet unknown.
And England shall admit a Jew
You think this strange, but it is true.
The Jew that once was held in scorn
Shall of a Christian then be born.
A house of glass shall come to pass
In England. But Alas, alas
A war will follow with the work
Where dwells the Pagan and the Turk.
These states will lock in fiercest strife
And seek to take each other's life.
When north shall thus divide the south
And Eagle build in Lion's mouth
Then tax and blood and cruel war
Shall come to every humble door.
Three times shall lovely sunny France
Be led to play a bloody dance
Before the people shall be free
Three tyrant rulers shall she see.
Three rulers in succession be
Each springs from different dynasty.
Then when the fiercest strife is done
England and France shall be as one.
The British olive shall next then twine
In marriage with a German vine.
Men walk beneath and over streams
Fulfilled shall be their wondrous dreams.
For in those wondrous far-off days
The women shall adopt a craze
To dress like men, and trousers wear
And to cut off their locks of hair.
They'll ride astride with brazen brow
As witches do on broomstick now.
STRANGE Times 2006
And roaring monsters with man atop
Does seem to eat the verdant crop
And men shall fly as birds do now
And give away the horse and plough.
There'll be a sign for all to see
Be sure that it will certain be.
Then love shall die and marriage cease
And nations wane as babes decrease.
And wives shall fondle cats and dogs
And men live much the same as hogs.
In nineteen hundred and twenty six
Build houses light of straw and sticks.
For then shall mighty wars be planned
And fire and sword shall sweep the land.
When pictures seem alive with movements free
When boats like fishes swim beneath the sea
When men like birds shall scour the sky
Then half the world, deep drenched in
blood shall die.
For those who live the century through
In fear and trembling this shall do.
Flee to the mountains and the dens
To bog and forest and wild fens.
For storms will rage and oceans roar
When Gabriel stands on sea and shore
And as he blows his wondrous horn
Old worlds die and new be born.
A fiery Dragon will cross the sky
Six times before this Earth shall die
Mankind will tremble and frightened be
For the sixth heralds in this prophecy.
For seven days and seven nights
Man will watch this awesome sight.
The tides will rise beyond their ken
To bite away the shores, and then
The mountains will begin to roar
And earthquakes split the plain to shore.
And flooding waters, rushing in
Will flood the lands with such a din
That mankind cowers in muddy fen
And snarls about his fellow men.
He bares his teeth and fights and kills
And secrets food in secret hills
And ugly in his fear, he lies
To kill marauders, thieves and spies.
Man flees in terror from the floods
And kills, and rapes and lies in blood
And spilling blood by mankind's hands
Will stain and bitter many lands.
And when the Dragon's tail is gone
Man forgets, and smiles, and carries on
To apply himselftoo late, too late
For mankind has earned deserved fate.
www.nexusmagazine.com
His masked smile, his false grandeur
Will serve the Gods their anger stir.
And they will send the Dragon back
To light the skyhis tail will crack
Upon the Earth and rend the Earth
And man shall flee, King, Lord, and serf.
But slowly they are routed out
To seek diminishing water spout
And men will die of thirst before
The oceans rise to mount the shore.
And lands will crack and rend anew
You think it strange. It will come true.
And in some far-off distant land
Some menoh such a tiny band
Will have to leave their solid mount
And span the Earth, those few to count
Who survives this [unreadable] and then
Begin the human race again.
But not on land already there
But on ocean beds, stark, dry and bare.
Not every soul on Earth will die
As the Dragon's tail goes sweeping by.
Not every land on Earth will sink
But these will wallow in stench and stink
Of rotting bodies of beast and man
Of vegetation crisped on land.
But the land that rises from the sea
Will be dry and clean and soft and free
Of mankind's dirt and therefore be
The source of man's new dynasty.
And those that live will ever fear
The Dragon's tail for many year
But time erases memory
You think it strange. But it will be.
And before the race is built anew
A silver serpent comes to view
And spew out men of like unknown
To mingle with the Earth now grown
Cold from its heat, and these men can
Enlighten the minds of future man
To intermingle and show them how
To live and love and thus endow
The children with the second sight.
A natural thing so that they might
Grow graceful, humble, and when they do
The Golden Age will start anew.
The Dragon's tail is but a sign
For mankind's fall and man's decline.
And before this prophecy is done
I shall be burned at the stake, at one
My body singed and my soul set free
You think I utter blasphemy
You're wrong.
These things have come to me
This prophecy will come to be.
NEXUS 99
 Prophecy Countdown 2000
Dannion Brinkley's Visions

O
n 17 September 1975, Dannion Brinkley was talking on the phone during a
thunderstorm. A bolt of lightning hit the phone line, sending thousands of volts
of electricity into his head and down his body, throwing him several feet into
the air. His heart stopped, and he died.
So many visions When Brinkley revived in the morgue after twenty-eight minutes, he had an incredible
story to tell.
presented by After the lightning strike, Brinkley watched from above as loved ones and medics tried
to start his heart. When doctors pronounced him dead he was already travelling through
Brinkley's Light a dark tunnel toward a spirit being, who led him into a crystal city awash in light and
tranquillity. Brought before thirteen angelic instructors in what he describes as "a cathe-
Beings have dral of knowledge", Brinkley was told of events that would shake the world before the
year 2000including the Chernobyl nuclear disaster, the Persian Gulf War, and
already come America's current economic crisis.

true ... The Beings came at me one at a time. As each one approached, a box the size of a
videotape came from its chest and zoomed right at my face.
The first time this happened I flinched, thinking I was going to be hit. But a moment
... and important before impact, the box opened to reveal what appeared to be a tiny television picture of a
world event that was yet to happen. As I watched, I felt myself drawn right into the pic-
prophecies for ture, where I was able to live the event. This happened twelve times, and twelve times I
stood in the midst of many events that would shake the world in the future.
the 1990s are At the time I didn't know these were future events. All I knew was that I was seeing
things of great significance and that they were coming to me as clearly as the nightly
now being news, with one great difference: I was being pulled into the screen.
On this day, 17 September 1975, the future came to me a box at a time.
fulfilled.
BOXES ONE, TWO & THREE: VISIONS OF A DEMORALISED
COUNTRY
Boxes one, two and three showed the mood of America in the aftermath of the war in
We'd be wise to South-East Asia. They revealed scenes of spiritual loss in our country that were by-prod-
ucts of that war, which weakened the structure of America and eventually the world.
pay attention. The scenes were of prisoners of war, weak and wasted from hunger, as they waited in
the rugged prisons of North Vietnam for American ambassadors to come and free them. I
could feel their fear and then despair when they realised one by one that no help would be
forthcoming and that they would live out their remaining years as slaves in jungle prisons.
These were the MIAs, those military men considered "missing in action".
The MIAs were already an issue in 1975, but they were used as a starting point in the
visions to show an America that was slipping into spiritual decline.
I could see America falling into enormous debt. This came to me as scenes of money
Extracted from going out of a room much faster than it was coming in. Through some kind of telepathy I
was aware that this money represented the increase in the national debt and that it spelled
Saved By The Light danger down the road. I also saw people waiting in long lines for the basics of life like
by Dannion Brinkley with Paul Perry clothing and food.
Many scenes of spiritual hunger came from the first two boxes as well. I saw people
Published in 1994 who were transparent in such a way as to reveal that they were hollow. This hollowness,
by Villard Books/Random House, Inc. it was explained to me, was caused by a loss of faith in America and what it stood for.
New York, USA The war in South-East Asia had combined with inflation and distrust in our government to
create a spiritual void. This void was added to by our loss of love for God.

100 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 This spiritual depravity resulted in a number of shocking and say that the country of Jordan would exist no more. I did not
visions: people rioting and looting because they wanted more hear the name of the new country.
material goods than they had, kids shooting other kids with high- This agreement was nothing more than a front by the Israelis to
powered rifles, criminals stealing cars, young men firing on other create a police force composed of Israelis and Arabs. This was a
young men from the windows of cars. Scenes like these played very harsh police force, cruel and unyielding. I saw them wearing
out in front of me like scenes from a gangster movie. blue-and-silver uniforms and having a tight grip on the people of
Most of the criminals were children or adolescents that no one this region. So tight was their grip, in fact, that world leaders
cared about. As I watched image after image, it became painfully became highly critical of Israel. Many collaborators on both sides
clear to me that these kids had no family units and, as a result, kept an eye on their own people and reported their activities to this
they were acting like wolves. police force. They served to make everyone suspicious, causing
I was confused because I couldn't figure out how American chil- trust in these societies to disappear.
dren could be left to roam and murder. Didn't they have parental I could see Israel becoming isolated from the rest of the world.
guidance? I wondered. How could such a thing happen in our As things worsened, there were images of Israel preparing for war
country? against other countries, including Russia and a Chinese-and-Arab
In the third box I found myself facing the Seal of the President consortium. Jerusalem was somehow at the eye of this conflict,
of the United States. I don't know where but I am not sure exactly how.
I was, but I saw the initials "RR" embla- From newspaper headlines that
zoned beneath this seal. Then I was As I watched this puzzling collage appeared in the vision, I could
standing in the midst of newspapers, see that some incident in that
looking at their editorial cartoons. One unfold, I heard a Being speak holy city had served to trigger
after the other I saw cartoons of a cow- telepathically to me and say that thisThese war.
boy. He was riding the range or shooting visions revealed Israel
down bad guys in saloons. This vision the country of Jordan would exist as being spiritually hollow. I had
was festooned with satirical illustrations no more. I did not hear the name the sense of it being a country of
from around the country from such news- strong government but weak
papers as The Boston Globe, the Chicago of the new country. morals. Image after image came
Tribune and the Los Angeles Times. The
dates on the newspapers ranged from
This agreement was nothing more of Israelis reacting with hatred
toward Palestinians and other
1983 to 1987, and it was clear from the than a front by the Israelis... Arabs, and I was steeped in the
nature of the drawings that they were sense that these people as a
about the President of the United States nation had forgotten God and
who projected the image of being a cowboy were now driven by racial hatred.
to the rest of the world. The fifth box showed oil being used as a weapon to control the
I could also tell that the man in these cartoons was an actor, international economy. I saw images of Mecca and then of the
because they all had a theatrical look to them. One of the cartoons Saudi people. While these images streamed before me, a telepath-
even referred to "Butch Cassidy and the Sundance Kid" and ic voice said that oil production was being cut off to destroy
played off the famous scene in that movie in which the two out- America's economy and to milk money from the world economy.
laws jump off a cliff into a shallow pool of water. Yet despite the The price of oil was going up and up, said the voice, and Saudi
vividness of the newspaper clippings, I was unable to see the face Arabia was making an alliance with Syria and China. I could see
under the cowboy hat. I now know that "RR" stood for Ronald Arab and Oriental people shaking hands and making deals. As
Reagan, but at the time I had no idea who the "cowboy" was. A these images came to me, I could sense money being given by the
few months later, when I was recalling these visions for Dr. Saudis to Asian countries like North Korea, all in the hopes of
Raymond Moody, the noted psychiatrist and researcher of near- destabilising the economy of the Asian region.
death experiences, he asked me who I thought "RR" was. Without I wondered where this alliance began, and I was able to see a
hesitation I said, "Robert Redford". He has never let me forget close-up of Syrians and Chinese signing papers and shaking hands
that mistake and ribs me about it every time we get together. in a building that I knew was in Syria. The date that came to me
was 1992.
Another date came to me1993and with it came images of
BOXES FOUR & FIVE: STRIFE AND HATRED IN THE
Syrian and Chinese scientists working in laboratories to develop a
HOLY LANDS missile that could deliver chemical and biological weapons.
Boxes four and five were scenes from the Middle East, showing Nuclear weapons were becoming things of the past, and these
how this area of eternal strife would reach a boiling point. countries wanted to develop new weapons of destruction.
Religion would play a large role in these problems, as would the The boxes kept coming.
economy. A constant need for outside money fuelled much of the
anger and hatred that I saw in these boxes.
In the first of these boxes I saw two agreements taking place.
BOX SIX: VISIONS OF NUCLEAR DESTRUCTION
In the first, Israelis and Arabs were agreeing to something, but Number six was terrifying. I was drawn into the box and found
what was unclear to me. myself in a cool, forested area beside a river. Next to the river
The second accord was one that I could see in some detail. Men was a massive cement structure, square and foreboding. I was
were shaking hands and there was much talk about a new country. fearful and didn't know why. Suddenly the Earth shook and the
Then I saw a collage of images: the River Jordan, a settlement top of this cement structure exploded. I knew it was a nuclear
from Israel that was spreading into Jordan, and a map on which explosion and could sense hundreds of people dying around me as
the country of Jordan was changing colour. As I watched this it took place. The year 1986 was given to me through telepathy,
puzzling collage unfold, I heard a Being speak telepathically to me as was the word "wormwood". It wasn't until a decade later, when

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 101

the Chernobyl nuclear plant exploded near Kiev in the Soviet BOX SEVEN: THE ENVIRONMENTAL RELIGION
Union, that I was able to associate these pictures with an event. It
was then that I made another connection between the vision in this The seventh box held powerful images of environmental
box and the nuclear disaster in the USSR. The word "Chernobyl" destruction. I could see areas of the world radiating energy, glow-
means "wormwood" in Russian. ing like a radium watch-face in the dark. Telepathically I could
A second nuclear accident appeared in the box, this in a north- hear voices speaking of the need to clean up the environment.
ern sea so badly polluted that no ships would travel there. The These voices came out of Russia at first, but then the accents
water was a pale red and was covered with dead or dying fish. changed and I could tell that they were emanating from South
Around the water were peaks and valleys that made me think I America, probably from Uruguay or Paraguay.
was seeing a fjord like those in Norway. I couldn't tell where this I saw the speaker from Russia as he talked with zeal about our
was, but I knew that the world was frightened at what had hap- need to heal the environment. People rallied around him quickly,
pened, because radiation from this accident could spread every- and he soon became so powerful that he was elected one of the
where and affect all of humankind. The date on the picture was leaders of the United Nations. I saw this Russian riding on a white
1995. horse, and I knew that his rise would come before the year 2000.
The vision didn't stop there. People were dying and deformed
as a result of these nuclear catastrophes. In a series of what
seemed like television pictures, I saw cancer victims and mutated
BOXES EIGHT AND NINE: CHINA BATTLES RUSSIA
babies in Russia, Norway, Sweden and Finland, not hundreds or In boxes eight and nine were visions of China's growing anger
thousands of people, but tens of thousands, in a vast array of toward the Soviet Union. When these visions took place in 1975,
deformity, going on through generations. The poisons released by I didn't know that the Soviet Union would break up. Now I think
these accidents were carried to the rest of the world through water, the tension I saw in that vision was a result of the death of Soviet
which was tainted forever by this Communism, which left the Chinese
nuclear waste. The Being made it the leaders of the Communist world.
clear that humans had created a hor- At the time, the visions were a puz-
rible power that had not been con- ...but I knew that the world was zle to me. I saw border disputes and
tained. By letting this power out of heavy fighting between Soviet and
their control, the Soviets had frightened at what had happened, Chinese armies. Finally, the Chinese
destroyed their own country and because radiation from this amassed their armies at the border and
possibly the world. pushed into the region.
The box showed me the fear in accident could spread everywhere The main battle was over a railroad,
people's hearts that resulted from and affect all of humankind. which the Chinese took in heavy
these nuclear accidents. As the fighting. They then pushed deep into
images of this fear unfolded, I some- The date on the picture was 1995. the Soviet Union, cutting the country
how understood that environmental- in half and taking over the oil fields of
ism would emerge as the world's (Dannion Brinkley, 1975) Siberia. I saw snow, blood, and oil
new religion. People would consider and knew that the loss of life had been
a clean environment a key to salva- heavy.
tion more than they ever had before.
Political parties would spring up around the issue of a cleaner
BOXES TEN AND ELEVEN: ECONOMIC
planet, and political fortunes would be made or broken based upon
feelings about the environment. EARTHQUAKES, DESERT STORM
From Chernobyl and this second accident, I could see that the Boxes ten and eleven came in rapid succession. They revealed
Soviet Union would wither and die, with the Soviet people losing scenes of the economic collapse of the world. In general terms,
faith in their government and the government losing its grip on the these visions showed a world in horrible turmoil by the turn of the
people. century, one that resulted in a new world order that was truly one
The economy played a strong role in these visions. I saw people of feudalism and strife.
carrying bags of money into stores and coming out with small In one of the visions, people lined up to take money out of
bags of goods. People with military uniforms wandered the streets banks. In another, the banks were being closed by the govern-
in Soviet cities begging for food, some obviously starving to ment. The voice that accompanied the visions told me that this
death. People ate rotted potatoes and apples, and crowds rioted to would take place in the nineties and would be the beginning of an
get at trucks filled with food. economic strife that would lead to the bankruptcy of America by
The word Georgia appeared in a Cyrillic script, and I could see the year 2000.
a mafia developing in Moscow that I assume came from the state The box showed images of dollar signs flying by as people
of Georgia in the Soviet Union. This mafia was a growing power pumped gas and looked distressed. I knew this meant that oil
that was in competition with the Soviet government. In scene prices were accelerating out of control.
after scene, I saw mafia members operating freely in a city that I I saw thirteen new nations entering the world market in the late
think was Moscow. nineties. These were nations with manufacturing capabilities that
I felt no joy as I watched the Soviet Union collapse. Although put them on a competitive footing with the United States. One by
Soviet-style Communism was dying right before my eyes, the one our European markets began to give their business to these
Being of Light was saying that this was a cautious moment instead countries, which slowed our economy even more. All of this led
of a glorious one. "Watch the Soviet Union," he said. "How the to a greatly weakened economy.
Russian people go, so goes the world. What happens to Russia is But the end of America as a world power came as visions of two
the basis for everything that will happen to the economy of the horrendous earthquakes in which buildings were swaying and top-
free world." pling over like a child's wooden blocks. I knew that these quakes

102 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

happened sometime before the end of the century, but I couldn't
tell where they took place. I do remember seeing a large body of
water that was probably a river.
The cost of rebuilding these destroyed cities would be the final
straw for our government, now so financially broken that it would
hardly be able to keep itself alive. The voice in the vision told me
that it would be this way, while the images from the box showed
Americans starving and lined up for food.
At the tail end of box ten came images of warfare in the desert,
a massive show of military might. I saw armies racing toward one
another in the desert, with great clouds of dust billowing from the
treads of tanks as they crossed the barren ground. There was can-
non fire and explosions that looked like lightning. The Earth
shook and then there was silence. Like a bird, I flew over acres of
destroyed army equipment.
As I left the box, the date 1990
came into my head. That was the
year of Desert Storm, the military
operation that squashed the army
of Iraq for occupying Kuwait.
Box eleven began with Iran and
Iraq in possession of nuclear and
chemical weapons. Included in
this arsenal was a submarine
loaded with nuclear missiles. The
year, said a voice in the vision,
was 1993.
I saw this submarine powering
through the waters of the Middle
East, piloted by people I knew to
be Iranians. I could tell that their
purpose was to stop the shipping
of oil from the Middle East. They
were so praiseful of God in their
speech that I had the sense that
this was some kind of religious
mission.
Illustration by Byron Bay Media Ltd/Giles Evans
The missiles that occupied the
desert of the Middle East were equipped with chemical warheads.
I don't know where they were aimed, but I do know that there was
worldwide fear of the intentions of the Arab nations that had them.
Chemical warfare played a role in a horrible vision of terrorism
that takes place in France before 2000. It begins when the French
publish a book that infuriates the Arab world. I don't know the
title of this book, but the result of its publication is a chemical
attack by Arabs on a city in France. A chemical is put into the
water supply, and thousands drink it and die before it can be elimi-
nated.
In one brief vision I saw Egyptians rioting in the streets, while a
voice told me that by 1997 Egypt would collapse as a democracy
and be taken over by religious fanatics.
The final visions from box eleven were like many images we
now see of Sarajavo: modern cities crumbling beneath the weight
of warfare, their inhabitants fighting one another for reasons rang-
ing from racism to religious conflict. I saw many towns world-
wide where desperate citizens were eating their own dead.
In one such scene, Europeans in a hilly region of the world were
weeping as they cooked human meat. In rapid succession I saw
people of all five races eating their fellow humans.
BOX TWELVE: TECHNOLOGY AND VIRUS
The eleventh box was gone and I was into the twelfth box. Its
visions addressed an important event in the distant future, the
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
decade of the nineties (remember, this was 1975), when many of
the great changes would take place.
In this box I watched as a biological engineer from the Middle
East found a way to alter DNA and create a biological virus that
would be used in the manufacture of computer chips. This discov-
ery allowed for huge strides in science and technology. Japan,
China, and other countries of the Pacific Rim experienced boom
times as a result of this discovery and became powers of incredi-
ble magnitude. Computer chips produced from this process found
their way into virtually every form of technology, from cars and
airplanes to vacuum cleaners and blenders.
Before the turn of the century, this man was among the richest
in the world, so rich that he had a stranglehold on the world econ-
omy. Still the world welcomed him, since the computer chips he
had designed somehow put the
world on an even keel.
Gradually he succumbed to his
own power. He began to think of
himself as a deity and insisted on
greater control of the world. With
that extra control, he began to rule
the world.
His method of rule was unique.
Everyone in the world was man-
dated by law to have one of his
computer chips inserted under-
neath his or her skin. This chip
contained all of an individual's
personal information. If a gov-
ernment agency wanted to know
something, all it had to do was
scan your chip with a special
device. By doing so, it could dis-
cover everything about you, from
where you worked and lived, to
your medical records and even
what kind of illnesses you might
get in the future.
There was an even more sinister side to this chip. A person's
lifetime could be limited by programming this chip to dissolve and
kill him with the viral substance it was made from. Lifetimes
were controlled like this to avoid the cost that growing old places
on the government. It was also used as a means of eliminating
people with chronic illnesses that put a drain on the medical sys-
tem.
People who refused to have chips implanted in their bodies
roamed as outcasts. They could not be employed and were denied
government services.
THE FINAL VISIONS
At the very end came a thirteenth vision. I don't know where it
came from. I didn't see a Being of Light bring it forward in a box,
nor did I see one take it away. This vision was in many ways the
most important of all because it summed up everything I had seen
in the twelve boxes. Through telepathy I could hear a Being say,
"If you follow what you have been taught and keep living the
same way you have lived the last thirty years, all of this will surely
be upon you. If you change, you can avoid the coming war."
Scenes from a horrible world war accompanied this message.
As the visions appeared on the screen, the Being told me that the
years 1994 through 1996 were critical ones in determining
whether this war would break out. "If you follow this dogma, the
world by the year 2004 will not be the same one you now know,"
NEXUS 103
said the Being. "But it can still be changed and you can help Beings were desperately trying to help us, not because we were
change it." such good guys, but because without us advancing spiritually here
Scenes from World War III came to life before me. I was in a on Earth, they could not become successful in their world. "You
hundred places at once, from deserts to forests, and saw a world humans are truly the heroes," a Being told me. "Those who go to
filled with fighting and chaos. Somehow it was clear that this Earth are heroes and heroines, because you are doing something
final war, an Armaggedon if you will, was caused by fear. In one that no other spiritual beings have the courage to do. You have
of the most puzzling visions of all, I saw an army of women in gone to Earth to co-create with God."
black robes and veils marching through a European city. As I was presented with each of these boxes, my mind pondered
"The fear these people are feeling is an unnecessary one," said the same questions, over and over: Why is this happening to me?
the Being of Light. "But it is a fear so great that humans will give What are these scenes in the boxes and why are they being shown
up all freedoms in the name of safety." to me? I didn't know what was going on, and despite the seeming-
I also saw scenes that were not of war, including many visions ly infinite knowledge that I had been given earlier, I was unable to
of natural disasters. In parts of the world that had once been fer- find the answers to those questions. I was seeing the future and I
tile with wheat and corn, I saw parched desert and furrowed fields didn't know why.
that farmers had given up on. In After the final visions, the thirteenth
other parts of the world, torrential Being of Light answered my questions.
rainstorms had gouged out the earth, He was more powerful than the others, or
eating away topsoil and creating People who refused to have at least I assume he was. His colours
rivers of thick, dark mud. chips implanted in their bodies were more intense, and the other Beings
People were starving in this vision. seemed to defer to him. His personality
They were begging for food on the roamed as outcasts. They was conveyed in his light and encom-
streets, holding out bowls and cups could not be employed and passed the emotions of his fellow Beings.
and even their hands in hopes that Without words, he told me that every-
someone or something would offer were denied government thing I had just seen was in the future, but
them a scrap to eat. In some of the services. not necessarily cast in stone.
pictures, people had given up or were "The flow of human events can be
too weak to beg and were curled on changed, but first people have to know
the ground waiting for the gift of what they are," said the Being. He com-
death. municated to me again their belief that humans were great, power-
I saw civil wars breaking out in Central and South America and ful and mighty spiritual Beings.
the rise of socialist governments in all of these countries before "We here see everyone who goes to the Earth as great adventur-
the year 2000. As these wars intensified, millions of refugees ers," he said. "You had the courage to go and expand your life
streamed across the US border, looking for a new life in North and take your place in the great adventure that God created known
America. Nothing we did could stop these immigrants. They as the world."
were driven by fear of death and loss of confidence in God. He then told me my purpose on Earth. "You are there to create
I saw millions of people streaming north out of El Salvador and spiritualistic capitalism," he said.
Nicaragua, and more millions crossing the Rio Grande into Texas. "You are to engage this coming system by changing people's
There were so many of them that we had to line the border with thought processes. Show people how to rely on their spiritual
troops and force them back across the river. selves instead of the government and churches. Religion is fine,
The Mexican economy was broken by these refugees and col- but don't let people be entirely controlled by it. Humans are
lapsed under the strain. mighty spiritual beings. All they need to realise is that love is
As these visions ended, I had the amazing realisation that these treating others the way they themselves want to be treated."

104 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 T HE P ROPHECIES OF
M ITAR T ARABICH
M
itar Tarabich (18291899), an illiterate peasant from the small Serbian village
of Kremna, experienced occasional prophetic visions. Being a religious
person and having a local Serbian orthodox priest for a godfather, he told this
priest about his episodes of "seeing into the future".
The priest, Zaharije Zaharich (18361918), wrote down everything in a small notebook,
which was damaged by fire in 1943 when his family home was destroyed by the occupy-
ing Bulgarian Army. This text is now in the possession of the family of Zaharich's great-
grandson, Mr Dejan Malenkovich. Tarabich's prophecies were literally very straightfor-
Nineteenth-century ward, unlike the prophecies of Nostradamus (15031566) that seem to be encrypted with
the latest 1,024-bit encryption technology.
Serbian peasant Tarabich's best-known prophecy has to do with a series of political events in 19th-
century Serbia. He predicted a sequence of events, spanning a course of decades, that
Mitar Tarabich eventually led to the removal of the ruling Obrenovich family from the Serbian royal
throne. This prophecy came to be known in the Balkan region as "the Black Prophecy",
made some and it played out as predicted.
You should note that Tarabich's words are translated from Serbo-Croatian and that the
uncannily accurate translation is not necessarily in its final form. You may notice that some of the phrasing
predictions for the in the quotes is awkward and rough; this is an accurate reflection of his rural accent.
Tarabich's words come from conversations with his godfather Zaharich, so you should be
19th and 20th aware that any references to "you" or "your descendants" relate to Zaharich (the priest)
specifically. When Tarabich says "us" he means the Serbs, but he does not distinguish
centuries, so only between Croats, Serbs, Slovenians, etc. To him, anyone who spoke his language was a
Serb. Perhaps it is also important to note that we don't really know how much of
time will judge how Tarabich's prophecies was influenced by his own opinion. Some of the adjectives used to
describe the people and events he saw could be a reflection of his "peasant-like" interpre-
his prophecies play tation of those events (examples: intelligent, brave, honest, horrible, calamity, etc.).
out for the 21st Predictions and Events up to the End of World War I (19031918)
century. "After the assassination of the king and queen [Alexander and Draga Obrenovich], the
Karageorgevichs will come to power. Then we will again start a war with the Turks.
Four Christian states will attack Turkey, and our border will be on the River Lim. Then
we shall finally conquer and avenge Kosovo."
Historical Facts:
1903 Alexander and Draga Obrenovich were assassinated by their own guards, and
Petar Karageorgevich became the ruler of Serbia.
1912 The First Balkan War erupted between the Balkan Alliance (Serbia, Greece,
Bulgaria and Montenegro) and Turkey (Ottoman Empire). The Balkan Alliance won, and
Serbia moved its border up to the River Lim. Serbia gained Kosovo from the Turks.

"Soon after this war, another war will start...the Big War in which a lot of blood will be
spilled. If that blood were a river, a huge stone of 300 kilograms would roll in its current
easily. A mighty army from across a river, three times bigger than ours, will attack us...
Editing and Commentary They will destroy everything on their way. They penetrate deep into our land... Hard
by Neo 2005 times will come upon us... Our army will almost give up, but than suddenly an intelligent
man on a black stallion will take command and cry out, 'Forward to victory, my people!
Forward, brother Serbs!' Our army springs to life. Its fighting spirit wakes up and the
enemy is chased away across the river..."

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 105

 Historical Facts:
1914 The Austro-Hungarian Empire started a war against
Serbia after a Serb nationalist, Gavrilo Princip, assassinated the
heir to the Austrian throne, Archduke Francis Ferdinand, and his
wife in Sarajevo. This regional war soon developed into World
War I (with 32 nations involved). In the beginning, Austria con-
quered the northern and central parts of Serbia easily but when
General Alexandar Mishichthe man on a black stalliontook
command, the Serbian armies were able to repel the Austrian
invaders back across the River Drina until October 1915.
"Then an even greater army will come from the north and run
over us. Our land will be devastated. We will be dying of hunger
and sickness in great numbers. For three years, Serbia will live
in total darkness. During that time, our wounded army will be
abroad. They will stay in a place surrounded by the sea and will
be fed and nursed by friends from over the seas. Then, their
wounds healed, they will come back home in ships. They will free
Serbia and all of the territories where our brothers live."
Historical Facts:
The Germans started their attack from the north and by
December 1915 had defeated the Serbs.
The Serbian Army and Government
fled to the Greek island of Krkira
(Corfu) in 1916. There they regrouped,
and after a full recovery they sailed for "Listen to me, my good father:
Salonika where they formed a new front after the first Big War, Austria
with other allied armies. After much
heavy fighting, Serbia was finally free will disappear and Serbia
and reunited with the other southern will be as big as a real kingdom.
Slav nations (Croats and Slovenians),
whose territories had been part of the We will live together with our
Austro-Hungarian Empire. During the northern brothers."
German occupation, a large number of
people in Serbia died of hunger and
sickness.
"I will tell you one more thing, father: the invading army will
come to Kremna exactly on your baptismal day, stay for three
years and go away on the same day they cameSt Luke's Day.
But you will not see the end of the war. In the last year of the
world's big carnage, you will die. Both these wars, the one with
the Turks and the big one when the whole world will be at war,
will take away two of your grandchildrenone before, and the
other after your death."
Historical Facts:
The Germans entered Kremna on St Luke's Day, and the vil-
lage was liberated on exactly the same date three years later.
Zaharije Zaharich died in 1918, the last year of World War I,
which also took the lives of two of his grandchildrenone before,
and one after his death.
Predictions and Events up to the End of World War II
(19181945)
"Listen to me, my good father: after the first Big War, Austria
will disappear and Serbia will be as big as a real kingdom. We
will live together with our northern brothers."
Historical Facts:
1918 The Austro-Hungarian Empire was dissolved. In
December 1918 a new State, officially titled the Kingdom of the
Serbs, Croats and Slovenes, was proclaimed. It was constantly
riddled with economic, social and political problems caused
mostly by conflicts between various nationalistic political parties.
"For some years we shall live in peace, love and prosperity.
But it will not last for long. A venomous hatred will come into
our people... Blood is spilled...horrible! I do not know when or
why, but it is probably because of this hatred."
Historical Facts:
Serbian domination of the government and a multiplicity of
political parties, and denial of autonomy to the Croats, Slovenes
and other minority groups, engendered intense political strife in the
kingdom. Under the guidance of Stjepan Radich, the Croats and
their allies systematically struggled against the centralist system
and leadership. The first phase of the struggle ended when, in June
1928, a Montenegrin deputy in the national Parliament fatally shot
Radich and two of his parliamentary colleagues. In retaliation, the
Croats withdrew from the Parliament and organised a separatist
regime, with headquarters in Zagreb. Civil war seemed imminent,
but in January 1929 King Alexander (the Serbian king) suspended
the 1921 constitution, dissolved Parliament and all political parties
and assumed dictatorial control of the government. The king, thus
hoping to impose national unity, subsequently abolished the
traditional provinces and changed the name of the State to the
Kingdom of Yugoslavia ("Land of the South Slavs").
"Then the one who sits on the
throne of our kingdom is killed. He
will leave behind a widow and
orphans. A relative of his will
replace him on the throne, and he
will try to rule justly and take good
care of his cousin's children. But
people do not love him, and he is
accused of being an unjust ruler.
He is dethroned and imprisoned by
his army. His life will be saved by
England's king and queen. Then,
on the empty throne, our killed
king's boy sits. But he will rule
only for a few days. He will be
taken by his soldiers over the seas because our kingdom is again
invaded by a foreign, evil army. All of Europe is under the rule of
the crooked anti-cross."
Historical Facts:
On 9 October 1934, a Macedonian terrorist connected with
Croatian separatist groups assassinated King Alexander, then in
France on a diplomatic mission. The king's son, still a youth,
succeeded to the throne of Yugoslavia as Petar II. Control of the
government was vested in a tripartite Regency Council headed by
Prince Pavle Karageorgevich, a cousin of the late king. Because
of his growing unpopularity, Pavle was ousted by his army and
exiled to England. World War II started in 1939. The German
Army invaded Yugoslavia in April 1941, but young King Petar
fled Yugoslavia with the government ahead of the invading Nazi
hordes. Most of Europe fell under Nazi occupation.
"In the beginning, Russia will not wage war; but when attacked
by the evil army, they will fight back. There is a red czar on the
Russian throne."
Historical Facts:
When Nazi Germany started World War II, the USSR
(Russia) remained neutral. On 22 June 1941, more than three mil-
lion German troops invaded the USSR. Under Communist Party
leader Joseph Stalin, the USSR fought back.
"Here, men with stars on their foreheads will appear. They will
rule Uzice and this region for exactly 73 days, and then fleeing

106 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

their enemies they will go over the River Drina. These are times death in 1953. Yugoslavia's relationship with the democratic
of hunger and great evil... Serbs will fight and butcher each capitalist countries caused mistrust with the USSR.
other. The invading enemy looks upon Serbian evil hatred and "After the Great War, peace will reign all over the world.
laughs at us. A man with blue eyes on a white horse appears Many new states will appear...black, white, red and yellow. An
among our people. A star shines on his forehead. The evil enemy international court is formed, which does not allow countries to
will hunt him all over our country, in the woods, over rivers and fight each other. This court will be above all kings. Where a war
upon the sea, but in vain. The man will gather a mighty army and starts, the court will judge justly, trying to transform hatred and
free occupied Belgrade. He will chase away the enemy from our butchery into love and peace. The lucky ones who live to see
country, and our kingdom will be bigger than ever. Russia will these times will be more than happy."
make an alliance with other great kingdoms over the seas, and Historical Facts:
they will burn down the crooked anti-cross and free all the In December 1945, the United Nations (UN) was established.
enslaved people of Europe." Articles 3338 of the charter authorise the Security Council to
Historical Facts: encourage disputing nations to settle their differences through
In Yugoslavia the Communist Party, led peaceful means including negotiations,
by Croatian communist Josip Broz Titothe inquiry, mediation, conciliation, arbitration
man with blue eyes on a white horsestarted and judicial settlement.
the resistance against the Germans and From 1946 to 1970, dozens of countries
Italians as well as against the Serb and Croat "After the Great War, America from Asia, Africa, the Middle East and South
nationalist extremists who were waging war achieved independence.
against each other. The symbol of Tito's peace will reign all
Communist Party was a red star, which they over the world. "After a while some great kings, as well as
wore on their hats. some small ones, will start to fake their
The first territory liberated by Tito and Many new states will respect for the court while doing whatever
his army was the region around the city of
Uzice. They held it against German and
appear...black, white, they please... Many small wars will begin
because of this... Thousands upon thousands
Italian forces for exactly 73 days, and then red and yellow. will die, but there will be no big wars."
Tito and his army were forced to flee over the Historical Facts:
River Drina to Bosnia. Guerrilla war An international court Korean War (19501953), Vietnam
was fought all over Yugoslavia. is formed, which does War (19591975), Afghanistan War
By May 1945, the Germans were (19791988), Nicaragua and the
defeated by the alliance of the USSR, not allow countries to IranContra scandal (19791989), etc.
USA, UK and France, and by the end of fight each other. This
the year Yugoslavia was united. Tito "There will be a few wars around the
entered Belgrade on a white horse and court will be above kingdom of Israel, but sooner or later
made the Royal Palace his residence. all kings..." the peace will come even there. In these
Communist Yugoslavia was formed, and wars, brothers fight brothers; then they
gained more territories from the neigh- make peace and kiss each other, but
bouring state of Italy. their hatred remains... All these small
wars are initiated by the great kingdoms
Predictions and Events following because of their wickedness and malice;
the End of World War II (1946 to those who fight and butcher each other
present) do it because of their blind stupidity."
[Editor's note: Unlike the previous writings, the priest Zaharich Historical Facts:
is now speaking directly in his diary about his conversations with In 1947, the State of Israel was founded in the Middle East.
Mitar Tarabich.] In 1967, a warknown as the Six-Day Warbroke out between
"Mitar told me that the man with blue eyes and the star upon Israel and its Arab neighbours. In 1975, civil war broke out in
his forehead would break the long-lasting love with our Christian Lebanon, with involvement of the Iranians, Syrians, Palestinians
Orthodox brothers, the Russians. He would not be grateful to and Israelis.
them for the fact that he was sitting on our throne because they Other wars included the IraqIran War (19801988), the
had put him there in the first place. A great hatred would erupt IraqKuwait War (1991), etc.
between us and the Russians. Blood would be spilled among our
people. These wounds would be quickly healed and we would "In our country, the time of peace and prosperity will last for a
again be friends with the Russians, but never sincerely, only long time. Many a generation will be born to live and die in
formally, pretending for the sake of others not to understand how peace, knowing about war only through wise books, words and
we cheat and lie to each other." different strange apparitions."
Historical Facts: Historical Facts:
In 1948, Tito refused to accept orders from USSR leader In 1965 and 1966, economic reforms in Yugoslavia produced
Joseph Stalinthe man who formed him politically in the early what has been called an economic revolution. Total industrial
1920s and sent him back to Yugoslavia to organise a communist production in 1957 increased by 70 per cent over that of 1953,
party. The USSR denounced Tito, accusing him of major and by 1966 it was more than double the 1957 figure. By 1967,
deviations from orthodox communist policy. Tito purged and prices had been stabilised, savings were increasing steadily and
executed members of his party who opposed this decision. labour productivity had risen by about seven per cent.
Cordial relations with communist USSR resumed after Stalin's TV and radio enjoyed a great boom in the 1950s and 1960s.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 107

 "Our kingdom will be strong and well loved and respected by
everybody. People will eat only white bread and whole wheat just
when they want to. Everybody will ride around in carts with no
oxen. People will travel in the sky, looking down upon our land
as if they had climbed on the doubled Tara Mountain."
Historical Facts:
There was economic prosperity, coupled with the introduction
of the car, bus, van and air transportation (Yugoslavia started its
own airline company).
"Serbia will prosper best while the man with blue eyes on a
white horse governs, one who will come to Serbia bringing some
kind of new religion. He will ascend our throne, and will be
strong and healthy, living a long life close to one hundred years.
He will very much like to hunt, and one time while hunting he will
accidentally fall from his white horse and thus lose his leg. From
this wound he will die, not because of his great age."
Historical Facts:
Tito's leadership brought
economic prosperity and communism
to Yugoslavia. Tito lived until 87
years of age (18921980). He did
not have a hunting accident but he "People will drill wells deep in the
enjoyed horse-riding and hunting.
The real cause of his death was ground and dig out gold, which will
diabetes, which caused his leg to be give them light, speed and power,
amputated.
and the Earth will shed tears of
"After him our land will be gov- sorrow because there will be much
erned by some kind of commission, more gold and light on its surface
but it will never be as it was. Even
though the people in our kingdom than in its interior."
will forget about misery and hunger
and will live in great wealth, brother
will start to hate and think evil of
brother."
Historical Facts:
After Tito's death, Yugoslavia was ruled by "collective
presidency" until 1991. In the 1980s, tensions ran high in the
southern Serbian province of Kosovo, which had become
autonomous in 1968 after riots protesting against Serbian control.
Seeking more independence and calling for a separate republic,
the majority population of ethnic Albanians clashed with Serbians
and Montenegrins throughout the decade.
"On our borders and over them a new nation will appear. They
will grow like grass after a deluge. They will be good and honest,
and they will answer our hatred with reason. They will take care
of each other like brothers. And we, because of our madness,
shall think that we know everything and that we can do anything,
and we shall baptise them with some new fate of ours, but all that
will be in vain because they will believe only in themselves and in
nobody else. Big trouble will come of it, because this nation will
be brave."
Historical Facts:
After the parliaments of Croatia and Slovenia passed declara-
tions of independence on 25 June 1991, the Yugoslavian Federal
Government ordered the Serb-dominated army to suppress the
secessionists. A 10-day war was fought in Slovenia, but ended
with a Serb defeat. The war in Croatia lasted seven months, end-
ing in January 1992. These secessions and the declaration of
independence by the Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia in
September 1991 marked the end of the de facto existence of
Yugoslavia. The similar declaration by Bosnia and Herzegovina
in March 1992, and the ensuing fighting, marked the outbreak of
the BosnianCroatianSerbian War.
"Many summers this trouble will last, and nobody will be able
to stop it, because that nation will grow like grass. One who will
be born many summers after you will be honest and intelligent; he
will deal with them in peace. We shall live in peacethey there,
us here and there."
Historical Facts:
The BosnianCroatianSerbian War lasted for five years
(19911995). One of the major aspects of the conflict was inter-
national involvement, both diplomatic and military (by NATO).
The international community took a series of limited measures
including peace initiatives and peace plans. "They there, us here
and there": after the war, ethnic Croatians lived only in Croatia
while ethnic Serbs lived in both Serbia and Croatia.
"You see, my godfather, when the
world starts to live in peace and
abundance after the Second Big War,
all of that will be just a bitter illusion
because many will forget God and
they will worship only their own
human intelligence... And do you
know, my godfather, what is human
intelligence compared to God's will
and knowledge? Not even a single
drop in the ocean."
Historical Facts:
With the increase in scientific
knowledge and the consequent
scientific explanation of phenomena
formerly considered supernatural,
atheism became a more natural and
less despised philosophical trend.
"Men will build a box and within will be some kind of gadget
with images, but they will not be able to communicate with me
already dead, even though this image gadget will be as close to
this other world as hairs on the human scalp are close to each
other. With the help of this image gadget, man will be able to see
everything that is happening all over the world."
Historical Facts:
Invention of television and the computer.
Influence of the Internet, CNN, Al-Jazeera, Fox News, CCTV,
etc.
Searching Google with the search words "Ghost" and
"Detector" takes us to this entry:
"EMF Detectors. EMF detectors were designed to detect elec-
tromagnetic emissions from microwave ovens and high-tension
electrical wires. EMF detectors alert investigators to the presence
of ghosts by measuring electromagnetic distortion in the two to
seven milligauss range. The models that come most highly rec-
ommended by paranormal investigators are the TriField EMF
Detector and the TriField Natural EM."
"People will drill wells deep in the ground and dig out gold,
which will give them light, speed and power, and the Earth will
shed tears of sorrow because there will be much more gold and
light on its surface than in its interior. The Earth will suffer
because of these open wounds. Instead of working in the fields,
people will dig everywhere, in right and wrong places, but the

108 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

real power will be all around them, not being able to tell them, of the world, these will be the worst of offspring. Only weaklings
'Come on, take me; don't you see that I am here, all around you?' will be born, and nobody will be strong enough to give birth to a
Only after many a summer, people will remember this real power, real hero."
and then they will realise how stupid it was to dig all those holes." Historical Facts:
Historical Facts: After the split of Yugoslavia into Serbia, Croatia, Bosnia and
Oil (petroleum), also known as "black gold", powers the car, Kosovo, UN peacekeeping forces were stationed in the Balkan
electric generator, plane, etc. Exploration to find oilfields is an states. Most of them were male, so there was the possibility of
economically risky task, but in the 1980s the oil exploration their bedding Serbian females. Or this may refer to the wide-
technique was perfected, although the risks of discovering spread, systematic rapes during the Balkan War.
economically non-viable oilfields still existed. Oil experts have The Serbs view those peacekeeping forces as foreign invaders
estimated that by 2050, world oil reserves will run dry. that sided with Croatian, Bosnian and Albanian Muslims in
Kosovo.
"This power will also be present in people, but it will take a long
time before they discover it and use it. Thus man will live for a "At one time we shall disappear from this land of ours. We
long, long time, not being able to know himself. There will be shall go to the north, and then realising our stupid deed we shall
many learned men who will think, through their books, that they return. When we come back, we shall wise up and chase away the
know and can do everything. They will be the great obstacle for unholy one, not to see him, in God's name, ever again."
this realisation (self-knowledge), but Historical Facts:
once men get this knowledge then By the time the Balkan War
people will see what kind of delusion ended in 1995, the Serbian, Croatian
it was when they listened to their and Bosnian economies were ruined
learned men. When that happens, and there was widespread unemploy-
people will be so sorry that they didn't "Men will build a box and within ment. Serbian, Croatian and Bosnian
discover it before, because this
knowledge is so simple. will be some kind of gadget with people have to go to Germany,
Denmark, Belgium, etc. in the north
"People will do many stupid things, images... With the help of this to work. In Kosovo, Serbs have
thinking that they know and can do become refugees.
everything, not knowing anything. image gadget, man will be able to As of June 2004, there were
Wise men will appear in the Orient, see everything that is happening 200,000 Serb refugees from Kosovo,
and their wisdom will cross all seas and only 80,000 Serbs remained in
and frontiers, but people will not all over the world." Kosovo. As of March 2004, KFOR
trust this wisdom for a long time, and in Kosovo had 19,000 troops from a
this real truth they will proclaim for a peak of 50,000; and as of June 2004,
lie. Their souls will not be possessed SFOR in Bosnia had 7,000 troops
by the Devil, but by something much from the peak of 60,000.
worse. They will believe that their illu- As of June 2004, there was news
sion is the real truth, although there will be no truth in their from Kosovo that ethnic Albanians were chasing ethnic Serbs
heads. from Kosovo, using mob riots to destroy churches and houses
"Here at home it will be the same as all over the world. People belonging to the Serbs, while KFOR troops were behaving like
will start to hate clean air and this divine freshness and all divine lame ducks.
beauty, and will hide in rankness. Nobody will force them to do
that, but they will do it of their own free will. Here in Kremna, "The whole world will be plagued by a strange disease and
many a field will become a meadow and many a home will be nobody will be able to find a cure; everybody will say, 'I know, I
abandoned, but then those who have left will come back to heal know, because I am learned and smart', but nobody will know
themselves by breathing fresh air. In Serbia, it will not be anything. People will think and think, but they will not be able to
possible to distinguish a man from a woman. Everybody will find the right cure, which will be with God's help, all around them
dress the same. This calamity will come to us from abroad, but it and in themselves.
will stay with us the longest. A groom will take a bride, but "Man will travel to other worlds to find lifeless deserts there,
nobody will know who is who. People will be lost and more and and still, God forgive him, he will think that he knows better than
more senseless day by day. Men will be born not knowing who God himself. There, except for the eternal peace of God, he will
was their grandfather and great-grandfather. People will think see nothing, but he will sense with his heart and soul all of God's
that they know everything, but not a thing they will know." beauty and power. People will drive in rigs upon the Moon and
Historical Facts: stars. They will look for life, but life similar to ours they will not
As has been happening all over the world, people are leaving find. It will be there, but they will not be able to understand it
rural areas to seek jobs in the big cities. More women are having and see that it is life. One who goes there, God forgive him, not
their hair cut short and are wearing trousers, as compared to the believing in God as it is proper for an honourable and decent
time of Tarabich. Children born out of wedlock has become person, when he comes back he will say, 'Oh, you people who
commonplace. mention God's name with doubt, go there where I was; then you
will see what is God's mind and power'.
"The Serbs will separate from each other and they will say, 'I "The more people will know, the less they will love and care for
am not a Serb; I am not a Serb'. The unholy one will infiltrate each other. Hatred will be so great between them that they will
this nation and bed with Serbian sisters, mothers and wives. He care more for their different gadgets than for their relatives. Man
will sire such children that among the Serbs, since the beginning will trust his gadget more than his first neighbour...

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 109


"Among people of a nation far in the
north, a little man will appear who will
teach men about love and compassion, but
there will be many hypocrites around him
so that he will have many ups and downs.
Not one of these hypocrites will want to
know what is real human grace, but his
wise books will remain and all the words
he will say, and then people will see how
self-deceived they were.
"Those who will read and write different
books with numbers will think that they
know the most. These learned men will let
their lives be led by their calculations, and
they will do and live exactly how these
numbers tell them.
"Among these learned men there will be
good and evil men. The evil ones will do
evil deeds.
"They will poison air and water and
spread pestilence over the seas, rivers and
earth, and people will start to die suddenly
of various ailments.
"Those good and wise will see that all
this effort and hard work is not worth a
penny and that it leads to the destruction of
the world, and instead of looking for wis-
dom in numbers they will start to seek it in
meditation."
110 NEXUS
The Prophecies of Mitar Tarabich
Predictions and Events during World
War III (20502100)
"When they start to meditate more, they
will be closer to God's wisdom, but it will
be too late because the evil ones will
already ravage the whole Earth and men
will start to die in great numbers. Then
people will run away from cities to the
country and look for the mountains with
three crosses, and there, inside, they will
be able to breathe and drink water. Those
who will escape will save themselves and
their families, but not for long, because a
great famine will appear. There will be
plenty of food in towns and villages, but it
will be poisoned. Many will eat because of
hunger and die immediately. Those who
will fast to the end will survive, because the
Holy Ghost will save them and they will be
close to God.
"The greatest and the angriest will strike
against the mightiest and the most furious!
When this horrible war starts, woe to those
armies that fly over skies; better off will be
those who fight on ground and water.
"People waging this war will have their
scientists who will invent different and
strange cannonballs. When they explode,
these cannonballs instead of killing will
www.nexusmagazine.com
cast a spell over all that livespeople,
armies and livestock. This spell will make
them sleep, and sleep they will instead of
fighting, and after this they will come back
to their senses.
"We will not fight in this war, but others
will do battle over our heads. Burning
people will fall from the sky over Pozega [a
town in Serbia]. Only one country at the
end of the world, surrounded by great seas,
as big as our Europe [Australia?], will live
in peace, without any troubles... Upon it or
over it, not a single cannonball will
explode! Those who will run and hide in
the mountains with three crosses will find
shelter and will be saved to live after in
abundance, happiness and love, because
there will be no more wars..."
Editor's Note:
Neo, the originator of this article, advises
that all credit should go to Mitar Tarabich,
Zaharije Zaharich and the person who
translated these prophecies from Serbian
to English. Note that we have retained his
anglicised spellings of Serbian names.
Readers may wish to refer to an earlier
article, "The Prophetic Visions of Mitar
Tarabich", which we published in NEXUS
vol. 3, no. 3.
STRANGE Times 2006
 PROPHETIC MESSAGES FROM
THE HOPI ELDERS
from John Hogue, April 2001
T
he Hopi Native Americans of the US
Southwest have an ancient prophecy
that has long foreseen the destruction
of our present world through a purification
by fire. You will know that the times for
this purification are at hand with the fulfil-
ment of a series of prophecies, known as
the "final warnings".
The first set of warnings was meant to
alert the Hopi elders of a future time when
the purification of the world was at hand,
after which they were expected to break
their silence and warn the world of a sec-
ond set of predictions hastening the onset
of the purification of the world by fire.
Here is the first set of warnings:
Warning: An iron horse will come to
the land of the red man.
Fulfilment: This is the train; it appeared
in the 19th century.
Warning: The white man will raise
metal wires into the skies.
Fulfilment: These are telegraph lines of
the 19th century and, later, the power lines
of the 20th century.
STRANGE Times 2006
Warning: Cobwebs will crisscross the
skies.
Fulfilment: These are the contrails of
planes and jets.
Warning: The powers of the red, the
swastika and the Sun will threaten Turtle
Island.
Fulfilment: North America seen from
space looks like the outline of a turtle. (Do
not ask me how pre-Columbian seers knew
that.) In World War II and in the Cold War
that followed, these three "powers" did
threaten North America. The swastika of
the Nazis and, later, the "red" forces of the
Communists of Russia and China beset
Turtle Island. The powers of the Sun did
directly scorch the earth of native lands
when the white man tested his atomic
bombs in Nevada and New Mexico near
the Hopi sacred lands in Arizona.
Warning: The white man will create a
gourd of ashes that will lay waste to the
land and keep it infertile for generations.
Fulfilment: These are atomic bombs.
Radiation is the sterilising plague.
Warning: The fulfilment of this first set
of signs will warrant the Hopi elders to end
their long silence and spread their prophetic
www.nexusmagazine.com
message that the great purification is at
hand. They will share their message and
their wisdom with the people of the world
so that everyone may prepare or soften its
blow upon the Earth.
Fulfilment: Indeed, over 50 years ago,
the Hopi elders agreed that the first wave
of signs had all been fulfilled. They there-
fore began warning the world about the
prophecies of a coming purification. Some
of the elders, such as Thomas Banyaca,
have explained the prophecies on national
television and have spoken before the full
assembly of the United Nations.
Now comes the second set of final
warnings:
Warning: A tribe of red-hatted and red-
cloaked people will come in great numbers
from the East, travelling through the air.
They will colonise the Western American
lands and then scatter and disappear.
Fulfilment: The Tibetans came calling
on the Hopi elders when the first three pre-
cursory signs in their own 1,200-year-old
prophecy concerning the transplantation of
their religion to America were fulfilled.
This prophecy, which came from
Padmasambhava, the founder of Tibetan
Buddhism, says: "When the iron bird flies
NEXUS 111
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
[a reference to airplanes] and the horse runs
on wheels [cars], the Tibetan people will be
scattered like ants across the face of the
Earth, and the Dharma will come to the
land of the red men."
Since the 1970s, the Dalai Lama and a
number of maroon-robed priests fulfilled
Hopi prophecy by regularly paying a visit
to the Hopi elders and moving on.
Many Hopis also believe that a later visi-
tation in the 1980s of red-cloaked/capped
followers of Bhagwan Sri Rajneesh, com-
ing in their thousands to eastern Oregon,
completes the prophecy. Even a handful of
Rajneeshees, aware of the prophecy, paid a
visit to the Hopi elder-in-chief, Grandfather
David Monongye, in 1985, before they and
their fellow red-clothed travellers soon
vanished from sight. I report on this meet-
ing in detail in my book, Messiahs: The
Visions and Prophecies for the Second
Coming.
Warning: The white man will steal
rocks from the Moon. This is a danger
sign, that we are in the final days before the
purification.
Fulfilment: The Apollo Moon landings
unearthed (or should I say "unmooned"?)
hundreds of pounds of Moon rocks, taking
them back to Earth. Indeed, I saw one sit-
ting under glass at the United Nations, just
outside the main theatre where the Hopi
elders shared their prophecies with the UN
assembly just a few years before.
Warning: The white man will build a
permanent house in the sky. This is the
final warning before the purification.
Fulfilment: MIR may have blazed its
way down to the sea in fragments, but the
112 NEXUS
far more permanent International Space
Station traverses our skies today. It will be
fully operational in a few more years. One
could argue that it is already operational
and therefore the times of the purification
have come.
T here are hundreds of prophecies from
other apocalyptic traditions that support
the idea of some death and rebirth of the
world shortly after the turn of the millenni-
um. Those who have read my books know
that I interpret the coming Hopi purifica-
tion by fire in two ways.
If fear and robotic adherence to fossilised
traditions remain the motivating forces of
our destiny, then the "fires" of war, global
warming, collective anger and stress will
burn our civilisation down before the next
50 years are out.
However, if in the same period of 50
years the message of personal transforma-
tion and meditation is heeded by enough
individuals around the world and they start
changing themselves, then the "fires" com-
ing to purify the world will be those of
love, awareness, genius and compassion.
I believe we will see the blazing of both
inner and outer fires in the coming years.
The question then remains: which fire
would you like to be purified by?
With that said, I would like to share with
you a message I received off the Internet.
It is purportedly an open letter of advice on
how to get through the year 2001, coming
from a spokesperson for the Hopi elders. I
have not yet confirmed whether this mes-
sage is indeed from the Hopi elders, but my
own understanding of their prophecies
makes me presume that it is authentic.
Here it is:
www.nexusmagazine.com
To my fellow swimmers:
There is a river flowing now very fast.
It is so great and swift that there are
those who will be afraid.
They will try to hold on to the shore;
they are being torn apart and will
suffer greatly.
Know that the river has its destination.
The elders say we must let go of the
shore, push off into the middle of the
river, keep our heads above water.
And I say, see who is there with you
and celebrate.
At this time in history, we are to take
nothing personally, least of all our-
selves, for the moment that we do, our
spiritual growth and journey come to a
halt.
The time of the lone wolf is over.
Gather yourselves.
Banish the word "struggle" from your
attitude and vocabulary.
All that we do now must be done in a
sacred manner and in celebration.
We are the ones we have been waiting
for.
The river is a metaphor for the fast white
water currents of our present times in this
new millennium. The call to abandon "the
shore" we know and flow down the current
of an unknown destiny is a common theme
in the Hopi purification prophecy. I have
heard the elders put it in another metaphor-
ical way: people will "drop dead from their
own fear of change" if they do not embrace
the coming changes. Those people who
can not only embrace change but celebrate
their journey into an unknown and new
millennium will greatly benefit from the
coming purification of the world.
Certainly, the call to celebrate lifeand
make every one of life's simple actions
sacredis a common message the Hopi
share with those modern mystics and
prophets like Adi Da, Gurdjieff and Osho.
All of them promote a vision of a coming
new humanity that transcends its past
attachments through meditation and cele-
bration of life. Happy floating down the
unknown river, to you all!
(Source: John Hogue, 16 April 2001, from his
HogueProphecy Archives at website www.hogue-
prophecy.com. A self-styled "rogue scholar",
Hogue is the author of Messiahs: The Visions and
Prophecies for the Second Coming, Nostradamus:
The Complete Prophecies and The Last Pope: The
Decline and Fall of the Church of Rome.)
STRANGE Times 2006
 N IGHT OF THE R ED S KY
The Prophetic Vision of "Grandfather"
In the 1920s, an
Apache wise man
had a Vision of four
prophecies that
foretold death and
destruction for
mankind, unless we
incorporate Spirit in
our daily lives.
Some of these
prophecies may
already have
come true.
by Tom Brown, Jr 1991
The Tracker, Inc.
PO Box 173
Asbury, NJ 08802, USA
Telephone: +1 (908) 479 4681
Fax: +1 (908) 479 6867
E-mail: TrackInc@aol.com
Website: www.trackerschool.com
STRANGE Times 2006
A number of people can predict the future, but few get the timing correct.
"Grandfather" was an Apache wise man and scout, named Stalking Wolf, who
grew up outside white man's influence. His many predictions not only came true
in the manner he predicted, but also when he predicted.
Tom Brown, Jr learned extensively from Grandfather for twenty years, from
their first meeting when Tom was seven years old. Stalking Wolf was the real-life
grandfather of Tom's best friend at the time. The following excerpt from Tom's
book, The Quest, tells of Grandfather's predictions for all of mankind.
L
ooking back, I can clearly see that Grandfather's prophecies, unlike anything
else, had the greatest influence on my life. At the time they had little more effect
than to frighten me and cause me to sit up and take notice. It wasn't until after
his prophecies began to come true that their haunting impact began to affect me
in a very profound way.
More than any other personprophet, religious leader or psychicI have ever met,
Grandfather's prophecies, on both a major and a minor scale, came true exactly at the time
he prophesied and exactly as he prophesied. With that record, I could not help but feel the
impact of these prophecies on my life.
Grandfather could foretell the future with tremendous accuracy. Not only could he pre-
cisely tell us what would happen in the next moment, day, week or year, but with the
same accuracy he could predict the possible futures for ten years and more away. It was
not long before I began to keep detailed records of his predictions, along with other notes
I kept on survival skills, tracking, awareness and things of the Spirit. I received from
Grandfather hundreds of personal, minor predictions, and well over half have since come
true. Along with the minor personal prophecies was a list of 103 major predictions, of
which, to date, over 65 have become absolutely true, not only in time and place but also in
the exact order in which they were predicted to happen.
Grandfather said that there was not future, only possible futures. The 'now' was like the
palm of a hand, with each finger being the possible future, and, as always, one of the
futures was always the most powerful, the way that the main course of events would sure-
ly take us. Thus his predictions were of the possible future, which meant that he always
left a choice.
"If a man could make the right choices," he said, "then he could significantly alter the
course of the possible future. No man, then, should feel insignificant, for it only takes one
man to alter the consciousness of mankind through the Spirit-that-moves-in-all-things. In
essence, one thought influences another, then another, until the thought is made manifest
throughout all of Creation. It is the same thought, the same force, that causes an entire
flock of birds to change course, as the flock then has one mind."
Out of all the personal and major prophecies that Grandfather foretold, there are four
that stand out above all the rest. It is these four that mark the destruction of man and life
on Earth, as we know it to exist now. Yet Grandfather said that we could still change
things, even after the first two prophecies came true, but that there could be no turning
back after the third.
Now that we have gone well past the second prophecy, danger and destruction are very
apparent, and our only recourse is to work harder to change what has possibly become the
inevitable. The urgency that I feelnow, more than everis a direct result of the second,
impossible prophecy coming true. It is the reason that I teach, sometimes with a certain
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 113
desperation, and constantly with the sense that we are quickly one might imagine finding in a jungle. In fact, the whole place
running out of time. looked like a jungleso out of place from the pine, oak and blue-
I should have worked harder and with that same desperation at berry that is typical in the Pine Barrens. As we sat down, a deeper
a much earlier date, but, like the rest of mankind, it took a strong spiritual sense of awareness came over me, and it was then that I
message to get me motivated. I should have known that these noticed the gravestones.
things he prophesied would some day come true, because his per- This was the place of a very old and probably long-forgotten
sonal, minor predictions were coming true daily. cemetery, possibly belonging to the town that had once been here.
He so accurately foretold of Rick's death on a white horse, that I The stones were old; some lay flat on the ground and others stood
would some day teach, that I would have a sonand that taking upright, though none was straight. Plants and bushes had overrun
him into the Pine Barrens for the first time would forever change many of the stones, and I could barely make out the markings on
my life. He predicted the formation of my school, my books, my the stones. The weathering process had worn away many of the
family, and even the horrible mistakes I would make as I tried to names and dates, making them barely readable.
live within society. At once we were in awe, humbled and
Yet with all of this coming true on a daily reverent in this place of death; at the same
basis, I simply would not believe or accept time, we were amazed that Grandfather had
that the major prophecy of man's destruction found it so easily. To my knowledge, none
would come true, and its reality hit me hard.
It was then that the urgency made itself He so accurately foretold of us had been there before, nor had
Grandfather ever spoken of this graveyard.
known. of Rick's death on a white Yet for some reason he seemed to be drawn
horse, that I would some to it, knowing that it was there on some

I
remember so vividly the "night of the unseen spiritual level, at least unseen to us.
four prophecies"as I have become day teach, that I would I suspect now, as I look back, that he knew
accustomed to calling that night when have a son... that it would become a teaching lesson for
Grandfather first made us aware of their pos- us.
sibility. We had been with Grandfather for He walked over to a gravestone that was
five years at the time and were accustomed He predicted the partially hidden by foxgrape vines and gen-
to his prophecies and their accuracy. tly pulled them away. After a long
Our ability to understand the things formation of my school, moment, he motioned us to come over.
of the Spirit world were as sure as our my books, my family, We could barely make out the name on
ability to survive and track. Very little the grave or the dates, but at the bottom
of what society calls "the paranormal"
and even the horrible was carved clearly: "12 years old".
shocked us any more, because miracles mistakes I would make Grandfather then spoke. "Who are
were part of our everyday existence. as I tried to live these people; who is this boy? What
Grandfather was a living miracle, and did they work for and what were their
so many of the things that he did on a within society. hopes, dreams and visions? Did they
daily basis, sometimes unconsciously, just work physically or did they work
would be considered miraculous by for the things beyond the flesh, for a
most. Yet as savvy as we were spiritu- grander purpose? Certainly they
ally, the night of the four prophecies affected the Spirit-that-moves-in-all-
shocked us like nothing we had ever things, but did they really work to the
experienced before. best of their ability to make things bet-
We had been hiking all day without much of a break, making ter for the future of their grandchildren, or did they do nothing
our way to a place where we were going to camp, atop a small hill other than to perpetuate the myth of society? Were they happy,
that I now call Prophecy Hill. It was a typical midsummer hike: joyous and filled with spiritual rapture, or did they just lead lives
hot, humid and dusty, with no water available along our entire of labour and mediocrity? And did this boy live close to the Earth
travel route. As usual, we still took time to stop frequently or take and the Creator, or did he just give up his youth, his sense of
side trips to explore various areas along our route. The adventure adventure, to toil, as did his parents and their parents before
and exploration kept us fresh and eager, making the fatigue, heat them? This boy was exactly your age, and I suspect he had hopes
and thirst hardly factors. and dreams much like yours. But this is his legacy, lying in a for-
Many times along the way, Grandfather would stop and teach gotten grave."
usnot physical lessons of survival, tracking or awareness, but "But, Grandfather," I said, "isn't it enough just to be happy and
lessons dealing with the awareness of Spirit. Very often he would live your life fully?"
discuss the future and, almost as frequently, the pastthe distant After a long moment of silence, Grandfather answered. "It is
past. not enough that man be just happy in the flesh, but he must also
At one point we stopped along the deer trail we were travelling be happy and joyous in spirit. For without spiritual happiness and
and followed Grandfather through some heavy brush. The trees rapture, life is shallow. Without seeking the things of the Spirit,
and shrubs were far different than those throughout the rest of the life is half lived and empty. And by spiritual life I do not mean
Pine Barrens, and I immediately knew this place as an old home- just setting aside one hour of one day of one week for worship,
stead or town of some sort. Even though the buildings had long but to seek the things of the spirit every moment of every day. I
since rotted away, the plants and trees still marked the spot where ask you, then: What did these people do to seek spiritual enlight-
civilisation had once stood. Passing through several very thick enment and rapture? Did they just give in to a life that was little
areas, we finally entered a grove of very tall, old sycamore trees. more than work? They were given a choice every day of their
From their branches and up their trunks ran huge vines, the kind livesas you will be given a choice to seek the rapture of the

114 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

Spirit or to resign yourselves to a life of meaningless work. The
end result is always the same: forgotten graves and forgotten
dreams of forgotten people. It is not important that anyone notice
or remember, but that you work to touch God and affect in a posi-
tive way the consciousness of the Spirit-that-moves-in-all-things,
thus bringing the consciousness of man closer to the Creator."
We left the graveyard without a word and headed up to the
campsite on the hill. By the time we reached the camp, it had
cooled off and the Sun had long since set. As we built shelters and
a fire and gathered food, time seemed to fly by unnoticed, as my
mind was thoroughly engrossed in thoughts of the lessons in the
graveyard. I wondered how much I might be like that nameless
dead boy in that forgotten grave. Was I just seeking the flesh and
not working hard enough in the things of the Spirit?
It was then that I realised the deeper lessons of what Grandfather
was trying to teach me. I realised then that I should live life as if
I were to die tomorrow, for that is what happened to that young
boy. No one can be assured of another day, but we must live each
day fully, in flesh and most of all in Spirit. It isn't important that work for the spiritual enlightenment of all of mankind. To work
anyone remember who we were, but that we made a positive
change in the consciousness of the Spirit-that-moves-in-all-things,
the life force of the Earth, and, in doing so, find spiritual rapture
and touch the Creator.
It is not a question as to whether we make a difference, for we all
make a difference, each of us in our own way. It is the difference
we make that is important."
"So if we live a life that is close to the Spirit, seek the spiritual
rapture of oneness, that will affect the outcome of life," I said.
My statement was more a question than a declaration.
"It is not enough," Grandfather said, "just to seek the things of
the Spirit on a personal level. To do so is selfish, and those who
just seek the spiritual realms for themselves are not working to
change the Spirit that moves through the consciousness of man.
Instead they are running away, hiding from their responsibility
and using their wisdom for their own glorification. Spiritual man
must then work for a principle, a cause, a Quest far greater than
the glorification of self, in order to affect the Spirit that can
change the course of man's destruction."
I sat for a long time in the quietude of the night, trying desper-
ately to understand what Grandfather had told me. In essence, it
was not enough to work for spiritual enlightenment for self, but to
only for self, to cloister oneself in the seeking of spiritual rapture,
is to run from this responsibility. What Grandfather was saying is
that a spiritual person must take the wisdom and philosophy of the
Earth and bring it back into modern society.
Grandfather spoke again. "Trying to live a spiritual life in mod-

I
sat by the fire after the work was ern society is the most difficult path
done, relaxing, still deep in one can walk. It is a path of pain, of
thought about the boy in the isolation and of shaken faith, but that
graveyard. Grandfather sat at the far is the only way that our Vision can
end of the fire, his eyes closed, but I "It is very easy to live a spiritual become reality. Thus the true Quest
suspected that he was not sleeping. life away from man, but the truth in life is to live the philosophy of the
In the firelight, his features appeared Earth within the confines of man.
more that of a spirit than of flesh. of Vision in spiritual life can only There is no church or temple we need
Quietly he leaned forward and be tested and become a reality to seek peace, for ours are the temples
answered the many questions I had of the wilderness. There are no spiri-
on my mind. At times, his ability to when lived near society." tual leaders, for our hearts and the
know what was on my mind was Creator are our only leaders. Our
unnerving, sometimes making me numbers are scattered; few speak our
angry to think that he could know language or understand the things that
my thoughts. we live. Thus we walk this path
"Did you ever watch a flock of sandpipers on the beach, how alone, for each Vision, each Quest, is unique unto the individual.
they ebb and flow with the tides, becoming at times not a gather- But we must walk within society or our Vision dies, for a man not
ing of individual animals but one organism, moving as a unit living his Vision is living death."
together along the surf? When they burst into flight, their cohe- For a long time there was no other conversation. I retired into
siveness is even more startling and wondrous. At once they all my own thoughts and doubts. I did not want to live within soci-
will be flying in a certain direction, and then in an instant the ety, for the wilderness was my home, my love, my life and my
entire flock will turn simultaneously and take a new direction. spiritual rapture. I could not see why a man could not live his
"Studied closely, there is no one bird that makes the decision to Vision in the purity of wilderness, away from the distractions of
turn, but it seems to be a Spirit, a collective consciousness, that society. I could feel no urgency or see any reason why I should
runs through the flock instantly. When viewed from afar, the take what I have learned back to society.
flock appears to be one animal, one organism, one consciousness, Grandfather's voice shattered my thoughts. "The Earth is dying.
governed by the collective force and spirit of all the individuals. The destruction of man is close, so very close, and we must all
It is this same consciousness that runs through man, Nature and work to change that path of destruction. We must pay for the sins
the Earththat which we call the 'Spirit-that-moves-in-all-things', of our grandfathers and grandmothers, for we have long been a
or the 'life force'. society that kills its grandchildren to feed its children. There can
"I suspect," he continued, "that it is but one bird that creates the be no rest, and we cannot run away; far too many in the past have
thought that turns the flock, and the one thought becomes imme- run away. It is very easy to live a spiritual life away from man, but
diately manifested in all the others. The individual then tran- the truth of Vision in spiritual life can only be tested and become
scends self and becomes one with the whole. Thus, at once, the a reality when lived near society."
bird moves within the flock and the flock moves within the bird. "How do I know that we are so close to that destruction?" I
So, then, do not ask what you can do to affect the life force in a asked.
positive way, for the same Spirit that moves within the birds also "I had a Vision," Grandfather said. "It was a Vision of the
moves within you. One person, one idea, one thought can turn the destruction of man. But man was given four warnings to that
flock of society away from the destructive path of modern times. destruction, two of which gave man a chance to change his ways

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 115

and two of which would give the children of the Earth time to
escape the Creator's wrath."
"How will I know these warnings, these signs?" I asked.
Grandfather continued. "They will be obvious to you and those
who have learned to listen to the Spirit of the Earth; but to those
who live within the flesh and know only flesh, there is no know-
ing or understanding. When these signs, these warnings and
prophecies, are made manifest, then you will understand the
urgency of what I speak. Then you will understand why people
must not just work for their own spiritual rapture but to bring that world sees that it is to blame for this famine, this senseless starva-
rapture to the consciousness of modern man."
realised, as the elder spoke, that he was the spirit of a mana
man no longer of flesh, but a man who had once walked a spiritu-
al path, possibly a shaman of this tribe. It was then that he under-
stood what the old one was trying to tell him.
The elder spoke softly. "Welcome to what will be called the
'land of starvation'. The world will one day look upon all of this
with horror and will blame the famine on the weather and the
Earth. This will be the first warning to the world that man cannot
live beyond the laws of Creation, nor can he fight Nature. If the
tion, then a great lesson will be learned. But I am afraid that the
world will not blame itself, but that the blame will be placed on

G
randfather had been wandering for several years and was Nature. The world will not see that it created this place of death
well into his forties when the Vision of the four signs was by forcing these people to have larger families. When the natural
given to him. He had just finished his third Vision Quest laws of the land were broken, the people starved, as Nature
at the Eternal Cave when the Vision made itself known. He had starves the deer in winter when their numbers are too many for the
been seated at the mouth of the cave, awaiting the rising Sun, land to bear."
when the spirit of the warrior appeared to him. He felt as if he The old one continued. "These people should have been left
were in a state somewhere between dream and reality, sleep and alone. They once understood how to live with the Earth, and their
wakefulness, until the spirit finally spoke and he knew that it was wealth was measured in happiness, love and peace. But all of that
not his imagination. The spirit called Grandfather's name and was taken from them when the world saw theirs as a primitive
beckoned him to follow. society. It was then that the world showed
As Grandfather stood, he was sud- them how to farm and live in a less prim-
denly transported to another world. itive way. It was the world that forced
Again, he thought that he was dream- These things you may never see, them to live outside the laws of Creation
ing, but his flesh could feel the reality but you must work to stop them and, as a result, is now forcing them to
of this place; his senses knew that this and pass these warnings on to die."
was a state of abject reality, but in The old man slowly began to walk
another time and place. your grandchildren. away, back to the death and despair. He
The spirit warrior spoke to turned one last time to Grandfather, and
Grandfather. "These are the things They are the possible futures of said: "This will be the first sign. There
yet to come that will mark the will come starvation before and after this
destruction of man. These things you what will come if man does not starvation, but none will capture the
may never see, but you must work to come back to the Earth and begin attention of the world with such impact
stop them and pass these warnings on to obey the laws of Creation as does this one. The children of the
to your grandchildren. They are the Earth will know the lessons that are held
possible futures of what will come if and the Creator. in all of this pain and death, but the
man does not come back to the Earth world will only see it as drought and
and begin to obey the laws of famine, blaming Nature instead of itself."
Creation and the Creator. There are four signs, four warnings, With that, the old one disappeared, and Grandfather found him-
that only the children of the Earth will understand. Each warning self back at the mouth of the Eternal Cave.
marks the beginning of a possible future, and as each warning [Author's note: This is the great African famine that inspired
becomes reality, so too does the future it marks." the "We are the World" Live Aid relief effort.]
With that, the spirit warrior was gone and Grandfather was left Grandfather lay back on the ground, thinking about what he had
alone in this strange, new world. witnessed. He knew that it had been a Vision of the possible
The world he was in was like nothing he had ever known. It future and that the spirit of the warrior had brought him to it to
was a dry place with little vegetation. In the distance he saw a teach him what could happen. Grandfather knew that people all
village, yet it was made out of tents and cloth rather than from the over the Earth were now starvingbut why was this starvation so
materials of the Earth. As he drew closer to the village, the stench critical, so much more important than all the rest, even more
of death overwhelmed him and he grew sick. He could hear important than the starvation that was taking place now?
children crying, the moaning of elders and the sounds of sickness It was then that Grandfather recalled that the tribal elder had
and despair. Piles of bodies lay in open pits awaiting burial, their said that the entire world would take notice, but that the world
contorted faces and frail frames telling of death from starvation. would not learn the lessons of what the death and famine were
The bodies appeared more like skeletons than flesh, and children, trying to teach. The children would die in vain.
adults and elders all looked the same, their once dark-brown Grandfather looked out across the barren land that surrounded
complexions now ash-grey. As Grandfather entered the village, the Eternal Cave to try to re-establish the reality of his 'now'. He
the horror of living starvation struck him deeper. Children could said that it was still hard to discern between waking reality and
barely walk, elders lay dying, and everywhere were the cries of the world of Vision, but he felt that he was back into his time and
pain and fear. The stench of death and the sense of hopelessness place.
overwhelmed Grandfather, threatening to drive him from the He told me that the Eternal Cave was always a place to find
village. Visions of the possible and probable futures, and it was not
It was then that an elder appeared to Grandfather, at first speak- uncommon for the searcher to have a Vision at the mouth of the
ing in a language that he could not understand. Grandfather cave, not just inside.

116 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 In a state of physical and emotional exhaustion, Grandfather all about him, all at once, was disaster. Piles of garbage reached
fell into a deep sleep, but it was in this sleep that the warrior spirit to the skies, forests lay cut and dying, coastlines were flooded and
appeared to him again and brought the remainder of the first sign storms grew more violent and thunderous. With each passing
to completion. moment, the Earth shook with greater intensity, threatening to tear
In his dream, the spirit spoke to Grandfather. "It is during the apart and swallow Grandfather.
years of the famine, the first sign, that man will be plagued by a Suddenly the Earth stopped shaking and the sky cleared. Out of
disease, a disease that will sweep the land and terrorise the mass- the dusty air walked the warrior spirit, who stopped a short dis-
es. The white coats [doctors/scientists] will have no answers for tance from Grandfather. As Grandfather looked into the face of
the people, and a great cry will arise across the land. The disease the spirit, he could see that there were great tears flowing from his
will be born of monkeys, drugs and sex. It will destroy man from eyes, and each tear fell to the Earth with a searing sound.
inside, making common sickness a killing disease. Mankind will The spirit looked at Grandfather for a long moment, then finally
bring this disease upon himself as a result of his life, his worship spoke. "Holes in the sky."
of sex and drugs, and a life away from Nature. This, too, is a part Grandfather thought for a moment, then, in a questioning, dis-
of the first warning; but, again, man will not heed this warning believing manner, said, "Holes in the sky?"
and he will continue to worship the false gods of sex and the And the spirit answered. "They will become the second sign of
unconscious spirit of drugs." the destruction of man. The holes in the sky and all that you have
[Author's note: This is presumably a reference to AIDS.] seen could become man's reality. It is here, at the beginning of
The spirit continued. "The drugs will pro- this second sign, that man can no longer
duce wars in the cities of man, and the heal the Earth with physical action. It is
nations will arise against those wars, arise here that man must heed the warning and
against that killing disease. But the nations work harder to change the future at hand.
will fight in the wrong way, lashing out at But man must not only work physically, he
the effect rather than the cause. It will never must also work spiritually, through prayer,
win these wars until the nation, until society, for only through prayer can man now hope
changes its values and stops chasing the "They will become to heal the Earth and himself."
gods of sex and drugs. It is then, in the the second sign of the There was a long pause as Grandfather
years of the first sign, that man can change thought about the impossibility of holes in
the course of the probable future. It is then destruction of man. The the sky. Surely Grandfather knew that there
that he may understand the greater lessons of holes in the sky and all could be a spiritual hole, but a hole that the
the famine and the disease. It is then that societies of the Earth could notice would
there can still be hope. But once the second that you have seen could hardly seem likely.
sign of destruction appears, the Earth can no The spirit drew closer and spoke again,
longer be healed on a physical level. Only a
become man's reality. It almost in a whisper. "These holes are a
spiritual healing can then change the is here, at the beginning direct result of man's life, his travel,
course of the probable futures of and of the sins of his grandfathers and
mankind." of this second sign, that grandmothers. These holes, the second
With that, the warrior spirit let man can no longer heal sign, will mark the killing of his grand-
Grandfather fall into a deep and dream- children and will become a legacy to
less sleep, allowing him to rest fully the Earth with physical man's life away from Nature. It is the
before any more Vision was wrought action." time of these holes that will mark a
upon him. great transition in mankind's thinking.
Grandfather awoke at the entrance of They will then be faced with a
the cave once again, the memory of the choicea choice to continue follow-
warrior spirit still vivid in his mind, the ing the path of destruction, or a choice
spirit's words becoming part of his to move back to the philosophy of the
soul. Earth and a simpler existence. It is
When Grandfather looked out across here that the decision must be made, or
the landscape, all had changed. The all will be lost."
landscape appeared drier; there was no Without another word, the spirit
vegetation to be seen, and animals lay dying. A great stench of turned and walked back into the dust.
death arose from the land, and the dust was thick and choking, the

intense heat oppressive. Looking skyward, the Sun seemed to be
larger and more intense; no birds or clouds could be seen, and the
air seemed thicker still. It was then that the sky seemed to surge
and huge holes began to appear. The holes tore with a resound-
ing, thunderous sound, and the very Earth, rocks and soil shook.
The skin of the sky seemed to be torn open like a series of gap-
ing wounds, and through these wounds seeped a liquid that
seemed like the oozing of an infection, a great sea of floating
garbage, oil and dead fish. It was through one of these wounds
that Grandfather saw the floating bodies of dolphins, accompa-
nied by tremendous upheavals of the Earth and violent storms. As
he held fast to the trembling Earth, his eyes fell from the sky, and
G
randfather spent the next four days at the cave entrance,
though for those four days nothing spoke to him, not even
the Earth. He said that it was a time of great sorrow, of
aloneness, and a time to digest all that had taken place.
He knew that these things would not appear in his lifetime, but
they had to be passed down to the people of the future with the
same urgency and power with which they had been delivered to
him. But he did not know how he would explain these unlikely
events to anyone. Surely the elders and shamans of the tribes
would understand, but not society, and certainly not anyone who
was removed from the Earth and Spirit.
He sat for the full four days, unmoving, as if made of stone, and

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 117

his heart felt heavy with the burden he now carried. There was a long silence, until Grandfather spoke to the child
It was at the end of the fourth day that the third Vision came to spirit, asking, "And what will happen to the worlds of man?"
him. As he gazed out onto the landscape towards the setting Sun, There was another period of silence until finally the child spoke
the sky suddenly turned to a liquid and then turned blood-red. As again. "There will be a great famine throughout the world, like
far as his eyes could see, the sky was solid red, with no variation man cannot imagine. Waters will run vile, the poisons of man's
in shadow, texture or light. The whole of Creation seemed to sins running strong in the waters of the soils, lakes and rivers.
have grown still, as if awaiting some unseen command. Time, Crops will fail, the animals of man will die, and disease will kill
place and destiny seemed to be in limbo, stilled by the bleeding the masses. The grandchildren will feed upon the remains of the
sky. He gazed for a long time at the sky, in a state of awe and ter- dead, and all about will be the cries of pain and anguish. Roving
ror, for the red colour of the sky was like nothing he had ever seen bands of men will hunt and kill other men for food, and water will
in any sunset or sunrise. The colour was that of man, not of always be scarce, getting scarcer with each passing year. The
Nature, and it had a vile stench and texture. It seemed to burn the land, the water, the sky will all be poisoned, and man will live in
Earth wherever it touched. As sunset drifted to night, the stars the wrath of the Creator. Man will hide at first in the cities, but
shone bright red, the colour never leaving the sky, and every- there he will die. A few will run to the wilderness, but the wilder-
where the cries of fear and pain were heard. ness will destroy them, for they had long ago been given a choice.
Again, the warrior spirit appeared to Grandfather, but this time Man will be destroyed, his cities in ruin, and it is then that the
as a voice from the sky. Like thunder, the voice shook the land- grandchildren will pay for the sins of their grandfathers and
scape. "This, then, is the third sign, the night of the bleeding grandmothers."
stars. It will become known throughout the world, for the sky in "Is there then no hope?" Grandfather asked.
all lands will be red with the blood of the sky, day and night. It is The child spoke again. "There is only hope during the time of
then, with this sign of the third probable future, that there is no the first and second signs. Upon the third sign, the night of the
longer hope. Life on the Earth as man has lived it will come to an bleeding, there is no longer hope, for only the children of the
end, and there can be no turning back, Earth will survive. Man will be
physically or spiritually. It is then, if given these warnings; if unheeded,
things are not changed during the second there can be no hope, for only the
sign, that man will surely know the "There is only hope during the children of the Earth will purge
destruction of the Earth is at hand. It is themselves of the cancers of
then that the children of the Earth must time of the first and second mankind, of mankind's destructive
run to the wild places and hide. For when signs. Upon the third sign, the thinking. It will be the children of
the sky bleeds fire, there will be no safety the Earth who will bring a new hope
in the world of man." night of the bleeding, there is to the new society, living closer to
Grandfather sat in shocked horror as the no longer hope, for only the the Earth and Spirit."
voice continued. Then all was silent, the landscape
"From this time, when the stars bleed, children of the Earth cleared and returned to normal, and
to the fourth and final sign, will be four will survive." Grandfather stepped from the
seasons of peace [that is, one year]. It is Vision. Shaken, he said that he had
in these four seasons that the children of wandered for the next season, trying
the Earth must live deep in the wild places to understand all that had been
and find a new home, close to the Earth and given to him, trying to understand
the Creator. It is only the children of the Earth that will survive, why he had been chosen.
and they must live the philosophy of the Earth, never returning to Grandfather had related the story to me in great detail during
the thinking of man. And survival will not be enough, for the that night of the four prophecies. I don't think that any event had
children of the Earth must also live close to the Spirit. So tell been left out, and his emotions and thoughts were such that he
them not to hesitate if and when this third sign becomes manifest actually relived it for us. Thus the power of his Vision became
in the stars, for there are but four seasons to escape." part of our spirit, our driving force, and a big part of our fears.
Grandfather said that the voice and red sky lingered for a week, I sat for a long time up on the hill. The fire had gone out, and
and then were gone as quickly as they were manifest. all had retired to sleep for the night. Creation seemed to be at a
standstill, awaiting this darkest part of the night to pass by. I felt

H
e did not remember how many days he'd spent at the
mouth of the cave, nor did it make a difference, for he had
received the Vision he had come for.
It was in his final night at the Eternal Cave that the fourth
Vision came to Grandfather, this time carried by the voice of a
young child.
The child said, "The fourth and final sign will appear through
the next ten winters [that is, ten years] following the night that the ography), and founded the Tracker School where he teaches
stars will bleed. During this time, the Earth will heal itself and
man will die. For those ten years, the children of the Earth must
remain hidden in the wild places, make no permanent camps, and
wander to avoid contact with the last remaining forces of man.
They must remain hidden, like the ancient scouts, and fight the
urge to go back to the destruction of man. Curiosity could kill
many."
alone and vulnerable, as if all of Creation were scrutinising my
every thought.
Grandfather had this Vision some time in the 1920s.
About the Author:
Tom Brown, Jr has called the wilderness home for most of his
life. In 1978 he wrote his first book, The Tracker (an autobi-
courses in survival skills such as tracking, nature awareness
and ancient Earth philosophy. He has since written another
15 books, including Tom Brown's Field Guide to Wilderness
Survival as well as The Search, The Vision, The Quest, The
Journey, Grandfather and Awakening Spirits. For details on
tracking courses and how to obtain Tom's books, visit The
Tracker, Inc. website at www.trackerschool.com.

118 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 VEDIC PROPHECIES FOR
THE KALI-YUGA
from the IndiaDivine website
W
hat follows are predictions for the
Age of Kali, as found in the Vedic
scriptures written many thousands
of years ago. The Kali-yuga (the Age of
Quarrel) started 5,000 years ago (3,102 BC)
and is scheduled to last a total of 432,000
years, leaving 427,000 years to go. At the end
of Kali-yuga (i.e., in 427,000 years), the Yuga
cycle will start over with Satya-yuga, the Age
of Truth. We should all note the Srimad
Bhagavatam's mentioning that in Kali-yuga
many cheaters will claim themselves to be
God, as we can see happening today.
Description of the Kali-yuga
In the 14th chapter of the last canto of the
Paramahamsa Samhita portion of the Vayu
Purana, named Sri Gauranga Candra Udaya,
Lord Brahma prays to the Supreme Lord Sri
Hari thus:
"In the Age of Kali, people are sponta-
neously attracted to sinful activities and are
devoid of the regulations of the scriptures.
The so-called "twice born" are degraded by
their low-class activities, and those who are
born in low-class families are always hostile
to brahminical culture. The twice born are
low class by quality and do business by sell-
ing mantras. These so-called learned men are
STRANGE Times 2006
absorbed in their intestines and genitals and
their only identification is the thread they
wear. Indulging in overeating, absorbed in
bodily consciousness, lazy, intellectually dull
and greedy for others' properties, they are
consistently against God consciousness. Due
to being overly inclined towards false paths
without essence, they manufacture their own
processes for self-realisation. Neglecting their
actual duties, they are expert in blaspheming
You [the Supreme Personality of Godhead]
and the saintly persons; hence, again, Mother
Earth is in tears due to this burden. Therefore,
O Lord of the Universe, destroyer of the mis-
eries of the destitute, please mercifully do
what is befitting for the protection of the Earth
and the living entities."
"The very day and moment the Personality
of Godhead, Lord Sri Krishna, left this Earth,
the personality of Kali, who promotes all
kinds of irreligious activities, came into this
world."
Srimad Bhagavatam 1.18.6
"Oh learned one, in this Iron Age of Kali,
men have but short lives. They are quarrel-
some, lazy, misguided, unlucky and, above
all, always disturbed."
Srimad Bhagavatam 1.1.10
Foreseeing the incompetence of the people
in this Age of Kali, or the Iron Age of
www.nexusmagazine.com
Quarrel, great sages and saintly people
throughout the ages have sought to benefit the
general mass of people by revealing to them
the knowledge contained in the scriptures,
whereby they may attain relief from the inflic-
tions of this most degraded and dangerous of
all ages.
Elaborate description of the anomalies of
the Kali-yuga and the plight of living entities is
given in the Srimad Bhagavatam. Therein, it
is described how, as the Sun rose and after
taking his morning ablutions in the waters of
the Sarasvati, Vyasadeva sat alone to
concentrate.
"The great sage Vyasadeva saw anomalies
in the duties of the millennium. This happens
on the Earth in different ages, due to unseen
forces in the course of time. The great sage,
who was fully equipped in knowledge, could
see, through his transcendental vision, the
deterioration of everything material due to the
influence of the age. He could also see that
the faithless people in general would be
reduced in duration of life and would be
impatient due to lack of goodness. Thus he
contemplated for the welfare of men in all sta-
tuses and orders of life."
Srimad Bhagavatam 1.4.16-18
Srila Prabhupada, in the Srimad
Bhagavatam, describes Kali-yuga in this way:
NEXUS 119
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
"The unmanifested forces of time are so Age of Kali. They are always disturbed by
powerful that they can reduce all matter to various diseases. For example, in the present
oblivion in due course. In Kali-yuga, the last age there are so many TB patients and TB
millennium of a round of four millennia, the hospitals, but formerly this was not so
power of all material objects deteriorates by because the time was not so unfavourable."
the influence of time. In this age, the material
body of the people in general is reduced, and Elsewhere in the Srimad Bhagavatam, Srila
so is the memory. The action of matter has Prabhupada further reveals the degradation of
also not so much incentive. The land does not human society:
produce food grains in the same proportions "In the Kali-yuga, the population is just a
as it did in other ages. The cow does not give royal edition of the animals. They have noth-
as much milk as it did formerly. The produc- ing to do with spiritual knowledge or godly
tion of vegetables and fruits is less than religious life. They are so blind that they can-
before. As such, all living beings, both men not see anything beyond the jurisdiction of the
and animals, do not have sumptuous, nourish- subtle mind, intelligence or ego, but they are
ing food. Due to want of so many necessities very much proud of their advancement in
of life, naturally the duration of life is knowledge, science and material prosperity.
reduced, the memory is short, intelligence is They can risk their lives to become a dog or
meagre, mutual dealings are full of hypocrisy. hog just after leaving the present body, for
"The great sage Vyasadeva could see this they have completely lost sight of the ultimate
by his transcendental vision. As an astrologer aim of life."
can see the future fate of a man, or an Srimad Bhagavatam 1.3.43
astronomer can foretell the solar and lunar
eclipses, those liberated souls who can see "The people of the world in this Age of
through the scriptures can foretell the future
Kali are always full of anxieties. Everyone is
of mankind. They can see this due to their diseased with some kind of ailment. From the
sharp vision of spiritual attainment. very faces of the people of this age, one can
"And all such transcendentalists, who arefind out the index of the mind. Everyone
naturally devotees of the Lord, are always feels the absence of his relative who is away
eager to render welfare service to the people
from home. The particular symptom of the
in general. They are the real friends of theAge of Kali is that no family is now blessed to
people in general, not the so-called public live together. To earn a livelihood, the father
leaders who are unable to see what is going to
lives at a place far away from the son, or the
happen five minutes ahead. In this age, the wife lives far away from the husband and so
people in general as well as their so-calledon. There are sufferings from internal dis-
leaders are all unlucky fellows, faithless in
eases, separations from those near and dear,
spiritual knowledge and influenced by the and anxieties for maintaining the status quo.
These are but some
important factors which
make the people of this
age always unhappy.
"With the progress of
the Age of Kali, four
things particularly
namely, the duration of
life, mercy, the power of
recollection, and moral
or religious principles
will gradually diminish.
Since dharma, or the
principles of religion,
would be lost in the pro-
portion of three out of
four, the symbolic bull
is standing on one leg
only. When three-
fourths of the whole
"Sorry we're late. We went to the world becomes irreli-
wrong house in a parallel universe." gious, the situation is
120 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
converted into hell for the animals. In the
Age of Kali, godless civilisations will create
so many so-called religious societies in which
the Personality of Godhead will be directly or
indirectly defied. And thus faithless societies
of men will make the world uninhabitable for
the saner section of people.
"Beef is forbidden in the scriptures, and the
bulls and cows are offered special protection
by the followers of the Vedas. But in this
Age of Kali, people will exploit the body of
the bull and the cow as they like, and thus
they will invite sufferings of various types.
"The people of this age will not perform
any sacrifice. The Mleccha population will
care very little for performances of sacrifices,
although performance of sacrifice is essential
for persons who are materially engaged in
sense enjoyment. The Mlecchas, however,
make plans to install slaughterhouses for
killing bulls and cows along with other ani-
mals, thinking that they will prosper by
increasing the number of factories and live on
animal food without caring for performance
of sacrifices and production of grains.
"In this Age of Kali, the women and the
children, along with the Brahmanas and cows,
will be grossly neglected and left unprotected.
In this age, illicit connection with women will
render many women and children uncared for.
Circumstantially, the women will try to
become independent of the protection of men,
and marriage will be performed as a matter of
formal agreement between man and woman.
In most cases the children will not be taken
care of properly.
"The Brahmanas are traditionally intelligent
men, and thus they will be able to pick up
modern education to the topmost rank, but as
far as moral and religious principles are con-
cerned, they shall be the most fallen.
Education and bad character go ill together,
but such things will run parallel. The admin-
istrative heads as a class will condemn the
tenets of Vedic wisdom and will prefer to
conduct a so-called secular state, and the so-
called educated Brahmanas will be purchased
by such unscrupulous administrators. Even a
philosopher and writer of many books on reli-
gious principles may also accept an exalted
post in a government which denies all the
moral codes of the sastras. The Brahmanas
are specifically restricted from accepting such
service. But in this age they will not only
accept service, but they will do so even if it is
of the meanest quality. These are some of the
symptoms of the Kali Age which are harmful
to the general welfare of human society.
"In this age, people are indulging in the
STRANGE Times 2006

necessities of life, eating, sleeping, defending
and mating without following the rules and
regulations, and this deterioration of social
and moral rules is certainly lamentable
because of the harmful effects of such beastly
behaviour. In this age, the fathers and the
guardians are not happy with the behaviour of
their wards. They should know that so many
innocent children are victims of bad associa-
tion awarded by the influence of this Age of
Kali. In this Age of Kali, the poor innocent
students are daily victims of cinemas which
attract men only for sex indulgence.
"Nowadays, men without proper training by
culture and tradition are promoted to exalted
posts by the votes of the people who are
themselves fallen in the rules and regulations
of life. How can such people select a proper
man when they are themselves fallen in the
standard of life? Therefore, by the influence of
the Age of Kali, everywhere, politically,
socially or religiously, everything is topsy-
turvy, and therefore for the sane man it is most
regrettable."
Srimad Bhagavatam 1.16.19-22
In the 12th canto of the Srimad
Bhagavatam, Srila Sukadeva Goswami
relates how, after the thorough degradation of
the brahminical and administrative classes,
these and other symptoms of Kali-yuga
increase to an intolerable level.
"Sukadeva Goswami said: Then, O King,
religion, truthfulness, cleanliness, tolerance,
mercy, duration of life, physical strength and
memory will all diminish day by day because
of the powerful influence of the Age of Kali.
"In Kali-yuga, wealth alone will be consid-
ered a sign of a man's good birth, proper
behaviour and fine qualities. And law and
justice will be applied only on the basis of
one's power. Men and women will live
together merely because of superficial attrac-
tion, and success in business will depend on
deceit. Womanliness and manliness will be
judged according to one's expertise in sex,
and a man will be known as a Brahmana just
by his wearing a thread.
"A person's spiritual position will be ascer-
tained merely according to external symbols,
and on the same basis people will change
from one spiritual order to the next. A per-
son's propriety will be seriously questioned if
he does not earn a good living. And one who
is very clever at juggling words will be con-
sidered a learned scholar. A person will be
judged unholy if he does not have money, and
hypocrisy will be accepted as virtue.
Marriage will be arranged simply by verbal
STRANGE Times 2006
agreement, and a person will think he is fit to
appear in public if he has merely taken a bath.
A sacred place will be taken to consist of no
more than a reservoir of water located at a dis-
tance, and beauty will be thought to depend
on one's hairstyle. Filling the belly will
become the goal of life, and one who is auda-
cious will be accepted as truthful. He who
can maintain a family will be regarded as an
expert man, and the principles of religion will
be observed only for the sake of reputation.
"As the Earth becomes crowded with a cor-
rupt population, whoever among any of the
social classes shows himself to be the
strongest will gain political power. Losing
their wives and properties to such avaricious
and merciless rulers, who will behave no bet-
ter than ordinary thieves, the citizens will flee
to the mountains and forests. Harassed by
famine and excessive taxes, people will resort
to eating leaves, roots, flesh, wild honey,
fruits, flowers and seeds. Struck by drought,
they will become completely ruined. The citi-
zens will suffer greatly from cold, wind, heat,
rain and snow. They will be further torment-
ed by quarrels, hunger, thirst, disease and
severe anxiety. The maximum duration of
life for human beings in Kali-yuga will
become fifty years.
"By the time the Age of Kali ends, the
bodies of all creatures will be greatly reduced
in size, and the religious principles of
followers of varnasrama will be ruined. The
path of the Vedas will be completely forgotten
in human society, and so-called religion will
be mostly atheistic. The kings will mostly be
thieves, the occupations of men will be
stealing, lying and needless violence, and all
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
the social classes will be reduced to the lowest
level of Sudras. Cows will be like goats,
spiritual hermitages will be no different from
mundane houses, and family ties will extend
no further than the immediate bonds of
marriage. Most plants and herbs will be tiny,
and all trees will appear like dwarf sami trees.
Clouds will be full of lightning, homes will be
devoid of piety, and all human beings will
have become like asses. At that time, the
Supreme Personality of Godhead will appear
on the Earth. Acting with the power of pure
spiritual goodness, He will rescue eternal
religion."
Srimad Bhagavatam 12.2.1-16
"In the Age of Kali, only one fourth of the
religious principles remains. That last rem-
nant will continuously be decreased by the
ever-increasing principles of irreligion and
will finally be destroyed.
"In the Age of Kali, people tend to be
greedy, ill-behaved and merciless, and they
fight one another without good reason.
Unfortunate and obsessed with material
desires, the people of Kali-yuga are almost all
Sudras and barbarians.
"When there is a predominance of cheating,
lying, sloth, sleepiness, violence, depression,
lamentation, bewilderment, fear and poverty,
that age is Kali, the age of the mode of igno-
rance.
"Because of the bad qualities of the Age of
Kali, human beings will become shortsighted,
unfortunate, gluttonous, lustful and poverty-
stricken. The women, becoming unchaste,
will freely wander from one man to the next.
Cities will be dominated by thieves, the
NEXUS 121

Continued from page 121
Vedas will be contaminated by speculative
interpretations of atheists, political leaders
will virtually consume the citizens, and the
so-called priests and intellectuals will be
devotees of their bellies and genitals. The
Brahmacharins will fail to execute their vows
and become generally unclean, the house-
holders will become beggars, the
Vanaprasthas will live in the villages, and the
Sannyasins will become greedy for wealth.
"Women become much smaller in size, and
they will eat too much, have more children
than they can properly take care of, and lose
all shyness. They will speak harshly and will
exhibit qualities of thievery, deceit and
unrestrained audacity.
"Businessmen will engage in petty
commerce and earn their money by cheating.
Even when there is no emergency, people will
consider any degraded occupation quite
acceptable. Servants will abandon a master
who has lost his wealth, even if that master is
a saintly person of exemplary character.
Masters will abandon an incapacitated
servant, even if that servant has been in the
family for generations. Cows will be
122 NEXUS
Vedic Prophecies for the Kali-yuga
abandoned or killed when they stop giving
milk.
"In Kali-yuga, men will be wretched and
controlled by women. They will reject their
fathers, brothers, other relatives and friends
and will instead associate with the sisters and
brothers of their wives. Thus their conception
of friendship will be based exclusively on
sexual ties. Uncultured men will accept chari-
ty on behalf of the Lord and will earn their
livelihood by making a show of austerity and
wearing a mendicant's dress. Those who
know nothing about religion will mount a
high seat and presume to speak on religious
principles.
"In the Age of Kali, people's minds will
always be agitated. They will become
emaciated by famine and taxation, my dear
King, and will always be disturbed by fear of
drought. They will lack adequate clothing,
food and drink, will be unable to rest
properly, have sex or bathe themselves, and
will have no ornaments to decorate their
bodies. In fact, the people of Kali-yuga will
gradually come to appear like ghostly,
haunted creatures."
"In Kali-yuga, men will develop hatred for
each other, even over a few coins. Giving up
friendly relations, they will be ready to lose
www.nexusmagazine.com
their own lives and kill even their own rela-
tives. Men will no longer protect their elderly
parents, their children or their respectable
wives. Thoroughly degraded, they will care
only to satisfy their own bellies and genitals.
"O King, in the Age of Kali, people's intel-
ligence will be diverted by atheism, and they
will almost never offer sacrifice to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the
supreme spiritual master of the Universe.
Although the great personalities who control
the three worlds all bow down to the lotus feet
of the Supreme Lord, the petty and miserable
human beings of this age will not do so.
"Terrified, about to die, a man collapses on
his bed. Although his voice is faltering and
he is hardly conscious of what he is saying, if
he utters the holy name of the Supreme Lord
he can be freed from the reaction of his
fruitive work and achieve the supreme desti-
nation. But still, people in the Age of Kali
will not worship the Supreme Lord."
Srimad Bhagavatam 12.3.24-44
(Source: from the IndiaDivine website at
http://www.indiadivine.org/predictions-kali-
yuga1.htm)
STRANGE Times 2006
 THE CRYSTAL SKULL'S
MESSAGES FOR MANKIND
J
ust like the ancient legend, [Frank]
Dorland's theory suggested that the
crystal skull may really be able to pro-
vide us with important information from
the past. The Maya today apparently also
believe this to be the case. Even the scien-
tists at Hewlett-Packard recognised that
natural quartz crystal has information stor-
age capacities and so were not entirely
closed to the possibility that the crystal
skull might have information programmed
into it. But what sort of information might
that be, and how might we be able to
access it?
When Chris and I were visiting Anna
Mitchell-Hedges [in Canada], we had
already met a woman [Carole Wilson] who
said she knew how to access the informa-
tion inside the skull. Like Frank Dorland,
she claimed conventional scientists had
failed because they were using the wrong
approach. She said the secrets of the skull
could only be uncovered using "the tech-
nology of the mind". We were somewhat
sceptical, but curious nonetheless. If this
were really possible, what might we find?
Perhaps secret knowledge that had been
buried in this crystal storehouse for thou-
sands of years...
When Carole arrived, she turned out to
be a quiet, well-dressed woman in her
STRANGE Times 2006
fifties with a very professional manner. I
was somewhat surprised to find that she
was accompanied by the former head of the
Toronto Police homicide department [John
Gordon Wilson, her husband]. It soon tran-
spired that...the Police had used Carole's
services many a time and had managed
successfully to solve a whole string of mur-
der and missing persons cases...
Carole now works closely with police
forces throughout the United States,
Canada and Britain...
The plan was that Carole was going to
channel the 'entity' of the crystal skull and
we would be able to ask it questions.
Carole requested that any questions we
asked were very specific. She explained
that the skull did behave a bit like a com-
puter in that you had to give it very specific
instructions and to be very clear about what
you were asking, otherwise you might not
get a very helpful answer. For example,
someone once before had asked the skull
what a skull was and had received the
answer that it was "a bony structure"! She
also warned that sometimes the skull antic-
ipated the questions in advance and told us
not to be put off by this.
Anna then placed the crystal skull on a
small turntable so that Carole would be
able to touch it from all angles and manipu-
late it as she wished during the channelling
session. Carole sat down and the crystal
www.nexusmagazine.com
skull was placed directly in front of her,
where it glimmered softly in the lamplight.
Carole closed her eyes. She began alter-
ing her style of breathing and used a low
hum to ease herself into the appropriate
mental state. The whole room began to
take on a somewhat eerie atmosphere of the
kind you might expect during a sance, as
Carole's gestures and posture changed.
Suddenly tense, she began to emit an
incredibly high-pitched humming sound.
Before I was even able to ask the first ques-
tion she began speaking in a strange, some-
what staccato voice, with a very stilted use
of the English language. I remember being
struck by the fact that you could actually
hear this new voice echoing strangely
around the room.
You seek to know the origins of this
receptacle which you call "the crystal
skull"... I tell you that it was made many,
many thousands of years ago by beings of a
higher intelligence... It was formed by a
civilisation before those you call "the
Maya". Our level of civilisation was, as
you say, "at that time" far in advance of
that which you now have by many factors...
The speech was interrupted by high-
pitched humming, and then continued:
This receptacle contains the mind of
many and the minds of one... It was not
made using what you call the "physical". It
was moulded into its present form by
NEXUS 123
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
thought. The thoughts and knowledge are
crystallised into this receptacle...this recep-
tacle is thought process crystallised...thus
the information was crystallised into this
receptacle...
We have put thought form into pure lan-
guage within that which you call "the crys-
tal skull"...
Much of the world that we created, we
created with mind. Mind creates matter.
You will understand this and crystal tech-
nology will be given to those who under-
stand it in more detail...that crystal is a liv-
ing substance and you can infuse mind with
matter...
So it seemed that the crystal skull had
been made by an advanced civilisation
using thought. But it was all a little con-
fusing, to say the least. I was about to ask
why the crystal had been shaped into the
form of a skull when the voice continued,
in the same manner:
This receptacle is crystallised because
you, within the third dimension, need to
see, to hear and to touch... Its form makes
it easier for mind to attach to mind, without
what you call personality... But you
respect the personality, the head, the enclo-
sure of your brain...so this form of the
receptacle has been guarded and guided
for many an age... The Earth life of this
receptacle is 17,000 years... It has been
handed down from generation to genera-
tion, polished with sand and hair...and no
harm will come to it.
So the reason the crystal had been made
into the shape of a skull was so that it
124 NEXUS
would be respected and cared for over the
years. I was about to ask if there were any
other crystal skulls, as the legend had said,
but once more the voice spoke before I was
even able to open my mouth:
You are seeking information as to the
other receptacles of mind... There will be
other receptacles found...for there are
many...for no one man and no one mind
were given all knowledge... Each of the
receptacles contains the information of
where the others are...
We would give you one where we left
markings upon the Earth [some have since
suggested this may be the area of the
Nazca lines of Peru, although there are
obviously many other alternative possibili-
ties]...and high in the mountains... There
will be one of blue in the region you call
"South America"... There will be another
found when the lost civilisation that you
call "Atlantis" rises to you...and we would
urge you to explore the ocean bed...we
would urge you to explore the discoveries
in the area you call "Bimini"... But we will
direct you...we will show you that which
you call a "temple"... This was an area of
communication between the Earth and
other systems...
When all receptacles are placed together,
you will be keepers of wondrous
knowledge... Light and sound will be the
key; when the right vibration is produced
you will have the information you require...
But the time is not yet... There are still some
that have not yet been given form...and
others which remain safely under your
ocean bed... But
you shall not find
them all, as you
say "at this
time"... It would
be too dangerous
for man to have
t h i s
information...too
early in his
evolution...
because mankind
still seeks to
better all the
o r i g i n a l
destruction of our
time.
I did not really
understand all of
this somewhat
cryptic informa-
tion, but I was
www.nexusmagazine.com
curious as to why the crystal skulls had
been made in the first place. Yet again, the
voice anticipated my question:
The receptacle has been given this form
to encourage the mind of oneness and to
reduce your desire for separation... Your
mind seeks separation... We sought to
leave you with the concept of oneness, but
your mind seeks only separation. As you
say, "As you seek, so shall ye find." And
already the process of separation has
begun. You have already begun the sepa-
ration, but there will be more. You have a
desire to separate that will lead to your
own destruction... Separation causes anni-
hilation and death. We can already feel the
influence of this separation as violence...
There is much violence occurring within
your planet. Violence against men, vio-
lence against nature...violence against the
Earth.
Again, I didn't really understand these
rather cryptic remarks and I was more
interested in whether the crystal skull could
tell us anything about mankind's history.
The answer came:
We understand that you come seeking in
quest of the beginnings of man. We wish to
tell you that your own origins were thought
in form, and that you have to cast your eyes
up and not down. There will be many dis-
coveries pointing to this acknowledgement
within the next 5, 10, 15 years... And the
beginnings of what you call your civilisa-
tion are over 15,000 years before the
acknowledgement of that which you call
Atlantis. For there is also much evidence
of our civilisation still beneath your
oceans. Already there are discoveries near
Bimini. But there will be many more dis-
coveries over the next 5, 10, 15 years
which will point you towards the right
direction... There will be more discoveries
in South America, in Australia and in
Egypt. In that which you call your
"deserts" you will find much knowledge.
But you will find traces of our civilisation
through most parts of your land masses
and there is much beneath your seas, espe-
cially beneath the oceans which you call
"the Atlantic" and "the Indian", and that
which you call "the Dead Sea". There,
closest to your Earth's surface, and soon to
be discovered, are remnants of our civilisa-
tion... These discoveries will confuse and
cause much disharmony, but they will be
needed to reduce the mind of separation.
But many of these discoveries will not be
permitted at this time. We can only permit
STRANGE Times 2006

that which will not cause too much havoc
for your minds. We came to your Earth
from a different world. From other dimen-
sions we came into this dimension. We
came to experience, needing to experience
density. That which we first heralded had
nothing of the density of what you call a
"body". The life on this Earth plane was
primitive in form, but we took upon our-
selves the physical form which is recognis-
able to you. We sought only to experience
material density and to bring knowledge
and enlightenment. But we did not confine
ourselves to any one, what you call, "geo-
graphical location". There were many,
and many of our relics and of our teach-
ings are still to be found scattered amidst
your land masses and your sea masses.
I was keen to know exactly who these
"we" were that the voice of the skull
seemed to be talking about, when it
continued:
But there are still many among you who
seek to find where in your universe we are
to be found. But still you cling to the idea
that we are of the third dimension and you
still cannot grasp the idea that we are of
the other dimensions, beyond your rudi-
mentary space-time relativity.
The voice then proceeded to divulge
some rather cryptic information about
space and time:
We would tell you that the essence of
time is an illusion. Time has been created,
in fact, by a higher intelligence as a form
of control upon the brain and function of
the body image. This is a safeguard
against corruption of matter but, in
essence, is non-existent. Thought exists
independently of the body and brain, but
time is the creation of matter. Thought is
without time. Time, as a mechanism, was
introduced to material and current mind
only, not to thought or spirit, to keep you
bound within the third dimension and with-
in the perimeters of the small planet you
call "Earth".
We would urge you to explore with truth
and understanding that which the mind is
capable of understanding and not that
which the brain is restricted to.
Time is related to you as numbers. We
offer to you that number and time have no
depth. These are merely programmed into
the current mind as safeguards, to keep
you in time and space. They are a function
not really of mind, but of brain. And they
are really a dysfunction of brain, to keep
you tied to the physical dimensions of the
STRANGE Times 2006
three-dimensional world. The relativities
you call "number", "time" and "space" are
a function of the brain related only to the
third dimension. This current mind keeps
you a prisoner in time and space, in the
material, physical world you call "reality".
But the delusion of time must remain for a
period. Do you understand?
I was not at all sure that I did. Instead I
was still trying to work out whose voice
this really was and why the crystal skulls
had been created in the first place. The
voice went on:
We have come now to warn you, because
the separation has already begun. The
destruction is already beginning to take
place. The mind of separation has taken
hold and some serious things have already
taken place. For you, with your primitive
knowledge, have already started something
which now cannot be reversed. It was
started through your scientists playing with
and bending sound and light waves and
that which you call "particles" into your
atmosphere. You will have noticed that
there are many destructive waves now hit-
ting your planet. There will be more
destruction brought about by atmosphere
intervention, unusual weather patterns and
rapid climatic change, and there will be
movement of your land masses also.
We wish to tell you that your civilisation
has grossly misunderstood the use of light
and sound and matter. That is why you
have only uncovered that which is closest
to you.
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
But, even now, your scientists and your
governments play with toys that they do not
understand. They play with light and
sound and that which you call "particles"
and "radiation", and they will rain havoc.
But because the reaction is not immediate
and not obviously near to yourselves, you
continue and you continue until this very
planet will erupt and destroy.
As we have said, your current mind
seeks only separation. You have a desire
to separate that will lead only to your own
destruction. For this is the same mind that
caused the Great Flood and caused the
previous destruction of many a land mass.
But this destruction has begun to happen
again already. And we can already feel
the influence of this separation in our
world. But, at present, you are unaware of
this separation because it is of your own
making. But we tell you that your Earth
will undertake great changes...
Even the body of your planet will
change, as with your weather, as with all
to do with your Earth as you now know it.
There will be changes upon this Earth in
the form of the human, the animal and that
form you know as "vegetation", and that
form which you know as "land mass", and
that which you know as "atmosphere".
There will be a disaster that is of great
consequence. But, in essence, your
"disaster", as you would term it, has already
begun. You will find much death amongst
your life upon the planet. You will find that
which is grown in the ground will cause
NEXUS 125
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
much change, and you will see that which
feeds upon the ground will end up with
much death. You will see much destruction
due to what you call "radiation" and you
will find much pestilence in that which now
flies upon your planet. There will be
eruptions and disruptions of weather
patterns, and much separating of
atmospheres. You will have much
wind...and your livestock will die in great
numbers. Your waters will rise where they
should not rise, and your land will be
sinking underneath the waves. Land masses
will disappear, and seas and oceans will
rise.
There will be a great splitting of the
Earth...from within the Earth. The
magnetic field will shift and is already
shifting now. The Earth will be split
asunder and the discharge will wander
through the Earth and into the atmosphere.
The atmosphere is already entering a state
of negative pollution. This is what you are
doing with your negative energies on the
Earth.
And this is why we left these receptacles
for you to find, in your time "long ago"
when we realised that so many had forgot-
ten their original purpose of incarnation
into this physical dimension. When we
realised that the mind of separation would
take hold and that there would be a great
catastrophe on this Earth, we chose to
return to our original dimension, but we
left behind the legacy of our minds. We
knew there would be those whose knowl-
edge and seeking and spiritual progression
would turn them towards this path. We
knew that because of the disaster that
126 NEXUS
would befall this planet, there would be
those who would be needed to call upon
their reincarnational memories to heal, to
counsel and to love a world gone mad, a
world without knowledge, a world without
hope, where the fires of destruction would
reign.
But when the time comes it will be the
duty of all those who seek spiritual knowl-
edge to instruct others when the Earth
moves from its axis. Within this receptacle,
and the others we have left you, lies that
which you will need. Our knowledge, here
crystallised, will be imparted when the
right time arrives. It was determined that
through these receptacles the minds of one
would be activated and would present
themselves when your Earth was in need.
And this is now beginning to happen, as
you say "at this time" and "in this place".
We are here to tell you that there is...will
be...and has already begun, a great change
within your Mother Earth. We urge you to
make known to mankind the things which
we are to give you, in the hope that the
holocaust can be reduced. For although
what is given cannot now be changed, its
effects can be much diffused.
At this point the voice explained that it
was going to leave us now because it could
sense that the physical body it was using,
presumably meaning Carole, was getting
very tired, and so it would have to go. A
long humming sound began again, and as it
faded away Carole slumped into her chair,
completely exhausted and unable to speak
for some minutes. It took a few glasses of
water to get her to speak again, in a long
drawl, like someone drunk.
www.nexusmagazine.com
When she eventually came round she
seemed completely unaware of the events
that had just passed and was unable to
answer any more questions.
We were completely baffled as to what
to make of the information Carole had
channelled. We had originally been scepti-
cal enough about the idea of psychic com-
munication with spirit beings, let alone
beings from another planet or "dimension",
whatever that meant, warning us about
imminent disaster on a global scale. But
our cynicism had already been tempered by
what we had heard about Carole's valuable
police work and by the fact that Carole her-
self seemed genuine and honest.
Everyone around us treated the informa-
tion we heard with a great degree of seri-
ousness and respect, and there was some-
thing about the predictions made that had
an alarming but still undeniable ring of
truth. Indeed, these became even more
unnerving when John showed us transcripts
of Carole's channelling sessions with the
skull from the 1980s.
The channelled information always
seemed to have been quite consistent. In a
session recorded in 1987, the voice had
predicted: "Livestock will die in great
numbers." This seemed to have particular
relevance for us now, having just come
from Britain where the BSE crisis had now
led to the slaughter of tens of thousands of
cattle.
Around nine months later, the prediction
about the Earth's magnetic field shifting
also took on a sobering degree of truth
when we read in an issue of New Scientist
[30 Mar '96] that it had just been discov-
ered that the magnetic field is indeed
beginning to shift. There are even some
scientists who now predict that the whole
axis of the Earth might be about to do a
complete flip [Guardian, 21 Mar '97].
At the time, however, we didn't know
what to make of everything we had heard.
Was this really "the voice of the skull"
speaking through Carole? We just couldn't
say. But the strange words remained in our
minds as we resumed our more everyday
approach to the mystery of where the crys-
tal skulls had really come from.
(Excerpted from Chapter 7, "The Talking
Skull", of The Mystery of the Crystal
Skulls, by Chris Morton and Ceri Louise
Thomas, published by Thorsons/
HarperCollinsPublishers, London, UK,
1997; reprinted by permission)
STRANGE Times 2006
 P ROPHECIES FROM THE
B ILLY M EIER C ONTACTS
So many of the
Plejaren predictions
given to Swiss
contactee Billy
Meier have come
true, that we'd be
wise to heed the
warning that
terrible things will
befall humanity and
our planet if we
can't learn to live
together.
by Michael Horn 2004
Post Office Box 5163
Playa del Rey, CA 90296
USA
Email: michael@theyfly.com
Website: http://www.theyfly.com
STRANGE Times 2006
Proof Beyond Reasonable Doubt
M
any people are still unaware of the amazing story of "Billy" Eduard Albert
Meier, the now 67-year-old Swiss man whose voluntary, face-to-face con-
tacts with extraterrestrial humans have been going on for the past 62 years.
For many years, Meier was dismissed by sceptics as a fraud and hoaxer. But
the recent failure of the top professional sceptics' organisation CFI-West, in Los Angeles,
to duplicate even one of his "easily duplicated" UFO photos or film segments, followed
by the sudden retraction by magician/debunker James Randi that the case is a hoax, has
resulted in much deserved, renewed interest in the case.
In addition to producing the clearest photos, films and video of UFOs ever taken, as
well as other physical evidence, for the past 48 years Meier has published the most specif-
ic, prophetically accurate, scientific and world-event-related information of any known
source. Before you consider the prophetic information below, please note that from his
251st Contact on February 3, 1995, Meier published advance warning of the US attack on
Iraq, the increase in Islamic terrorism to follow, the appearance of SARS, the spread of
"mad cow disease", the renewed public concern over chemical warfare, and the near acci-
dent at the nuclear power plant near Lyon, France (which occurred in August 2003). All
of this information and more from the 251st Contact was also published in Guido
Moosbrugger's book, And Yet They Fly!, in September 2001well before any of the fore-
told events occurred.
Combine this unprecedented evidence and all of the following with the still irrepro-
ducible, scientifically authenticated physical evidence, and you may understand why this
remarkable one-armed man, who has been the target of 19 documented assassination
attempts, stands at the centre of the most important story in all of human history.
In the following article I give the numbers and dates of specific contacts between Billy
Meier and the Plejaren, and then an overview of the information contained in each
contact. The items titled "Corroborated" show the dates and sources of the earliest
corroboration of Meier's information found by the researchers. It should be noted that
Genesis III published much of the material in volumes 14 of Message from the Pleiades,
with the earliest copyright being 1979the date by which almost all of the information
was in the possession of the investigative team. While I present only a brief overview of
the information in the specific contacts, I hope that each contact will be published in its
entirety in the near future. Except where attributed to Meier, the Plejaren are the source
of the information.
Absence of Erroneous Prophetic Information
If, as some people might think, Meier somehow guessed or fabricated all of this specific,
prophetically accurate information, it would be logical to assume that there would have to
be an even more enormous body of randomly generated erroneous information.
Unfortunately for the sceptics, there simply is no such voluminous body of inaccurate
work. And it's easy to prove this, since most of the information validated so far has been
culled from a couple of thousand pages of the earliest English translations of the Contact
Reports, published by Meier primarily between 1975 and 1979, with additional informa-
tion excerpted from contacts in the 1980s and 1990s. Let me also add that there are still
thousands of pages of untranslated German texts and some unofficial English translations
that contain additional, already published, prophetic information awaiting scrutiny.
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 127
CONTACT PREDICTIONS CORROBORATED
A
s you read (and research) the following, please consider
the possibility that the extraterrestrials and Meier are
attempting to offer us assistance in solving the very seri-
ous problems we face.
7th Contact, February 25, 1975, and 35th Contact,
September 16, 1975:
Connection of A-bomb testing, explosions to ozone damage;
high-frequency "elementary radiations" unknown to terrestrial
scientists; damage to Earth's rotation, magnetic disturbances,
polar displacement; contribution of bromine gases to ozone
damage; penetration of UV through holes, killing micro-organ-
isms and leading to disruptions in food chain, genetic mutations
and other long-term negative effects for humans and the planet.
Corroborated: November 29, 1988, with report published by
Lawrence Livermore National Laboratories announced this
"new discovery": "Atom Bomb Testing Tied to Ozone
Depletion".
Corroborated: 1991, when National Public Radio confirmed
the connection between bromine gases and ozone layer damage.
Corroborated: February 24, 1992, Los Angeles Times,
"Ozone Hole Damages Food Chain".
29th Contact, July 7, 1975, and 31st Contact,
July 17, 1975:
Contact involved specific information about Venus, unknown
at the time, including composition of atmospheric gases, surface
temperatures, depth of clouds, wind speeds, atmospheric pres-
sure, colouration, variation in terrain, etc.
Corroborated: October 1975 and August 1976, confirmed
by probes from the USSR and USA respectively.
Corroborated: February 1981; USGS [US Geological
Survey] was producing a topographical map of Venus which, as
discovered by the investigative team, further confirmed the
details Meier had published five years earlier.
31st Contact, July 17, 1975:
Semjase informed Meier that Mt Chimborazo, Ecuador, is the
highest mountain on Earth, contrary to Meier's belief that it was
Mt Everest.
Corroborated: June 1996 in Earth magazine, 21 years later.
45th Contact, February 25, 1976:
Semjase (Meier's extraterrestrial female contactor) warned
him that our extraction of petroleum and natural gas from the
Earth, the damming of waters and construction of huge cities are
major factors contributing to increased earthquake/volcanic
activity.
Corroborated: June 27, 1990, in The Good Life newspaper
(now defunct), Los Angeles: "Earthquakes, Oil Interact".
115th Contact, October 19, 1978:
Meier described existence of Jupiter's rings, saying they are
composed mainly of dust, particles, sulphur ions flung off by
volcanoes on Io; described Io as the most volcanically active
body in the solar system, and smooth, level-surfaced with no
water; described Europa as ice-encrusted; Jupiter said to have 17
"actual" moons (Plejaren don't consider that all of Jupiter's satel-
lites meet their standards for moons); described nature of
Jupiter's huge funnel-shaped storm.
Corroborated: March 5, 1979, NASA's Voyager 1 probe dis-
covered the rings of Jupiter, that Io is the most volcanically
Continued on page 130
128 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
What Does It Mean to Us?
Meier and his extraterrestrial friends seem to be able to predict,
i.e., accurately calculate, the results of causal actions known to
them, originating from humanity and/or nature and the cosmos.
And they have made it clear that certain prophesied (undesired)
events can still be changed for the betterif humanity recognises
its errors and makes sufficient effort in the correct, positive direc-
tion to alter those outcomes that can still be changed.
In the 215th Contact, known as the Henoch Prophecies, special
emphasis was placed on America and the very times we are in.
(These prophecies are contained in the 2004 book, And Still They
Fly!) More recent comments by Meier have also carried harsh
and heavy warnings about the current American administration
and leadership and the danger of its leading the world into a cata-
clysmic Third World War. Considering the credibility the
Plejaren have established with their track record of accuracy since
at least 1975, it would be wise for us to give serious consideration
to their warnings about the future. Of course, it is up to each
interested person to do the research necessary to determine the
accuracy and authenticity of the Meier Contacts for themselves.
Should the most important event in human historycontact
between an Earth human and extraterrestrial humansactually
have occurred, then we might realise that this is less about UFOs
and extraterrestrials than it is about usand our future survival.
THE HENOCH PROPHECIES
Presented by Quetzal
215th Contact, Saturday, February 28, 1987, 2.09 am
Billy Meier/FIGU 20022004
Quetzal: Before I give you a clear account of the prophecies
of Henoch, I would like to point out that prophecies are always
changeable and can be changed for the better if man makes posi-
tive changes in his thoughts, feelings and actions, leading to that
which is better and positively progressive. Prophecies always rest
upon specific causes; these again result in certain effects, whereby
these effects can be changed at any time if only the preceding
causes are changed in their form. Therefore, it is possible that neg-
ative or evil prophecies do not have to be fulfilled if the preceding
causes will be purposely changed in a manner that positivity and
good develop instead of negativity and evil.
However, this does not apply to predictions, as these rest upon
events that cannot be changed, are inevitable and surely and defi-
nitely will occur in the future. Predictions rest upon a preview and
thus on a direct viewing of the future, and have to do with neither
prophecy nor with calculation of probability. So when I make a
portion of Henoch's prophecies for the third millennium known to
you, it does not mean that they have to be fulfilled, because the
prerequisite of fulfilment in each case would be that the already
existing causes continue to exist as also continue to be created in
the future so that a fulfilment of the prophecies can come to pass.
Thus, provided that human beings of Earth will become reason-
able, the possibility exists that by a reasonable change in the way
of thinking as well as a reasonable development in feeling and an
equally reasonable way of acting, everything changes for the better
and positive, whereby prophecies do not have to be fulfilled.
However, if this transformation does not occur, a very evil, wicked
and negative time lies ahead for the Earth and its entire population
in the coming new millennium.
Billy Meier: Since the Second World War, the thoughts, feel-
ings and actions of the human being of Earth have changed much
towards the positive and good, but all that achieved is not enough
in my opinion, as the great transformation towards the better has
STRANGE Times 2006
not been achieved yet, neither by the mighty of this world nor all West against the East. Many deaths will be inflicted upon the peo-
of mankind of Earth itself. In the years gone by, you have made ple by fighter and bomber aircraft, and bombs and rockets will
many predictions and calculations of probability as well as men- destroy and annihilate smaller and larger villages and cities.
tioned prophetic facts concerning the economic, military and polit- The people will be completely powerless against all this and will
ical situation on Earth, whereby I was requested to spread this live through 888 days of Hell on Earth, suffering hunger and
informationwhich I indeed have done. Governments and news- plagues which will claim even more lives than the war itself. The
papers, radio stations as well as TV stations and many private per- time will be severe as never before experienced on Earth.
sons worldwide were informed by me. But the entire effort did not Ultimately, nothing can be bought or sold any longer. All provi-
achieve anything, because up to now mankind has carried on in the sions will be rationed; and if a human being steals even a small
old manner and has paid no attention whatsoever to prophecies, piece of bread, he/she will have to pay for it with his/her life.
predictions and calculations of probability. Many waters will mix with human blood and turn red, as once in
And the same will most likely be the case in the future, when I the past the Nile in Egypt turned red with blood.
receive permission from you in the coming time to spread the And it will be that the fanatics of Islam will rise up against the
prophecies of Henoch for the third millennium. But, nevertheless, countries of Europe and all will shake and quiver. Everything in
I feel that Henoch's message for the future must be made known the West will be destroyed; England will be conquered and thrown
and distributed, because somehow it may bear fruit yet. down to the lowest level of misery. And the fanatics and warriors
Quetzal: You apparently never give up hope. Your optimism is of Islam will retain their power for a long time. However, not only
honourable and deserves to be heard by human beings, but the way Europe will be affected but ultimately all the countries and peoples
things have developed throughout this century there is not too of the Earth, as the great horror expands to a war that will encom-
much hope that human beings of pass the entire world.
Earth will come to their senses and After the turn of the millennium,
heed your words. This will then be the papacy will exist only a short
the case only when the prophecies If the human being of Earth period. Pope John Paul II is the third
prove to be true or, even worse, have continues to live in the same way as from last in this position. After him,
already come to pass. Probably only he has done up to nowforming his only one additional pontificate will
then will the time come when the follow. Then a Pontifex Maximus
defamations against you will end in thoughts and feelings in the same follows who will be known as Petrus
regard to your contacts with us, manner, indulging in the same Romanus. Under his religious rule,
although they will long continue to be actions as he has hithertothen the the end of the Catholic Church will
vehemently disputed by your enemies come, a total collapse becoming
as well as by pathological know-it- words of the prophecies of Henoch inevitable. That will be the beginning
alls and critics who dismiss them as could not be any clearer. of the worst catastrophe that will ever
swindle, lies and fraud. The full truth have befallen the human beings and
about our contacts with you will be the Earth. Many Catholic clerics,
proven in the distant future, and then priests, bishops, cardinals and many
mankind will accept our help we offer through youeven when others will be killed and their blood will flow in streams. But also
they erroneously assume we come from the seven-star system the reformed version of Christianity will become just as infinitely
known to human beings of Earth as the Pleiades. [The Plejaren small, as does Catholicism.
claim to live in the Plejares, an altered time-space configuration
about 80 light-years beyond the Pleiades. MH] Horrifying weapons and a possible world war
Billy: Semjase and Ptaah already explained this to me. But tell Due to the fault of scientists, enormous power will be seized by
us now what the new millennium will bring to human beings of the power-hungry and their military, their warriors and terrorists,
Earth and the planet Earth according to the prophecies of Henoch. and power will be seized as well through laser weapons of many
Quetzal: I will do that in a moment, but I would like to explain types, but also via atomic, chemical and biological weapons. Also
before beginning that I am not authorised to give exact indication concerning genetic technology, enormous misuse will occur,
of years in an official manner. because this will be unrestrainedly exploited for the purposes of
If the human being of Earth continues to live in the same way as war, not lastly due to the cloning of human beings for warring pur-
he has done up to nowforming his thoughts and feelings in the poses, as this was practised in ancient times with the descendants
same manner, indulging in the same actions as he has hitherto of Henoch in the regions of Sirius.
then the words of the prophecies of Henoch could not be any However, this will not be all of the horrors; as besides the
clearer. genetic technology and the chemical weapons, far worse and more
The point in time at which these prophecies will begin to be dangerous and more deadly weapons of mass destruction will be
fulfilled will be when a Pope will no longer reside in Rome. All of produced and will be used. The irresponsible politicians will
Europe will then fall victim to a terrible punishment by evil unscrupulously exercise their power, assisted by scientists and
powers. The Christian religion will collapse and the churches and obedient military forces serving them, who together hold a deadly
monasteries will end up in ruins and ashes. sceptre and will create clone-like beings which will be bred in a
Monstrous forces will be created by science and will be released total lack of conscience and will be scientifically manipulated to
by the military forces and armies as well as by terrorists, causing become killer machines. Division by division and devoid of any
great destruction. Millions and even billions of people will be feelings, they will destroy, murder and annihilate everything.
killed by acts of terrorism, by wars and civil wars; and finally, in The USA will set out against the Eastern countries ahead of all
some parts of the world, every third human being, and, in other other financial states and simultaneously she will have to defend
places, every fourth human being, will lose his or her life. The herself against the Eastern intruders. In all, America will play the
nations of the East will rise against the nations of the West, the most decisive role, when in the guise to strive for peace and to

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 129

Continued from page 128
active body in the solar system and that Europa is covered in
icefive months after Meier published this information.
Corroborated: September 15, 1998, Cornell University
scientists confirmed particulate composition of rings from
Jupiter's moons (first theorised by astronomers on August 2,
1995). Meier's information is 20 years ahead of Cornell's.
(While scientists believe that the source of the particulate matter
is explosions caused by meteorite strikes on the moons' surfaces,
Meier's information seems more accurate, i.e., matter being
explosively propelled from volcanoes at speeds up to 2,300
km/hour to heights of 180 km is more likely the true source of
most particulate-forming rings.)
Additional information from the 115th Contact was acciden-
tally given to lead investigator Col. Wendelle Stevens, USAF
(Ret.), and shown by him to Maj. Rudolph Pestalozzi, USAF
(Ret.) and Mr O. Richard Norton, former director of the
Flandreau Planetarium, Tucson, Arizona.
Witnessed by the three men, the information was secured until
after the following specific, predicted events occurred:
Jonestown massacre (Nov 18, 1978)
Overthrow of the Shah of Iran (Jan 1979)
Chinese invasion of North Vietnam (FebMar 1979)
Iran Hostage Crisis (Nov 1979Jan 1981)
Soviet invasion of Afghanistan (Dec 1979)
Terrorist attack on Iranian Embassy, London (AprMay
1980)
Abdication of Queen Juliana of The Netherlands (Apr 1980)
Death of Tito of Yugoslavia (May 4, 1980)
Mount St Helens eruption (May 18, 1980)
Assassination of Indian Prime Minister Indira Gandhi (Oct
31, 1984).
1978:
In a Wasserman publication, Meier foretold the launch of a
telescope at end of the 1980s that would make unfathomable
discoveries in space, and wrote that a comet would be discov-
ered in the late 1980s to early 1990s; it would be named
Toutatis, and may threaten Earth in September 2004.
Corroborated: April 1990, Hubble telescope was launched.
Corroborated: 1989, French astronomers discovered a comet
[asteroid], named it Toutatis, and predicted it would come closest
to Earth on September 29, 2004.
1978, 1992:
In his book, Existing Life in the Universe, Meier stated that
there are two small planetary bodies outside Pluto's orbit; he
called them Trans-Pluto and Uni, and said scientists will discover
them in the not-too-distant future.
Corroborated: July 3, 2001 and October 7, 2002, the BBC
reported that scientists have discovered a new planet beyond
Pluto.
150th Contact, October 10, 1981:
Meier discussed information concerning the 29 actual moons
of Saturn, and the origins of moons from asteroids.
Corroborated: November 2000, scientists announced the dis-
covery of 12 additional moons orbiting Saturn, bringing the
"official" total to 28, just one shy of what Meier reported almost
20 years earlier; scientist corroborates the likelihood that moons
originate from asteroids.
Continued on page 132
130 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
fight against terrorism she invades many countries of the Earth,
bombs and destroys everything and brings thousandfold deaths to
the populations. The military politics of the USA will likewise
know no limits, as neither will their economic and other political
institutions which will be focused on building and operating a
world police force, as it is the case already for a long time [sic].
But that will not be enough, and, in the guise of a so-called peace-
ful globalisation, American politics will aspire to gain absolute
control of the world concerning supremacy in economy.
And this will point towards the possibility that a Third World
War could develop from it, if human beings as a whole will not
finally reflect upon reason, become reasonable and undertake the
necessary steps against the insane machinations of their govern-
ments and military powers as well as their secret services, and call
a halt to the power of the irresponsible who have forsaken their
responsibility in all areas.
If this does not happen, many small and great nations will lose
their independence and their cultural identity and will be beaten
down, because the USA will gain predominance over them and
with evil force bring them down under her rule. At first, many
countries will howl with the wolves of the US, partially due to fear
of American aggressions and sanctions, as will be the case with
many, many irresponsible [ones] in Switzerland and Germany but
also of other countries. In part, others will join in because they
will be forced somehow to do so or will be misled by irresponsible
promoters of American propaganda.
Finally, many Asian, African and European states will rise up
against the American hegemony, once they recognise that the
United States of America is only taking advantage of them for pur-
poses of war, conquest and exploitation. In this way, many coun-
tries will become puppet states of America before reason and reali-
sation will emerge in the responsible ones of governments and in
many of the population, resulting in a turning away from the USA.
However, the great war will hardly be avoidable because the
human beings of Earth will probably not accept the directions
towards the better, therewith towards true love, true freedom and
real peace, striving instead only towards wealth, pleasure and rich-
es and for all manner of material values and unrestricted power.
Thus, huge and deadly formations of tanks will roll across the
countries while fighter planes and rockets sweep through the air
and bring death, ruin, destruction and annihilation to countries and
people.
If the Third World War will actually happenas calculations
and observations appear to indicate to be probable now and also
during the approaching few decadesthen, as now, the civilian
population will above all have to bear the brunt of the enormous
suffering in tremendous numbers in this entire catastrophe and, last
but not least, the fault of the irresponsible scientists who by
cloning will create human machines for military purposes, devoid
of conscience and feelings, and will create immensely deadly and
all-annihilating computer-like weapons. At the same time, the
danger could become reality that the human combat machines, the
military clones, will gain their independence and under their own
management will bring death, devastation, destruction and annihi-
lation to the human beings of Earth and to the planet.
The entire planet will become an arena of unparalleled suffering,
which will never have existed before on Earth up to that time. The
cruel happenings will last about 888 days and cause civilisation to
collapse. Yet, the terrible scenario will continue, and epidemics
and various diseases as well as enormous famine will be spread
among the people, while the economy of the world will totally col-
lapse and there will be no possibility to produce any goods. All
foods and medications will be rationed.
STRANGE Times 2006
 The insanity of war will extend not only across the land, but the terrible catastrophe which has ever been recorded, evil military
disaster will equally be spread to the oceans, into the atmosphere, powers will wreak havoc with computerised and nuclear, biologi-
even into outer space. But there will also be settlements under the cal and chemical weapons, whereby it will also happen that com-
ocean that will be developed in the course of the future and these puterised weapons become independent and cannot be controlled
will be attacked and destroyed, claiming the lives of many thou- any longer by human beings. Overall, this is the most important
sands of people. However, a certain maelstrom of destruction will part of Henoch's prophecies.
also originate from the undersea facilities; because in the cities at
the bottom of the ocean, groups of submarine pirates will be Epidemics, conflicts and disasters
formed which will burst upwards from the depths of the ocean and Billy: There is still more to it; at least that is what you told me.
will become involved in destructive actions of combat with naval Quetzal: You are untiring; so I will point out a few more
units on the surface. important facts of the prophecies. As of now, new epidemics have
And at this time, the possibility could become reality that spread among the people of Earth; however, as Henoch prophe-
extraterrestrial forces intervene against the Western industrialised sied, quite a number of further epidemics will follow. Not only
countries, because these will be responsible for the extreme and AIDS will occur worldwide in the 1990s, but also epidemics such
enormous disaster of the coming evil times. These extraterrestrial as the so-called "mad cow disease", i.e., BSE, out of which differ-
forces will give up their anonymity and their state of secrecy and ent strains of CreutzfeldtJakob syndrome will develop, lasting
will assist those who are being terrorised by the irresponsibly act- well into the new millennium. Also, an epidemic known as Ebola
ing Western countries, should this will cause many deaths, as well as
possibility become reality. other unknown epidemics and dis-
In addition, apocalyptic natural cat- eases which will sporadically arise in
astrophes will occur which will cause epidemic proportions and will be new
all of Europe to shake and tremble; The insanity of war will extend to the human being, causing great
but Europe will continue to exist, not only across the land, concern.
even after having suffered enormous However, most of the evil will be
destruction. but the disaster will equally brought about by politics. France and
be spread to the oceans, into Spain become involved with each
Destruction in North America other in armed conflicts, and even
Far in the West, it will be different; the atmosphere, even into before World War Three will have
the United States of America will be a outer space. broken out. Yet France will not only
country of total destruction. The engage in armed conflicts with Spain,
cause for this will be manifold. With for within her great unrests will arise,
her global conflicts which are contin- leading to upheavals and civil war, as
uously instigated by her and which will [will be] the case in Russia and
continue far into the future, America is creating enormous hatred Sweden. Especially in France and Sweden, machinations as well
against her, worldwide, in many countries. As a result, America as dictatorial regulations of the European Union will cause much
will experience enormous catastrophes which will reach propor- unrest and many uprisings; but also crimes committed by gangs
tions barely imaginable to people of Earth. The destruction of the and organised criminal elements in these countries will cause
WTC, i.e., the World Trade Center, by terrorists will only be the unavoidable civil wars.
beginning. In addition, significant tensions will arise between the native cit-
Yet all the apocalyptic events will not only be brought about due izens and immigrants from foreign countries, who as a rule also
to the use of unbelievably deadly and destructive weaponssuch observe religious beliefs different from those of the native popu-
as chemical, laser and othersand by cloned murder machines; lace. And in the end, this will lead to severe conflicts. Hatred
but in addition to this, the Earth and nature, maltreated to the deep- against strangers, foreigners and people of different religious
est depths by the irresponsible human beings of Earth, will rise up beliefs will be the order of the day, as well as the rise of neo-
and cause destruction and bring death onto the Earth. Enormous Nazism, terrorism and right-extremism. Conditions similar to civil
firestorms and gigantic hurricanes will sweep over the USA and war will be in England, Wales and Northern Ireland and claim
bring devastation, destruction and annihilation, as this from time many lives.
immemorial never before will have happened [sic]. The Soviet Union will be dissolved in this decade or at the latest
Not only will America, but also all other Western industrial by the beginning of the next. The man decisive for this action will
countries which still live at the beginning of the new millennium in be Mikhail Gorbachev. But this will not lead to rest, because the
the delusion that they could dominate and rule over underdevel- new Russia will continue its longstanding conflict with China over
oped nations, i.e., Third World countries, will not only soon lose Inner Mongolia, with the result that Russia will lose a portion of
influence over these but must defend themselves against them. this territory to China. And China becomes dangerous, especially
According to the prophecies of Henoch, the truth about industri- to India, as also at this time China maintains uneasy relations with
alised countries is that they only seem to appear to be true civilisa- her. China will attack India; and if biological weapons are used,
tions, but in fact they are not; because more and more, at the end of around 30 million human beings will be killed in the area of and
the 20th century and at the beginning of the third millennium, they around New Delhi alone. However, this will not be the end yet
will disregard all true love, true freedom and true wisdom as well because the effect of biological bombs and missiles, etc., used can-
as true peace along with all values of humaneness and all values of not be controlled at that time, and terrible epidemics unknown up
men's and women's true being. to that point in time will arise and will spread quickly to many
But not even all the terrible happenings will hinder the USA in areas. Also Pakistan will allow herself to be misled to instigate a
continuing to proceed with her actions against all countries. Even war against India, which will be especially dangerous in view of
when the North American continent will be stricken by the most the fact that both countries are developing atomic weapons.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 131

Continued from page 130
215th Contact, February 28, 1987:
Known as the Henoch (or Enoch) Prophecies, this contact
contained a forewarning of the destruction of the World Trade
Center (WTC) by terrorism, the series of worldwide wars that
the US would subsequently launch, and military actions involv-
ing Russia, China, France, Germany, Spain, England,
Scandinavia and many Third World and other countries.
Corroborated: September 11, 2001, the WTC was
destroyed; the United States has already attacked Afghanistan
and Iraq as of the time of this writing.
235th Contact, February 3, 1990:
Warned of earthquake in California and eruption of the
Redoubt volcano in Alaska for February 28, 1992.
Corroborated: The Upland quake occurred on that precise
date; and the Redoubt volcanic activity began on February 21
and continued through February 28, with more activity follow-
ing in March.
241st Contact, February 3, 1992:
This contact contained specific corroborated warnings about:
Landslide in Brazil, March 1992: occurred March 18, 1992;
Nuclear accident in Russia during the third week of March:
occurred March 27, 1992;
Landers earthquake in Los Angeles for April 23 or 24, 1992:
occurred April 22, 1992;
Eruption of Mt Etna, Italy, in April 1992: reported April 15,
1992;
Eruption of Cerro Negro, Nicaragua, in April 1992:
occurred April 912, 1992;
Earthquakes in GermanyHollandBelgium area for April
1992: occurred April 13, 1992;
Earthquakes in ChinaBurma (Myanmar) April 1992:
occurred ChinaBurma border April 23, 1992.
249th Contact, June 13, 1994:
Still speculative: In response to a question Meier asked
regarding "mad cow disease", Ptaah stated that "BSE pathogens
cannot be destroyed by simply cooking the meat and other items,
or by producing meat meal", and that the temperatures necessary
for killing the disease-causing prions would need to be "as high
as 700C [1292F], and possibly even up to 1000C [1832F], for aggressors will be formed, which will invade Scandinavia.
previously mutated pathogens that have existed for some time
now". Our scientists have been raising their own estimates as to
the temperatures necessary to destroy the disease-causing prions
and are now more closely approaching the temperatures that the
Plejaren, Ptaah, stated.
251st Contact, February 3, 1995:
This contact contains startling information regarding techno-
logical developments such as hybrid warriors created by mixing
human and pig DNA. People will have biochips attached to
their nerve endings, and Meier warned of ominous biochipping
with links to Deep Space Platform satellites and supercomputer.
Corroborated: Humanpig DNA experiments have begun in
the last several years; people are starting to get "chipped".
Still speculative: Creation of half-human/half-machine
beings, clones and androids; discoveries that conclusively con-
firm existence of previous human life on Mars; rectification of
the "ageing" and "aggression" genes; Plejaren warnings of deep-
impact scenario, and need for a defence system for incoming
objects.
Michael Horn
132 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
Wars and devastation in Europe and North America
Yet Russia will not rest and will attack Scandinavia, and in
doing so will embroil all of Europe. And months before that, a ter-
rible tornado will have swept across northern Europe, causing
great devastation and destruction. It must still be stated that the
Russian attack will occur during the summer, in fact, starting from
Arhangelsk. Denmark will not be dragged into the war, due to the
insignificance of this country. Yet Russia will not be satisfied with
this action of war, as her will for expansion will be ravenous. And
consequently Russia will launch a military attack against Iran and
Turkey and will conquer these two countries in bloody fighting,
causing enormous destruction.
In the Russian expansionist mentality will also be included the
drive to gain control of the Middle Eastern oil deposits as well as
to gain control of the southeastern region of Europe. Therefore,
she will also invade the Balkans and conquer these countries there
in enormous battles, causing ruthless and devastating destruction
with many deaths.
This will be at the time that tremendous natural disasters will hit
Italy and its people, causing severe hardship. But this will also be
at the time when Vesuvius could become active again and could
spread tremendous havoc. At the same time, a war will shake Italy
and claim many human lives as well as cause great destruction.
Destruction of war will descend on the northern countries as
strong military forces will invade them from the East and will pil-
lage and murder as well as use bombs and missiles, like hail com-
ing down, and hitherto unknown weapons of laser- and computer-
controlled types which will destroy and annihilate everything,
whereby the first target will be Hungary and after that will follow
Austria and northern Italy. Switzerland will also be severely
affected, but will not be the actual target; this will be France and
Spain. However, the main objective of the aggressors will be to
bring all of Europe under their military control, and for that pur-
pose France will be selected to be the headquarters.
France will not only be invaded by the aggressors from the out-
side, but will also be conquered from within as a result of collabo-
rative forces and other forces. This can be envisioned as being the
many foreigners of a different religion living in France at that time,
and specifically Islam, which will be this force working from with-
in. Once France has fallen, a war to conquer Spain and England
will take place. Subsequently, an alliance with the forces of the
For all these French-based military operations, the weapons of
mass destruction stored in the arsenals of France will be used and
cause evil devastation, destruction and annihilation. The aggres-
sors from the East will force the French Army to join their military
forces and lead a war of conquest against the northern countries of
Europe, invading and conquering Sweden and Norway.
Subsequently, these northern countries will be annexed by Russia.
Military forces will also attack Finland, whereby many will be
killed and an enormous destruction will be caused.
At the same time, as a civil war rages in Germany, an enormously
bloody revolution will break out in England which will claim more
lives than will be claimed by the civil war in Germany. And
because England and Ireland have been at war for a long time
already, due to the IRA and the police and military forces of
England, the result will be (because this feud will continue up to
that time) that this revolution will spread out to all of Ireland,
especially affecting Northern Ireland. Many lives will be lost
during a civil war in Wales, where differences between various
parties will arise before the Third World War. Welsh and English
forces will clash especially near Cymru, and claim many lives and
cause great destruction.
STRANGE Times 2006
 But death, destruction and annihilation will not only rage in Civil wars and anarchy in America
Europe but also in America, where much suffering will have to be Yet the misery on Earth will continue, as two terrible civil wars
endured and many deaths as well as destruction and annihilation will break out in America, whereby one will follow the other.
will be. America and Russia will have the most terrible weapons Afterwards, the United States of America will break apart and
of mass destruction at their disposala fact which is already the deadly hostility will prevail among her, which then leads to the
case to a certain extent todayand will clash with violent force division into five different territories; and it cannot be prevented
against each other at that time of conflict, whereby Canada will that sectarian fanatics will play a dictatorial role.
also be dragged into this conflict. The source of this conflict will Anarchy will be the worldwide condition that will prevail and
substantiate the Russian attack on the American State of Alaska torment human beings over a long period of time, as human beings
and against Canada. will also be tormented by the many epidemics and diseases, many
This conflict will result in mass killings of human beings as well of them new and unknown to human beings and for this reason
as devastating destruction, annihilation and epidemics, etc., which incurable. Due to this fact, the bodies of many human beings will
mankind of Earth will never have seen and experienced up to that slowly and miserably decay, while unbearable pain will also occur
time. Not only nuclear, biological and chemical weapons will be as well as blindness and terrible respiratory problems that lead to
used en masse, but also enormously deadly systems of computer- suffocation. The consciousness of many human beings will
controlled weapons that are only in the beginning stages of devel- become impaired and succumb to feeblemindedness and insanity.
opment today, or will be invented and constructed during the third And all these gruesome occurrences will be traceable to biological
millennium. and chemical weapons, which are the cause of not fast, but grue-
some and slow deaths; and this will also occur due to the use of ray
Worldwide natural catastrophes and frequency weapons which are already being developed today.
As already mentioned, enormous Finally, the words of Henoch may
natural catastrophes and rolling walls be specifically mentioned, which
of fire and violent hurricanes will ...two terrible civil wars will break include that mankind of Earth, in pur-
rage all across America, while, in out in America, whereby one will suit of technology for mass destruc-
addition, all the terrible effects of war tion and greed for power, hatred,
will bring thousandfold deaths, follow the other. Afterwards, the vengeance and riches, will ignore all
destruction and annihilation. United States of America will values of Creation and will trample
America's largest cities will be upon all values of love, wisdom, free-
absolutely destroyed, and firestorms
break apart and deadly hostility dom and peace, as ancestors of the
will cause great disaster and misery. will prevail among her, which then Henoch lineage have done before, to
Severe earthquakes and volcanic leads to the division into five plunge the world into screaming mis-
eruptions will also belong to that ery, death, destruction and annihila-
time, and these will cause much suf- different territories... tion and into the most severe catastro-
fering and misery and deaths besides phes mankind of Earth will ever have
enormous destruction and devasta- experienced.
tion, as all of nature and the planet itself will rise up against the
insanity of human beings on Earth. However, tornadoes, earth- About the Author:
quakes and volcanic eruptions will not only rage in America, but Michael Horn is the authorised American media representative
also in Europe and in the rest of the world. for the Billy Meier Contacts and has researched the case for
These activities have already begun at the present time, also dur- over 25 years. He is a lecturer, writer and frequent guest on
ing the past decadeswith the exception that they will become radio and TV. Michael has presented to two NEXUS
Conferences, DVDs of which are available through NEXUS
increasingly more devastating in the future. And man of Earth is
Magazine offices around the world.
guilty for the most part today, as also in the future it is man who
will destroy the entire environmentall of nature, the atmosphere, Editor's Note:
water and all the resources of the planet. The information here is just a fraction of that given to Billy
And through this, a shifting of weight inside the Earth takes Meier. For more details, and for the complete text of the
place, caused for example by the creation of gigantic lakes by Henoch prophecies, visit the website http://www.theyfly.com.
damming and by creating hollow caverns due to the exploitation of The Henoch Prophecies are copyright 20022004 Billy
petroleum and gas, etc. And thereby unnatural inner-Earth move- Meier/FIGU (Freie Interessengemeinschaft fr Grenz und
ments are created, which also lead to unnatural tectonic effects and Geisteswissenschaften und Ufologiestudien [Free Community of
cause earthquakes and volcanic eruptions, which also in turn cause Interests in Fringe and Spiritual Sciences and Ufological Studies),
enormous climatic changes, resulting in horrendous tornadoes of Semjase Silver Star Center, CH-8495 Schmidrti ZH,
devastating proportions which in the end will set their destructive Switzerland. For more information, go to website
energies free on the entire world. All of this will lead to increas- http://www.figu.org. The complete Henoch Prophecies, as well
ingly horrible floods and unusually massive snowfalls which will as more predictions from the 251st Contact, can be found in
advance to the southern countries and finally even to the equatorial Guido Moosbrugger's 2004 book, And Still They Fly! (the sec-
ond edition of And Yet They Fly!, 2001). Both the book and the
regions, because through the insanity of human beings the Earth
new DVD, The Meier Contacts The Key To Our Future
has begun unnoticeably to spin [strangely] as a consequence of
Survival (see review, NEXUS 11/03), are available directly from
atomic explosions inside and on the surface of the Earth. And this http://www.theyfly.com, or contact Michael Horn, PO Box
will be the reason that the planet will slowly but surely enter an 5163, Playa del Rey, California 90296, USA, email
extraordinary spinning orbit around the Sun, while the first phase michael@theyfly.com. Also see Michael Hesemann's interview,
is already occurring, which causes a change in climate, leading to a "Billy Meier's ET Contacts Are Real, Says His Son", in Twilight
new ice age. Zone, NEXUS 7/02.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 133

 Mysteries Within the Earth
I n all the years we've been working on NEXUS, we've received numerous reports that suggest there's
a lot going on under the surface of our planetand I'm not even talking about subterranean bases
established by the military. If folklore and eyewitness accounts are any guide, there's got to be some
truth to these claims. This section looks at the ever-popular Hollow Earth theory as well as examples
of unusual goings-on beneath our feet.
Hollow Earth Theory: The number of people who believe that the Earth may be a hollow sphere
grows by the day. Many people subscribe to the notion that there are entrances to this inner world
via the north and south poles. According to reports from polar explorers such as Nansen, each of
these entrances is so large that, on the ground (or ocean), the observer is not able to discern that he
is going "down" below the horizon until strange effects or sights are noted: navigational instruments
gone haywire; the appearance of an additional sun; the existence of numerous warm-blooded
animals; abnormally warm temperatures and high humidity.
By now, you would think that all one would need to do would be to obtain a satellite photograph
of either pole on a cloud-free day. I attempted to find such a picture many years ago and was baffled
to discover that no such photographs existed. I have repeatedly emailed and publicly asked for any
such photographs, but with no results. There is much more to the Hollow Earth concept than meets
the eye. Before you dismiss it out of hand, you would do well to consider all the basic information
first. For a more comprehensive look at the arguments for and against the Hollow Earth theory, I
would suggest you visit some of the many websites dedicated to the cultural, historical and scientific
research into the subject.
Deep Dwellers: There are numerous accounts of people who have discovered anomalous
artefacts and buildings or encountered strange beings in caverns and caves all over the globe. The
articles by Michael Mott presented in this section provide a comprehensive study of the subject, with
many examples given. I've noticed there are consistent observations of seemingly endless tunnels
with extremely smooth walls, often reportedly having permanent illumination. Along with tales of
subterranean structures, many of which seem to have been designed for giant-sized humans, you'll
read many reports of diverse civilisations existing in vast underground pockets deep within the Earth.
All of these civilisations appear to have advanced technology and do not wish to interact with us
surface-dwellers (we seem to be considered primitive and warlike!). There are reports of both
benevolent and sinister cultures among them.
It is also interesting to hear what happens when someone returns from an amazing caving
adventure. In several cases I know of, that country's military has turned up shortly afterwards and
usually sealed up the entrance so that no one can ever get in (or out) again.
If you have any information to contribute to the greater understanding of this subject, I'd be happy
to hear it.

134 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 A Case for the
Hollow Earth Theory
O
n 25th November 1912, Marshall B. Gardner of Aurora, Kane County, Illinois,
USA submitted his discovery application to the United States Patent Office.
Eighteen months later, on 12th May 1914, this federal agency granted Mr
Gardner United States Patent 1096102, the second most important scientific
document ever issued. Its scientific significance is exceeded only by the mechanical
flight discovery of Orville and Wilbur Wright in 1903. For reasons which even Mr
Gardner could not have fully anticipated in the early l900s and which are now abundantly
clear, his discovery soon became the most highly classified military secret of all time.
In 1913, Gardner wrote his original book proving beyond any doubt that our Earth is a
A 1914 US hollow sphere. So voluminous was the evidence which he continued to amass from studies
of astronomy and polar exploration that he expanded his book to 450 pages in 1920. The

patent contends title is A Journey to the Earth's Interior, or Have the Poles Really Been Discovered?
Although he seems not to have been aware of it, Gardner's work had been preceded
incompletely by William Reed whose book, Phantom of the Poles, was 281 pages and was
that planet published in 1906 in New York City by the Walter S. Rockey Company. The one
shortcoming with Mr Reed's theory, otherwise very intelligently developed, was that he
Earth is a had failed to finish his centrifugal force reasoning regarding Earth's formation. As a result,
he was never able to logically account for the powerful source of heat and illumination
hollow sphere present in the Earth's interior. Gardner, on the other hand, did account for this source. The
difference is that whereas Reed confined his research strictly to polar exploration, Gardner
with polar augmented his with studies of astronomy.
The majority of this article will be testimony from the real experts, the people who were
therethere at the huge telescopes and especially there in those vast and previously
openings and its mysterious polar regions. But first, this is the common-sense theory responsible for United
States Patent 1096102.
own central In the beginning, some four or five billion years ago when the Earth was still an
enormously expanded ball of superhot whirling gas, it gradually began to contract as it
sun. cooled. The laws of physics require cooling gases to condense, and so the rapidly spinning
sphere of tenuous gases began to concentrate as the heat loss continued. Self-centred
gravitational attraction kept reducing the diameter of the whirling ball of cooling
materialbut only to a certain extent. This is the big logical distinction between the old
inadequate theory of planetary formation and Gardner's discovery. The old notion would
have us believe that the gravitational contraction continued unabated until the Earth had
become molten hot under a fierce gravitational pressure. While such a scenario
undoubtedly does routinely occur in the celestial evolution of particularly immense bodies,
as is the case with all stars, it is definitely not the final development of typical planets.
The crucial second factor to lay on stress is centrifugal force. Remember that while
gravity is attempting to draw all of the material toward the centre, there is an opposing
force also at workcentrifugal force. Just as a figure-skater spins much more rapidly
when she brings her outstretched arms tightly in against her body, so too did the ever-
contracting proto-planet begin rotating ever more rapidly as its size decreased. Like the
by Mark Harp 'glued' water in a bucket that refuses to spill if one swings the bucket in a fast circle, so too
was this same law of motioncentrifugal forceattempting to hurl all of the material
107 North Holmes outward from the forming planet's axis of rotation. So finally, in this silent titanic struggle
between two natural forces, a balance was struck. When the swiftly whirling sphere had
Memphis, TN 38111, USA
drawn itself down to an approximately 8,000-mile diameter, the compromise between
gravitational and centrifugal force was reached. But there is more.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 135

 There is a special characteristic of centrifugal force and we must enormity and very gradual curve of the polar aperture, it is
not overlook this important trait. The strength of 'c-force' impossible to visually detect it. This is the same as the fact that we
becomes greatly lessened as it approaches right angles to the do not 'see' that the Earth itself is round. The curve is much too
direction of spin. A simple day-to-day example of this behaviour gradual to observe. Based on the nearly constant merger of warm
is water in a basin. If you remove the drain plug and allow the interior air with very cold exterior polar air, the polar openings are
water to start emptying from the basin, what will you eventually almost always covered by a thick cloud layer. This explains why,
observe?a vortex or whirlpool, an empty space surrounded by when viewed from satellites, the openings look just as they would
rapidly rotating material. if there actually were the mythical 'polar ice caps' which
Now imagine this same principle in action concerning the con- government policy claims are at the Earth's extremities.
tracting body which was to become our Earth. At right angles to Gardner was led inexorably to his monumental scientific dis-
the rotational axisin other words, the polesthe c-force was covery by the vast quantity of inconsistent information which he
considerably weaker than elsewhere, especially the equator; there- continually encountered during his years of study dealing with,
fore, although at the Earth's equator the c-force was able to halt especially, high Arctic expeditions. Chief among the numerous
the material's inward progress at about an 8,000-mile diameter, it mysteries are: (l) a dramatically improving climate in the very far
was considerably less successful in the polar regions, there stop- north; (2) the extreme peculiarity of the famous northern lights or
ping the contraction aurora borealis; and
at about 1,400 miles. (3) the eccentric
The inevitable out- behaviour of the
come of this natural compass in very high
compromise is that latitudes.
our planet concluded We shall now pro-
its evolution and ceed to hear from
solidified as an many witnesses who
8,000-mile hollow forfeited much com-
sphere with 1,400- fort, convenience
mile-diameter polar and, in several cases,
openings. their lives in order
Now it is at this that we may fully
stage in the logic understand the true
that Gardner greatness of our
advances and Reed world, a world vastly
falters. Because of more spectacular
his study of astro- than officially
nomical records and acknowledged.
photography as In the preface of
specifically relating Three Years of
to nebulae and Arctic Service, Lt
comets, Gardner Adolphus Greely of
became aware of the the US Army
whole truth. In the expresses the amaze-
precise centre of ment of his Lady
these translucent Franklin Bay expedi-
spheres is a propor- tion at the strange
tionately small conditions they
incandescent ball. experienced in the
Between this lumi- far north: "Fearing
An Applications Technology satellite photo of the Earth taken 22,300 miles above
nous interior orb and Brazil in 1967 (NASA Photo 67-HC-723). exaggeration, I have
the shell of the neb- occasionally modi-
ula is a large intervening space; said another way, the nebula is fied statements and opinions entered in my original journal,
hollow except for the bright sphere at its centre. Why? Well, believing it better to underrate than enlarge the wonders of the
where is the one other location at which c-force is quite weak, Arctic regions, which have been too often questioned."
besides at the poles? The answer, of course, is at the precise cen- Before focusing on our own world, let us look briefly at some of
tre of rotation, and once again the logic is so straightforward that our interesting neighbours in space. Renowned astronomer
we may readily examine a common household example to support Percival Lowell comments on page 33 of Mars: "...round what we
the argument. What would be the result if you sprinkled a layer of know to be the planet's pole, appeared to be a great white cap... It
powder upon the top of a record player and then turned the record proceeded slowly to dwindle in size... As summer comes on, they
on high speed? The powder would fly off the recordexcept for dwindle gradually away, till by early autumn they present but tiny
a small portion at the precise centre. patches a few hundred miles across... As it melted, a dark band
Based upon his studies of the planetary nebula through appeared, surrounding it on all sides...it was the darkest marking
observatory photographs, Gardner was able to surmise that the very upon the disk, and was of a blue colour."
thick shell of the Earth is approximately 800 miles thick, the polar The temptation to think of this blue perimeter as water must be
openings 1,400 miles across, and the gravitationally suspended avoided, because if this were indeed prodigious volumes of water,
central sun (the incandescent orb locked by gravity in the exact it would frequently be coursing through the many ancient
planetary centre) some 600 miles diameter. Because of the riverbeds which criss-cross the dry Martian surface. These

136 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

riverbeds are permanently dry. Instead, what we are really observ- Madeira in 1877, it appeared that this was the identical position
ing is the optical effect of vast cloud masses moving over the of the spot where he had seen star points then, and where Mitchell
curving sides of the Martian polar aperture. The exterior of Mars had seen them in 1846... Meanwhile, the cap had been steadily
experiences changing seasons; the interior does not. The degree to decreasing in size. On October 12, at 10 hrs 40 mins, ...Mr
which atmospheric moisture and temperature vary at the pole, Douglas measured its position and estimated its size, as was his
where the differing climates converge, will determine the amount wont every few days. He found it to be six degrees distant from
to which the immense blue ring will manifest itself in terrestrial the planet's pole... On looking at the planet on October 13, at 8
telescopes. hrs 15 mins, to his surprise he found the cap gone. Not a trace of
Being unaware of the true configuration of Mars, Lowell natu- it could be seen... What had certainly been there on the 12th was
rally believed that this blue polar band had to be water melted not there on the 13th. The ice cap had disappeared."
from an ice cap. In this assumption, though incorrect, he showed Robert Powers remarks in Mars: Our Future on the Red Planet:
his wisdom. Unlike our present government policy, he knew "There seem to be vast quantities of water in the polar caps...
absolutely that the pole of Mars cannot be carbon dioxide. Page Like the ice caps of Earth, they are bright white."
81: "Faraday made experiments on the relation of the congealing Thomas McDonough says in Space: The Next 25 Years: "Mars
point of carbonic also has large,
acid gas to the pres- bright ice caps,
sure... He further which can even be
found that the curve seen from the Earth
for the liquefaction with a good tele-
point lay very close scope."
to that for the con- In The Greatest
gealing point, and Challenge: The
approached yet clos- Incredible Adventure
er as the pressure and Splendid
decreased. In other Destiny of Man in
words, the gas Exploring Space,
passed almost imme- Martin Caidin notes
diately from the that Both American
gaseous to the solid and Russian
state... Now the astronomers in
pressure is certainly recent years have
very slight on the observed a series of
surface of Mars... In very bright flashes,
consequence, on a lasting about five
rise of temperature minutes, and fol-
the frozen carbonic lowed by mush-
acid gas would there room-shaped clouds.
pass practically Original Moon
straight from the explorer Michael
solid into the Collins writes in
gaseous state... Mission to Mars: "A
Now, from the exis- greater mystery is
tence of the sur- what happened to
rounding polar sea, the water and ice
we remark that in that gouged out
Picture reproduced from The Phantom of the Poles by William Reed
the substance com- those huge channels
(published by Walter S. Rockey Company, New York, 1906).
posing the polar billions of years ago.
caps of Mars this does not occur. A considerable portion of it is Mars has a strong enough gravitational field to hold water vapour
always in the transition state of a liquid. Carbonic dioxide would in its atmosphere rather than allow it to escape into space... What
not thus tarry: water would." happened to all the water that carved out deep channels?"
Lowell made a particularly fascinating observation of the north John Noble Wilford says in Mars Beckons: "Mariners 6 and 7...
polar opening when, for a short period, a portion of the usual The camera photographed a hood of clouds over the south polar
cloud cover parted, thereby allowing beams of light from Mars' cap, and infrared instruments measured temperatures there as low
central sun to project beyond the orifice. "Meanwhile an interest- as -193 degrees Fahrenheit... The infrared spectrometer had
ing phenomenon occurred in the cap on June 7; ...as I was watch- appeared to detect temperatures at the edge of the south polar ice
ing the planet, I saw suddenly two points like stars flash out in the cap that were much too high to be from frozen carbon dioxide...
midst of the polar cap. Dazzlingly bright upon the duller white Scientists could see by the Soviet document that the range of pos-
background of the snow, these stars shone for a few moments and sibilities for the 1994 flight was wide and challenging. Under
then slowly disappeared. The seeing at the time was very good... serious consideration were plans to place two spacecraft into
But though no intelligence lay behind the action of these lights, orbits of Mars passing over the poles."
they were none the less startling for being Nature's own flash- On page 22 of the March-April l992 Final Frontier are some
lights across one hundred millions of miles of space. It had taken remarks about the planet nearest to the SunMercury: "...temper-
them nine minutes to make the journey... On comparing its posi- atures that climb as high as 800 degrees Fahrenheit...
tion with Green's map of his observations upon the cap at Researchers at the California Institute of Technology in Pasadena

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 137

have identified what they believe is a water ice-cap more than 180 Arctic voyager. Perhaps the most interesting expedition ever con-
miles in diameter on Mercury's north pole... The researchers saw ducted in the Arctic area is chronicled in Nansen's 679-page two-
a bright area at the north pole... 'We were amazed'." volume work whose complete title is, Farthest North: Being the
Marshall Gardner devotes 27 pages of his book to the study of Record of a Voyage of Exploration of the Ship "Fram" 1893-96
preliminary planets, better known as nebulae. Here are a few and of a Fifteen Months' Sleigh Journey by Dr Nansen and Lieut.
comments. "The spectroscope supplies the answer...the spectro- Johansen. On page 120, when the 13-man crew had already
scope has proven absolutely that the nebula is not made up of reached almost 77N latitude, Nansen observes: "It was a strange
stars...the typical nebula has a remarkable shell-like structure and feeling to be sailing away north in the dark night to unknown
a central star...a search made with a spectrograph and the Lick lands, over an open, rolling sea, where no ship, no boat had been
36-inch telescope for rotation effects... Definite evidence of rota- before. We might have been hundreds of miles away in more
tion was found..." southerly waters, the air was so mild for September in this lati-
On page 63, in reference to comets as being planets in the tude... We see 'nothing but clean water', as Henriksen answered
process of destruction, Gardner writes: "Hecter MacPherson tells from the crow's-nest when I called up to him... 'They little think at
us in his book, The Romance of Modern Astronomy, that the great home in Norway just now that we are sailing straight for the Pole
comet of 1811, with a tail stretching for a hundred million miles in clear water'... I have almost to ask myself if this is not a dream.
behind and fifteen million miles in breadth, had a nucleus that, One must have gone against the stream to know what it means to
according to measurements by Herschel, was only 428 miles in go with the stream."
diameter. The comet of Donati, detected from a Florence obser- Another of the major contributors to Arctic knowledge was US
vatory in 1858, had a nucleus which 'shone with a brilliance equal Army Lieutenant (later General) Adolphus Greely. Like other
to that of the Polar Star' and which was 630 miles in Arctic voyages, the Lady Franklin Bay expedition encountered the
diameter...'even in the short period of man's life, comets have been truly bitter cold conditions in the lower portion of the Arctic region,
seen to break up and disappear'." but less harsh climate as they neared 80
Included in his many observa- latitude, and especially mild weather
tions concerning Mars, Gardner ... the polar openings are almost beyond the 80th parallel. On page 369,
points out that besides the
numerous reports of the Martian
always covered by a thick cloud when their party had attained the 81st
latitude while map-making for the Army
pole being very bright and mak- layer. This explains why, when on Ellesmere Island, Greely comments:
ing rapid size changes, "...the "At that time a high warm wind was
light from the polar region of viewed from satellites, the blowing from the interior, and the
Mars is a direct illuminant from openings look just as they would if temperature was considerably above 40
within the planet, because that
light, seen at night, is yellow. there actually were the mythical degrees (5 degrees Celsius)." His use of
the word 'interior' was more profoundly
Any other sort of light, a reflec- 'polar ice caps' which government accurate than he realised. An example of
tion from a snowy surface for how dramatically the warm winds from
instance, or a reflection from policy claims are at the Earth's the interior affect the far north exterior is
sand or mountain surfaces, extremities. demonstrated in this passage from page
would be white." On page 80A, 192, when the winds had for a long while
Gardner displays eight excellent been from the south: "At 10 pm, 16th
photographs of Mars recorded at February, the mercurial thermometers
the Yerkes Observatory and which show the "...so-called snow- thawed out, after having been frozen continuously for sixteen days
cap projected beyond the planet's surface, which precludes all and five hours. This is the longest time on record during which
possibility of its being snow or ice." In writing of the English mercury has remained frozen."
astronomer J. Norman Lockyer's report to the Royal Astronomical Dr I. I. Hayes, with the schooner United States, wrote of his far
Society of England: "'The snow-zone was at times so bright that, north voyage in The Open Polar Sea. They were utterly bewil-
like the crescent of the young moon, it appeared to project beyond dered by the inexplicable increase in temperature whenever the
the planet's limb. This effect of irradiation was frequently visible: high Arctic wind sustained from the north. While stalled by a
on one occasion the snow-spot was observed to shine like a nebu- strong persistent wind out of the north for much of the first two
lous star when the planet itself was obscured by clouds...' That weeks of November, Hayes noted that after the great initial masses
luminosity is precisely what our own aurora borealis would look of ice had been driven past them, there were none more to replace
like if our planet was viewed from a great distance. And the light them. He adds: "November 13: Worse and worse. The tempera-
is the same in both cases." ture has risen again, and the roof over the upper deck gives us
As lame as the official government position is in postulating ice, once more a worse than tropic shower... November 14: The wind
snow or frozen carbon dioxide as composing the Martian poles, has been blowing for nearly twenty-four hours from the north-
imagine their predicament in the case of Venus. By their own east, and yet the temperature holds on as before... I have done
admission, the temperature on Venus is well in excess of 800 with speculation. A warm wind from the mer de glace...makes
degrees Fahrenheitquite a place to put an ice cap! Whether by mischief with my theories, as facts have heretofore done with the
choice or by chance, the Jet Propulsion Laboratory of the National theories of wiser men."
Aeronautics and Space Administration released a few remarkable Ship's surgeon for the Advance and Rescue, Dr Elisha Kent
radar-generated photographs of Venus in early 1989. One of these Kane recorded his extensive Arctic experience in Arctic
close-up images, in which the cloud-piercing radar reveals with Explorations in Search of Sir John Franklin, experiences which
excellent clarity the north polar opening, boldly graced the cover culminated near the 82nd parallel. The expedition progressed as
of the April 1989 issue of Discover. Now back to Earth. far north as was practical in their ships, and then, when the amount
Certainly one of the three greatest pioneers of polar exploration of ice rendered additional progress impossible or at least unsafe,
was Dr Fridtjof Nansen, the acclaimed Norwegian scientist and they continued their poleward journey on foot with sledges.

138 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 But as with other Arctic explorers before and since, they were When his group was at the 81st parallel, Greely records on page
amazed to eventually find further advancement thwarted by the 370: "In its whole extent the valley was barren of snow, and in
gradual encroachment of an open polar sea. He writes: "It is most places was covered with a comparatively luxuriant vegeta-
impossible in reviewing the facts which connect themselves with tion." At latitude 8149', Greely writes on page 372: "I there
this discoverythe melted snow upon the rocks, the crowds of caught a butterfly, and saw three skuas, two bumble-bees, and
marine birds, the limited but still advancing vegetable life, the rise many flies..." Page 374: "While at this camp, No. 3, we obtained
of the thermometer in the waternot to be struck by their bearing but little sleep, owing to the large swarms of flies... On rising at 2
on the question of a milder climate near the pole. To refer them am, the temperature was found to be very high, 48 (8.9C), with a
all to the modification of temperature induced by the proximity of minimum of 47 (7.8C) since the preceding evening... In this lake
open water is only to change the form of the question; for it leaves also there were many small minnows..." Page 376: "Corporal
the inquiry unsatisfied: what is the cause of the open water?" Salor brought in with his willows two small pieces of unworked
About 130 years later we have these remarks from the Russian pine wood... Nearby I discovered the former site of an old sum-
explorer Vladimir mer encampment of
Snegirev in his 1985 the Eskimos." Page
On Skis to the North 377: "The sur-
Pole: "On May 9 roundings of the
they crossed the 86th encampment were
parallel... It was a marked by luxuriant
strange thing vegetation of grass,
indeed: you might sorrel, poppies and
have thought that as other plants." Page
they approached the 378: "The sky was
Pole the ice would partly covered with
become thicker, true cumulus clouds,
stronger, more solid, quite rare in Arctic
but in reality it was heavens...; the tem-
just the other way perature was high
around. The closer and the gay yellow
they came to their poppies and other
goal, the more often flowers drew to them
they encountered gaudy butterflies...;
open water..." he could well imag-
Writing about ine himself in the
Admiral Richard roaring forties
Byrd's first journey instead of eight
to Antarctica in degrees from the
Beyond the Barrier, geographical pole."
Eugene Rodgers Page 379: "At this
records the extraor- point, and in its
dinary effect that a immediate vicinity, a
wind persisting from large number of but-
the pole has: terflies were
"Temperature seen...facing
swings were so vio- Ruggles River, three
lent that, only three abandoned Eskimo
Composite photo taken 23rd November 1968 by ESSA 7 satellite, pass 1235-1251.
days after the record huts..." Page 383:
low, the reading rose to 15 above. 'That makes a range of 87 "Among other pieces of wood was a pole, nine feet long and about
degreesas much as the annual range over most of the eastern two inches in diameter, of a hard, close-grained, coniferous wood,
US'..." probably fir or hard pine." Page 385: "...a bumble-bee and a
On page 144 of his book, Nansen exclaims: "Today we had the 'devil's darning-needle'. Butterflies were very numerous, as many
same open channel to the north, and beyond it open sea as far as as fifty being seen during the day... The weather during the day
our view extended. What can this mean?" When in the 79th par- was excessively hot, and we suffered extremely. The attached
allel, he records on page 197: "...bringing northerly wind. It is thermometer of the aneroid barometer, which was carried always
curious that there is almost always a rise of the thermometer with in the shade, stood at 74 (23.3C)... The day's march carried us
these stronger winds... A south wind of less velocity generally farther along the shores of Lake Hazen than I had reached in
lowers the temperature, and a moderate north wind raises it." May, and now a new, undiscovered country was gradually open-
After having reached the very far northerly position of 86 lati- ing to our view."
tude, Nansen observes on page 391: "I was inconvenienced for By far the three most significant categories of evidence proving
the first time by the heat; the sun scorched quite unpleasantly." the validity of United States Patent 1096102 are: (1) warmer
Page 407: "...last night I could hardly sleep for heat." Several climate in polar region; (2) eccentric behaviour of the compass; and
months later, Nansen and Johansen were heading back to the (3) the peculiar polar lights known respectively as the aurora
Fram, but were still above the 81st parallel, when he writes on borealis and, in Antarctica, the aurora australis.
page 527: "Fancy, only 12 (21.5 Fahrenheit) of frost in the mid- Although the brevity of this article prevents all but a cursory
dle of December! We might almost imagine ourselves at home..." examination of the voluminous available evidence, there are

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 139

 Showing the Earth bisected centrally through the polar openings and at right angles to the equator, giving a clear view of the
central sun and the interior continents and oceans. Reproduced from a photograph of the working model made by Marshall
Gardner in 1912, and patented on 12th May 1914 (US Patent 1096102).

several other categories of proof as well. These include: (4) a
dramatic increase in plant and animal life at the far north, also
extreme northward bird migrations at the onset of winter; (5)
stones, wood, dust, pollen and mud found both on and embedded in
icebergs; (6) anomalous radio-wave behaviour in polar region; (7)
gravitational increase measurable at the polar curve, sufficient to
cause a significant segregation of salt water and fresh water; (8)
strange situation of the far north Eskimo, a people with a
completely unique language and whose oral tradition states that
they originated from much farther north in a warm land of
perpetual daylight; (9) polar sea depth and strong southgoing
current in the high Arctic; (10) the perfectly fresh mammoths found
encased in the ice: (a) if, as the official government position
postulates, these elephants died during a climate shift from tropical
to frigid, it is logical to enquire why didn't these shivering
elephants simply 'pack their trunks' and move south? or (b) if this
alleged climate shift happened suddenly, then why aren't these
'flash-frozen' pachyderms found alongside the inevitable 'flash-
frozen' thousands of acres of forest in which they lived?; and (11)
the peculiar chemistry and mathematics of icebergs, enormous
objects composed of fresh water and which, although there is
almost no annual precipitation with which to replace them, travel
by the thousands slowly southward to melt every year.
The compass has been trying to indicate the true configuration
of the polar regions ever since man first employed this instrument
in his quest for those mythical poles. Instead of smoothly leading
would-be conquerors of the pole to the fabled 90 latitude point,
as it must if the official description of the Earth's geology is cor-
rect, the needle starts to perform in an agitated and indecisive
fashion in high latitudes. After reaching approximately the 80th
parallel, an extraordinary thing begins to occur: the needle starts
vertical movement! It is at that stage that the conflicting forces of
magnetism and gravity are manifesting themselves.
Concerning the compass, Russian explorer Snegirev writes:
"...the magnetic pole...makes some kind of tricky curve...inconve-
nience of travelling by compass alone. The arrow would point
northward, then suddenly it would veer to the west, and then
almost reluctantly it would return to its former position." Walter
Sullivan comments in Quest for a Continent: "...compasses which
behaved erratically so near the Pole." Chauncey Loomis
observes in Weird and Tragic Shores, his biography of Arctic
explorer Charles Francis Hall: "...be buried so far north of the

140 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

magnetic pole that the needle of a compass put on his grave points Planets: A Guide to the Solar System: "Despite the fact that Venus
south-west." On page 536 of his book, Nansen says: "There were has no magnetic field, it seems to have auroras high in its
other things, too, that greatly puzzled me. If we were on a new atmosphere; their origin is not understood."
land, near Spitsbergen, why were the rosy gulls never seen there, Greely states on page 158 of his book: "The aurora...magnetic
while we had them in flocks here to the north? And then there was disturbances were rare during colourless and slowly changing
the great variation of the compass." Greely records on page 128 forms." Page 184: "Despite the remarkable duration and extent
of his book: "In the magnetometer a small magnet, freely sus- of the aurora, the magnet was but slightly disturbed." Page 187:
pended by a single fibre of untwisted silk, swings readily in any "The halo was preceded by an aurora, which was unaccompanied
horizontal direction. This magnet, at Conger...swung to and fro in by magnetic disturbances."
a restless, uneasy way... A magnetic needle, nicely and delicately Acclaimed South Polar explorer Finn Ronne notes in his autobi-
balanced, in the middle latitudes assumes a nearly level position. ography, Antarctica, My Destiny: "...I beheld an unimaginable
At Conger, however, the needle, adjusted so that it can move crystalline beauty; and I felt myself a part of a surrealistic scene
freely in a vertical plane, shows a strong tendency to assume an as I stood transfixed while the aurora australis washed over me."
upright position. At a dip of 90 the needle would be erect, while Nansen writes in his book on page 163: "The whole sky was
at Conger the inclination was about 85." ablaze with it... No words can depict the glory that met our eyes...
The single most spectacular feature of the high Arctic is It was an endless phantasmagoria of sparkling colour, surpassing
undoubtedly the aurora borealis, a phenomenon alien to nearly all anything that one can dream."
of the Earth's countries. The official government explanation is The evidence presented in the science books of William Reed
essentially the same as that expressed in nearly all large circulation and especially Marshall Gardner prove beyond any reasonable
publications, such as The Guinness doubt the accuracy of United
Book of World Records: "These States Patent 1096102, the Hollow
luminous displays are caused by Instead of smoothly leading would-be Earth Theory. When one couples
showers of electrons streaming the monumental importance of this
from the Sun (the solar wind) and conquerors of the pole to the fabled discovery with the nearly total
striking the atoms of the upper
atmosphere, so making them glow.
90 latitude point, as it must if the non-acknowledgement of it in the
major press, it is readily apparent
The shape of the Earth's magnetic official description of the Earth's that it has the dubious distinction
field confines these displays to
polar regions and high latitudes."
geology is correct, the needle starts of also being the single most per-
vasive conspiracy in the world.
Were it not for its wholesale to perform in an agitated and Why?
omission of the facts, this The famous unregistered aircraft
conjecture sounds nearly plausible. indecisive fashion in high latitudes. commonly described as unidenti-
There are large problems, however, fied flying objects are the logical
with an electromagnetic hypothesis answer. Even ignoring all other
in accounting for the polar lights: (l) electricity and magnetism do aspects of the UFO situation, the authentication of at least some of
not move haphazardly about in enormous curtain shapes; (2) the these vehicles is fully established by the countless number of firm
aurora is noticeably affected by local weather changes; (3) the radar contacts measured on both military and commercial scopes.
aurora displays a significant variety of colours, often concurrently; Common sense easily discerns the logical connection between the
(4) the magnetic needle functions even at the equator, but the dramatic arrival of these aircraft in large numbers in 1947 and our
aurora is almost exclusively polar; (5) actual electrical phenomena own extraordinary technological leaps of the 1940si.e., atomic
such as lightning are noisy, yet the aurora is silent; (6) particles bomb, trans-sound-barrier flight, radar, television, etc. If the civil-
from the Sun are mainly hydrogen, yet very little hydrogen is isation operating these unregistered aircraft were headquartered on
recorded in the spectrograph's analysis of auroral light; (7) if a distant planet, they would not be interested in the slightest; if, on
caused by a perpetual flow of electrons from the Sun, then why are the other hand, they occupy our interior sister world, in that case
auroral displays sometimes present and sometimes absent?; (8) the they would be extremely interestedespecially by our harnessing
most powerful refutation is that auroras are often experienced on of the atom. It may very possibly be that atomic energy will lead
site with no effect upon the magnetic needle! (or has led) to the ultimate technology of antimattergravity-iner-
Peter Freuchen writes in The Arctic Year: "These peculiar tia reversal.
lights ...brightest by far and best developed in the Arctic, reaching Second only to national security is a nation's desire to explore.
the height of beauty in the dark winter nights...luminous bands or As a peaceful pursuit, Mankind's most exhilarating ambition is
rays dart rapidly over the sky. They change form continuously, space exploration, an undertaking which we have barely begun.
and sometimes colour too, and the rays often give the illusion of That will change soon if recent indications out of Nevada reach
originating from a distant searchlight... On other occasions the fruition. The long-sought technology of gravity-inertia reversal
aurora appears as a rippling curtain of light, steadily changing has finally been achieved and is being flown routinely in the
form and position. Or it may occur as a cascade of light radiating Groom Dry Lake Antimatter Research Facility of Lincoln County,
from a magnificent crown high up in the sky. Whatever the form, Nevada, USA. The large number of witnesses grew dramatically
the aurora always exhibits movement and, generally, rapid when NBC-TV aired their 20th April 1992 report by Pentagon
change." correspondent Fred Francis at the edge of perhaps the most highly
The kaleidoscopic behaviour of the aurora is fully explained by classified military base in the worldArea 51.
the limitless variety of atmospheric conditions present at any After an eventual full disclosure and subsequent public
particular time between the central sun and the polar opening. exploration of the Interior Earth, Interior Mars will be even more
For an instantaneous discreditation of the fraudulent fascinating.
"electromagnetic bombardment" theory of auroral production, we Sentido komun, katotohanan at saka katarungancommon
refer to this passage about Venus from Mark Chartrand's 1990 sense, truth and justice.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 141

 THE CHINTAMANI STONE AND
THE CITY OF EIGHT IMMORTALS
I
t appears to be a trapezohedron made
of black stone or ore, with glowing
striations. However it is more, or
less, than stone. Scientists would not
be able to study it completely because it
exists only partially in humanity's concept
of matter and space. The Chintamani
Stone is more than an artefact: it is a key
to doors that were sealed aeons ago.
Part of the stone was kept in a
monastery in Tibet, the second in the
Museum of Natural History in New York
City, and the final piece in the city of
Agartha.
One ancient South American legend
relates that the god Tvira built a temple
on an island in Lake Titicaca to hold three
holy stones called the Kala.
Similarly, three black stones were ven-
erated by the Muslims in the Ka'aba at the
Great Mosque in Mecca. There are sever-
al traditions associated with the stones,
but all agree on their celestial origin.
Muslims say that the stones were origi-
nally white, but turned black after absorb-
ing dark or evil thoughts.
In Hungary, near the village of
Stregoicavar, there was a monolith that
19th-century occultists spoke of as being
one of the keys. There was a great deal of
142 NEXUS
superstition regarding the monolith, espe-
cially the assertion that if anyone slept in
its vicinity they would be haunted by
monstrous nightmares of another world
forever after.
In many texts, the Chintamani Stone is
referred to as "the shining trapezohedron".
Nicholas Roerich (18741947)
(Source: www.roerich.org/NicholasRoerich.html)
www.nexusmagazine.com
A number of esoteric and suppressed
volumes of the Gnostic tradition
mentioned the original form of the stone
as a trapezohedron.
An Arab scholar who went by the name
of Abdul Al-Hazred wrote of it in his
18th-century manuscript, the Kitab Al-
Azif. Von Junzt alluded to it in his
Unaussprechlichen Kulten, as did the
Ponape scripture and Prinn's De Vermiis
Mysteriis.
The most recent mention of the stone is
from the 1920s and directly references the
reason why the stones were called "keys".
In Buddhist and Taoist beliefs, there is
the tradition of "eight immortals": eight
masters who reside beneath a mountain
on the Chinese-Tibetan border. The city,
known as Agharta in some legends and
Hsi Wang Mu in others, is possibly
underground and has been said by many
to be near Lhasa.
There have been numerous and dubious
reports of explorations of tunnels leading
to the city, but the most convincing came
from Nicholas Roerich, the Russian artist
and mystic (18741947). During his trav-
els in Asia in the first decade of the 20th
century, he heard about the eight immor-
tals and their abode in the mountains.
He learned from a native guide about a
huge vault inside the Kunlun mountain
STRANGE Times 2006

range, where treasures had been stored
from the beginning of history, and of
strange, grey people.
In the 1920s, a high abbot from the
Trasilumpo lamasery entrusted Roerich
with a fragment of a magical stone from
another world: the Chintamani Stone,
alleged to have come from the Sirius
system. Ancient Asian texts claim that
"when the son of the Sun descended upon
the Earth to teach mankind, there fell from
the heavens a shield which bore the power
of the world".
Roerich's wife Helena wrote that the
stone possessed a dark lustre, like a dark
heart, and bore four unknown letters.
Roerich recognised the four letters on the
stone to be Sanskrit and translated them
to mean: "Through the stars I come. I
bring the chalice covered with the shield.
Within it I bring a treasure, the gift of
Orion." Its radiation was stronger than
radium, but on a different frequency.
Asian legends state that this radiation
covers a vast area and influences world
events, and that the main mass of the
stone is kept in a tower in the city of the
Starborn.
According to ancient texts, the stone
was sent from Tibet to King Solomon in
Jerusalem, who split the stone and made a
ring out of one piece. Centuries later,
Muhammad took three other fragments to
Mecca. A smaller fragment was sent with
Roerich to Europe to help aid the
establishment of the League of Nations.
With the failure of the League, Roerich
returned the fragment to the Trasilumpo
lamasery in Tibet. Supposedly the 13th
Dalai Lama decreed that the fragments
were to be kept in separate places for
safekeeping.
Roerich speculated that the stone was a
form of moldavitea magnetic mineral
that is also said to be a spiritual accelera-
tor. Some historians said that the stone
could act as a homing beacon, leading to
the City of the Eight Immortals.
The abbot told Roerich how the
immortals were made of air and clay,
formed by Mu Kung, the sovereign of the
eastern air, and Wang Mu, the queen of
the western air.
A post-Taoist twist is that they were
from a planet in the solar system of Sirius
and established an outpost in the
mountains of Tibet to conduct their
genetic hybrid experiments.
Roerich reported that during his journey
STRANGE Times 2006
to Tibet he saw a flying disc (a term he
used two decades before it was
popularised). His guide had told him it
was from the city of Agharta.
Roerich's theory about the stone is that
it is charged with shugscurrents of
psychic force. He speculated that it
resembled an electrical accumulator and
in one way or another may give back the
energy stored within it. For instance, it
will increase the spiritual vitality of
anyone who touches it, infusing him with
knowledge or enhancing psychic abilities
that allow him to glimpse Agharta, the
Valley of the Eight Immortals.
The stone, according to Balam, is a key
to all futures and everyone's destiny. It is
a point of power, a nontechnological
quantum vortex.
References
Agharta Secrets of the Subterranean
Cities: www.za.spiritweb.org/Spirit/
agartha.html
Chintamani Treasure of the World:
www.roerich.org/icmr/Collection/
Paintings/Chintamani.html
Nicholas Roerich: www.roerich.org/
Searching for Shambhala: www.
atlantisrising.com/shambhala.html
Underground Cities:
www.crystalinks.com/underciv.html
(Source: www.jamesaxler.com/dlwsg/
chintamani_stone.htm)
"Chintamani Treasure of the World" by Nicholas Roerich
(Source: www.roerich.org/icmr/Collection/Paintings/Chintamani.html)
www.nexusmagazine.com
THE TWILIGHT ZONE
ROERICH'S SEARCH FOR THE
SECRETS OF SHAMBHALA
M
uch energy has been spent by
adherents to the Hollow Earth
theory in trying to locate the polar
entrances, specifically the northern one, to
the hollow portion of the Earth. Their
research material has come from many
sourcesfor example, modern scientific
methods of gathering information have
been employed, from satellite pictures to
seismological surveys. But earlier on,
Hollow Earthers looked towards legend
and folklore as well as the results of polar
exploration as their sources of information.
The Bhagavat Purana, for example,
contains the story of the sons of Maharaj
Sagara, who were ordered by their father to
search the entire globe for the sacrificial
horse which had been stolen by Indra. At
one point, it tells us that the sons of Sagara
went off in the northeastern direction from
India and entered into the interior of the
Earth, where they found the horse at the
hermitage of Kapila Rishi (they were not
nice about it to the rishi). Other Puranas
offer a bit more detail. They tell that the
Sagaras came upon a northern ocean, which
they passed over, and that they then entered
into the bowels of the Earth.
There are traditional Tibetan Buddhist
beliefs regarding the city of Shambhala and
the kingdom of Agharta, in which the city is
situated.
NEXUS 143
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
Specifically, some conversations held by
Nicholas Roerich, a patron of culture, with
various lamas and Tibetans as he travelled
in that region with his wife in the 1920s
have been recorded in various books
beginning with those by Roerich himself,
including AltaiHimalaya (1929) [see
review this issue] and Shambhala (1930).
(His artwork is still displayed at the
Nicholas Roerich Museum at 319 West
107th Street in New York City.)
Roerich wrote: "I remembered how, dur-
ing our crossing of the Karakorum Pass,
my sais, the Ladaki, asked me: 'Do you
know why there is such a peculiar upland
up here? Do you know that in the subter-
ranean caves here, many treasures are hid-
den, and that in them lives a wonderful
tribe which abhors the sins of the Earth?'
And again when we approached Khotan the
hooves of our horses sounded hollow, as
Portrait of Nicholas Roerich in Tibetan Robes
(Source: www.roerich.org/online_collection/n/Nicholas_Roerich.html)
144 NEXUS
though we rode above caves or hollows.
Our caravan people called our attention to
this... When we saw entrances of caves,
our caravaneers told us: 'Long ago, people
lived there; now they have gone inside;
they have found a subterranean passage to
that subterranean kingdom.'"
Here are some most important passages
of a conversation which Roerich had with a
Tibetan lama in 1928.
Roerich: Lama, tell me of Shambhala.
Lama: But you Westerners know noth-
ing about Shambhalayou wish to know
nothing. Probably you ask out of curiosity;
and you pronounce this sacred word in
vain.
After some cajoling by Roerich, the
Lama studied him and replied:
Lama: Great Shambhala is far beyond
the ocean. It is the mighty heavenly
domain. It has nothing to do with our
www.nexusmagazine.com
Earth. How and why do you people take
interest in it? Only in some places, in the
Far North, can you discern the resplendent
rays of Shambhala... The secrets of
Shambhala are well guarded.
Roerich: Lama, we know the greatness
of Shambhala. We know the reality of this
indescribable realm. But we also know
about the reality of the earthly Shambhala.
We know some high lamas have visited
Shambhala... We know the stories of the
Buryat Lama, of how he was accompanied
through a very narrow secret passage... So
do not tell me about the heavenly
Shambhala only, but also about the one on
Earth...because I know that a real one
exists on Earth... Lama, how does it
happen that Shambhala on Earth is still
undiscovered by travellers? On maps you
may see so many routes of expeditions. It
appears that all heights are already marked
and all valleys and rivers explored.
Lama: ...But, as yet these people have
not found all thingsso, let a man try to
reach Shambala without a call! You have
heard about the poisonous streams which
encircle the uplands. Perhaps you have
even seen people dying from these gases
when they come near them... Many people
try to reach Shambhala, uncalled. Some of
them have disappeared forever. Only a few
of them reach the holy place, and only if
their karma is ready.
M ore recently, Jan Lamprecht wrote
about this subject matter in his book,
Hollow Planets (1998). A Tibetan lama,
who is a renowned teacher of Vajrayana
Buddhism and a Tibetan doctor, lectured in
the San Jose, California, area and made a
reference to Agharta. His title is His
Holiness Orgyen Kusum Lingpa, so it
seems that he belongs to a certain lineage
and might be privy to ancient information
on the matter. Lamprecht wrote:
"While lecturing in San Jose, this lama
stated that Agharta could be reached from
India by flying northwards for seven days.
I would assume the lama's references were
to the speed at which the bird might fly. If
that is so, then the average bird flying
northwards from India for seven days
would easily reach the Arctic.
"Roerich's lama had stated that
Shambhala lies in the Far North. Could
this be a reference to the Arctic Ocean?"
(Source: Edited from the web page
www.skywebsite.com/hollow/arctic/)
STRANGE Times 2006
 T HE D EEP D WELLERS
The subterranean
dwellers of various
ancient religious
and mythical
traditions have
parallels with the
underworld beings
of modern-day
accounts.
Part 1
by Wm Michael Mott 2000
Email: mottimorph@earthlink.net
Website:
http://www.hollowplanets.com/
journal/J0002TheDeepDwellers.asp
STRANGE Times 2006
SUBSURFACE INHABITANTS IN FOLKLORE, MYTH AND LITERATURE
T
he legends, myths and literature of mankind have always been filled with fanciful
or terrifying accounts of underground lands and races, hidden from surface sight.
Rumours of a largely unseen reality, of cavern worlds, hidden tunnel systems
which criss-cross the globe, and the occasional accidental discovery of a large
geode structure within the Earth, have migrated from the realms of folklore and early sci-
entific speculation into literatureand perhaps back into folklore again.
When reading and studying the available fiction which touches upon the topic of a sub-
terranean world, many similarities come to light. This is interesting insofar as the various
writers were not necessarily familiar with one another's works. It is obvious that many of
them drew upon folktales and mythology as well as the latest scientific findings and theo-
ries of the day; indeed, they had a huge matrix of archetypes and forms with which to
work.
Religious traditions have also been a major influence on the development of fiction
about subterranean worlds and inhabitants, and some brave souls have shared accounts of
what they believed to be their own encounters with the denizens that dwell within the
Earth's crust.
In this work, all of these aspects of underworld studies, and more, will come under care-
ful examination, but this is not so much an examination of the underworlds as it is of their
inhabitants.
MYTHICAL (ANCIENT RELIGIOUS) ACCOUNTS
1. The East
One of the earliest examples of subterranean stories is to be found in the Gilgamesh
cycle of stories, which some would say is not so much fictitious as it is a distorted account
of ancient events.
Gilgamesh was an actual king who ruled Uruk (also called Unug) about 2600 BC, and
he was supposedly of half-divine origin. Like other heroes of ancient mythic cycles who
were demigods, or semi-divine, Gilgamesh longed for an immortality which he saw as his
birthright, much the same as Heracles of the Greeks. In one tale from his cycle, he
befriends a physically powerful, hairy, subhuman character named Enkidu and teaches
him the customs of humanity. In a later tale, Enkidu, on behalf of his friend and king,
agrees to venture into the underworld of ancient Mesopotamia to search for someone who
has the secret of immortality.
Other Sumerian accounts leave little doubt that the Kur or Ki-Gal ("the Great Below")
was a place of immense size and great terror. This realm was ruled by the goddess
Ereshkigal and her consort Nergal, a warlike god who had entered her queendom with
plans of conquestonly to be seduced by the enemy, who became his wife. The Ki-Gal
was said to be filled with a wide range of beings, including spirits and the undead, reani-
mated bodies of human beings as well as savage guardians called "scorpion men".
Other residents were described as sexless and robotic "artificial" beings called Galatur
or Gala, who were used by the rulers of the underworld for missions of kidnapping human
beings from the surface world or for other errands. Also present in the underworld were
the Utukku, "eagle-headed" reptilian humanoids who are probably the original Djinn and
Ifrits of the ancient Middle East. The latter beings were usually depicted with wings, rep-
resenting their ability to fly when dispatched on the errands of the rulers of the under-
world. Another strange race was the Pazuzu, a canine-faced humanoid monstrosity with
reptilian scales and tail.
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 145
 All of these are motifs which in one form or another have been to nearly human in appearance. The Naga race is related to anoth-
found to permeate nearly every ancient underworld tradition and er underworld race: the Hindu demons, or Rakshasas.
also have found their way into folklore and literature. The Nagas are also said to possess, as individuals, a "magical
The Asian region, particularly the Indian subcontinent, Tibet, stone" or "third eye" in the middle of their brow. This is known
Nepal, China and Japan, has very similar traditions about subter- to students of eastern mysticism as the focal point of one of the
ranean inhabitants. higher chakras (energy channel points) of the human(oid) nervous
In India, there is still a strong belief in the reality of the system, and is the chakra associated with inner visions, intuition
Nagasa race of "serpent people" or "lizard men" who have and other esoteric concepts.
made their homes in two major underground In China, the Lung Wang (Dragon Kings)
cities (or civilisations), Bhogavati and Patala. closely resemble the Nagas in many
Bhogavati is believed to be underneath the respects. The Lung were said to dwell either
Himalayas, and it is said that from there the The Nagas in the "celestial realm", i.e., the stars and
Nagas wage war on other human subter- are believed to have planets, or beneath the surface of the Earth.
raneans from the subsurface kingdoms of They, too, were said to possess a "magical
Agharta and Shambala. an affinity with water, pearl" in their foreheada "mystical" or
Patala is believed by millions of Hindus to divine eye or source of power. Like the
this day to have an entrance in the Well
and the entrances to Nagas, some of the entrances to their
of Sheshna in Benares. According to their underground palaces or kingdoms could be found
herpetologist and author Sherman A. beneath lakes and rivers or behind
Minton in his book, Venomous Reptiles, palaces are said to be waterfalls. Almost always, such
this entrance is very real, having 40 hidden often at the entrances were well hidden from the
steps which descend into a circular intrusive eyes or feet of mortal men
depression and then terminate at a bottom of wells, deep and women. One such entrance to the
closed stone door covered in bas-relief lakes and rivers. Chinese underworld was said to be in
cobras. In Tibet, there is a major mysti- the "Eastern Mountain" of Taishan,
cal shrine, also called Patala, which is near Qufu province. This entrance to
said by the people there to sit atop an They are described as the Chinese Hell was guarded by sav-
ancient cavern and tunnel system which a very advanced race age demons called Men Shen, often
reaches throughout the Asian continent depicted as warriors wearing fierce,
and possibly beyond. or species with a animalistic masks or faces.
The Nagas are believed to have an There was also interaction between
affinity with water, and the entrances to their
highly developed the Lords of Hell, as they were known, and
underground palaces are said to be hidden technology. the Dragon Kings. The four Hell Kings,
often at the bottom of wells, deep lakes and called Yan Luo or Yen Wang (possibly
rivers. They are described as a very derived from the Hindu death god, Yama),
advanced race or species with a highly devel- ruled over a vast region consisting of 18
oped technology. Among their many devices are "death rays" and levels or locales. In one tale, a Dragon King is robbed by an
vimanaflying, disc-shaped aerial craft which are described at extremely clever and human-like Monkey, who is similar in many
length in many ancient Vedic texts including the Bhagavad-gita respects to the Hindu Hanuman (who in turn came into conflict
and the Ramayana. The Nagas are also believed to harbour a dis- with the Rakshasas of the underworld in the Ramayana). Enkidu
dain for human beings, whom they are said to abduct, torture, also comes to mind in this tale. The Dragon King calls on the
interbreed with and even eat. The interbreeding has supposedly help of the Yan Luo, who are in turn bested by Monkey as well.
led to a wide variety of forms, ranging from completely reptilian The 18 regions of the Chinese netherworld are bureaucratic,
tedious systems or civilisations and an
apparent mixture of Taoist and Buddhist
ideas, with a strong influence from the
latter.
The Japanese Hell is even more of an
amalgam of different traditions, as it incor-
porates Chinese, Hindu and Buddhist char-
acteristics into an earlier, animistic Shinto
system. Emma-Hoo (perhaps from Yama-
Raja) is the king of Jigoku, an eight-levelled
region of fire and ice. Jigoku is filled with
Oni, or demons, which have the heads of
oxen or horses but humanoid bodies.
Japan also has other cavern-dwellers who
come out upon occasion. The bird-headed
reptilian goblins, the Tengu, dwell in moun-
tainous regions and mostly come out by
night. They are experts in the use of the
A reptilian humanoid in the underworld weapons which are in modern times associ-
ated with ninjitsu. According to legend, the

146 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

Tengu trained Minamoto Yoshitsune, a famed Samurai swords- homes were hidden in inaccessible mountainsides and other
man of the late 12th century, when he was an exiled boy on the remote locations.
run from his enemies. The Tengu are almost identical in descrip- The Scandinavian and Germanic peoples also believed in the
tion to the Utukku of Sumerian myth. Huldre, the "hidden folk", or Elves. The Huldre domain was a
Other beings are the Kappa, a semi- luminous cavern realm called
aquatic and totally reptilian-looking Alfheim. From Alfheim they would
humanoid dwarf, the "ugly girls of venture forth to cajole, abduct or
hell" and sundry other shapeshifting seduce human beings. Other beings
entities who dwell underground or were the Kobolds, or mine dwarves,
under houses. The "fox people" are More mysterious were the perhaps a variant of the Norse
among the latter, often taking human Svartalf.
form and delighting in abduction and dwarves, a race (or races) of Another type was the Tusse, a
seduction of mortals. stunted, powerful craftsmen variant of elf who lived close to
The underworld of ancient Egypt humans, usually beneath or close to a
has many things in common with its and weapons-smiths. farmstead. The primary interest of
Mesopotamian counterpart. Called the Huldre elf-folk, which could be
the Tuat or Duat, it was ruled by the said to apply to all the Germanic
god of the dead, Osiris, the counter- types, seems to have been procre-
part of Sumer's Nergal. It is the ser- ation with human beings for the pur-
vants of Osiris, however, who are of pose of maintaining genetic diversi-
concern here. There was the jackal-headed god Khentimentiu and ty. Like the trolls and dwarves, the elves seemed to dislike bright
also Anubis, both gods of arcane knowledge, embalming and sunlight, but may have had more tolerance than their troll and
other sciences. The god of knowledge, Thoth, was also a regular dwarf cousins as they were sometimes seen at dawn, twilight or
in the Tuat; he had a humanoid form with the head of a baboon dusk, or by day in deeply shadowed valleys or mountain chasms.
(but very canine in appearance). All three of these deities bear a Huldre elves in particular are said to have dwelt beneath mounds
strong resemblance to the Sumerian Pazuzu. and hills which were in closer proximity to human habitations, as
There is also a parallel in the Ushabtiu, originally conceived as trolls did more rarely. The elves took a regular interest in human
artificial, animated and robotic servants who were very similar to affairsweddings, births and deaths (bloodlines?), the success of
the Gala, or Galatur, of the Sumerian underworld. Like the Gala, crops and livestock and so forthbut only for their own selfish
the Ushabtiu could be dispatched to punish or abduct an
ordinary mortal or even the Pharaoh himself. These beings
were represented in Egyptian burials by small statues of the
same name, mimicking the supernatural servants of Osiris
and hopefully providing a retinue of retainers and slaves for
the deceased.
Another being with familiar characteristics was Ammut,
a blend of crocodile, lion and dog. But possibly the most
feared being to haunt the underworld was the god of chaos
and strife, Set or Seth, who attempted to mount a coup
d'tat against his brother, Osiris. Set is often considered to
be the Egyptian counterpart of the Judaeo-Christian
personality known as Satan, his appearance both canine and
reptilian with a human form but animalistic head, long-
snouted and/or muzzled. The hugest dragon of the Tuat,
however, was the gigantic serpent Apophis, very similar to
Nidhoggr or Jormungand from the Norse underworldsa
monstrous serpent which brought fear even to the gods.

2. The West
Moving into Europe and Scandinavia, the mythical sub-
terraneans became less distant and more immediate, inter-
acting with the common folk on a much more regular basis.
Scandinavians had their trolls and giants or Jotuns, also
called Etins, who were great granitic beings of immense
physical power and sometimes hairy of form. More myste-
rious were the dwarves, a race (or races) of stunted, power-
ful craftsmen and weapons-smiths. One race of dwarves
was from Svartalfheim, the Land of the Dark Elves, a cav-
ern world in its own right. Some of the Svartalf dwarf-kind
lived in Nifleheim, the Land of the Dead. Along with the
savage and man-eating trolls, the dwarves would turn to
stone, into toads or otherwise die if struck by the direct rays A hero fighting a scaled humanoid creature similar to a
of the Sun. More often than not, the entrances to their Greek gorgon. Note the creature's "third eye".

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 147

interests. They seemed to be overly concerned with genetic and had the entrances to their subterranean homes at the bottom of
biological diversity, and they pilfered livestock, crops and human lakes. To remove all doubt as to their relationship with Norse
genes via theft or cross-species liaison whenever they saw fit to hidden-folk and Indian Nagas alike, they shunned the sunlight and
do so. The elves are generally depicted as extremely fair-haired often seemed interested in crossbreeding their own bloodlines with
and fair-skinned. those of human beings, or even in crossbreeding their "livestock"
Dragons were also said to live deep in the Earth, as recounted in or fairy cattle, horses, hounds and so forth with the surface species
the Anglo-Saxon (Germanic) saga of Beowulf. The monster which were most compatible. The goblin-dwarf Rumpelstiltskin,
Grendel was a hairy, scaled fiend, a Naga in his lust to have the human baby and its
troll which later British traditions would call genetic bounty, is another example of this in
a "goblin" and modern cryptozoologists German folklore.
would term a "hairy humanoid". The term Of particular interest are the Tuatha de
Pazuzu would probably have been just as Danaan of Ireland, the People of the Goddess
appropriate for Grendel. Dragons were the Danu, also called the Sidhe. Originally an
special guardians of "buried treasure"; that is, Dragons were the aristocratic warrior race of heroic proportion,
buried knowledge or technology, much special guardians of they dwindled in size after retreating
of it often made by the powers of the underground to become the Daoine Sidhe
subterranean dwarves. The European "buried treasure"; (Theena Shee) or diminutive faeries of
dragon had a nastier disposition than his that is, buried Irish folklore.
oriental counterpart, or perhaps he came Most of the "gentry" or aristocratic
into conflict with a group of people who knowledge or trooping faeries are said to be of this
entertained different philosophical ideals
when it came to living in fear of man-
technology, type. Like the Scandinavian elves, they
are depicted as particularly fair of
eating entities; but whatever the case, much of it often complexion and hair. According to Lady
like his Eastern cousins he had a rela- made by the powers Wilde in Ancient Legends of Ireland
tionship with both underground caverns (Ward & Downey, London, 1887), "they
and deep bodies of water. of the subterranean are categorised as 'cave fairies'". In
England, Scotland, Wales and Ireland
have rich traditions of under-earth
dwarves. addition to their now familiar practice of
abduction of and hybridisation with
dwellers, with many similarities or even surface humans, their name Tuatha ("tribe" or
common origins between them. Like the "people") de Danaan holds a strong
Norse/Germanic variants, the "fairies" resemblance to the Egyptian name for the
goblins, trows, knockers, brownies, underworld: the Tuat.
leprechauns, Sidhe (shee), Tylwyth teg It is generally thought that the term "fairy"
(terlooeth teig), and numerous other categories of humanoid or "faerie" has its origin in the earlier French term fay or the Latin
beingswere fair or foul, malevolent or kind (actually, fatae, but the possibility of an older origin, as hinted at by the
indifferent), making their homes almost without exception beneath Tuat/Tuatha connection, may in fact bear further examinationfor
the ground. Mounds, hills, ruins, ancient raths and hill-forts, did not the "Pharaohs" believe that they would journey through the
mountains, cliffs and even cities of great age were said to serve as Tuat on the way to their places in eternity?
the rooftops of their palaces. Like the Nagas and dragons, some The hills and glens of Ireland are also said to hide the remnants
of at least three vanquished races: the Firbolgs, the
Fomorians and the Nemedians. All are ancient ene-
mies of the Tuatha de Danaan and were driven under-
ground by the latter in the distant past, where they
then dwindled in size (lack of genetic diversity?) at an
even earlier time than did their conquerors. The
Fomors and the Firbolgs are probably the origin-race
of many of the bogeys and pookas (bucas), goblins
and hobgoblins, Scottish trows and other malevolent,
sometimes shapeshifting beings which seem to bear
strong resemblance to the Scandinavian trolls, being
perhaps a smaller variant. The etymological connec-
tion between "trows" and "trolls" is obvious, and
reflects the sequence of both legendary and historical
migrations to the British Isles as well as the wars
between each newcomer group and the then-
ensconced one.
Each group of faeries and goblins can be viewed as
the dethroned exiled gods of an earlier defeated
human culture. The question is, what or who were
these "gods" which still exist in the popular imagina-
tion today? Were they symbolic pantheons or arche-
Two examples of Utukku (Djinn or Genii), dispatched from the Ki-Gal types, or living beings who pre-dated man on this
to the surface world. planet?

148 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

3. The New World see these as subsequent cavern worlds, each one lower than the
Native American cultures have similar beliefs in an extensive, next and each one eventually abandoned and destroyed in turn.
layered realm of caverns which is hidden beneath their feet. This While still in the murky "third world", the Hopi ancestors came
murky world is believed to be inhabited by both human and into contact with the mysterious "ant people", an ectomorphic race
humanoid beings and by a variety of monsters and demons. or species which greatly resembles the Gala of Sumerian myth, and
Most tribes or nations have their own traditions of subterranean at some point they also came into conflict with the "serpent
"little people", as well as other motifs people". Like other tribes, their underworld
including reptilian or serpent-like humanoid mythos is filled with cataclysms and floods.
beings. In addition to this, many tribes At least one of their previous worlds was said
believe that they themselves emerged from a to have been "in the east". Combined with
mythical underworld ages before. the flood element, this legend is very similar
The Mescalero Apache have many of to Apache and Aztec traditions.
these beliefs. One of their oldest sacred tra- The underworld The Choctaw (Cha'ta) people of
ditions states that they came from the Mississippi also have a myth of under-
Old Red Fire Land before the Great
dwellers were a ground origins. They believe that their
Flood. This land is said to have been in mixture of human, ancestors emerged from the Nanih
the distant eastern (Atlantic) sea but Waiya cave mound, a 50-foot-tall nat-
was destroyed by a combination of del-
reptilian and other ural geological formation which is hid-
uge and volcanic cataclysms. Escaping animal characteristics, den in a swampy forest area, approxi-
through "great caverns" and tunnel sys- mately one-and-a-half miles east of a
tems, the ancestors of the Apache came and the rain-god Chac better-known artificial mound and
to high mountain lands far to the south, was a long-nosed, tourist site. The hill has several natural
where they built new cities. A series of openings, some of which have been
misfortunes there, however, eventually fanged, humanoid "sealed up" (the Park Service seems to
drove them northward. creature very similar have no good explanation for this), and
This legend is nearly identical to the it is said by the Choctaw to be the
origin story as related in the Chilam to the Egyptian entrance to a vast underground realm.
Bilaam of the Maya, and brings to god Set. One legend has it that in ancient
mind both Mayan and Aztec origin myths. times the Choctaw were invaded by a race of
The Aztecs say that they originated in a land red- and blond-haired, white-skinned giants
called Aztlan, obviously synonymous with who bore "sharp clubs" (swords?) and axes
Atlan or Atlantis, the destruction of which and wore an extra, thick skin (chain or
they also escaped. After this, they ended up leather mail?) which made them impervious
in a cavern world called Chicomoztoc, or the to arrow, spear and warclub. Add the touch
Seven Cavern Cities of Gold, where they lived for some time that some of these Nahullo, or giants, had "horns", and these
before emerging again into the surface world. white invaders sound suspiciously like wandering Norsemen.
In addition to believing in a vast, nine-layered underworld filled Whatever their origin or identity might have been, these invaders
with strange beings, the chief god of the Maya, called Itzamna drove the Choctaw into hiding.
(meaning "iguana house"), was depicted as an anthropomorphic The world beneath the cave mound where the Choctaw hid was
lizard, snake, cayman or dragon. The underworld dwellers were a a large series of caverns through which a river or rivers ran (the
mixture of human, reptilian and other animal characteristics, and
the rain-god Chac was a long-nosed, fanged, humanoid creature
very similar to the Egyptian god Set.
The underworld, called Xibalba, is the location of most of the
action in the Popol Vuh, a priestly epic of the Maya. In the Popol
Vuh, two semi-divine brothers, Hunapuh and Xbalanque, have to
journey into a realm of horrors beneath the earth in order to defeat
those who are the enemies of their father and his family and who
threaten their own ascendancy to power. In Xibalba, they come
into conflict with Zipacna (a crocodile-headed monster), Seven
Macaw (a bird-headed creature), the maker of earthquakes, and
other familiar forms. An interesting event occurs when the
vengeance-seeking brothers devise a way to pick out the 12 lords
of Xibalba from identical "mannikins" or robotic Ushabti-like fig-
ures, so as to destroy the lords of the underworld. The twins
eventually defeat their rivals and take over the rulership them-
selves, bringing an end to human sacrifice as part of the deal.
These events preceded and made possible the "modern" epoch of
time.
The Hopi of the southwest desert, descendants of the mysterious
Anasazi people, have an equally strange tradition. They believe
that as a people they migrated from a series of previously extant
"worlds"usually interpreted as "ages" or "epochs", but they also Tengu, Japanese bird-headed (reptilian) humanoids

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 149

Nanih Waiya cave mound sits squarely at the headwaters of the His pointed ears only accentuate his reptilian appearance.
Pearl River). Some traditions indicate that it went on to connect Another variant is the Nalusa Chito, or "big black being", who
to other "worlds" or underground places. Staying underground emerges from underground dens to capture women and children
for many generations, the Choctaw emerged to wage a form of presumably for supper. This abduction scenario is by now a
guerrilla warfare on their enemies, eventually winning by using familiar one and is very similar to the abduction and changeling
darts coated with a poison made from mushrooms found in the accounts of Celtic and Scandinavian traditions which often
caverns. Victorious, they emerged again into the sunlit world. describe abductions for the purposes of maintaining genetic
One tradition holds that this emergence of a generation of peo- diversity. The goblin Ho'koklonote'she is a shapeshifting creature
ple born underground is the basis for the mound origin myth, and believed to haunt the region, and is very similar to the Pooka or
that the Choctaw had in fact arrived centuries Buca of the British Isles. So are the Nalusa
earlier after leaving a "sunken land" which twins, for that matter.
had foundered in a distant western ocean. As has been demonstrated, many
After many wanderings and travails, they similarities or perhaps identical descriptions
arrived in the southeast where they found the exist for the underworld inhabitants of myth
natural cavern mound which would later and folklore.
serve as a place of refuge. But other This underlying cohesion may have
Choctaw beliefs dispute this, claiming resulted from an "archetypal stew"
that not just the Choctaw but the which long simmered in the
Muskogee, Cherokee and Chickasaw One tradition holds imaginations of men and women; and as
peoples emerged from the mound as
well, having all been one people in the
that this emergence of will be demonstrated in the next section,
this has resulted in some very
underworld. a generation of people interesting and imaginative works of
Today the Choctaw still believe that a born underground is fiction.
variety of strange supernatural beings
either inhabit the cave mound or dwell the basis for the About the Author:
in the wooded hills that surround it. One Wm Michael Mott is the Creative
of these is the Shampe, a hair-covered,
mound origin myth... Director for a high-performance US
manlike giant who has a terrible odour software company. He is also a free-
lance artist and writer of both fiction
and stays underground during the day.
and non-fiction. He has worked as an
The Shampe is a sort of Sasquatch, but artist/designer for Fortune 500 companies
the underworld connection is there. Also and for a variety of book and magazine pub-
present are the Kawana-kasha (Kowi lishers. His artwork has appeared in publica-
Anukasha), also called Bohpoli ("stone- tions such as Computer Graphics World
thrower"), a type of supernatural and Magazine, Computer Artist, IEEE Computer
mercurial dwarf living within not just the Graphics and Applications, Dragon
woods of Mississippi but within the cave mound itself. Like the Magazine, UFO Magazine and others. He's created award-win-
Norse dwarves, they are hoarders of vast knowledge. ning artwork and graphic design for mass-market book covers,
The mound is also the home of "giant serpents" and perhaps a posters, brochures, packaging, CD-ROM covers and art collections
host of other beings. Among the latter is the Nalusa Falaya, or as well as for digital/web-based media. His artwork has been fea-
tured in the exhibition In Dreams Awake: Art of Fantasy at the
"long black being", who is humanoid yet slides on his stomach
Olympia and York Gallery in 1988, at the 1987 World Fantasy
"like a snake". Con and in other exhibits.
Mott's satirical fantasy novels, Pulsifer: A
Fable and Land of Ice, A Velvet Knife, are
published in electronic form by SoftBook
Press/Gemstar, (www.softbook.com) and
will soon also be available from the author
in a deluxe illustrated version on CD-ROM.
The first of a series of illustrated short stories
appeared in September 2000 as a chapbook
from Undaunted Press (www.undaunted-
press. com).
Mott has been researching Fortean and
paranormal topics for over 20 years and has
only recently decided to put the results of
this research into written form, the result
being the graphically rich book and CD-
ROM, Caverns, Cauldrons, and Concealed
Creatures (available from http://www.hid-
denmysteries.com). Wm Michael Mott can
be contacted by e-mail at
mottimorph@earthlink.net.

Editor's Note:
Examples of Egyptian underworld deities, the jackal-headed Anubis and Ammut See page 160 for the bibliography.

150 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 T HE D EEP D WELLERS
The subterranean
dwellers of various
ancient religious
and mythical
traditions have
parallels with the
underworld beings
of modern-day
accounts.
Part 2 of 3
by Wm Michael Mott 2000
Email: mottimorph@earthlink.net
Website:
http://www.hollowplanets.com/
journal/J0002TheDeepDwellers.asp
STRANGE Times 2006
MODERN FORTEAN AND CRYPTOZOOLOGICAL CONNECTIONS
W
ith the advent of the "scientific century", i.e., the 20th, occurrences which in
earlier times would have been deemed "magical", demonic or the work of
faeries, gods or witches were given descriptions or names which downplayed
their inexplicable nature and sought to fit them somehow into a
comprehensible, "modern" world view.
The problem then was, and continues to be, that such anomalous phenomena have
defied the most rational, sceptical and "scientific" explanations. Also termed "Fortean"
events, after anomaly researcher and writer Charles Fort, these occurrences have continu-
ally thrown a philosophical monkey-wrench into the cherished machinery of scientific
dogma. In other words, science has no explanation for these events or discoveries, so it
largely ignores, ridicules or dismisses them out of hand.
There is no doubt that many of these phenomena are genuine, and for now are beyond
the ability of the currently dominant science belief system to explain. This brings to the
fore the first category of research (outlined in part one), which may tie in very closely
with "what has gone before".
CRYPTIDS AND MYSTERY CREATURES
"Cryptozoology" is a term which was coined by Belgian biologist Bernard Heuvelmans
to designate a field of study concerned with unknown creatures or animals, also referred
to as "cryptids" ("hidden" animals). For the purposes of this study, the term "cryptid" will
not be used to designate known or suspected known animals which are simply "out of
place" or out of their customary environment; it will be reserved for those creatures which
are truly "unknown".
The comings and goings of such creatures, their sudden appearances in remote, rural or
densely populated areas and their equally sudden disappearances with scarcely a trace left
behind have long befuddled researchers in the field of cryptozoology. With a careful
examination of specific unknown animals or entities and their habitats, interesting
connections to the ancient traditions are revealed.
1. Lake Monsters and Sea Serpents
Many freshwater lakes around the world have longstanding traditions of "lake monsters"
of various types, ranging from humped or sinuous, scaled or plated, to sporting "elephant-
like" hide and "horselike" manes of hair. Most such creatures appear sporadically, often in
high mountain lakes or large isolated lakes of great depth with little or no access to the sea.
Questions which have yet to be answered include:
1. How do such creatures maintain a breeding population of sufficient numbers to pro-
vide genetic diversity in relatively closed environments?
2. How do these populations, their bodies being of immense size, manage both to feed
themselves and maintain a high core temperature, usually in cold waters with limited food
resources?
3. What is the relationship of "lake monsters" to "sea serpents"?
4. If migratory, how do large populations of such creatures travel from lake to lake or
from lake to ocean and ocean to lake?
Without a doubt, the most well known of such beasts is the "monster" of Loch Ness, a
large deep lake in the Highlands of Scotland. Loch Ness is connected to the sea by the
River Ness, yet sightings have only very rarely taken place in or at the river. The loch
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 151
itself, like many in Scotland, Ireland, Scandinavia and North 2. Hairy Humanoids
America, has a longstanding tradition and reputation for being Many eyewitness accounts of hair-covered humanoids have
haunted by "kelpies", or shapeshifting, horse-headed, serpentine been reported and documented over the years by people from a
entities. These creatures are often described as having horselike wide range of backgrounds and professions. While Bigfoot or
heads and manes, long serpentine necks and huge humped bodies Sasquatch is the type whose description is known to most people,
with four flippers. perhaps equalled by the Yeti of the Himalayas (the "Abominable
Given the frigid water conditions at the loch (42F or 5.5C] on Snowman"), the literature would indicate that not only are these
average) and the mammalian characteristics of the creatures, it living flesh-and-blood creatures, but they come in a wide variety
stands to reason that they are either mammals or some sort of of physical configurations. Yet, like the lake monsters, they seem
endothermic (warm-blooded) plesiosaur descendants, or dinosaur to "pop in and out" of our surface world reality and are amazingly
descendants (many of the theropod dinosaurs were endothermic, difficult to track for creatures so large.
as are their descendants, the birds). Given the additional fact that In addition to the towering, hirsute Bigfoot form, witnesses
they sometimes sport horns or "ossicorns" like those of a giraffe, have reported: stunted, clawed versions with savage dispositions;
the mammalian hypothesis (descendants of zeuglodons, primitive black "winged" varieties (the Ixals of Mexico); screeching horrors
whales) may be the best bet. with shaggy, hair-covered faces; gigantic varieties which would
The questions of where they originate, where they go when they dwarf Sasquatch (like the Yeren of China); and more. In addition
vanish and how they maintain a stable diet still remain. A look at to the "rotten egg" or "skunk-like" odour which often accompa-
the structure of Loch Ness provides some clues. nies most of these forms (as it does with Bigfoot, the Shampe of
It has been determined that at some point in the distant past, the Choctaw Indians and the Florida "skunk ape"), many sightings
Loch Ness was an arm of the sea. Now it is seldom less than 300 and encounters have taken place in or near caves or cavernous
feet (91.4 m) deep and routinely surpasses 400 feet (121.9 m) in regions as well as abandoned mines and other man-made tunnels
depth. The bottom of the lake runs up in many instances to meet or potential entrances to unknown, underground areas.
underwater cliffs and the submerged sides of the mountains which Consider the underworld-exploring Enkidu, the hell-plumbing
surround the loch. Sonar has indicated Chinese monkey, the hairy
that the bases of these cliffs are Scandinavian trolls and the fanged,
honeycombed in places with very large baboon- or dog-headed monsters of
caverns of undetermined depth and Sumer, Egypt and other cultures, and a
extent. Could these lead to even more
vast underground caverns under the
Is there a connection between connection again becomes clear.
These creatures come out into our
mountains, some containing air and the reptilian yet mammalian world, usually by night, and then
eventually linking to other lakes and to retreat into an "invisible" cavern or
the sea? This would certainly provide a
"dragons" of large cold lakes subterranean world about which only
feasible explanation for the mysterious and the vast cavern systems they know, vanishing "without a
movements and disappearances of these trace". This does not have a connota-
creatures, and perhaps to the question of that may lie beneath them? tion of the supernatural but the conno-
their diet, which may be also that of an tation of a natural phenomenon and is
ocean-going animal or "sea serpent". a logical conclusion.
Perhaps the lakes and lochs around Not only does this indicate an under-
the world which boast of such creatures world connection, but it also indicates
are simply places to breed and spawn in relative safety from the an intelligent "covering" of tracks and evidence which is beyond
large predators of the oceans. the abilities of ordinary animals and can only be equated to the
When it is taken into account that many other "vortex-haunted" premeditated and well-planned actions of human beingsor of
lakes around the world have been found to have deep caverns something at least as clever. It also begs the question of, at some
which account for their "vortices" (created by the suction of even level, possible human involvement of a covert nature in not only
larger water-filled caverns and the movement of huge volumes of "hairy humanoid" matters but in other, more bizarre, cryptid
water), the whole matter shifts into perspective. accounts.
Such vortex-sporting, cavern-hiding lakes include Lake St Jean And disinformationin the form of ridicule, evidence-
and Blue Sea Lake in Canada (the latter home to Misiganebic, a tampering or intentional hoaxingmay also come into play at
"horse-headed" dragon), as well as Pohenegamook, Massawippa, times. If this does occur, it does not automatically disqualify the
Memphremagog, and on and on. Loch Ness and the Walchensee phenomenon as a genuine one. It only complicates matters by
in Bavaria, among others, are said to connect to the sea in similar introducing what may be the intended element into the equation,
fashion. that element being obfuscation.
Given the distance of some of these bodies of water from the
ocean, it is not unreasonable to assume that many deep aquifers 3. "El Chupacabras" and Other "Hybrid" Beings
are actually tributaries or parts of vast subterranean oceans of Puerto Rico is a small island, only about 150 miles long by 45
fresh water which may now be in danger of depletion by human miles wide (241.4 by 72.4 km), yet it has experienced enough
usage from the surface. paranormal and cryptid activity in its history to be a continent.
Is there a connection between the reptilian yet mammalian The native Taino, an Arawak tribe of the West Indies, feared
"dragons" of large cold lakes and the vast cavern systems that creatures like the Araidai, a jungle goblin, and Konokokuyuha, a
may lie beneath them? The evidence would seem to indicate that type of evil dwarf. The island has long been a haunt of hairy
this is the case. The cryptid dragon, with his underground lairs humanoids, mysterious winged creatures (some described as
and underwater entrances to them, is apparently as active and "pterodactyls") and unidentified flying objects (UFOs), with the
secretive as the Chinese and Japanese versions ever were. entire human population in some areas at times living in terror.

152 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 During 1975, Puerto Rico was stricken by a mysterious wave of the animal mutilations? Sometimes only blood would be taken;
livestock mutilations accompanied by UFO sightings. Many other times, specific organs like livers would be missing. It should
times, animals were drained of blood and left like emptied wine- be noted that blood and the "meaty organs" were the very items
skins for investigators to puzzle over. Twenty years later, in offered to the dark gods of antiquity in the ancient Middle East and
1995, things turned really weird. even in pre-Columbian America. The description of El
The mutilations and blood-drainings returned with a vengeance, Chupacabras is very reminiscent of that of the Sumerian Utukku or
and over a two-year period the "culprit" was seen or encountered even the Gala and the Egyptian Ushabtiucreated as "artificial"
first-hand by dozens of witnesses. Termed "El Chupacabras", or life-forms (yet no less alive) to do the bidding of the Lords of the
"The Goat-sucker", the creature seemed like something out of a Underworld. Maybe times are tough in the subterranean realms
cartoonist's nightmare. It was described as four to five feet tall, and the "gods" have taken to stealing the substances which are no
generally reptilian in appearance, with a kangaroo-like hip or longer offered to themor could it be that the Nagas are coming
haunch structure, spines along a back-ridge and a humanoid head out to play?
with protruding, incandescent eyes reminiscent of descriptions of The Utukku are reptilian in aspect, vaguely humanoid and
the "grey aliens" of ufology. Sometimes the creatures would be slightly "winged", just like El Chupacabras. Again we are
grey-green and hairless; sometimes they would have flat black or reminded of the chimerical, genetic hybrids mentioned in the
grey fur. With folding flaps of skin under their arms which Book of Enoch, which were created by the Nefilim (the Sumerian
connected to their rib cages, they could purportedly glide like Annunaki and Igigi) before the Deluge when they "sinned against
flying squirrels or fly outright, and they had birds, wild animals, reptiles and fish", creat-
three-pronged retractable mouth-organs used ing hybrid creatures to serve them. These
for slicing, dicing and sucking blood and monstrosities also terrorised mankindas the
fluids. people of Puerto Rico might verify!
At first it was thought that the sightings Perhaps, instead of "looking skyward" for
were surely an elaborate hoax, or simply hys- "alien invaders", we should start looking
teria, until the sheer number of incidents and
reports reached overwhelming proportions.
During 1975, downward for ancient parasites which are
more or less native to our planet.
Hair was obtained from one mutilation site Puerto Rico was stricken
and analysed by a Japanese lab; while by a mysterious wave 4.Creatures Other Forms
deemed to be "similar to the hair of a wolf", it similar in description to El
was labelled as coming from an animal which of livestock mutilations Chupacabras have been seen around the
was "unknown". accompanied by world, ranging from reptilian humanoids (the
The creature was a typical cryptid in some "Loveland Frog", "Lizard Man", etc.); "little
respects, seemingly popping in and out UFO sightings. people" of a wide variety of descrip-
of existence at a moment's notice and tions; bulbous-headed and bug-eyed,
generating fear and confusion all over stick-thin grey humanoids; and winged
the island. From Puerto Rico, the Twenty years later, anthropomorphic forms. Such appear-
Chupacabras events quickly spread to ances, or periods of intense "cryptid" or
the rest of Latin America, including
in 1995, things turned "alien" activity, are often hallmarked by
Mexico, South Florida and the desert really weird. animal mutilations, which involve pre-
southwest of the United States. This cise (even surgically precise), selective
marked it as a distinctly cultural phe- organ removal and blood-draining, or
nomenon (Hispanic), but that by no else by mass disappearances of pets and
means indicates that it was not genuine- livestock.
ly taking place. These sightings cannot all be dis-
A connection was soon suspected in missed as hallucinations or hoaxes, par-
Puerto Rico between El Chupacabras and ticularly the sighting reports which con-
the mountainous rainforested region of sist of several witnesses' testimony.
El Yunque, which is honeycombed with mostly unexplored cavern The sheer number of sightings is too great for them to be so easily
systems. In fact, caverns underlie much of the island. Several dismissed, and the number of unexplained animal mutilations and
witnesses reported seeing the creature or creatures fleeing to the El disappearances which correspond with these "flaps" would seem
Yunque region when discovered or pursued. Soon, other parts of to support this.
the Spanish-speaking world were reaching similar conclusions. Sometimes these creatures are confronted with violent force,
And, like the demons of old, an acrid, debilitating, foul odour often yet almost always they resound "as if hollow" and are otherwise
accompanied the visits of the beast. impervious to human weaponryas in the case of the
One brave soul, Jesus Sanchez, was victimised repeatedly, his "Hopkinsville Goblins" of Kentucky, which were shot by the wit-
rabbits being drained of blood. Finally, one morning at 4.00 am nesses. "Mothman" of West Virginia, a tall, winged humanoid
he surprised the invader by blinding it with a bright light. When it who haunted the region of Point Pleasantparticularly an old
rushed to escape, he struck it with a macheteonly to discover military storage area which had "underground bunkers"made
that "the blow sounded as if it had hit a drum". The creature, mechanical whirring sounds as it flew and did not flap its wings at
unscathed, made its disappearance as usual. all. The now ubiquitous "grey aliens" have been described as
What is to be made of a report like this? How can a creature "mechanical" in their motions, moving "stiffly" or "jerkily". This
both "have hair" yet "sound like a drum" when struck (or shot, for will be examined again shortly, but all of these beg an obvious
that matter) and escape unharmed? question.
And why the almost methodical and indeed selective nature of Are all of these "creatures" simply different makes and models

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 153

of Utukku or Galatur? Are they the Golems and the Ushabtiu of collecting organs, blood or genetic materialnot to mention a
old, and are they completely mechanical and artificially general aversion to bright daylight or other bright lights, more
intelligentor are they a melding of living genetics and non- often than notthe cryptid and "monster" scenario is brought into
living technology? Human beings are only now starting to create sharper focus. This multitude of beings is not from "elsewhere";
such technologies, but they do exist. What technology might be the odds for that are simply too great, given the variety of forms
amassed through a simple cumulative process by an earlier, encountered and taking into account the already considerable
prehuman civilised species with hundreds of thousands or even genetic diversity that we know about which has sprung from the
millions of years of history behind it? biosphere of the Earth.
The entity known as Mothman, whose reign of terror lasted for The scientific principle known as "Occam's Razor" would
thirteen months during 1967 and 1968 (as chronicled so well by indicate that, given the choice between a staggering variety of
John A. Keel in The Mothman Prophecies), made his visits to beings from a staggering variety of worlds lost in interstellar space,
West Virginia, which it should be noted is one of the most dense- or a naturally (or even artificially) diverse varieties of life-form
ly cavernous areas of North America. So is Kentucky, for that which have sprung from one ecological system (hence, for
matter, where the Hopkinsville instance, the mostly bipedal, two-
"UFO" entities were encountered. handed, two-legged, two-winged,
The same can be said of many four-flippered configurations, all
areas of New England, which as a variations on the earthly vertebrate
region has been the haunt of "the An unknown welder named template), the latter would have to be
Dover Demon" (a term coined by
cryptozoologist Loren Coleman), Richard S. Shaver told the world the most rational and logical choice
for a theory of origin. No, they are
"lizard men", hairy humanoids, "mad a story which sounded like a coming and going at will from some
gassers" of reptilian aspect, and a
host of other creepy visitors. blend of paranoid-schizophrenic place very near at hand, and the
circumstantial evidence would seem
The New England region is also delusions, hallucinations and to indicate that place to be the hidden
the location of the "Morehedmoodus" bowels of our own planet.
area near East Haddam, Connecticut; bad science fiction.
in this area, the ground shakes and RE-INVENTION, PARANOIA
roars within, as if with "underground AND DECEPTION
tempests" or as if titanic subterranean 1. The Degenerates Below
machinery is at work. This noisy and In December 1943, the pulp maga-
disconcerting phenomenon is known as "the Moodus Noises", and zine Amazing Stories opened a can of worms which would even-
it has yet to be explained by mainstream science, government or tually grow into a controversial storm of accusations, ridicule,
anyone else with a room full of PhDs. denial and resentment.
And of course, neither West Virginia nor New England is An unknown welder named Richard S. Shaver told the world a
excessively far removed from another region which is famed for a story which sounded like a blend of paranoid-schizophrenic delu-
distinctive "cryptid", "demon" or "creature": between both is the sions, hallucinations and bad science fiction. Working with the
Pine Barrens region of New Jersey, home of the infamous "Jersey "assistance" of Ray Palmer, editor of Amazing Stories, Shaver
Devil". began to tell his allegedly "true" tales of deep-cavern civilisations,
This creature not only shares some of the physical characteris- genetically degenerated, technologically advanced troglodytes,
tics of El Chupacabras and Mothman, but in many accounts and an ancient high technology which gave these beings amazing
resembles the winged reptilian forms of the Sumerian Utukku, a powers over the unsuspecting inhabitants of the surface world.
dragon, or a mediaeval cockatrice or basilisk. Strangely, in addition to their "death ray" (laser or
With their elusive dispositions, similar characteristics (among electromagnetic weapon), "thought ray" (telepathy) and illusion
their "group" as well as with ancient forms) and nasty habit of (holographic) "mech" or machines, these new incarnations of the
"deep dweller" concept had
silent, flying ships which
Shaver described as "discs",
which were kept hangared
beneath the Earth's surface and
were used regularly. This was
five years before Kenneth
Arnold's famous "first" sighting
of nine objects over Mt Rainier
in Washington stateobjects
which he referred to as "saucer-
like", hence inadvertently
helping to coin the modern term
"flying saucer".
Additionally, the troglodytes
could produce "solid illusions"
of creatures or objects, even
their disc-like craft, which were
Selected covers of magazines which featured the "true" stories and commentaries of Richard S. Shaver. temporarily physical then

154 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

dissipated or were "turned off". How many
times have UFOs just "disappeared" from
radar screens around the world?
Shaver's underworld was inhabited by two
ancient races which had originally been one,
which he termed "dero", for "detrimental
robot" ("degenerate" would have been more
accurate), and "tero", for "integrative energy
robot" (the "good guys"). According to the
welder-turned-writer, he had not only been
contacted and tormented by the beams of
these beings but he had been "helped" by the
tero in defeating the assaults of the dero and
had actually been in the cavern-world him-
self.
Readers responded to Shaver's accounts in
two ways: they either reviled and ridiculed
him and his "underworld", which was often
depicted as sexually and violently brutal; or
they wrote in with letters of support and A curious "picture rock", one of many images "brought out" by Richard S. Shaver.
accounts of their own, in an effort to corrobo-
rate his stories! Ultimately, "the Shaver Mystery", as it was scient, although she was fooled and eluded upon several occasions
called, drove Ray Palmer from Amazing Stories and into business by her victims. Beginning with standard "poltergeist" activities,
for himself, and generated an uproar (and an income) for both the "spirit" worked its way up to invisibly dealt physical blows
Palmer and Shaver that would last, to some degree, until both of and attacks, and throughout the ordeal, which spanned many
their deaths in the 1970s. years, spoke to, sang for and reviled the Bell family. The activi-
Was Richard Shaver unbalanced and delusional, or was he ties of this entity were witnesses by hundreds of people, including
simply a talented and outrageous storyteller? Or was he telling Andrew Jackson, the seventh President of the United States.
stories which were half truth, half confabulation? In his youth he Only now, in our "modern" age, is it noticed that at first the
had spent some time in a mental hospital, a fact which generated "voice" of the "witch" was booming, hollow and metallic, only
contempt and ridicule from others throughout his life, but later and after considerable practice taking on a regular, well-
wouldn't actual, repeated contact by modulated tone; and the origin of the
such beings as his "dero" push even a thing was said to be in the "Bell Witch
strong mind over the edge and into Shaver claimed that many rocks Cave", a deep and mostly uncharted
partial delusion? "Confabulation" is cavern system that was at that time on
one common reaction which the
and boulders in specific regions the Bell family property. The "witch"
human mind uses as a defence around the world are actually itself claimed that the cave was its
mechanism when it is hiding a great shattered libraries of home, and forbade anyone to enter
traumatic event from full recollection. there.
Regardless of the proportion of ancient crystals, containing Local Native Americans had shunned
truth to fantasy in his accounts, three-dimensional images or the cave and surrounding land as
Shaver's choice of words to describe haunted or cursed, long before the first
his tormentors"robots"is interest- hologram records. white settlers arrived. To this day,
ing. While "fleshly" and possessed of witnesses swear that the still-unplumbed
animalistic lusts, the dero and tero are cavern system is haunted and even
nevertheless "programmed" victims, to a greater or lesser degree, guarded by the same evil being.
of "harmful" or "de" (destructive, degenerate, etc., according to A terrible story, indeed, and sure to engender fear and forebod-
Shaver) thinking. He attributed the degeneration of the subter- ing; perhaps the perfect type of story to make certain that a short
raneans to damaging solar and cosmic radiation (from which they and direct route to some underworld lair, loaded with "special
still hide underground) and to the destructive radiations of their effects" equipment or "mech", is not tried or violated...
own "stim" (sexual and other stimulation) machines. They kidnap Spelunkers and other brave souls have yet to seriously attempt to
surface humans, particularly women, for sexual pleasure (or pro- explore the "Bell Witch Cave" deep cavern system. It looks like
creation?), eat human beings and take great delight in causing the project may have achieved its desired goal of keeping people
mayhem, destruction, confusion and terrifying apparitions (holo- out, after all.
grams) in the surface world. As evidence of his obsession with proving the veracity of his
As an aside and interjection, Shaver's claims of the abilities of stories, Richard S. Shaver was one of the few "contactees" by
dero machinery would explain many additional mysteries which "alien" or nonhuman forces to make an effort to produce physical
have not been examined here so far. To touch on just one exam- evidence. He claimed that many rocks and boulders in specific
ple would be to examine the case of "the Bell Witch" of regions around the world are actually great shattered libraries of
Robertson County, Tennessee, a malevolent and violent entity ancient crystals, containing three-dimensional images or hologram
which terrorised a family in the early 1800s. The Bell Witch, so- records.
called because "she" haunted the Bell family, went to great To prove this point, in later years he took to finding such
lengths to create the illusion that she was omnipresent and omni- "picture rocks" and cutting them open with a rock-saw to reveal

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 155


Continued from page 155
what he said were glimpses of the ancient
records. He would use paint to accentuate
or "bring out" these images, but only
worked along the edges or strata of shapes
which were pre-existing. Some of his
"picture rocks" were in fact quite startling,
depicting humans or human-like beings,
human-animal hybrids, giants, and humans
battling with creatures which look
suspiciously like the Nagas, El Chupacabras
or something similar. In 1975, Ray Palmer
featured many of these pictures, along with
Shaver's commentaries, in The Secret
World.
The forms described by Shaver should be
familiar by now. The derodark elves, or
trolls, or Nagas, or Utukku/Ushabtiuand
the terothe "noble faeries", Tuatha de
Danaan, or "Aryan/Nordic Masters"
have simply manifested in a more contem-
porary, pseudo-scientific form. The Naga
vimana disc-craft are present, and the
abduction and genetic rape motif of all
underworld Nagas/goblins/faeries is pre-
sent as well.
The "treasure of the Nibelungs", or the
hoarded wealth of dragons, has been
156 NEXUS
The Deep Dwellers
replaced by ancient and super-scientific
"mech", a technology which bestows god-
like powers upon its owners. And like the
trolls, goblins, vampires and the rest of the
ages-old underworld crew, these subter-
ranean beings are in hiding from the Sun,
living in mole-like terror of its direct rays.
A relationship between Shaver's under-
world inhabitants and those of the past is
hopefully not so much literal and based in
some terrible reality as it is archetypal and
obvious.
Continued ...
About the Author:
Wm Michael Mott is the Creative Director
for a high-performance US software com-
pany. He is also a freelance artist and
writer of both fiction and non-fiction. He
has worked as an artist/designer for
Fortune 500 companies and for a variety of
book and magazine publishers. His art-
work has appeared in publications such as
Computer Graphics World Magazine,
Computer Artist, IEEE Computer Graphics
and Applications, Dragon Magazine, UFO
Magazine and others. He's created award-
winning artwork and graphic design for
mass-market book covers, posters,
brochures, packaging, CD-ROM covers
www.nexusmagazine.com
and art collections as well as for
digital/web-based media. Mott's artwork
has been featured in the exhibition In
Dreams Awake: Art of Fantasy at the
Olympia and York Gallery in 1988, at the
1987 World Fantasy Con and in other
exhibits.
Mott's satirical fantasy novels, Pulsifer: A
Fable and Land of Ice, A Velvet Knife, are
published electronically by SoftBook
Press/Gemstar (www.softbook.com), and
will soon also be available from the author
in a deluxe illustrated version on CD-
ROM. The first of a series of illustrated
short stories appeared in September 2000
as a chapbook from Undaunted Press
(www.undauntedpress.com).
Mott has been researching Fortean and
paranormal topics for over 20 years and
has only recently decided to put the results
of this research into written form, the result
being the graphically rich book and CD-
ROM, Caverns, Cauldrons, and Concealed
Creatures (available from http://www.hid-
denmysteries.com). Wm Michael Mott
can be contacted by email at motti-
morph@earthlink.net.
Editor's Note:
See pages 159-160 for the bibliography.
STRANGE Times 2006
 T HE D EEP D WELLERS
Age-old stories of
underworld beings
interacting with
humanity have
parallels with
modern-day reports
of abducting aliens
and mysterious Men
in Black.
Part 3 of 3
by Wm Michael Mott 2000
Email: mottimorph@earthlink.net
Website:
http://www.hollowplanets.com/
journal/J0002TheDeepDwellers.asp
STRANGE Times 2006
RE-INVENTION, PARANOIA AND DECEPTION
2. The Masks may change, but the Play's the same.
T
he final three decades of the 20th century have been filled with rumours: con-
spiracy theories about alien abductions, plots for world domination shared
between aliens and secret government, Illuminati cabals and the like. Several
interesting variations on age-old theories have permeated the field of ufology and
conspiracy literature alike, and in many places the two have overlapped and in fact have
completely blurred into one. These latter areas are of particular interest and significance
to the study at hand.
One of the most commonly reported manifestations of "alien invaders" are the EBE
(extraterrestrial biological entities) type, commonly called "greys". These beings are the
variety most often reported in abduction accounts, and they are highly ectomorphic with
scrawny, underdeveloped limbs and bodies, oversized heads and extraordinarily large
black eyes (some abductees have reported these to be actually "reptilian" or "birdlike"
eyes with slit pupils, the "blackness" only a protective artificial film, like sunglasses).
They are from three to five feet in height, averaging around four feet tall.
Again, their very physiology gives away their origins, for large protruding eyes with
large slit pupils and needing an artificial protective covering would be hard to equate with
a race that has mastered, and perhaps been genetically prepared for, interplanetary or
interstellar travel. Outer space is an extremely bright, radiation-filled environment. The
type of eyes described are those of a creature that spends most of its time in the darkness,
as they are designed for optimum light reception. The shaded coverings, for venturing out
into the surface world, are really self-explanatory.
Similarly, their bodies, small and easily manoeuvrable through tight spaces, with small
surface area and a minimum of body-weight, are ideal for an underground environment.
Their method of locomotion, generally described as "shuffling", with "hips moving
strangely" or "sideways", is another indication that they have developed in a relatively
cramped place or even one where tunnels are commonplace. They are often described as
smelling "musty", "like a snake" or "like rotten eggs".
This type of entity allegedly abducts unfortunate human beings and conducts medical or
genetic testing on them, sometimes removing sperm and ova for use in "hybridisation
experiments" or for purposes unknown. The abductions almost always take place under
cover of darkness (doubly helpful to the molesters, since the "harmful" sun has set and
people are drowsy or asleep).
The victim is taken into a UFO (usually disc-shaped or shaped like a child's spinning-
top) for experimentation and also for a form of indoctrination consisting of intense three-
dimensional audiovisual presentations. The primary message of these presentations seems
to deal with a concern over human destruction of the Earth's biosphere and biodiversity
(recall the recurrent "faerie" interest in the same thinga steady supply of genetic
materials). This becomes even more telling when it is recalled that the first underground
atomic tests were concurrent with the resurgence of "witnessed activity" of UFOs on a
previously unprecedented scale. Those tests may have rattled more than a few windows in
the desert!
During the medical aspect of the abduction, local anaesthetics are seldom if ever used,
and the victim is left with a type of post-traumatic stress syndrome which at first is marked
by amnesia and mental distress or unease, sometimes followed by nightmares, self-
imposed social isolation and eventually a total recall of the experience, either through
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 157
natural recovery of memory or through hypnotic regression Island folklore, "little men" who abducted people were sometimes
therapy. referred to as "grey neighbours", and the "greys" also bear a strong
Other common themes emerge as well. The entities are resemblance in head and torso structure to the cryptid El
described by their victims as "drone-like", "robotic", "clinical" Chupacabras. The methodical imps and Djinn that served Satan
and so forth, and are also described as "reptilian", "lizard-like" or and Shaitan come to mind as well, and of course Richard Shaver's
as having reptilian, birdlike or amphibian-like skin texture. "dero" are similar, especially in their use of high technology. The
In many instances, the abduction experience moves to a "cavern Nordics, sometimes seemingly the "enemies" of the grey and
city", "cavern world" or "underground base". It is in these latter reptoid types, are often reported as working side by side with them
subterranean places that "hybrid beings"having "alien", human in the underground facilities or labs, which recalls the fact that the
or other animal characteristicshave been reported as being seen Nagas were said to look "almost human" and reminds us of the
in development, along with cannibalism and the torture of human mercurial dispositions of the aristocratic or Aryan faeries, the light
beings. One such site has been alleged by several researchers and elves/Tuatha de Danaan.
"abductees" as being beneath Archuleta Mesa near Dulce, New Additionally, the apocryphal hybrid offspring of the Nephilim
Mexico. In these prolonged episodes, other beings enter the and humans were described in the Book of Lamech and the
scenesuch as "hybrid" children who are frail, pale and ectomor- Slavonic Book of Enoch as having an extremely Nordic or Aryan
phic but generally human in appearance. Some abductees have appearance, and were also said to have a reptilian patch of skin
even said that these children look "like fairies"! ("badge of priesthood") on their chests or elsewhere.
Other entities are not so harmless, such as a tall "human" type In Celtic Welsh myth, the lord of the underworld of Annwn had
with an aristocratic "Aryan" look; these are a "magical cauldron" that produced an
generally referred to as "Nordics" in the endless supply of warriors for him. Was this
UFO literature, and bear more than a slight an "Earth mother", "primal womb" archetype,
resemblance to the "light elves" and Tuatha or was it instead synonymous with producing
de Danaan of old. Are these the "fairy chil- offspring through gene-splicing, the
dren", hybrids and "changelings", all grown Several authors have "cauldron" actually a test tube?
up and hard at work? published the theory The reptoids or lizard men are familiar as
Another type of entity is more sinister in Nagas, Utukku, Ammut, "dragon kings",
both appearance and attitude, described as a that the reptilians are goblins, trolls and so on. They are also often
"reptilian humanoid", "lizard man" or "rep- masters of illusion and described as smelling like rotten eggs or like
toid" and ranging from five to eight or nine sulphur.
feet in height. These "reptoids" are usually holographic projection Both the reptilians and the greys have in
characterised as being "in charge" of the
other types, but upon occasion are said to
or are physical shape- recent years passed from the UFO research
realm into "conspiracy" literature, where they
report to taller, even stranger entities shifters who are are said to be involved in "controlling
that resemble skeletally thin, giant replacing world leaders, the Earth" or are in the process of
"greys" or even giant "mantids". "taking over".
Normal surface humans, paramilitary government officials Several authors have published the
in nature or appearance, are also seen and public figures as theory that the reptilians are masters of
in these underground areas. illusion and holographic projection or
Another interesting factor is that all an insidious "fifth are physical shape-shifters who are
of the entities described go to great
lengths to convince their captives that
column". replacing world leaders, government
officials and public figures as an
they have come from "far away", from insidious "fifth column". Here again
distant stars, planets and "vibrational are the changelings of European
frequencies" or dimensions. They have folklore, the hologram-utilising dero
come all this distance because they are and the "serpent men", precisely as
"worried about humanity", but they put described by the fiction writer Robert E.
out their heartfelt propaganda as they Howard in his pulp-fiction tales of King
stick a huge needle in a woman's abdomen or up someone's nose Kull. This is by no means a "new idea", revelation or suspicion,
without even a local anaesthetic. but is as ancient as the concept of an underworld itself.
Yet the biology of all the different types or castes of abductors,
as horrific as it might appear to superstitious human eyes, is 3. Men In Black
essentially that of animal forms which are natural to the Earth: This treatise would not be complete without an examination of
mammalian and reptilian. Obviously, it is very important to these another mysterious player from the depths: "Men in Black", or
beings that such a logical connection not be made. If there is even "MIB". These cool cats figure prominently in both UFO and
a shred of truth to UFO abduction accounts, then it is more than conspiracy literature. Thanks to the excellent work of researchers
apparent that the abductors want their victims and humanity at and writers John Keel and the late Jim Keith as well as the work of
large to believe that they are from "somewhere else". While a host of others, many small and seemingly inconsequential facts
humanity looks continually upward at enigmas in the sky, what is have been obtained from witnesses and preserved.
transpiring beneath our very feet? Men in Black seem to fall into two categories: the standard men
Additional folklore and literature parallels are apparent in the in black, who may be actual agents of secret government or
accounts described. The "greys" are identical to the order- military investigation/disinformation groups; and the MIB, who
following, human-abducting, drone-like Galatur and Ushabtiu of Keel indicates are somehow in league with or originating from the
the Sumerian and Egyptian underworld mythologies. In Shetland unseen forces behind the various cryptid or creature sightings as

158 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

well as the UFO phenomenon. It is the latter category, the MIB, surface, the more erratic, disoriented, lethargic or "drunk" they
that has bearing here. seem to become (a side effect of rapid depressurisation, or
These "mystery men" are usually described as of varying height aeroembolism).
and build, but more often than not they are on the thin side. They They have sometimes identified themselves to their unwilling
generally wear dark or black businesslike clothing, dark hats and visitants with cryptic statements, e.g., claiming to be citizens of the
sunglasses (again, the eye protection from the sun!). They are "Nation of the Third Eye"an occult or secret society reference
either olive-skinned and vaguely Oriental or Asiatic, or they are still widely utilised in symbology and ritual today by some
Nordic or Scandinavian in "brotherhoods" of "enlightened"
complexion, hair colour and physique. human beings, but which harks back
From the basic template of these two to the "third eye" of the Nagas or the
forms, strange variations have been
reported: total hairlessness (not even
These "mystery men" are usually "skull pearl" of the Chinese dragons.
Any relationship that this Nation of
having eyebrows or eyelashes); overly described as of varying height the Third Eye might have to modern-
large, protruding eyes (a non-
mammalian trait, for the most part, or
and build, but more often than day secret societies is debatable, but
the parallel exists.
perhaps due to an unaccustomed lack not they are on the thin side. Another clue lies in the fact that
of atmospheric pressure); wheezing They generally wear dark or they arrive at their victims' doorsteps
and other trouble breathing, as if in shiny black cars that are in pristine
unused to earthly (or surface?) air black businesslike clothing, condition, i.e., "like new". The
pressure (aeroembolism); unnatural puzzling thing is that these vehicles
joint movement and locomotion;
dark hats and sunglasses... are almost always decades out of date
"reptilian" or "froglike" cast of skin and sometimes seem to be
texture and facial features; webbed composites of several different
fingers; sulphurous or "metallic" odour; makes of cars (still out of date). To
and a host of additional oddities of physical configuration. remain unravaged by the passage of timeoxidation, dry rot of
Add to all of this the fact that these MIBs are often ignorant or tyres and so forththey would have to be warehoused and
in amazement of the most ordinary surface-world activities maintained in an environment of constant temperature and low
trying to drink gelatin, refusing food and taking a pill instead, humidity, away from weather, sun and extreme changes in
stealing or asking for small common objects (like writing pens) as temperature. Add to this the manner in which both the cars and the
apparently prized souvenirsand they become even less human men suddenly and inexplicably vanish, as if swallowed up by the
through their behaviour. Earth...but by now the premise is obvious. Some caverns are
They often exhibit a strong interest in the sexuality or sexual damp, but many others are exceedingly dry and remain constant in
habits of those they confront; and the longer they remain on the temperature, year round, after a certain depth.

About the Author:
Wm Michael Mott is the Creative Director
for a high-performance US software com-
pany. He is also a freelance artist and
writer of both fiction and non-fiction. He
has worked as an artist/designer for Fortune
500 companies and for a variety of book
and magazine publishers. His artwork has
appeared in publications such as Computer
Graphics World Magazine, Computer
Artist, IEEE Computer Graphics and
Applications, Dragon Magazine, UFO
Magazine and others. He's created award-
winning artwork and graphic design for
mass-market book covers, posters,
brochures, packaging, CD-ROM covers
and art collections as well as for
digital/web-based media. Mott's artwork
has been featured in the exhibition In
Dreams Awake: Art of Fantasy at the
Olympia and York Gallery in 1988, at the
1987 World Fantasy Con and in other
exhibits.
Mott's satirical fantasy novels, Pulsifer: A
Fable and Land of Ice, A Velvet Knife, are
available from the author in a deluxe ver-
sion as The Pulsifer Saga, featuring full-
colour illustrations. The Pulsifer Saga is
now available in HTML format on CD-
ROM from Mottimorphic Publishing Co.,
email mottimorph@earthlink.net. The first
of a series of illustrated short stories
appeared in September 2000 as a chap-
book from Undaunted Press
(www.undauntedpress.com) and can be
found at the website http://www.hollow-
planets.com. Also see the Association of
Science Fiction and Fantasy Artists website,
www.asfa-art.org/Members/MikeMott/
index.html.
Mott has been researching Fortean and
paranormal topics for over 20 years and
has only recently written the graphically
rich book and CD-ROM, Caverns,
Cauldrons, and Concealed Creatures, avail-
able from www.hiddenmysteries.com/redir/
index111.html. Wm Michael Mott can be
contacted by email at mottimorph@earth-
link.net, or you can visit his website at
http://mpi.mpi-softtech.com/~mott, where
much of his original artwork is featured.
Bibliography of Non-Fiction Sources
1. New Larousse Encyclopaedia of
Mythology, Hamlyn Publishing Group Ltd,
1968. Sections referenced: Assyro-
Babylonian, Egyptian, Celtic, Indian, Chinese,
Japanese.
2. Myth and Mankind: Epics of Early
Civilization Myths of the Ancient Near East,
Time-Life Books, 1998.
3. Myth and Mankind: Epics of Early
Civilization Land of the Dragon, Time-Life
Books, 1999.
4. The Controllers, by Commander X,
Abelard Productions, Inc.
5. Flying Serpents and Dragons, by R. A.
Boulay, The Book Tree, 1997, 1998.
6. The Forgotten Books of Eden: Lost Books
of the Old Testament, edited by Rutherford H.
Platt, Jr, and J. Alden Brett, Gramercy Books,
Random House, 1980.
7. The Ramayana by Valmiki, translated by
William Buck, New American Library, 1978.
8. Bhagavad-Gita As It Is, by A.C.
Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupada, The
Bhaktivedanta Book Trust, 1972, abridged
edition.
9. Japanese Tales, edited by Royall Tyler,
Pantheon Books, 1987.
10. The Samurai: A Military History, by
Stephen R. Turnbull, Macmillan Publishing
Co., 1977.
11. The Story of Sigurd (Volsunga Saga),
translated from Icelandic by Eirikr Magnusson
and William Morris; in A Treasury of Fantasy,
Avenel Books, 1981.
12. American Elves: An Encyclopedia of
Little People from the Lore of 380 Ethnic
Groups of the Western Hemisphere, by John
E. Roth, MacFarland Books, 1997.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 159

 History and folklore both have parallels. Folklore is filled with beneath our feet, stretching down through secret, twisting tunnels
"dark men", "men dressed in black" and "grim reapers", often and deep caverns to the Mohorovicic layer, which itself is an
identified in previous centuries as sorcerers, demons, warlocks or anomalous cavern region deep beneath the upper crust.
other "servants of the Devil"and, of course, the odour of sul- What if there is an unknown world beneath our feeta world
phur and brimstone was a trademark of his from way back. that is dependent upon the biodiversity and genetic wealth on the
During the plague years of the Middle Ages, entities resembling Earth's surface; a world that has been exploiting that wealth for
both MIB and the now-standard grey aliens were often seen in thousands or millions of years, victimising the ignorant savages
areas that would shortly thereafter be stricken with an outbreak of who roam the face of the sunlit world? Or could all of the evi-
the dreaded disease. On the eve of dence be circumstantial and without
major events throughout history, people merit, simply a misinterpreted conglom-
have repeatedly seen or been harassed eration of coincidence and misidentified
by such beings.
As Keel points out in Disneyland of
What if there is an unknown animals, natural phenomena and arche-
types from the human collective uncon-
the Gods and his other excellent books, world beneath our feet sciousness? The critic could toss in an
Julius Caesar, Napoleon and even
Malcolm X all reported encounters with
a world that is dependent endless supply of overactive imagina-
tions down through the millennia, but
this variety of terrifying being. Hitler upon the biodiversity and the evidencedating back as it does for
also was alleged to have had his share genetic wealth on the thousands of years of human traditions
of midnight visits from a mysterious and continuing right up through the pre-
"Tibetan", and through him to have met Earth's surface...? sent daysays otherwise.
"the New Man"a sort of super-Aryan The reptilian, vampiric, robotic and
who he believed came from the interior demonic are all characteristics which
of the Earth, and of whom he was most have been attributed to underworld
afraid. beings down through the ages. They have haunted mankind's
How much fear, confusion and human suffering can be traced to imagination and nightmares since our most remote time. These
uncanny visits from these "robotic yet human" agents "archetypal" images speak to us of supernatural terrors and mys-
provocateurs? Where are they from, who do they work for, and teries; but what if, instead, these beings are natural and technolog-
what is their long-term agenda? Could it be that their goal is to ically advanced to a degree that only until recently has been
generate confusion and divisions, to keep humanity "looking beyond our comprehension and therefore considered "magical" or
upwards" for an invasion that will never come? The "invaders" impossible in their level of sophistication? If the latter is the case,
may already be here, and may have been here all along. The then we would do well as a species to become more aware not
evidence is in the folklore, religions, myths, literature and only of our own planet but also of our mythic and folkloric her-
archetypes of humankind. Perhaps they're not "extraterrestrial" but itage, for it speaks not of a symbiosis but of a nearly invisible
"intraterrestrial", and perhaps there's a vast, unknown world "parasite" dwelling in the depths.

13. Folktales of Norway, edited by Reidar
Christiansen, translated by Pat Shaw Iversen,
University of Chicago Press, 1968.
14. Scandinavian Folk Belief and Legend,
edited by Reimund Kvideland and Henning K.
Sehmsdorf, University of Minnesota Press,
1988.
15. An Encyclopedia of Fairies, by Katherine
Briggs, Pantheon Books, 1976.
16. Irish Folktales, edited by Henry Glassie,
Pantheon Books, 1985.
17. The Norse Myths, by Kevin Crossley-
Holland, Pantheon Books, 1980.
18. Celtic Myth and Legend, Poetry and
Romance, by Charles Squire, Bell Publishing
Co., 1979.
19. Gods and Myths of the Viking Age, by H.
R. Ellis Davidson, Bell Publishing Co., 1981.
20. Passing Strange: True Tales of New
England Hauntings and Horrors, by Joseph
A. Citro, Houghton Mifflin Co., 1997.
21. Myth and Mankind: Gods of Sun and
Sacrifice Aztec & Maya Myth, Time-Life
Books, 1997.
22. American Indian Myths and Mysteries, by
Vincent H. Gaddis, Indian Head Books, New
York, 1992.
23. Popol Vuh, translated by Dennis Tedlock,
Simon & Schuster, 1985.
24. Maya: The Riddle and Rediscovery of a
Lost Civilization, by Charles Gallenkamp,
Viking Penguin, 1985.
25. "That Old Time Choctaw Religion", by
Len Green, Bishinik Magazine, June 1979.
26. "Origins of the Choctaw People Retold
from Old Legends", by Len Green, Bishinik
Magazine, August 1980.
27. Lake Monster Traditions: A Cross-
Cultural Analysis, by Michel Meurger and
Claude Gagnon, Fortean Times, 1988.
28. The Great Orm of Loch Ness, by F. W.
Holiday, W.W. Norton & Co., 1968.
29. Chupacabras and Other Mysteries, by
Scott Corrales, Greenleaf Publications, 1997.
30. Unexplained!, by Jerome Clark, Visible
Ink Press, 1999.
31. Sasquatch/Bigfoot, by Don Hunter and
Rene Dahinden, McClelland & Stewart, 1993,
revised edition.
32. The Field Guide to Bigfoot, Yeti, and
Other Mystery Primates Worldwide, by Loren
Coleman and Patrick Huyghe, Avon Books,
1999.
33. Subterranean Worlds Inside Earth, by
Timothy Green Beckley, Inner Light
Productions, 1992.
34. Lost Continents and the Hollow Earth, by
David Hatcher Childress and Richard S.
Shaver, Adventures Unlimited Press, 1999.
35. Subterranean Worlds, by Walter Kafton-
Minkel, Loompanics Unlimited, 1989.
36. The Secret World, by Ray Palmer (with
Richard S. Shaver), Amherst Press, 1975.
37. Architects of the Underworld, by Bruce
Rux, Frog Ltd, 1996.
38. Above Top Secret: The Worldwide UFO
Coverup, by Timothy Good, William Morrow,
1988.
39. Alien Contact: Top Secret UFO Files
Revealed, by Timothy Good, William
Morrow, 1993.
40. The Bell Witch of Tennessee, by Charles
Bailey Bell, 1934; facsimile edition by
Charles Elder, Publisher, 1972.
41. The Infamous Bell Witch of Tennessee, by
Charles Edwin Price, The Overmountain
Press, 1994.
42. Disneyland of the Gods, by John A. Keel,
Illuminet Press, USA, 1995.
43. Our Haunted Planet, by John A. Keel,
Galde Press, 1999.
44. The Mothman Prophecies, by John A.
Keel, Illuminet Press, 1991.
45. Operation Trojan Horse, by John A.
Keel, G. P. Putnam & Sons, 1970.
46. Casebook on the Men in Black, by Jim
Keith, Illuminet Press, 1997.
47. Beowulf, translated by Burton Raffel,
New American Library, Mentor Books, 1963.
Bibliography of Fiction Sources
All fiction sources are referenced within the
body of the treatise.

160 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 BUCHNER'S 1535 ACCOUNT OF
BREITENWINNER CAVE
This piece was found at an obscure website
on the Internet. If anyone has further
information regarding the 1535 expedition
into Breitenwinner Cave, Germany, please
let us know.
Editor
Two of us were appointed leaders, to
whom we others promised obedience, etc.
Then we got ready to go into the hole
which is so wide that one could turn a
wagon of hay in it.
Each of us had to carry something: a
piece of rope, a light, lantern, pickaxe,
wine, bread, etc. And we sang cheerfully,
"We are travelling in the name of God!"
One of the leaders went in first, the other
to avert danger, because if we should lose
track of the ropes it would be impossible
for us to get out again. After fastening the
ropes to a rock we descended 500 klafters
[950 m]. Four honest, strong men were
selected to keep watch at the mouth of the
mountain cave. Very soon we arrived at a
very narrow cleft. One of our companions,
a goldsmith who at home had desired to be
the first one in the cave, was so frightened

R
emarkable tidings from the year leader brought up the rear. He secured the by the sight of it that he deserted us. But
1535! Twenty-five citizens of the entrance with rope and marked it with signs we crept on our stomachs some fifty
town of Amberg set off to a moun-
tainous area three miles distant from
Amberg. Near the village of Predenwind
they went into a huge hollow mountain,
about 900 klafters [1700 m] deep, and
walked through to the other side. The mar-
vels they saw there have been written down
by Berthold Buchner.
In the evening on the day of St Peter and
St Paul, the abovementioned 25 men set off
from Amberg with a cart laden with lad-
ders, materials for making fire, stone-
breaking tools, ropes, wine, bread, and
other items useful for such an undertaking.
They went to the market place of
Hohenburg to stay overnight. Next day
they started very early, meeting at the
entrance of the mountain and debated.
The ignorant will not believe this story,
the experienced ones will not think it possi-
ble. But we have seen it with our own
eyes, and it is the truth.
1535

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 161

 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
klafters [95 m] through this narrow cleft.
There was a wider opening next to it but it
did not stretch very far. First of all we
came upon a wide space like a hall for
dancing. When we crept in we found so
many bones that the first of us had to pile
them up in one place to make room for us
to enter. The bones were very large as if
from giants.
We then reached a very narrow hole and
had to squeeze through on our stomachs.
At 200 klafters [380 m] one comes
into what seems like a beautiful spa-
cious palace big enough to hold about
100 horses. It is lined at the top very
handsomely with "grown" stones
[speleothems]. There are eight or ten
"grown" pillars and good seats at the
sides. Here we found two skulls
which, to our surprise, were enclosed
by the rock and we could hardly hack
them out with our tools. Each person
took a piece, one the cranium, one the
teeth, etc. There were many passages
here and everywhere in the mountain;
some of them we explored. All the
caves and passages were full of big bones.
We searched for about an hour for a hole
leading further in. At last our leader found
one and we all followed him. The other
tunnels met now and then in the mountain.
We were still amazed by the sight of this
palace.
After 150 klafters [285 m] we came
across a very narrow cave, finding it diffi-
cult to squeeze in. There we heard a
strange roaring, crackling and rustling.
More than one of us wished he had stayed
at home with his wife. Suddenly the cave
widened so that we could walk side-by-
side. We took counsel and decided to go
on and find out what these wild sounds
were. Our leader went in front again.
Arriving at another wide space, we
examined it carefully. It looked like a
chapterhouse, with pews on one wall and a
gallery overhead. It was difficult to get up
there and I stayed down below. In all the
caves we found many bones. We came to a
narrow vault where we found a skull bigger
than we had ever seen before. When we
tried to squeeze it through the narrow
opening it crumbled like ashes. Through a
narrow entrance we got down further, about
200 klafters [380 m] . There was more and
more roaring and rustling till we came upon
a fairly wide opening where an enormous
waterfall was rushing down between two
rocks with such a force it would have been
162 NEXUS
sufficient to turn two mill wheels. The
stream ran downwards over the opening.
We were curious to know where this stream
came from or to find its spring, as it was so
icy cold. However we could not follow it.
Our leader got stuck there in a cave; he had
to be pulled out otherwise he would have
died. The same happened to me and I felt
very weak afterwards, so the apothecary
gave me a restorative.
On the other side,
between the south and
west point, we found a
fountain with four
stone pillars around it
and there seem to have
been seats there at one
time.
Adjoining this wide cave was a hand-
some triangular vault. There we found a
stone sculpture. It resembled a deity seated
on a throne with a straw wreath on its head.
The straw was black and very brittle. A
few of us took some straw home.
We found another stone sculpture hang-
ing from a high wall. We left a light burn-
ing in front of it. At 200 klafters [380 m]
we found loose soil with a great many
bones.
We crept and walked on, following the
rope and at 250 klafters [475 m] we came
to a most wonderful palace and tabernacle.
On the other side, between the south and
west point, we found a fountain with four
stone pillars around it and there seem to
have been seats there at one time. The
fountain was very cold.
www.nexusmagazine.com
We hung our wine bottles in it and the
wine was soon cooled.
While we refreshed ourselves at the
fountain we heard a loud noise in the cliff
where the stream ended. Our leader was
bold enough to climb in but got stuck and
became drenched. When we came to his
rescue with lights, one of uscalled
Burckstallerwas struck on the head. We
thought the object had been thrown by a
female figure. Burckstaller was very
superstitious, so perhaps it was a ghost.
We did not see anything else.
It was very strange that the dripping
water, which falls into this mountain in
60 places, freezes into a very hard, even
rock and into translucid stone. From
some caves, a white salt-like substance
trickles out; it looks like glass and we
took it to be saltpetre. In a cliff of this
rock, one of our companions found a
strong, grey, curly hair which he
assumed was from a beard. All of us
were curious to find out more about the
"ghost" and would have faced further
adventures and dangers. But we lost
the passages and caves where we saw the
"ghost" and were forced to climb to the sur-
face with the rope and soon reached day-
light again. Just then a cuirassier with two
horses passed the entrance of the cave and
we called to him to come in. But on seeing
us he rode away hurriedly. We all looked
discoloured and were terrified at each
other' s appearance. We looked like
corpses and startled the guards at the
entrance.
But thanks to God, nobody was hurt.
Praise be to God now and for ever. Amen.
This has been written down by Berthold
Buchner, who took part, and is attested by
the Treasurer of Amberg.
(Source: http://www.gci-net.com/users/v/
vrartist/1535caves.html)
Editor's Note:
The following source information was
also posted at the above website: I
found this story in History of Cave
Science; The Exploration and Study of
Limestone Caves, to 1900 by Trevor R.
Shaw, Second Edition Published by the
Sydney Speleological Society, 19 9 2.
The call letters, here in the University of
Arizona Library are: "GB 601 A4 S54
1992 Science" (Science Library). It is
interesting that this cave appears to be
almost "off limits" in a military training
area.
STRANGE Times 2006
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 163
 Giants of Prehistory
S keletal fragments and tools that look like they belong to gigantic humans have been found
on nearly every continent. We are not just talking seven- or eight-footers; we are talking 12-
to 15-footers here: real giants! Nearly every native culture on the planet has legends of giants
from bygone times. In some cultures, the tales of giants don't just refer to times long ago, but
to an ongoing co-existence.
The main article I've selected for this compilation is quite lengthy, and most of the informa-
tion was reported to and by the prestigious Smithsonian Institution. It would appear that in
parts of North America, many mounds containing giants' skeletons and implements (some of
which seemed to incorporate advanced technology) were found and looted by European set-
tlers during the early colonisation of North America.
Of course the accounts of giants are not limited to North America, as you will see in John
Mount's article, in the Twilight Zone section on page 174. Here you will learn of records of
giants in the Middle East, South America, Europe and Asia. In Australia, author and researcher
Rex Gilroy has collected what he believes to be the bones and artefacts of giant hominids that
once roamed Australia. You can see for yourself at his website http://www.mysteriousaus-
tralia.com.
There are also many websites which contain further information on the subject of giants, both
from the past and some even from the present. Several Christian-oriented websites have infor-
mation on this subject which is also worth perusing.

164 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 H OLOCAUST OF G IANTS
The Great Smithsonian Cover-up
Skeletal remains of
giants buried in the
ancient earth
mounds of North
America were
described in
19th-century
documents of the
Smithsonian
Institution, but the
physical evidence
either has perished
or been hidden
from public view.
by Ross Hamilton 2001
Email: ophi@greatserpentmound.org
Reprinted from his Serpent Mound
Mysteries website at:
http://greatserpentmound.org/
articles/giants3.html
Computer Images
2001 by Patricia Mason
STRANGE Times 2006
It's probably better that so few of the ruins and remains were tied in with the
Smithsonian because they give good reason to believe the ending of the Indiana
Jones moviea great warehouse where the real secrets of earth history are buried.
Vine Deloria, Jr, noted Native American author and Professor of Law Emeritus
(Personal communication, May 2000)
M
odern-day archaeology and anthropology have nearly sealed the door on our
imaginations, broadly interpreting the North American past as devoid of
anything unusual in the way of great cultures characterised by a people of
unusual demeanour. The great interloper of ancient burial grounds, the 19th-
century Smithsonian Institution, created a one-way portal through which uncounted bones
have been spirited. This door and the contents of its vault are virtually sealed off to any
but government officials. Among these bones may lie answers not even sought by these
officials concerning the deep past.
The first hint we had about the possible existence of an actual race of tall, strong and
intellectually sophisticated people was in researching old township and county records.
Many of these were quoting from old diaries and letters that were combined, for posterity,
in the 1800s from diaries going back to the 1700s. Says Deloria on this understanding:
"Some of these old county and regional history books contain real gems because the
people were not subjected to a rigid indoctrination about evolution and were astonished
about what they found and honestly reported it."
Some time before archaeology came to subscribe the general public to its view of pre-
historygenerations prior to Darwin's troublesome theorythe pioneers thought that
some of the earthworks were as ancient as could be concurrent with human habitation in
America. Some among those early settlers exercised their pens, assured that the earth-
works were not built by the direct ancestry of the native people living in the historical
period but, rather, were constructed in a more remote era encompassing a different social
order. They compared the "Mound Builders" with the "Indians", clearly discerning the
former as belonging to an earlier time and possessing a different fate or destiny from the
latter.
"Evidence for the occupation of this region before the appearance of the red man and
the white race is to be found in almost every part of the county, as well as through the
northwest generally. In removing the gravel bluffs, which are numerous and deep, for
the construction and repair of roads, and in excavating cellars, hundreds of human
skeletons, some of them of giant form, have been found. A citizen of Marion County
estimates that there were about as many human skeletons in the knolls of Marion
County as there are white inhabitants at present!"
The History of Marion County, Ohio
(Compiled from past accounts; published in 1883)
"Mastodonic remains are occasionally unearthed, and, from time to time, discoveries of
the remains of Indian settlements are indicated by the appearance of gigantic skeletons,
with the high cheek bones, powerful jaws and massive frames peculiar of the red man,
who left these as the only record with which to form a clew to the history of past ages."
The History of Brown County, Ohio
(Compiled from past accounts; published in 1883)
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 165

Title pages of the early county and pioneer history books often included
phrases like "Carefully Written and Compiled" and "Lest We Forget".
"She said also that three skeletons were found at the mouth of
the Paw Paw Creek many years later, while Nim (Nimrod)
Satterfield was justice of the peace. Jim Dean and some men
were digging for a bridge foundation and found these bones
at the lower end of the old buffalo wallow. She thought it
was Dr Kidwell, of Fairmont, who examined them and said
they were very old, perhaps thousands of years old. She said
that when the skeletons were exposed to the weather for a
few days, their bones turned black and began to crumble, that
Squire Satterfield had them buried in the Joliffe graveyard
(Rivesville). All these skeletons, she said, were measured,
and found to be about eight feet long."
Now and Long Ago: A History of the Marion County Area,
by Glen Lough (1969)
(This citation on West Virginia is courtesy of Dave Cain.)
Another of many examples, this one, col-
lected by James Mooney (18611921), tells
of the visit of very tall people from the
west:
"James Wafford, of the western
Cherokee, who was born in Georgia in
1806, says that his grandmother, who
must have been born about the middle
of the last century, told him that she
had heard from the old people that long
before her time a party of giants had
once come to visit the Cherokee. They
were nearly twice as tall as common
men, and had their eyes set slanting in
their heads, so that the Cherokee called
166 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
them Tsunil' kalu', 'the Slant-eyed people', because they
looked like the giant hunter Tsul' kalu'. They said that
these giants lived far away in the direction in which the
sun goes down. The Cherokee received them as
friends, and they stayed some time, and then returned to
their home in the west"
This kind of recorded tradition did not start with Mooney
but, rather, began early in American history. During the
Colonial and post-Colonial eras, the information-seekers
were keen on gathering as much knowledge of the forgotten
past as feasible through native sources. Some of it was
woven into romantic tales including verse, but the main part
of it went into records which, like the accumulation of earth
and debris over ancient village sites, became buried in the
musty stacks of old librariesconsidered to have no real
"substance" in the emerging field of the white man's science.
"Of the very early history of the region which now
embraces Lake County, but little can be written. The
Mound Builders had occupied it and passed away, leav-
ing no written language and but little even as tradition...
These mounds were quite numerous
Excavationshave revealed the crumbling bones of a
mighty race. Samuel Miller, who has resided in the
county since 1835, is authority for the statement that
one skeleton which he assisted in unearthing was a trifle
more than eight feet in length, the skull being corre-
spondingly large, while many other skeletons measured
at least seven feet"
Historical Encyclopedia of Illinois and History of Lake County,
edited by Newton Bateman, LLD, and Paul Selby, AM (1902)
From the outset of North American archaeology, no federally
sponsored concern has researched and collected evidence
specifically emphasising the existence of unusually tall Native
Americans in prehistoric and even in historic times. There are
reasons for this oversight, though in hindsight it has placed limits
on our overview of prehistory. Because there were only occasional
people of large stature born among the light-skinned, European
races, numbers of giants were far from anticipated in America.
Scientists in Europe, in case-by-case studies, declared their giants
to have been victims of pituitary disorder. Another reason was that
when the private citizenry in the US unearthed the bones of very
tall and strongly constructed people, and when these disinterments
were recorded, rarely was any comparison made with sites of
similar contents.
Group of mounds in Brown County, Ohio
STRANGE Times 2006
 It was still a sort Offsetting the carefully recorded diaries of the rural folk, there
of wilderness in were popular writers who creatively developed the more
many rural areas contemporary histories and folk legends, leaving to cursory
right until the mid- treatment the deeper accounts of North American antiquities.
dle 1800s. In this, These authors, while having captured the essence of the public
each discovery was perception of the noble native tradition, were not reconciled to the
"unique"only to antique body of legend. The pens of James Fenimore Cooper
end up in the stacks (17891851) and Henry Wadsworth Longfellow (18071882)
of old township relate virtually nothing of the tall ones. Native Americans, as we
libraries to be com- know, were discouraged from writing, although some, such as
piled later as David Cusick, circumvented the bias using Christian names.
curiositiesif they Fortunately, early missionaries gathered oral traditions from the
survived at all. The tribal elders concerning men of giant stature.
following account But even the most informative or entertaining accounts could
originated around not instill enough respect for the native people to put an end to the
Dancing figures found on a copper plate in the year 1800: further destruction of the sacred sites. The attitude of the white
Union County, Illinois.
"There were race in general towards the red race was an abomination, totally
mounds situated in the eastern part of the village of Conneaut lacking in mercy and compassion. Many of the Native American
and an extensive burying-ground near the Presbyterian skulls were compared with European skulls, but selectively so as
church, which appear to have had no connection with the to depict the current native populace as being of inferior intelli-
burying-places of the Indians. Among the human bones gence. Almost without resistance, the black seeds of racial bias
found in the mounds were some belonging to men of gigantic were forming in the uncorrupted soil of prehistoric interpretation.
structure. Some of the skulls were of Take, for example, the words of an impor-
sufficient capacity to admit the head of tant government official and popular writer,
an ordinary man, and jaw bones that Henry Schoolcraft (17931864):
might have been fitted on over the face "The Indian has a low, bushy brow,
with equal facility; the other bones were beneath which a dull, sleepy, half-
proportionately large. The burying- closed eye seems to mark the ferocious
ground referred to contained about four
acres and, with the exception of a slight
Some of the skulls passions that are dormant within. The
acute angles of the eyes seldom present
angle in conformity with the natural were of sufficient the obliquity so common in the Malays
contour of the ground, was in the form capacity to admit the and the Mongolians. The color of the
of an oblong square. It appeared to have eye is almost uniformly a tint between
been accurately surveyed into lots head of an ordinary black and grey; but even in young per-
running from north to south, and sons it seldom has the brightness, or
exhibited all the order and propriety of
man, and jaw bones expresses the vivacity, so common in
arrangement deemed necessary to that might have been the more civilized races."
constitute Christian burial..." Bureau of Indian Affairs (1852)
Historical Collections of Ohio in Two
fitted on over the face
Volumes, by Henry Howe, LLD (1888) with equal facility; Schoolcraft, who himself married a
half-Indian woman, was apparently
Although not regarded by the govern- the other bones were predisposed to labelling the native peo-
ment as reliable, the oral traditions of proportionately large. ple in general as inferior. This kind of
the native people in the eastern US aver ridiculous prejudice underscored the
the existence of possibly two races of tone for the unbridled continuation of
giants, one supplanting the other by the earthwork debacle. The result of
violent means. Here we have the first this is accurately reflected in how
inkling of some very remote prehistory, archaeology was organised more than
preserved through the tradition of the one hundred years ago, and may be
Chippewa, Sandusky and Tawa tribes summed up in the policy of Joseph
(members of the Algonquin language Henry, first secretary of the
group), of the existence of giant, bearded men. Smithsonian Institution. Said Henry in 1846: "The collection of
"In this connection I would say that Mr Jonathan Brooks, data should precede theorising..."
now living in town, stated to me that his father, Benjamin Unfortunately, the collection of data seemed to have no end,
Brooks, who lived with the Indians fourteen years and was and any subsequent theorising was (and is) in a state of transience.
well-acquainted with their language and traditions, told him The Smithsonian, playing a sort of leading role in the massive
and others that it was a tradition of the Indians that the first undertaking attempting to cast light on the inscrutable prehistory
tribe occupying this whole country was a black-bearded race, of the United States, inadvertently collected far too many relics
very large in size, and subsequently a red bearded race or than it could ever analyse in a comprehensive sense.
tribe came and killed or drove off all the black beards, as they Estimates of the number of moundworks in Ohio alone, at the
called them." end of the Colonial period, topped ten thousand. Today, less than
"Memoirs of Townships", by Wm H. Crane, in one-twentieth of these exist, and, moreover, they exist in a
The Firelands Pioneer, Vermilion, Ohio (November 1858) reconstructed form.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 167

 No quarter of special status was given to any earthwork, no fertile, worthy, intellectual territory. Hungerford died in 1835.
matter how sacred or strategic to tribal lands. It was a holocaust Although there was some controversy in the interim, the finding
of an unprecedented nature, for it undermined the very morale of of the Smithsonian, based upon the more than half-a-million-dol-
the native people who understood the peace of their ancestors to lar gift, took place officially in 1846. His legacy to the American
be ruined. people was, in his own words, "for the increase and diffusion of
Differing only in the professionalism somewhat absent from the knowledge".
previous 70 years of ghoulish quests, Henry's mandate dictated Since that time, the museum's collections have increased con-
emphasis on the creation of an inclusive system of excavation, siderably, with problems in the cataloguing and location of stored
recording and description. Any analysis that followed had to be finds developing due to changing standards of administrations
based upon this criterion. But competent analysis of anomalies over the last 150 years. By analogy, the Vatican's antique cache
rarely (if ever) came from the Smithsonian and other institutions of confiscated, problematic treasures may pale in comparison to
formally engaged in the practice of exhumation. Given this the Smithsonian's boatload of diffuse evidence. The pity of it is
understanding, it is no wonder that the Smithsonian is believed by that Smithson's request has taken on a different mode of interpre-
knowledgeable people to tation. Instead of diffus-
be actively stymieing ing knowledge, it has
research that would pro- unwittingly become con-
duce a more enlightened fused with the problem
view of American pre- of sprawling storage.
history.
There is, however, Powell and Thomas
some compensation for "Grave a, a stone
this oversight in that the sepulcher, 212 feet
Smithsonianlike the wide, 8 feet long,
Peabody, and the and 2 feet deep, was
Carnegie shortly there- formed by placing
afterfaithfully upheld steatite slabs on
Henry's mandate to edge at the sides and
detail, as was feasible, ends, and others
their mound "explo- across the top. The
rations". However, the bottom consisted
present-day inaccessibil- simply of earth
ity of the bones and hardened by fire. It
objects these people contained the
removed for future study remains of a single
is a reflection and symp- skeleton, lying on
tom of the proposed its back, with the
"oversight". head east. The
One thing that pleased frame was heavy
us in this research effort and about seven feet
was the fact that there long. The head
were many skeletons of rested on a thin
gigantic frame discov- copper plate
ered and reported by the ornamented with
Smithsonian, boosting i m p r e s s e d
the validity and value of figures"
the old township diaries 12th Annual Report of
as well as the native leg- the Bureau of Ethnology
ends. Some of these are to the Secretary of the
presented below. Smithsonian Institution,
Plat of the Etowah Group, Bartow County, Georgia. Grave A (found in the 18901891 (published in
A Brief History of largest mound of the group) contained a seven-foot skeleton of a heavy frame. 1894) (Cyrus Thomas's
the Museum investigations of Etowah)
The Smithsonian Institution, easily the world's largest museum
complex, began from the generous gift of James Smithson, an In 1882, after some 36 years of growth and sound management,
English scientist, in 1829. Believed born illegitimate (especially Smithsonian executive John Wesley Powell (of Grand Canyon
in the eyes of his later detractors), Smithson was a "diligent young exploration fame, 18691872), hired Cyrus Thomas. Powell
student", receiving a Master of Arts from Pembroke College, wanted this man to head up the fieldwork for the Smithsonian's
Oxford, in 1786. He became a distinguished scientist. newly created Bureau of Ethnology, specifically the Eastern
The gentle man passed away in 1829, bequeathing his fortune Mound Division.
to nephew James Henry Hungerford with the stipulation that if Thomas was a minister and an entomologist, whose broadened
this man died without an heir, the remainder of the fortune would interests included archaeology. He was, in other words, a bible-
go to the United States. It seems he felt that the United States was advocating, insect-adept archaeologist who believed in the mys-
the future of Britain. Perhaps Smithson saw the "New World" as tery of a lost race at the time of his being recruited.

168 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 Powell, who was much in sympathy with the plight of Native up with anomalous evidence directly questioning Powell's
Americans, having lived among them for a length of time, sweeping suppositions.
believed that there was no lost or mysterious race of mound "Cave burials occur in this district in the following counties:
builders. He desired to credit the downtrodden native people with In Grayson, Hart, Edmonson, Barren, Warren, and Fayette
the worthy and gentle arts associated with the ancient mound counties; Kentucky; Smith, White, Warren, Giles, Marion,
building societies. Subsequently, and in light of other political and Fentress counties, Tennessee; and Bartow county,
considerations marking the era, Powell sought to enact these per- Georgia. These localities lie mostly in a belt extending in a
sonal convictions through the instrumentality of Thomas. north and south direction through the center of the district.
In spite of his personal beliefs, Thomas was not outspokenly "In most of these caves, both in Kentucky and Tennessee,
resistant to accepting the position. Besides, Congress was allocat- the bodies appear to have been laid on the floor of the cave,
ing solid funding for this proposed ramble through the ancient sometimes in beds of ashes, sometimes on a pavement of flat
landscape. stones. There are, however, some instances in which the
There was apparently an important decision made at this time bodies have been found incased in stone slabs, and afterwards
concerning the facilitation of an enveloping theoryso necessary imbedded in clay or ashes. In Smith and Warren counties,
to create order where chaos Tennessee, and in
loomed. Before discharging a Warren and Fayette
book, one logically creates an counties, Kentucky, the
outline to guide one's thoughts. flesh of the bodies was
This was to become a hierar- preserved and the hair
chical arrangement that would was yellow and of fine
decide the angle of vision for texture. In some cases
the categorising of the finds the bodies were
that would be made. enveloped in several
On one hand, the belief that thicknesses of coarse
others had discovered North cloth with an outer wrap-
America before Columbus ping of deer skin. Some
(such as Phoenician, Egyptian, of the bodies were
Hebraic, Greek, Roman, Celtic, wrapped in a kind of
Scandinavian or even Asian cloth made of bark fiber,
mariners) was explored. On into which feathers were
the other hand, the idea of the woven in such a manner
continent having been isolated as to form a smooth sur-
from outside influences was face. In two cases the
put on the table. It was perhaps bodies, placed in a sit-
because of Powell's deference ting or squatting posture,
to the native kinship that the were incased in baskets.
latter ideai.e., screening out In one of the caves in
any extra-continental Smith county the body
visitorswas adopted. of a female is said to
Needless to say, this was an have been found, having
extraordinary assumption, and about the waist a silver
one that has affected decision- girdle, with marks
making right until the present resembling letters."
day. On the positive side, it 12th Annual Report of the
viably linked the living Bureau of Ethnology to the
factions of the Native Secretary of the Smithsonian
American people with the more Institution, 18901891
ancient mound-building folk, (1894) (Explorations in the
and shortly thereafter it was Tennessee district)
responsible for the faintly
successful preservation of what Armed with a self-created
remained of the Mound Mound Group, Dunleith, Illinois. "Near the original surface, 10 or 12 doctrine powered by ample
Builders' legacy. From this it feet from the center, on the lower side, lying at full length on its back, funding, and with a little help
may be understood how was one of the largest skeletons discovered by the Bureau agents, the later from the one-way door
length as proved by actual measurement being between 7 and 8 feet."
aspects of Powell's work, such to the Smithsonian's inacces-
as analysis of the social order of the Mound Builders, was not a sible catacombs, Powell and his underling in the years that fol-
priority. lowed nearly succeeded in the obliteration of the last notions of
Powell's decision regarding isolation was in reality a two-edged the legendary, mysterious and antique class of mound-building
sword. While it was a meaningful step that fostered a meagre people and, for that matter, any people that didn't fit into the
though important harmonic between the federal government and mould of his theory. Did Powell intentionally overlook some of
the native people, it was regrettably based upon a false notion. the archaeology so as to focus on his own special agenda?
An example of its contradiction is found right in the 12th Annual Powell and his associates at the Bureau were quite certain that
Report itself. Again and again, Thomas and his operatives came people had arrived in the Americas only sometime after the first

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 169

Egyptian dynastyless than 4,500 years ago! They also believed full length on its back, was one of the largest skeletons dis-
that the Mississippi Valley was sufficiently isolated from the Ohio covered by the Bureau agents, the length as proved by actual
Valley to warrant the simultaneous flourishing of quite distinct measurement being between 7 and 8 feet. It was clearly
cultures over a long period. traceable, but crumbled to pieces immediately after removal
Since carbon-dating had not yet been discovered, Thomas used from the hard earth in which it was encased"
stratigraphic analysis (after Lyell) and, following the rest of the 12th Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary
mandate, included detailed record-keeping and documentation of the Smithsonian Institution, 18901891 (1894)
whenever appropriate. His findings were broadly accepted and
are still referenced. Regarding the problem of "intrusive" Indian burials, what kind
"Underneath the layer of shells the earth was very dark and of a time gap were these men looking at between the original
appeared to be mixed burials and the later ones?
with vegetable mold to As his agents uncovered the
the depth of 1 foot. At physical evidence for
the bottom of this, rest- powerful men of towering
ing on the original sur- stature, Thomas held the
face of the ground, was a position that any and all
very large skeleton lying skeletal remains represented
horizontally at full the direct ancestry of the
length. Although very present-day people. Was it
soft, the bones were suf- not plausible to consider an
ficiently distinct to allow extended "family" or
of careful measurement hierarchical group of very
before attempting to tall folk who served with the
remove them. The people? Were they selective
length from the base of enough in their sexual
the skull to the bones of associations to appear,
the toes was found to be overall, as a race with its
7 feet 3 inches. It is own peculiarities and even
probable, therefore, that physical characteristics? The
this individual when liv- findings that didn't fit into
ing was fully 7 12 feet the guideline established by
high. At the head lay his superior were summarily
some small pieces of recorded and forgotten by
mica and a green sub- Thomasa legacy we have
stance, probably the inherited today.
oxide of copper, though "An old Indian mound
no ornament or article of has been opened on the
copper was discovered." farm of Harrison
12th Annual Report of the Robinson, four miles
Bureau of Ethnology to the East of Jackson, Ohio,
Secretary of the Smithsonian and two skeletons of
Institution, 18901891 extraordinary size and a
(1894) (Explorations in great quantity of trinkets
Roane County, Tennessee) have been removed.
Some years ago a party
But Thomas's time was of relic hunters,
limited because of the large supposed to have been
territory he was to explore. sent out in the interest of
Under such working condi- the Archeological
tions, anomalies were put Society, visited the
aside for future researchto Robinson farm, and after
be forgotten, as it has turned a few days' search
out. Thomas was forced to removed a great
rely on the accounts of opera- collection of stone
tives in many cases. hatchets, beads and
Spring Hill enclosure, Kanawha County, West Virginia. In the bottom of
Evidently, some of these peo- Mound 11 (upper left) was found a skeleton "fully seven feet long". bracelets, which were
ple discerned between packed and shipped to
"Indian" burials and the burials of the Mound Builders, perhaps an Eastern institute, and until this recent accidental discovery
challenging the patience of Powell. it was supposed that everything had been removed by the
"No. 5, the largest of the group, was carefully examined. relic hunters. It is thought by many that more relics are to be
Two feet below the surface, near the apex, was a skeleton, found, and preparations are being made for a thorough
doubtless an intrusive Indian burial Near the original sur- investigation."
face, 10 or 12 feet from the center, on the lower side, lying at The Adair County News, Kentucky (January 5, 1897)

170 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 What has become of all the evidence?
Again and again, only a single long skeleton
or two was found among those of normal
size. The understanding of tall, ruling
chiefs and their wives was not developed at
all, as is evident in these examples.
"The other, situated on the point of a
commanding bluff, was also conical in
form, 50 feet in diameter and about 8
feet high. The outer layer consisted in
sandy soil, 2 feet thick, filled with
slightly decayed skeletons, probably
Indians of intrusive burials. The earth
of the main portion of this mound was a
very fine yellowish sand which
shoveled like ashes and was A Section of the Great Smith Mound, Kanawha County, West Virginia. This cone-shaped
everywhere, to a depth of 2 to 4 feet, as mound rose 35 feet high and measured 175 feet in diameter at its base. The interior of the
full of human skeletons as could be mound contained a vault made of timber measuring 12 feet by 13 feet. It was positioned
within the mound 20 feet above surface level.
stowed away in it, even to two and three
tiers. Among these were a number of bones not together as
skeletons, but mingled in confusion and probably from
scaffolds or other localities. Excepting one, which was rather
more than 7 feet long, these skeletons appeared to be of
medium size and many of them much decayed"
12th Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary
of the Smithsonian Institution, 18901891
(1894) (Pike County, Illinois)
"No. 11 is now 35 by 40 feet at the base and 4 feet high. In
the center, 3 feet below the surface, was a vault 8 feet long
and 3 feet wide. In the bottom of this, among the decayed
fragments of bark wrappings, lay a skeleton fully seven feet
long, extended at full length on the back, head west. Lying in
a circle above the hips were fifty-two perforated shell disks
about an inch in diameter and one-eighth of an inch thick."
12th Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary
of the Smithsonian Institution, 18901891
(1894) (Kanawha County, West Virginia)
Largest in the collective series of mounds, the Great Smith
Mound yielded at least two large skeletons, but at different levels
of its deconstruction by Thomas's agents. It was 35 feet in height
and 175 feet in diameter, and was constructed in at least two
stages, according to the report. The larger of the two skeletons
represented a man conceivably approaching eight feet in height
when living.
"At a depth of 14 feet, a rather large human skeleton was
found, which was in a partially upright position with the back
against a hard clay wall All the bones were badly decayed,
except those of the left wrist, which had been preserved by
two heavy copper bracelets
"Nineteen feet from the top the bottom of this debris was
reached, where, in the remains of a bark coffin, a skeleton
measuring 712 feet in length and 19 inches across the shoul-
ders was discovered. It lay on the bottom of the vault
stretched horizontally on the back, head east, arms by the
sides Each wrist was encircled by six heavy copper
bracelets Upon the breast was a copper gorgetlength, 312
inches; greatest width 312 inches"
12th Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the
Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution 18901891 (1894)
(Kanawha County, West Virginia)
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
The pressure of the time schedule doubtless made it inconve-
nient to consider seriously the possibility of an ancient lineage of
leaders taking the form of very tall people. The fact of gigantic
stature never settled in as a clue to a greater mystery, and the evi-
dences of very tall, ruggedly built men vanishedand often
enough into the Smithsonian's temporary charnel house of pre-
Columbian miscellany.
"Three feet abovethe skeleton of a large, strongly built man
lay extended at full length with the face up, the head toward
the east... The skull was obtained almost entire. Under it were
thirteen water-worn quartz pebbles. The femur measured 1812
inches"
12th Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the
Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, 1890-1891
(1894) (Union County, Mississippi)
A femur (thigh bone) exceeding 18 inches would indicate a
man of very great heighteasily over seven feet. Femurs
exceeding 20 inches have been found, however.
Though hindsight is said to be 20/20, Thomas's methodology
was little better than a government-sanctioned dissolution of the
sacred burial places. He dismantled the sanctuaries and charnel
houses with the fervour of a man whose first priority was to
impress his employer.
From Florida to Nebraska, including 23 states and Canada's
Manitoba region, over the next seven years he and his agents
worked like men possessed of a deadline.
"Several years ago an Indian mound was opened near
Cartersville, Ga., by a committee of scientists from the
Smithsonian. After removing the dirt for some distance, a
layer of flagstones was found, which had evidently been
dressed by hand, showing that the men who quarried the rock
understood the business. These stones were removed, and in
a vault beneath them was found a skeleton of a giant,
measuring seven feet and two inches. His hair was coarse
and jet-black, and hung to the waist, the brow being
ornamented with a copper crown. The skeleton was
remarkably well preserved and taken from the vault intact.
Nearby were found the bodies of several children of various
sizes. The remains of the latter were covered with beads
made of bone of some kind. Upon removing these, the
bodies were found to be enclosed in a network of straw or
reeds, and underneath these was a covering of the skin of
some animal. In fact, the bodies had been prepared
NEXUS 171
 somewhat after the manner of mummies, and will doubtless The question has been raised, asking whether there was giant
throw new light upon the history of the people who reared stature among the Native American people in earlier historic times.
these mounds. On the stones which covered the vault were From Hardesty's History of Monroe County, Ohio, we discovered
carved inscriptions, and if deciphered will probably lift the this:
veil which has enshrouded the history of the race of giants "He further told me of the killing of a big Indian at
which undoubtedly at one time inhabited the continent." Buckchitawa, about the time of the settlement at Marietta.
Georgia's Landmarks, Memorials, and Legends, by Lucian The Indians had a white prisoner whom they forced to decoy
Lamar Knight (18681933) (Byrd Printing, Atlanta, 191314) boats to the shore. A small boat was descending the river,
containing white people, when this prisoner was placed under
Could this special burial have been another kingly individual? the bank to tell those in the boat that he had escaped captivi-
In these increasingly hasty intrusions into the native burial ty, and to come to the shore and take him in. The Indians
grounds' inherent sanctity, the holocaust delivered its zenith under were concealed, but the big Indian stuck his head out from
the officialdom action of for- behind a large tree, when it
mer Union Major Powell. This was pierced by a bullet
man, who in his youth had from the gun of the steers-
lived among the "Indians", man of the boat. The
somehow was insensitive to Indians cried out 'Wetzel,
the sanctuary of their grave- Wetzel' and fled. This was
yards. But others came later to the last ever seen of the
do a fair share of damage as prisoner. The Indians
well, all in the name of infor- returned next day and
mation gathering. The prehis- buried the big Indian, who,
tory of eastern North America he said, was twenty inches
is not what we have been asked taller than he was, and he
to accept from the efforts of was a tall man.
Cyrus Thomas, nor from the "When Chester Bishop
subsequent authorities who was digging a cellar for
based so much of their work Asahel Booth, at
upon his, and the reason is Clarington, many years
worth repeating: many or most ago, he came across a
of the oldest mounds and sub- skeleton, the bones of
terranean burial acreages were which were removed care-
promptly destroyed, long fully by Dr Richard
before any focused "scientific" Kirkpatrick, and from his
effort came on the scene. measurement the height of
Apart from the disregard of the man when living would
the settlers' records, the other have been 8 feet and 5
part of the problem is the inches. It is probable that
labyrinthine mausoleum that is these were the bones of the
the Smithsonian bone and arti- big Indian of whom the
fact collection. In sum, we Indian at Jackson's told
today are deprived of the real me."
knowledge of the more ancient
lineage. The early settlers And again this:
observed that the giants of old "A large quantity of human
may have passed on their grand bones was discovered in a
stature to the later native peo- fissure in the limestone
ple, for there were individuals Group of mounds in Union County, Mississippi near the United States
among their later progression who were of a size and build that Coast Guard lighthouse. A crude tomb of black stone slabs,
goes beyond our current notions of Native American physicality. of a formation not known on the island, was found many
years ago beneath the roots of a huge stump. Eight skeletons
The Telling of the Bones were found, one measuring over seven feet in height."
It is difficult not to understand the probability of an elite lineage Sketches and Stories of the Lake Erie Islands
of tall men and women who propagated their own genetic inheri- by Theresa Thorndale, Sandusky (1898)
tance. These people lived, worked and bred together. Were their
marriages arranged to ensure the continuance of the grand stature Some of the settlers and their descendants may have seen
in roles of leadership and protection? In his classic Red Earth, clearly, but the representatives of the Smithsonian and other
White Lies, Vine Deloria says: sanctioned institutions, in spite of good intentions, lacked the kind
"From talking with elders of several tribes, my understanding of thoroughness in their analyses that included a broadened field
is that the Indians were and are describing people of more of vision. We have felt heartily from the beginning of this
than average height. In fact, some elders as a routine matter research that the Smithsonian is the recipient of mandates put into
have reported that the Indians themselves were much larger place well over 100 years ago. It is virtually exempt from
and taller." NAGPRA (the Native American Graves Protection and

172 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

Repatriation Act), for the reason (say they) of there being too What was left over became part of the Smithsonian collection,
much data to finish analysing to prepare for repatriation. estimated at 18,000 individuals, and this by way of the Army
"Concealing evidence that conflicts with accepted theory is Medical Museum.
common scientific skullduggery. For years the Smithsonian "The objects here collected which have not been given, or
Institution has been accused of hiding in storage vaults things acquired by exchange, have been purchased for the use of the
it doesn't like. In 1968 two Neanderthal-like skulls with low museum by order of the surgeon-general There is a skele-
foreheads and large brows were found in Minnesota. As for ton of a giant, who, in life, measured seven feet, prepared by
dating, University of Minnesota scientists said they were Auzoux and mounted by Blanchne's method, which, if I may
reluctant to destroy any of the material, although carbon-14 use that term, is really a beauty. It is as white and clean as
testing only requires the burning of one gram of bone. They new fallen snow, and the brass joints and screws which keep
were sent to the Smithsonian. Later, Dr Lawrence Angel, it together are bright, and of the latest style and finish"
curator of physical anthropology at the institution, said he "The Army Medical Museum in Washington", by Louis
had no record of the skulls there, although he was sure they Bagger, in Appletons' Journal: A Magazine Of General
were not lost. We have a right to wonder whether some pro- Literature, vol. 9, issue 206 (1873)
fessional scientists mightn't find a really early date for the
bones distressing." Today, however, bones are no longer as good a source of
American Indian Myths and Mysteries, information as they once were thought to be, and for several good
by Vincent H. Gaddis (1977) reasons. Bone is composed dominantly of the metallic calcium,
yet is made up of
Why distressing? organic molecules.
Because no true Depending on
Neanderthal remains moisture and
have ever been temperature, it will
recognised by any decay, break down
Federal authorities with time and return
as originating on the to the condition of
North American the soil after a
continent, what to certain number of
say of the Americas centuries.
in general. Is there Bone evidence
yet today a conflict has created over-
between established emphasis on certain
theory and what has periods of
been physically dis- prehistory, in this
covered? region the so-called
Is the "ghost" of "Hopewell" and
Powell yet haunting "Fort Ancient"
the halls of the The mound at Marietta, drawn by Henry Howe in 1846. Howe stated this mound ( M i s s i s s i p p i a n )
Museum? So what was "of a magnitude and height which strike the beholder with astonishment". people. Thus, a
is the policy of the Its base had a diameter of 115 feet; its height reached up 30 feet. It was great proportion of
Smithsonian? Does surrounded by a ditch four feet deep and 15 feet wide. the Archaic and
the institution intentionally withhold information? Is the fact of a early Adena bones discovered were decomposed beyond
race of giant warriors and chieftains threatening to the closed, preservation. Due to a lack of skeletons, other more antique
internal doctrine of American archaeology? That there was a race periods have not received the same kind of recognitionsave from
of men and women possessing an unusually tall and strong physi- the better scholars affecting the interested public's view of the
cality living over an extensive area of North America has become ancient world.
a forgotten fact. Ironically, the holocaust of giants, while deadening our sense of
There are other examples, and names like the Gungywamp the past, may well serve as a lesson for the future.
Society of Connecticut, Ed Conrad and others have bizarre stories
to relate about the ineptitude or simple prejudice of the Recommended Reading
Smithsonian when dealing with their materials. In these exam- Vine Deloria, Jr, Red Earth, White Lies: Native Americans and
ples, there is growing appreciation for an actual cover-up. the Myth of Scientific Fact, Fulcrum Publishing, 1997, ISBN
Another grotesque twist is the Army Medical Museum's collec- 1-55591388-1
tion. According to the ABC TV News special Skeletons in the
Closet, the United States government acquired a real interest in About the Author:
Indian corpses. Ross Hamilton is a writer and investigator of ancient sites,
The Surgeon-General, in postCivil War 1868, requested that and lives in Cincinnati, Ohio. He is an initiate philosopher
the Army collect the skulls, utensils and weaponry of Native with a background in general science as well as spiritual sci-
Americans "as far as you are able to procure them". According ence.
to the report, these were to be sent to Washington, DC, as part of He is the author of The Mystery of the Serpent Mound (North
a program that studied the effects of modern bullets and other Atlantic Books, 2001), and is currently working on several
weaponry on human bodies. The collection of such remains, esti- projects including an upcoming book entitled A Tradition of
mated at 4,000, was taken mostly from grave and battle sites. Giants.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 173

 AND THERE WERE GIANTS...
by John Mount 2001
W
hat of the fossilised giant men-
tioned in the Strand magazine of
1895, whose 12-foot-2-inch body
was propped up for viewing against a 19th-
century railroad carriage, totally dwarfing
it? It's funny how these "finds" often dis-
appear and never again see the light of
day. Thankfully, a reporter took a pho-
tograph...
During a stormy BC military cam-
paign, the Israelite commander David
(already of giant-killing fame and later
to become king of the Israelites), with
the help of his army, fought a decisive
battle with a Philistine army that con-
tained a number of men of gigantic
stature, eventually killing several of
them. The biblical commentator men-
tions that while examining one of the
bodies of these giants, David's men
noticed some unusual characteristics:
And there was...a battle in Gath, a
city of the Philistines also known as
the City of Giants, where was [found
the body of] a man of great stature,
that had on every hand six fingers and
on every foot six toes...
(2 Sam 21:20)
174 NEXUS
In one of his books, Harold T. Wilkins
quotes excerpts from the publication
American Antiquities regarding the finding
of giant human footprints in solid rock at
the headwaters of the Tennessee River near
Braystown. The prints are unique in that
they contain six toes! One print more pro-
nounced than the rest is of a heel ball mea-
suring 13 inches (33 centimetres) across!
... in the many worldwide
references to giants, one often
comes across these strange
traits of six fingers and toes ...
It appears that these giant men in the dis-
tant, prehistoric past were leading their
horses along a muddy or clay track when
one of the horses must have slipped several
inches, causing a more pronounced imprint
of a hoof.
www.nexusmagazine.com
This particular hoofprint measured 8 by
10 inches (20 by 25 centimetres)!
According to G. H. Williamson in his
book, Road in the Sky, Talmudic and
Midrashic literature contains several refer-
ences to giants with double rows of teeth.
In fact, in the many worldwide references
to giants, one often comes across these
strange traits of six fingers and toes with
the occasional double row of teeth
thrown in. Perhaps these are the
"hallmarks" of true giants.
Abnormally oversized humans are
nearly always recognisable as such,
because their height is often gained at
the expense of their build (as in
giantism). Apparently, true giants
were also easily distinguishable by
their build, which (like normal
humans) was in balanced proportion
to their height.
There were several battles reported
between the early Israelites and for-
eign armies containing giants. It was
as though these giant men were used
as mercenaries by early Middle Eastern
civilisations.
At least one early Israelite account
describes the size of one of these giants as
well as the weight of some of their cap-
tured armour and weapons:
STRANGE Times 2006
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
"Goliath of Gath whose height was 6 and out after revenge, ascended the difference between a short giant and an
cubits and a span..." (1 Sam 17:4) Cordilleras in pursuit of the Inca but were abnormally large, well-built human.
The stumbling blocks in these old reports "dispersed" when they met the armies of the Perhaps it was the extra fingers and toes
are the different interpretations of the Inca king Ayataca Cuso. that gave them away.
Mediterranean cubit. It was known to vary It is noteworthy that giant-killing In March 1858, Commodore Byron of
between 18 and 21 inches. The biblical humans were somehow able to differentiate the French warship La Patrie during a visit
cubit is conservatively reckoned at 17.5 between humans with abnormal, excessive to Port St Julien in Patagonia had an inter-
inches (44.5 centimetres), representing the growth and bona fide giants. esting conversation with the chief of a 500-
distance measured from an adult's elbow to And because many of the giants them- strong tribe whose men were well over
the tip of the middle finger, which would selves were of varying sizes, one wonders seven feet tall; none of the women was
make Goliath in his stockinged feet at least what criteria were used for determining the under six feet tall.
9 feet 5.75 inches (2.9 metres) tall.
Another battle produced a captured breast-
plate of mail weighing 5,000 shekels (126
pounds or 57 kilograms) as well as a tro-
phied spear, which the commentator com-
pared to the size of a heavy "weaver's
beam". The spearhead, when weighed by
itself, tipped the scales at 600 shekels
(approx. 15 lbs or 7 kg). (1 Sam 17:7)
According to ancient literature, humans
and giants were rarely able to live together
in harmony. A manuscript called "The
Apocalypse of Baruch", a pseudepigraphi-
cal work written around AD 100 and pre-
served only in the sixth-century Syriac
Vulgate (and which seems a little unclear
in parts) appears to hint at the origin of
giants:
Men began as giants. These first
giants were very highly developed,
intellectually, artistically and physi-
cally: they had power over birds and
animals...they misbehaved and were
abolished by God, and ordinary men
took their place...

H. T. Wilkins, in his book Mysteries of

Ancient South America, recalls old
Peruvian traditions that tell of a time during
their long past when a race of giant men,
who came from the Pacific Ocean in ships,
invaded the lowlands of old Peru, forcing
the Inca high up into their mountain strong-
holds in the Andes.
These giants, say the Inca, were so huge
that "from the knee down, they were as tall
as a tall man". According to Wilkins, the
Inca say that these giant men "brought no
women with them", and because they were
too big for the Inca women they became
"homosexual", and "one day while they
were publicly polluting the marketplace
with these practices, a fire from heaven
rained down on them and consumed them".
Not all the giants perished in this "Sodom
and Gomorrahtype holocaust", according
to Wilkins. The survivors, apparently
totally ticked off by these traumatic events The photograph published in Strand Magazine in 1895.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 175

 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
The chief's body, according to the report,
was covered with "hideous paintings", and
the fellow was described as having a
"fierce countenance".
He also had the skin of a wild animal
thrown over one shoulder, which was
probably a symbol of officeand which is
strongly reminiscent of those drawings of
Hercules, portrayed in ancient
Mediterannean paintings, where he is
shown armed with a club and with the skin
of the Nemean lion draped over one
shoulder. Which is also probably similar to
that figure of a giant, which is carved into
the chalk in the English countryside of
Dorset. Research in recent years shows that
the Dorset giant, bearing a club, was also
once provided with something draped over
the shoulder or upper arm.
The giant teeth found in China and
known as "dragon's teeth" were found by
the German-Dutch palaeontologist G. H. R.
von Koenigswald around 1935 in a Chinese
herbal shop. They were studied by various
authorities who noticed that they bore a
striking resemblance to human teeth,
though around twice the size.
They calculated that the teeth belonged
to a hominoid around 11.8 feet (3.6 metres)
tall, which would have weighed in at 694
pounds (315 kilograms).
Von Koenigswald named the creature
Gigantopithecus blacki. The close resem-
blance to human teeth had led some palaeo-
morphologists at the time to speculate that
modern humans might have descended
from "giant" ancestors.
Modern science, however, was adamant
that the teeth are from "giant extinct apes".
As far as this writer knows, the only evi-
dence that science possesses of these crea-
tures at the moment is a few teeth, some
lower jawbones and possibly a piece of dis-
tal humerus. (Isn't it laughable that, ever
These giants, say the
Inca, were so huge that
"from the knee down,
they were as tall as a tall
man".
since Darwin's time, science has been try-
ing to make a man out of a monkey?
Now, faced with the possibility of giant
humans, they are trying to make monkeys
out of men!)
An extract and photograph from the
British Strand magazine of December
1895, reprinted in W. G. Wood-Martin's
book Traces of the Elder Faiths of Ireland,
mentions a fossilised giant that had been
found during mining operations in County
Antrim, Ireland:
Pre-eminent among the most extraor-
dinary articles ever held by a railway
company is the fossilised Irish giant,
which is at this moment lying at the
London and North-Western Railway
Company's Broadstreet goods depot,
and a photograph of which is repro-
duced here...
This monstrous figure is reputed to
have been dug up by a Mr Dyer whilst
prospecting for iron ore in County
Antrim. The principal measurements
are: entire length, 12 ft 2 in.; girth of
chest, 6 ft 6 in.; and length of arms, 4
ft 6 in. There are six toes on the right
foot. The gross weight is 2 tons 15
cwt.; so that it took half a dozen men
and a powerful crane to place this
article of lost property in position for
the Strand magazine artist.
Dyer, after showing the giant in
Dublin, came to England with his
queer find and exhibited it in
Liverpool and Manchester at sixpence
a head, attracting scientific men as
well as gaping sightseers. Business
increased and the showman induced a
man named Kershaw to purchase a
share in the concern. In 1876, Dyer
sent this giant from Manchester to
London by rail; the sum of 4 2s 6d
being charged for carriage by the
company, but never paid.
Evidently Kershaw knew nothing of
the removal of the 'show', for when he
discovered it he followed in hot haste,
and, through a firm of London solici-
tors, moved the Court of Chancery to
issue an order restraining the compa-
ny from parting with the giant, until
the action between Dyer and himself to
determine the ownership was disposed
of. The action was never brought to
an issue.

Unfortunately (as far as this writer

knows), nothing more was ever heard of the
Antrim giant or its owners.
References
The Holy Bible (King James Version)
W. G. Wood-Martin, MRIA, Traces of
the Elder Faiths of Ireland, Longmans,
Green and Co., London, 1902
H. T. Wilkins, Mysteries of Ancient South
America, Rider & Co., London, 1946
H. T. Wilkins, Secret Cities of Old South
America, Rider & Co., London, 1950
G. H. Williamson, Road in the Sky,
Neville Spearman, UK, 1959
(Source: Written by John Mount,
Queensland, Australia, email jemount@
globalfreeway.com.au)

176 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 Hidden Bases
and Unusual Beings
T he following articles touch on subject matter covered in other sections but, as I wrote in my
editorial, they fit into an "all of the above" category. They're of course well worth reading.
The first, titled "Britain's Secret War in Antarctica", discusses the covert mission that took place just
after the end of World War II by a few special operatives who discovered secret tunnels, a huge
subterranean Nazi base, advanced technology and a frightening snow "yowie"all in a part of
Antarctica which was/is not covered by snow and ice!
The next article as well as the Twilight Zone report deals with the "high strangeness" that is found
even today in and around the Solomon Islands. There are ancient stone ruins; tribes of giant yowies
living in and outside caves; tunnels connecting islands; UFOs seen entering and leaving openings in
mountains and the sea; obelisks bearing unknown writings; dwarf-like hominids; ETs and more.
Normally I would require independent corroboration of such claims before even thinking of
publishing them, and in the Solomon Islands case I had it. Over the years I had received letters and
information from various Westerners who had spent time deep in the hills of these islandsall
indicating almost unbelievable tales about giants and UFO bases that exist there. So when I received
comprehensive accounts from a military-trained Westerner who had lived with the native people of
these islands for extended periods of time, I was most excited because his accounts confirmed the
earlier reports.
It is worth pointing out that just as we went to print with these Solomon Islands articles, Australia
was sending troops to quell "warlords" in exactly those areas under discussion. I reckon a lot more
went on over there than just a few Aussie troops and police keeping law and order.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 177

 B RITAIN ' S S ECRET W AR
IN A NTARCTICA
At the end of World
War II, Britain sent
a covert mission to
investigate
anomalous activities
near its secret base
at Maudheim in
eastern Antarctica
and to seek out and
destroy a
subterranean Nazi
haven.
by James Robert 2005
Email:
james-robert@hotmail.co.uk
178 NEXUS
Introduction
I
n 1938, Nazi Germany sent an expedition to Antarctica with a mission to investigate
sites for a possible base and to make formal claims in the name of the Third Reich.
To prepare them for their mission, they invited the great polar explorer Richard E.
Byrd to lecture them on what to expect. The following year, a month after hostilities
had commenced in Europe, the Germans returned to Neuschwabenland to finish what had
been started, with many suggesting that a base was being constructed.
Nine years later, Richard E. Byrd, who by now had become an Admiral in the United
States Navy, was sent to Antarctica with the largest task force ever assembled for a polar
mission. In Admiral Byrd's own words, the mission (code-named Highjump) was
"primarily of a military nature".1 Many claim that the task force was sent to eradicate a
secret Nazi base in Queen Maud Land, which the Nazis had renamed Neuschwabenland
and which had never been explored as profoundly as the rest of the Antarctic. But, and
the big but is, the fact that Admiral Byrd spoke of "flying objects that could fly from pole
to pole at incredible speeds"2 and with well-documented German activity before, during
and in the immediate aftermath of World War II, one can't help but wonder whether there
is some truth in the Nazi Antarctica myth. Even so, could Operation Highjump and Byrd's
quotes have overshadowed the truth about British excursions in Antarctica by way of
misinformation, bringing attention to his mission and, by doing so, making sure that
history only remembered one mysterious Antarctic mission?
When the Antarctica mystery is mentioned, Britain is never given more than a footnote.
That fact is surprising in itself, especially as British forces were active in Antarctica
throughout the war and quite possibly took the initiative in dealing with the Antarctic
Nazi threat a whole 12 months before Operation Highjump was initiated.
Britain's activities on Antarctica, though less documented and more clandestine, are just
as intriguing as the supposed much-vaunted Operation Highjump. Unfortunately for
Britain, though victorious in the War, it was bankrupted and humiliated by the two new
superpowers. But Britain was in a position to regain some pride and surreptitiously upset
its supposed allies with the final, decisive battle against the surviving Nazis: a battle that
would never be recorded in the history books; a battle that would make its claims on the
continent more legitimate; but, most importantly, a battle that ended the war that it had
been compelled to wage.
Antarctic Postage Stamps: Claim or Commemoration?
On 1 February 1946, a set of postage stamps was released with His Majesty's royal
approval. The stamps caused international outrage and brought on a diplomatic crisis for
a war-weary Great Britain. The offending eight postage stamps commemorated Britain's
claim to the Falkland Islands Dependencies, but one of them also depicted a territorial
map of Antarctica that completely overlooked Chile's and most of Argentina's claims on
the continent. Now why would Britain, when the world economy was in such dire straits,
bring about an international crisis over an area of the world that appeared on the surface to
be totally devoid of life?
Many historians claim that Britain's postwar interest arose because, with Britain in dire
need of materials, Antarctica was deemed as the solution; the stamps were a way of mak-
ing Britain's claim valid. That assertion, however partially true, does not explain why
British forces, as part of Operation Tabalan, were on the continent throughout and in the
immediate aftermath of the War.
www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006
 Operation Tabalan was activated as a measure of monitoring was warned that my posting in Palestine would continue
German activities on the Antarctic continent. The known British indefinitely. I saw many of my fellow soldiers die. Thankfully, I
bases were mainly on the Antarctic Peninsula, in places such as received an order at the beginning of October 1945 to report to my
Port Lockroy and Hope Bay, and on the islands surrounding the commanding officer, as I had been selected for a mission so secret
peninsula, such as the secret bases on Deception and Wiencke that none of my senior officers knew why I had been requested to
Islandsthough some were set up on the continent. The most go to Gibraltar. I was not told why I had to report, but I went,
secret of all has not, and more than likely never will be, disclosed. hopeful that I would soon be discharged into Civvy Street. How
The base at Maudheim, near the Mhlig-Hoffmann Mountain wrong I was: I would be spending another Christmas on a war
Range in Queen Maud Land or, alternatively, Neuschwabenland, footing.
was so secret that it was never given a name or even a grid refer- Once I arrived on Gibraltar I was secreted away by a Major and
ence on official maps. informed that I would be sent to the Falkland Islands
Could the stamps have been released to commemorate a suc- Dependencies for further briefing and that I would be joined by
cessful mission in Queen Maud Land? The facts and rumours, as several other soldiers from other elite British forces. The mystery
well as a story dispensed by a thickened as we were all flown
wartime SAS officer, may shed to the Falklands under complete
some light on the many myster- silence. We were ordered to
ies of the Antarctic arenaa not even speculate about why
front that has been kept secret we had been selected and where
for 60 yearsand on a hostile we were going.
encounter that will never be Upon reaching the desolate
divulged to the public. and forbidding Falkland
Britain has suppressed so Islands, we were introduced to
many wartime events in the the officer who was leading the
name of national security that expedition and a Norwegian
now, even 60 years on, many who had served in the
people are still none the wiser Norwegian Resistance, an
about the secrets of the war expert in winter warfare who
from Rudolph Hess to the was going to be training us for
peace parties, to the even more the mission that we had no
sinister happenings including inkling about.
Britain's knowledge of the Nazi The Falklands is now consid-
extermination camps, the Irish ered the best-kept secret in the
Republican Army's flirtation British Army, and being posted
with Nazis, and the lesser there normally meant an easy
known secrets such as SS con- few years; however, things
centration camps on British soil were different in the 1940s
on Alderney in the Channel even more so for those who had
Islands. With just those few been selected with me.
listed, a pattern of suppression We were forced to undertake
is emergingand on some, a a gruelling month's training
total denial is normally forth- where we were prepared for
coming. Antarctica is no cold-weather warfare. From
exception. being plunged into the icy
With the passing of time, all Atlantic to facing the elements
those who served in the Neuschwabenland campaign are no in a tent on South Georgia, the training was arduous and there
longer with us. The last survivor gave me the following account seemed little sense in the madness that we were forced to
of the forgotten battle. I hasten to add that the story was told on undertake. However, after the month's training we were briefed
two separate occasions, 10 years apart, and there was not one dis- by a Major and a scientist, and as the mission was relayed to us
crepancy in either account. we all realised that there would be little chance of us all returning,
[Editor's note: We have deleted opening and closing quotation especially if the suspicions proved correct.
marks in the next section for ease of reading.] We were informed that we were to investigate "anomalous"
activities around the Mhlig-Hoffmann Mountains from the
The Neuschwabenland Campaign British base in Maudheim. Antarctica, so we were told, was

W hen Victory in Europe was announced, my unit was resting

in a cave in the former Yugoslavia. I was thankful that the
War had finally ended, though with war still being waged in the
Pacific and tensions rising in Palestine, we were warned that our
war could continue.
Thankfully, I was spared from participating in the war against
Japanbut alas, I was posted to Palestine where the influx of
Jews, allied with a rise in Zionist terrorism, was causing anguish
not only to the inhabitants of Palestine but also to the British forces
that were sent to stem the Jewish influx and quell the uprisings. I
"Britain's secret war". We were then briefed on British activities
in the South Pole during the war.
We sat intrigued as to what was being divulged; none of us had
heard anything so fascinating or frightening. It was not common
knowledge that the Nazis had been to Antarctica in 1938 and
1939, and even less known was the fact that Britain began to set
up secret bases around Antarctica in response. The one we were
to visit, Maudheim, was the biggest and most important as well as
the most clandestine Antarctic base of them all. The reason for its
importance was the fact that it was within 200 miles of where the

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 179

Nazis had supposedly built their Antarctic base. We had to operate under complete radio silence. We were alone,
We sat there stunned, but still the mystery deepened. We were with no back-up and no chance of retreat if our worst fears were
told about German activity in the Southern Ocean around confirmed.
Antarctica. We were also informed that an inestimable number of We approached the base wary of what was awaiting us, but
U-boats were missing and unaccounted for; but worse, some of when we got there the base appeared devoid of life, a ghost town.
those that had surrendered months after the War had ended fuelled Instantly, our suspicions were roused, but, just like all the previ-
even more speculation. ous campaigns I had fought during the War, we had a job to do
British forces had captured three of the biggest names in the and so our personal fears could not shroud our judgement.
Nazi partyHess, Himmler and Dnitzand with their captures As we split up to search the base, a trip wire was detonated and
Britain was given information that was not going to be shared a siren sounded, destroying the silence and startling the whole
with Russia or the United States. That information compelled force. A shout was soon heard, demanding us to identify our-
Britain to act alone, and we were spearheading that operation. selves, but the voice could not be targeted. With our guns raised
We were told in no specific terms what was expected of us and the Major introduced us to the voice, and then, thankfully, the
what Britain expected us to find on Antarctica. Britain had more voice was given a body. The voice belonged to a lone survivor,
than a strong suspicion that the Germans had and what he divulged made us more anxious
built a secret base and had spirited many of and had us wishing that there were more
the unaccounted Nazis away from the tur- troops amongst our ranks.
moil in Europe. The lone survivor claimed that in Bunker
Still, more and more revelations were
forthcoming. The summer before, we were
"We were informed One was the other survivor from the "tunnel"
trip, along with one of the mysterious Polar
told, the original scientists and commandos that we were to Men that we had heard on the recorded
had found an "ancient tunnel". Under
orders, the force went through the tunnel but
investigate 'anomalous' broadcast. Despite obstructions and
objections from the survivor, Bunker One
only two returned before the Antarctic activities around the was ordered to be opened. The survivor had
winter set in. During the winter months, the
two survivors made absurd claims over the
Mhlig-Hoffmann to be held back and his fear and anguish
panicked us instantly, and none of us wanted
radio about "Polar Men, ancient tunnels and Mountains from the to be the one to enter the bunker.
Nazis". Radio contact was finally lost in Fortunately, I was not selected to enter;
July 1945, and ominously for our
British base in that honour was bestowed on the
mission, going into the unknown, the Maudheim. youngest member of our unit. He pro-
last broadcast brought us all further ceeded inside, hesitating slightly as he
anxiety as we listened to the fear in the struggled with the door. Once inside, a
voice: "...the Polar Men have found "Antarctica, so we silence descended across the base, fol-
us!" was screamed before contact was lowed moments later by two gunshots.
lost. were told, was The door was opened and the Polar
After the radio broadcast was played, 'Britain's secret war'." Man dashed to freedom. None of us
we were then given a rousing speech was expecting what we saw, and the
from the Major who would be leading Polar Man had fled into the surround-
the expedition to investigate what had ing terrain so quick that only a few
happened. "We are to go to the base at token shots were fired.
Maudheim, find the tunnel, investigate Out of fear and awe at what we had
the enigma of the Polar Men and the seen, we all decided to go into the
Nazis and do what we can to make sure the Nazi threat is bunker. Go in we did, and two bodies were found. The soldier
destroyed." who had pulled the short straw was found with his throat ripped
When asked for questions, we all had so many, and thankfully out, and, more heinous, the survivor had been stripped to the
the answers were honest and direct. We were informed that bones.
evasive action was being taken because Britain was well aware of What we had witnessed demanded answers; and with our abject
US and USSR intentions in mounting their own expeditions, and anger at seeing one of our unit die within hours of our landing on
Britain did not want to risk the chance that the US or the USSR the continent, our anger was taken out on the lone survivor who
would discover the base and gain further Nazi technology. Both had warned us against opening Bunker One.
countries had a technological advantage over Britain because of The whole unit listened categorically to the Major's questions,
the scientists, equipment and research both countries had but it was the answers that were to provoke the most intrigue.
recovered. Nevertheless, Britain wanted to be the nation to The first question that needed answering was just what had hap-
destroy the menace because Britain viewed Antarctica as under pened to the other survivor, and how he had become trapped in
the British Empire's jurisdiction, and if the Nazis were there it was the bunker with that Polar Man. However, the lone survivor pre-
their duty and their desire to eradicate them first and thus deny ferred to start from the beginning, from when they had first found
both the USA and the USSR the propaganda value of fighting the the "tunnel". Whilst he narrated what had happened, the scientist
last battle of World War II. who had accompanied us scribbled down everything divulged.
We were flown to the pre-designated drop-off point which was It transpired that the area near the tunnel was one of
20 miles from the Maudheim base; snow tractors had already been Antarctica's unique dry valleys, and that was how they managed
despatched and were awaiting our arrival. After parachuting into to find the tunnel with such ease. Every one of the 30 personnel
the icy wilderness, full of fear and trepidation, we reached the at the Maudheim base was ordered to investigate and, if possible,
snow tractors and from that moment on we were on a war footing. find out exactly where the tunnel led.

180 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 They followed the tunnel for miles, and eventually they came to On hearing that, the Major issued the battle cry, and guard duty
a vast underground cavern that was abnormally warm; some of was set up whilst the Major and the scientist discussed, in private,
the scientists believed that it was warmed geothermally. In the just what we were to do next, even though it was obvious to the
huge cavern were underground lakes; however, the mystery deep- rest of us.
ened, as the cavern was lit artificially. The cavern proved so The next morning we were ordered to "investigate the tunnel",
extensive that they had to split up, and that was when the real dis- and for the next 48 hours we made our way steadily to the dry val-
coveries were made. ley and the supposed "ancient tunnel". Upon arriving in the dry
The Nazis had constructed a huge base into the caverns and had valley we were all amazed, for we had been told that Antarctica
even built docks for U-boats, and one was identified supposedly. was completely ice-bound and yet here we were in a valley that
Still, the deeper they travelled, the more strange visions they were reminded me of being back in the North African Sahara. We
greeted with. The survivor reported that "hangars for strange were forbidden from even approaching the tunnel until the tempo-
planes and excavations galore" had been documented. rary base camp had been erected; and whilst the men constructed
However, their presence had not gone unnoticed: the two the base, the scientist and Major investigated the tunnel.
survivors at the Maudheim base witnessed their comrades get After a few hours, they returned to the now complete camp to
captured and executed one by one. After witnessing only six of chronicle what they had seen and what our next plan of action was
the executions, they fled to the tunnel, lest to be. The tunnel was not an ancient pas-
they be caught, with the aim to block up the sageway at all, claimed the scientist,
tunnelthough "it was too late; the Polar although the Major added that the walls were
Men were coming", claimed the survivor. made of smooth granite and looked infinite.
With enemy forces hot on their tail, they We were informed that we would be able to
had no choice but to try to get back to the make our own minds up after we had rested
base so that they could inform and warn their "The cavern proved for the night.
superiors about what they had uncovered. Sleeping in Antarctica during the summer
They managed to get back to the base, but, so extensive that they months was difficult with perpetual daylight
with winter approaching and little chance of had to split up, and that covering the continent; but that night, sleep
rescue, they believed it was their duty to was even more difficult to come by with all
make sure the secret Nazi base was reported; was when the real the thoughts running through each of our
and so they split up, each taking a wireless
and waiting in separate bunkers. One of the
discoveries were made. minds about what we would find and just
when, or where, we would encounter the
survivors tempted one of the Polar Men The Nazis had Polar Man again.
into the bunker in the hope that they'd
believe only one had survived. The
constructed a huge Just before we were assigned our
times for guard duty, we were informed
plan worked, but to the detriment of his base into the caverns that we would be following the tunnel
life and to the radio. Unfortunately, the and had even built all the way"...to the Fhrer, if needs
brave soul in Bunker One had the only be".
fully operational wireless radio, which docks for U-boats..." That night our fears were confirmed,
was destroyed in the fracas. The other as the Polar Man did indeed return.
survivor had no option but to sit, wait However, this time no more casualties
and try to avoid going stir crazy. occurred [on our side], but the Polar
The mystery of who or what the Man was slain as he was lured to the
Polar Men were was explained, not camp. The scientist decided that the
satisfactorily but explained Polar Man was "human" but, it seemed,
nonetheless, as a product of Nazi had been able to produce more hair and
science; and the enigma of how the withstand the cold far more effectively.
Nazis were getting power was also explained, albeit not in The corpse, after a brief post-mortem, was stored in a body bag,
scientific terms. The power that the Nazis were utilising was by and with the cold could be preserved until a more meticulous dis-
volcanic activity, which gave them heat for steam and also helped section could occur.
produce electricity, but the Nazis had also mastered an unknown The next morning it was decided that two would remain at the
energy source because the survivor claimed: "...after what I tunnel's entrance with the corpse, the tractors, the equipment but,
witnessed, the amount of electricity needed is more than could be more fundamentally, the radio. The Major, leading the expedi-
produced, in my opinion, by steam". tion, needed the Norwegian for his expertise and also the scientist;
The scientist amongst the party dismissed most of what was the survivor, too, was critical for the mission's success. The rest
divulged, and rebuked the survivor for his lack of scientific edu- of us wanted to join them. I was selected with the other jubilant
cation and implied that his revelations "could not possibly be four who would be undertaking one of the most exciting and pos-
true". Though the scientist dismissed the survivor's claims, the sibly one of the most important expeditions in human history.
Major didn't. He wanted to know more about the enemy that we The two who were kept behind were disappointed, but their
were facing, but, more fundamentally, just what the Polar Man roles were just as vital to the mission's success as the nine who
was going to do next. The answer from the survivor did nothing would be traversing into the unknown.
to comfort us and provoked the scientist to announce that the sur- As the nine of us prepared to enter the tunnel, we made sure
vivor was "certifiable". Disconcerted is too weak a word to that we took enough ammunition and explosives to wage a small
describe how we felt when the survivor replied to the Major's war and hopefully destroy the base in its entirety, for that was our
questions about the escaped Polar Man's intentions: "He will mission: not to salvage, but to destroy.
wait, watch and wonder just how different we taste." We walked into the darkness, and thankfully after four hours of

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 181

walking we began to see some light in the far distance. However, what we had seen, heard or even encountered.
the light was still another hour away; and as each of us battled The tunnel was explained away as nothing more than a freak of
with our mind's questions of what we would uncover, we inched nature; "glacial erosion" was the scientist's specific term. The
forward. "Polar Men" were nothing more than "unkempt soldiers that had
Eventually we reached the vast cavern that was artificially lit. gone crazy"; the fact that they were German was never submitted
We were then led to where the survivors had witnessed the into the report, and any notion of the mission going public was
executions. The survivor stated it was as covert as one could firmly rebutted. The mission would never be made official,
possibly have wished for. though certain elements of the mission were to be leaked to the
As we looked over the entire cavern network, we were over- Russians and the Americans.
whelmed by the numbers of personnel scurrying about like ants, So my last Christmas of World War II was spent on the
but what was impressive was the huge constructions that were Antarctic continent in 1945, fighting the same Nazis that I had
being built. From what we were witnessing, the Nazis, it fought against every Christmas since 1940. What was worse was
appeared, had been on Antarctica a long time. The scientist jotted the fact that the expedition was never given any recognition, nor
down everything he could, drew diagrams the survivors any credit. Instead, the British
and took rock samples as well as the odd survivors were de-mobbed from the forces,
photograph. The Major, on the other hand, whilst the scientist and his report would soon
was more interested in how the base was to disappear, the mission never to be known
be destroyed without being caught by the about except by the select few.
Nazis present. That mission never made the history
After two days of vigilant reconnaissance, books, but the return mission in February
the scientist and Major decided on the targets 1950, conducted by a joint
for the mines. The mines were to be placed BritishSwedishNorwegian expedition that
all around the roof of the cavern, with other "The mission would lasted till January 1952, did.
targets on the to-do list such as the generator never be made official, The main purpose of the expedition was to
and the petrol dumps and, if possible and verify and investigate some of the findings
attainable, the ammunition dumps. though certain elements of the 193839 Nazi expeditions to
Throughout the day, mines were laid and Neuschwabenland.
more photos were taken; and with the odds
of the mission were Five years after our mission, Maudheim
of not being detected looking good, a to be leaked to the and Neuschwabenland were revisited,
hostage was taken, as well as proof of and that expedition had everything to
the Nazi base, the "Polar Man" and Russians and the do with the Neuschwabenland cam-
photographs of new, and quite Americans." paign, but, more importantly, with what
advanced, Nazi technology. we had destroyed. For the intermediate
When the mission to place the mines years between the missions, the Royal
that would destroy the base had been Air Force continuously flew flights
accomplished, as well as substantial over Neuschwabenland. The RAF's
proof of the base gathered, we headed official reason for their extensive
towards the tunnelbut, alas, we were flights was that they were searching for
spotted, and more of the Polar Men and suitable places to set up base camps.
a troop of Nazis gave chase. Upon However, one can't help but wonder.3
reaching the tunnel, we needed to put [The SAS officer's account ends
an obstacle in the way to slow down here. Ed.]
our enemy long enough for the mines
to detonate. Some mines were placed at the entrance to the tun- About the Author:
nel, and when the explosions were heard we were hopeful that not James Robert is a civil servant with an agency of the UK
just the base had been comprehensively destroyed but so, too, the Ministry of Defence, as well as a World War II historian and
enemy forces giving chase. We were wrong. writer. He has travelled extensively throughout North Africa
The mines did indeed close the tunnel, but, for those Nazis and and Europe to investigate mysteries of Britain's secret wars.
Polar Men behind, the chase was still on. In a fighting retreat, only With a family from a military background, and with German
three of the 10 escaped the tunnel: the Norwegian, the scientist and sources giving many so-called "myths" credence, he has set a
myself. The rest had fallen gallantly in making sure that some of personal mission to delve deeper into the strange, suppressed,
the party survived. little-known and anomalous activities that were conducted
Upon reaching the safety of the dry valley, enough mines were before, during and after the war against Germany. "Britain's
Secret War in Antarctica" has been taken from his forthcoming
laid to close the tunnel permanently. After the mines were deto-
book that will document some of his investigations.
nated, there was no evidence of any tunnel ever existing.
James Robert can be contacted by email at james-
Suspiciously, very little of the evidence unearthed remained.
robert@hotmail.co.uk.
Whether it had been lost accidentally or purposely, it mattered lit-
tle because the scientist had already made his and, ultimately, the Endnotes
mission's own conclusions. 1. Admiral Byrd's press release, 12 November 1946.
The camp was disbanded and we returned to the Maudheim 2. El Mercurio, 5 March 1947; Admiral Byrd interviewed by Lee van
base where we were evacuated and flown back to the safety of the Atta.
Falkland Islands Dependencies. Upon reaching South Georgia, 3. Former British SAS officer, documenting the 194546
we were issued with a directive that we were forbidden to reveal Neuschwabenland campaign.

182 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 T HE D RAGON S NAKE
A Solomon Islands UFO Mystery
This former RAAF
engineer's startling
experiences, along
with his knowledge
of the Solomon
Islanders' long
history of
encounters with
strange aerial craft
and alien beings,
sparked him to
search for hidden
UFO bases.
by Marius Boirayon 2003
PO Box 148
Eudlo Qld 4554, Australia
Email:
solomongiants@optusnet.com.au
Website:
http://www.thesolomongiants.com
STRANGE Times 2006
W
e had not long returned from the New Georgia group, where I had just bought
a beautiful tropical island with white sand beaches and coconut palms, and we
were desperately in need of new rental accommodation on Guadalcanal. My
best friend Joseph had been helping me find a house that was preferably out-
side the Honiara area. As there was a shortage of livable housing, it had almost come to the
point of taking what we could get.
Joseph told me of a house that he knew of at his village but he thought it wouldn't suit me
as I'm a white man. I told him to stop that kind of rubbish thinking and that we should go
and have a look. I knew of Joseph's village, but I couldn't place the house that he had been
describing to me as we drove the roughly 70-kilometre journey westward along the coast
from Honiara.
Upon arriving at Cape Esperance, Joseph pointed to the quaint little three-bedroom timber
house that was on the eastern extremity of the village. It had a cement floor and a gal-
vanised iron roof with an out-house near the grass-hut kitchen, and the most beautiful island
sea view that anyone could wish for. There was a tap and shower outside with perpetual
mountain spring water. It didn't bother me that there was no electricity, as I had a generator.
I made up my mind to take the house, as I didn't have too many options left. While I was
inspecting the house, the divorced woman who owned the house arrived, and so I formalised
an agreement to move in the next day.
Late the next afternoon, we arrived at the house with a six-tonne truck and proceeded to
unload all our possessions into the house. This attracted the attention of a good portion of
the village folk, as I was the only white man ever to have come to live in their area.
That night, after placing a few fluorescent lights around the house, I started up the genera-
tor and sat back with Joseph and a few new friends to relax and have a beer. Later that
night, when I was finding out a little more about the area, Joseph told me that I had to watch
out for the "Dragon Snake" that was in the area. "Dragon Snake! What #*# Dragon
Snake?" Just to hear the name of it put a shiver down my spine! They then told me that it
comes out of the mountains at night and flies around. They said that the Dragon Snake, with
its piercing red eyes, has been feared for generations. It was responsible for people going
missing and for killing people.
"What next?" I thought to myself. All I wanted to do was relax and do some fishing in a
nice, peaceful, tropical environment. Now I had to contend with some mythological Dragon
Snake. I thought no more of it and put it down to one of their superstitions, of which there
seemed to be plenty.
MY FIRST UFO SIGHTING
A few days went past as things started to settle down a little. I had become quite an
enthusiastic fisherman with my fishing rod, and had been pulling scores of beautiful reef
fish. Joseph was renowned by all in the village as being the best spearfisherman. One time
he decided to do some night spearfishing, as it was easy to do at night by torchlight. So I
decided that while Joseph was spearfishing, I would throw some lines in and see what kind
of fish I caught.
I was cleaning fish with Ci-Ci, another good friend of mine, when Joseph came out of the
water with his dugout canoe full of fish to add to our already large pile. While we were
inspecting his catch, Joseph suddenly shouted for our attention: "There! There! There!
The Dragon Snake! The Dragon Snake!" He was pointing to the right, down the beach.
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 183
 As I looked down the beach, I couldn't believe what I seeing.
About a kilometre away there was a very bright, luminous, white
object flying slowly over the water. I remember asking myself
whether I was really seeing it. I called out for my wife Miriam to
bring my binoculars. After focusing in on the starlike, brilliantly lit could produce a documentary about it with the submersibles they
object, I noticed that it was about 60-foot round and seemed to
make no noise. We watched it for a couple of minutes until it sub-
merged itself into the sea. Joseph told me to wait about 10 minutes
and I'd see it come back out againwhich it did! When it came
back out of the water, it was glowing twice as brightly as when it
went in. We continued to watch it with my binoculars as it returned
to the coast in the direction whence it had come and until it disap-
peared out of sight over the top of the coconut trees.
Somewhat startled by this experience, we went back into the
house and sat talking about this "Dragon Snake" until the early
hours of the morning. They told me that if you didn't see it one
night, you were quite likely to see it the next. They were right. In
fact, over a seven-month period, I lost count of these sightings
when they reached the 60 mark. So while we sat talking about this
object, I explained the structure of the Universe to Joseph and Ci-
Ci. I showed them my copy of a TimeLife book called The
Universe, with its space-type pictures, and said that these so-called
"Dragon Snakes" are what white men call "Unidentified Flying
Objects". They were absolutely amazed, as they had spent their
whole life fearing this thing with
superstition and having no real under-
standing of it. Yet, for that matter, I
was also a little fearful.
This sighting was the first of well My suspicions were right:
over 60 more to follow, during which the chiefs knew
time I investigated the UFO waterfall
lake base of northwest Guadalcanal One of the chief's brothers
and later the UFO bases of the central
east coast of Malaita and central
had been killed by it when
Small Malaita. This first sighting, he was only a little boy.
though, had completely changed my
mind about the existence of extrater-
restrials, and a little investigation
revealed that this so-called Dragon
Snake had been in the area for well over a century. I realistically
began thinking in terms of extraterrestrials inhabiting our planet.
My extensive investigation into the presence of extraterrestrials
on Guadalcanal and Malaita has revealed that these supposedly
"hidden to the eye" aliens have displayed unacceptable and
unfriendly behaviour towards the Guadalcanal and Malaita people;
indeed, there have been several outright abductions and murders.
Because of this, they can't be considered friendly. For example, the
grandfather of a good friend of mine was incinerated by one of
these UFOs around the early 1900s. Several independent sources
have verified this. Countless horrific stories can be heard through-
out these islands.
PLOTTING UFO ACTIVITY ON THE MAP
During the next two weeks, I saw the UFO three more times at
the same place as my first sighting. This made me question myself
several times as to what I was actually seeing. It also raised many
more questions. What was so interesting for the UFO down in the
sea where it was submerging all the time? And where did it go
when it wasn't flying around?
The part of the sea that was right in front of the village was
where the Allied Forces had encountered a Japanese fleet in a great
battle that resulted in the biggest loss of Allied ships during any
naval engagement in World War II. This battle included the
184 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
Australian heavy cruiser, the HMAS Canberra, and the American
heavy cruiser, the USS Chicago. I won't go into the sad details of
how they went down, but it was all a tragedy and many men lost
their lives. Actually, it would be a really good idea if someone
used in finding and documenting the wreck of the Titanic.
A few days later, Joseph and I went to Honiara to obtain a 23-
foot fibreglass boat with engine. While we were there, I went to the
historical archives to look up information about where these ships
had actually sunk. Much to my surprise, I learned that the UFOs
were submerging in exactly the same area where the HMAS
Canberra, the USS Chicago and other ships had sunk. This was no
mere coincidence, or at least I didn't think so.
At that time, I did not know there were several of these things
flying around. Why the UFOs had so much of an interest in these
old warships became a somewhat baffling problem for me at the
time. I do remember speculating about any remaining gunpowder,
but questioned myself as to why these aliens would have a need for
mere gunpowder. Somewhat curious as to all these perplexing
goings-on and mysteries, while still trying to maintain some form
of sanity, I formulated an ingenious plan. And so I went to the
nearby Department of Lands and purchased a 1:25,000 topographi-
cal map of northwest Guadalcanal.
Meanwhile, Joseph's wife had given birth to a boy, their 10th
childa remarkable achievement, I
thought, for a couple in their late 20s.
The child's christening was to be held
the following Sunday, and Joseph and
his wife had decided to name him after
a lot about it. me. It was Joseph's normal job to hold
the Sunday mass at the village church.
Lord knows why! Joseph was the
biggest rascal of them all! On this par-
ticular occasion there were five babies
to be christened, and so a white
Catholic priest from Honiara had been
booked to perform the ceremony. I
had bought two pigs from the Honiara
abattoir especially for this event and
sent an invitation to two chiefs from the area to come to my house
for the feast, which was to be held on the grass outside.
The christening ceremony went ahead as planned. The pigs had
been butchered and were cooking away in the hot stone oven when
the two chiefs and their company arrived. It was quite a large
turnout. The Catholic priest from town made a special effort to talk
to me and find out what religious denomination I was.
When he'd left, I made my way to the two chiefs and respectfully
introduced myself. As we were talking, I brought up the topic of
the Dragon Snake. My suspicions were right: the chiefs knew a lot
about it. One of the chief's brothers had been killed by it when he
was only a little boy. They told me several stories of deaths and
abductions, all of which confirmed to me that these UFOs are defi-
nitely not friendly. They may be friendly in other places in the
world, but certainly not here.
Excusing myself, I went to the house and then returned with my
local map and proceeded to ask them where the Dragon Snake's
"house" was located. Sure enough, they knew where it was! It took
them some time to become familiar with the map and finally agree
on what they were looking at. They then pointed out the place to
me: an unnamed mountain that makes up part of the mountain
range which includes nearby Mount Popori. This unnamed moun-
tain, which for the sake of convenience I eventually named "Mount
Dragon", is about eight kilometres inland as the crow flies. They
STRANGE Times 2006
told me of a big waterfall high up in the mountain, with a lake
beneath into which the water falls. They said that inside that lake is
where the Dragon Snake lives! A further study of Mount Dragon
revealed that there is a small lake in the mountain that is the begin-
ning of a river. These fellows had no idea of topographical map
language, but their descriptions seemed to have some credibility.
If what they told me was true, then it raised more questions.
What was at the bottom of this waterfall lake, and how many UFOs
were there? I had to stop speculating on answers to these questions,
as all of this was starting to sound a lot like a science-fiction movie
and I was beginning to question the sanity of what I was doing. On
many occasions it crossed my mind to tell somebodybut who was
there to tell, and who would believe me? Yet as incredible as this
story may seem, all you need do for any proof is go to northwest
Guadalcanal and ask a few of the locals. You'd be surprised at what
you find out.
CLOSE CALLS AND CULTURAL EVIDENCE
Early one morning, not long afterwards, Joseph came to the
house to tell me that a fisherman he knew was in hospital from
injuries he had sustained from a UFO two nights previously. He
was from a village three kilometres east of ours. After asking
Joseph what kind of injuries the fisherman sustained, he told me
that apparently he had burns to most of his body. We had all been
planning a trip to town, anyway, as
Miriam wanted to do some shopping
and see her family, so we decided to
go to the hospital and visit this
As if curious
fisherman. the fishermen, the UFO
After dropping Miriam off in town, hovered over
Joseph and I went to the hospital.
Following some enquiries as to where for a minute and then
the fisherman was, we arrived at his departed at incredible
bedside. He was covered in bandages
from head to toe and was in a great toward the island of
deal of pain, but doped up with pethi-
dine. Joseph began to speak with him
Santa Isabel.
in the Guadalcanal language to try to
find out exactly what had happened to
him.
He had been out fishing in his fibreglass boat at about 3.00 am,
when he saw the Dragon Snake flying along. In foolishness, he
started flashing his torch at it. That was when it flew over to him in
an instant and hovered overhead. Panicking, he started the motor
and took off to get away from the Dragon Snake, but it followed
him as he "zigzagged" his way back to shore. It was during this
short pursuit to the beach that it fired some form of light at him but
it only partially hit him. A later inspection of his 19-foot fibreglass
boat showed traces of scorching upon some of the boat's interior
paint.
He said that when he drove his boat up the beach and ran into the
bush, the Dragon Snake followed him to where he was hiding behind
a tree and hovered above. When he moved around to the other side
of the tree, it also went around to the other side. It was then that he
literally got down on his knees and began to pray to God with his
hands clasped in front of him. With that, the Dragon Snake moved
on. After that, he stumbled his way back to his village and was taken
to hospital.
It was an incredible story, but true. He definitely had no reason
to be lying. These kinds of UFO encounters have happened on
numerous occasions over the past century but, strangely enough,
the Solomons being the way they are, reports have not been taken
seriously.
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
After leaving the hospital, we went over to my in-laws' house to
pick up Miriam. I began discussing the matter of the so-called
Dragon Snake with my father-in-law, John, and explained how
some of the white men believe that aliens from other worlds are the
ones responsible for driving this type of flying vehicle. When I
explained to John what they were commonly thought to look like
four-foot tall with big head, big eyes, four fingers, transparent skin,
etc.he told me there was a book in the Solomon Islands Cultural
Museum with pictures describing this sort of being. Somewhat sur-
prised, I asked John if we could duck into town so that he might
show me this book, which he agreed to do.
Upon arriving at the museum and after a few directions to this
book, there it was! This 15-page book had 14 detailed hand-drawn
sketches of aliens just like the ones we are all used to seeing on
television. An islander had compiled this short collection of draw-
ings for the museum from different eyewitness accounts of these
strange-looking creatures. There was an initial descriptive verse
saying that the drawings were of some Solomon Islands mythologi-
cal beings. What I wanted to know was: how could the Solomon
Islanders know anything about these kinds of aliens, when 99.9 per
cent of them had never had any significant type of exposure to
white man's media? Most of the old tribal people still thought that
the stars were caused by pinpricks in the sky and that the Earth was
flat, so how could these pictures of alien types be explained? At the
time, this became another little baf-
fling mystery to me.
about each of We picked up Miriam and on the
drive back home I asked Joseph to tell
me about the time when he, Ci-Ci and
each of them his brother Ben had encountered the
UFO while out fishing. He said that
the three of them were in their dugouts
speed at about midnight when they saw the
UFO. Initially, they were each
separated by about 50 metres. As if
curious about each of the fishermen,
the UFO hovered over each of them for
a minute and then departed at
incredible speed toward the island of
Santa Isabel. By the time all three had finally reached shore, they
were spread out over a kilometre's distance along the beach.
Although Joseph described the story as being funny, there was a
serious side to it.
REALITY SINKS IN
During the following weeks, I pondered on all of the previous
weeks' happenings. I realised that I was most probably the first
human being to have been in the position to have experienced all
these phenomena, and was able to understand the significance of
the unique circumstances in which I had found myself.
I was the first person in the area who'd ever realised the
similarities between UFOs and these Dragon Snakes. Also, to my
knowledge, I must have been the first white man to speculate on the
possible location of a hidden Dragon Snake/UFO basethough I
needed to do further investigation to confirm my suspicions. These
kinds of unusual realisations were starting to take their toll on my
keen sense of logic, but the reality of it all was that these unexpected
events had actually occurred. Prior to these sightings, I was
somewhat sceptical about the existence of UFOsbut my position
had now dramatically changed.
I also realised the possible consequences of investigating this
matter any further. Some of these were very positive, but some
were also extremely negative. One of these negatives was the
NEXUS 185
impact on my precious well-being. I had initially only gone to the quite agitated by my actions, and a heated discussion followed.
Solomons to enjoy an early, youthful retirement and certainly had Joseph and I left at 8.00 pm to travel to our vantage position. We
not expected to be chasing UFOs. But as a former military man, I knew that the UFO had the habit of appearing at around 10.00 pm
couldn't stop thinking about the fact that this UFO was continually or 3.00 am. After parking the car in the bush, with torchlights shin-
coming and going near ships that had been involved in a great battle ing we climbed up to the top of the mountain. This turned out to be
where thousands of men had lost their lives in the cause of freedom. a perfect position as we had a 270-degree view of the area.
It seemed as if this UFO was robbing graves. This weighed heavily Because of the orientation of the mountain, we faced east. With a
on my mind for weeks. clear view of the sea to the left of us and the valley's entrance to the
One night, though, while I was sitting fishing, my indecision right, there was no way that we were going to miss seeing the UFO
changed. I had been watching the UFO submerge into the sea near when it made its appearanceand we didn't.
the wreck of the USS Chicago and then surface again shining more Having sat up half the night, watching and waiting and having a
brightly. I had my binoculars fixed well on it when I saw the lights few beers to pass the time, at 2.35 am we saw the first glimmer of
of a ship that was travelling toward my direction. From the the UFO's light leaving the valley's entrance. There was an air of
trigonometric perspective, the UFO couldn't see the ship because of excitement between me and Joseph. While training my binoculars
the point that was shielding its view. on the UFO, I noticed that it was travelling
However, I had both the UFO and the ship in toward our direction at a fair rate of speed,
my field of view. After about 30 seconds, which we estimated later to be about 100 knots.
when the UFO did see the ship it instantly
vanished. The UFO didn't seem to go
We had been watching We had been watching it approach us for close
on a minute when it came past at an estimated
anywhere; it simply vanished as if it had it approach us for height of 300 feet, half a kilometre away. No
turned off its lights. I took my binoculars from close on a minute sooner had this UFO passed by than it took an
my eyes. I was not sure if the craft had instantaneous 45-degree turn to the left and then
instantly accelerated or had somehow cloaked when it came past at accelerated away at phenomenal speed. I took
itself. Yet it seemed that the UFO didn't mind an estimated height the binoculars from my eyes, and we watched
the indigenous people seeing it, but it did mind the UFO's light diminishing over the horizon
when someone saw it who would possibly of 300 feet, half a within seconds while it was still travelling at
know of its real identity. If there's one thing I kilometre away. near sea level.
hate, it's sneakiness! This whole episode was a mind-fathoming
In any case, I made up my mind right
No sooner had this experience, even when I think back on it
then and there to gather intelligence on UFO passed by than it today, seven years later.
this so-called Dragon Snake by doing took an instantaneous All our efforts had paid off. This sight-
some reconnaissance on its movements. ing confirmed to me the information that I
Switching into soldier mode, I went to 45-degree turn to needed to know. This UFO definitely did
sleep formulating my plan. the left and then come from somewhere up that valley!
My subsequent investigation into the This was the first time that the information
UFO's ability to cloak itself revealed that accelerated away at the two chiefs had given me had started to
this characteristic was commonly known phenomenal speed. be proved correct.
by all within the area and had become At that time, there was only one other
part of the superstition about the Dragon course of action left for me: I had to make
Snake. There are just too many stories an expedition up the valley to Mount
about the Dragon Snake's sudden Dragon and try to document this UFO on
"disappearance" to discuss here. film. I was extremely under-funded for
the manner in which I wanted the expedition to proceed, as most of
EXPEDITION TO MOUNT DRAGON my money was tied up in essential assets and I had been living off
The next morning I went up to Joseph's house to tell him of my my fortnightly military pension. Even though I had most of the
plan. My intention was to place ourselves at night, high up in a equipment necessary to commence, I was still short of a good video
panoramic position so that we could familiarise ourselves with the camera that could take pictures at night. I had a Kodak Instamatic,
UFO's movements. With the map out, we began to study the area but it was useless for night work and certainly was not the calibre of
for possible positions. camera that I required for this job. I was in a catch-22 situation. I
From where "Mount Dragon" was situated, there was really only couldn't borrow a camera; there was only one white man I knew
one way to the coast that the UFO could take without being detected well enough to ask, and he didn't have a video camera, anyway. As
flying over mountains. That was via a five-kilometre-long valley the weeks went past, every time I saw the UFO I became progres-
that runs in a northward direction past Mount Dragon. Earlier sively more frustrated about my video camera situation.
discussions with some of the people living a few kilometres east in One morning at 3.00 am, a couple of weeks later, Joseph and I
that direction had well confirmed this to me. After searching the were on the grass outside the house, husking coconuts around a fire,
area for a suitable position that afternoon, we chose an accessible when we noticed the UFO. As we watched it, we observed that it
800-foot mountain that had all the requirements we needed. And so was slowly moving in our direction. It started to get closer and
we went home to prepare for what was becoming a military mission closer, and it seemed to us that if it continued on the path it was on
for me. it would overfly us. As it progressively came even closer, we
The next day, we gathered all the equipment we thought was started to move to the door of the house. Both Joseph and I were
required. I also loaded my 30-shot, 7.62-mm and my shotgun to standing at the door when it flew over the nearby trees and over the
take along just in case. There was also the danger of being gored top of the house. The brilliance of its white light radiated the whole
by wild pigs, of which there was no shortage. My wife became area as if we were standing amidst the light of a dozen arc welders

186 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

at once. This was the first time that I could clearly see the vehicle's
sphere with my naked eye. It made no noise as it eerily passed over
us. In fact, at the time we made audible comments to each other
about what was happening. After it went by, we both ran out to see
it disappearing over the trees further on. Joseph had experienced
this sort of thing before, but I hadn't.
After the reality of what had happened sank in, Joseph and I
decided that we would go to Mount Dragonwith video camera or
not. It was in my mind to confirm whether this mountain waterfall
lake was really the UFO's base.
Around that time, a melancholy feeling of futile inadequacy and
powerlessness started to dominate my thoughts, as though I was
carrying around a heavy weight on my shoulders. This was due to
my constant questioning of the reality of it all, and also because I
allowed my thoughts to be weathered down because of my desper-
ate need for a good-quality camera. I could not explain this to any-
one, as there was no one I could explain it to who could understand.
It was like being lonely amongst a
crowd of a thousand people. I went
through a time of considerable self-
examination.
Strangely, I remember thinking to ...if there were ever a place
myself that if I ever happened to write
all of this down one day, I should
that one
remember that particular time "UFO Headquarters",
it would have to be
SUBTERRANEAN UFO BASES
ON MALAITA central Malaita.
I would like to share some signifi-
cant further research from my expedi-
tions to Malaita in 1996, 1997 and
2002. Contrary to popular belief,
NASAor whoever that mob wasfirst made contact with the
occupants of the subterranean UFO base in central east Malaita in
1961. This is how they began to gain what partial technology they
have today. It was through blackmail. This happened because
when the great geologist Mr Gropher was doing his few expeditions
in the area between 1958 and 1960, he saw these UFOs and then
reported back to the UK (the ruling colonial power at the time)
about them.
Apparently, in 1961, a white man who claimed to be from NASA
came to that part of the island and asked for assistance from my
wife's relatives to take him to the UFO subterranean base entrances,
which they did. I am the only white man ever to have married a
woman from Kwaio, which is in that area. This NASA guy was
gone a week and then returned, asking my wife's relatives for fur-
ther assistance to take him back to these places.
There is a 50-metre-diameter, bottomless circular reef in amongst
the surrounding 10-metre-deep coral reef a few miles north of Kwoi
Island (which is on the border of the Kwaio and Kwara'ae tribes)
and south of Namo'ere'ere in central east Malaita. Singalanggu
Harbour is slightly further south. UFOs can be seen going in and
out of that reef virtually every night.
My friends like fishing down this UFO hole during the daytime
because it saves them from having to go out into the danger of the
ocean and because there's a plentiful supply of big ocean-type fish
that can be caught in its depths. They have let down over 200
metres of 100-pound line and still haven't been able to hit the bot-
tom. I always think of this hole as having been made by a huge
spaceship that hovered above it and shot a big laser into the crust of
the Earth, for whatever reason!
On mainland Malaita, about three to four miles directly inland
from that circular reef entrance is a lake which has two connected
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
entrances/exits. When the boys are out fishing at night, they see the
UFOs going in one entrance and coming out the other. A UFO
coming out of this lake at dusk incinerated my good friend's grand-
father, and everyone in the area knows about it. The aliens have
instilled fear in these people for generations, and many people have
gone missing.
In the Kwaio and Kwara're areas, there are three entrances in
their jungle mountains that I know of where these "ball of
light"type UFO vehicles can be seen entering and exiting. It is my
belief that these entrances are not individual bases but are all con-
nected, making up one big UFO base under the island. I may be
wrong, but I also believe that one of the many reasons why they are
there is that, for reasons of their own, they are mining a very rare
type of gemstone under this kimberlite rock volcanic island.
The gemstones which my wife's relatives possess have a far high-
er specific gravity than that of diamonds, and a refractive index
such that when you put the stone in light you see your mirror image
in the centre of the stone. I once had a
32.4 carat "ET stone" with these char-
acteristics. There are some old folk-
lore stories supporting the interest in
these unique stones.
could call Furthermore, as there are many rem-
nants of the Ramo civilisation that can
be found on top of the island and the
aliens underneath, there is every
chance there is a connection. And that
goes for on Guadalcanal, too.
The waterfall lake UFO base of
Small Malaita (south Malaita), where I
have also witnessed their activities, is
easy to find. Just ask the locals, but,
heading north up the passage with Small Malaita on your right,
about three kilometres from Affiou, the main town, and about a
kilometre up the jungle mountain is their base entrance, where they
can be seen entering and exiting nearly every night and also brazenly
and casually flying along the passage.
Many Solomon Islanders have told me of flat stingray-type UFOs
with big round lights underneath them that hum as they go along.
They sometimes see them flying low over the jungle and surfacing
out of the sea near where they are fishing. The UFOs have landed
near villages, and the (white or black) people who get out of them
have strange grey uniforms, not seen anywhere else in the world.
You can make your own deductions there.
Nevertheless, if there were ever a place that one could call "UFO
Headquarters", it would have to be central Malaita. Mind you,
these are only the ones I know of. Goodness knows what else there
is in the rest of the Solomon Islands.
About the Author:
Australian Marius Boirayon is the son of the World War II central
France maquis (resistance) leader, and grew up in Mount Hagen
in the Papua New Guinea Highlands. Following a career in the
Royal Australian Air Force and as an aircraft/helicopter engineer
working in outback Australia, he decided in 1995 to go to the
Solomon Islands to live.
Marius Boirayon is raising funds for an expedition to the
Solomon Islands to investigate UFO and other mysteries (see his
article on the Giant Races of the Solomon Islands in Twilight
Zone follows).
He can be contacted by mail at PO Box 148, Eudlo, Qld
4554, Australia, by email at solomongiants@optusnet.com.au,
or via the website http://www.thesolomongiants.com.
NEXUS 187
 GIANT RACES STILL EXIST IN
THE SOLOMON ISLANDS
by Marius Boirayon 2003
S
cience is a progression of discoveries,
and this is definitely one of the bigger
ones that we will have for a while.
I'll get into some facts about the Giants of
the Solomon Islands by using the Giants of
Guadalcanal first as an example.
The Giants of Guadalcanal live inside the
huge tropical rainforest jungle mountain
ranges of Guadalcanal. They have vast
cave systems running the length of the
entire island. I have come across many
Guadalcanal people who believe these
Giants can go from east to west through
these cave systems without seeing the light
of day, and many believe that their popula-
tion numbers in the thousands.
The Guadalcanal Islanders also believe
there is a huge city of them underneath the
big mountains of the island. Mount Tatuva
is definitely one of this city's main
entrances; and if anyone ever wished to
film these Giants, the villages closest to the
mountain, where they are also seen
regularly, is a good starting point. But that
is not required, because they are all over
the place and are seen on a daily basis
somewhere on the island.
To my understanding, there are three dif-
ferent species or types of these Giants. The
188 NEXUS
larger and more commonly seen are over
10 feet tall, but I have come across numer-
ous islander accounts with evidence which
supports that they grow much taller than
that. These Giants have very long brown
or reddish hair, and when they want to have
a good look at you they pull it aside from
their face with one hand. They have a pro-
truding double eyebrow, bulging red eye-
balls, a flat nose and a wide-gapped mouth.
From the large hairy type, they range down
in size with lessening amounts of body
hair. The smaller versions, although bigger
than normal human beings, are like wild
men living in the jungle and are not as
hairy as the big ones. This is the way the
Guadalcanal Islanders describe them.
Invariably when they see these small Giant,
half-human people, they make efforts to
kill them. These smaller versions are lower
down in the Giants' social order, living pre-
dominately outside their cave systems in
the jungle, although all three types are
found in the island's jungle.
I must point out that the Solomon
Islanders don't understand that the Giants
are something big to the rest of the world.
Whether by intentional design or not, it is
appropriate that the Solomon Islands' slo-
gan is "The Place That Time Forgot".
Guadalcanal is rich in golda fact that
the Europeans discovered centuries ago.
Thirty years ago, various gold mining
www.nexusmagazine.com
companies started negotiating with the
traditional landowners with memoranda of
understanding in order to capitalise on this
gold. A succession of failed attempts
followed, until recent years when Ross
Mining broke through with a 3% deal for
the indigenous people.
In 1998, at Gold Ridge in central north-
ern Guadalcanal where the mine was being
built, they got going with their bigger type
of mining bulldozers pushing in roads and
clearing the mine area. The mine borders
the Giants' territory, and it would appear
that the Giants are quite territorial. On one
particular occasion, one of these huge bull-
dozers broke down, with one of the pins on
the blade attachment rendered useless. As
it was late in the afternoon, they decided to
drop the blade there and take the bulldozer
back to the workshop to do the repairs
overnight so they could continue the next
day.
When they returned the next morning,
the blade had disappeared. All the boys
became confused. How could such a heavy
object vanish? Mind you, we're talking
about 10 tonnes plus! So they started
scouting around in the bush and happened
to notice gigantic footprints, around three
feet in length, close by where they'd left the
blade. They found the blade some 100
metres away on a small hill. From further
footprint investigation, they deduced that
STRANGE Times 2006
 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
the Giants had not carried it there but had window to a tree, the Premier said, "About Luti Mikode is well known by the people
thrown it, or had got it there some other that high"which I estimated to be over 15 around Guadalcanal as "the Chief of the
way. feet and which would be consistent with Giants". The story about how he changed
Some years ago, as a retired helicopter the 34-foot-long footprints they had the Giants' attitude about eating the
pilot/engineer I was asked by the chief heli- described. Guadalcanal people about a century ago is
copter pilot of an American fishing fleet Apes and monkeys cannot breed with just extraordinary. Luti Mikode's educa-
which had helicopters to look after their Homo sapiens. So where do I think the tion of the Giantsto the effect that the
spare parts requirements, as Australia is Giants came from? I believe they are a Guadalcanal people had hearts, minds and
closer to the Solomons than Guam. The surviving species of hominoid that had feelings like themselves, and were not to be
job lasted six weeks and I was handsomely branched off well before Neanderthal man eatenresulted in inter-clan wars amongst
paid for my little effort. and developed through evolution to be the Giants. I have recorded this widely
The office I set up was just opposite the what they are today. The Guadalcanal peo- known and most fascinating story and have
old Guadalcanal provincial headquarters, ple also believe that the Giants were there proven it to be true.
and at lunchtime I would sometimes go before they were. Apparently their gene The Guadalcanal people's language and
across the road and have a few beers there pool allows them to breed with the local the Fijian language are very close. There
with the then Guadalcanal Premier and the people. are over a hundred words in common,
Finance Minister, Victor. It was during Why are they so secretive and meaning that a Guadalcanal person can go
one of these lunchtimes that they told me universally so shy about being seen or to Fiji and speak Fijian within a week and
of an encounter with Giants that they'd had known about? I'm sure that within the vice versa (as my good friend and partner
some months beforehand. Both the Peter Casi found out when he and his
Premier, who is now a national min- band of musicians did a tour there).
ister, and Victor, who is again a The Guadalcanal Giants' language
Guadalcanal minister, had decided to Ezekiel Alebua, a once is very similar to the dialect of the
go to Gold Ridge to survey the area Guadalcanal people.
of the proposed gold mine. In mid- Prime Minister and the previous It is well known that Giants do
afternoon they got into their twin-cab Guadalcanal Premier, told me of a not like fire, possibly because of
Toyota Hilux and drove up there. their long hair. Some months ago,
It's quite a drive, and after passing burial cave in east Guadalcanal that Ezekiel Alebua told me of an inci-
a few villages on the way they his father took him to when he was dent that happened on the
arrived at the mine area. A bulldozer Weathercoast, south Guadalcanal,
had carved out a road, but, as it rains
a child. Within that cave, there is a in 2000 during the tension.
frequently, the road around the side perfect Giant skeleton laid out that Five Tangarare men had gone
of a hill had become slippery and the is around 15 feet in length. hunting pig with their bows and
Hilux slipped off the road's edge and arrows, and during their hunt they
became bogged. They made some lost track of time. As it was getting
effort to get the 4WD vehicle back late and the weather was ominously
up onto the road, but then decided to turning to rain, they decided to
walk back to the last village they had next decade we'll find out the answer to build a sago palm hut quickly and camp the
passed and get a bunch of boys to come this question. night. They were sitting around a fire with-
and help them pull it out. It is my belief that the reason why the in the hut, with the rain pelting down out-
Obtaining 30-odd men, they walked Solomon Islanders' population is far side, when a huge hand and arm came
back. As they were rounding the last cor- smaller than it should be is because the through the hut's wall. An inquisitive
ner from where the 4WD was bogged, they Giants of the islands considered the local Giant had leaned over the hut and was feel-
saw their vehicle back up on the road with people as food to be eaten. ing around for what was inside. The five
two huge Giants standing there, one in Eyewitnesses who have been captured men started screaming and using sticks
front of it and other behind. The first reac- and released have told me that it is just like from the fire to beat the monstrous hand
tion for all of them was to run away, daytime inside the mountains. There is a away. Horrified, they ran straight through
screaming in absolute fear. They told me lighting system within the Giants' cave the back wall of the hut, into the darkness
that when they got the courage up some dwellings that has no obvious light source, of the bush. When they found each other
half-hour later, they returned to find the such as bulbs and lamps. the next morning down on the coast, they
Giants had left. Guadalcanal and Malaita have literally realised they had dispersed several kilome-
I asked how tall the Giants were. They hundreds of caves with Giant artefacts tres apart.
told me that the taller of the two was the within. Ezekiel Alebua, a once Prime There is a World War II mystery that has
one that had lifted the front of the vehicle Minister and the previous Guadalcanal never been solved about why initially there
up onto the road. They said that when they Premier, told me of a burial cave in east were no Japanese to resist the Allied Forces
inspected the footprints, they could see that Guadalcanal that his father took him to at Red Beach and Henderson Airfield.
each Giant had picked up the vehicle by when he was a child. Within that cave, This was uncharacteristic of the Japanese
putting one foot on the road and the other there is a perfect Giant skeleton laid out who, on other island campaigns, had
near the vehicle. Pointing out through the that must be around 15 feet in length. always fought to the very last. When the

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 189

 THE TWILIGHT ZONE
Allied Forces arrived, they were expecting There is also evidence of a lost South be found in the 1,000-square-kilometre
to lose one in two men, but instead there West Pacific civilisation scattered across area of tropical jungle mountains west of
was no one to be found. different parts of Malaita. Around a moun- Mount Popomanaseu.
At The Borderline, very near Mount tain near Mount Mala in north Malaita's It is my dream that one day soon these
Austin, further up the road past the interior is a perfectly fitted large stone remarkable people will be recognised and
Japanese Memorial there are three block wall and path spiralling around the that we may all benefit from the
Guadalcanal tribes. The Simba is one of mountain. This path leads to a flat area on knowledge.
those tribes, and living not far from them is top of the mountain, where another large
an old Giant couple, a male and a female. stone block wall separates to a higher split- About the Author:
Any of the tribes up that way will tell you level flat area where an "altar" can be Marius Boirayon was born in Australia
all about them; it's common knowledge. found. Some hundred metres further on is and raised from the age of five in the
The area is rich with many stories per- a burial site that has a perfectly flat, Highlands of Papua New Guinea. He
taining to the local tribes' tumultuous his- approximately 18 x 6 x 1foot stone upon completed his senior education in
torical relationship with the Giants, but so it. The bush people further away from that Queensland and then joined the Royal
is everywhere else on Guadalcanal and, for area say that a Ramo of great importance is Australian Air Force (RAAF).
that matter, everywhere else in the buried there. There are also hieroglyphic After service in the RAAF, he spent
Solomon Islands. inscriptions chiselled into these stone block some years working for various compa-
The Giants inhabit all the larger islands walls. nies flying mainly in the outback of
of the Solomons, but they are known by In Kwaio, a place where my wife is Australia as an aeroplane/helicopter
different names on each of these islands. from, obelisks with strange inscriptions pilot engineer. In 1995, he decided to
However, "Moo-Moo" (like the cow noise) upon them can be found deep in the bush. go to the Solomon Islands to live.
is the universal Solomon Islander name for In an area of Kwara'ae, north of Kwaio, Marius is currently in Australia raising
these huge people. there is a large burial place in the jungle funds for an expedition to the Solomon
Choiseul, an island 300 kilometres long with thousands of Giant Ramo skeleton Islands. Interested persons can contact
by 80 kilometres wide at the western bones scattered upon the ground. A hut in him by mail at PO Box 148, Eudlo, Qld
extremity of the Solomons, apparently has one village not far from this area has as one 4554, Australia, by email at
just as many Giant people as Guadalcanal of its main support poles a Ramo femur solomongiants@optusnet.com.au, or
has living in its interior. When you bone measuring nearly eight feet in length! via the website
observe the map, you'll notice there is not On Guadalcanal, the Giants are common http://www.thesolomongiants.com;
one village in the interior of Choiseuland knowledge to all of the local people, and alternatively, they can contact his
there is a very good reason for that. due to past interactions they play a major colleague John Mapson by email at
The island of Santa Isabel has big Giants part in the history, culture and folklore of mapsun@bigpond.com.au.
still living there in two different areas, but the people. The Guadalcanal Giants can
their population is far
fewer than that of
Guadalcanal. Central
northeast and central north
are the two areas where
they can be found on that
island, but just ask anyone
there and they will steer
you in the right direction.
Makira, which is east of
Guadalcanal, has only the
small, super-strong dwarf-
like Giants, which can also
be found on Guadalcanal.
In 1996, there was a front-
page picture of one of
these four-foot "Chowa-
Chowa" in the Solomons
Star newspaper.
Malaita has a very rich
history with these giant
people. The Ramo of
Malaita are the same as the
Giants of Guadalcanal,
although reportedly
culturally different.

190 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 The Crop Circles Conundrum
E very summer they appear, and they have been spreading far beyond the fields of England. These
mysterious geometric formations now appear each summer on more and more fields across Europe
and now the United States and Canada. Sure, some are man-made, but these look so obviously fake
from both the air and the ground (in terms of their clumsy execution, lack of symmetry and so on).
Researching all aspects of the crop circle mystery is challenging. However, most of the hard-core
information has been put into the public domain, e.g., evidence of biochemical changes in the soil
and plants, bent stems and weird electromagnetic effects, so people can study this info and come up
with a variety of opinions. The truth is that no single explanation has arisen that can account for all
aspects of the mystery.
I have made the following observations about these so-called "crop circles".
These formations are not the result of something physically sitting on the field, crushing the
ground and vegetation. The earth is not indented as a result of any weight having been placed on
top of it.
Some formations have appeared inside high-security areas, e.g., areas under surveillance with
infrared or motion-detector cameras.
Reports of complex crop formations have been found in records going back hundreds of years,
ruling out the theory that a bored secret satellite operator is engaging in high-level graffiti (pardon the
pun).
Some crop circles have been formed or completed without being noticed, even though people
were in the same fields doing measurements at the same time.
Some formations have produced a strange effect upon video cameras, camera batteries, mobile
phones, etc., often rendering the equipment useless.
In some formations, both the soil and plant stems show evidence of biochemical changes.
Eyewitnesses who claim to have seen circles being formed are rare, but they all report strange
balls of light flying around at high speed, leaving a vast complex formation that was created within
seconds.
Many of the formations believed to genuine can be repeated as eidetic formations using cymatics
(look it up; I don't have room to explain it here, save to say that sounds have "shape" if you set up a
system to express it).
The whole subject is vast and ever changing. For example, a year or two ago, several researchers
decided that man-made crop circles (i.e., the fakes) would not exhibit strange electromagnetic effects
and anomalies, whereas the formations not made by cheeky humans (i.e., the "real" formations)
obviously did. So they set out to prove their theory by making some formations and testing them for
anomalous EM effects and behaviours. Imagine their shock and surprise when they discovered that
their own man-made, hoaxed formations did put out the reported strange EM effects!
So, due to the popularity of the crop circle designs, for this compendium we have included lots of
photographs of formations for the seasons 1999 to 2004, and have gone light-on in terms of the
written word, although we include Andy Thomas's round-up report for each year.
If we ever find out exactly the real cause and purpose of the crop circles, we'll be shouting the news
from the rooftops in the first available issue of NEXUS Magazine.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 191

 D OES S OUND C REATE
C ROP C IRCLES ?
Experiments with
plants and sound
have produced
effects similar to
those analysed in
and around crop
circles, suggesting
that particular sonic
frequencies could
be creating these
beautiful,
mysterious designs.
by Freddy Silva 19972005
Email: lovely272@earthlink.net
The Crop Circular website:
http://www.lovely.clara.net
192 NEXUS
Smashing the Myth that "All Crop Circles Are Hoaxes"
D
uring the twilight days of 1998, small articles tucked away in the nether regions
of the British press quietly announced "Unknown Force Was Behind Corn
Circles, Claims Hoaxer". This dramatic U-turn by the surviving member of the
infamous Doug and Dave duothe English sexagenarians who from 1991
misled the world with tales of their crop-flattening prowess with planks of wood
illustrates that the hand of man materialised in crop circle lore long after the real
phenomenon had manifested.
Although hoaxers claim to have orchestrated the phenomenon in 1978, unpublished evi-
dence at the time showed approximately 200 sporadic reports of crop circles around the
world throughout the 1900s, with dozens of eyewitnesses reporting crop circles forming in
a matter of seconds as far back as 1890. Several highly descriptive accounts were even
documented in 1678 by Robert Plot, then curator of the Ashmolean Library in Oxford,
England. If hoaxers are responsible for crop circles, then they appear to have mastered
the art of time travel, in which case it is they who ought to be under scientific scrutiny.
To date, some 10,000 crop circles have been catalogued in 29 countries worldwide, and
their anomalous features continue to defy human replication: plants bent an inch above
the soil, their cellular structure altered, their stems lightly burned around the base; alter-
ations to the crystalline structure of the affected soil; evaporation of groundwater; alter-
ation of the local electromagnetic field; and dowsable, long-lasting energy patterns, not to
mention hundreds of measured effects on the human biological field.
So much, then, for two guys and a piece of wood. But thanks to a virtual embargo on
the coverage of research throughout the media, a popular myth has developed that all crop
circles have been nothing more than a prank with a plank. By definition, a hoax is a
forgery, and a forger requires an original from which to copy. So what is this "unknown
force" that creates genuine crop circles? One answer may lie with sound.
Sound and Sacred Geometry
Traditionally, sound has been considered a prime universal force in the creation of
matter. This concept is echoed in all faiths and traditions: "In the beginning was the
Word, and the Word was with God", so the Bible, the Q'ran and the Rig Veda remind us.
In a similar way, Hopi and Navajo religious traditions assert that, in ancient times,
shamans could utter words onto sand and create patterns not dissimilar to the Hindu
mandalasthose geometric paintings held to be expressions of vibrations from the unseen
Universe. Consequently the Eastern faiths, Islam in particular, chose this sacred geometry
to express the image of God. In the 12th century these geometric principles were encoded
in the design of Gothic cathedrals, and their application is now known to enhance these
buildings' sonic effects.
Geometry, sound, resonance and vibration are fundamental to our supposedly physical
world. When the primeval Hindu sound, the "OM" (from which is derived our modern
term "hum"), is sung into a tonoscope (a device for converting the human voice into
visible form), it is possible to see geometric shapes attributed with "sacredness". Under
the microscope, even atoms are seen as harmonic resonators, and their structures are
composed of geometric rhythms whose proportions are similar to the mathematical
intervals governing the notes of the music scale. For example, the gap between the notes
C and Ga musical fifthcan be represented geometrically as a pentagram.
As the expression of number in space, geometry is inextricably linked to sound, since
www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006
the laws of the former govern the mathematical intervals that from the simple circle surrounded by concentric rings, typical of
make up the notes in Western musical scales, also known as early 1980s designs, to the tetrahedron and the complex star frac-
diatonic ratios. Physical reality, it seems, is governed by tals of the 1990s (see fig 4).
geometric arrays related to sound frequencies. Visually, then, the connection is undeniable. But what evi-
One of the mathematical minds studying crop circles was the dence links sound and crop circles at a physical level?
late Professor Gerald Hawkins. In February 1992 he published an
interesting challenge to the half a million subscribers of Science Sonic Effects in the Field and in the Laboratory
News. Prof. Hawkins had studied the work of Euclid, a Greek Audible sound
mathematician of the third century BC, whose treatises on mathe- Many accounts exist of a trilling sound heard by the 80 reported
matics pretty much form the basis of our knowledge today. He witnesses to crop circles forming. This unusual noise, which
used the principles of Euclid to prove that four geometric theo- sounds like a cross between a cicada and a waterfall, was cap-
rems can be derived from the relationships of design elements in tured on magnetic tape in 1989 during a night watch of a field at
crop circles. More significantly, he Cheesefoot Head, England, by a group
discovered a previously unknown of researchers. It was duly sent to
fifth theorem from which he could Cymatics is the study of NASA's Jet Propulsion Laboratory in
derive the other four. Euclid himself Pasadena, where it was brought to
had not written it in his 13 treatises sound waves and their interaction the attention of Robert Weiss, the
on mathematics, and yet Prof. with physical substances. man who had previously analysed the
Hawkins showed that a gap existed in famous Watergate tapes. He con-
Euclid's work where logically it Low frequencies produce a simple cluded that the noise was not related
ought to have fitted. circle encompassed by rings, to any type of bird or insect, and due
Despite an open challenge to the to its looping, rhythmic nature it
high IQ readership of Science News,
whereas higher frequencies appeared to be of intelligent,
no one was able to create this fifth increase the number of concentric mechanical origin. Further, it con-
theorem. Needless to say, it came as rings around a central circle. tained a frequency of 5.05.2 kHz.
a slight shock when it materialised as Later that summer, the trilling
a 160,000-square-foot crop circle at sound was captured againthis time
Litchfield, England, in 1995 (see fig. 1). by a BBC cameraman whilst record-
Incredibly, the theorem did not appear overtly, and, just like the ing an interview inside a crop circle. A few seconds after its
challenge laid by Hawkins, the Circlemakers required it to be appearance, it rendered his US$55,000 camera useless.
decoded from within their own design. According to the technicians who later rebuilt the equipment, the
By their nature, the crop circle theorems produce diatonic sound frequency had interfered with the circuitry to such a degree
ratios, so a link now exists between crop circles and musical that the camera would not work after that episode.
notes, which are the by-product of sound frequencies. And by Interestingly, many latter-day Australian Aborigines relate to
1995, crop circles bearing unmistakable physical associations this trilling sound. During their ceremonies to contact their "sky
with sound began to appear. One contained a curious ratchet fea- spirits", a specially shaped piece of wood called a bora is attached
ture from which is extracted a musical diagram, the Lambdoma, to the end of a long string and whirled, creating a noise practically
dating to the ancient Egyptian mystery schools. Also known as identical to the crop circle sound. It was later discovered that not
the Pythagorean Table, it defines the exact relationships
between musical harmonics and mathematical ratios (see
figs 2a, 2b).
But it was a convincing crop circle etched in barley at
Goodwood Clatford, England, in 1996which had its
plants bent six inches from the topthat gave the prover-
bial nod to sound, for here was a representation of a cymat-
ic pattern (see fig. 3).
Cymatics is the study of sound waves and their
interaction with physical substances. One of its modern
pupils was Swiss scientist Hans Jenny who, throughout the
1950s to 1960s, painstakingly captured on film the effects
of sound as it interacted with powders and liquids. He
observed how sound vibration created geometric shapes: a
low frequency produced a simple circle encompassed by
rings, whereas a higher frequency increased the number of
concentric rings around a central circle. As the frequencies
rose, so too did the complexity of shapes, to the point
where tetrahedrons, mandalas and other sacred geometric
forms could be discerned.
Just as the Egyptians had once described geometry as
"frozen music", so Jenny now enabled humanity to see it.
Jenny also provided a physical connection to the creation of
crop circles I'd been looking for, since many of the vibra- Figure 1: Crop circle at Litchfield near Dunley, Hampshire, UK, formed 4 July 1995.
Photograph Steve Alexander 1998.
tional patterns captured in his photos mimic their designs:

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 193

only have crop circles appeared in Australia, they have also on plants by subjecting them to different tones. Exposure to
manifested throughout Aboriginal myths, just as their geometries heavy metal music made the plants tilt in the opposite direction or
have appeared in ancient Aboriginal rock paintings. die, whereas classical music lulled the plants to lean toward the
But back to that 5 kHz connection, since it has taken me on a speakers. But in the case of Hindu devotional musicthe type
journey of extraordinary connections, particularly regarding the played by the sitar player Ravi Shankarthe stems bent in excess
way in which sound interacts with plants and soil. Back in the of 60 to the vertical, perhaps the closest any human has ever
1950s, American agricultural researcher George Smith found that come to recreating that right-angle bend common to plant stems in
exposing corn to sound frequencies produced a higher heat con- genuine crop circles.
tent in soil as well as a slight burnt appearance in the plants. Such Interestingly, applications of Indian devotional song to plants
effects are consistent with the during the 1930s at Annamalai
soil of crop circles, where the University, India, also showed a
affected area appears noticeably number of similar biophysical
drierin some cases, baked changes to those which occurred
compared with the rest of the in plants collected from crop
field, even despite overnight circles and analysed by Dr
rain; the same applies to the Levengood.
"slight burning" at the base of Sound as one energy source
crop circle stalks. Oddly capable of creating crop circles
enough, Smith speculated at the now becomes very feasible. But
time that particular sound fre- what type of sound coaxes plants
quencies also increased molecu- to bend and lie down by
lar activity in plants. applying firm and gentle
Three decades later, such pressure and, given the intricacy
activity was indeed discovered and complexity of latter-day
in plant samples taken from patterns, with a fine degree of
crop circles. Tests performed precision?
since 1989 by Michigan-based
physicist Dr W. Levengood Ultrasound
consistently show how the Figure 2a: Crop circle at Andover, Hampshire, UK, formed July 1995. Interestingly, ultrasound is
energy creating crop circles capable of interacting with
affects seed embryo and plant physical elements to such an
growth and elongates the plants' incredible degree. It can be
nodes, even altering the pattern aimed like a laser beam, and
of their crystalline structure. specific frequencies can be
The sudden and abnormal focused to cause certain kinds
growth in plants affected by the of molecules to vibrate while
energy of crop circles was others nearby are left unmoved.
attributed by Levengood to The higher the frequency of
microwaves. However, ultrasound, the greater its ability
microwaves have the ability to to be directed. This requires
render biological systems frequencies in the high MHz
sterile, and an overdose will range, such as those detected for
even kill organisms. Crop circle over a decade inside crop cir-
plants, on the other hand, are cles. The readings generally
certainly alive and well, so there hover in the vicinity of 260320
is another answer. MHz. However, the frequencies
Already conversant with dis- inside them appear to increase
coveries by Russian scientists each year, and relative to the
that certain sound frequencies increase in their geometric com-
noticeably affected the growth plexity. This mirrors Jenny's
of plants and seeds, Mary experiments, which show that a
Measures and Pearl Weinberger relationship exists between the
experimented with sound at the complexity of cymatic geome-
University of Ottawa through- tries in proportion to the dis-
out the 1960s. They succeeded Figure 2b: Pythagoras' Circular Lambdoma, which contains all musical pensed sound frequencies. In
in accelerating growth in wheat, ratios. Diagram Robert Faulkrod. other words, the higher the fre-
but the sound also produced a resonant effect in the plants' cells, quency, the greater the geometric intricacy.
thereby affecting their metabolism. And the frequency applied Such extremely high frequencies are known to affect states of
was identical to the crop circle trilling noise: 5 kHz. awareness and consciousness in humans, and visitors to crop for-
Perhaps the greatest connection linking sound to the manifesta- mations often report this.
tion of crop circles lies in their greatest anomaly: the permanent Such effects are traditionally associated with sacred spaces
bending of the plants' stems. In 1968, laboratory experiments at stone circles in particularand it is interesting to note that ultra-
Temple Buell College, Colorado, measured the effects of music sound has been detected at stone circles and standing stones in

194 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

England. When tuned in the MHz range, ultrasound prevents
damage to sensitive tissue, so its healing properties are today used
in the treatment of muscular ailments. Again, this mirrors the
folklore of sacred spacesand as far as crop circles are con-
cerned, hundreds of people have also reported healings. One
long-time sufferer of Parkinson's disease stopped shaking. A man
with a retinal eye tumour, 99 per cent malignant, saw the tumour
shrivel away after contact with crop circles; this case is clinically
documented in New Hampshire, and the patient's doctor remains
at odds to explain this.
Infrasound
Below 20 Hz, sound becomes infrasonic, and such frequencies
influence biological processes. And here lies the direct connec-
tion to crop circles.
Experiments throughout the 1980s at the Princeton Engineering
Anomalies Research (PEAR) Laboratory demonstrate that the
acoustic power of infrasound, when combined with high pressure,
boils water inside a cavity in one nanosecond.
As water heats, it expands; and in the case of crop circle plants
and their water-filled stems, a close look reveals tiny holes in their
nodes (the plant's "knuckles"), indicating that the superheated
water has blown outwards. The bases of the stems are made sub-
tle like molten glass by the heat, leaving the now top-heavy plants
to collapse into their new horizontal position. Since this action
(called "vapour cavitation") creates local temperature increases of
hundreds of thousands of degrees for a fraction of a second, it is
now not difficult to see how millions of gallons of groundwater
can disappear within and around the perimeter of a crop circle or
why the plants attain their slightly burnt appearance.
Combine this with Levengood's discovery of microscopic blow-
holes in the plants' cell-wall pits (indicating the rapid boiling of
water inside the plant), and everything starts to fall into place.
Infrasound is also capable of atomising water molecules,
creating a fine mist, and farmers in England and Canada have
witnessed columns of mist rising from within newly arrived crop
circles.
Finally, the lower the operating frequency of infrasound, the
Figure 4: Crop circle at Milk Hill, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire, formed August 1997.
Photograph Steve Alexander 1998.
STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com
Figure 3: Graphic of crop circle at Goodworth Clatford, near Andover,
Hampshire, formed June 1996. From www.cropcircleconnector.com.
greater the effect, and 18 Hz is the lowest safety threshold below
which the pressure formed by infrasound is known to produce dis-
ruption to chromosomes.
Every northern summer, crop circle plants of every variety are
sent to Dr Levengood for blind-testing, and some samples
inevitably show unmistakable disruption to their chromosomes.
Yet give him samples from man-made designs and he finds some-
thing remarkable: perfectly normal plants!
Psychic Questing with the Circlemakers
So, who is in control of this "technology" that is manifesting
these euphonious crop circles? In England, one highly respected
psychic individual inadvertently vectored information about the
origin of crop circles during a trance session. Her name is
Isabelle Kingston.
Psychic ability is undoubtedly the hardest practice
to prove because of the social barriers placed in front
of the quest for its understanding, the biggest of all
being ridicule. Yet since the 1950s, Soviet parapsy-
chologists have systematically established the sixth
sense as a valid means of communication.
What gives Eastern scientists the edge is their
deep-rooted understanding that nature is composed
of both the seen and the unseen, and that many of its
phenomenalike ultrasound, infrasound and the
greater portion of the light spectrumlie beyond our
five limited senses of perception.
In Bulgaria, psychic abilities have proved so
useful that they have been applied throughout
education and medicine. In the West, despite lack of
public acknowledgement, the employment of
psychics is becoming more commonplace than one
might think. Psychics are today employed in
successfully locating geological faults, in crime
solving, even in predicting earthquakes. The
military has admitted working with psychics, both in
remote viewing and in remote influencing of
policymakers, so something obviously works.
The information vectored by Isabelle Kingston in
NEXUS 195
1982 came from the Watchers, a universal group consciousness sound. This relationship is applied in Buddhist mandalas, whose
who appear throughout history, serving as helpful guides to elaborate geometries are used to alter states of consciousness.
humanity during its times of tumultuous change. As the Shining Perhaps it is not by coincidence that crop circle designs mirror
Ones or Els, they are featured throughout ancient Egyptian texts. these intricate patterns, just as they bear an uncanny familiarity to
They also facilitated the building of Europe's tallest mound, Jenny's materialisations of sound.
Silbury Hill ("Sil-bury" means "hill of the shining beings"). If sound vibrations are creating crop circles, is it not possible
The problem with the information received by Isabelle was that, that they can arouse the individual at a spiritual level? After all,
at the time, few knew what a "crop circle" was, so when the it's through music that whole human experiences are celebrated
Watchers said they would provide signs of their purpose in the and carried on from generation to generation. It is very probable
fields at Silbury Hill within seven days, no one in Isabelle's group that the very shape of the human earmore specifically, the
knew what to expect. Seven days later, a group of five crop cir- cochleais a spiral constructed according to the harmonic laws
cles arranged like a Celtic cross manifested at the base of the of tone, just as the same spiral shape is the primary form from
5,000-year-old sacred site. which thousands of crop circles have sprung.
In succeeding years, Isabelle would be provided with further Music is a carrier for social change: the effect of Handel's
instructions ahead of time as to the circles' locations and physical music is believed to have reversed the lax moral values prevalent
attributes. Their appearance was often closely followed by mili- throughout early Victorian England, just as the anarchic overtones
tary helicopters which seem to be able to pick up their electro- of Punk music corralled disillusioned youth into fighting an
magnetic fingerprint on radar. Establishment that held no tolerance for
The main purpose behind the glyphs, we those who stepped outside its rules.
are told, is to feed information into the The effects on people's awareness after
planet's subtle energy grid, thus providing contact with crop circles is similarly
human beings with the tools that will help documented. In 1990, a pictogram at Alton
them wake up to their responsibilities as co- Barnes sported the trident of Neptune or
creators and achieve their greater potential. If sound is one of the Shivafigures traditionally associated with
To some, the message may seem some- transformation. Ironically, it was through
what simplistic, even utopian, yet there is no formative principles exposure to this unique crop circle that
doubt that we are living in times of great behind crop circles, millions around the world felt transformed,
upheaval, and whatever choices we are mak- just as images of crop circles today continue
ing as a collective will affect generations to it is not surprising that to enlighten the awareness of those who
come. What is already certain is that the tens
of thousands of people who have come into
these formations are come into contact with them.
If sound is one of the formative principles
contact with crop circles have taken leaving psychological behind crop circles, it is not surprising
with them a more positive world-view, impressions on those that these formations are leaving psy-
and this change in perception is quietly chological impressions on those whose
seeping into the everyday world. whose antennae are antennae are extended and receptive to
The Watchers spoke of technology extended and receptive their tune.
yet to be deciphered from the glyphs
(spinning disc and antigravity devices to their tune. About the Author:
based on the designs are being devel- Freddy Silva is a writer and art director
oped as I write), and how the patterns who has researched crop circles and
are connected to all ancient sacred sites sacred spaces from a multidisciplinary
via subtle energies. It has since been point of view since 1990. He is today
discovered that all genuine crop circles one of the world's leading experts on
these subjects as well as a bestselling
indeed lie at the crossroads of invisible author. His comprehensive book
electromagnetic pathways which criss- Secrets In The Fields: The Science
cross the entire globe, linking all sacred And Mysticism of Crop Circles
sites. (Hampton Roads, 2002; reviewed in NEXUS 9/06) is available
They also spoke of the designs being essentially created through from his website, The Crop Circular, at
thought processes sent from other levels of awareness. These http://www.lovely.clara.net. The original version of this article,
vibrations transform into sound and light as their frequencies are with accompanying colour photographs, can also be viewed at
slowed down by our atmosphere and the laws of the physical his website. Mr Silva was a guest speaker at the NEXUS
world. Indications of these processes would eventually be Conference in Brisbane on 2325 September 2005.
discovered in the plants and the soil by people who'd be
communicated with at a subtle level of exchange. Further Reading
Peter Tompkins and Christopher Bird, The Secret Life of Plants, Allen
The Sound of Transformation Lane, Penguin, 1974
The musical scale, constructed on the harmonics of sacred David Tame, The Secret Power of Music, Destiny, 1984
Hans Jenny, Cymatic, Basillius Presse, 1972
geometry and now found within the framework of crop circles, Robert Lawlor, Sacred Geometry: Philosophy and Practice, Thames
represents the mathematical structure of the soul of the world & Hudson, 1982, 1994
because it embodies the essence of the Universe. So it's no Joachim Ernst Berendt, Nada Brahma, Destiny, 1983
coincidence that a large percentage of crop circles can be identified Valerie Hunt, Infinite Mind, Malibu, 1989
with, and by, ancient cultures who to this day honour their histories Sheila Ostrander and Lynn Schroeder, Psychic Discoveries Behind the
through song and music, their healing rituals performed with Iron Curtain, Prentice-Hall, 1970

196 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 N EWS OF THE S WIRLED !
UK Crop Circles of 1999
This season's
round-up of crop
circles continues to
amaze, with
unusual geometric
shapes and
variations on
familiar themes.
Introduction
by Andy Thomas 1999
Southern Circular Research
3 Old House Courtyard
Southover High Street,
Lewes, East Sussex BN7 1HT, UK
Website: http://www.swirlednews.com
Images from
Crop Circle Connector website:
http://www.cropcircleconnector.com
STRANGE Times 2006
E
ach crop circle season in England, enthusiasts wonder how the phenomenon can
possibly better what has gone before, yet 1999, like every year, sprang astonishing
new surprises in addition to developments on familiar themes. The quality of the
designs displayed a dynamism bordering on audacity.
The pictogram which arrived on 3 April at Over Wallop, Hampshire, marked a record
early appearance and was soon followed by a scattering of other designs over several
counties. One emerging theme was a number of "eclipse" motifs, perhaps foreshadowing
the forthcoming August event, most notably at nearby Middle Wallop on 3 May, each
phase of a total solar eclipse depicted in a linear sequence.
Of May's Wiltshire formations, a strange biological-looking symbol at Avebury Trusloe
intrigued many, while religious symbolism impacted with the arrival of a clear Jewish
Menorah, the sacred candelabrum, at Barbury Castle on 31 May. There has been much
speculation as to its context as a crop formation.
In June, circle "Mecca" Alton Barnes was hit with the longest pattern of the year: a chain
of older pictogram shapes from the early 1990s, spanning over 1,000 feet! A "serpent"
design lay nearby. The field had been watched by "croppies" until 2.30 am, yet the
formation was found at first lightnot much time for the alleged hoaxers (whom the media
continually promote) in which to work.
The most prominent of the now traditional summer debunkings was initiated by the
Daily Mail newspaper, claiming a triangular emblem of 33 standing circles at Avebury as
a hoax it commissioned. The lack of evidence and contradictory prose left many
unconvinced, but even if the design was man-made it explained only one out of thousands
which have appeared in far more mysterious circumstances. More positive media interest
followed the announcement that Laurance Rockefeller is funding a number of crop circle
research projects.
Oblivious to this, the formations continued to amaze with a series of breathtaking glyphs,
playing not just with circles but also hexagons, squares and representations of 3D-cubes,
amongst other geometrical lessons. A record was broken on 16 July at Windmill Hill,
Wiltshire, when a square containing 288 small circles appearedthe most ever found in
one pattern. On 6 August, an amazing star of standing rings at Roundway, Wiltshire, was
distinguished by a unique woven chequerboard laythe first of its kind. It existed for just
a few hours before being harvested.
Around 130 English crop formations were reported during the summer. Curiously,
from the total solar eclipse which touched the British Isles on 11 August, things quietened
down, leaving some awaiting a grand finale to close the season at the time of writing.
Even without one, those drawn to this most beautiful of mysteries, the source of which
remains elusive, could hardly complain after such a season.
Andy Thomas, 24 August 1999
Editor's Note: Andy Thomas is editor of the bimonthly crop circle journal, SC, a
founding member of the Southern Circular Research team, and the author of three
books exploring aspects of the circles: Fields of Mystery, Quest for Contact (with
Paul Burra), and Vital Signswhich has been described by many as the definitive
guide to the phenomenon. Andy regularly writes and lectures, and has made
numerous TV and radio appearances.
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 197
Allington, near Devizes, Wiltshire. Reported 24th June. West Overton, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 24th June.
Image by Steve Alexander 1999. Image by Steve Alexander 1999.

Allington Down, near Devizes, Wiltshire. Reported 26th June. Bishop Cannings, near Devizes, Wiltshire. Reported 22nd August.
Video by M. J. Fussell 1999. Circle in centre is 32 feet across. Image by Peter Sorensen 1999. About 50 feet in width.

East Kennett, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 21st July. Liddington Castle, near Swindon, Wiltshire. Reported 21st July.
Video by Peter Sorensen 1999. Circle in centre is 32 feet across. Image by Steve Alexander 1999. Approx. 200 feet in diameter.

198 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 Left: Avebury Avenue, near Avebury,
Wiltshire. Reported 29th July.
Image by Steve Alexander 19 9 9 .
Report by Stuart Dike from the Crop
Circle Connector website at
http://cropcircleconnector.com

"THE NIGHT THE DAILY MAIL

DIDN'T UNDERSTAND"...?
O n 29 July, a huge design appeared
opposite the standing-stone circle of
Avebury, and shrouded the crop circle
phenomenon in controversy once again.
This latest design was reportedly part
of a huge experiment at the hands of the
national newspaper, the Daily Mail.
The newspaper's aim was to prove that
a team of well-organised artists could go
out in the dead of night and create a
large, convincing formationwhich,
according to their article, would prove
that people could be fooled into believ-
ing crop circles to be genuine.
The article within the Daily Mail was
titled, "The night the UFOs didn't land",
but perhaps it should have have read,
"The night the Daily Mail didn't under-
stand"!

Upavon, near Pewsey, Wiltshire. Reported 22nd August. Gipsy Lane, near Cheesefoot Head, Hampshire. Reported 1st
Video by Peter Sorensen 1999. August. Video by Peter Sorensen 1999.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 199

 LEFT: Henwood, near East Meon,
Hampshire. Reported 3rd August.
Video shot by Peter Sorensen 1999.
Discovered from the air by Nippon TV and
Peter Sorensen.
LEFT MIDDLE: Meonstoke, near
Horndean, Hampshire. Reported 23rd July.
Image by Lucy Pringle 1999.

ABOVE: Barbury Castle, near Chiseldon,

Wiltshire. Reported 5th August.
Image by Steve Alexander 1999.
LEFT: West Kennett Longbarrow, near
Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 4th August.
Image by Steve Alexander 1999.
Formation discovered by Ulrich Kox.
FIELD REPORT by Stuart Dike:
This formation was located in quite a
remote part of the Avebury landscape, posi-
tioned about a couple of hundred yards out
the back of West Kennett Long Barrow. It is
another fine addition to the Koch designs
witnessed over the last three years. Indeed,
the square geometry has been a main fea-
ture of the formations of 1999.
Five main squares are involved in the con-
struction of this design, with the hidden
squares creating the outer edge of the pat-
tern. The circles placed on the perimeter
are well formed, but visiting a formation at
this stage in the season seems to create a
messy floor constructionthe plants not
quite as supple as they would be earlier on
in the season.

200 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

RIGHT, TOP: Beckhampton, near Avebury,
Wiltshire. Reported 28th July.
Image by Steve Alexander 1999.
FIELD REPORT by Stuart Dike:
This marvellous formation is located on the
flat field between Silbury Hill and Knoll
Down. As we entered the formation, we
noticed that the floor construction was
extremely neat, with the classic quarter-
sectioning of crop inside each of the trian-
gular inserts on the outer edge of the inner
design. It took us a while to work out the
exact shape of the design, which is a classic
Celtic Knot, a recognised Celtic symbol.
The execution and accuracy of the forma-
tion is quite breathtaking. The outer ring
surrounding the knot has a width of around
19.8 feet (6 metres), and the design is
approx. 240250 ft (7376 m) in diameter,
with the central section of crop displaying
an anticlockwise rotation. The outer
perimeter ring has a clockwise rotation.
RIGHT, MIDDLE: Barbury Castle, near
Chiseldon, Wiltshire. Reported 23rd July.
Image by Steve Alexander 1999.
FIELD REPORT by Stuart Dike:
This wonderful formation, situated on the
western side of Barbury Castle, is posi-
tioned in one of the most picturesque
places I have had the pleasure to visit. It
was quite breathtaking to view the forma-
tion from the top of Barbury Castle, a
Neolithic hill fort and one of the best ram-
part forts you will visit in Wiltshire.
The formation itself spanned across six
tramlines, which makes its diameter to be
around 300 feet (91 metres). The design is
made of a huge circle, with an inner ring of
only about two feet in thickness, with a
wonderful pattern of three interlocking cres-
cents placed in the centre.
Overall, the floor construction is one of
the best examples seen in the Avebury area.
A truly outstanding formation!
RIGHT, BELOW: Wimpole Hall, near
Great Eversdon, Cambridgeshire. Reported
23rd July.
Image by Russell Stannard 1999.

For more information and pictures,

please contact the following:

Steve Alexander
27 St Francis Road
Gosport, Hants PO12 2UG, UK
Tel/Fax: +44 (0)1705 352867
http://www.temporarytemples.co.uk

Lucy Pringle
5 Town Lane, Sheet,
Petersfield, Hants GU32 2AF, UK
Tel/Fax: +44 (0)1730 263454
http://www.lucypringle.co.uk/

CROP CIRCLE CONNECTOR WEBSITE

http://cropcircleconnector.com

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 201

 Cherhill, near Calne, Wiltshire. Reported
17th July.
Image by Steve Alexander 1999.
FIELD REPORT by Stuart Dike:
Located directly below the famous White
Horse of Oldbury Camp, or more common-
ly named Cherhill Hill Fort, its appearance
came within a flurry of reports that hit the
area between 15th and 17th July.
The floor constructions on this year's
formations have been extremely impressive,
and Cherhill is no exception. The pattern
around the triangular sections on the outside
of the vortex flowed in two directions
between each interlocking triangle.
This is a feature seen on many designs
over the years, but the Cherhill formation
incorporates a separate pattern positioned
just off the main design. This is not the first
time this shape has appeared; it was first
seen on the Silverstone formation in
Derbyshire back in 1998.

Devil's Den, near Clatford, Wiltshire.

Reported 20th July.
Image by Steve Alexander 1999.
FIELD REPORT by Stuart Dike:
This formation is situated approx. 100 feet
(30 metres) from an ancient dolman (top
right), a wonderful set of three stones with a
top lintel. On entering the crop formation,
we noticed the floor construction was sim-
ply beautiful. There were some wonderful,
small, 23 ft channels running around the
outer perimeter crop. On inspecting the
many circles inside the formation, I noticed
that all of them were running in a clockwise
rotation; but on closer inspection it seemed
that the smaller outer circles running down
each diminishing arm were not quite circu-
lar in form.
The very night this design formed, a
power failure was experienced by local res-
idences between 11 pm and 1 am.

Trottiscliffe, near Maidstone, Kent.

Reported 20th June.
Image by Andrew King 1999.
FIELD REPORT by Andrew King and Joyce
Galley (CCCS):
This formation consists of 43 circles, all
clockwise, in three arcs of 12 with dimin-
ishing diameters, centred on three sets of
circles, each with one central circle. Some
of the circles' centres were offset from geo-
metric centre and, clearly, the centres had
all been much more heavily impressed than
the outer parts. Some standing centres
were noted, but since the formation was
some 10 days old before we visited it, and
had had a number of visitors, it was difficult
to comment on how the original lay had
been in the centres of most of the circles.
Another Kent formation had three large
circles/ovals with arcs overlapping at a cen-
tral point where they all thicken. Diameters
approx. 250 and 600 feet respectively.

202 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 F ORMATIVE F IELDS
UK C ROP C IRCLES OF 2000
This year's
bountiful yield of
crop glyphs
featured circular,
triangular,
diamond-shaped
and grid-like
patterns as well as
some unusual
optical effects.
Introduction
by Andy Thomas 2000
Southern Circular Research
3 Old House Courtyard
Southover High Street,
Lewes, East Sussex BN7 1HT, UK
Website: http://www.swirlednews.com
Images from
Crop Circle Connector website:
http://www.cropcircleconnector.com
STRANGE Times 2006
I
n 1990, the crop circle mystery burst into the international media with a flurry of
utterly extraordinary patterns etched into the fields. Until then, the phenomenon had
been just another quaint, Fortean eccentricity; but these new arrivals leapt from the
formerly simple circles and rings into an inexplicable evolution of complex designs
which would blossom and develop over the next 10 years.
As the century turned and another decade began, expectations were high that the
phenomenon would take another quantum leap. It didn't quite happen like that, but the
continuing progress of its serene, upward curve ensured that the marvels of the 2000 crop
circle season were no disappointment.
Things took a while to get going, with just a handful of formations gracing the fields
between April and June, but of these, on 20 May, Alton Barnesthe classic circle-site of
oldyielded up a sign of things to come with a pentagonal design which played 3D tricks
with the eyes.
The era of optical-illusion crop formations had dawned and would be followed up with
some truly mesmerising patterns later in the summer. A chequerboard grid of rectangles
at Windmill Hill on 18 June gave the startling effect of simultaneously appearing as a
sphere. A "Chinese puzzle" emblem, which arrived at Bishops Cannings on the same
night, resembled three pentagrams seen in perspective, clinging to the surface of another
sphere.
The incorporation of triangles in crop designs also became commonplace. One such
example arrived next to the West Kennett longbarrow near Avebury on 2 June. Initially
unimpressive with a very messy lay, the triangular outline which appeared there, ringed
with 12 flattened smaller triangles, suddenly surprised everyone on 3 June by transform-
ing itself overnight into an exquisite emblem of standing and flattened areas, the formerly
haphazard lay miraculously combed into good order!
In fact, the whole Kennett/Silbury Hill area was very much the major hotbed of circular
activity this year, with virtually every other field in a square mile being visited by a
formation. Mystics say this was due to a cylindrical shaft suddenly and unexpectedly
opening up in the top of the ancient and mysterious Silbury Hill itself. Though this was
almost certainly due, in part at least, to the shoddy workmanship over 200 years ago of
treasure-hunting excavators who didn't fill in their diggings properly and simply plugged
the top, many felt that potent forces were released when the plug finally collapsed
inwards. Strange lights were seen over the Hill in the weeks preceding the hole's arrival.
Whatever the real circumstances (however mundane) behind the subsidence, those who
believe Silbury to be an accumulator of "Earth energy" hold that its unexpected opening
must have led to a significant release of the focused natural power that fires up this sacred
landscape.
Of the formations which appeared in this hotspot, the most shattering was a grid, like a
circuit board, comprising 1,600 rectangular components, which appeared at East Kennett
on 2 July. The geometrical logic of how one would go about creating such a pattern
with merging sections of standing squares becoming flattened squarestroubled even the
best crop circle geometers. On the ground, one could not make head nor tail of how the
design worked, nor of how any human could possibly have attempted it.
This formation, with its unique qualities, actually grabbed the attention of the newspa-
pers; but the media, except for publishing one or two more positive pieces, soon slipped
back into the easy scepticism which circle enthusiasts have come to expect, with a variety
of hoax-promoting articles and letters. Several man-made circles were allegedly filmed in
the making, the plan being for the footage to be broadcast later on televisionto the
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 203

Windmill Hill, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 18th June.
(Image Francine Blake/Wiltshire Crop Circle Study Group 2000)
East Kennett, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 2nd July.
(Image Steve Alexander 2000)
Woodborough Hill, near Alton Priors, Wiltshire. Reported 13th
August. (Image Steve Alexander 2000)
204 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
resigned yawns of researchers who have seen and survived all this
before.
The pronouncement by veteran circle researcher Colin
Andrewsthat he now believes the formations are man-made in
80% of cases, the rest being caused by natural magnetism
achieved much publicity for the phenomenon but was met with
cynicism and indifference by some sceptics and believers alike. As
no official paper has yet been produced for scrutiny, this latest
assertion remains just another theory until the necessary evidence
is put forward.
The notion that people are responsible for creating such a large
proportion of formations has been severely challenged by many
researchers who point to a lot of details which suggest otherwise.
However, the notion that human hoaxers are responsible for at least
a certain quota of crop glyphs seems now to have been widely
absorbed by the crop circle community without too much harm
some considering that, for good or for ill, what man-made
formations there are simply add to the overall mystery and interact
with the landscape in their own way. Many formations, though,
continue to defy the idea that humans could create such complexity
and beauty without error in conditions of darkness.
The generally accepted masterpiece of the year was certainly the
breathtakingly fantastic pattern which arrived at Avebury Trusloe
on 22 July. A staggering series of standing and flattened
diamonds, splayed outwards in a containing circle, gave the
impression (perhaps ironically, given the Andrews
pronouncement) of particles held in magnetic fields. Despite the
inevitable distracting claims of authorship, made by the usual
egocentric "artists" in one newspaperas ever, without a scrap of
evidence to support themeven seasoned researchers were open-
mouthed in awe at this show-stopper. But the show didn't stop
there, for another astonishing pattern demonstrating similar
mathematical principles appeared at Woodborough Hill on 13
August.
Perhaps the event that best illustrated just how far the
phenomenon has come in the last 10 years was the very unusual
formation which occurred at Everleigh Ashes on 19 July. In 1989,
the cerealogical world had got a tiny taste of the developments
which would rock it to its young foundations the following year,
when the last formation of that season, at Winterbourne Stoke, was
found to be a circle split into four quarters of linear crop lay instead
of a conventional swirl. The Everleigh Ashes formation of 2000
saw four such quartered circles aligned as a Celtic cross orbiting a
round barrow, which made up the central component of the pattern.
Avebury Trusloe, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 22nd July.
(Image Steve Alexander 2000)
STRANGE Times 2006
 On the antique mound itself, the grass had been swirled to com-
plete the effect. How things have moved on!
The photographs which accompany this article speak for the
many beautiful crop formations which arrived this year. But not
all of this year's efforts were confined within the borders of
Wiltshire; other counties, including Hampshire, Kent,
Leicestershire, Yorkshire, Sussex and others besides, all played
their part in the continuing development, as did the many other
countries which now regularly receive their own gifts each year.
We have learnt much over the last decadebut not the answer
to the continuing mystery. That still eludes, whether the solution
be extraterrestrial, geophysical, psychic or spiritual. But the devo-
tees seeking widely accepted credibility for this unique enigma
have a passion that has not diminished, despite all the cutting scep-
ticism and problems encountered.
This year, the three-day international Glastonbury Symposium
celebrated its 10th anniversary with a radiant event which I was Silbury Hill, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 25th July.
privileged to be a part of, as people from around the world came (Image Steve Alexander 2000)
together to reaffirm their enthusiasm for these amazing patterns,
associated issues and the widening mindsets they engender.
Throughout the summer, other events took place which brought
like-minded individuals together. Each year, numbers at the best
of these events swell, not diminish. There are many who see
beyond the scepticism and hype.
In a recent Internet article, the BBC Online science correspon-
dent Dr David Whitehouse described anyone who believed that
crop circles were not made by people as "misguided, a fool or a
charlatan". Clearly, there are many prepared to risk being per-
ceived as all of these in their pursuit of the truth.

About the Author:

Andy Thomas is a founder member of the Southern Circular
Research team, and author of three books exploring aspects of the
circles: Fields Of Mystery, Quest For Contact and Vital Signs.

For more information and images, please contact :

Crop Circle Connector Website: Bishop Cannings, near Devizes, Wiltshire. Reported 27th June.
http://www.cropcircleconnector.com (Image Steve Alexander 2000)

Steve Alexander
27 St Francis Rd., Gosport, Hants PO12 2UG, UK
Tel/Fax: +44 (0)1705 352867
http://www.temporarytemples.co.uk

Istead Rise, near Gravesend, Kent. Reported 29th July. Under Milk Hill, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire. Reported 1st July.
(Image Andrew King 2000) (Image Steve Alexander 2000)

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 205

Allington Down, near Devizes, Wiltshire. Reported 1st August. South Field, Alton Priors, Wiltshire. Reported 19th June.
(Image Steve Alexander 2000) (Image Francine Blake/Wiltshire Crop Circle Study Group 2000)

Uffington White Horse, near Woolstone, Oxfordshire. Reported White Hill, near Lockeridge Dene, Wiltshire. Reported 19th July.
22nd July. (Image Steve Alexander 2000) (Image Steve Alexander 2000)

Bishop's Sutton, near Winchester, Hampshire. Reported 15th July. Broadbury Banks, near Wilsford, Wiltshire. Reported 5th August.
(Image Steve Alexander 2000) (Image Steve Alexander 2000)

206 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 S IGNS OF THE T IMES
C ROP C IRCLES OF 2001
This year's season
had a slow start
in England, but
some spectacular
patterns and
recurring themes
finally graced the
landscape.
Introduction
by Andy Thomas 2001
Southern Circular Research
3 Old House Courtyard
Southover High Street,
Lewes, East Sussex BN7 1HT, UK
Website: http://www.swirlednews.com
Images from
Crop Circle Connector website:
http://www.cropcircleconnector.com
STRANGE Times 2006
T
here had been dire warnings from sceptics about this season. The first ever, and
much publicised, legal prosecution for a man-made crop formation in late 2000
meant that the land-artists they believed responsible would all stay at home for
fear of the law. The threat of hefty trespass fines imposed during the Foot and
Mouth crisis afflicting the UK would ensure even further that hardly any circles would
appear. Even if a few did, no-one would be allowed in.
None of these doomy predictions came to pass, and though the season was later to start
than many before it, the first UK formations did actually arrive during the height of the
Foot and Mouth outbreak in mid-May. No apologies were forthcoming from the sceptics,
naturally. Though access to fields was tighter than before as far as visiting new circles
went, the movement restrictions had eased enough by high summer for some farmers to
open up their fields without qualms.
The first designs picked up on themes begun in 2000. One recurring motif in Wiltshire
was a type of mandala based around triangles with curved edges, while one formation at
Badbury revived the chequerboard idea founded the year before, but this time encircled by
a coiled snake eating its tail, which had a flavour of Aztec or Mayan culture. Aztec sym-
bolism eventually came big time in what for many people was the best formation of the
year, up at Wakerley Woods, Northamptonshire: a circular, segmented arrangement of
Aztec calendar signs. In fact, some of the year's most ambitious designs appeared in the
north of England.
Another spectacular, recurring trait was a form of star mandala, radiating small standing
circles in rays, and some other new surprises and unexpected themes, such as an ingenious
style of interlocking wavy curves begun in July at Windmill Hill, Wiltshire. One forma-
tion universally acclaimed, christened "the angel", was a cluster of crescents with over 70
radiating, perfectly straight lines within it, laid in one continuous sweep of crop without
any deviation or wobble.
Despite these, though, for some there was a slightly lacklustre feel to the first 50 or so
UK glyphs, with few to match the intense impact and ingenuity of masterpieces from for-
mer years. The evolution of the designs was perceived to have faltered slightly, though
not everyone agreed, citing unrealistic expectations on the part of some observers.
However, at the time of writing (mid-August), a major formation has just appeared
which looks like the season may have saved the best for the latter part of the summer. A
six-armed fractal Julia Set at Milk Hill, Wiltshire, reminiscent of the classic designs from
1996, around 800 feet across and containing around 400 circles of many sizes, has
stunned observers with its scale and genius.
With a late harvest and at least three weeks still left for the chances of something even
more remarkable, with formations appearing almost by the day, perhaps the circles have
just been pacing themselves.
But those who believe the phenomenon to be psychically interactive with human expec-
tation have pointed out that the seeds of deliberately spread confusion may have stunted
the early development of the crop glyphs in 2001. Certainly, for a year begun with doomy
prophecies and low expectations, there was much confusion and hoax paranoia, similar to
the feeling which prevailed in 1993a year which preceded a major renaissance in 1994.
The paranoia was boosted late in 2000, with the aforementioned prosecution for the
making of one man-made formation. The paltry 100 fine given to the hoaxer hardly
proved a disincentive to others and the upshot was that the wide media coverage given to
the story brought an unbalanced focus onto the man-made component of the crop circle
phenomenon. This was deliberately stirred further by the prosecuted individual by way of
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 207

Berwick Bassett, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 9th June.
Photograph Steve Alexander 2001.
Knap Hill, near Alton Priors, Wiltshire. Reported 5th August.
Photograph Steve Alexander 2001.
Gog Magog Hills, near Cambridge, Cambridgeshire. Reported 25th
July. Photograph Steve Alexander 2001.
208 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
a campaign of emails, leafleteering and further circlemaking.
The creation of several man-made formations for either
research purposes or TV shows hardly helped matters. The fact
that some high-profile circle researchers were themselves
involved in sponsoring some of these projects sat badly with
many enthusiasts, and some were critical of their methods, proto-
cols and uncertain motivations, questioning their conclusions.
The making of a well-executed direct copy of a 1995 astronomical
crop design for a UK film production (for a fictional story) further
shook the faith of some, though to the discerning the differences
were clearly apparent and it lacked the important subtleties which
had so distinguished the original.
Despite the subterfuge exercises, there seemed to be a resur-
gence of interest in the crop circles from the realm of film and
television, with no less than five camera crews from around the
world filming video, TV and movie documentaries, following
"croppies" around in fields, pubs and conferences, the results from
most of which will presumably surface in 2002.
But away from the circus which habitually surrounds the UK
crop circle scene, other countries received formations of their own
to explore with rather less stressful intensity. Germany scored
highest with 10 (at the time of writing), each as elaborate as many
of their UK counterparts, but with their own flavour. Canada, the
Czech Republic, Israel, Serbia and Poland also reported several
new crop glyphs.
The Netherlands, which had seven formations, has meanwhile
become the focus of attention for important scientific work into
the circle phenomenon. The US-based BLT Research, led by
Nancy Talbott, which has done much to promote the work of Dr
W. C. Levengood into biological anomalies inside circle-affected
crops, has continued its investigations into circular appearances
and their links with balls of light in The Netherlandsand in par-
ticular with a young man in the Amsterdam area who seems to
attract such phenomena. Their findings have found his stories to
be true.
Meanwhile, Dr Eltjo Haselhoff has been conducting his own
studies into physical effects and the link with aerial light phenom-
ena. He has become, after Levengood, only the second person to
have a scientific paper on the subject of cerealogy published in
the peer-reviewed journal Physiologa Plantarum. (A layman's
version of his paper can be found at www.swirlednews.com.) Dr
Haselhoff found himself part of an intriguing mystery while
Newhouse Farm, near Acton Turnville, North Somerset. Reported
5th August. Photograph Steve Alexander/Karen Douglas 2001.
STRANGE Times 2006
investigating a "scorpion"-shaped formation at Stadskanaal with a
team from the Dutch Centre for Crop Circle Studies in early
August. As they strolled around the formation, an extra circle
appeared even as they surveyed it, though no-one saw it happen:
suddenly there it was. Photos proved that it had not been there
when they first entered. They began to feel ill effects as they
approached it, and decided to leave in case the newly formed
shape had dangerous properties. The batteries immediately
drained in one of the cameras present, and a digital camera was
later found to have had its data corrupted.
This is but one demonstration that despite all the intrigues and
paranoia which may infect the crop circle community from time
to time, a sizeable mystery still remains around this most beautiful
of unexplained phenomena.
Science may also explain why some of this year's earlier UK
formations seemed subdued: evidence has shown that crop circle
appearances are linked to underground water and the state of geo-
Englishcombe, near Bath, Somerset. Reported 12th August.
logical aquifers. BLT Research's data from previous years shows
Photograph Gary Howe 2001.
that summers where the aquifers are low seem to produce the
most numerous, vibrant designs. The extensive flooding of late
2000 left the aquifers abnormally high at the start of this season.
It is interesting to note that BLT Research is still finding uni-
form biological anomalies in samples from crop patterns sent in
from around the globe, and yet man-made testsdespite unfound-
ed claims by hoaxershave still been unable to replicate the core
findings of these results. Whatever man-made formations there
may be, some are not easy to explain away so quickly.
In addition to the British film being planned, 2002 will see the
release of a new Hollywood blockbuster starring Mel Gibson as a
farmer whose life is turned upside down by the supernatural
arrival of a crop design on his land. Whatever spin Tinseltown
puts on the mystery, attention towards the non-fictional circles
will almost certainly intensify a hundredfold when the movie
arrives, and a whole new generation may discover something
going on that has hitherto passed them by.
With all this new attention partly in mind, Southern Circular
Research this year successfully launched its website
www.swirlednews.com, a rolling news service for the crop circles Milk Hill, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire. Reported 13th August.
(replacing its long-running journal SC) to balance sceptical propa- Photograph Steve Alexander/Karen Douglas 2001.
ganda and disinformation with incisive commentary and analysis.
Readers are invited to log on for the real stories about what's
going on in the fields.

Woodborough Hill, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire. Reported 10th Yatesbury, near Avebury Trusloe, Wiltshire. Reported 22nd July.
August. Photograph Steve Alexander 2001. Photograph Steve Alexander 2001.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 209

Lane End Down, near Kilmeston, Hampshire. Reported 22nd July. All Cannings Bridge, near All Cannings, Wiltshire. Reported 30th
Photograph Steve Alexander 2001. June. Photograph Steve Alexander/Karen Douglas 2001.

Milk Hill, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire. Reported 12th July. Silbury Hill, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 24th July.
Photograph Steve Alexander 2001. Photograph Stuart Dike 2001.

Hill Barn, near Badbury, Wiltshire. Reported 17th June. Chilcomb Down, near No Man's Land, Hampshire. Reported 15th
Image Stuart Dike 2001. July. Photograph Steve Alexander 2001.

210 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 THE CHILBOLTON OBSERVATORY FORMATIONS
A RESPONSE TO A 1974 EARTH TRANSMISSION?
by Linda Moulton Howe 2001

F
or the past few years, crop formations have appeared in the
wheat field near the Chilbolton Observatory in Chilbolton
village, south of Andover, Hampshire. The one from
August 2000 now seems linked to the August 2001 formations.
Last year's was one of England's largest formations in terms of
square footage, and it appeared next to the government-owned
land upon which the radio telescope complex was built in 1965.
The facility is sectioned off from the public and is surrounded by
a high barbed-wire fence.
The estimated measurements of the code formation are 200 feet
long and 85 feet wide; the estimated face measurements are
approximately 160 feet wide and 180 feet long. Both are framed
by wheat laid down in almost identical fashion, according to field
researcher Charles Mallett from Roundway, Wiltshire.
According to an employee at the Chilbolton Observatory, on
Tuesday 14 August 2001 a framed "face" appeared, followed the
next Monday, 20 August, by a "binary code". When Paul Vigay,
the director of the Independent Research Centre for Unexplained
Phenomena in Southsea, Hampshire, England, first saw the aerial
photograph of the "code" formation, he immediately recognised it
as extremely similar to the digitally encoded transmission sent on
16 November 1974 from the Arecibo, Puerto Rico, radio tele-
scope out into space. The Arecibo transmission was planned by
astronomers, including the late Carl Sagan, at Cornell University.
Cornell operates the 300-metre-diameter (985 feet) radio tele-
"Face" in the wheat field near Chilbolton Observatory, Wherwell,
scope, built into a mountain, under a cooperative agreement with Hampshire, first noticed on Tuesday 14 August, 2001. (Aerial photograph
the National Science Foundation. 2001 by Steve Alexander.)
That original 1974 Arecibo transmission is shown here (far
right below), in a black and white graphic of the binary code
beamed at a star cluster called M13, about 23,000 light years from
Earth; on the left is the Chilbolton 2001 "transmission code" for
comparison to Arecibo's; and on the top right is the Chilbolton
2001 face.
The 1974 Arecibo transmission indicated human double helix
DNA with the double arched lines above the humanoid figure. In
the crop formation at Chilbolton, there is a difference in the pat-
tern on the left compared to the right and compared to the Arecibo
transmission.
(Source: Linda Moulton Howe, via her Earthfiles website,
www.earthfiles.com)

The "binary code" on the left and "face" to the right in the wheat field near
Chilbolton Observatory near Wherwell, Hampshire, UK were first seen on
different dates, according to a Chilbolton Observatory employee. The
"face" near top centre was reported on Tuesday, August 14, 2001. The
"binary code" to the left was reported on Monday, August 20, 2001.
(Aerial photograph 2001 by Steve Alexander.)
Comparison produced to show the Chilbolton "transmission code" on left
(aerial photograph 2001 by Steve Alexander) and the actual November 16,
1974 Arecibo radio telescope transmission to M13 star cluster from book,
Cosmos ( 1976 Carl Sagan.)

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 211

 T HE P ICK OF THE 2002
C ROP C IRCLE S EASON
After a slow start in
England, the 2002
circle season sprang
the phenomenon's
usual surprises,
including a
mysterious image of
an ET holding out
an inscribed disc.
Introduction
by Andy Thomas 2002
Southern Circular Research
3 Old House Courtyard
Southover High Street,
Lewes, East Sussex BN7 1HT, UK
Website: http://www.swirlednews.com
Images from
Crop Circle Connector website:
http://www.cropcircleconnector.com
212 NEXUS
I
n the traditional British heartlands of the crop circle phenomenon following a year of
foot and mouth disease, hoax paranoia and then two stunning circular events at Milk
Hill and Chilbolton which cleared the air somewhat, the 2002 season promised a
much cleaner slate.
Yet it looked for a while like nothing was going to happen at all. Events began very
slowlythe slowest for several yearswith a modest, ringed circle in a rape crop at
Soberton, Hampshire, on 12 April. It then took a long while to get going before the mas-
terpieces the UK was used to seeing returned, with only three minor formations reported
in May. Events began properly at Avebury Trusloe, Wiltshire, on 2 June, with an attrac-
tive Celtic-looking design resembling a sixfold knotted string within a ring of beads.
Though progression was slow, there was a scattering of other noted formations through-
out June. One was a beautiful double spiral at West Overton, Wiltshire, on 23 June,
whilst the county of West Sussex also delivered some fine patterns. One of two forma-
tions at Sompting was a convex triangle design found (by myself and Allan Brown) to
contain a thick but fine white dust deposited inside. When Rodney Ashby (as recom-
mended by Nancy Talbott of BLT Research) analysed the dust, he found it to be a particu-
larly pure form of silica, very unlikely to be found in a field. No explanation could be
found for its presence, but Nancy later revealed that such dust has recently been found in
other formations around the world.
Despite these offerings, it wasn't really until July that the UK scene came properly to
life, finally delivering the numbers and array of ingenuity expected for the time of year.
But then, what are the expectations with the crop circles, which always seem to confound
predictions and complacency?
It has now become traditional to await the arrival of the hugest formation of the year as
some kind of "grand finale", as with the astonishing 800-foot Milk Hill spiral of the pre-
ceding year, but in 2002 the largest-diameter formation (at least at the time of writing, in
late August) arrived on 4 July near Stonehenge, Wiltshire. It was a wonderful 741-foot
design, resembling six ribbons three-dimensionally fluttering in the wind. What
impressed as much as its shape (actually, made from very straightforward curves) was its
positioning within the field, poised perfectly between three round barrows and the perime-
ter of the field, with little margin for error. Michael Glickman likened the task to "lower-
ing an oil tanker into Trafalgar Square".
This was the first formation of the year to catch the attention of the British media, and it
found its way into newspapers and television reports to a suitably impressed public. But
the UK is already well conditioned to the presence of crop circles. In the USA, many
were discovering the phenomenon for the very first timeperhaps incredibly to British
eyesthanks to one particular film
August 2002 saw the US release of the movie Signs, starring Mel Gibsona spooky
UFO-invasion thriller in which tall green aliens create formations in maize crops as land-
ing beacons for their craft. Putting aside the unoriginality of the plot and the portrayal of
the crop circles as something so disappointingly mundane, the fact is that the movie raised
the profile of the real phenomenon to a huge degree, bringing it to the attention of many
Americans whom it had somehow previously bypassed. Magazines and newspapers
swelled with articles and the airwaves buzzed with radio and television documentaries,
news features and phone-ins on crop circles as if they had never existed before.
It's interesting to note that most US "croppies" were deeply unimpressed with the film,
many considering it a fear-mongering distortion of the true phenomenon, but those new to
www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006
the concept of the circles in any light suddenly became exposed to
the existence of the real thing. Cerealogical interest from the
States became intense, and circle websites saw the effect as hit-
rates rapidly increased.
A positive documentary movie, Crop Circles: Quest For Truth,
by award-winning US filmmaker William Gazecki, was planned
for release in late [northern] summer, too, to set straight any
Hollywood misconceptions about the real phenomenon. A 45-
minute excerpt was premiered at this year's Glastonbury
Symposium crop circle conference (in its new, bigger venue) and
was well received.
With all this newfound interest, there was a suspicious rise in
the number of US formations, though those who believe the phe-
nomenon to be psychically interactive defended this development
as inevitable and positive.
The debunkers were also on hand to capitalise on the newfound
interest. As the movie-inspired circle coverage increased, their
claims that all crop circles are man-made became more prominent,
as spokespersons for the rather sinister Inquisition-like elite organ-
isation CSICOP (Committee for the Scientific Investigation of Windmill Hill, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 2nd August.
Claims of the Paranormal) found louder voices, and the usual Image M. J. Fussell 2002
human circlemaking teams found new platforms from which to
dispense their scepticism. One thing the film does not do is
debunk the circleswhich would have been a dramatic let-down.
So the sceptics have had to find even louder voices this year, with
probably a major debunking still on its way at the time of writing,
courtesy of a conglomeration of known UK human circlemakers
promising something spectacular, probably timed to coincide with
the UK release of Signs in September.
Elsewhere in the world, aside from Hollywood's intervention,
crop circles increased their profile in a number of placesnotably
Germany, which, for a time until July, had more crop circles than
the UK, with a series of intriguing if less ambitious designs, some
of which utilised more unusual crops than the routine grain-types.
A formation on the Isle of Ruegen at MecklenburgVorpommern,
for instance, appeared in a field of white clover and purple
phacelia flowers, creating a rather beautiful effect. Canada also
continued its increased sightings, and The Netherlands was again a
contender in the numbers stakes.
But by the middle of August, the UK had caught up from its late
start and was producing some extraordinary patterns, though some Nursteed, near Devizes, Wiltshire. Reported 11th August.
feared a deliberate increase in man-made formations as a result of Image M. J. Fussell 2002

Beckhampton, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 26th August. Crooked Soley, nr Hungerford, Berkshire. Reported 28th August
Image M. J. Fussell 2002 Image M. J. Fussell 2002.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 213


East Field, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire. Reported 14th August.
Image M. J. Fussell 2002
Pewsey White Horse, near Pewsey, Wiltshire. Reported 17th July.
Image Steve Alexander 2002
Crabwood Farm House, near Winchester, Hampshire.
Reported 15th August. Image Steve Alexander 2002
The circular ASCII code has been translated to read: "Beware the bearers of FALSE
gifts & their BROKEN PROMISES. Much PAIN but still time. BELIEVE. THERE
IS GOOD OUT THERE. We OPpose DECEPTION. Conduit CLOSING."
214 NEXUS
the extra publicity from Signs, which was less acute in the UK but
still noticeable.
One or two formations this year surprised by being overtly picto-
rial in their naturesuch as the one which appeared at Alton
Barnes on 15 July and appeared to resemble an apple tree, or a
mushroom if turned upside down. Later, on 14 August in the same
field, another dramatic emblem depicted two stylised dolphins
leaping around a triple-ringed circle. A few saw this as a beautiful,
but cautioning, representation of the negative effects of sonar on
these aquatic creatures. Some were not happy with such unam-
biguous designs, but the mother of pictorial formations was to
upset things further
On 15 August, a year and a day on from the amazing Chilbolton
"face" and "message" formations which confounded the circle
community in 2001, another representation of a facethis time
almost certainly a classic-looking "ET", complete with shoulders
and chestarrived at Crabwood, near Winchester, Hampshire, just
a few miles from Chilbolton. Instead of an accompanying radio
telescope, this time a microwave transmitter complex stood nearby;
and instead of the separate play on the message we beamed out into
space in 1974, as embodied in last year's "code", this time a large
spiral disc of small rectangular dots and dashes was superimposed
over the corner of the ET illustration, clearly containing digital
information.
The first attempts at decoding the disc as ASCII text code came
through quickly. The message appears to read as follows, written
exactly as it translates:
"Beware the bearers of FALSE gifts & their BROKEN
PROMISES. Much PAIN but still time. EELIJ?E [this word
is damaged and unclear, but some say it may be meant to read
"BELIEVE"]. THERE IS GOOD OUT THERE. We OPpose
DECEPTION. Conduit CLOSING." (A bell sound is then
signified.)
Perhaps with the thought of "false gifts" in mind, opinion was
divided over the nature of the symbolism, being just too overt for
some people. Some found the ET creepy and threatening, while
others thought it had a playful, mischievous nature. Some felt this
was another agency at work altogether from the usual circlemaking
forces, and inevitably many others were highly dubious as to its
authenticity, especially with all the attendant Signs fuss. Yet its
construction was ingenious. Instead of half-tone dots, as found at
Chilbolton in 2001, this face and body were formed from thin
Windmill Hill, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 18th July.
Image Steve Alexander 2002
www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006
 South Field, near Alton Priors, Wiltshire. Reported 22nd July. Barbury Castle, near Wroughton, Wiltshire. Reported 24th July.
Image Steve Alexander 2002 Image Stuart Dike 2002

Telegraph Hill, Lilley, near Luton, Hertfordshire. Reported 1st June. Avebury Trusloe, nr Beckhampton, Wiltshire. Reported 2nd June.
Image Russell Stannard 2002 Image Steve Alexander 2002

Silbury Hill, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 4th June. Avebury Stone Circle, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 21st June.
Image Stuart Dike 2002 Image Steve Alexander 2002

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 215

scanning lines, widening at different
intervals to create the pattern. Ground
observation was meaningless without an
aerial visual reference. The debates will
doubtless continue for a long time.
As I write, there is a hope for perhaps
one more "biggie" to come, aside from
any glitzy but hollow distractions human
circlemakers may create for PR
purposes. However, the astonishing
formation which appeared on 28 August
at Crooked Soley, near Hungerford in
Wiltshire, may well have been the grand
finale: a wide ring with a DNA-type
spiral of blocks running through it in a
3D mosaic fashion. Its geometric
construction is remarkable and its
implications are intriguing, if unsettling.
Now the fields are rapidly falling to
the harvesters, closing a curious season
marked more by new attention to the
phenomenon than any overtly new Normanton Down Long Barrows, near Stonehenge, Wiltshire. Reported 4th July.
behaviour from it, with the obvious Image Steve Alexander 2002
exceptions.
Whether by next year, especially when the debunkers
have finished their work, the crop circles will be seen as
"last year's" faded fad remains to be seen, but many will
celebrate the year in which attentioneven if the
Hollywood trigger for it was essentially superficial
was drawn in a big way once again to the ever-
continuing mystery in the fields.

About the Author:

Andy Thomas is author of Vital Signs: A Complete
Guide to the Crop Circle Mystery and Why it is
NOT a Hoax, and editor of the Swirled News web-
site, http://www.swirlednews.com.

Special thanks to the folks at

http://www.CropCircleConnector.com
and to Steve Alexander at
http://www.temporarytemples.co.uk/ Avebury Stone Circle, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 28th July.
Image Steve Alexander 2002

The Gallops, nr Beckhampton, Wiltshire. Reported 28th July. North Farm, nr West Overton, Wiltshire. Reported 23rd June.
Image Steve Alexander 2002 Image Steve Alexander 2002

216 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 G ENIUS IN THE F IELDS
T HE C ROP C IRCLES OF 2003
An unusually warm
summer in the UK
shortened this
year's crop circle
season, but exciting
new themes still
emerged and
formations were
seen in much
greater numbers in
Europe as well as
the USA.
Introduction
by Andy Thomas 2003
Southern Circular Research
3 Old House Courtyard
Southover High Street,
Lewes, East Sussex BN7 1HT, UK
Website: http://www.swirlednews.com
Images from
Crop Circle Connector website:
http://www.cropcircleconnector.com
STRANGE Times 2006
L
ast year had been a renaissance time for crop circles as far as the public was
concerned, largely due to the impact of the Hollywood blockbuster film, Signs,
which ensured that the phenomenon was plastered across our newspapers and
television screens more than ever before. As a result, there were more minds
focused towards the fields this season than in recent years. However, despite high
expectations, 2003 was much quieter than anticipated, in the UK at least, where eyes are
traditionally cast to catch the most prolific and spectacular designs.
The very hot English summer encouraged the crops in the fields to ripen early this year,
and the combines stripped the canvas away so quickly that by mid-August there were
virtually no fields left standing. This shaved almost two to three weeks off the usual length
of an average UK crop circle season (which can sometimes stretch into September), leaving
researchers and enthusiasts feeling rather bereft. General opinion tended towards the view
that the season lacked some of the truly stunning masterpieces we have come to expect, and
didn't deliver a "grand finale" as such. That said, the year still produced a variety of
spectacular and intriguing designs that 10 years ago would have shocked and been
marvelled at; so perhaps we have become rather too used to genius at work in our fields.
Research into biological effects in circle-affected crop continues to show anomalous
effects in many caseseffects which are yet to be reproduced by hoaxers. The human
demonstrations continue to fall short of the standards seen in so many of the masterpieces
that have appeared more mysteriously. The quality of the lay in these formations is still
unsurpassed by the claimants' work, and the long hours taken to create the human efforts
challenges the idea that all crop formations are made in this way. We still have an extra-
ordinary mystery before us.
So what were the highlights of 2003? The year started on exactly the same date as the
previous season, when a single circle in oilseed rape arrived at Ringmer in Sussex around
12th April, though it was not the first to be reported. That honour went to Privett in
Hampshire, the day after: a curious, ringed figure-of-eight with a broken flow, looking a
little like a metal puzzle.
The first truly stunning formation of the season took the ring-of-rope idea started the
year before at Alton Priors in Wiltshire and developed it further at Windmill Hill on 7th
June. These designs are virtually impossible to draw on paper without a fine grid of criss-
crossing lines over them, yet there is no evidence that such a technique was used in the
field. Similar, if less well executed, geometrical themes would be used towards the end of
the season at Alton Barnes and again at Alton Priors.
On 15th June, a beautiful six-armed emblem of radiating crescents arrived at Ogbourne
St George, and became the latest in a long line of formations to have strange balls of light
videoed hovering over and around them, taken this year by Stuart Dyke of the Crop Circle
Connector website. These small white balls of light are seen every year in association
with crop circles and continue to mystify and amaze, though their origins remain
unknown.
Over the next few weeks, some intriguing themes and geometrical delights were pro-
duced, but they were not all confined to the usual Wiltshire heartlands. On 21st June,
much further north at Thornborough in North Yorkshire, a very complex emblem of clus-
tered half-rings in a floral design appeared right next to the ancient site of Thornborough
Henge. Many researchers saw this as a protest from the circlemaking sources, as the
Henge is currently threatened with partial destruction due to quarrying and a campaign is
currently underway to stop this.
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 217

Tan Hill, near Stanton St Bernard, Wiltshire. Reported 24th June.
Image: Nick Nicholson and the Crop Circle Connector 2003
Hackpen Hill, near Winterbourne Bassett, Wiltshire. Reported 20th July.
Image: Nick Nicholson and the Crop Circle Connector 2003
218 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
Other areas around the country also pro-
duced excellent works, including Sussex,
with two very fine designs at Patcham and
Lewes, amongst other formations, and at
Sharpenoe in Bedfordshire, where a stun-
ning pentacle with a ring of radiating lines
impressed with its clean-cut precision.
Ancient sites always seem to attract crop
circles. Another appearance which made a
firm connection with our prehistoric her-
itage was the so-called "Celtic shield"
design, a remarkably detailed circle con-
taining over 400 tiny rings in a concentric
configuration.
It arrived at North Down, between
Bishops Cannings and Beckhampton,
Wiltshire, on 5th July.
It was placed perfectly in line with a
series of four burial mounds spread out in a
linear fashion, and was directly on the spot
where another mound, now removed, had
been.
Some new visual themes developed in
2003, sometimes playing with new types of
design, such as the abstract pop-art pattern
that appeared at Woodborough Hill on 14th
July and the beautiful "swallows" emblem
that turned up at Alton Barnes on 4th
August, which resembled flying birds trail-
ing necklaces of diminishing circles.
STRANGE Times 2006
 West Stowell, near Huish, Wiltshire. Reported 20th July.
Image: Nick Nicholson and the Crop Circle Connector 2003
The number-play utilised in the geome-
try of some formations also expanded. For
the first time, at West Stowell, Wiltshire,
on 20th July, a complex pattern of radiating
diamonds used 13-fold geometry as its
main feature. Though the number 13 had
been present implicitly in at least one for-
mation before this, it had never been used
overtly as part of the physical pattern.
Researcher Michael Glickman has long
predicted the clear usage of the number
13the number of transformationin the
fields, and he believes it marks an impor-
tant step in the continuing mathematical
lesson the crop circles are giving us.
By the middle of August, there were
high expectations that something of great
importance would appear around the
anniversary of the "face and message"
formation of 2001 and the "alien and disc"
of 2002, both of which appeared around
14th August and had encoded pictorial and
binary information in a unique and highly
controversial way. Some researchers even
staked out the fields to await the arrival of
the next instalmentbut it didn't come,
and hadn't arrived at the time of writing.
With most fields cut down by the middle of Sharpenhoe, near Barton Le Clay, Bedfordshire. Reported 29th June.
August, it was left to the very large Image: Russell Stannard 2003

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 219

 Broad Hinton, near Winterbourne Bassett, Wiltshire. Tegdown Hill, Patcham, near Brighton, East Sussex.
Reported 24th July. Image: www.temporarytemples.co.uk 2003 Reported 22nd July. Image: David Russell 2003

Milk Hill, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire. Reported 17th June. Kit's Coty, near Burham, Kent. Reported 26th July 2003.
Image: www.temporarytemples.co.uk 2003 Image: Andrew King 2003

South Field, near Alton Priors, Wiltshire. Reported 8th August. Thornborough Henge, near Ripon, North Yorkshire.
Image: John Dove 2003 Reported 21st June.

220 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

"molecule" pattern at Beckhampton on
10th August to serve as the last of the
"biggies": a relatively simple but
intriguing, massive spread of rings and
crescents across a field.
If there was slight disappointment across
the UK, in the USA it was a different story.
With Americans having been introduced to
the phenomenon in a big way for the first
time due to the Signs movie, there was far
greater alertness to the appearance of new
formations, with accompanying media
excitement. The US is now in the throes of
what the UK went through in the early
1990s: endless arguments and claims/
counter-claims between sceptics and non-
sceptics filling local newspapers and televi-
sion screens, as seen particularly in
Rockville, California, where a group of
boys laid claim to a local pictogram.
UK researchers found it hard to stifle a
kind smile at seeing people in another
country going through what they have had
to endure for so many years, knowing from
experience that clear-cut answers to the
debates now inflamed in the US will never
come. Green Street, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 6th July.
The US even had its first claimed eye- Image: http://www.temporarytemples.co.uk 2003
witness account of circles
caught in the act of forming.
According to the US TV sta-
tion The Milwaukee Channel,
a Wisconsin farmer says he
watched formations appear-
ing in his field during a thun-
derstorm. "It looked like a
lakethe waves, the wind
blowingand then, all of a
sudden, this dark hole
appears, like a black hole.
And then immediately, one to
the right, then another to the
centre of it."
Overall, the UK count of
crop circles was notably
down this year (with only
around 75 recorded patterns),
while the rest of the world
was up in comparison
(around 130 in total), with
Germany, The Netherlands
and Canada notching up
some particularly fine forma-
tions. Germany, in particu-
lar, helped push the global
count up with a staggering 58
recorded crop designs; if this
curve continues, it will even-
tually challenge the UK as
the leader in numbers.
Meanwhile, Italy, previ-
ously almost a circle-free Walkers Hill, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire. Reported 4th August.
zone, suddenly produced 14 Image: John Dove 2003

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 221


A34, near Litchfield, Hampshire. Reported 4th July.
Image: http://www.temporarytemples.co.uk 2003
Avebury Trusloe, near Avebury, Wiltshire. Reported 13th July.
Image: Nick Nicholson and the Crop Circle Connector 2003
Scrope Wood, near Marlborough, Wiltshire. Reported 22nd July.
Image: Nick Nicholson and the Crop Circle Connector 2003
222 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com
events this year, following its first crop circle confer-
ence in 2002. Cynics claimed that newly inspired land-
scape artists were at work, but others argued that the
almost psychic interactive quality of the enigma was in
operation again, performing accordingly in a country
waking up to the circles far more than ever before.
What a persistent and amazing phenomenon we have.
After so many years of appearances, claims and theo-
ries, and with all the colourful personalities and
intrigues surrounding them, the crop circles still remain
a mystery, with neither the mystics nor the sceptics
being able to explain their presence satisfactorily. It is
the mystery, of course, that remains the phenomenon's
greatest gift, leaving us all free to take whatever journey
we choose with them. Doubtless, 2004 will be quite a
different year again.
About the Author:
Andy Thomas is a leading crop circles researcher
and the world's most prolific writer on the subject.
He is best known for Vital Signs: A Complete Guide
to the Crop Circle Mystery, described by many as
the definitive word on the phenomenon. His most
recent books, just published, are Swirled Harvest:
Views from the Crop Circle Frontline, a collection of
pieces on crop circles and related matters, and A
Oneness of Mind: The Power of Collective Thought
and Signs of Our Times, which transcribes some of
Andy's extraordinary live presentations on other far-
reaching matters. Information and online ordering
details for all these books can be found at
http://www.vitalsignspublishing.co.uk.
Special thanks to the folks at
http://www.CropCircleConnector.com
and to
Steve Alexander at
http://www.temporarytemples.co.uk/
North Down, near Beckhampton, Wiltshire. Reported 10th August.
Image: John Dove 2003
STRANGE Times 2006
 G EOMETRY IN THE G RAIN
CROP CIRCLES OF 2004
Dramatic and
complex new
designs emerged in
the English fields
during the 2004
crop circle summer,
defying the plankers
and debunkers and
standing out for
their beauty and
strangeness.
Introduction
by Andy Thomas 2004
Southern Circular Research
3 Old House Courtyard
Southover High Street,
Lewes, East Sussex BN7 1HT, UK
Website: http://www.swirlednews.com
Images from
Crop Circle Connector website:
http://www.cropcircleconnector.com
STRANGE Times 2006
A
fter an abruptly premature end to last year's crop circle season in early August,
there was a faltering start to the 2004 crop formationsat least in England, the
traditional heartland of the mystery. By the middle of June there were far
fewer numbers than expected for that time of year, and there was a general feel-
ing amongst the research community that the phenomenon, whatever its source or intent
still absolutely unknownwas on a go-slow.
Statistics from other countries also seemed depressed compared with showings in recent
years. Germany, which in 2003 almost rivalled the UK in terms of circle numbers, only
produced around 20 formations in 2004, while countries such as the USA, Canada, the
Netherlands and Italy, which had all been blossoming areas in recent years, only managed
about 10 formations each throughout the whole year.
As far as the UK was concerned, a revival in impetus finally arrived in mid-June with
the appearance of several intriguing and complex designs to match many of those seen in
previous years. By the end of August, around 60 formations had been recorded.
The first significantly dramatic design of the season came in the form of a large double
spiral at Fort Nelson, Portchester, Hampshire, on 11 June (figure 1). The two thin, perfect
spirals reminded some of the infamous "ET and disc" formation of 2002, which included a
binary message notched into a similar spiral. The decoded message was a warning,
beginning with: "Beware the bearers of false gifts and their broken promises" The
resemblance between this and the two new spirals suggested to some that we were being
invited to carve our own binary reply into them! In the event, this didn't happen; though
the thought did spark some communication experiments later in the seasonled by Jack
Sullivan and Martin Noakes, who flashed binary messages into the sky with some
interesting results (see article at http://www.swirlednews.com).
The traditional centre of the phenomenon, Alton Barnes in Wiltshire, then produced its
latest masterpiece on 20 June in the form of a bizarre but beautiful glyph, resembling
perhaps some kind of strange musical instrument (figure 2). Its oddness put some people
off, but the fluidity of the lay inside and the complete lack of damage to the stems (in a
year in which white creases on stems were widely decreed to be a sure sign of human
circle-making) revealed it as a highlight of the year.
Six days later, another extraordinary design of similar quality arrived at nearby Milk
Hill, this time resembling what was rather crudely termed a "bee" by somea winged
emblem atop an apparently insectoid body (figure 3). Others pointed out its closer resem-
blance to the ancient "winged caduceus" symbol. Its geometric properties were incredibly
complex, as uncovered by geometer Allan Brown.
As the list of bold patterns in the crops began to lengthen, some formations in particular
stood out. One of the longest, a vast string of circles and crescents which arrived at
Windmill Hill, Avebury, Wiltshire, on 17 July, measured over 800 feet in length (figure
4). Meanwhile, a square within a circle, resembling Islamic geometric art, appeared at
Savernake Forest, Marlborough, Wiltshire, on 28 July and impressed many with its
optical illusion qualities (figure 5).
At West Kennett Longbarrow on 30 July, a quadranted labyrinth within an eight-pointed
star began a new style for the crop circles (figure 6), while another square design of smaller
squares and dots at Lewisham Castle, Aldbourne, Wiltshire, on 6 August turned out to
signify "a rendition of the Magic Square representing the Moon's movements, a 9 x 9
square in which the sums of the diagonals, the rows and the columns each add to 369",
according to Geoff Stray, editor of the influential website http://www.diagnosis2012
(figure 7).
With the year 2012 in mind, the crop formation that most caught the public attention in
2004 was undoubtedly the so-called "Mayan" design which appeared over two consecutive
www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 223
 Figure 1: Fort Nelson, near Portchester, Hampshire. Figure 2: East Field, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire.
Reported 11th June. Diagram: Allan Brown 2004 Reported 20th June. Photograph: Busty Taylor 2004

Figure 3: Milk Hill, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire Figure 4: Windmill Hill, near Avebury Trusloe, Wiltshire.
Reported 26th June. Photograph: Busty Taylor 2004 Reported 17th July. Photograph: Verity Bullock 2004

Figure 5: Savernake Forest, near Marlborough, Wiltshire. Figure 6: West Kennett (2), near Silbury Hill, Wiltshire.
Reported 28th July. Photograph: Steve Alexander 2004 Reported 30th July. Photograph: Nick Nicholson 2004
224 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006
nights at Silbury Hill, Wiltshire, on 23 August (figure 8). (A
number of formations "grew" this year, making some people
suspicious.) It was a vast wheel of ancient Mayan glyphs, including
"the double square spiralthe Mayan symbol for jaguar snouts,
which indicates an entrance to the underworld", as described by
Geoff Stray. The now widely held belief that the Mayan calendar
indicates an end-of-time point in 2012 gave the UK newspapers
something to get their teeth into. The Daily Mail dubiously
proclaimed it "The Doomsday Crop Circle". Much of the
speculation about this formation's 2012 connections was highly
questionable, but it made good headlinesnot that the press needed
a genuine phenomenon to fill columns. Indeed, the Sunday Express
went out of its way to debunk the Mayan glyph, devoting two pages
to thisperhaps in an effort to "get one over" on its rival paper.
This year there was a large blast of disproportionate press
publicity for human circle-makers. Several major newspapers ran
large features on "plankers" (as the research community
increasingly calls them), boasting of their skills in creating crop
circles. As ever, what all these pieces had in common was the
inevitable lack of any substance: nearly all of them involved lazy
insinuation and nothing more. More seriously, there was an almost
complete absence of any balancing information in these pieces
beyond the odd glib quote from researchers. By and large, the
plankers were presented as the answer to the entire crop circle
mystery, with not a dissenting view on show nor any serious
discussion as to the mass of contrary evidence which shows that not
all glyphs can be so easily explained. Those who hold that there is
a co-ordinated campaign to discredit the crop circles believe their
views have been vindicated by such unbalanced publicity.
One high-profile Italian sceptic, who's been giving his country's
circle researchers a hard time recently, was even spotted cavorting
with known plankers in the UK this summer. It made some people
wonder how wide the debunking agendas might be and who could
be behind them. (However, in-fighting appeared to be breaking
out amongst the ranks of the plankers themselves, with angry
email tirades being openly fired off from one faction to another!)
Unfortunately, the overriding negativity which spilled over from
such heightened profiles of the plankersand not helped by the
National Farmers Union, which launched a campaign this summer
to discourage people from visiting crop formationsaffected the
mood in the croppie world, resulting in much fear and suspicion
down in the fields of Wiltshire, especially with traits of human
circle-making seemingly being more obvious in some formations
this year. Some suggested the real phenomenon had even backed
off slightly to allow the limitations of the imitators to be clearly
revealed. As has been noted before, this is an interactive
phenomenon, after all.
However, others considered much of this so-called negativity to
be paranoia and nothing more, believing that succumbing to it only
played into the hands of the debunkers. Looked at simply, within
the context of other years and with the benefit of even just a few
weeks of hindsight, in truth what we had was another season of
some extraordinary designs, with all the accompanying wonder,
beauty, confusion, trouble and strife one might expect from any-
thing so consistently challenging and stubborn in its refusal to go
away, whatever its origins.

About the Author:

Andy Thomas is a leading crop circles researcher and the world's
most prolific writer on the subject. He is best known for Vital
Signs: A Complete Guide to the Crop Circle Mystery. His most
recent books are Swirled Harvest: Views from the Crop Circle
Frontline, a collection of pieces on crop circles and related mat-
ters, and A Oneness of Mind: The Power of Collective Thought
and Signs of Our Times, which transcribes some of Andy's extra-
ordinary live presentations on other far-reaching matters.
Information and online ordering details for all these books can
be found at http://www.vitalsignspublishing.co.uk. Pewsey White Horse (3), near Pewsey, Wiltshire.
Reported 22nd July. Photograph: Francine Blake 2004

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 225

 Figure 8: Silbury Hill (2), near Beckhampton, Wiltshire. Reported 2nd and 3rd August.
Diagrams above: Berthold Zugelder 2004. Photograph below: Steve Alexander 2004

226 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006

 Figure 7: Lewisham Castle, Aldbourne, Wiltshire. Beacon Hill, near Burghclere, Newbury, Berkshire.
Reported 6th August. Diagram: Berthold Zugelder 2004 Reported 28th July. Photograph: Steve Alexander 2004

28 July 2004 29 July 2004 30 July 2004 31 July 2004

Tan Hill (left and above), near Stanton St

Bernard, Wiltshire. Reported 28th July.
This formation was created in four steps
over a period of four nights (see above).
Diagrams: Berthold Zugelder 2004
Photograph (left): Steve Alexander 2004

Resources:
To view all the formations for
2004, visit the website http://www.
cropcircleconnector.com.
More information is available from
Swirled News, Southern Circular
Research, 3 Old House Courtyard,
Southover High Street, Lewes, East
Sussex BN7 1HT, UK, websites
http://www.swirlednews.com,
http://www.vitalsignspublishing.co.uk.

STRANGE Times 2006 www.nexusmagazine.com NEXUS 227

Coombe Abbey, near Coventry, Warwickshire. Reported 4th July. Shalbourne, near Hungerford, Wiltshire.
Photograph: Steve Alexander 2004 Reported 8th August. Photograph: Steve Alexander 2004

Honey Street, near Alton Barnes, Wiltshire. Etchilhampton Hill, near Devizes, Wiltshire.
Reported 16th June. Photograph: John Dove 2004 Reported 25th July. Photograph: Steve Alexander 2004

Etchilhampton Hill (2), near Devizes, Wiltshire. Blacklands Golf Course, near Calne, Wiltshire.
Reported 3rd August. Photograph: Steve Alexander 2004 Reported 3rd August. Photograph: Steve Alexander 2004

228 NEXUS www.nexusmagazine.com STRANGE Times 2006